JP2022167009A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can improve an interest in a game.SOLUTION: When a first performance execution condition is satisfied by carrying out a first performance, a second performance can be executed. When a second performance execution condition is satisfied by carrying out a third performance, a fourth performance can be executed. In addition, an operation performance causing a player to operate an operation to a performance operation part can be carried out as the second performance and the fourth performance. Additionally, the performance operation part is provided which can varied in an operation mode. A performance according to a variation of the operation mode of the performance operation part can be carried out as an operation performance. Moreover, the performance operation part can vary to a first operation mode in which a first operation performance part is returned to an initial operation position and a second operation performance part is retracted, and a second operation mode in which the first operation performance part is moved to a movable position and the second operation performance part is moved and exhibited to a specific operation position.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 172

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is performed, and this special symbol lottery. If you win, you can control the jackpot game state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), or when the game machine enters the start hole, change the big win hole to an open state, and enter the big win hole. There is known a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game state on the condition that the entered game ball enters a specific area (
so-called two types of game machines). When controlled to such a big winning game state, the big winning hole is opened in an advantageous opening mode (for example, opening time 29 seconds × 10 rounds, etc.) that makes it easy to enter the game ball, and the big winning hole is opened. A prize ball (game ball) corresponding to the entered game ball can be paid out.

Then, based on the result of the special symbol lottery, after performing the first reach production (long reach, SP reach) in order to improve the interest of the game, the second reach production (SP
A game machine that performs SP reach is known (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-236850 A

However, it has been desired to increase the interest in the game by increasing the relevance of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, etc., and further improving the effects such as the ready-to-win effect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A gaming machine capable of performing a variable display of identification symbols when a predetermined starting condition is established,
An effect executing means for performing a predetermined effect when the identification pattern is displayed in a variable manner;
When the effect execution means satisfies the first effect execution condition by performing the first effect,
A second effect can be executed, and when a second effect execution condition is established by performing a third effect different from the first effect, a fourth effect can be executed, and the second effect is performed. As the effect and the fourth effect, it is possible to perform an operation effect that causes the player to operate the effect operation unit, and as the operation effect, an effect corresponding to a change in the operation mode of the effect operation unit. The effect operation unit has a first effect operation unit and a second effect operation unit that can be operated by the player, and the first effect operation unit is arranged at an initial operation position, A first operation mode in which the second effect operation section is stored; a second operation mode in which the first effect operation section is moved to a movable position and the second effect operation section is displayed at a specific operation position; It is characterized by being able to change to

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance when the first pachinko game machine is viewed from the front and right obliquely upward. It is an example of the exploded perspective view when the 1st pachinko game machine is seen from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance when the first pachinko game machine is seen from the upper right in the rear direction. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing an LED unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game flow of a pachinko game machine. It is an example of the game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. It is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. (A) An example of a special symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko game machine, (B) An example of a decorative symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol determination table of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart (part 1) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart (part 2) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 4) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of initial setting processing at the time of start-up in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a power-off process in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving management processing of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of counter update processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving counter update process of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ceiling counter update process of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of counter determination processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time reduction transition determination processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time saving transition processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of time saving setting processing of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the start opening winning detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table in the normal game state of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead per type production pattern determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of winning) in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead expected value production pattern determination table (at the time of losing) in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a flow chart showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination process in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which the big hit-type look-ahead effect form changes. It is an example of the look-ahead performance pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which the time-saving per-system look-ahead performance form changes. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a common win-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit-type look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a dedicated common win-type look-ahead effect form to a big win-type look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead performance pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process of changing a pending image from a dedicated common winning-type look-ahead performance form to a time-saving winning-type look-ahead performance form. It is the table|surface which shows an example of the output conditions of the signal output outside the machine of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is an example of the timing chart of the signal of "prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. In the first pachinko game machine, it is a table showing an example of the output conditions of the signal that is output to the outside according to the game state. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start of the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (Part 1) showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart (part 1) showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the second pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening preparation processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening control processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine. An example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, and (A) opening mode of the specific area is the first open mode, (B) when the open mode of the specific area is the second open mode, and (C) when the open mode of the specific area is the third open mode. It is an example of a special design determination table in the expansion example. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the expansion example. Another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, (A) of the specific area FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a case where the opening mode is the first opening mode, and (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a winning type determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the C time saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the A reduced working hours gaming state and the B reduced working hours gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols after the limiter function is activated in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a special symbol variation pattern determination process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of limiter frequency update processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening preparation processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is a time chart showing an example of an opening mode of a normal electric accessory in a normal game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is a time chart showing an example of the release mode of the normal electric role product in the C time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state and the C time saving game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols after the limiter function is activated in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a time chart showing an example of the release mode of the normal electric accessory in the normal game state or C time reduction game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 5th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation mode determination process in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation pattern determination process in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of an explanatory diagram explaining the bonus time in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a display image for explaining a bonus time effect in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance when the sixth pachinko game machine is seen from the front and diagonally upper right. It is an example of the conceptual diagram which shows the change of the operation mode of the production|presentation button apparatus of a 6th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a first half variation pattern table and a second half variation pattern table of special symbols in a right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) which shows an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) which shows an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the production flow of the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the production flow of the right hitting game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a symbol effect pattern determination table in a normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a symbol effect pattern determination table for a right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the second half icon number determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the first half icon number determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the first half icon display scenario determination table of the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the first half icon set order scenario determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a cherry blossom accumulation advance notice determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a support icon display scenario determination table of confrontation reach in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a lotus blossom advance notice determination table in a right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the folding fan advance notice determination table of the jackpot game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation mode determination process in a 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (1) which shows an example of the production|presentation pattern determination process in a 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (2) which shows an example of the production|presentation pattern determination process in a 6th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the normal display image of the west army mode and the east army mode in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image (No. 1) explaining the performance of the cherry blossom accumulation notice in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image (No. 2) explaining the performance of the cherry blossom accumulation notice in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image (No. 1) explaining a pseudo continuous effect in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image (Part 2) explaining a pseudo continuous effect in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image (No. 3) explaining a pseudo continuous effect in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image (No. 1) explaining the production of the road to the decisive battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a display image (Part 2) explaining the production of the road to the decisive battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the display image explaining the production of the road to the decisive battle in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image (part 1) for explaining the showdown ready-to-win effect in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a display image (Part 2) explaining the showdown ready-to-win effect in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image for explaining the performance of the lotus flower notice in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image (Part 1) explaining the effect of the battle ready-to-win in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a display image (part 2) explaining the effect of battle reach in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a configuration diagram for explaining the configuration of the operation effect time of the road to the decisive battle and the reception time of the effect button device in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is the table|surface which shows an example of the output conditions of the signal output outside the 6th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the timing chart of the signal of "external information 3" among the signals output to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 7th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the time saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a transition diagram of a special symbol variation pattern table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the prefetch related data of the special symbol in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of an opening pattern determination table of normal electric accessories in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the operation contents of the ordinary electric accessory in the first time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a right-handed instruction period setting table in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a special symbol variation pattern determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time saving management processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving counter update process in a 7th pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a small winning game state setting process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a small winning game state control process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot game state ending process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the production flow of the game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the symbol effect pattern determination table in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a determination table at the start of the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the symbol effect pattern determination table in the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the symbol production pattern determination table of the first time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a symbol production pattern determination table other than the final variation of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the symbol production pattern determination table at the time of the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the notice effect pattern determination table of the window notice of the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a pending notice effect pattern determination table of the pending change notice of the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a winning notice effect pattern determination table for flash notice in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a prohibition condition setting table of the look-ahead effect in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a small hit effect pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a V passing effect pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the production stage selection table after the end of the jackpot game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation mode determination process in a 7th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (1) which shows an example of the production|presentation pattern determination process in a 7th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (2) which shows an example of the production|presentation pattern determination process in a 7th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (3) which shows an example of the production|presentation pattern determination process in a 7th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prefetch effect|action determination process in a 7th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the normal display image of the 1st normal game state in the 7th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image for explaining card effects and door effects in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the display image explaining the production|presentation of the Sengoku rush chance of the 1st time saving game state in a 7th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the display image explaining selection of the production|presentation stage by the player in a 7th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image explaining a Sengoku time production when the male character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the display image explaining the Sengoku time production when the female character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the display image explaining the effect performed when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening in the small winning game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image for explaining an effect when the Sengoku time ends in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the display image explaining the production|presentation of the continuous battle of the 2nd normal game state in the 7th pachinko game machine.

As an example of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described.

In addition, in this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko game machine is directed forward.
The back side of the pachinko machine is facing backwards, the left side when looking at the pachinko machine from the front is facing left,
The right side of the pachinko machine when viewed from the front is to the right, the top of the pachinko machine is to the top, the bottom of the pachinko machine is to the bottom, and the clockwise direction of the pachinko machine is to the right when viewed from the front. The clockwise direction and vice versa the counterclockwise direction is defined as the counterclockwise direction.

Both the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine are so-called type 1 pachinko game machines called digipachi. Among these, the first pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine in which only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed. On the other hand, the second pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel.

In addition, the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine called a 1-type 2-type mixed machine that mixes a so-called type 1 type game machine called digipachi and a type 2 type game machine called Hanemono. It is a game machine. The third pachinko machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but in this specification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in parallel. An example in which only one of them is variably displayed will be described. However, it is not intended to exclude the pachinko game machine of one kind and two kinds of machines capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel.

It should be noted that, in this specification, when simply referred to as "special design", it means both the first special design and the second special design unless otherwise specified.

Further, the term "variable display" as used herein is a concept that includes, for example, both "variable display" in which patterns are displayed in a variable manner and "stop display" in which patterns are displayed in a stopped state. The operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is called one "variable display". When the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed (hereinafter also referred to as "derivation"), the result of the special symbol hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "special symbol lottery") and the normal symbol hit determination process (Less than,
The result of the "normal design lottery") is confirmed. It should be noted that although the design appears to be stopped, the results of the special design hit determination process and the normal design hit determination process are not finalized (for example, temporary stop mode). However, such aspects are included in the variable representation above. Even if the symbols are temporarily stopped, for example, the results of the hit determination processing of the special symbols and the hit determination processing of the normal symbols are not determined at this time, so the symbols can be variably displayed again.

Also, in this specification, the first pachinko machine, the second pachinko machine and the third
In explaining the pachinko gaming machine, the case where the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be described as an example. However, for the first pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, the number of special symbols may be one.

[1. First pachinko machine]
First, the first pachinko game machine will be explained.

As a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol is variably displayed and the second special symbol is variably displayed. A pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variation machine") in which, for example, the start condition of the second special symbol is established preferentially over the start condition of the first special symbol when the display is suspended, and the first Pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as
(referred to as a "sequential variator").

In the priority variation machine, the conditions for starting the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being variably displayed, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended. and that the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, etc., is established when all certain requirements are satisfied. In addition, in the priority variation machine, the conditions for starting the second special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the second special symbol is variable. It is established when all certain requirements are met, such as that the display is withheld.

In addition, in the sequential variation machine, the conditions for starting the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being variably displayed, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the first special symbol is variably displayed. It is established when at least all of the conditions of being suspended and that the earliest suspension is suspension of the variable display of the first special symbol are satisfied. Further, in the sequential variation machine, the condition for starting the second special symbol is that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being variably displayed.
It is not in a jackpot game state, etc., the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, and
It is established when at least all of the conditions that the earliest suspension is suspension of the variable display of the second special symbol are satisfied.

In the following, the priority change machine will be described as an example.

[1-1. Appearance configuration]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the forward direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view when the first pachinko game machine is viewed diagonally from the upper right in the forward direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the rearward direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko game machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a plate unit 5, a launching device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), and a payout unit. 8 (Fig. 2
, see FIG. 3), the board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), and the game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2
See), etc. Furthermore, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the lower right portion of the game board unit 10 . Here, the outer frame 2, the base door 3, the glass door 4, the plate unit 5, the launching device 6, the display device 7, the payout unit 8 and the board unit 9 will be briefly explained, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be explained. Details will be described later. It should be noted that the above parentheses indicate reference drawings for configurations not shown in FIG.

(outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island facilities of the game hall. A hinge (no reference numeral) is provided on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2, for example, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported on this hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 about the hinge.

It should be noted that the outer frame 2 is connected via the base door 3 to a payout unit 8, a substrate unit 9,
A high strength is required in order to support a large number of members such as the display device 7, the game board unit 10, the glass door 4, the plate unit 5, and the like. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the performance effect, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be enlarged. Therefore, by forming the outer frame 2 from, for example, a thin plate of metal, the display device 7 and the game board unit 10 can be
It is possible to maintain high strength while increasing the size. Especially if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum,
It is also possible to reduce the weight.

(base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a payout unit 8 and a substrate unit 9 attached to the back side thereof and supports them.

A game board unit 10 is fitted on the surface side of the base door 3. - 特許庁In addition, hinges (no reference numerals) are provided at the upper end, the middle portion below the substantially central portion in the vertical direction, and the lower end, for example, on the front side of the left end portion of the base door 3, and the upper end A glass door 4 is pivotally supported by the hinges at the middle portion and the middle portion, and a plate unit 5 is journaled by the hinges at the middle portion and the lower end portion, respectively. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the glass door 4 and the tray unit 5 forward together or individually with respect to the base door 3 about the hinge.

In addition, a firing device 6 is fixedly attached to the front side of the base door 3, for example, on the lower right side, and speakers 32 (see FIG. 2) are fixedly attached to the left and right sides of the upper side, for example. there is The speaker 32 outputs, for example, sound effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, sound effects such as voice notification, error notification, and the like.

Furthermore, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the opposite side of the base door 3 to the hinge (that is, the right end). This locking device has a function of locking the base door 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 with respect to the base door 3 .

(glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member with an opening 41 formed therein. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear side. When the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the game area 105 formed in the game board unit 10 (
4 to be described later) and the protective glass 43 face each other. In this way, the game area 105 can be visually recognized from the front while the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, and the game ball flowing down the game area 105 is prevented from jumping forward. be able to.

The protective glass 43 may be formed by attaching a plurality of (for example, two) glasses with a gap between them, or by unitizing a plurality of glasses with a gap between them. may Furthermore, in the case of a unitized one, for example, a light guide plate may be provided between glasses. The protective glass 43 is not limited to be made of glass, and may be made of transparent resin, for example.

Further, below the glass door 4, there is provided an operation unit 66 that can be operated by, for example, the player in order to receive a game information providing service (for example, "Unimemo (registered trademark)"). The operation unit 66 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated on the hall menu screen by the manager of the game arcade or the like.

Further, a speaker cover 45 arranged in front of the speaker 32 is provided above the glass door 4 . In addition, a large number of LED groups 46 used for lighting effect etc. are arranged around the periphery of the opening 41 of the glass door 4, and in front of these LED groups 46, L
An ED cover is provided. Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for the sake of convenience, the LED group 46 will be described. The LED group 46 is, for example, light emitting means for performing lighting effects such as notification with light and various variations of light emitting effects. may be

(dish unit)
The plate unit 5 is formed by unitizing an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52. - 特許庁The tray unit 5 is arranged in the lower front portion of the base door 3 and below the glass door 4 . This dish unit 5
is configured to be opened and closed by rotating it with respect to the base door 3, as described above, so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, a game arcade clerk or the like can clear the ball jam. The plate unit 5 does not necessarily have to be provided with the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 52, and may be configured as an integral plate.

The upper tray 51 is provided so as to be able to store game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 are shot from the shooting device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The upper plate 51 is provided with a payout port 53, a performance button 54, and the like. A game ball to be rented or a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball is paid out from a payout port 53 to an upper tray 51.例文帳に追加The effect button 54 is a so-called "C
It is called "HANCE button" or "push button". The effect button 54 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined performance function corresponds to, for example, a function of vibrating or protruding upward based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. Also, the functions of the operation unit 66 may be shared.

The lower tray 52 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 . Lower plate 5
2 is provided with a payout port 55 communicating with the upper tray 51, and the game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 are paid out from the payout port 55 to the lower tray 52.例文帳に追加

The bottom surface of the lower plate 52 is formed with an opening (without reference numerals) that can be opened and closed by a player's operation. When the opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 52 is opened, the lower tray 5
2 can be transferred to the ball box placed below the lower tray 52.例文帳に追加In addition, when a so-called each-machine counting system is provided for each machine, not only does the ball box not be required, but the game balls counted by each machine counting system are stored, and the stored game balls are reused. It can also be used for games.

(launching device)
The shooting device 6 is for shooting game balls stored in the upper tray 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The launcher 6 is located in the lower right front portion of the base door 3 and to the lower right side of the pan unit 5 . The firing device 6 includes a panel body 61 , a drive (not shown) and a firing handle 62 .

The panel body 61 is provided so that the dish unit 5 and the firing device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 are integrated in appearance when the dish unit 5 is closed with respect to the base door 3 .

The firing handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and the panel body 61
placed on the front side of the The driving device described above is arranged on the back side of the panel body 61 and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the shooting handle 62, the game ball is shot by the operation of the driving device. When operating the shooting handle 62, the larger the amount of clockwise rotation (the amount of operation), the stronger the shooting strength of the game ball.

A game ball shot from a shooting device 6 arranged on the lower right side of the plate unit 5 is sent to a shooting rail (
(not shown), and rolls in an arc shape along a guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) to be launched into a game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). In addition, the arrangement position of the launching device 6 is not limited to the lower right side of the dish unit 5 , and may be the lower left side of the dish unit 5 . In this case, the above launch rail is not required, and the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively used, making it possible to enhance versatility.

(Display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various game-related effect images, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100 .
The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device composed of electroluminescence, or the like, or may project an image using a projection device such as a projector. may be In the display area of the display device 7, for example, a performance identification pattern (for example, a decorative pattern) is variably displayed to display the result of the special pattern hit determination process, or a special pattern hit determination process result is displayed. A performance image, a performance image during the jackpot game state, a demonstration performance image, a performance image showing a pending state of variable display of special symbols, and the like are displayed.
In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10. However, if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 can be attached to the base door 3. You may enable it to be attached.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided for displaying the above various effect images. An image may be displayed.

(Dispensing unit)
The payout unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and comprises a ball passage 81, a payout device 82, and the like. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 81 from a storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Game balls are supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). The dispensing device 82 moves the ball passage 81 from the storage tank 80 when the dispensing condition is satisfied.
A predetermined number of game balls out of the game balls supplied to are put out to, for example, an upper tray 51.例文帳に追加A power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8 as shown in FIG.

(substrate unit)
The board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the rear side of the base door 3 . Various control boards and the like are provided in the board unit 9 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 91 on which a main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and a sub control board 91 on which a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted. substrate 9
2. A payout/launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described later) for controlling the payout/launch of game balls is mounted on a payout/launch control board 93, and a power supply circuit 450 (see FIG. 6 below) for supplying power. ) are mounted on the board unit 9 .

In addition, in FIG. 3, for the sake of convenience, the main control board 91, the sub-control board 92, and the payout/launch control board 9
3 and power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, all of which are housed in a board case.

Also, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (one board provided with one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs). However, not limited to this, for example, all or part of a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, and a character control circuit 307 (all of which will be described later in FIG. 6) can be provided on a separate substrate. By doing so, the sub-control board 92 may be composed of a plurality of boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 provided in the first pachinko game machine. On the front side of the game board unit 10, a game area 105 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll and flow.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which shot game balls can roll and flow down, a guide rail 110, and a substantially central portion of the game area 105. A center accessory 115, a first starting port 120, a general prize winning port 122, a passage gate unit 125, a special electric accessory unit 130, a second starting port 140, and a normal electric accessory unit. 145, LED unit 160, and out port 178
and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 10 . note that,
As mentioned above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(game panel)
The game panel 100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 7 . A guide rail 110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 110 toward the game area 105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward toward the game area 105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the game panel 10
0 may be entirely made of a transparent member, or, for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized in a front view may be made of a transparent member. Also, game panel 1
00 may be composed of a member (for example, wooden) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the back unit can be seen from the front. .

(guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of arcuate outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals). The game area 105 is partitioned (demarcated) by the guide rails 110 .
The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIG. 6 described later) to the upper part of the game area 105 .

(Center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 100, and has an arc-shaped center rail 116 above. game area 10
The game balls shot toward 5 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116. - 特許庁

In this first pachinko game machine, the area on the left side of the center accessory 115 in the game area 105 is called the left area 106 , and the area on the right side of the center accessory 115 is called the right area 107 . The definitions of the left side area and the right side area are the same for the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine which will be described later.

A game ball shot toward the game area 105 by the shooting device 6 flows down the left area 106 or the right area 107 . A game ball flowing down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the amount of operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 106 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 107 .

In this specification, as an operation mode (hitting method) of the shooting handle 62, a hitting method of shooting a game ball so as to flow down the left area 106 is called "left hitting", and the right area 107
A hitting method in which a game ball is shot so as to flow down is called "right hitting". In this way, the player can hit the game ball either toward the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 .

In addition, the center accessory 115 is formed with a warp entrance 117 at its left outer peripheral edge, through which a game ball flowing down the left area 106 can enter. A game ball entering the warp entrance 117 is configured to be guided to a stage 118 formed in the center accessory 115 .
The stage 118 is formed in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 7 so that the game ball can roll in the horizontal direction. Note that the stage 118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 119 into which game balls can enter is located behind the stage 118 in the center in the left-right direction.
is formed, and a game ball that has entered the chance entrance 119 is configured to be released directly above the first start opening 120 . Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 119 is
Compared to the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 117 but did not enter the chance entrance 119, the probability of winning (passing) through the first start opening 120 is high. there is

(First start port)
The first starting port 120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins in the first starting port 120, the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later)
reference). In addition, the right-handed game ball may be able to win the first starting port 120 . Also, in place of or in addition to the above-described first starting port 120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol Random number for judging big hit, random number for first special symbol pattern, random number for reach judgment for first special symbol,
And various random numbers such as random numbers for selecting the effect of the first special symbol) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, four at maximum). The stored various data are subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the starting condition of the first special symbol (also referred to as "fluctuation starting condition of the first special symbol" in this specification) is satisfied. When game balls enter the first starting port 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is referred to as the starting winning of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the random number for judging the jackpot of the first special symbol,
Various random numbers such as the symbol random number of the first special symbol, the reach determination random number of the first special symbol, and the effect selection random number of the first special symbol, etc.) are referred to as start information of the first special symbol. In addition, storing the starting information of the first special symbol until the starting condition is established is called suspension. The same applies to the second special symbol.

(general prize entrance)
A plurality of general winning holes 122 are arranged in the lower left part of the display area of the display device 7, and are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). It is When a game ball wins in one of the plurality of general winning openings 122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 122 The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize.
In place of or in addition to 2, a general prize winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize may be provided.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 125 is arranged in the right area 107, and includes a passing gate 126 configured to allow almost right-handed game balls to pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126. 127 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected by the passage gate switch 127,
Various data related to normal symbols (for example, random numbers for winning determination of normal symbols) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, four at maximum). The stored various data are usually provided for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passage gate switch 127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left region 106 instead of or in addition to the right region 107 .

In this specification, the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 is referred to as starting passage, and various data related to the normal symbols extracted by the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 (for example, the random number value for hit determination of the normal symbols) etc.) is usually referred to as starting information of the design. Further, storing the starting information of the normal symbol until the starting condition is established is called suspension.

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 includes a large winning slot 131, a count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball into the large winning slot 131, and a special electric accessory 133.
It is a unit body that integrates The special electric accessory unit 130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 125 in the right area 107 .

The big winning opening 131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the big winning hole 131, a big winning hole in which a left-handed game ball can win a prize may be arranged, or a game may be played on the upper part of the center accessory 115. A large prize winning opening in which a ball can win a prize may be arranged.

Also, the big winning opening 131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) a prize when controlled in a jackpot game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. This is the prize-winning entrance. When the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later) detects the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 131, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the big prize mouth 1
The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to 31 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 134 . The special electric accessory 133, that is, the special electric shutter 134, is in an open state in which a game ball can enter (pass through) the big winning opening 131 or is easily opened, and in which a game ball cannot enter (pass through) the big winning opening 131. Or configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the jackpot game state is a game state in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big prize winning port 131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time over a plurality of rounds. is.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 140 is arranged in the left region 106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 120). However, the second starting port 140 is difficult or impossible for a left-handed game ball to win due to, for example, a game nail. is configured to be guided to the vicinity of However, the second starting port 14
It is not essential to configure 0 in such a manner, and it may be provided in the right area 107, for example.
Also, the second starting port 140 may be configured so that left-handed game balls can win.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is detected by the second starting port switch 141 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the second special symbol (for example, the second special symbol Random number for big hit determination, random number for second special symbol, random number for reach determination for second special symbol,
And various random numbers such as random numbers for selecting the effect of the second special symbol) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4 at maximum). The stored various data are subjected to the hit determination process of the second special symbol when the second special symbol start condition (also referred to as "second special symbol variation start condition" in this specification) is satisfied. When a game ball enters the second starting port 140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 145 is arranged in the left area 106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first start port 120), and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) the game balls. It is a unit body that integrates a prize winning hole, a switch for detecting the winning of a game ball into this winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 146.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, the above prize winning opening is the second
A starting port 140 is used, and the above switch is a second starting port switch 141 .

The ordinary electric accessory 146 is provided with a general electric movable member 147 made of, for example, a blade member called a so-called electric chew, and a general electric solenoid 148 (see FIG. 6 described later) for operating the general electric movable member 147. . The ordinary electric accessory 146, that is, the ordinary electric movable member 147 is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter (pass through) the second start port 140, and in which it is impossible for the game ball to enter the second start port 140. It is configured to allow state transitions to and from possible or difficult closed states. In addition, the general electric movable member 147 includes a vane type, a door type, a projecting plate type, and the like.

(out port)
The out port 178 is launched toward the game area 105, but does not win any of the various winning ports (eg, the first starting port 120, the second starting port 140, the big winning port 131, the general winning port 122, etc.). It is for ejecting missing game balls out of the machine. This out port 178 is
It is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the out port 178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between a plurality of general winning ports 122, so that the game balls flowing down the game area 105 are discharged out of the machine. can be

(back unit)
A back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 10 and is provided behind the transparent game panel 100 . This back unit includes a performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 6 described later) such as a movable accessory controlled by the sub-control circuit 300 . The performance accessory group 58 is arranged around the display area of the display device 7, for example. At least one or more of the performance accessory group 58 or the performance accessory component constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory operable based on the result of the special symbol win determination process. do.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board unit 10 and outside the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, for example). The LED unit 160 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display portion 161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 162, a first special symbol display portion 163, a second special symbol display portion 164, and a first special symbol reservation display. A part 165, a second special symbol reservation display part 166, a probability variation notification display part 167, and a time reduction notification display part 168 are provided.

(Normal pattern display part)
The normal symbol display unit 161 displays the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, and includes normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the conditions for starting the variable display of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol start conditions") are established, the normal symbol display LED 161
A, 161b are alternately turned on and off, and variable display of normal symbols is started. When a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbols is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the normal design is a hit in the normal design, the normal design display LED 161
A combination of lighting and extinguishing of a and 161b becomes a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a is lit and the normal symbol display LED 161b is extinguished. On the other hand, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned off and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned on. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b indicating the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined to operate the normal electric accessory 146, the normal electric movable member 147 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 140 Winning (passing) of game balls to is facilitated.

(Reserved display for normal symbols)
The normal symbol pending display unit 162 displays the number of variable displays of normal symbols that are being held (hereinafter referred to as "the number of pending normal symbols") when the starting information of the normal symbols, that is, the variable display is being held. It is provided with reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols. The above-mentioned "variable display of normal symbols is suspended" means that the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected, and various data (for example, random numbers for determining hits of normal symbols, etc.) applied to the normal symbols are It refers to the state from extraction to establishment of the starting condition of the normal symbol. It should be noted that the starting condition of the normal symbol is established when at least all of the conditions that the normal symbol is not being variably displayed and that the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended are satisfied.

The normal symbol pending display unit 162 displays the number of variable display pending normal symbols by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol pending display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of reserved symbols is normally one, the reserved display LED 162a for the normal design lights up and the reserved display LED 162b for the normal design goes out. Also, if the number of reserved symbols is normally 2,
Both of the normal symbol hold display LEDs 162a and 162b light up. Further, when the number of reserved symbols is normally 3, the reserved display LED 162a for the normal design flashes and the reserved display LED 162b for the normal design lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved symbols is normally four, both of the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols blink. However, the display mode of the normal design reservation display LEDs 162a and 162b indicating the number of normal design reservations is not limited to this.

(Special pattern display part)
The special symbol display section displays the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and includes a first special symbol display section 163 and a second special symbol display section 164 . First special symbol display portion 163
has, for example, a first special symbol display LED group consisting of eight LEDs 163a to 163h. Similarly, the second special symbol display section 164 also has a second special symbol display LED group consisting of, for example, eight LEDs 164a to 164h.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the first special symbol") is satisfied, the eight LEDs 163a to 1 constituting the first special symbol display unit 163
All or part of 63h alternately or mutually repeats lighting and extinguishing variable display of the first special pattern is started. When a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the first
The variable display of the special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the first special symbol display section 163 becomes a specific stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display portion 163 is stop-displayed in a specific stop-display mode, the transition to the jackpot game state is determined.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the second special symbol") is satisfied, the eight LEDs 164a to 1 constituting the second special symbol display unit 164
A variable display of the second special pattern is started in which all or part of 64h alternately or alternately repeats lighting and extinguishing. When a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the second
The variable display of the special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h constituting the second special symbol display section 164 becomes a specific stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display portion 164 is stop-displayed in a specific stop-display mode, the transition to the jackpot game state is determined.

(Reserved display for special symbols)
The special symbol pending display unit displays the number of variable display of special symbols that are suspended (hereinafter referred to as "the number of reserved special symbols") when the start information of the special symbols, that is, the variable display is suspended. It comprises a first special symbol reservation display portion 165 and a second special symbol reservation display portion 166 .

When the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, the first special symbol suspension display unit 165
It displays the number of reserved first special symbols, and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a
, 165b. "The variable display of the first special symbol is suspended" means that the first start port 1
After the winning (passing) of the game ball to 20 is detected and the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted,
It refers to the state until the starting condition of the first special symbol is satisfied.

The first special symbol reservation display unit 165 includes first special symbol reservation display LEDs 165a and 165.
The number of pending variable display of the first special symbol is displayed by the combination of lighting and extinguishing of b. For example, when the reserved number of the first special symbol is one, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a lights up and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b goes out. Also, when the number of reserved first special symbols is two, both of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b are lit. Also, when the number of reserved first special symbols is three, the first special symbol reserved display L
The ED 165a blinks and the first special symbol pending display LED 165b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved first special symbols is four, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a
, 165b flash. However, the display mode of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b indicating the number of reserved first special symbols is not limited to this.

The second special symbol pending display unit 166, when variable display of the second special symbol is suspended,
It displays the number of reservations of the second special symbol, and the reservation display LED 166a for the second special symbol
, 166b. ``Variable display of the second special symbol is suspended'' means that the second start port 1
After the winning (passing) of the game ball to 40 is detected and the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted,
It refers to the state until the starting condition of the second special symbol is satisfied.

The second special symbol pending display unit 166 includes second special symbol pending display LEDs 166a and 166.
The number of pending variable display of the second special symbol is displayed by the combination of lighting and extinguishing of b. For example, when the number of reserved second special symbols is one, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a lights up and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b goes out. Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols is two, both of the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b are lit. Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols is 3, the second special symbol reserved display L
The ED 166a blinks and the second special symbol pending display LED 166b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved second special symbols is four, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a
, 166b flash. However, the display mode of the second special symbol pending display LEDs 166a and 166b indicating the number of pending second special symbols is not limited to this.

(Probability notification display unit)
The variable probability notification display unit 167 can be lit during execution of the variable probability control described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

The probability variation notification display unit 167 may be turned on during execution of the probability variation control, but for example, by not lighting so as not to be able to grasp that the probability variation control is being performed from the appearance, the probability variation control is being executed may be concealed.

However, when the power supply is cut off during execution of variable probability control, the backup capacitor 2 described later
With the function of 07, the data indicating that the variable probability control is being executed does not disappear. Therefore, when the power is turned off during execution of variable probability control and then turned on, the variable probability notification display unit 167 lights up in such a manner that the variable probability control is being performed.

In addition, even if whether or not the probability variation control is being executed is kept secret before the power is turned off, the probability variation notification display unit 167 is lit when the power is turned on. By
It is configured so that it can be grasped that the variable probability control is being executed.

(Display unit for time saving notification)
The time saving notification display unit 168 can be turned on during execution of time saving control, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

In the present embodiment, the display unit 168 for time reduction information is, for example, the first display unit 168 for time reduction information
a and second time-reduction notification display portion 168b, but the number of time-reduction notification display portions 168 is not limited thereto.

Further, although the details will be described later, the time saving game state includes an A time saving game state, a B time saving game state and a C time saving game state. And, for example, it is configured so that it is possible to grasp which time-saving gaming state by a combination of lighting or extinguishing by the first time-saving information display unit 168a and the second time-saving information display unit 168b.

The display unit 168 for time reduction information displays the first display unit 168a for time reduction information according to the time reduction control being executed.
Or / and the second time-saving notification display unit 168b may be lit, but for example, whether or not time-saving control is being executed or the type of time-saving control being executed cannot be grasped by the appearance (for example, By turning on or off in all lights off, all lights, a mode that is not related to the time saving control in progress), it is not possible to grasp from the appearance that the time saving control is being executed and the type of time saving control being executed You can keep it secret. In particular, it may be possible to grasp from the appearance whether or not time-saving control is being executed, but it may be difficult to grasp from the appearance which time-saving control is being executed. Interest can be heightened by making secret the kind of time saving control of inside.

However, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of the time saving control, the backup capacitor 2 described later
With the function of 07, not only the data indicating that the time saving control is being executed but also the data indicating the type of time saving control being executed are not lost. Therefore, when the power is turned off during the execution of the time saving control and then the power is turned on, the time saving notification display unit 168 lights up or goes out.

Before the power is turned off, even if the fact that time saving control is being executed or the type of time saving control being executed is hidden so that it cannot be seen from the outside, the power is turned on. In this case, the display unit 168 for time saving notification is lit and / and extinguished in such a manner that the time saving control is being executed and the type of time saving control being executed can be grasped from the appearance.

[1-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 6, the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine will be described. Figure 6 shows
It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 for controlling the game, a sub-control circuit 300 for controlling the effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout/fire circuit. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450 .

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on, processes related to game operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (readable/writable memory), and an initial reset. It has a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 201 is connected with a main ROM 202, a main RAM 203, an initial reset circuit 204, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a WDT (watchdog
timer) and functions to prevent fraud.

The main ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the first pachinko game machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 202 .

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for progressing the game. The main RAM 203 functions as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201 to store various flags and variable values. Note that in this embodiment, the main CPU
Although the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of 201, it is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 200 includes an I/O port 205 connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 206 connected to enable output of various commands to the sub control circuit 300. Also prepare.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200 . For example, the main control circuit 200 includes the normal symbol display portion 161, the normal symbol reservation display portion 162, the first special symbol display portion 163, the second special symbol display portion 164, and the first special symbol reservation display portion 165. , Second special symbol holding display portion 166, probability variation notification display portion 167, time reduction notification display portion 168, general electric solenoid 148, and special electric solenoid 135 and the like are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 170, an error notification monitor 172, and the like. Main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 205 .

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data, setting values, which will be described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 172 . Also, the error notification monitor 1
In 72, in addition to the error code, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later, a setting changing code indicating that setting change processing is in progress, and a setting confirming code indicating that setting confirmation processing is in progress. It is also possible to display the code, etc. As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed as a special pattern (for example, a setting change pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 200 includes a first starting switch 121 and a second starting switch 141.
, passage gate switch 127, count switch 132, and general winning opening switch 1
23 etc. are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detect signal is sent to I/O port 2.
05 to the main control circuit 200.

Further, the main control circuit 200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function to call a hall attendant and a function to display the number of jackpots, and a hall computer 186 that controls the pachinko machines in the entire hall. An external terminal board 184, and a setting key 174 operated when changing or confirming setting values in a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later.
, a backup clear switch 176 or the like that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 203 according to the operation of the manager of the game arcade. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later.

Also, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. The "inside a predetermined case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 corresponding to the case. A notch is provided, and when the pachinko game machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game hall to expose the back surface, the manager of the game hall can press the setting key 174 or/and the backup key. Also included is one configured to allow contact with the clear switch 176 .

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but this is not the only option.
0 or the power supply circuit 450 may be used. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 .

[1-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 3
03, a display control circuit 304, a voice control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a character control circuit 307, a command input port 308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 200 . Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the first pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. Sub CPU 30
1 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the program ROM 302 . In particular, the sub CPU 301 controls game effects according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 200 .

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 301 .

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 7 . The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, image data is provided as an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 301 . Note that the display device 7
The image data to be displayed includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7 , an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7 . In this manner, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 32 . The audio control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound output from the speaker 32 . The sound source IC is a sub CPU
One voice data is selected from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to the voice generation command from 301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 32 .

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 58). The role item control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a driving signal to each role item, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role item data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the role product control circuit 307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 .

[1-2-3. Dispensing/launching control circuit]
The payout/shooting control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/shooting control circuit 400 includes a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls, and a game ball to shoot. A launching device 6 capable of
etc. are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180 . The ball lending operation panel 182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving a ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180 . The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 180 . Although the operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side,
It may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 400 applies electric power to a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) when the firing handle 62 is turned clockwise. It supplies and controls the shooting of game balls.

[1-2-4. power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit that is created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, and the like.

The power switch 95 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 450 . The power switch 95 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, an example of the game flow will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. FIG. 7 is an example of a game flow. FIG. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing transitions of game states. It should be noted that the game flow shown in FIG. 7 is not a control flow, but a flow that can be understood visually.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is shot by a user's operation of a player or the like, and when the game ball enters various prize winning openings (for example, the first starting opening 120, etc.), the game ball is released. A payout control process is performed. Pachinko games include a "special symbol game" using special symbols and a "normal symbol game" using normal symbols. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a special symbol hit determination process is executed based on the winning of game balls into the starting ports 120 and 140, and whether or not to shift to a big win game state is determined. In addition, the normal symbol game, for example, executes the normal symbol hit determination process based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126, and operates the normal electric accessory 146 to operate the winning opening (the second game in this embodiment) This is a game for determining whether or not to open the starting port 140). In this specification, "special symbol game" may be referred to as "game", but "game" is a term used in a broad concept, for example, normal symbol game and operation unit such as production button 54 ( For example, see FIG. 1) is included in "games".

Also, in this specification, after the variable display of the special symbol is started, until this variable display is finished and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is confirmed (derived) (more specifically, the special symbol is confirmed until the time elapses) is regarded as one special symbol game. However, after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived, when the game is controlled to the big win game state, one special symbol game is performed until the end of the big win game state. In the first pachinko game machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in a pachinko game machine in which the small hit is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination is performed. After the result of the processing is derived, if the game state is controlled to the small winning game state, one special symbol game is performed until the small winning game state ends.

In the special symbol game, when the stop display mode indicating the big win is derived to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164, the game is controlled to the big win game state. In the jackpot game state, the operation of the special electric accessory 133 causes the jackpot 131 to open for a predetermined time (for example, up to 30
000 msec), the round game is executed in an open state, and the possibility of winning the big winning opening 131 is relatively increased.

In addition, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol display section 16 is the stop display mode indicating the normal symbol hit.
1, the operation of the normal electric accessory 146 opens the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 in this embodiment), and for example, the possibility of winning the second starting opening 140 is relatively low. Increased.

In addition, the game that can be executed in the pachinko game is not limited to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, and a new game other than these may be executable.

The outline of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below.

[1-3-1. Special pattern game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol game mainly includes the first starting port 120 or the second
A special symbol start winning process performed when there is a winning (passing) to the starting port 140, and
Special symbol control processing, etc., which are performed based on the fact that the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, are included.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 140, a special symbol starting winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data (for example, a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for design, a reach judgment Various random numbers such as random numbers for use and random numbers for effect selection, etc.) are extracted (acquired) respectively. Each random value extracted is retained as starting information. This special symbol start winning process is performed even during execution of the special symbol control process.

Further, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the special symbol is satisfied. When the starting condition of the special pattern is established, the random number value for judging the big win extracted from the counter for judging the big win of the special pattern is referred to, and the special pattern hit judging process for judging whether or not it is a ``big hit'' is performed. After that, stop symbol determination processing for determining a stop symbol is performed. In the stop symbol determination process, a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the symbol determination random number extracted from the special symbol symbol determination counter and the result of the special symbol win determination process.

In addition, in the present embodiment, if the variable probability flag is ON, the variable probability control is executed. In the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process, if the probability variation flag is off, it is determined that it is a "jackpot" with a relatively low probability, and if the probability variation flag is on, it is a "jackpot" with a relatively high probability is determined. Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "jackpot" is referred to as a "jackpot probability".

The variable probability flag is one of management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not variable probability control is to be executed. When the probability variation flag is on, the game progresses in the gaming state (for example, in the present embodiment high probability short-time gaming state) in which probability variation control is executed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is off, the game progresses in the gaming state (for example, the normal game state or the low probability time-saving gaming state) in which the probability variation control is not executed.

Next, a special symbol variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number is extracted from the variation pattern determination counter, and the random number, the result of the above-described special symbol hit determination process, and the above-described special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the special symbol variation pattern is obtained. (variable display pattern) is determined. Then, the special symbol variable display control process is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern is performed next. Then, based on the result of the effect pattern determination process, the display device 7
For example, display effects such as decorative patterns and character effects displayed in the display area of , and effect control processing such as sound effects such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 32 are performed. Note that the effect control processing is performed by the sub CPU 301 .

Then, the special symbol variable display control process and the performance control process are finished, and if the game is a big win, a big win game control process is carried out. The big-hit game control process is a process executed in the big-hit game state. When the big win game state ends, the special symbol game ends, and a game state transition control process to a non-big win game state is performed. In this case, the game state shifts according to the type of the big win. For example, when both the probability variable flag and the time saving flag are set to ON, the game moves to a high probability time saving game state after the end of the big hit game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit, that is, if it is a loss, the special symbol game ends. In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol win determination process does not include a small win, but in the pachinko game machine in which the result of the special symbol win determination process includes a small win, if a small win is won. Small hit game control processing is performed. In addition, when it is not a big hit but a time saving hit described later, the game shifts to a time saving game state.

Then, each time the starting condition for the special symbol is established, various processes of the above-described special symbol control process are repeated.

In addition, when there is a winning of game balls to the starting ports 120 and 140 during the special symbol control process, the special symbol starting winning process is executed. In addition, starting information of special symbols extracted when a game ball enters the starting ports 120, 140 (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for special symbols, random numbers for judging reach, and random numbers for selecting effects) Various data such as various random numbers such as numerical values) are withheld until the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the starting information of special symbols can be reserved up to a total of 4 pieces of starting information of the first special symbols and 4 pieces of starting information of the second special symbols. , The number of starting information of special symbols that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, the starting information of the first special symbol may be retained more than the starting information of the second special symbol, or the starting information of the second special symbol may be retained more than the starting information of the first special symbol. can be

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 7, it is extracted at the time of winning (passing) of the game ball to the starting ports 120, 140 after the special symbol starts winning and before the starting condition of the special symbol is satisfied. Pre-reading judgment (for example, see S396 in FIG. 52 to be described later) is performed to determine the winning/losing (whether or not a "big hit" is won) and the variation pattern prior to the special symbol hitting judging process based on the starting information, and this pre-reading judgment is performed. A look-ahead effect function that performs a predetermined effect based on the result may be provided. The above-mentioned look-ahead determination may be performed before or after the starting information extracted by the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 120, 140 is withheld.

[1-3-2. Normal pattern game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal symbol game mainly includes a normal symbol starting passage process which is performed when a game ball passes through the passing gate 126, and when a normal symbol starting condition is established. Normal design control processing, etc. are included.

When the game ball passes through the passage gate 126, normal symbol start passage processing is executed. In the normal symbol starting passage processing, normal symbol starting information (for example, normal symbol winning determination random number value, etc.) is extracted (obtained) from the normal symbol winning determination counter, and the extracted starting information is reserved.

Further, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the condition for starting the normal symbol is satisfied. When starting the variable display of the normal symbols, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination random number value extracted from the normal symbol hit determination counter, and determines whether or not to set the "normal symbol hit". A pattern hit determination process is executed, and then a variation pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the result of the normal design hit determination process is referred to, and the normal design variation pattern is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the results of the win determination process for the normal symbols and the determined variation pattern of the normal symbols, and performs variable display control processing for controlling the variable display of the normal symbols.
And, it executes the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect. Note that the effect control process may not be executed.

Then, when the normal symbol variable display control process and effect control process are completed, the main CPU
201 determines whether or not a normal winning symbol indicating "normal winning" has been drawn to the normal symbol display section 161 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). When determining that the stop display mode indicating the normal winning is derived, the main CPU 201 executes normal symbol winning game control processing. In this normal per symbol game control process, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) operates, and the winning of the game ball to the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment). It becomes an open state in which (passing) is possible or easy. On the other hand, when determining that the stop display mode indicating the normal winning is not derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol winning game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in the game state (for example, normal game state) in which the time saving control is not executed, the probability of deriving the stop display mode indicating the normal winning may be set to 0. Time-saving control is, compared to when time-saving control is not executed, a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of special symbols, and a winning opening (in this embodiment, for example, the third 2 starting port 140 (see FIG. 4)
) to increase the frequency of opening the electric sapo control. This time saving control may be a control that performs both the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control, or may be a control that performs only one of the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control.

The electric sapo control improves the time saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of "per normal pattern", the variable display time of the normal pattern, and the opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time) of the normal electric accessory 146. It is a control that allows The time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to a winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment),
Winning probability of "per normal design", variable display time of normal design, or / and normal electric accessory 1
46 opening patterns (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time, etc.). Improving the time-saving performance means, for example, making it easier to win a game ball into a winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment). That is, when the electric sapo control is executed, compared with the case where the electric sapo control is not executed, the winning probability of "per normal symbol" is increased, the variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened, or / and normal electric accessories Winning facilitation (increasing the number of openings, extending the opening time, shortening the wait time, etc.) is performed by 146.

Then, each time the starting condition of the normal symbol is established, various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, when there is passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 during the normal design control processing, the normal design start passage processing is executed. In addition, normal symbol start information extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (for example, normal symbol hit determination random number) is withheld until the normal symbol start condition is established.

In addition, the start of the variable display of normal symbols is performed in the order of being held, and when the start condition of the normal symbols is satisfied, the variable display of the start information that is held first among the start information of the held normal symbols is displayed. Run.

In addition, various random numbers (for example, the random number for judging the jackpot of the first special symbol, the random number of the first special symbol, the random number for the reach judgment of the first special symbol, the random number for judging the big hit of the second special symbol, second
The pattern random number value of the special symbol, the random number value for reach determination of the second special symbol, and the random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol) are extracted in a predetermined range (width) by executing the program by the main CPU 201 A soft random number system may be used in which random numbers are generated in the random number generator, or a hard random number system may be used in which random numbers are extracted from a counter in a random number generator whose random numbers are updated at predetermined intervals.

[1-3-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the game state can be roughly divided into a non-jackpot game state and a jackpot game state. In the non-jackpot game state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when the jackpot is derived as a result of the special symbol win determination processing, the non-jackpot game state is shifted to the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of special symbols is not executed. However, the variable display of normal symbols can be executed even in the jackpot game state. In addition, the explanation about the small winning game state shall be omitted.

The non-jackpot game state is divided into a low-probability state in which the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol win determination process is relatively low, and a high probability game state in which the probability of winning the big win in the special symbol win determination process is relatively high. can be broadly classified.

The high certainty gaming state includes a high certainty short working hours gaming state (high certainty high base) in which time saving control is executed. It should be noted that, although not included in the high certainty gaming state in the first pachinko game machine, as shown in FIG. state may be included.

The low probability state includes a normal game state (low probability low base) in which time saving control is not executed and a time saving game state (low probability high base) in which time saving control is executed.

Furthermore, the time saving game state includes an A time saving game state, a B time saving game state, and a C time saving game state.

The A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be shifted after a specific jackpot gaming state ends, and when a special symbol game of a specified number of times is executed or transitioned to the jackpot gaming state, the A time-saving gaming state is changed. finish. When the A time-saving game state is completed by executing a specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the state shifts to the normal game state.

In the B time-saving gaming state, for example, the jackpot gaming state ends, and the variable display of special symbols in the non-high certainty gaming state (that is, the gaming state in which the probability variation flag is off) has started, and the later-described RAM has been cleared. When the number of variable display times of special symbols (e.g., ceiling counter) reaches the ceiling value (e.g., 1000 times) starting from such as, it is a time-saving gaming state that can be shifted, and whether the special symbol game is executed for the specified number of times , When it shifts to the jackpot game state, the B time-saving game state ends. When the B time-saving game state is completed by executing a specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the game state shifts to the normal game state.

The C time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be shifted when the result of the special symbol hit determination processing performed in the low probability state is "time-saving winning" and the display mode of the time-saving winning is derived,
When the specified number of special symbol games determined by winning the "time-saving win" are executed or the game is shifted to the big win game state, the C time-saving game state is terminated. When the C time-saving game state ends by executing the above-mentioned specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the game state shifts to the normal game state. In addition, for example, when a plurality of time-saving game states overlap, even if the special symbol game is executed the specified number of times, the C time-saving game state continues instead of shifting to the normal game state.

In this specification, regardless of whether or not a plurality of time-saving gaming states are executed repeatedly, the conditions for shifting to the time-saving gaming state are established in the time-saving gaming state, or the conditions for shifting to multiple time-saving gaming states are established at the same time To do, the time saving game state is referred to as “overlapping”. Then, when a plurality of time-saving gaming states overlap, the control of the main CPU 201 internally activates any of the plurality of overlapping time-saving gaming states, that is, internally activates the plurality of overlapping time-saving gaming states. Running in parallel is called "overlapping". However, the main CPU
Even if 201 internally executes a plurality of time-saving game states, the time-saving control that is actually executed is only the time-saving control corresponding to one of the time-saving game states. That is, even when a plurality of time-saving game states are executed in a superimposed manner, the player perceives that the game is controlled to one of the plurality of time-saving game states.

Next, the game state transition will be described.

Normal game state, time saving game state (A time saving game state, B time saving game state, C time saving game state),
And even if it is controlled to a high-probability game state (for example, a high-probability short-time game state), if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, it shifts to a big win game state.

When the jackpot game state ends, depending on the game specifications, it can be shifted to any of a normal game state, a time-saving game state, and a high-certainty game state (for example, a high-certainty time-saving game state). However, the time-saving game state that can be shifted when the jackpot game state ends is limited to the A time-saving game state.

When it is controlled to the high certainty game state, it does not shift from the high certainty game state to the time saving game state or the normal game state except for some pachinko game machines such as so-called ST machines and loop machines. Similarly,
From the time-saving game state or the normal game state, the state does not shift to the high-certainty game state unless the jackpot game state is passed.

When it is controlled to the normal game state, it is possible to shift to the B time reduction game state or C time reduction game state, but it is not possible to shift to the A time reduction game state unless the jackpot game state is passed.
However, when the special symbol game is executed a specified number of times in the A time-saving game state, the game state shifts to the normal game state, so it is possible to shift from the A time-saving game state to the normal game state. In addition, even if it is controlled to either the B time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state, when the special symbol game of the specified number of times is executed, it will shift to the normal game state. It is also possible to shift from the game state to the normal game state.

Next, the transition between the time-saving game states will be described.

When it is controlled to the A time saving game state, the number of time saving times that can be executed in the A time saving game state is set to a number less than the ceiling value which is the condition for transition to the B time saving game state, so from the A time saving game state to B It does not shift to the time saving game state. In addition, since the A time saving game state is controlled via the jackpot game state, there is no transition from the B time saving game state to the A time saving game state. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the A time saving game state is "time saving hit", the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is satisfied, so the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state can overlap. . However, since the A time-saving game state is controlled via the jackpot game state as described above, there is no transition from the C time-saving game state to the A time-saving game state.

When it is controlled in the B time-saving gaming state, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit"
When it is, the transition condition to the C time saving game state is established, and the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state may overlap. Also, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the C time saving game state and the B time saving game state can overlap.

When it is controlled to the C time saving game state, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit"
When it is, the transition condition to the C time saving game state is established, and the C time saving game state and the C time saving game state may overlap.

In addition, the detail about duplication of a time-saving game state is mentioned later.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19, basic specifications of the first pachinko game machine will be described.

In the first pachinko game machine, the normal game state in which neither the variable probability control nor the time saving control is executed, the high probability time saving game state in which both the variable probability control and the time saving control are executed, and the time saving control although the variable probability control is not executed A low-probability, time-saving game state to be executed is prepared, and the main CPU 201 can progress the game in any one of these game states. However, the game state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, and in the high-probability short-time game state and the low-probability short-time game state, the right-handed hit is the regular game mode. The sub CPU 301
A control is executed to display, for example, the display area of the display device 7 in a manner of hitting that is regarded as a regular game mode. Note that the "regular game mode" corresponds to a game mode that is least disadvantageous to the player (advantageous to the player) among a plurality of game modes (e.g., shooting mode).

[1-4-1. Jackpot probability for each set value]
FIG. 9 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first pachinko game machine, the above setting key 17
4, backup clear switch 176 (see FIG. 6 for both), etc., for example, setting 1
Any one of a plurality of setting values such as setting 6 can be set. In the case of such a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the big hit probability differs according to the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes special symbol win determination processing based on the set value.

Specifically, the probability variation flag in which the probability variation control is not executed is off game state (for example, normal game state and low probability time-saving game state in this embodiment) jackpot probability in the first special symbol hit determination process and the second special For example, setting 1 is about 1/319, setting 2 is about 1/314, setting 3 is about 1/309, and setting 4 is about 1/319.
is about 1/304, setting 5 is about 1/299, and setting 6 is about 1/294. In addition, the probability variation flag in which the probability variation control is executed is on (in this embodiment, for example, a high probability short-time gaming state). Setting 3
1/75 at setting 4, 1/74 at setting 5, 1/73 at setting 6, 1/72 at setting 6
It has become.

It should be noted that the time saving hit probability is a probability common to all set values, unlike the jackpot probability. For example, when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed, the time saving probability is 1/160, and when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, the time saving probability is 1/240. there is The time saving hit probability may be different between when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed and when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, but may be the same.

However, even if the time saving hit probability is a common probability with all set values, the time saving continuation rate (for example, the time saving number of times to be set) may be varied according to the set values. For example, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", for example, in the case of setting 1, 50 times are set as the number of times of time saving, and in the case of setting 6, 100 times are set as the number of time saving can be

In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the small win is not included in the lottery target, but the small win may be included in the lottery target. When small hits are included in the lottery targets, the small hit probability may be a common probability for all set values. In addition, when the small hit is included in the lottery target, the small hit is won only when the hit determination processing of one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern (for example, the second special pattern) is performed. You can make it soothing. In this case, in the hit determination process of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol), in addition to the aspect of not performing the determination itself of whether or not the small hit was won, whether or not the small hit probability was set to 0 may be determined.

The above-mentioned short-time hit probability and the small hit probability when including the small hit in the lottery target are common probabilities for all set values as described above, but not limited to this, as different probabilities depending on the set value good.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but it is not limited to this. A plurality of setting values may have the same jackpot probability, such as a jackpot probability and a jackpot probability common to setting 5 and setting 6.例文帳に追加

Also, in this embodiment, the big win probability differs according to the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player differs according to the set value, the target different according to the set value is not necessarily limited to the big win probability. For example, in a pachinko game machine that is controlled to a jackpot game state when a game ball enters a specific winning hole, the probability of winning a specific winning hole may be varied according to the set value. It should be noted that it is not essential that the pachinko gaming machine be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 10 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 10 shows the case of setting 1 shown in FIG. 9 as an example.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, the "time saving hit" based on the big hit determination random number extracted when the game ball wins in the start ports 120 and 140. , a table to be referred to when determining a "big hit" or "losing" by lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery target is "time saving hit", "big hit" and "losing", and other lottery targets (for example, small hits) are not included, but the first start port 120 or / and When a game ball wins in the second starting port 140, it may be determined as another lottery target.

As described above, the big hit determination random number value is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the random number for judging a big hit is 0 to 65535 (65536 types)
extracted from the However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines "time-saving hit", "big hit", or "lose" based on the extracted big hit determination random number value in the first special symbol win determination process. In the hit determination table of the first special symbol, for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag, the range (width) of the random number for judging the big hit determined as "time saving hit" and the time saving hit decision value corresponding to this data, the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the range of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "losing" The relationship between (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this specification, if the value of the probability variation flag is "0", the probability variation flag is off,
When the value of the probability variation flag is "1", the probability variation flag is on.

In addition, in the second special symbol win determination process, the main CPU 201 determines, in the same way as in the first special symbol win determination process, based on the extracted big win determination random number value, a "time-saving win", a "big win", or a "loss". ” is decided. In the hit determination table of the second special symbol, the range (width) of the random number value for judging the big hit determined as "time saving hit" and the time saving hit decision value corresponding to this for each probability variation flag value (0 or 1) data, the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the range of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "losing" The relationship between (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, for example, the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
When the extracted random number value for judging a big hit is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201
is determined as "time saving hit", and determines the hit/loss determination value data as "time saving hit determination value data".
Further, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 201 determines "big hit".
, and the hit/lose determination value data is determined as "big hit determination value data". Further, when the extracted random number value for judging a big hit is any one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 201
"Loss" is determined, and the judgment value data is determined as "losing judgment value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time saving hit". Then, the determination value data is determined as "time reduction hit determination value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted random number value for big hit determination is any one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 201 determines "big hit",
The determination value data is determined as "big hit determination value data". Also, when the extracted random number value for judging a big hit is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 201 judges it as "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

Similarly, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201
It is determined as "time saving hit", and the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Also, the second
When the probability variable flag is off during the special symbol hit determination process and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 273 to 477, the main CPU 201 determines a "jackpot",
The determination value data is determined as "big hit determination value data". Furthermore, the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number is 478 to 65535
If either of
"Loss Judgment Value Data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". Then, the determination value data is determined as "time reduction hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 273 to 1123, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit",
The determination value data is determined as "big hit determination value data". Furthermore, the probability variation flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted random number for the big hit determination is 1124 to 6553.
5, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" and determines the determination value data as "losing determination value data".

Thus, in this embodiment, for example, among the random numbers for judging the big hit generated in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined width from 0 (for example, 0 to 408 in the case of the hit judging process of the first special symbol), It is assigned to other judgment value data (for example, time saving judgment value data) excluding big hit judgment value data and loss judgment value data. Also, from the predetermined value, the end (for example, 614 to 65535 if the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Furthermore, the big-hit determination value data and the loss determination value data are allocated adjacently. By doing this, for example, when the probability variable flag is turned from off to on (or from on to off), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced by the amount that increases (or decreases) the width of the big hit judgment value data ( or larger), it is possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time saving judgment value data).

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, and the "time saving hit" winning probability when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed By making the probabilities different from each other, it is possible to provide variations to the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 10, the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed is compared with the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. , it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the normal game state, which tends to be monotonous.

However, the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed. may In this case, for example, when "time saving hit" is won in the time saving game state, the time saving game state is repeatedly executed, and when the "time saving win" is won just before the time saving game state ends, the time saving game state is activated. It will be extended substantially, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline of interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, even if the variable probability flag is ON or OFF, it is possible to win the "time saving hit". However, when the probability variation flag is off (normal game state, time reduction game state), the main CPU 201 controls to the time reduction game state if the result of the hit determination process is "time reduction hit", but the probability variation flag is on. In the case, even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", it is not controlled to the time saving game state.

[1-4-3. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selected symbol command" for determining a stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins the starting ports 120, 140 and the aforementioned determination value data; This table is referred to when selecting the "symbol designation command". "
The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a winning symbol determined according to the type of the big hit when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a big hit. This is a command for designating the pattern to be displayed when the variable display is stopped.
The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 201, for example, outputs the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU
201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.
”.

Also, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
For example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 2
01 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.
to select. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Also, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
Regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of, for example, 97 to 99, the main C
PU 201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and "z
A7".

Also, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
For example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201
"z9" is selected as the selection symbol command, and "zA8" is selected as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU
201 selects "z10" as the selection symbol command and "zA" as the symbol designation command.
9”.

Also, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
The main CPU 201 selects "z11" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99.

In addition, in this embodiment, with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), the hit/lose determination value data is determined based on the extracted big hit determination random number value, and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number value for judging a big hit and the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the winning/losing of the special symbol, the selected symbol command and the symbol specifying command may be determined together.

[1-4-4. Special symbol stop mode determination table]
FIG. 12A shows the main ROM 20 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko game machine.
2 is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table stored in . The special symbol stop mode determination table includes the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 163 when the variable display of special symbols is stopped.
It is referred to when determining the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 5) according to the selected symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 12(A), the stop mode of the special symbols derived to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164 (see FIG. 5) is composed of areas 0 to 7, for example. 1-byte control signal. Each of the areas 0 to 7 of the first special symbol corresponds to one of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h (see FIG. 5) forming the first special symbol display portion 163 on a one-to-one basis. For example, the first special symbol area 0 corresponds to 163a, the first special symbol area 1 corresponds to 163b, the first special symbol area 2 corresponds to 163c, and the first special symbol area 3 corresponds to 163d. , the first special symbol area 4 corresponds to 163e, the first special symbol area 5 corresponds to 163f, the first special symbol area 6 corresponds to 163g, and the first special symbol area 7 corresponds to 163h.

Similarly, each area 0 to 7 of the second special symbol corresponds to one of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h (see FIG. 5) constituting the second special symbol display portion 164 one-to-one. For example, the second special symbol area 0 corresponds to 164a, the second special symbol area 1 corresponds to 164b, the second special symbol area 2 corresponds to 164c, and the second special symbol area 3 corresponds to 164d. , the second special symbol area 4 corresponds to 164e, the second special symbol area 5 corresponds to 164f, the second special symbol area 6 corresponds to 164g, and the second special symbol area 7 corresponds to 164h.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the LED display mode (time saving win display mode) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined as follows. be done. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163a corresponding to the first special symbol area 0 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display section 163, and the first special symbol The LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 is lit, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol display portion 163 is determined to be stopped and displayed.
When the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 displays the first special symbol display section 163
Of the eight LEDs constituting the, LED163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol, LED163b corresponding to the area 1 of the first special symbol, LE corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol
D163h is lit, and other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol display portion 163 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 displays the LED 163a corresponding to the first special symbol area 0 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display portion 163 and the first special symbol area. 2 and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off,
It is determined to stop display the first special symbol display portion 163 . Also, if the selection pattern command is "z
7”, the main CPU 201 displays eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display portion 164.
Among them, LED164a corresponding to the area 0 of the second special design, LED164b corresponding to the area 1 of the second special design, LED164h corresponding to the area 7 of the second special design is lit,
In the mode that other LEDs are turned off, the second special symbol display portion 164 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 201 displays the second special symbol display section 1
Of the eight LEDs constituting the 64, LED164a corresponding to the second special symbol area 0, LED164c corresponding to the second special symbol area 2, LED164h corresponding to the second special symbol area 7 The second special symbol display section 16 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.
4 is determined to be statically displayed.

Also, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the special symbol display unit 163
, 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 16 corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display portion 163.
3d, the LED 163e corresponding to the first special symbol area 4, and the LED 163g corresponding to the first special symbol area 6 are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol display part 163 is stopped. Decide to display. If the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CP
U201, among eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display portion 163, LED163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol, LED163f corresponding to the area 5 of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol The LED 163g corresponding to the area 6 is lit, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol display portion 163 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 displays eight L
Of the ED, LED163d corresponding to the first special symbol area 3, the first special symbol area 4
LED163e corresponding to, LED163f corresponding to the area 5 of the first special symbol, the first
The first special symbol display portion 163 is determined to be stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163g corresponding to the special symbol area 6 is lit and the other LEDs are extinguished. The selected pattern command is "z9
, the main CPU 201 selects an LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and an LED 164e corresponding to the second special symbol area 4 among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display unit 164. , LED 164g corresponding to the area 6 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the second special symbol display part 164 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 displays the second special symbol display section 1
Of the eight LEDs constituting the 64, LED164d corresponding to the area 3 of the second special symbol, and LED164f corresponding to the area 5 of the second special symbol are lit, and the other LEDs are extinguished. 2 It is determined that the special symbol display portion 164 is stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", the special symbol display unit 163
, 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 16 corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display portion 163.
It is determined to stop and display the first special symbol display portion 163 in a mode in which only 3h is lit and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z11", the main CPU 201
Of the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display portion 164, only the LED 164h corresponding to the second special symbol region 7 is lit, and the other LEDs are turned off. Decide to stop displaying.

When the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol stop mode based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 sends a control signal corresponding to the determined mode to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. It outputs to each LED to constitute, and controls the stop mode of the special symbols derived to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164 .

In addition, in FIG. 12(A), the display mode of the LED led to the first special symbol display portion 163 and the display mode of the LED led to the second special symbol display portion 164 are shown in the same table for convenience. ing. However, it is preferable to transmit the control signals separately for the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 .

FIG. 12(B) shows the program RO of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko game machine.
It is an example of a decorative design stop mode determination table stored in M. The decorative pattern stop mode determination table is referred to when determining the decorative pattern stop mode (symbol combination) derived when the variable display of the decorative patterns displayed on the display device 7 is stopped, according to the pattern designation command. be done. It should be noted that the "remarks" column shown in FIG.

Since the first pachinko gaming machine can variably display only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 variably displays the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The display device 7 is controlled so that the display effect for the special symbol being displayed is performed. In this case, it is preferable that the sub CPU 301 performs the display effect in such a manner that it is possible to grasp whether the special symbol variably displayed is the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the decorative patterns displayed on the display device 7 are composed of 9 patterns, for example, 1 to 9, for the left pattern, and 10 patterns, for example, 1 to 9 and a time-saving pattern, for the middle pattern. , and the right symbol is composed of nine symbols 1 to 9, for example. The time-saving design is a design that is stopped and displayed when the game state shifts to the time-saving gaming state, such as when the result of the special design lottery is a time-saving winning, for example. By stop-displaying the medium pattern as the time-saving pattern, the player can grasp that he has won the time-saving prize. Further, in the present embodiment, the odd numbered symbols are defined as symbols having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the even numbered symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol lottery does not include a small win, but if the result of the special symbol lottery includes a small win, for example, the symbols constituting the medium symbols may include a small win symbol. (symbols stopped and displayed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit) may be included. In this case, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win, the sub CPU 301 stops and displays the middle symbol as a small win symbol, so that the player can know that a small win has been won.

As shown in FIG. 12(B), when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols. As such, for example, the left and right symbols are stopped at even-numbered symbols, and the middle symbols are stopped at time-saving symbols.

If the design designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (the result of the special design lottery is "
If it is a time-saving hit", the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols, for example, stops the left and right symbols as odd-numbered symbols, and stops the middle symbol as a time-saving symbol. When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"), the symbol designation command is " Compared to the case of "zA1" or "zA6" (when the selected symbol command is "z0", "z1" or "z7"), the number of set time reductions is large, and the degree of advantage for the player is high.

If the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" (the result of the special symbol lottery is "
If it is a jackpot", the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols, for example, by stopping the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol with odd-numbered symbols (zoroshi).

If the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9" (the result of the special symbol lottery is "
In the case of a big hit", the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols, for example, by stopping the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol with even-numbered symbols (zoroshi). It should be noted that the symbol designation command "zA4" is, as can be seen from FIG. There is a case where the probability variation flag is not set to ON (when the selected symbol command is "z5"). Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the selected symbol command is either "z4" or "z5", the sub CPU 301 controls the decorative symbols to stop at the aligned symbols of the even-numbered symbols (zorome), In the jackpot game state, it is preferable to perform a promotion effect indicating that it is a probability variable win (a probability variable flag is set to ON).

Also, as will be understood by referring to FIG. 13 described later, when the design designation command is "zA4" or "zA9", as will be understood by referring to FIG. 13 described later, the design designation command is "zA3" or "zA8 ”, the expected value that the probability variation flag is set to ON after the end of the jackpot gaming state is small. At this point, the pattern designation command is "zA3".
Alternatively, when the command is "zA8", the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9".

When the symbol designation command is "zA5" or "zA10" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "Loss"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols at random. A loose stitch corresponds to, for example, a stop mode in which at least one of the left, right, and middle symbols is different from the other symbols.

In FIG. 12(B), the decorative pattern stop mode according to the pattern designation command (for example, when the design designation command is "zA1", the left design "2", the middle design "time saving", the right design "4") Although illustrated, the stop mode shown in the column of the decorative pattern stop mode in FIG. 12B is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

[1-4-5. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table determines the aspect of the jackpot game state (more specifically, the number of rounds, for example) and/or the aspect of the subsequent game state in accordance with the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol. Referenced when making decisions. The mode of the game state after that indicates the mode of the game state after the end of the big hit game state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the big hit game state, so the game state after that is the C time saving game state. Aspects are shown.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and to set the number of times of time saving to 10 times. The selection pattern command is "
In the case of z1” and in the case of “z7”, the main CPU 201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the probability changing flag and the time saving flag, and decides to set the number of times of time saving to 50 times. When the selected symbol command is "z2" and "z8", the main CP
U201 decides to set ON only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and decides to set the time saving number of times to 100 times. When the result of the special symbol win determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU 201 derives the above-described time saving win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, A time saving flag is set on and the determined number of times of time saving is set without controlling to a jackpot game state, and control to a C time saving game state is possible. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", since it is not controlled to the big win game state, the mode of the big win game state is not determined. In addition, in this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed, the time saving number of times to be set is the same and However, it is not limited to this, and the number of time reduction times to be set may be changed according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

Thus, in the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", according to the selected symbol command determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the time saving number of times to be set are making it different. By doing so, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", it is possible to give variation to the progress of the game after that, and it is possible to suppress the decline of interest. It becomes possible.

By the way, as described above, when the variable probability flag is ON, the main CPU 201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, the main CPU 201 turns on the variable probability flag (high probability gaming state)
Even if it is, as shown in FIG. 10, the lottery for "time saving hit" is performed, and if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", the time saving hit indicating that the "time saving hit" has been won Although the display mode is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, without controlling to the C time saving game state,
You may make it continue a high certainty game state.

In addition, the main CPU 201 draws a lottery for "shorter working hours" when the variable probability flag is on, and even if the result of the hit determination process is "shorter working hours", the display mode of losing is forcibly displayed on the special symbol display unit. 163 and 164.

Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit judgment value data is not assigned to the big hit judgment random value, that is, the "time saving hit" is not included in the lottery result (special symbol hit judgment processing result) hit A determination process may be performed. In this case, when the probability variation flag is off, the time saving hit determination value data is assigned to the big hit determination random number value, and when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit determination value data is not assigned. Therefore, the width of the random number assigned to the time saving per judgment value data when the probability variation flag is off is instead of the time saving per judgment value data, the loss judgment value data, the big hit judgment value data, or the loss judgment value It is assigned to both the data and the big hit judgment value data.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability flag is ON, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko machine that can be controlled to a high probability non-time-saving game state such that the time-saving flag is off even if the probability variable flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit" You may make it transfer to a highly reliable time-saving game state.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the mode of the winning game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" and "z9", the main CPU 20
1 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as a mode of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined to set both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag to ON, and to set both the variable probability number and the time saving number to 10000 times.
In these cases, the main CPU 201 displays the above-described jackpot display mode on the special symbol display section 16.
After deriving to 3,164, it is controlled to a big hit game state, and after the end of this big hit game state, it becomes controllable to a high probability short working time game state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the aspect of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined to set both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag to ON, and to set both the variable probability number and the time saving number to 10000 times. In this case, the main CPU2
01, after deriving the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163, controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, it becomes controllable to a high-accuracy time-saving game state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the aspect of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as a mode of the game state after that, it is determined to set only the time saving flag out of the probability changing flag and the time saving flag to ON.
Moreover, it determines to set the number of times of time saving to set to 200 times, for example. In this case, after the main CPU 201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163, it controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, it becomes controllable to the time saving game state. The time saving game state controlled here is the A time saving game state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the aspect of the big win gaming state. In addition, as a mode of the game state after that, it is determined to set only the time saving flag out of the probability changing flag and the time saving flag to ON. Moreover, it determines to set the number of times of time saving to set to 300 times, for example. In this case, after the main CPU 201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the second special symbol display unit 164, the main CPU 201 controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, it becomes controllable to the time saving game state. The time saving game state controlled here is also the A time saving game state.

In addition, it is preferable that the time saving performance in the high probability time saving game state is the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, but it may be different from the time saving performance in the A time saving game state.

Further, for example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), the main CPU 201 changes the mode of the big win game state and None of the subsequent game state aspects are set. i.e.
When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not shift the game state, and continues control to the previous game state.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), as described above, the mode of the jackpot game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state modes are set, originally, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. However, in the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", for the sake of convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the jackpot game state nor the mode of the subsequent game state is determined. 13.

Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table of FIG. Determine the hit-lose judgment value data based on the random number (perform hit-lose judgment),
Win or lose ("time saving hit", "big hit" or "losing") is determined. After that, the main CPU
201 refers to the special symbol determination table of FIG. 11, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins the first start port 120 or the second start port 140 and the hit/loss determination value data. Based on this, the selected symbol command is determined, and the type of display mode (type of time saving hit or big hit) derived to the special symbol display parts 163 and 164 is determined. Incidentally, the hit-lose determination and the determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, but are excluded from being performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbols and the final display. not on purpose.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5")
, or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z10"). On the other hand, the number of time saving in the C time saving game state controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1", "z7"), or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2", "z
8"). That is, the expected value of the time saving frequency in the A time saving game state is higher than the expected value of the time saving frequency in the C time saving game state. In this way, by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving game state, it is possible to increase the position of the "big hit".

In addition, instead of the expected value of the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state being higher than the expected value of the number of times of time saving in the C time saving game state, for example, as shown in FIG. may be set higher than the expected value of the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state. FIG. 14 is a modification of the winning type determination table shown in FIG. This figure 1
4, the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state is, for example, 50 times (the selected symbol command is "z5",
for "z10"). On the other hand, the number of times of time saving in the C time saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1", "z
7") or 200 times (if the selected symbol command is "z2", "z8").
Thus, by making the C time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the A time-saving game state, the positioning of the "time-saving win" can be increased. For example, even if a state in which the ``jackpot'' is not won continues for a long period of time, if the ``shorter working hours'' is won, the game is controlled to a relatively advantageous C time-saving game state, thereby suppressing the decline in interest. It becomes possible to

In this specification, similarly to the variable probability flag, when the value of the time saving flag is "0", the time saving flag is off, and when the time saving flag is "1", the time saving flag is on.

A time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in main RAM203 like a probability variation flag, and is a flag for managing whether time saving control is performed.

Moreover, the number of times of shortening of working hours is the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed by continuing the shortening of working hours control. That is, for example, when the number of times of time saving is determined to be "50", if variable display of special symbols is performed 50 times without winning a jackpot in this time saving game state, this time saving game state is terminated and non-time saving game is played. It shifts to a state (for example, normal game state).

In addition, "10000" of the probability variable number of times and the time saving number shown in FIG. .

[1-4-6. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 15 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the first pachinko gaming machine. The column of "remarks" in FIG. 15 is shown for convenience so that it is easy to understand. "Remarks" in Fig. 15
The time-saving hit system reach A, B, and C shown in the column is a reach effect indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is a possibility of a time-saving hit (no possibility of a big hit). Similarly, big hit system reach A, B, C is a reach effect indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a possibility of a big hit (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, common reach A, B, C, D
, E are ready-to-win performances indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be either a time-saving hit or a big hit. In addition, FIG. 15 is a special symbol variation pattern table when the probability variation flag is off, and illustration of the special symbol variation pattern table when the probability variation flag is on is omitted.

The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140. - 特許庁Determining fluctuation patterns. The special symbol variation pattern table of FIG. 15 is a table referred to when performing the special symbol variation pattern determination process of S96 of FIG. 28 described later.

As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern of the special symbol is the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (win or lose), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the reach determination random value, or / And, although it is determined based on the random number value for effect selection or the like, it is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values or the like instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 sets a look-ahead flag when the random number for effect selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start hole 120 is a specific random number. The sub CPU 301, which has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201, performs a look-ahead effect when a look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is off, and does not set the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is on or the variable probability flag is on.

Also, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may determine.

It should be noted that the main CPU 201 may set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead effect) also when the time saving flag is on or when the variable probability flag is on. Also, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a look-ahead flag may be set (a look-ahead effect may be performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of times of variation per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The determined fluctuation pattern information is sent to the main CPU 20 via the command output port 206.
1 to the command input port 308 of the sub CPU 301 . The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201 .

Although not shown in FIG. 15, for example, the range of random number values for effect selection may be changed for each set value so that the variation pattern (variable display time) of the determined special symbol is different.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, when the result of the hit determination process is a loss, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to whether the time saving flag is on regardless of the type of time saving. , but not limited to this. For example, the expected value of the number of variable display times of special symbols per unit time may vary depending on the type of time saving. For example, the expected value of the variable display frequency of the special symbol per unit time may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state.

[1-4-7. Time saving game state]
As described above, in this embodiment, as the time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state are prepared. These time-saving game states will be described below.

A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is, for example, "z5" or "z10". is. That is, in the present embodiment, the condition for shifting to the A time-saving gaming state is to win a jackpot (a jackpot where the selected symbol command is "z5" or "z10"). However, even if the conditions for transitioning to the A time-saving gaming state are met, it does not necessarily shift to the A time-saving gaming state, but when the conditions that prevent the transition to the A time-saving gaming state are established (for example, when the backup is cleared etc.) does not shift to the A time-saving game state.

In addition, the end condition of the A time-saving game state is determined in response to the selected symbol command when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started. When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times of shortening (hereinafter referred to as "A specified number of times of shortening") is executed (see column "Number of times of shortening of hours" in FIG. 13) It is a case where one of the conditions is satisfied.

The B time-saving gaming state is, for example, the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the starting point is when the variable display of special symbols in the non-high-certainty gaming state (for example, the normal game state and the low-certainty time-saving gaming state in this embodiment) is started. , the ceiling counter is updated (1 is added), and the time saving game state is controlled when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state is that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. The transition to the B time-saving gaming state may be when the variable display of special symbols when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (hereinafter referred to as "final ceiling fluctuation") is started, or when the ceiling final fluctuation is finished. Alternatively, it may be the time when the variable display of the special symbol following the final ceiling change is started. That is, the transition timing to the B time-saving gaming state may be between when the ceiling final variation is started and when the variable display of the next special symbol is started. Also, the result of the hit determination process of the special pattern in the final ceiling change is "
In the case of "losing", although the display mode of losing is derived to the special symbol display parts 163 and 164, it will shift to the B time saving game state. In this case, the sub CPU 301 displays to the player that the condition for transition to the B time-saving gaming state has been established (for example, in this embodiment, the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value). to stop it, or
Control may be performed to display on the display device 7 a special effect by a character, or a effect in which both of these are performed. It should be noted that even if the condition to transition to the B time-saving gaming state is established, it does not necessarily shift to the B time-saving gaming state, but if a condition that prevents the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is established (for example, a special When the result of the pattern hit determination process is a big hit, etc.), the game state is not shifted to the B time-saving game state.

The ceiling counter is not updated when the probability variation flag is on, and when the probability variation flag is off, it is always counted regardless of whether the time saving flag is on or off. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, unless the result of the special pattern hit determination processing is "big hit", the game is controlled to the B time-saving game state. In a pachinko game machine including a small win in the result of special symbol win determination processing, when the result of the special symbol win determination processing is "small win" when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the display mode of the small win. is led to the special symbol display portions 163 and 164, the B time-saving game state may be started, or the B time-saving game state may be started after the end of the small winning game state. That is, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "small hit", the special symbol display portions 163 and 164 only display the display mode of the small win. , the above-described display effect for showing the player that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value is not displayed. In the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the ceiling value may differ according to the setting value. Also, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit".
In the case of , it is controlled to the big hit game state without controlling to the B time saving game state.

In addition, when the power is turned on, when the ceiling counter is controlled to the jackpot game state, R
When the work area (volatile area) in the AM 203 is cleared (backup clear process), a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 17
4 or a dedicated switch) is operated, and in the case of a game machine capable of changing the normal symbol winning probability, when the high probability of the normal symbol winning probability ends, etc., it is reset when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, when the update of the ceiling counter is allowed, each time the variable display of the special pattern is executed,
Ceiling counters are updated. For example, if the variable probability flag is on, updating the ceiling counter is not allowed.

After clearing the ceiling counter, the main CPU 201 starts counting the ceiling counter from the variable display of the next special symbol. Each time the ceiling counter is cleared, the ceiling value will be
It may be set by the main CPU 201, or may be predetermined as a pachinko game machine-specific setting instead of being set each time.

If the ceiling counter is cleared by being controlled to the jackpot game state, and if the variable probability flag is not turned on after the jackpot game state is ended, the main CPU 201 will display the variable display of the first special symbol at the start or end. Update (+1) the ceiling counter. Also, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, if the variable probability flag is on, the ceiling counter is not updated even if the variable display of the special pattern is performed, but if it is a specification that performs a ST machine or a variable drop lottery, for example, the probability variable flag The ceiling counter is updated at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern after the is turned off. In addition, in the case of specifications that perform a variable drop lottery, the variable flag will be changed from on to off at the start of the variable display of the special design, so if you update the ceiling counter at the end of the variable display of the special design, the special design If the variable probability flag is off at the end of the variable display, the ceiling counter may be updated.

In addition, in the case of a pachinko game machine with specifications in which a variable probability drop lottery is performed by the main CPU 201, when the sub CPU 301 receives a command transmitted from the main CPU 201, an effect that suggests that the variable probability drop lottery has been won, and a high probability game It is preferable not to perform an effect suggesting transition from the state to the low probability gaming state. By doing so, the timing to start counting by the ceiling counter, that is, the transition timing to the B time-saving gaming state, can be
It becomes difficult for the player to understand the display effect displayed on the screen, and it is possible to provide an interesting game. When it is difficult to grasp the transition timing to the B time saving game state, for example, a countdown effect that suggests the transition timing to the B time saving game state or a countdown effect of a false countdown effect is displayed on the display device 7 under the control of the sub CPU 301. , it becomes possible to further enhance interest.

In addition, when the clearing process (backup clearing process) of the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is performed, the main CPU 201 starts variable display of the special symbol for the first time after the clearing process of the work area in the RAM 203. Update (+1) the ceiling counter at time or end.

Furthermore, a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 17
4 or dedicated switch) is operated, the main CPU 201 updates the ceiling counter (
+1) to do.

In addition, the conditions for ending the B time-saving gaming state are the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and a predetermined prescribed number of times (hereinafter It is a case where one of the conditions is satisfied, out of the case where the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed. One of the conditions for ending the B time-saving gaming state, "When the variable display of the special symbols for the B time-saving specified number of times is executed", is the B time-saving specified number of times of the special design variable display (hereinafter "B time-saving final variation ”)
It may be when is started, or when the B time saving final variation is completed. That is, the end timing of the B time-saving gaming state may be between when the B time-saving final variation is started and until the variable display of the special symbols related to this B time-saving final variation is completed.

The C time saving game state is a time saving game state controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit". That is, the condition for transitioning to the C time saving gaming state is to win the time saving hit (the selected symbol command is "z0" to "z2", "z7" or "z8" time saving hit), and the time saving per display mode is a special symbol. It is derived (determined display) on the display units 163 and 164 .
It should be noted that even if the conditions for transition to the C time-saving gaming state are established, instead of always shifting to the C time-saving gaming state, if the conditions that prevent the transition to the C time-saving gaming state are established (for example, B time-saving gaming state and (details will be described later), and the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the B time-saving game state is "time-saving hit", etc.), C
Do not shift to the time-saving game state. It should be noted that, when the condition to prevent the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is established despite the fact that the condition for shifting to the C time-saving gaming state is established, the main CPU 201 does not cause the shift to the C time-saving gaming state. The display mode of the special symbol display section 163
, 164 is performed.

In addition, the end condition of the C time-saving game state is determined in response to the selected symbol command when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started. When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times of shortening (hereinafter referred to as "C specified number of times of shortening") is executed (see "Number of times of shortening" in FIG. 13) It is a case where one of the conditions is satisfied. The C time-saving specified number of times, which is one of the conditions for ending the C time-saving gaming state, is the variable display of the special symbol for the time-saving number determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as "C time-saving final variation"). It may be when it is done, or it may be when the C time saving final variation is completed. That is, the end timing of the C time-saving gaming state is
It is sufficient that it is from the start of the C time saving final variation to the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to this C time saving final variation.

In addition, the time saving performance may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state. In addition, the time saving performance of two time saving game states out of the A time saving game state, B time saving game state and C time saving game state is the same, and the time saving performance of these two time saving game states and the other one time saving game state You may make it differ from time saving performance. Furthermore, the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, the time saving performance in the B time saving game state, and the time saving performance in the C time saving game state may be the same.

In addition, in addition to the above, for the end condition of the A time saving game state, the end condition of the B time saving game state, and the end condition of the C time saving game state, for example, the number of variable display times of the second special symbol has reached the specified number of times Alternatively, the fact that the normal electric accessory 146 has been opened a predetermined number of times, the fact that a specific opening mode has been selected as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 146, and the like may be included. Further, in a pachinko game machine including a small win as a result of the special symbol win determination process, the end condition may include that the number of small wins has reached a specified number of times. Furthermore, a time-saving falling lottery may be performed, and winning of the time-saving falling lottery may be included in the above termination conditions.

[1-4-8. Normal pattern hit judgment table]
FIG. 16 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the game state and the normal symbol hit determination extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). It is a table that is referred to when determining "per normal symbol" or "losing" by lottery based on the random number value and (that is, when executing the normal symbol game determination process of S295 in FIG. 43 described later). .

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for normal symbol hit determination from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the normal symbol win determination process, the main CPU 201 determines "normal symbol win" or "loss" based on the extracted normal symbol win determination random number value.
In the normal symbol hit determination table, for each type of time saving, the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value determined as "normal symbol hit" and the normal symbol per determination value data corresponding to this The relationship and the relationship between the range (width) of the hit determination random number value of the normal symbol determined to be “losing” and the loss determination value data corresponding thereto are defined.

In this embodiment, in a non-time-saving game state (for example, normal game state), the main CPU
When the random number for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 0 to 79, it is determined as "normal winning", and hit/lose determination value data is determined as "normal winning determination value data". In addition, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 80 to 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data ” is decided.

In addition, in the time-saving game state A, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 98 as "normal symbol hit", and sets the hit/lose determination value data to "normal". Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the time-saving game state A, when the random number value for winning judgment of the extracted normal symbol is 99, the main CPU 201 judges "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 79, determines that it is a “normal symbol win”, and sets the hit/lose determination value data to “normal”. Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 80 to 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data". ” is decided.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 79, determines that it is a “normal symbol win”, and sets the hit/loss determination value data to “normal”. Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 80 to 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data ” is decided.

Thus, in the present embodiment, among the non-time-saving gaming state, A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving gaming state, and C time-saving gaming state, the winning probability per normal symbol in the A time-saving gaming state (shown in FIG. 16 selectivity (approximate)) is the highest.

Also, the winning probability per normal symbol in the B time-saving gaming state (selection rate (rough estimate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Similarly, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time-saving gaming state (selection rate (rough estimate) shown in FIG. 16) is also the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, even if the game state shifts between the non-time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is not changed.

In addition, the winning probability per normal symbol may be made the same in the non-time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to change the ratio of types of normal symbols to be described later for each state without changing the winning probability per normal symbol.

[1-4-9. Normal pattern judgment table]
FIG. 17 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table includes the type of time saving, the hit-loss determination value data described above, and the passing gate 12
6 (see FIG. 4) When selecting the "selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol" for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through 6 (see FIG. 4) is a table referenced by "Selected pattern command at the time of normal design hit" is a command for specifying the normal design hit pattern determined according to the normal design hit type when the result of the hit determination process for the normal design is a normal design hit. be. The pattern random number of the normal pattern is, for example, 0 to
It is extracted from among 99 (100 types).

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command at the time of the normal symbol hit is selected as follows. be.

For example, in a non-time-saving gaming state, when the normal design hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal design hit determination process, even if the normal design random number value is any of 0 to 99,
The main CPU 201 selects "fz0" as a selection symbol command for a normal winning symbol.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 29, it is normal. Select "fz1" as the selected symbol command at the time of per symbol, and if the symbol random number of the normal symbol is any one of 30 to 69, "fz1" is selected as the selected symbol command at the time of normal per symbol
2" is selected, and if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 70 to 99, "fz3" is selected as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol.

In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 29, it is normal. Select "fz4" as the selected symbol command at the time of per symbol, and if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 30 to 69, "fz4" is selected as the selected symbol command at the time of normal per symbol
5" is selected, and if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 70 to 99, "fz6" is selected as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 29, it is normal. Select "fz7" as the selected symbol command at the time of per symbol, and if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 30 to 69, "fz" is selected as the selected symbol command at the time of normal per symbol
8" is selected, and if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 70 to 99, "fz9" is selected as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16) and determines the hit/lose determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value. After that, referring to the normal design determination table (see FIG. 17), the selection design command at the time of normal design is determined based on the design random number value of the normal design.
It is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number for winning determination of the normal symbol and the random number of the normal symbol, the winning/losing of the normal symbol and the selection symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol may be determined together.

[1-4-10. Type determination table per normal pattern]
FIG. 18 is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal per symbol type determination table selects an opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), in response to a normal per symbol select symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the normal symbol. It is referred to when determining (that is, when executing the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 which is executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 of FIG. 43 described later).

In this embodiment, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, if the selected symbol command is "f
z0”, the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to be the first opening time of 1000 msec, no wait time, and no second opening. That is, the opening pattern is determined such that the normal electric accessory 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

In addition, when the selection symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz1", the main CPU 201
The opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), is set to the first opening time 2
000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second open time of 2000 msec.

In addition, when the selection symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz2", the main CPU 201
The opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), is set to the first opening time 2
500 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second open time of 2500 msec are determined.

In addition, when the selected symbol command for the normal winning symbol is "fz3", the main CPU 201
The opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), is set to the first opening time of 3
000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second open time of 3000 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "fz4" and "fz7" at the time of normal symbol,
The main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to be the first opening time of 2500 msec, no waiting time, and no second opening.

Also, when the selected symbol command is "fz5" and "fz8" at the time of normal symbol,
The main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to have a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2000 msec.

In addition, when the selection pattern command is "fz6" and "fz9" at the time of normal design,
The main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to have a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2500 msec.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the non-time-saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric auditors 146 (see FIG. 4) is the non-time-saving game State, A time saving game state, B time saving game state, and C time saving game state in the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146, the most advantageous degree becomes a disadvantageous mode.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 is the degree of ease of winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140 when the normal electric accessory 146 is opened.

When the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the A time saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is a non-time saving game state, A time saving game state, B time saving Among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 in the game state and the C time saving game state, the degree of advantage is the most advantageous mode.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the B time saving game state is "normal symbol win" is the normal symbol hit determination in the C time saving game state Although the degree of advantage is the same as that of the open pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the result of the processing is "normal pattern hit", the present invention is not limited to this.

[1-4-11. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 19 is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols of the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table is used when determining the normal symbol variation pattern (that is, the normal symbol variation pattern determination process executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 in FIG. 43 described later). It is referred to when The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table, and based on the game state and the normal symbol effect selection random number extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4), normal Determine the variation pattern of the design. The normal symbol effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the random number for normal design effect selection is 0 to 99.
In either case, the variable display time of normal symbols is determined to be, for example, 300000 msec. The variable display time of normal symbols in the non-time-saving game state is the longest among the non-time-saving game state, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is one of 0 to 89, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the normal symbol effect selection random value is 90 to 99. , the variable display time of the normal pattern is, for example, 800 mse
c.

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is any one of 0 to 39, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the normal symbol effect selection random value is 40 to 79. In the case of either of
When it is determined to be ec and the random number for normal design effect selection is any one of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal design is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

In addition, in the C time saving game state, when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is any one of 0 to 39, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the normal symbol effect selection random value is 40 to 79. In the case of either of
When it is determined to be ec and the random number for normal design effect selection is any one of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal design is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

In this way, the variable display time of the normal pattern per variable display is a non-time-saving gaming state, A
Among the variable display times of the normal symbols in the time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the A time saving game state is the shortest. Therefore, the A time saving game state is the shortest time until the normal electric accessory 146 is released among the non-time saving game state, A time saving game state, B time saving game state, and C time saving game state.

Further, the expected value of the variable display time of normal symbols in the B time saving game state is the same as the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the C time saving game state, but it is not limited to this.

[1-5. Details of processing related to time saving gaming state]
[1-5-1. Time saving number of times set at time saving hit]
In the above description, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the number of time saving times to be set is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol win determination process is performed. However, it is not limited to this, and the number of time saving times set when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" is determined according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. You may do so.

Further, even in the high probability gaming state in which the probability variation flag is set to ON, the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include "time saving hit". In this case, the main CPU derives the display mode for the time-saving win to the special symbol display unit, but does not execute the control to shift to the time-saving game state, and continues to control to the high-accuracy game state. By the way, for example, like a pachinko game machine called a so-called ST machine, there is known a game machine that turns off a variable probability flag from ON when variable display of special symbols is executed over a specified number of times. In such an ST machine, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol performed in the final game as a high probability game state is "time saving hit", the time saving hit is displayed rather than the process of turning off the probability variation flag. When the processing for deriving the mode is performed later, the main CPU may control to the C time-saving game state after deriving the display mode for the time-saving win.

[1-5-2. Overlap of time-saving game state]
When a plurality of time-saving game states are provided, the time-saving game states may overlap. For example, in the A time saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state overlap. Further, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the C time saving game state and the B time saving game state overlap. When the time saving game state overlaps in this way, the time saving game state may be overlapped and executed, or the time saving game state may not be overlapped (that is, the "time saving win" may be ignored). In addition, so that the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state do not overlap, the A time saving specified number of times, which is the condition for ending the A time saving game state, is smaller than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time saving game state. stipulated.

When the time-saving game state overlaps, a mode in which the time-saving game state is overlapped and a mode in which the time-saving game state is not overlapped will be described below.

[1-5-2-1. Aspect of executing the time-saving game state repeatedly]
As a mode of overlapping and executing the time saving game state when the time saving game state overlaps, the time saving win is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B and the time saving game state C. Sometimes, there is a mode in which the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed, and a mode in which the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-1. A mode in which the C time-saving game state is superimposed on one time-saving game state]
When the "time saving win" is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B and the time saving game state C, the main CPU 201 displays the special symbol display unit 163,
164, the display mode per time saving is derived. In this case, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of one time-saving game state, and adopts as the number of times of time-savings the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed before the end condition of the time-saving game state is satisfied.

For example, in the A time-saving game state, if the "time-saving hit" is won, and the remaining number of time-savings in the A time-saving game state is greater than the number of times of time-saving that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit", the main CPU 2
01 maintains the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, and controls to the time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving games in the A time-saving game state is exhausted unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state is 200 times, the "time saving hit" is elected, and the number of time saving times that can be executed based on this "time saving hit" is 50 In the case of the time, although the display mode of the time saving hit is derived to the special symbol display parts 163 and 164, while maintaining the time saving performance of the A time saving game state, the time saving number from here is as long as the "big hit" is not derived. 200 times. Therefore, even if you win the "time saving hit" in any one of the time saving game state A, B time saving game state and C time saving game state, the number of time saving times and time saving performance It is the same as the case where the A time-saving game state is continued without winning the "hit".

On the other hand, for example, in the A time-saving game state, if the "time-saving hit" is won, and the number of time-savings that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit" is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the A time-saving game state, the main CP
U201, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving gaming state, unless the "jackpot" is derived,
The game is controlled to the time-saving game state until the number of times of time-saving set based on the 'time-saving win' is consumed. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state is 20 times, "time saving hit" is elected, and the number of time saving times that can be executed based on this "time saving hit" is 50
In the case of times, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving gaming state, the number of time-savings from here is 50 times unless a "jackpot" is derived. That is, 2 which is the remaining number of time saving in the A time saving game state
Even if the special symbols are variably displayed 0 times, the special symbols are further variably displayed 30 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time saving performance of the A time saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-2. Aspect in which the B time-saving game state is superimposed on the C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 responds to the display mode derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process). Execute control.

In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol win determination process does not include a small win, but the following description includes the case where the result of the special symbol win determination process includes a small win. .

First, in the ceiling final variation, the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "minor hit" or "losing" will be described.

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, if the remaining number of time saving times in the C time saving game state is larger than the B time saving specified number of times, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the C time saving game state. , Unless a "jackpot" is derived, control to the time-saving game state is performed until the remaining number of time-saving games in the C time-saving game state is exhausted. To give specific numbers, for example,
When the remaining number of time saving in the C time saving game state is 300 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and B
When the specified number of times of time saving is 200 times, while maintaining the time saving performance of the C time saving game state, the number of times of time saving from here is 300 times unless a "big hit" is derived. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the appearance of the number of time saving times and the time saving performance is the same as when the C time saving game state continues without the ceiling counter reaching the ceiling value. .

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving gaming state, if the B time-saving specified number of times is greater than the time-saving remaining number of times in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state. At the same time, unless a "jackpot" is derived, the game state is controlled to the time-saving game state until the B time-saving prescribed number of times is completed. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time saving in the C time saving game state is 20 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the number of time saving times that can be executed in the B time saving game state is 300 times. In the case, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state, the number of time-savings from here is 300 times unless a “jackpot” is derived. That is, even if the variable display of the special pattern is executed over 20 times, which is the remaining number of time saving in the C time saving game state, after that, while maintaining the time saving performance of the C time saving game state, special symbols over 280 times of the difference between the two is further performed.

When the variable display of the special symbols ends in the final ceiling change, the main CPU 201 derives a display mode corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 . That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", the small hit display mode is derived, and when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "losing", the losing display mode is derived. . When the small-hit display mode is derived, the game is controlled to the small-hit game state, but the main CPU 201 keeps the time-saving flag turned on even during the small-hit game state.

Next, in the ceiling final fluctuation, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", that is, in the ceiling final fluctuation, the conditions for transition to the B time saving game state and the transition conditions to the C time saving game state are A case where it is established will be described. In this case, the main CPU 201 starts controlling the B time-saving gaming state before the result of the special symbol win determination process is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, and when the result of the special symbol win determination process is Special symbol display portion 163, 1
Different control can be executed in the case where the control of the B time saving gaming state is started after being derived to 64.

First, when the control of the B time-saving game state is started before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is the special symbol display unit 163,
164 is already controlled to the B time-saving gaming state. Therefore, main C
The PU 201 maintains the time saving performance in the B time saving game state, and unless the “jackpot” is derived, the time saving number of times of the B time saving prescribed number of times and the time saving number of times in the C time saving game state, whichever is larger, is digested. to control the state.

Next, when the control of the B time-saving game state is started after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is the special symbol display unit 163,
164, it has not yet been controlled to the B time-saving game state. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state, and the conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state (for example, derivation of the display mode of the big win, derivation of the display mode of the small win or a specific small win, etc.) are established. Unless otherwise, control is made to the time saving game state until the larger number of times of time saving of the prescribed number of times of B time saving and the number of times of time saving of C time saving game state is exhausted. In this case, when the conditions for ending the time saving game state in which the time saving performance is maintained or executed are established, the time saving game state may be ended.

In addition, when the transition condition to the B time reduction game state and the transition condition to the C time reduction game state are satisfied in the ceiling final fluctuation, the sub CPU 301 performs B time reduction performed only when the transition condition to the B time reduction game state is satisfied. A special display effect different from the transition display effect and the C time saving transition display effect performed when only the condition for transition to the C time saving game state is satisfied may be performed. Alternatively, for example, when the time saving performance of the B time saving game state is maintained, the B time saving transition display effect is performed, and when the time saving performance of the C time saving game state is maintained, the C time saving transition display effect is performed. etc.
Either of the B time reduction transition display effect and the C time reduction transition display effect may be preferentially performed.

In addition, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the ceiling final change is "big hit", the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state, B time saving game To control to a jackpot game state without controlling the state.

[1-5-2-1-3. Time saving performance when executing multiple time saving game states repeatedly]
In the above, the aspect which overlaps and performs C time saving game state on one time saving game state, and the aspect which overlaps and performs B time saving game state on C time saving game state were demonstrated.

In this way, if it is a specification that can be executed by overlapping a plurality of time-saving game states, the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that was previously executed is maintained. In a pachinko machine with such specifications, the time-saving performance of a plurality of time-saving game states that can be superimposed may be different, but the time-saving performance of a plurality of time-saving game states that can be superimposed may be the same. preferable.

For example, in the case of a specification that allows the C time-saving game state to be superimposed on one time-saving game state, it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the one time-saving game state and the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state the same. Further, when the specification is such that the B time-saving game state can be superimposed on the C time-saving game state, it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state and the time-saving performance of the B time-saving game state the same.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine with specifications that allow multiple time-saving gaming states to be executed in an overlapping manner, the time-saving gaming state that can be executed later in addition to the time-saving gaming state that is being executed first is, for example, the time-saving gaming state that is executed first. One time saving performance same as the time saving gaming state and another time saving performance different from this one time saving performance may be provided. Then, when the time-saving game state is executed in addition to the time-saving game state that is being executed first, one time-saving performance is activated, and the time-saving game state is activated as in the case of activating the time-saving game state in the normal game state. If it is not executed repeatedly, other time-saving performances may be activated.

For example, if it is a pachinko game machine with specifications that can be executed by overlapping the B time-saving game state with the C time-saving game state, the time-saving performance of the B time-saving game state is the same as the C time-saving game state, and this one time-saving performance. For example, two time-saving performances with other time-saving performances different from the performance are provided. Then, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, one time-saving performance is activated, and in the normal game state, which is not in any time-saving game state, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, another time-saving performance may be activated.

[1-5-3. Aspect in which the time-saving game state is not repeatedly executed]
As a mode that does not execute the time saving game state repeatedly, there is a mode in which the winning determination process is performed so that the "time saving win" is not included in the lottery target in the time saving game state, and a "time saving win" is included in the lottery target in the time saving game state. A mode (hereinafter referred to as "the latter mode") in which the time-saving game state is not performed repeatedly even if the time-saving game state overlaps is conceivable. As the latter mode, even if winning is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B and the time saving game state C, this is ignored and the time saving game state is repeated. Two modes are conceivable, ie, a non-execution mode and a mode in which even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, this is ignored and the B time saving game state is not repeated. The above two aspects considered as the latter aspect will be described below.

[1-5-3-1. A mode that does not overlap the C time-saving game state with one time-saving game state]
When the "time saving hit" is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B and the time saving game state C, the main CPU 201 displays the special symbol display units 163 and 164 as described above. , derives the display mode per time saving. However, the main CPU 20
1, unless it is a variable display of the last special symbol in one time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as “time-saving final variation”), one time-saving game state without controlling to C time-saving game state based on “time-saving hit” Control to one time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving is digested. In this case, being controlled to one time saving game state (excluding the time saving final variation) is a condition that prevents the transition to the C time saving game state.

On the other hand, if you win the "time saving hit" in the time saving final variation in one time saving game state,
The main CPU 201 determines whether one time-saving game state ends before the display mode of the time-saving hit is drawn to the special symbol display portions 163 and 164, and when the display mode of the time-saving win is the special symbol display portion 163.
, 164 when one time-saving gaming state ends, different control can be executed.

First, when one time-saving gaming state ends before the display mode for the time-saving win is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the main CPU 201 derives the display mode for the time-saving win, and then C
Start control of the time saving game state.

Next, when one time-saving gaming state ends when the time-saving per display mode is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, that is, the derivation of the time-saving per display mode and the end of one time-saving gaming state When performed within the same interrupt process, the main CPU 201 may or may not start control of the C time-saving gaming state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the process of deriving (confirmed display) the display mode for time saving is performed prior to the end process of one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 controls one time saving game state without controlling to the C time saving game state. End the time-saving game state. In this case, performing the process of deriving the display mode for the time saving game prior to the ending process of the time saving game state is a condition that prevents the transition to the C time saving game state.

On the other hand, when the process of deriving (confirmed display) the display mode of the time saving per is performed after the end process of the one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the one time saving game state and controls to the C time saving game state. do. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not maintain the time saving performance of the one time saving game state, but sets the time saving performance of the C time saving game state. That is, the main CPU
201 ends one time saving game state without controlling to C time saving game state if the end processing of one time saving game state is not processed at the time when the display mode for time saving per is derived, and one time saving game state If the end processing of the game state has already been performed, it is controlled to the C time-saving game state.

[1-5-3-2. Aspect in which the B time-saving game state is not superimposed on the C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 responds to the display mode derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process). Execute control.

First, in the ceiling final variation, the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", "minor hit" or "losing" will be described.

In the C time saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination processing in the final ceiling change is "time saving hit", "small hit" or "losing", the main CPU 201 completes the time saving remaining number of times in the C time saving game state. Control to the C time saving game state until it is done.

However, if the remaining number of time saving in the C time saving game state is 0 in the final ceiling fluctuation, the main C
PU201, depending on the processing of the program, there is a case where the control of the B time-saving gaming state is started and a case where it is not started. Specifically, when the end processing of the C time saving game state is performed prior to the start processing of the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state and controls to the B time saving game state. On the other hand, when the end processing of the C time saving game state is performed after the start processing of the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state without controlling to the B time saving game state. That is, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving gaming state without controlling to the B time-saving gaming state if the end processing of the C time-saving gaming state is not processed at the time when the B time-saving gaming state is to be started, and the C time-saving gaming state is terminated. If the end processing of the game state has already been performed, it is controlled to the B time-saving game state. In this case, performing the end processing of the C time saving game state after the start processing of the B time saving game state is a condition that prevents the transition to the B time saving game state.

In the final ceiling change, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is "big hit", the main CPU 201 ends the C short game state and starts control of the big win game state.

[1-6. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be described.
[1-6-1. Main control main processing]
First, referring to FIGS. 20 to 23, the main processing executed by main CPU 201 (
main control main processing) will be described. 20 to 23 are flowcharts showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the power interruption signal is at High level (S
11). It goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table, although not shown, prior to S11.

If it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at High level (NO in S11), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process of S11.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S11 that the power failure signal is at the High level (S11 is Y
ES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S12.

At S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing for the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 (S12). In this process, the ON/OFF state of the backup clear switch 176 and the ON/OFF state of the setting key 174 are saved. That is, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are turned on/off.
The OFF state is stored in the activation control flag area within the main RAM 203 . Also, in this process, the game permission flag is set to OFF. After executing the process of S12, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the activation wait of the sub-control circuit 300 side is performed. The startup waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 12000.07 msec. After executing the process of S13, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S14.

While waiting for activation of the sub-control circuit 300, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, interrupt request signal check processing, WDT output processing when an interrupt request signal is generated, and initialization of various sensors at a predetermined timing. Output processing of the conversion signal may be performed.

In S<b>14 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure before activation (previous time) was a normal power failure. In this process, based on the value stored in the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203, it is determined whether the power interruption is normal or abnormal.

If it is determined in S14 that the power interruption was not normal (NO determination in S14), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S14 that there was a normal power outage (if S14 determines YES), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15). Verification processing of the checksum value of the area is performed (S16)
. After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether the collation result is abnormal.

If the collation result is not abnormal in S17, that is, if it is determined to be normal (S17
is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22. The processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the collation result is abnormal in S17, that is, not normal (
If S17 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

At S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. That is, when both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, N
If the determination is O and both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, and if either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 is off, the determination is YES.

If it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (NO in S18).
determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S21. Note that the processing of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (if S18 determines YES),
The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 turns on the security signal of the external terminal. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs error display processing on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This processing is performed by the I/O port 2 where the signal is output to the performance display monitor 170.
05 output port, set the data for error display. As a result, a predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 lights up to display an error. The main CPU 201 performs S2
After executing 0 operations, an endless loop is entered.

In this way, if the previous power failure was not a normal power failure, or if the checksum value collation result of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 was not normal, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are determined to be on, the first pachinko gaming machine is not allowed to play a game.

Next, the processing of S21 will be described. In S<b>21 , the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating a setting change in the activation control flag area within the main RAM 203 . This processing is performed at the time of abnormal start-up, and stores again the value indicating that the setting has been changed. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S2.
Move to 2.

In S<b>22 , the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs activation state determination processing. In this process, based on the value of the activation control flag stored in the activation control flag area in the main RAM 203,
Determine the current startup state (power failure recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear). Main C
PU201 moves a process to S24, after performing the process of S23.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs RAM setting processing at startup. In this process, the clearing process (volatile area) of the work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags, etc.
For example, work area construction, address setting, etc.) are performed. It should be noted that this processing is performed in common at the time of recovery from power failure and at the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared.
After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S25.

In S<b>25 , the main CPU 201 performs initial setting processing at startup. This process
An initial setting process is performed according to the current startup state (power failure recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clearing). Note that the details of the startup initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24 .
After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt prohibition processing. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs power-off processing. The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process of 27, the process moves to S28. For details of the power interruption process, see Fig. 2.
5 below.

In S28, the main CPU 201 updates the initial random number. In this process, the initial value random numbers of various random number counters (for example, a special symbol jackpot determination random number counter, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S29.
to

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

If it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (NO in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S30.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S29 that the game is permitted (when S29 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes after S26.

In S31, the main CPU 201 saves the register. Main CPU2
After executing the process of S31, 01 shifts the process to S32.

In S<b>32 , the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor total calculation processing. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. In addition, this processing is performed by the main RAM2
03 using an area (outside area) other than the work area in 03. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S32, the process moves to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 restores the registers saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S34.

At S34, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the system cycle time has passed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 ms, which is three times the interrupt cycle (eg, 2 msec).
ec.

If it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO determination in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes after S26.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in S35
determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt disabled section in the main control main process. Main C
After executing the process of S36, the PU 201 shifts the process to S37.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, within the main control main process, before the execution of various processes (for example, the process of S37 ~ S44) related to the game control described later, for example, 6 msec interruption prohibited section (S
26 to S35) is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed every 6 msec (every system period), for example. In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt disabled section is three times the interrupt period has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 updates the system timer. The system timer is a timer that manages the system period (eg, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system periodic management timer area within the working area of the main RAM 203 .
After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing. In this processing, command transmission/reception processing for payout control is mainly performed. The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process of 38, the process moves to S39.

At S39, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol control process. In this processing, processing related to the special symbol game is performed. For details of this special symbol control process, see FIG.
6 below. After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S4.
Move to 0.

At S40, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing. For this process,
Processing related to the normal symbol game is performed. The details of this normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S40, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S
Move to 41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs game operation display unit control processing. In this process, each display section of the LED unit 160 (for example, the first special symbol display section 163, the second
Setting processing of the display data to be output to the special symbol display unit 164, etc.) is performed. Main CPU2
After executing the process of S41, 01 shifts the process to S42.

At S42, the main CPU 201 performs game information data generation processing. In this processing, control processing of the external terminal board pulse signal, processing of setting the output data, processing of generating the test firing test signal, and the like are performed. Note that the process of generating the test-firing test signal is performed using an area (outside area) separate from the work area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs state monitoring processing. In this process, firing position determination processing, game abnormality detection determination processing, payout abnormality detection determination processing, and the like are performed. In the firing position determination process, if there is a change in the firing position (for example, right-handed or left-handed), transmission of a firing position command is reserved. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26, and performs the processes after S26.

[1-6-2. Initial setting processing at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the startup initial setting process performed at S25 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading the activation control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S52.

In S<b>52 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating power failure recovery.

If it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating power failure recovery (S5
2 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S54.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S52 that the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating recovery from power interruption (YES in S52), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs second normal game pre-processing. The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON to enter the game permission state. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S53, the startup initial setting process is terminated, and the process is returned to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation status flag is not a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation, that is, it is a value indicating RAM clearing (NO determination in S54), the main CP
U201 moves the process to S56.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag indicates the setting change or setting confirmation (when S54 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs a setting operation command transmission reservation process. The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S336 in FIG. 46 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 terminates the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

At S56, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the first normal game preprocessing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in a game permission state. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S56, the initial setting process at startup is ended, and the process is returned to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

[1-6-3. Power outage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the power interruption process performed at S27 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of power interruption processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is ON (S
61).

If it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not ON (NO determination in S61), the main CPU 201 terminates the power interruption process, and shifts the process to the main control main process (see FIG. 20).
to FIG. 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is ON (S61 is Y
ES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs checksum value calculation processing. Main C
After executing the process of S62, the PU 201 shifts the process to S63.

In S<b>63 , the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the power failure detection flag value in corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203 . In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag. After executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 executes a RAM access prohibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset waiting process until the power is cut off.

[1-6-4. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol control processing performed at S39 during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 26, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S71. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). Main CPU 201
executes the processing of S71, and then shifts the processing to S72.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process by:
Prior to the process of S71, an address setting process is performed to set the address of the special symbol work area in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control process. Then, when both the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are "0" for a certain period of time or longer, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a demonstration display command. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command,
The sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect.

At S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded at S71 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is waiting for variable display.

If it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S72), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S75.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control number of the special symbol is 0 in S72 (S72 is YES
If the determination is S), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S73.

In S73, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is to start variable display.
That is, it is determined whether or not the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol does not start variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is not reserved (if the determination in S73 is NO), the main CPU 201
moves the process to S74.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved (when S73 determines YES), the main CPU
201 moves the process to S75.

In S74, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is to start variable display.
That is, it is determined whether or not the starting information of the first special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol does not start variable display, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is not reserved (if the determination in S74 is NO), the main CPU 201
ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol is the start of variable display, i.e., the start information of the first special symbol is reserved (when S74 determines YES), the main CPU
201 moves the process to S75.

At S75, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S75, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process, and the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).
reference).

It should be noted that the main CPU 201 sets the interrupt prohibition section, and the special symbol control process (S
71 to S75) are preferably performed within the interrupt disabled section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved as the first pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variator to be given has been described, it is not limited to this. For example, when the starting information of the first special symbol is reserved, the special symbol management process (
S75) may be executed as a priority variable machine, or the first start port 120 or the second start port 1
It may be a sequential variation machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning to 40.

[1-6-5. Special pattern management processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 27, at S75 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26), the main CPU
The special symbol management process executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is "0", the special symbol management process is the second special symbol to be processed when the process of S73 (see FIG. 26) is YES, and the process of S74 (see FIG. 26).
See) is YES determination, the first special symbol is the processing target. Also, if the control state number is "0
, the special symbol management process is performed on the special symbol being executed.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 27 are the control state numbers of the special symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for special symbols is 0 (S8
1).

If it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S81), the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol management process and shifts the process to the special symbol control process (
26).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 in S81 (S81 is YES
If the determination is S), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S82.

At S82, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S83. In addition, the main CP
U201 performs the processing after S83 based on the control state number read in the processing of S82.

In S83, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S8
The process of 3 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S8
The process of 4 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S85.

At S85, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. The process of S85 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S86.

At S86, the main CPU 201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. This process of S86 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S87.

At S87, the main CPU 201 performs a special winning opening opening control process. The process of S87 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S88.

In S88, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot ending process. This process of S88 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S83 to S88, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process,
The processing is returned to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 26).

[1-6-6. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 28, at S83 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
The special symbol variable display start processing executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main CPU 201 first determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "
0” is determined (S91).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" in S91 (S91 is N
If the determination is O), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" in S91 (S9
1 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a special symbol big hit determination random number value. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag to ON when the result of the special symbol win determination processing is a time saving hit, and sets the big win flag to ON when the special symbol win determination processing result is a big win. do. In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol win determination process does not include a small win, but if the pachinko game machine includes a small win in the result of the special symbol win determination process, the special symbol win When the result of the judgment processing is a small hit, the small hit flag is set to ON. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S93, the process is moved to S94. The time saving flag is turned off when shifting to the C time saving game state, and the big win flag is turned off when the big win game state is started. If the pachinko game machine includes a small win as a result of the special symbol win determination process, the small win flag is turned off at the start of the small win game state.

In the special symbol hit determination process (see S93), first, a process for determining whether or not the hit is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined that this process is not a big hit, a process for determining whether or not it is a time-saving hit is performed, If it is determined in this process that it is not a time-saving hit, it is determined to be a loss.

At S94, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93) (for example, a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a loss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) is referred to, and the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S94, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process of judging or determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, big hit). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 13) is referenced, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S94). In addition, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but the number of types of big winnings may be one, and the type of time-saving winnings may also be one. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to providing a plurality of winning types, a plurality of losing types may be provided. In this embodiment, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small hit, but the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include a small hit, and a plurality of types of such small wins may be provided. good. After executing the process of S95, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, referring to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15), for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the reach determination random value or/
And the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random number value for effect selection and the like. It should be noted that the variation pattern table to be referred to when performing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol may be different according to the game state or the like. After executing the process of S96, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S96) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S97, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S98.

At S98, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (Fig. 27 S84) is performed. Main CPU20
1 executes the process of S98, and then moves the process to S99.

At S99, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 (for example, variable probability remaining number, time saving remaining number, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S99, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S100.

In S100, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. This process
Mainly, update processing of various flags (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to management of game state is performed. After executing the process of S100, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section, and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S100), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S101)) during the interrupt prohibited interval. preferably in-house.

[1-6-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 29, at S84 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
The special symbol variable display ending process executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S111).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" in S111 (S111
is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" in S111 (S
111 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S112.

At S112, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S85 in FIG. 27) can be performed after the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be performed. The main CPU 201 performs S11
After executing the process of 2, the process moves to S113.

At S113, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. In addition, the special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.
sent to. After executing the process of S113, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S114.

At S114, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. The number-of-determined-symbols counter is a counter for counting the number of times special symbols are determined (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the count value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 . For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the number of remaining times of variable probability and the number of remaining times of reduced working hours. You can manage numbers. After executing the process of S114, the main CPU 201
The special symbol variable display ending process is ended, and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-6-8. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, referring to FIG. 30, at S85 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
The special symbol game determination processing executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S121).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" in S121 (S121
is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" in S121 (S
121 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S122.

At S122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a big win has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S122, when it is determined that it is a big hit, that is, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win (when S122 is YES), the main CPU 201
The process moves to S123.

On the other hand, in S122, if it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not in a stop display mode indicating a big win (NO determination in S122), the main CPU 201
moves the process to S130.

In S123, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing of the big hit game control processing. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) to be output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6 for both) via the external terminal board 184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S123, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S124. Signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 and the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control of S123, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a variable probability flag, a variable probability counter, a time saving flag, and a time saving counter.

In S124, the main CPU 201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the big winning hole 131 is opened (S125), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 184 (S126).
), the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S127), the game state designation parameter setting process (S128), and the transmission reservation process of the big hit start display command (S12
9) etc. are processed. In addition, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S12
7) is performed to switch the control state number, and after this special symbol game determination process ends, the big winning opening opening preparation process (see S86 in FIG. 27) is performed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

At S130, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Note that the main CPU 201
When the special symbol game end processing is performed, the special symbol game determination processing is terminated, and the processing is returned to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination process (S121 to S130) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[1-6-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S130 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30) will be described. FIG. 31 shows the first
It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving management processing (S131). The details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko game machine. After executing the process of S131, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S132.

At S132, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed.
After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S133.

At S133, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol game end command (
S134) is performed. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S134, the main CP
U201 terminates the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30).

If the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28) is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the variable probability flag or the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the display mode of losing is derived, the game state does not shift.

[1-6-10. Time saving management processing]
Next, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 . FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of time saving management processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S131 during the special symbol game ending processing (see FIG. 31) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs counter update processing (S141). Details of this counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. The main CPU 201, S141
After executing the process of , the process moves to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 performs counter determination processing. The details of this counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. The main CPU 201 performs S142
After executing the process, the time saving management process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 31).

[1-6-11. Counter update process]
Next, referring to FIG. 33, counter update processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 33 shows time saving management processing (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko game machine.
14 is a flowchart showing an example of counter update processing executed by the main CPU 201 in S141 of the process.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time saving counter update process (S151). The details of this time saving counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34 . The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S151, the process is moved to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 201 performs ceiling counter update processing. The details of this ceiling counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S152, the counter update process is terminated, and the process is changed to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32
reference).

[1-6-12. Time saving counter update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 34 shows counter update processing (FIG. 3) in the first pachinko gaming machine.
3) is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S151.

In addition, the time saving counter update process shown in FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a process when a plurality of time saving game states are superimposed and executed when a plurality of time saving game states overlap.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S161). In this process, YES determination is made when both the time saving flag ON and the time saving counter being greater than 0 are satisfied, and NO determination is made if either one is not satisfied.

The time saving flag is set to ON when shifting to the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state. In addition, when shifting to the high certainty gaming state, the probability variation flag is set to ON.

The time-saving counter is in the A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, or C time-saving game state,
Shows how many times each is executed.

When the condition for shifting to the A time saving game state, B time saving game state or/and C time saving game state is satisfied, a time saving counter for the time saving game state in which the transition condition is satisfied is set.

In this embodiment, the time saving counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol ends, and the time saving game state is terminated when the time saving counter reaches 0, but this is not the only method. Instead, an addition system may be adopted in which the time saving counter is added when the variable display of the special symbols is completed, and the time saving game state is ended when the time saving counter reaches the set time saving number. In addition, instead of updating (subtracting or adding) the time-saving counter when the variable display of the special design ends, the time-saving counter is updated at the start of the variable display of the special design, and when the time-saving counter becomes 0 ( The time saving game state may be ended when the time saving counter is set (in the case of the subtraction method) or the number of time saving counters is set (in the case of the addition method).

In S161, when it is determined that both the time saving flag ON and the time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S161), the main CPU 201
The time saving counter update process is ended, and the process is returned to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S161 that the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S161 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter (S162). After executing the process of S162, the main CPU 201
The process moves to S163.

In S<b>163 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving mode=3 and the C time saving counter is greater than zero. In this process, when the time saving mode is 3 and the C time saving counter is larger than 0, a YES determination is made. If the determination in S163 is YES, the main CPU 20
1 moves the process to S164.

In addition, the C time saving counter is a counter which is set when the transition condition to the C time saving game state is satisfied during the time saving game state. Although not shown in the flow chart, the C time reduction counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the B time reduction counter, which will be described later, is set.

Time-saving mode is a flag that is set when a plurality of time-saving gaming states are superimposed and executed. In the present embodiment, the time saving mode is configured with, for example, 2 bits, and when the C time saving game state is superimposed on the previously executed time saving game state, "time saving mode=3" is set.
Further, when the B time-saving game state is superimposed on the time-saving game state that is being executed first, the "time-saving mode=2" is set.

On the other hand, in S163, when it is determined that both the time saving mode = 3 and the C time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (when S163 is NO), the main CPU 20
1 moves the process to S165.

In S164, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C short working hours counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S164, the process moves to S165.

In S<b>165 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving mode=2 and the B time saving counter is greater than zero. In this process, when the time saving mode is 2 and the B time saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If the determination in S165 is YES, the main CPU 20
1 moves the process to S166.

In addition, the B time saving counter is a counter that is set when the transition condition to the B time saving game state is established during the time saving game state (in the present embodiment, during the C time saving game state). Although not shown in the flowchart, the B time saving counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the C time saving counter is set.

On the other hand, in S165, when it is determined that both the time saving mode = 2 and the B time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (when S165 is NO), the main CPU 20
1 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In S166, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the B time saving counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S166, the time saving counter update process is terminated, and the process is returned to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In addition, although not shown, when the C time reduction counter = 0 as a result of performing the processing of S164, or when the B time reduction counter = 0 as a result of performing the processing of S166, the main CPU 201 Set the mode to off (=0).

By the way, when a plurality of time-saving game states are overlapped and executed, not only two time-saving game states are overlapped, but three or more time-saving game states may be overlapped and executed. In this case, since the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state do not overlap as described above, the case where three or more time saving game states overlap is the A time saving game state or the B time saving game state. It corresponds to the case where one or more C time-saving gaming states overlap, and the case where three or more C time-saving gaming states overlap.

[1-6-13. Ceiling counter update process]
Next, the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 shows counter update processing (FIG. 3) in the first pachinko gaming machine.
3) is a flow chart showing an example of the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S152.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (S171). The ceiling count prohibition flag is a flag that is set on when the variable probability flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. i.e.
If the probability variation flag is off and the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value,
The ceiling count prohibition flag is off. The ceiling counter value is stored in the main RAM 203 .

In addition, the ceiling value is predetermined as a value unique to the pachinko game machine as a transition condition to the B time-saving game state. However, instead of this, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling value when the jackpot game state ends, when the backup clear process is performed, when the dedicated operation means for resetting the value of the ceiling counter is operated, etc. You may make it process.

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (if the determination in S171 is NO), that is, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is OFF (determined as YES in S171), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S172.

At S172, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter.
After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process,
The processing is returned to the counter update processing (see FIG. 33).

[1-6-14. Counter judgment processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 36, counter determination processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 36 shows time saving management processing (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko game machine.
10 is a flow chart showing an example of counter determination processing executed by the main CPU 201 in S142 of FIG.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving transition determination processing (S181). The details of this time saving shift determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37 . The main CPU 201 performs S181
After executing the process of , the process moves to S182.

In S<b>182 , the main CPU 201 performs time saving transition processing. The details of this time-saving transition processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 38 . After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S183.

In S<b>183 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving counter is smaller than one.

In S183, when it is determined that the time saving counter is not smaller than 1 (S183 is N
O determination), that is, when the time saving counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 201 causes the process to be S
Move to 185.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S183 that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 (YES in S183), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S184.

In S184, the main CPU 201 turns off the time saving flag. Main CPU2
After executing the process of S184, 01 moves the process to S185.

In addition, when it is determined that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 in S183 (S183 is Y
In the case of ES determination), both the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter should be less than 1 (that is, should be 0). However, in view of the possibility that some trouble may occur in executing the processing by the main CPU 201, for example, if the B time reduction counter or the time reduction counter is 1 or more despite the determination being YES in S183 , an abnormality warning may be output, or other abnormality processing may be executed. Also, instead of or in addition to this abnormal time process, when S183 is determined as YES, not only turn off the time saving flag (see S184), but also reset the B time saving counter and C time saving counter. You may make it match|compatibility with a counter, a B time saving counter, and a C time saving counter.

At S185, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 executes transmission reservation processing of the time saving shift command (S186
)I do. In addition, the time-saving transition command transmitted in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S186, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-15. Time reduction shift determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the time reduction transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. In this process, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, a determination process for shifting to the B time-saving game state is performed. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of time reduction transition determination processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S181 during the counter determination processing (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the variable probability flag is off (S191).
.

In S191, if it is determined that the variable probability flag is not off (NO determination in S191), that is, if the variable probability flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction transition determination process, and shifts the process to the counter determination process (Fig. 36). That is, when the variable probability flag is ON, it is possible to prevent the transition to the B time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, in S191, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is off (S191 is YES
If the determination is S), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling counter is the ceiling value.

When it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is not the ceiling value (NO determination in S192), the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is the ceiling value (when S192 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON. After executing the process of S193, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling flag to ON. The ceiling flag is a flag indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S195.

At S195, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter. Main CPU
After executing the process of S195, 201 ends the time reduction transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-16. Time reduction transition processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the time-saving transition processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 38 shows counter determination processing (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko game machine.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition process performed by main CPU201 by S182 of inside.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the variable probability flag is off (S202).
.

In S202, if it is determined that the variable probability flag is not off (if the determination in S202 is NO), that is, if the variable probability flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition processing, and shifts the processing to the counter determination processing (FIG. 36 reference). By doing so, when the probability variation flag is ON, neither the B time saving game state nor the C time saving game state can be started.

On the other hand, in S202, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is off (S202 is YES
S determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON.

If it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is not on (NO in S203), that is, if the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 proceeds to S206.
to

On the other hand, when it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is ON (YES in S203)
S determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 201 executes a B time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the B time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of time reductions to be set in the B time reduction counter, setting the time reduction mode to 2, time reduction performance and the like are determined. Main CPU
201 moves the process to S208 after executing the process of S205.

In addition, the number of times of time saving set in the B time saving counter is a predetermined number of times. again,
Among the time-saving performances, the winning probability of "normal design per" is based on the normal design hit determination table (Fig. 16
reference). In addition, among the time saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18). It is as it should be. Furthermore, among the time saving performances, the variable display time of normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S206, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving hit flag is ON.

In S206, if it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON (NO determination in S206), that is, if the time saving hitting flag is OFF, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process, and performs the counter determination process ( 36).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S206 that the time saving hit flag is ON (S206 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 201 executes a C time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the C time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of times of time saving to be set in the C time saving counter, setting the time saving mode to 3, time saving performance and the like are determined. Main CPU
201 moves the process to S208 after executing the process of S207.

In addition, the number of times of time saving set in the C time saving counter is a hit type determination table (for example, FIG. 1
3), and is determined according to the selected symbol command. Further, among the time-saving performances, the winning probability of the "normal symbol win" is as shown in the normal symbol win determination table (see FIG. 16). In addition, among the time saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18). It is as it should be. Furthermore, among the time saving performances, the variable display time of normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S208, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving setting process. The details of this time saving setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S208, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving shift process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-17. Time saving setting processing]
Next, the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 39 . FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 at S208 during the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S211).
.

When it is determined in S211 that the time saving flag is ON (when S211 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S212.

If S211 is YES determination, the probability variation flag is off, for example, when the B time-saving gaming state is repeatedly executed while the C time-saving gaming state is being executed first (ceiling counter = ceiling value case), or when the C time-saving game state is executed in a state where the A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, or C time-saving game state is executed first (when winning the “time-saving hit”) is equivalent. do.

In addition, although not shown, when the B time-saving gaming state is executed while the C time-saving gaming state is executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time-saving mode = 2",
The B time saving counter determined in S205 is set. In addition, when the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is executed first, and the C time saving game state is executed repeatedly, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode = 3". Along with this, the C time saving counter determined in S207 is set.

When it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON in S211 (NO determination in S211)
That is, when the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S214.

In S212, the main CPU 201 compares the current time-saving counter (remaining number of time-savings in the previously executed time-saving game state) with the new number of time-savings (the number of time-savings determined in S205 or S207), and compares the current time-saving counter. It is determined whether or not the time saving counter is smaller than the new number of times of time saving.

In S212, if it is determined that the current time-saving counter is not smaller than the new number of times of time-saving (if the determination in S212 is NO), that is, if the current time-saving counter is greater than the new number of times of time-savings, the main CPU 201 will Terminate the setting process and change the process to time-saving transition process (
38).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S212 that the current time saving counter is greater than the new number of times of time saving (when S212 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving counter resetting process. In this process, when the B time-saving game state is repeatedly executed while the C time-saving game state is executed first, or when the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, or the C time-saving game state is executed first. When the C time-saving game state is repeatedly executed in the state where it is, the larger one of the current value of the time-saving counter (that is, the number of remaining time-savings) and the new number of time-savings is reset as a new time-saving counter. . However, even if the time saving counter resetting process (S213) is performed, the main CPU 2
01 does not reset the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter. After executing the process of S213, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process, and shifts the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 38).
back to

In addition, when the B time-saving game state is repeatedly executed in the state where the C time-saving game state is executed first, or when the A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, or C time-saving game state is executed first , the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the previously executed time saving game state. That is, the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that was executed earlier is changed to the time-saving performance of the new time-saving game state, or the time-saving game corresponding to the larger one of the current time-saving counter and the new time-saving number of times It will not be changed to the time saving performance of the state.

The time-saving performance, as described above, is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to a winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment), , the variable display time of normal symbols, and/or the opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time, etc.) of normal electric accessories 146, and the like.

By the way, in this embodiment, by providing the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter, it is possible to manage that the two time-saving game states are being overlapped internally. Then, in the time-saving counter resetting process (S213), the larger one of the current value of the time-saving counter and the new number of times of time-savings is reset as a new time-savings counter. However, even if the two time-saving gaming states are executed internally, the time-saving performance that appears superficially (that the player can grasp) is the two time-saving gaming states that are internally overlapped. Among them, it is only the time saving performance for any one time saving game state. Therefore, without managing that the two time-saving game states are being executed internally (
That is, without providing B time-saving counter and C time-saving counter), when executing multiple time-saving gaming states repeatedly, the larger one of the current time-saving counter value and the new time-saving number of times You may make it reset as a time-saving counter.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving mode setting process. This process is
When 211 is NO determination, that is, when executing by shifting from the non-time-saving game state to the B time-saving game state (when the ceiling counter = ceiling value), or when the non-time-saving game state is changed to the C time-saving game state It is a process that is performed when it is executed (when it is elected to "per time reduction"). In this process, B time reduction control mode determination process (S205) or C time reduction control mode determination process (S2
07) The number of times of time saving and the time saving performance determined in 07) are set. The main CPU 201 performs S21
After executing the process of 4, the process moves to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag to ON. Main C
After performing the process of S215, PU201 complete|finishes a time saving setting process, and returns a process to a time saving transition process (FIG. 38).

Thus, in the above-described time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. going to In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko game machine that includes a small hit in the result of the hit determination process of the hit determination process, the first in the final ceiling fluctuation The result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a small hit. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol in the final ceiling variation is a small hit, the main CPU 201, based on the end of the small hit game state, B
It is preferable to perform a process of shifting to a time-saving gaming state.

Further, in the above-described time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the main CPU20
1, the transition processing to the B time saving game state is performed when the variable display of the special pattern as the final ceiling change is completed, but it is not limited to this, and the variable display of the special pattern as the final ceiling change is started. You may make it perform the transition process to B time saving game state based on having done. In particular, in the first pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling change, B time saving game It is preferable to perform state transition processing. This is because, when the variable display of the special pattern as the final ceiling change is completed, if the transition to the B time-saving game state is made, during the variable display of one of the special patterns as the final ceiling change, the other special pattern is variable. This is because, when the display is started, the other variable display of the special symbols cannot receive the benefits of the B time-saving game state, and there is a possibility that the interest is lowered. In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, variable display of special symbols is not performed with a long variation such as 600000 msec. However, in a pachinko game machine capable of variable display of special symbols with such a long variation, transition processing to the B time-saving game state is performed based on the start of variable display of special symbols as the final ceiling variation. As a result, delay in starting the B time-saving game state can be avoided even when variable display of the special symbol, which is the final ceiling variation, is performed in a long variation.

In addition, in the time saving management process described above with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the B time saving control mode determination process (S205) as a process related to the transition to the B time saving game state is changed to the C time saving game state. (See S203 to S207 in FIG. 38), but it is not limited to this. For example, C time saving control mode determination processing (S207) as a process related to the transition to the C time saving gaming state
B time-saving control mode determination processing (S205
).

Further, in the ceiling counter update process described above with reference to FIG. 35, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (NO determination in S171 of FIG. 35), the ceiling counter is not updated. can't For example, in a ST machine or a pachinko game machine that performs a variable probability drop lottery, even if the variable probability flag is ON, the ceiling counter may be updated when the variable display of the special symbol is performed. In this case, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the transition to the B time-saving game state is not performed, and when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variable counter becomes the ceiling value, the transition to the B time-saving game state may be made. . In this case, the main CPU 201
When the difference between the ceiling counter and the variable probability counter becomes the ceiling value, the process of shifting to the B time-saving game state is performed.

In addition, it is preferable that the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state, be within a predetermined range (for example, 2.5 to 3.0 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off. In this embodiment, for example, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off is 1/319 (if the set value is 1), so the ceiling value is preferably within the range of 319×2.5 to 319×3.0 (times).

In addition, it is preferable that the upper limit of the B time-saving prescribed number of times, which is the end condition of the B time-saving gaming state, is up to a prescribed multiple (for example, 3.8 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off.
Similarly, the upper limit of the C time-saving specified number of times, which is the end condition of the C time-saving gaming state, is up to the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off by a specified number (for example, the denominator of the jackpot probability of 3. up to 8 times). In this embodiment, since the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off is 1/319 (when the set value is 1), both the prescribed number of B time reduction and the prescribed number of C time reduction are approximately 1212 (319 × 3.8) is preferably set as the upper limit.
In addition, it is not essential to set the upper limit of the B time saving prescribed number of times and the upper limit of the C time saving prescribed number of times to the same value.

By the way, as in the first pachinko game machine, in the case of a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values with different jackpot probabilities such as setting 1 to setting 6, as described above , Time saving per probability is a common probability for all set values. In such a case, the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state, is set to the jackpot probability (
When the denominator of the probability variation flag is off) is multiplied by a specified number (eg, 3.0),
The ceiling value will differ according to the set value, and there is a risk that the set value will be seen through by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of which set value is set, the ceiling value is determined by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (if the variable probability flag is off) by a specified number, It is preferable to use the same value regardless of the set value.

[1-6-18. Modified example related to time saving management processing]
In addition, in the above-described time-saving management processing (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving management processing of the present embodiment") described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the ceiling counter update processing (see FIG. 35) is (see FIG. 31). Further, the processing related to the transition to the B time saving game state is given priority over the processing related to the transition to the C time saving game state. Furthermore, a transition flag (ceiling flag) to the B time-saving game state and a transition flag (time-saving hit flag) to the C time-saving game state are provided separately, and when the ceiling flag is on, it is shifted to the B time-saving game state, When the time saving hit flag is ON, it is made to shift to the C time saving game state. However, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process, the priority of the transition to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state, the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state Regarding whether to make the transition flag separate or common, it is not limited to the above,
Time saving management processing can be performed in various variations.

For example, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to when the fluctuation is stopped, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to when the fluctuation is stopped, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided separately.

Also, even if the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the time of stopping the fluctuation, and after confirming that the "time saving hit" is not elected when reaching the ceiling, it is shifted to the B time saving game state. good.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set at the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set at the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set at the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided as a common flag.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set at the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided as a common flag.

Furthermore, when a plurality of time-saving game states are not executed repeatedly, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time-saving counter when the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0; should not be subtracted.

[1-7. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 40, at S86 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
The preparation process for opening the big winning opening executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S251).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" in S251 (S251
is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" in S251 (S
251 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S252.

At S252, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is the main RA
It is stored in a predetermined area in M203. After executing the process of S252, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

When it is determined in S253 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (S253 is Y
ES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S254. On the other hand, if it is determined in S253 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S253)
, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S257.

At S254, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In this way, by performing the processing (S254) for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, the jackpot end processing (Fig. 27 S88) is performed. The main CPU 201 performs S2
After executing the process of 54, the process moves to S255.

At S255, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process.
After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (S25
6). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the process of S256, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S257, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S258.

At S258, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 131, the number of prize balls when winning the large winning opening 131, etc. are set. . The number of rounds corresponds to the number of openings of the big winning opening 131 . It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude the case where the big winning opening is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of opening and closing times of the big winning opening are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S258, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S259.

At S259, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, the process of generating the opening/closing control data for the big winning opening 131 is performed. The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process of 259, the process moves to S260.

At S260, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S260) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (see S87 in FIG. 27) is performed. After executing the process of S260, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S261.

At S261, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process.
After executing the process of S261, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S262.

At S262, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the display command during opening of the big winning opening. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is the effect control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG.
It is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 . After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-1. Large winning opening control process]
Next, referring to FIG. 41, at S87 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
The big winning opening opening control process executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S271).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" in S271 (S271
is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" in S271 (S
271 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S272.

At S272, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole 131 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6) for counting the winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 131 is the maximum winning number. The value of the big winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 .

When it is determined in S272 that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 131 is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S272), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S273.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S272 that the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole 131 is the maximum winning number (when S272 determines YES), the main CPU 201 advances the process to S
274.

At S273, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 131 has passed. In this process, various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S258 in FIG. 40)
It is determined whether the maximum open time set in .

If it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 131 has not passed (
If the determination in S273 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening opening control process,
The process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 131 has passed (when S273 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S274.

At S<b>274 , the main CPU 201 performs closing setting processing for the big winning opening 131 . After executing the process of S274, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S275.

At S275, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the special symbol control state number to "3". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2
75) is performed to switch the control state number, and after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (see S86 in FIG. 27) is performed again. After executing the process of S275, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S276.

At S276, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process.
After executing the process of S276, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S277.

In S277, the main CPU 201 performs an inter-round display command transmission reservation process. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S277, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-2. Jackpot end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 42, at S88 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
The jackpot end processing executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" in S281 (S281
is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot ending process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" in S281 (S281
is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S282.

At S282, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (eg, variable probability flag, time saving flag, etc.) set and various counters (
For example, a process of setting or resetting the value of a variable probability counter, a short working hours counter, a fixed number of symbols counter, a round counter, a big winning opening winning counter, etc.) is performed. Main CPU20
1 moves the process to S283 after executing the process of S282.

At S283, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the processing of S283, the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot end processing and returns to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-7-3. Normal symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. Needless to say, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 43, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal symbol start condition is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. The numbers (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flow chart shown in FIG. 43 are normal symbol control state numbers. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. For convenience, each process shown in FIG. 43 is not shown as a subroutine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the wait time for normal symbols is 0 (S2
91).

When it is determined in S291 that the wait time for the normal symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S291), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process, and shifts the process to S41 (FIG. 2).
3).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S291 that the wait time for the normal symbol is 0 (when S291 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S292.

At S292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S292, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S293. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S293 based on the control state number read in the process of S292.

At S293, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S293 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0".
In this normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 201 performs the normal symbol hit determination process, the normal symbol variation pattern determination process, and the normal symbol hit determination process. 146 opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time) setting processing is performed. In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CP
U201 moves the process to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S294 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1".
In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when ending variable display of normal symbols. In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201
The process moves to S295.

At S295, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This S29
The process of 5 is a process performed when the control state number of normal symbols is "2". In this normal design game determination process, the determination process of the normal design derivation result (for example, normal design hit or loss) is performed. In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU
201 moves the process to S296.

At S296, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric accessory release process. This S29
Process 6 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the normal electric accessory 146 is opened in a predetermined manner. In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S
Move to 297.

In S297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol per end processing. This S29
The process of 7 is a process performed when the control state number of normal symbols is "4". When the normal symbol per end process ends, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process,
The processing is returned to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20-23).

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the hit determination table for normal symbols (see FIG. 16),
A random number for normal symbol hit determination is generated in a range (width) of 0 to 99, for example, and 0 to 79 is used as normal symbol hit determination value data (in the case of non-time-saving game state). The probability per normal pattern is
Since it is determined by the number of normal symbol hit determination value data with respect to the total random numbers of the normal symbol hit determination random numbers, for example, the normal symbol hit probability is 80/100 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the probability per normal symbol is different between when the time reduction control is executed and when the time reduction control is not executed, but it may be the same or substantially the same. In addition, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 600000 msec in a non-time-saving game state in which time-saving control is not executed, whereas in a game state in which time-saving control is executed, for example, 1000
It only runs for a short time, relative to msec. Thus, when the time saving control is executed, the execution frequency of the normal electric accessary product opening process, that is, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is increased.

[1-7-4. External maskable interrupt processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 44, external maskable interrupt processing executed under the control of main CPU 201 will be described. This processing is interrupt processing that is performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, when power is cut off. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S301). Main C
After executing the process of S301, the PU 201 shifts the process to S302.

At S<b>302 , the main CPU 201 reads the state of a predetermined input port of the I/O port 205 . For the predetermined input ports mentioned above, for example, the states of power interruption detection line, backup clear switch line, sensor abnormality detection line, radio wave sensor line, open detection line, magnetic sensor line, vibration sensor line, solenoid monitoring sensor line, etc. are set. is an input port that After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S30.
Move to 3.

In S<b>303 , the main CPU 201 determines whether power failure is detected.

If it is determined in S303 that the power failure has not been detected (NO determination in S303), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined in S303 that power interruption has been detected (if S303 is YES), the main CPU 201 causes the process to proceed to S30.
Move to 4.

In S304, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area within the work area of the main RAM 203 . Main CP
After executing the process of S304, U201 shifts the process to S305.

In S305, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing of the protection register saved in S301. After executing the process of S305, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 terminates the external maskable interrupt process.

[1-7-5. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 45, system timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt cycle of 2 msec, for example, will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S311).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off (
S312). If it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, the power failure is detected) (NO determination in S312), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, the power failure is not detected) (YES in S312), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After that, the main CPU
201 reads the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 (S314), and shifts the process to S315.

At S315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in the game permitted state based on, for example, the value of the activation control flag. The start-up control flag is a flag for determining which of power-off recovery, setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, and the like, the start state at the time of power-on. For example, in the case of power failure recovery, it is determined to be in the game permitted state, and in the case of setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, etc., it is determined not to be in the game permitted state.

The activation control flag is composed of a combination of on/off information of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, power failure recovery, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the setting is changed.
If the backup clear switch 176 is off and the setting key 174 is on, the setting is confirmed.
If the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, it is determined that the RAM is cleared.

When it is determined that the game is not permitted in S315 (when S315 determines NO)
, the main CPU 201 performs setting control processing (S316). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed within the system timer interrupt process performed at intervals of, for example, 2 msec, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. After executing the setting control process (S316), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326. Note that S3
Details of the setting control process of No. 16 will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game is not permitted (NO determination in S315), the main CPU 201 prohibits the shooting of game balls from the shooting device 6 (see FIG. 6), sets a specific switch (for example, the setting key 174, the backup clear switch 176). etc.), it is preferable to set the disabling of various switches, prohibition of payout of prize balls from the payout device 82, and the like.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S315 that the game is permitted (when S315 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S317.

In S317, the main CPU 201 executes processing for adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt disabled sections during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).
03 is stored in the interrupt counter area in the work area. After executing the process of S317, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S318.

In S318, the main CPU 201 updates the interrupt period timer. After executing the process of S318, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S319. The interrupt cycle timer is a timer for interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec) management, and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area within the work area of the main RAM 203 .

In S319, the main CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, special symbol jackpot judgment random number counters, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined period (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to secure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important factors related to the payout of balls.
After executing the process of S319, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S320.

In S320, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. The details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S320, the process moves to S321.

In S321, the main CPU 201 performs winning information command setting processing. In this process, a winning information command (payout information) setting process is performed. The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process of 321, the process moves to S322.

At S322, the main CPU 201 performs effect control command transmission processing. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 . After executing the process of S322, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S323.

In S323, the main CPU 201 performs register save processing. Main CPU2
01 moves the process to S324 after executing the process of S323.

In S324, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor control processing. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6), and the like are performed. The data stored in this process is stored in an area (outside the area) different from the work area in which the data necessary for the progress of the game is stored, that is, in the area to be backed up, even if the RAM is cleared, for example. data is stored in an area that is not cleared. After executing the process of S324, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S325.

In S325, the main CPU 201 restores the registers saved in S323. After executing the process of S325, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326.

In S326, the main CPU 201 restores the protection register saved in S311, and terminates the system timer interrupt process.

[1-7-6. Setting control processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 46, the setting control process performed at S316 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 46, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag indicates a setting change (S331).

If it is determined in S331 that the value of the activation control flag indicates a setting change (S
331 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs setting change processing (S332).
The details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. Setting change process (S33
After executing 2), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S331 that the value of the activation control flag does not indicate a setting change (NO determination in S331), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S333.

In S333, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag indicates confirmation of setting.

If it is determined in S333 that the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating confirmation of setting (S
333 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs setting confirmation processing (S334).
The details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. Setting confirmation process (S33
After executing 4), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S333 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating setting confirmation, that is, if it is determined that the RAM is cleared (NO determination in S333), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S337.

In S335, the main CPU 201 performs setting operation display processing. This process
Currently set values are displayed. The main CPU 201 performs S335
, the process proceeds to S336.

At S336, the main CPU 201 performs effect control command transmission processing. In this process, the command (initialization command, power failure recovery command, or setting operation command) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S332), setting confirmation process (S334), or initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 25) is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 . The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S336, the process moves to S337.

In S337, the main CPU 201 performs WDT (watchdog timer) output processing. In this process (WDT output process), the WDT clear register address read process, the WD
Clear processing of T and restart processing of WDT are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is performed as appropriate. After the process of S337, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45).

[1-7-7. Setting change process]
Next, referring to FIG. 47, the setting change process performed in S332 during the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S341). This processing is performed by reading information set in the input port of the I/O port 205 .

If it is determined in S341 that the backup clear switch 176 has not been pressed (NO in S341), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S343. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (YES in S341)
If the determination is S), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S342.

In S<b>342 , the main CPU 201 performs update processing within the set value range. Main C
After executing the process of S342, the PU 201 shifts the process to S343.

In this embodiment, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176 in the setting change process. You may enable it to change a setting value by operating.

At S343, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key 174 is turned off (S343).

If it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO in S343), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns to the setting control process (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, if it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (YES in S343), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S344.

In S344, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, as described above, when the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in the game permission state. After executing the first normal game pre-processing (S344), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change processing and returns the processing to the setting control processing (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-8. Setting confirmation process]
Next, referring to FIG. 48, the setting confirmation process performed at S334 during the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the setting key 174 is turned off (S3
51). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S343 in the above-described setting change process (see FIG. 47).

If it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO determination in S351), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (when S351 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs second normal game pre-processing (S352).
The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Incidentally, as described above, when the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in the game permission state. After executing the second normal game pre-processing (S352), the main CPU 201
The setting confirmation process is ended, and the process is returned to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-9. First normal game pre-processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 49, the first normal game pre-processing performed at S344 during the setting change processing (see FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this first normal game pre-processing is also carried out as the initial setting processing when the RAM is cleared in the initial setting processing at startup (see FIG. 24) when none of the recovery from power failure, setting change and setting confirmation is performed. .

The main CPU 201 first performs RAM setting processing during initialization (S361). In this process, an area (hereinafter referred to as "
"backup area") is cleared (for example, work area construction, address setting, etc.) is performed. Note that the area in which data is stored is not cleared in the performance display monitor control process (see S324 in FIG. 45). Also, in this process, initial data is generated, and each of the generated initial data is stored in the constructed work area in the main RAM 203 .
That is, the data backed up when the power is cut off is erased, and the game state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown, in this processing, the game can be started by returning the game state to the initialized state, and the game permission flag is set to ON to enter the game permission state. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S361), the main C
PU201 moves a process to S362.

In S362, the main CPU 201 performs initialization command transmission reservation processing. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the processing of S362, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal game pre-processing. When the first normal game pre-processing is finished, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in a game permission state.

[1-7-10. Second normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the second normal game pre-processing performed at S352 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 48) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of power failure recovery in the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 24).

The main CPU 201 first performs a RAM setting process when power is restored (S371). In this process, for example, data stored in the backup area within the main RAM 203 is read, and the read data is stored in the constructed work area within the main RAM 203 . The above data are, for example, game state information, ON/OFF states of special symbol and normal symbol hit flags, pending number information, and other various information necessary for the progress of the game. That is, by returning the data backed up at the time of power failure to the work area in the main RAM 203 again, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power failure. Although not shown,
In this process, the game can be started by returning to the same game state as before the power failure, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in the game permission state. After executing the RAM setting process (S371) at power failure recovery, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S372.

In S372, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable probability flag is ON. This processing is performed by reading the data stored in the work area in the main RAM 203 .

When it is determined in S372 that the variable probability flag is not ON (NO in S372), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S374.

on the other hand. When it is determined that the probability variation flag is on in S372 (S372 is YES
determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S373.

In S373, the main CPU 201 sets the variable probability notification flag to ON. This is done in order to notify the state of the variable probability flag at the time of power failure recovery. When the probability variation notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, a probability variation notification LED (not shown) to be lit. As a result, it is possible to visually recognize whether or not the variable probability flag is on when power is restored. After executing the process of S373, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3.
Move to 74.

In S374, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the power failure recovery command.
The power failure recovery command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the processing of S374, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal game pre-processing.

[1-7-11. Switch input detection process]
FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing by the main CPU 201 . The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 201 executes starting opening winning detection processing (S381). After executing the process of S381, the main CPU 201
The process moves to S382. The start opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs general winning opening passage detection processing (S382). In the general winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc., is set at the time of winning to the general winning opening 122 . After executing the process of S382, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S383.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a special winning opening passage detection process (S383). In the special winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc., is set when a prize is won in the special winning opening 131 . After executing the process of S383, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs ball passing detection processing (S384). In the ball passage detection process, based on the fact that the passage gate switch 127 has detected that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 126, various random numbers for normal symbols (random numbers for hit determination of normal symbols, etc.) are extracted. . It should be noted that the main RAM 203 stores various random numbers extracted based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 126 (random numbers for hit determination of normal symbols, etc.), and reserves the normal symbols until the conditions for starting the normal symbols are satisfied. It has a starting memory area (1) to a normal symbol starting memory area (4). Then, in the ball passing detection process, it is extracted based on whether or not there is an empty area in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to the normal symbol start storage area (4), that is, the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126. It is also determined whether or not the number of reserved normal symbols is, for example, less than four. After completing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-7-12. Starting entrance winning detection process]
FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing an example of a start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 201 . The starting opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described switch input detection process.

As shown in FIG. 52, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (S391).

When it is determined that the game ball is not detected by the first starting port switch 121 (S391 is N
If the determination is O), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (S391 is Y
ES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S392.

In S392, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, the first special symbol jackpot determination random number, the first special symbol symbol random number, the first special symbol ready-to-win determination random number, and the first special symbol Various random numbers such as random numbers for effect selection) are extracted, and processing is performed to set payout information according to the first start opening winning prize. After executing the process of S392, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S393.

In S393, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols extracted based on the winning to the first starting port 120 is less than four, for example. Main RAM
203 is a first special symbol start storage area (1) to hold various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 120 until the start condition is satisfied. (4), and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). Note that the main RAM 203 is
In addition to the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), there is also a first special symbol start storage area (0), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved first special symbols is not less than four, that is, the upper limit is four (S393
is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved first special symbols is less than 4 (when S393 is YES determination)
, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S394.

At S394, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of the first special symbols. After executing the process of S394, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S395.

At S395, the main CPU 201 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 120 until the first special symbol variation start condition is satisfied.
03 is stored. As a result, the variable display of the first special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S395, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S396.

In S396, the main CPU 201 performs prefetch determination processing. This process is a process of determining a variation pattern of special symbols, performing a hit determination process, etc., using the random number value extracted in S392 prior to the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28). again,
It is also determined whether or not the prefetch flag is set.

Note that the look-ahead determination process may be performed at any timing between the time when the random number value is extracted in S392 and the time when the special symbol hit determination process is executed, but the variable display of the special symbol is started. Considering that the sub-control circuit 300 performs the look-ahead effect before and after the process of S395, for example, it is preferable to perform the process before and after. After executing the process of S396, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S397.

At S397, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command for the first special symbol. The winning command of the first special symbol is a command including information to increase the reserved number of the first special symbol by 1, the variation pattern information of the first special symbol (that is, the variation pattern command of the special symbol), etc. In this process, The winning command of the first special symbol reserved for transmission is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S397, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

At S<b>398 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second starting port switch 141 has detected a game ball.

When it is determined that the game ball is not detected by the second starting port switch 141 (S398 is N
In the case of O determination), the main CPU 201 ends the start opening winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 141 (S398 is Y
ES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S399.

In S399, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, the second special symbol jackpot determination random number, the second special symbol symbol random number, the second special symbol ready-to-win determination random number, and the second special symbol Various random numbers such as random numbers for effect selection) are extracted, and processing is performed to set payout information according to the second start opening winning prize. After executing the process of S399, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S400.

In S400, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols extracted based on the winning to the second starting port 140 is less than four, for example.

In addition, the main RAM 203 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140 until the starting condition is satisfied. It has a symbol start storage area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). . note that,
The main RAM 203 has a second special symbol start storage area (1) to a second special symbol start storage area (
In addition to 4), it also has a second special symbol start storage area (0), which will be described later.

When the number of reserved second special symbols is not less than four, that is, when the upper limit is four (S400
is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the start opening winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, when the number of reserved second special symbols is less than 4 (when S400 is YES determination)
, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S401.

In S401, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of second special symbols. After executing the process of S401, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S402.

At S402, the main CPU 201 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 140 until the second special symbol variation start condition is satisfied.
03 is stored. As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S402, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S403.

At S403, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command of the second special symbol (S403). The winning command of the second special symbol is a command including information to increase the number of reserved second special symbols by 1, the variation pattern information of the second special symbol, etc., and the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process. The winning command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S403, the main CPU 201 terminates the start opening winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

[1-8. Sub control processing]
Next, contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the sub CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S501). In this initialization processing, for example, initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup recovery initialization, and the like is performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S502.

Note that the initialization process (S501) described above is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared.

In S502, the sub CPU 301 performs read processing of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, the command sent from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set in the command input port 308 is read out. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S503.

In S503, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S502 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 301 executes effect mode determination processing. In this process, for example, based on the prize winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 7 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) and the output from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6) The manner of sound production and the like are determined.

In the effect mode determination process (S504), the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request including information specifying the content of the effect, and based on the generated animation request, generates various requests (for example, a drawing request) for operating various effect devices. , sound requests, lamp requests, and character requests). After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S505.

In S505, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6).
The display control circuit 304 receives a message (drawing request) sent from the sub CPU 301
Drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 is performed based on . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S506.

In S506, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 6). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control for causing the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S507.

In S507, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). Based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 , the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or part of the LEDs forming the LED group 46 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S508.

In S508, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the role product request to the role product control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6).
The role product control circuit 307 receives a message (a role product request) sent from the sub CPU 301
Based on , drive control is performed to operate a performance drive motor (not shown) for all or a part of the performance accessory group 58 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 3
01 ends the sub-control circuit main process.

[1-9. Specific example of effect mode determination processing by sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 (more specifically, the sub-CPU 301) performs effect mode determination processing (see S504 in FIG. 53) based on the winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 200. FIG.

Sub CPU301, as one of the various processes performed in the production mode determination process, for example, the production pattern of the sub-variation production corresponding to this special symbol fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as "the relevant fluctuation") (hereinafter "sub-variation A sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern"), a prefetch effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern of the prefetch effect (hereinafter referred to as a "prefetch effect pattern"), etc. are performed. In addition, in the effect mode determination process, the effect mode is determined, for example, a countdown effect that suggests that the ceiling counter is approaching the ceiling value, or a B time-saving game state transition effect that suggests that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. Processing, etc., is also performed for determination processing of various effects related to the progress of the game.

The sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination process is performed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. The sub-variation production pattern is a production pattern that is performed in the display area of the display device 7 by the sub CPU 301 in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbols (for example, a variation pattern of decorative symbols or a character production patterns, etc.).

In the sub-variation production, depending on the sub-variation production pattern to be executed, with the passage of time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop of the special symbol, the expectation for the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol It is possible to indicate that the degree is maintained or increased.

The sub-fluctuation effect patterns include, for example, time-saving hit system reach A, B, C, big hit system reach A, B, C, and common reach A, B, C, D, E, etc., as shown in FIG. 54 to be described later. is included. As described above, the time-saving hit system reach A, B, C is a special symbol hit determination process (Fig. 2
8 S93 reference) is a ready-to-win effect indicating that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit (no possibility of a big hit). The jackpot type reach A, B, and C are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol indicates that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be both a time saving hit and a big hit.

In addition, for example, when the execution timing of the countdown effect that suggests the transition timing to the B time-saving gaming state and the execution timing of the ready-to-win effect overlap, the sub CPU 301
It is preferable that one of the effects is preferentially executed.

The look-ahead effect pattern determination process is performed based on, for example, a special symbol variation pattern determined as a result of the look-ahead determination process. The look-ahead effect is an effect that indicates the degree of expectation for the result of the look-ahead determination process. is provided for the hit determination processing of the special symbols (until the variable display of the special symbols is started), the sub-CPU 301 performs in the display area of the display device 7.

In the look-ahead effect, according to the look-ahead effect pattern to be executed, when in the pending state, with the passage of time (more specifically, the progress of the variable display of the previously held start information), the look-ahead judgment It is possible to indicate that the degree of expectation for the outcome of the processing is maintained or increased.

The look-ahead effect is performed using a pending image displayed on the display device 7, for example. The pending image is an image showing the current pending status.

The look-ahead effect pattern includes a look-ahead determination process, that is, a result type of the special symbol hit determination process (whether it is a time-saving hit or a big hit). A look-ahead expected value production pattern capable of suggesting an expected value for the result of the win determination process being a win (big win or short-time win) is included. That is, in the look-ahead effect, it is possible to suggest both or one of the expected value for the result type of the special symbol hit determination process and the expected value for the result of the special symbol hit determination process to be a hit. is. Also, in the look-ahead effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 59 described later), the look-ahead per type effect pattern determination process (see S3006 in FIG. 59 described later),
A look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process (see S3008 and S3009 in FIG. 59 to be described later) is performed. Specific examples of the look-ahead hit type effect pattern, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process, and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be described later.

[1-9-1. Sub-fluctuation effect pattern decision processing]
First, the sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination process will be described. FIG. 54 is an example of a sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table (detailed description is omitted) in the game state (normal game state) in which the time saving flag is off. This sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table is stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko game machine. The program ROM 302 also stores a sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table in the gaming state (high-probability short-time gaming state, low-probable short-time gaming state) in which the time-saving flag is on, but the description is omitted here.

The sub CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation production pattern determination table in the normal game state of FIG. 54, and based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, displays as a variation production pattern corresponding to the variation. A sub-variation effect pattern (illustrated as "variation pattern" in FIG. 54) to be displayed on the device 7 is determined. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub-fluctuation production pattern includes time-saving hit system reach A, B, C, jackpot system reach A, B, C, and common reach A, B, C, D, E. there is

The time-saving hit system reach A, B, and C are reach performances indicating that there is a possibility of time-saving winning as described above, and are ready-to-reach performances in which the possibility of time-saving winning can be grasped from the appearance. The time-saving hit system reach A is not displayed when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a loss or a big hit, but is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (Fig. 15). reference). This time-saving hit type reach A is not a prefetch target sub-variation production pattern, but is not limited to this, and may be a pre-read sub-variation production pattern. The time-saving hit system reach B and the time-saving hit system reach C are the same or substantially the same in appearance appearance. However, the time saving system reach B is not a sub-variation production pattern for prefetching, while the time reduction per system reach C is a sub-variation production pattern for prefetching (the column of "prefetching flag" in FIG. 15,
54, and FIG. 55 below).

The big hit system reach A, B, and C are the reach effects indicating the possibility of the big win as described above, and are the reach effects that allow the player to grasp the possibility of the big win from the appearance. The big hit system reach A is not displayed when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a loss or a "time saving hit", but is a big hit determination reach production that is displayed only when it is a "big hit" (Fig. 1
5). This big hit type ready-to-win A is not a prefetch target sub-fluctuation effect pattern, but is not limited to this, and may be a prefetch-type sub-fluctuation effect pattern. The big-hit reach B and the big-hit reach C have the same or substantially the same performance mode in appearance. However, the big-hit ready-to-win B is not a sub-fluctuation effect pattern to be read ahead, while the big-hit ready-to-win C is a sub-fluctuation effect pattern to be read ahead (refer to the column of "look-ahead flag" in FIG. 15).

The common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach performances indicating that there is a possibility of either a big hit or a short time hit as described above, and from the appearance, there is a possibility of a short time hit or a big hit. It is a reach production mode that it is difficult to grasp whether there is a possibility. The common reach A is a win (big hit, short time hit) fixed reach production which is not displayed when the result of the special pattern hit determination processing is a loss, and is displayed only when it is a big hit or a "short time hit". (Fig. 15
reference). The common reach B and the common reach C have the same or substantially the same presentation mode in appearance. Further, the common reach D is an effect that develops from the common reach C to the time-saving hit system reach C.
Furthermore, the common reach E is an effect that develops from the common reach C to the big hit system reach C. In addition, common reach A and common reach B are not prefetch target sub-variation effect patterns, while common reach C, common reach D, and common reach E are pre-read target sub-variation effect patterns ("Prefetch in FIG. 15 flags column).

In this way, the sub CPU 301 uses the sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 54).
, and based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the sub variation effect pattern is determined. Then, the sub CPU 301 controls the display device 7 to display the determined sub fluctuation effect pattern.

[1-9-2. Look-ahead production pattern decision processing]
Next, a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process and a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process, which are performed as the look-ahead effect pattern determination process, will be described.

In addition, in the work RAM 303 (see FIG. 6), the first special symbol start storage area (0) provided in the main RAM 203, the first special symbol start storage area (1), the first special symbol start storage area (2) , the first special symbol start storage area (3), and the first special symbol start storage area (4) as areas corresponding to the first sub reservation area (0), the first sub reservation area (1), the first There is provided one sub-reservation area (2), a first sub-reservation area (3) and a first sub-reservation area (4). In the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4), various items related to the extracted random value Hold information is stored. In addition, information corresponding to the variation is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the first sub reservation area (0). When the sub CPU 301 receives the winning command for the first starting opening winning, it stores the received information in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the current first special symbol starting storage area.

In addition, the work RAM 303 includes a second special symbol start storage area (0), a second special symbol start storage area (1), a second special symbol start storage area (2), and a second special symbol provided in the main RAM 203. As areas corresponding to the starting storage area (3) and the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the second sub-reserving area (0), the second sub-reserving area (1), the second sub-reserving area ( 2), a second sub-reservation area (3) and a second sub-reservation area (4) are provided.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the look-ahead effect for the first special symbol is performed in the normal game state, but is not limited to this, and in other game states (for example, high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state) It may be performed, or may be performed for the second special symbol.

The look-ahead effect is performed using, for example, a pending image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 . In the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-reservation area (0) is displayed as an area for displaying a reservation image.
The 0th area corresponding to the , the first reservation area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (1), the second reservation area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (2), the first sub-reservation area (3) corresponding to A third reservation area and a fourth reservation area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (4) are provided.

[1-9-2-1. Table referred to in look-ahead per type production pattern determination processing]
A table referred to in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process will be described.

By the way, in the form of the pending image in which the prefetch effect is executed in the determined prefetch hit type effect pattern, there is a time saving prefetch effect form indicating that there is a possibility of a time saving hit and a possibility of a big hit. A big hit system look-ahead effect form shown and a common hit system look-ahead effect form showing that there is a possibility for both a time saving hit and a big hit are included.

The read-ahead winning type production pattern changes the form of the pending image, for example, from a common win-type read-ahead production form to a time-saving winning-type read-ahead production form, or changes from a common winning-type look-ahead production form to a big win-type look-ahead production form. Thus, it is an effect pattern that can suggest a change in the expected value with respect to the result type of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

FIG. 55 is an example of a read-ahead type effect pattern determination table number determination table.
In FIG. 55, only the fluctuation patterns to be read ahead among the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 54 are shown. Also, FIG. 56 is an example of a per-read-ahead type effect pattern determination table.
These tables are stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in the look-ahead per type effect pattern determination table number determination table of FIG.
PU 301 determines the per-read-ahead type effect pattern determination table number, for example, based on the variation pattern and the number of reservations. The pending number here includes start information to be prefetched. That is, when the starting information extracted based on the winning to the first starting port 120 is withheld, the number of reservations after the reservation corresponds to the number of reservations shown in FIG.

For example, when the variation pattern is "03H" and the number of reservations is "3", the look-ahead per type effect pattern determination table number is determined to be "3". Also, for example, if the variation pattern is "0E
H" and the number of reservations is "2", the per-read-ahead type effect pattern determination table number is "
22”.

When the look-ahead per type effect pattern determination table number is determined, the sub CPU 301
With reference to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table of FIG. 56, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined. More specifically, as shown in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table of FIG. It is determined.

In addition, in FIG. 56, for the sake of convenience, the "prefetching per type effect pattern determination table number" is replaced with "S
"ASPT number", and "look-ahead winning type effect pattern" is represented as "SAS effect pattern". The sub effect selection random number value 1 is a random number value extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger, such as when a variation pattern command for a special symbol is received.

For example, when the read-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is "3" and the extracted sub-effect selection random number value 1 is "55", the read-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined as "07H". Further, for example, if the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is "7" and the extracted sub-effect selection random number value 1 is "77", the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is "16".
H".

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the column of remarks (corresponding to reservation) in FIG. 56 indicate the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area, respectively.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. ,
It shows that the pending image is displayed in the time-saving winning type look-ahead performance form indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination processing is the possibility of the time-saving winning. When the pending image is displayed in the look-ahead effect form of the time-saving hit system, it can be grasped from the appearance that there is a possibility of the time-saving hit.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. ,
It shows that the pending image is displayed in a big hit type look-ahead performance form indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is likely to be a big hit. When the pending image is displayed in the big-hit look-ahead presentation mode, it can be grasped from the appearance that there is a possibility of a big-hit.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. ,
It shows that the pending image is displayed in the common winning type look-ahead performance form indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination processing has the possibility of both the time-saving winning and the big winning. When the reserved image is displayed in the common winning type look-ahead presentation mode, it is difficult to grasp from the appearance whether there is a possibility of a time-saving win or a big win.

For example, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "07H", the common hit-type look-ahead effect form "C" is displayed in the third reservation area, and the second after the shift from the third reservation area
Also in the reservation area, the common hit-based look-ahead effect form "C" is displayed. Then, when shifting from the second reservation area to the first reservation area, the common winning system prefetching production form 'C' changes to the time saving prefetching production form 'A', and in the first reservation area, the time saving prefetching production form "A" is displayed.

Further, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "16H", the common hit-type look-ahead effect form "C" is displayed in the third reservation area. Then, when shifting from the third reservation area to the second reservation area, from the common hit system prefetch production form "C" to the big hit system prefetch production form "
B", the second reservation area, and in the first reservation area after being shifted from the second reservation area, the big win-based look-ahead effect form "B" is displayed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 56, the following a) to
E) pattern is included. In addition, in this embodiment, the pattern that changes from the big hit system prefetch production form "B" to the time saving system prefetch production form "A", and the time saving system prefetch production form "
The pattern of changing from A" to the big and short winning look-ahead performance form "B" is not included in the look-ahead winning type performance pattern, but these patterns may be included in the look-ahead winning type performance pattern.
B) At the time of suspension, the time-saving hit-type look-ahead production form is displayed, and after that, the time-saving hit-type look-ahead production form is displayed without changing the production form. "09H").
b) A pre-reading big hit effect pattern (for example, a pre-reading hit type effect pattern "17H") in which the big hit type prefetch effect form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the big win type prefetch effect form is displayed without changing the effect form thereafter. ).
c) A common winning type look-ahead performance form is displayed at the time of suspension, and then a look-ahead common winning performance pattern A (for example, a look-ahead winning type look-ahead performance pattern "24H") that changes to a time-saving winning type look-ahead performance form.
d) A read-ahead common win effect pattern B (for example, a look-ahead win type effect pattern "12H") that is displayed in a common win-type look-ahead effect form at the time of suspension and then changes to a big win-type look-ahead effect form.
E) A read-ahead common winning performance pattern C (
For example, per look-ahead type effect pattern "06H").

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table (see, for example, FIG. 55), and based on the variation pattern and the number of reservations, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number (SASPT number ). and sub C.
The PU 301 refers to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56), and determines the look-ahead hit type based on the determined look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number (SASPT number) and the sub effect selection random number value 1. A production pattern (SAS production pattern) is determined.

In addition, in FIG. 56, at the time of suspension, the time-saving hit system prefetch effect form "A" is displayed,
After that, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern that changes to the big hit type look-ahead effect form 'B' is not shown, but in this way, the time saving type look-ahead effect form 'A' is changed to the big hit type look-ahead effect form 'B'. The sub CPU 301 may determine the look-ahead hit type effect pattern. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the interest that can be given to the player by the look-ahead effect.

Also, in FIG. 56, the big-hit look-ahead effect form "B" is, as described above, a big-hit look-ahead effect indicating that there is a possibility that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit (that is, there is a possibility of losing). In addition to this, it is also possible to display a big hit confirmation look-ahead effect form indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit confirmation. In this case, the look-ahead winning type effect pattern determined by the sub CPU 301 may include any or all of the following look-ahead type effect patterns f) to h).
f) A look-ahead big-win determination performance pattern A in which the big-win determination look-ahead performance form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the big-hit determination look-ahead performance form is displayed without changing the performance form thereafter.
g) At the time of suspension, other pre-reading production forms (for example, time saving pre-reading production form "A"
, big hit system look-ahead performance form 'B', common win system look-ahead performance form 'C', etc.) are displayed, and then a look-ahead big hit determination performance pattern B that changes to a big hit determination look-ahead performance form.
H) At the time of suspension, another look-ahead production form (for example, a time-saving hit-based look-ahead production form "A"
, common hit system look-ahead production form "C", etc.) is displayed, and then a big hit system look-ahead production form "
B" is displayed, and furthermore, a look-ahead big-win determination performance pattern C that changes to a big-win determination look-ahead performance form.

In addition, in FIG. 56, the big hit system prefetch production form "B" and the time saving per system prefetch production form "A"
and the common win-type look-ahead effect form "C", the display frequency of the common win-type look-ahead effect form "C" is the highest at the time of suspension, but is not limited to this. For example, at the time of suspension, the display frequency of the time-saving hit-type look-ahead performance form 'A' may be the highest, and at the time of suspension, the display frequency of the big-hit look-ahead performance form 'B' may be the highest. You may do so. Furthermore, the display frequency of the common win-based look-ahead effect form "C" may be the lowest at the time of suspension.

In addition, in FIG. 56, all "prefetching per type effect pattern determination table number (SASP
T number)” is assigned a sub effect selection random number value 1 of a predetermined width, but this is not the only option. It is also possible to set the distribution rate of the SASPT number to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-2-2. Table referenced in look-ahead expected value production pattern determination process]
Next, the table referred to in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be described.

FIG. 57 is an example of a look-ahead expected value production pattern determination table (at the time of winning) that is referred to when the result of the special symbol winning determination processing is "shorter working hours" or "big hit". again,
FIG. 58 is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) that is referred to when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss.

By the way, the form of the pending image in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the determined look-ahead expected value effect pattern differs in the effect form according to the expected value for the hit (time-saving hit, big hit).

When a pending image is displayed as a look-ahead effect form for saving time, for example, the shape of the pending image, which is usually represented by a triangle, is changed to "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle <star". can express the change in the expected value. In this case, the expected value is lowest when the retained image is a rectangle and highest when it is a star.

Also, when a pending image is displayed as a big-hit look-ahead effect form, for example, the pending image, which is normally displayed in white, is changed in color such as "blue<yellow<green<red<rainbow". can express the change in the expected value. In this case, the expected value is lowest if the pending image is blue and highest if the pending image is a rainbow.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the case where the pending image is displayed as a common hit system look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility for both the big hit and the time saving hit, the pending image is set to, for example, the expected value for the big hit It may be represented by both a color indicating a level and a shape indicating an expected value level for a time-saving hit, or may be represented by a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form.

The reserved image in which the anticipation effect is performed can change from the effect form with the relatively low expected value to the effect form with the relatively high expected value, but the expected value is relatively high from the effect form with the relatively high expected value It is preferable not to change to a low production mode. Also, when changing the presentation form of the hold image, it is not necessary to change one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle <star" or "blue < yellow < green < red <rainbow". , for example, "pentagon→circle" or "yellow→rainbow". Also, the shape of the pending image does not necessarily have to start from the lowest expected value, such as a square or blue, but may be, for example, a circle or red.

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the column of remarks (on hold) in FIG. 57 are the same as in FIG.
The first to fourth reservation areas are shown respectively.

Also, in each column of "1" to "4" in the column of remarks (holding correspondence) in FIG. 57, " 0
” to “5” indicate the height of the expected value for the hit (time saving hit, jackpot). for example,
The above "triangle" and "white" correspond to "0", and the above "square" and "blue" correspond to "1".
", the above "pentagon" and "yellow" correspond to "2", the above "hexagon" and "green" correspond to "3", the above "circle" and "red" correspond to "4", and the above "star" and "rainbow" correspond to "5".

Hereinafter, in each column of "1" to "4" in the column of remarks (holding correspondence) in FIG. 57, " 0
” to “5” are referred to as expected value levels “0” to “5”.

The look-ahead expected value effect pattern when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "big hit" is shown in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of hit) in FIG. 57, for example, It is determined based on the number of reservations and the random number 2 for sub effect selection. Similarly, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is
As shown in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) in FIG. Random number 2 for sub effect selection
is a random number value extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger such as when a variation pattern command of a special symbol is received, for example. In addition, in FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, only the case where the number of reservations is "1" to "3" is illustrated, and the illustration when the number of reservations is "4" is shown for convenience.
omitted.

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the number of reservations is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection is "750", the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "43H". . When the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "43H", the expected value level is "2" in the third reservation area, and the expected value level is "2" when shifting from the third reservation area to the second reservation area. to "3", and when shifting from the second reservation area to the first reservation area, the expected value level changes from "3" to "5".

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the number of reservations is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection is "680", the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "3FH". be done. For example, when the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "3FH", the expected value level is "2" in the third reservation area, the expected value level is "2" in the second reservation area, and the second reservation area to the first reservation The expected value level changes from "2" to "4" when shifting to the region.

In this way, the sub CPU 301, based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of winning) (see FIG. 57) or the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) (see FIG. 58) See), the number of reservations and the random number for sub effect selection 2
Based on and, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit" or "big hit", the distribution rate of each look-ahead expected value production pattern is not limited to the distribution rate shown in FIG. 57, and can be changed as appropriate is.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "losing", the selection rate of the look-ahead expected value production pattern (for example, "01H", "0BH", etc.) with a relatively low expected value level is increased. However, it is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate, such as even distribution.

Further, in FIGS. 57 and 58, the sub effect selection random number value 2 having a predetermined width is assigned to all the "prefetch expected value effect patterns", but this is not restrictive, and a specific "prefetch expected value effect pattern" is assigned. ” (that is, the distribution rate of the specific “forecasting expected value effect pattern” may be set to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-3. Look-ahead production pattern decision processing]
Next, the look-ahead effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 with reference to the tables of FIGS. 54 to 58 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 shows sub CPU3
01 is an example of a flow chart showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination process.
As described above, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process only in the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, but the present invention is not limited to this.

The sub CPU 301 first determines whether or not it has received a winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201 (S3001).

If the winning command has not been received (NO determination in S3001), the sub CPU 30
1 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has been received (if determined as YES in S3001),
The sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3002.

In S3002, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the prefetch target is currently on hold.
That is, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect is being executed for the current suspension. If there are multiple suspensions, the look-ahead effect may be performed in a plurality of suspension images, but in this embodiment,
The look-ahead effect is performed only for one reserved image.

If the prefetch effect is being executed for the current hold (if S3002 is NO determination)
, the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the look-ahead effect is not executed for the current hold (YES determination in S3002), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3003.

In S3003, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the variation pattern information received by the winning command is for prefetching (see FIG. 55).

If the variation pattern information received by the winning command is not for prefetching (S3003 is N
In the case of O determination), the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern information received by the winning command is to be prefetched (S300
3 is YES), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3004.

In S3004, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the difference between the ceiling price and the ceiling counter is greater than, for example, the upper limit number (for example, 4 or 8) that can be held. This processing is for avoiding the transition to the B time-saving game state before execution of the variable display of the special symbols for the suspension of the read-ahead performance despite the execution of the read-ahead performance. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress the decline in interest. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3005.

In this embodiment, in S3004, it is determined whether or not the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than the upper limit number that can be reserved, but the invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern information received by the winning command is When it is a prefetch target (when S3003 is YES determination),
You may make it determine whether it is larger than the pending|holding number including the prefetch object. The ceiling value and ceiling counter may receive information from the main CPU 201 as commands, or may be managed by the sub CPU 301 separately from the main CPU 201 .

In S3005, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination process. In this process, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55) is referred to, and the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is determined. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3006.

In S3006, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process. In this process, with reference to the look-ahead per type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56),
A look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3007.

In S3007, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol win determination process is a "time saving win" or a "big win". In this process, the result of the special pattern hit determination process is determined based on the variation pattern information received in the prize winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, and if the result is a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit", a YES determination is made. be done. However, it is not limited to this, and the sub-CPU
By transmitting to 301, you may make it determine a "time saving hit" or a "big hit."

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "big hit" (S300
7 determines YES), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3008.

On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is neither "time saving hit" nor "big hit" (NO determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3009.

In S3008, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead expected value production pattern (at the time of winning) determination processing. In this process, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table of FIG. 57 (at the time of winning)
to determine the look-ahead effect pattern (hit time). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

In addition, in S3009, the sub CPU 301 performs prefetch effect pattern determination processing when losing. In this process, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table of FIG. 58 (at the time of loss)
to determine the look-ahead expected value effect pattern (at the time of loss). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

[1-9-4. Effect by performing look-ahead effect, example of expansion of look-ahead effect]
In the above-mentioned look-ahead effect, depending on the form change of the pending image, not only is it interesting to see whether it will change to a big hit type look-ahead effect form or a time saving type look-ahead effect form, but also a hit (
It is possible to change the level of the expected value of a big hit, a time-saving hit, etc., and it is possible to heighten the interest by performing a new performance that has never been seen before. In addition, the timing of changing the form of the pending image is not limited to when the pending is shifted, and may be, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

In addition, the form of the pending image performed as a look-ahead effect (for example, the first sub-holding area (4) to
For the form of the reserved image displayed within the range of the first sub-reserved area (1))
20 may be determined, and the form of the pending image in the variable display of the special symbols of the variation may be determined at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

By the way, the variation pattern in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the look-ahead short-time hit effect pattern (Fig. 5
4, for example, "03H" and "0EH"), and a variation pattern in which a look-ahead effect is executed in the look-ahead big hit effect pattern (see, for example, "06H" and "11H" in FIG. 54). The former probability is higher (see, for example, FIG. 15)
. That is, the execution ratio of the look-ahead effect is higher in the read-ahead short hit effect pattern than the execution ratio of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead big hit effect pattern. Therefore, compared with the conventional pachinko game machine in which the look-ahead performance is performed only when there is a possibility of a big win, the execution frequency of the look-ahead performance can be increased while suppressing the decrease in the expected value of winning.
It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, the execution ratio of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead big hit performance pattern may be higher than the execution ratio of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead short hit performance pattern. In this case, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the expected value for the big win is higher than the expected value for the time-saving win, so it is possible to increase the interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the game state (in this embodiment, normal game state, low probability time-saving game state) in which the probability variation flag is off, it is possible to win "time-saving hit" in the special symbol hit determination process (Fig. 10 reference). However, in this embodiment, although the look-ahead effect is performed in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect is not performed in the low-probability short-time game state. Even if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the low probability time saving game state is "time saving hit", when the C time saving game state is superimposed on the A time saving game state, and for the A time saving game state In any case where the C time saving game state is not repeatedly executed, the possibility of increasing the time saving number of times is low. Therefore, by minimizing the player's knowledge of the possibility of winning the "time saving win" in the A time saving game state, the disappointment given to the player by winning the "time saving win" is reduced. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

However, it is not essential to prevent the look-ahead effect from being performed in the low-probability short-time game state, and the look-ahead effect is performed not only in the normal game state but also in the low-probability short-time game state and high-probability low-time short game state. may Also, in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for the first special symbol, but the look-ahead effect is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect may also be performed for the second special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, as the sub-fluctuation effect pattern, time-saving hit system reach, big hit system reach, or common reach can be executed. 15 and 54 in this embodiment.
As can be seen from FIG. 56, the sub CPU 301, when executing the look-ahead performance with the look-ahead time-saving winning performance pattern, executes the time-saving winning system reach as the sub-fluctuation performance pattern, and does not execute the big win system ready-to-win. In addition, when the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead big-hit performance pattern, the sub-CPU 301 executes the big-hit type ready-to-win as the sub-fluctuation performance pattern, and does not execute the time-saving winning-type ready-to-win.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect with the look-ahead time saving effect pattern or the look-ahead common winning effect pattern, it is possible to execute the time saving hit system reach as the sub-fluctuation effect pattern. However, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the time-saving hit system reach as the sub-fluctuation effect pattern when the pre-read effect is executed in the pre-read big hit effect pattern.

In addition, the prefetch big hit effect pattern (for example, the prefetch per type effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) "37H" shown in FIG. 56) and the prefetch short time hit effect pattern (for example, the prefetch per type effect pattern "29H" shown in FIG. 56) ”), and a look-ahead common hit effect pattern (for example, a look-ahead effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) “27H” shown in FIG. 56)
and , the sub CPU 301 sets the common reach as the sub-variation effect pattern (for example, the sub-variation effect patterns "0AH" and "0BH" shown in FIG. 55).
”) may be executed.

Moreover, after executing the time-saving winning system reach and clearly showing the loss in the time-saving winning system reach, a performance pattern may be provided in which the big winning system is executed. In this case, since the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation until the end whether or not the jackpot-type ready-to-win with a high profit rate will be executed, the interest of the player can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 15, when the common reach E is executed in the variable display of the special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "target variation") performed for the start information in which the look-ahead effect is executed, the common reach E and the common reach C After the common performance is displayed, it is possible to shift to the performance common to the jackpot type ready-to-win C. On the other hand, if no effect common to the common reach C is executed,
Do not shift to jackpot system reach C. Similarly, when the common reach E is executed in the target variation, after the performance common to the common reach C is displayed, it is possible to shift to the performance common to the short-time winning system reach C. On the other hand, when the performance common to the common reach C is not executed at all, it does not shift to the time saving hit system reach C.

By the way, in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for one reserved image (see S3002). Therefore, even when a look-ahead effect mode (hereinafter referred to as "big hit look-ahead effect") indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a big hit, has already been executed, the sub CPU 301 Do not execute look-ahead effects. Even in a pachinko game machine in which a look-ahead effect is performed in a plurality of reserved images, it is preferable not to perform a new look-ahead effect when a big hit look-ahead effect has already been performed.

For example, any one hold (hereinafter referred to as "first hold") and another hold (hereinafter referred to as "second hold") in which variable display of special symbols is started after this first hold ), and when the prefetching jackpot production pattern (for example, the prefetching hit type production pattern "17H" in FIG. 56) is executed in the first reservation, the prefetching production is performed in the second reservation Even if executed, the look-ahead effect in this second hold may not make sense. In particular, when the jackpot is derived for the first hold and is controlled to the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state is terminated, the game is controlled to the A time-saving game state, for example, the "time-saving win" is derived for the second hold. Even so, there is a possibility that the player will not be able to receive the benefit of this "time-saving win", and in this case, the interest is significantly reduced. Therefore, when the big win look-ahead performance has already been executed, it is preferable not to carry out the look-ahead performance for the suspension to be executed after the suspension in which the big win look-ahead performance is executed.

It should be noted that even if the first hold is a jackpot hold (a hold from which the jackpot is derived), the first
If the look-ahead effect is not executed for the second hold, the look-ahead effect may or may not be executed in the second hold.

In addition, even when a fake big hit look-ahead effect (for example, a look-ahead winning type effect pattern "53H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first hold, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead effect in the second hold.

However, if the time-saving hit look-ahead effect (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern “05H” in FIG. 56) is executed in the first suspension, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time-saving look-ahead effect is executed in the second suspension. may This is because, even if a time-saving win is derived for the first reservation, the player can expect a big win with a higher degree of profit than that.

Further, in the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small win, but in the pachinko game machine that includes a small win in the result of the special symbol win determination process, a small win is included in the first reservation. Even when the hit look-ahead effect is being executed, the big win look-ahead effect or the time saving look-ahead effect may be executed in the second reservation. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, the player can expect a big win with a higher degree of profit than that.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small hit, the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a small hit.
) is executed in the first reservation, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time saving look-ahead effect may be executed in the second reservation. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, the player can expect a small win with a higher degree of profit than that.

Also, as a sub-fluctuation production pattern, during the execution of the jackpot type reach, for example, the first start port 120
When a prize is won and the starting information is suspended, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the look-ahead effect for this suspension.

Also, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect only in the normal game state. Therefore, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the big hit display mode is derived, the start information determined to be "time saving hit" by the prefetch determination performed by the main CPU 201 is withheld (this This suspension is referred to as “specific suspension” in the paragraph), and whether the look-ahead effect is executed or not performed for this specific suspension, the sub CPU 301 will be executed after the jackpot game state ends. , If it is not in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect is not executed for the specific hold. However, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute the look-ahead effect for the specific hold even in the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, even if it is a pachinko game machine that executes a look-ahead effect in a game state other than the normal game state (for example, a high-probability short-time game state, a low-probability short-time game state), it is specified when the jackpot display mode is derived. Sub CPU if pending
301 may make it possible not to execute the look-ahead effect for the specific reservation after the end of the jackpot game state.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and the jackpot display mode is derived, the main CP
If the starting information determined to be "time saving hit" by the look-ahead determination performed by U201 is suspended (this suspension is referred to as "specific suspension" in this paragraph), even if this specific suspension is "time saving hit" , the main CPU 201 may not be controlled to the C time-saving game state based on the "time-saving win" after the jackpot game state ends. For example, when the time-saving gaming state overlaps, it is a specification that does not execute multiple time-saving gaming states, and if it is controlled to the A time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the specific hold is "time-saving hit ”, the main CPU 201 will not execute the C time-saving game state based on the “time-saving win”.

[1-10. Specific example of look-ahead effect]
A specific example of the look-ahead effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. FIG. In this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 can execute a look-ahead effect using a pending image based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 201 .

[1-10-1. Specific example when prefetching effect is performed in the prefetching jackpot effect pattern]
As described above, the look-ahead effect pattern includes the look-ahead hit type effect pattern and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern. Here, first, as the above-mentioned look-ahead hit type effect pattern, a specific example in which a look-ahead effect is performed in a look-ahead big hit effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG.

FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) are examples of the look-ahead effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, showing the possibility of a big win. It is a figure which shows a process. 60(a) to 60(f) correspond to "1CH", "3CH", "58H" or "78H" in FIG. Also, the look-ahead expected value effect patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value effect patterns shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) are omitted in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f), the display area 7a of the display device 7 includes the first
A reservation area 411 to a fourth reservation area 414 are displayed. As described above, the first reservation area 411 to the fourth reservation area 414 are areas indicating whether reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4), respectively. be. In addition, the 0th area 410 is
This is an area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (0) in which information corresponding to the change is stored.

In this embodiment, when the hold information is stored in the first sub-hold area, the sub CPU 301
holds the reservation areas 411 to 414 corresponding to the first sub-reservation area in which the reservation information is stored,
A suspended image indicated by a triangle (hereinafter simply referred to as a "held image") is displayed. Further, when the reservation information is not stored in the first sub reservation area, the sub CPU 301
The reserved image is not displayed, and only the frame of the reserved area is displayed.

In FIG. 60(a), the first reservation area 411 to the third reservation area 413 display a normal reservation image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, and the fourth reservation area 414 displays a reservation image. Only the frame is displayed. This indicates that pending information is stored in the first sub-reserving areas (1) to (3) and no pending information is stored in the first sub-reserving area (4).

In FIG. 60(b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 60(a). This indicates that the reservation information is newly stored in the first sub-reservation area (4) from the state shown in FIG. 60(a).

As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, color) of the reserved images shown in the first to fourth reserved areas 411 to 414 differently according to the expected value for the big hit. In this embodiment, except for the rainbow, the difference in color is illustrated by the shade of color.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 60(b), the color of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is white (expected value level "0"), and the color shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is white. The color of the pending image displayed is blue (expected level "1").

FIG. 60(c) is an image in which one hold is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 60(b), and the color of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold area 414 in FIG. , a change from blue to yellow (expected value level “2”) when shifted to the third reservation area 413 .

FIG. 60(d) is an image in which one hold is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 60(c), and the color of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. , a change from yellow to green (expected value level “3”) when shifted to the second reservation area 412 .

FIG. 60(e) is an image in which one hold is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 60(d), and the color of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , a change from green to red (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reservation area 411. FIG.

FIG. 60(f) is an image in which the suspension is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. , is an image showing a change from red to rainbow (expected value level “5”) when shifted to the 0th region 410. FIG.

In addition, the color (expected value level) of the pending image indicating the expected value for the big hit does not necessarily need to be changed when the pending is shifted, for example, it may be changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the change. .

In addition, in FIG. 60, the change in the expected value from which the big win is derived is shown by changing the big hit look-ahead effect form, but instead of or in addition to this, the big win determination look-ahead from the big hit look-ahead effect form is shown. The sub CPU 301 may execute a look-ahead effect that changes to the effect mode. In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before changing to the big hit determination look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-2. Specific example when prefetching production is performed in the prefetching time saving production pattern]
Next, a specific example in which a look-ahead performance is performed in a look-ahead time saving performance pattern as the look-ahead hit type performance pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 61 .

Figure 61 (a) ~ Figure 61 (f) is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, showing that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit system It is a figure which shows the process which changes. In addition, the look-ahead time reduction per type effect pattern shown in FIGS.
corresponds to "H". Also, the look-ahead expected value effect patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value effect patterns shown in FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) are omitted in FIG.

In FIG. 61(a), the first reservation area 411 to the third reservation area 413 display a normal reservation image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, and the fourth reservation area 414 displays a reservation image. Only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 61(b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 61(a). Sub CPU301, as described above, the first reservation area 411 ~
The form (for example, shape) of the reserved image shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is displayed differently according to the expected value for the time saving hit.

Thus, in this embodiment, the expected value for the big win is represented by the color of the pending image, and the expected value for the time saving win is represented by the shape of the pending image.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 61(b), the shape of the reserved image shown in the first to third reserved areas 411 to 413 is a triangle (expected value level "0"), and the shape shown in the fourth reserved area 414 The shape of the retained image that is displayed is a rectangle (expectation value level "1").

FIG. 61(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(b), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold area 414 in FIG. , third
It is an image showing a change from a quadrangle to a pentagon (expected value level “2”) when shifted to the reservation area 413 .

FIG. 61(d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(c), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. , second
It is an image showing a change from a pentagon to a hexagon (expected value level "3") when shifted to the reservation area 412 .

FIG. 61(e) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(d), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , first
It is an image showing a change from a hexagon to a circle (expected value level “4”) when shifted to the reserved area 411 .

FIG. 61(f) is an image obtained by shifting one hold from the state shown in FIG. 61(e), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the first hold area 411 in FIG. , 0th
4 is an image showing a change from a circle to a star (expected value level "5") when shifted to region 410;

It should be noted that the shape of the hold image that indicates the expected value for the time saving does not necessarily need to be changed one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle <star", for example, change to "pentagon → circle" You may let

In addition, the shape of the pending image (expected value level) indicating the expected value for time saving is not necessarily
It is not necessary to change when the hold shifts, for example, it may be changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

In addition, in FIG. 61, by changing the look-ahead effect form of the time-saving hit system, the change in the expected value from which the time-saving hit is derived is shown. It may be executed by the sub CPU 301 . In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before changing to the big hit determination look-ahead effect form.
・ A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit-type look-ahead effect form.
・ A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit confirmation look-ahead effect form.
- A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit-type look-ahead effect form, and then changes to a big-win fixed look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-3. Specific example when prefetching effect is performed with prefetching common hit effect pattern]
Next, a specific example in which the prefetching effect is performed in the prefetching common winning effect pattern as the above prefetching winning effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 62 .

FIGS. 62(a) to 62(d) are examples of the look-ahead effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are common hits indicating that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time-saving hit. It is a figure which shows the process which a pending|holding image changes from a system look-ahead production form to a big-hit system look-ahead production form. Changes in the common winning system look-ahead production form include changes in the expected value level of the win (shorter time win, big win) and changes in which it is clear whether the type of win is a big win or a short time win. is included. 62(a) to 62(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H" or "71H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 62(d) correspond to "43H" in FIG.

In this embodiment, both the color indicating the expected value level for the big hit and the shape indicating the expected value level for the time saving hit are used as a common hit system look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility for both the big hit and the time saving hit. is displayed.

In FIG. 62 (a), the first reservation area 411 and the second reservation area 412, the normal reservation image is displayed in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, the third reservation area 413 and the fourth reservation area 414 The reserved image is not displayed and only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 62(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 62(a). Sub CPU301, the first reservation area 411 ~ fourth reservation area 41
4, the form (for example, color and shape) of the pending image shown in
are displayed differently depending on the expected value for In this embodiment, if the look-ahead effect is not executed or if the expected value for winning is the lowest, the pending image is displayed with a white triangle,
The expected value for short hits increases in the order of “blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star”.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 62(b), the first reservation area 411 and the second reservation area 412
is a white triangle (expected value level "0"), and the form of the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 413 is a yellow pentagon (expected value level "2"). .

FIG. 62(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62(b), and the form of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. , second
Yellow pentagon to green hexagon (expected value level "3") when shifted to reserved area 412
It is an image showing that it changed to

FIG. 62(d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62(c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , first
When shifting to the reservation area 411, it changed from a green hexagon (a common hit-type look-ahead effect form with an expected value level of "3") to a rainbow triangle (a big hit-type look-ahead effect form with an expected value level of "5"). It is an image showing that.

That is, the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 62(b) and FIG. 62(c) is a form showing an expected value for the big hit or a form showing the expected value for the time saving hit. It is a production that is difficult to grasp from the form of. On the other hand, FIG.
), the form of the pending image indicates the expected value for the big hit, and the expected value is extremely high (for example, the expected value level "5"). It is.

Thus, in this embodiment, depending on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the look-ahead effect,
One of the look-ahead short-time hit production pattern indicating the expected value for the time-saving hit, the look-ahead big hit production pattern indicating the expected value for the big hit, and the look-ahead common hit production pattern indicating the expected value for the hit (jackpot or time-saving hit) It is configured to be able to execute a look-ahead effect with a pattern. Then, when the read-ahead performance is executed in the read-ahead common win performance pattern, the player is given the interest of whether the pending image changes to the big win system look-ahead performance form or the time-saving winning system look-ahead performance form. It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, the form of the pending image showing the expected value for time saving does not necessarily have to be changed one by one in the order of “blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star” Instead, for example, it may be changed to "yellow pentagon (common hit system look-ahead production form) → red triangle (big hit system look-ahead production form)", or "green hexagon (common hit system look-ahead production form) → It may be changed to "triangular star (time-saving hit system look-ahead production form)". In addition, it is not necessary to start the form of the pending image showing the expected value for the hit from the blue square with the lowest expected value,
For example, it may start from the red circle.

Also, the form of the hold image indicating the expected value for the win does not necessarily have to be changed when the hold shifts, and may be changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the change, for example.

In addition, in FIG. 62, by changing the common winning system look-ahead performance mode, the expected value for deriving any winning (big win or short-time winning) is changed, or the expected win is changed from an unknown state to a big win. However, instead of or in addition to this, for example, the sub CPU 301 may execute a look-ahead effect shown below. In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before changing to the big hit determination look-ahead effect form.
- A look-ahead effect that changes from a common hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit confirmed look-ahead effect form.
・Change from common hit-type look-ahead production form to big hit-type look-ahead production form, and then,
A look-ahead effect that changes to a big hit confirmed look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-4. Modified example of common hit system look-ahead production form]
In addition, as the form of the pending image, the common hit system look-ahead production form indicating that there is a possibility for both the jackpot and the time saving hit is not necessarily the color that indicates the expected value for the jackpot,
It is not limited to the form represented by both the shape showing the expected value for the time saving hit. Instead of this, for example, a dedicated common hit-based look-ahead effect form may be provided. When a dedicated common hit system look-ahead performance form is provided, it becomes possible to have expectations for both big wins and short-time wins, and since the expected values of each are unknown, it will be possible to adapt to future changes in the performance mode. The game can be played with anticipation, and interest can be improved.

FIGS. 63(a) to 63(d) show an example of a prefetch effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show a pending image from a dedicated common win system prefetch effect form to a big win system prefetch effect form. It is a figure which shows the process which changes. 63(a) to 63(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H" or "71H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 63(d) correspond to "31H" in FIG. 57 or FIG.

Also, FIGS. 64(a) to 64(d) are examples of the prefetch effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and from the exclusive common winning system prefetch effect form to the time saving system prefetch effect form FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a process in which a held image changes to . It should be noted that the look-ahead hit type production patterns shown in FIGS.
, or "63H", and the look-ahead expected value rendering patterns shown in FIGS. 64(a) to 64(d) correspond to "31H" in FIG.

63(a) and 64(a), the first reservation area 411 and the second reservation area 412
, a normal pending image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed, and the third pending area 41
No reserved image is displayed in the third and fourth reserved areas 414, and only frames are displayed.

In FIG. 63(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 63(a).

Similarly, in FIG. 64(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 64(a).

In both FIG. 63(b) and FIG. 64(b), the form of the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 413 is a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form, for example, a glittering form. By changing the degree of brightness of the light, the expected value level can be changed.

FIG. 63(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. It is an image showing that the look-ahead effect form is shifted to the second reservation area 412 as it is.

Similarly, FIG. 64(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64(b), and in FIG. It is an image showing that the common hit system look-ahead effect form is shifted to the second reservation area 412 as it is.

FIG. 63(d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 63(c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , first
When shifting to the reservation area 411, the red triangle (
This is an image showing that the expected value level of the jackpot has changed to "4").

On the other hand, FIG. 64(d) is an image in which the suspension is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64(c), and in FIG. When the form is shifted to the first reservation area 411, it is an image showing that it has changed from the dedicated common winning system look-ahead production form to a white circle (expected value level "4" for time saving).

In this way, even when the look-ahead performance form is represented by the dedicated common win-type look-ahead performance form, the special common win-type look-ahead performance form is changed to the big win-type look-ahead performance form and the time-saving hit-type look-ahead performance form. It is possible to make the player have interest in which way it will change, and to increase interest.

[1-11. Signal output outside the machine]
Next, it is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko machine (for example, hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), island computer (not shown) provided on each island). Signals are explained. In addition, although the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be described in this embodiment, it may be possible to input the signal from the outside of the first pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. Signals output from each CH of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are, for example, "prize ball information 1", "
door/frame open”, “external information 1” to “external information 8”, “prize ball information 2” and “security”. However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals. It may be configured such that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 65 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 65, CN1 outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1", and CH2
, the signal of "door/frame open" is output, and each of CH3 to CH10 outputs "external information 1
to "external information 8" are output, a signal of "prize ball information 2" is output from CH11, and a signal of "security" is output from CH12. The conditions for outputting signals from the first pachinko game machine to the outside are as shown in FIG.

Next, an example of a timing chart of signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine is
A signal of "prize ball information 1" will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 65, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 66 is an example of a timing chart of the signal of "prize ball information 1" out of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, a payout detection switch (not shown) turns from off to on each time one prize ball is paid out. In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the large winning opening 131 (Fig. 4
) when a game ball wins, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball wins a start port (first start port 120 or second start port 140 (both see FIG. 4)) For example, three prize balls are paid out, and when game balls enter the general prize winning opening 122 (see FIG. 4), for example, four prize balls are paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for 120 msec, for example, each time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 waits, for example, 120 ms at the timing when the payout detection switch for the tenth prize ball is turned on, starting from the previous output of the signal "prize ball information 1".
During ec, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output. It should be noted that outputting the "prize ball information 1" signal at the timing when the payout detection switch for the tenth prize ball is turned on is merely an example. Any period from when it is turned on to when it is turned off is sufficient. In addition, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output every time 10 prize balls are paid out.
The output for msec is also merely an example, and the output timing and output time of the signal of "prize ball information 1" can be set as appropriate.

Next, an example of the "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine, will be described. A "security" signal is a signal output mainly when an error occurs.

FIG. 67 is a table showing an example of an overview of the errors in the first pachinko game machine. , the signal of "security" (illustrated as "security signal" in FIG. 67)
is a table showing the output time and remarks of .

Although the first pachinko game machine does not have a big winning hole for a small win, FIG.
It also describes the small winning big winning opening abnormal winning error. In addition, in FIG. 67, the big winning opening 131 is described as a big winning opening.

Note that the outline of errors shown in FIG. 67 is an example, and only some of them may be judged to be errors, or, for example, errors not shown in FIG. 67 may be judged to be errors. You may do so. Errors not shown in FIG. 67 that are judged to be errors include:
For example, solenoid monitoring sensor error when the solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is on or off for more than a predetermined time, not discharged inside the big winning opening (large winning opening for big winning or big winning opening for small winning) This corresponds to a large winning hole entry/ejection error when there is a game ball or a prize is won in the big winning hole when the big winning hole is not open, a vibration sensor error when the vibration sensor is on for a predetermined time, and the like. Also, for example, a specific area is provided in the big winning opening for big hit, and based on the game ball passing through the specific area during the execution of the big winning game control, the probability variable control is executed after the big winning game control is finished. , it will be judged as an error even if there is no undischarged game ball inside the big winning opening for the big win, but the game ball passes through the specific area. preferably configured.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, the sub CPU 30
1 (see FIG. 6). Sub CPU that received fraud detection related information
301 executes notification control according to the content of the error.

Below, the main CPU
The control by 201 and sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6 for both) will be briefly described.

As shown in FIG. 67, for example, after the initial power is turned on, if one winning prize is detected before the first big winning big winning opening is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) It is determined that an abnormal prize winning error has occurred, and a "security" signal is output for 12 seconds. In addition, it transmits to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) a fraud detection-related command indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, since the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds regardless of the error, an external device (for example, the hall computer 186 (FIG. 6) ) and the island computer (not shown)) can recognize the occurrence of an error by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot ascertain the content of the error. However, without being limited to this, for example, by changing the output time of the "security" signal according to the content of the error, etc., the device outside the aircraft that receives the "security" signal can grasp the content of the error. good too.

When the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) receives a fraud detection-related command indicating, for example, a big winning opening abnormal winning error for big winning, for example, it executes all or part of the following notification control,
When, for example, 30 seconds have passed since the fraud detection-related command was received, the notification control described below is terminated.
Information control for displaying characters such as "large winning opening abnormal winning error" on the display device 7 (see FIG. 6, for example) via the display control circuit 304;
- Notification control for outputting a voice such as "It is a special winning opening abnormal winning error" from the speaker 32 (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the voice control circuit 305.
• Notification control for outputting, for example, a beep sound from the speaker 32 via the voice control circuit 305 .
Information control for causing the LED group 46 (see FIG. 6, for example) through the LED control circuit 306 to light up in red, for example.

Note that if there is a power failure before, for example, 30 seconds have passed since the fraud detection-related command was received, the sub CPU 301 terminates the above-described notification control.

Further, for example, when the sub CPU 301 receives a fraud detection-related command indicating an abnormal jackpot winning error during execution of the above-described notification control indicating the occurrence of a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error, the above-described Re-execute notification control.

Next, FIG. 6 shows the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine according to the game state.
8 for explanation. FIG. 68 is a table showing an example of output conditions of signals output to the outside according to the game state in the first pachinko game machine. In FIG. 68, signals to be output are indicated by ◯, and signals not to be output are indicated by x.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, different signals are output depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201 . For example, during the normal game state (other than during the big hit / small hit, during probability variation / time reduction), neither signal is output, ” and “external information 7” signals are output, and the signals of “external information 3”, “external information 5” and “external information 7” are output during the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot and during the small hit) output. In addition, in a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, signals of “external information 3” and “external information 6” are output during a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (other than during a big hit, other than during a small hit) be done.

In this way, by varying the signal output according to the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201, an external device capable of receiving the signal (for example, the hall computer 1
86 (see FIG. 6) and the island computer (not shown)) can grasp the game status of the pachinko gaming machine that is the source of the external information.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the normal game state) is during the normal game state apart from)
is the same as the signal output to Similarly, during the small hit game control process (during the low-probability short-time game state)
The signal that is output to is the same as the signal that is output during the low-probability short-time gaming state (other than during the big hit, other than during the small hit), and is output during the small-hit game control process (during the high-probability short-time gaming state) The signal that
It is the same as the signal that is output during the high-accuracy short-time gaming state (other than during the big hit, other than during the small hit), and the signal that is output during the small-hit game control process (during the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state) is highly accurate. It is the same as the signal output during the non-time-saving gaming state (other than during the big hit, during the small hit). That is, an external device capable of receiving a signal (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or an island computer (not shown)) executes a small winning game control process in the pachinko gaming machine that is the source of the external information. It is not possible to ascertain whether or not However, instead of this, by making the signal output during the small-win game control process different from the signal output when the small-win game control process is not being performed, the small-win game machine that is the source of the external information can win a small win. Whether or not the game control process is being executed may be grasped by an external device capable of receiving a signal.

In addition, during the low-probability short-time gaming state shown in FIG. During the time-saving game state) and during the small winning game control process (during the high-probability time-saving game state) are signals that are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, it may be said that the time saving control is being executed when both the electric sapo control and the special figure shortening control are being executed, and only the electric sapo control is executed among the electric sapo control and the special figure shortening control It may be said that the time saving control is being executed when there is, and it may be said that the time saving control is being executed when only the special figure shortening control is executed among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control.

Further, in the explanation of the first pachinko game machine mentioned above, under the control of the main CPU,
It is possible to control the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state (the function of the A time-saving game state, the function of the B time-saving game state, and the function of the C time-saving game state are installed). Although described as a premise, it is not limited to this. For example, only one of the functions of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state function, and the C time-saving game state function (for example, the function of the A time-saving game state) is installed, and the other function ( For example, it may be a pachinko game machine that does not include the function of the B time saving game state and the function of the C time saving game state). Also, among the functions of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state function, and the C time-saving game state function, two functions (for example, the A time-saving game state function, and the B time-saving game state function or C time-saving It may be a pachinko game machine that has only the function of the game state) and does not have other functions (for example, the function of the B time-saving game state or the function of the C time-saving game state).

Also, for example, like a pachinko game machine called ST machine, after the jackpot game state is over, 1
In a pachinko game machine in which the variable probability flag is set to ON with a probability of 00%, even if it is configured so as not to install any of the functions of the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state function, and the C time saving game state function. good.

[2. Second pachinko machine]
Next, the second pachinko game machine will be explained. The second pachinko machine is, as described above, a type 1 pachinko machine called digipachi. However, the second pachinko machine differs from the first pachinko machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. Therefore, regarding the game board unit and electrical configuration,
There is a difference from the first pachinko game machine.

Hereinafter, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, for example, the basic configuration such as the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal plate 1184 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the outside of the second pachinko game machine (For example, a hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 described later) or an island computer (not shown) provided on each island). The description of the common points will be omitted as much as possible.

Also, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko game machine are used for the configuration explained with reference to the drawings used in the explanation of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, in the explanation of the second pachinko game machine, even if the configuration described with reference to the newly adopted drawings is the same as the first pachinko game machine in terms of functions, etc., the first pachinko game Description will be made using reference numerals and step numbers different from those of the machine.

By the way, as a pachinko machine capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are suspended, for example Including a pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as "priority variation machine") in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition of the first special symbol, and the first and second starting openings. There is a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "sequential variation machine") in which the starting condition is satisfied in the order of winning.

[2-1. Game board unit]
FIG. 69 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 1010 provided in the second pachinko game machine. As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 has a game area 1105.
is formed.

Various members arranged in the game area 1105 of the second pachinko machine (for example, the first start port 1120, etc.) are arranged in the game area 105 of the first pachinko machine (see FIG. 4). There are some things in common, but I will explain it once again.

As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 formed with a game area 1105 in which a shot game ball can roll and flow down;
10, a center accessory 1115 arranged substantially in the center of the game area 1105, a first starting port 1120, a general prize winning port 1122, a passage gate unit 1125, a special electric accessory unit 1130, and a second starting. Mouths 1140A, 1140B and normal electric accessory unit 1145
, a small win unit 1150 , an LED unit 1160 , an outlet 1178 , and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 1010 . In addition, LE
The D unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the description thereof is omitted for this second pachinko game machine.

(game panel)
The game panel 1100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007 . In addition, a guide rail 1110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) or the like is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward toward the game area 1105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

In addition, behind the game panel 1100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 1100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only a portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 1100 may be made of a member (for example, wooden) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rails 1110 are arcuate outer rails and inner rails (both unreferenced).
Consists of The game area 1105 is partitioned (demarcated) by guide rails 1110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding a game ball shot from a shooting device 1006 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105 .

(Center role)
The center accessory 1115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 1100, and has an arc-shaped center rail 1116 above. The game balls shot toward the game area 1105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116. - 特許庁

The game ball shot toward the game area 1105 by the shooting device 1006 is the left area 1
106 or right region 1107. A game ball flowing down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 1100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the amount of operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 1106 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 1107 .

Further, the center accessory 1115 is formed with a warp entrance 1117 at its left outer peripheral edge portion into which a game ball flowing down the left area 1106 can enter. A game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be guided to a stage 1118 formed in the center accessory 1115 . The stage 1118 is formed so that a game ball can roll in the left-right direction at the lower front of the display area of the display device 1007 . Note that the stage 1118 may be formed in a plurality of stages such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

Behind the center of the stage 1118 in the horizontal direction is a chance entrance 11 into which game balls can enter.
19 is formed, and the game ball entering the chance entrance 1119 is
is configured to be emitted directly above the Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 1117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 1117 but did not enter the chance entrance 1119. Mouth 1
It is designed to win (pass) 120.

(First start port)
The first starting port 1120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 1007, and is arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins the first starting port 1120, the first starting port switch 1121
(see FIG. 70 described later). In addition, the game ball hit to the right is the first start port 112
It may be possible to win 0. Also, instead of or in addition to the first start port 1120,
A game ball hit to the right may win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the start condition is established. When game balls enter the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General prize winner)
A plurality of general winning openings 1122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 1007.
It is arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). When the game ball wins the general winning opening 1122, the general winning opening switch 1
123 (see FIG. 70 described later).

When the winning (passing) of game balls to the general winning opening 1122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the general winning opening 11
The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to 22 is not limited to four.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the general winning hole 1122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but it is not necessarily limited to this.
In place of or in addition to 122, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 1125 is arranged in the right area 1107, and includes a passing gate 1126 configured to allow almost right-handed game balls to pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of the game ball to the passing gate 1126. 1127 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later).

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126 is detected by the passage gate switch 1127, the start information of the normal design is extracted, and the extracted start information of the normal design is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). . The reserved starting information of the normal symbol is usually subjected to the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passage gate switch 1127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 1125 may be located in the left region 1106 instead of or in addition to the right region 1107 .

Also, the passage gate 1126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous actuating device. That is, the condition for transition from a non-jackpot game state (for example, a normal game state) to a jackpot game state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous actuating device operate, but the stop display mode indicating the jackpot. When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not to operate the character product continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the conditional device is operating, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 1126, that is, when the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 1127 (see FIG. 70 described later), the accessory continuous operation device is activated. You may make it operate|move and it may be made to shift to a jackpot game state.

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 includes a big winning prize opening 1131 and a big winning prize opening 1 for big winning.
Big winning opening count switch 1132 for big hits for detecting winning (passing) of game balls to 131
(See FIG. 70 to be described later) and the special electric accessory 1133 are integrated. The special electric accessory unit 1130 has a passage gate unit 1125 in the right area 1107.
is placed below.

The big winning opening 1131 for big hits is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the big winning big winning opening 1131, a big winning big winning opening that can win a left-handed game ball, or a center accessory 1115 A big winning opening for winning a game ball may be arranged in the upper part of the .

In addition, the big winning opening 1131 for big winning is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when controlled in a big winning game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. This is the winning entrance. Big winning opening count switch 1132 for big winning (see FIG. 70 to be described later)
) detects that a game ball has entered the big winning hole 1131, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize winning opening 1131 for big win is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 1135 (see FIG. 70 to be described later) that operates the special electric shutter 1134 . The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the special electric shutter 1134
An open state in which winning (passing) of game balls to 31 is possible or easy, and a big winning opening 113 for big winning
A closed state in which winning (passing) of a game ball to 1 is impossible or difficult, and a state transition is possible. It should be noted that the state transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening 1131 for big win is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the jackpot gaming state is the jackpot jackpot 113
1 is a game state in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which a closed state is shifted to an open state over a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds.

(Second start port)
In this embodiment, as the second starting ports, the second starting port 1140A and the second starting port 1140B
are arranged in the game area 1105, and these second start ports 1140A and 1140B are
In both cases, right-handed game balls can win prizes (left-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win)
It has become. However, it is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win the second starting hole 1140A and/or the second starting hole 1140B.

When a game ball wins in the second starting port 1140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141A (see FIG. 70 described later). Also, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later). Second starting port 114
Even if the game ball wins in any of 0A and 1140B, it triggers the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

Second starting port 1
When the winning (passing) of the game ball to 140A and 1140B is detected, the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, 4 at maximum). The withheld starting information is subjected to the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the second starting ports 1140A, 114
The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to 0B is not limited to this.

By the way, in the present embodiment, on the downstream side of the flow direction of the game ball that is hit to the right but does not win the big winning opening 1131, there are two flow paths 1107a and 1107b vertically as the flow path of the game ball. is formed. A game ball that is hit to the right and does not enter the jackpot jackpot 1131 and flows further downstream is, for example, a branch nail 11 shown in FIG.
08, it is distributed to the upper flow path 1107a or the lower flow path 1107b.

The second starting port 1140A is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a can win. However, most of the game balls that flow down the upper flow path 1107a are the second starting port 11
It is not essential to be configured to win 40A. It may be possible to win a prize at an expected value (for example, approximately 1/3 to 1/5). In addition, game balls that have flowed down the upper flow path 1107a but have not won the second starting port 1140A are configured to be discharged from the out port 1178 to the outside of the machine.

The second starting port 1140B is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can win prizes.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 1145 is disposed on the lower flow path 1107b side, and includes a winning opening through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) of the game balls, and a winning opening to the winning opening. It is a unit body in which a switch for detecting winning of a game ball and a normal electric accessory 1146 are integrated. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141B. However, it is not essential to use the above winning opening as the second starting opening 1140B. For example, the first starting opening may be used as the above winning opening.

The ordinary electric accessory 1146 includes a protruding plate-type shutter 1147 for ordinary electricity that can move back and forth, and a solenoid for ordinary electricity 1148 (see FIG. 70 described later) for operating the shutter 1147 for ordinary electricity. The normal electric accessory 1146, that is, the normal electric shutter 1147 is in an open state in which the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second start port 1140B is possible or easy, and the second start port 114
A closed state in which winning of a game ball to 0B is impossible or difficult, and a closed state can be changed to.
Instead of the general electric shutter 1147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, a movable member called a so-called electric tulip made of, for example, a blade member may be employed. Also, the movable member is
Including blade type, door type, projecting plate type, etc.

(small hit unit)
The small winning unit 1150 includes a small winning large winning opening 1151 and a small winning large winning opening 1151.
A small winning large winning opening count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball to, a small winning shutter 1153 that can move forward and backward, and this small winning shutter 1153 It is a unit body integrated with a small hit solenoid 1154 that can be operated.

The small-hit shutter 1153 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction so that the small-hit big winning opening 115
An open state in which the winning (passing) of the game ball to 1 is possible or easy, and a big winning opening 1151 for a small winning
A closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to win a prize, and a state transition to the closed state are possible.

When the game ball wins when the small-hit big winning opening 1151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small-hitting big winning opening count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70 described later). When a game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch 1152 for a small hit, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big winning hole 1151 for small winning is not limited to ten.

Also, the small winning unit 1150 is arranged downstream of the normal electric accessory unit 1145 in the downward flow path 1107b. Therefore, when the second starting port 1140B is opened by the operation of the normal electric accessory 1146, even if the small winning big winning port 1151 is opened, the game ball flowing down the downward flow path 1107b is small. Before reaching the big winning opening 1151 for winning, in order to win the second starting opening 1140B provided on the upstream side,
It becomes difficult (or impossible) to win the small winning big winning opening 1151.例文帳に追加

In the present embodiment, the big winning opening 1131 for big winning and the big winning opening 1151 for small winning are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this. The big winning opening opened during execution of the small winning game control process may be the same big winning opening.

(out port)
The out port 1178 is a variety of winning ports (for example, the first starting port 1120, the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B, the big winning prize port 1131
, general winning port 1122, etc.) to discharge out of the machine. This out port 1178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 1105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 1178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning ports 1122, between the normal electric accessory unit 1145 and the small winning unit 1150, etc. A game ball flowing down the region 1105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100 as described above. This back unit is a sub-control circuit 1300
(See FIG. 70 described later).
The performance accessory group 1058 is arranged around the display area of the display device 1007, for example. At least one or more of the performance accessory group 1058 or the performance accessory constituent members constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[2-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 70, the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine will be described. Figure 70
is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a second pachinko game machine. Although the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine has some in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, it will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 70, the second pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 1200 for controlling the game, a sub-control circuit 1300 for controlling the effect in accordance with the progress of the game, and a payout/fire circuit. It is composed of a control circuit 1400 and a power supply circuit 1450 .

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on, processes related to game operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (readable/writable memory), an initial reset circuit 1204
and a backup capacitor 1207, etc., which are housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 1201 is connected with a main ROM 1202, a main RAM 1203, an initial reset circuit 1204, and the like. The main CPU 1201 has a WDT that monitors the operation.
(watchdog timer) and functions to prevent fraud are built in.

The main ROM 1202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the second pachinko game machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like. Main CPU 12
01 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 1202 .

The main RAM 1203 is provided with storage areas for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 1203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201 and has a function of storing various flags and variable values. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201, but the RAM is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 1203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 is an I/O circuit connected to be communicable with various devices.
A port 1205 and a command output port 1206 connected to the sub-control circuit 1300 so as to output various commands are also provided.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200 . For example, the main control circuit 1200 includes a normal symbol display portion 1161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 1162, a first special symbol display portion 1163, a second special symbol display portion 1164, a first special symbol reservation display portion 1165,
Second special symbol holding display unit 1166, probability variation notification display unit 1167, time reduction notification display unit 11
68, a general electric solenoid 1148, a special electric solenoid 1135, and a small winning solenoid 1154 are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 1200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 1170, an error notification monitor 1172, and the like. Main control circuit 12
00 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 1205 .

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, set values described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 1201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 also displays a setting change code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later. It is also possible to display a setting-confirming code or the like indicating . As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed as a special pattern (for example, a setting change pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 1200 includes a first starting switch 1121, a second starting switch 1
141A, 1141B, passage gate switch 1127, big winning opening count switch 1132 for big winning, general winning opening switch 1123 and big winning opening counting switch 11 for small winning
52 etc. are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detect signal is sent to I/O port 1.
205 to the main control circuit 1200 .

Further, the main control circuit 1200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function to call a hall attendant and a function to display the number of jackpots, and a hall computer 1186 that manages the pachinko machines in the hall as a whole. An external terminal board 1184, a setting key 1174 operated to change or confirm setting values in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later, backup data stored in the main RAM 1203 are stored by the manager of the game hall. A backup clear switch 1176 or the like that can be cleared in accordance with the operation of is connected. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 1176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later.

Also, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. The "inside a predetermined case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 corresponding to the case. A notch is provided, and when the pachinko game machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game center to expose the back surface, the manager of the game center operates the setting key 1174 and/or the backup key. Also included is one configured so that the clear switch 1176 can be contacted.

In this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. In this case also, a third party other than the manager of the game hall may operate the setting key 1174 or the backup clear switch 1.
Preferably, 176 is not easily accessible.

[2-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 1300 includes a sub CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work R
AM 1303, display control circuit 1304, audio control circuit 1305, LED control circuit 1306
, a role item control circuit 1307, a command input port 1308, and the like. Sub control circuit 1
300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 1200 .
Although not shown in FIG. 70, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 1302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the second pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. Sub CPU
1301 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the program ROM 1302 . In particular, the sub CPU 1301 controls game effects according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 .

A work RAM 1303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 1301 .

A display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 1007 . The display control circuit 1304 includes an image data ROM that stores VDP and data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A converter that converts image data into image signals. Equipped with a converter, etc.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 1301 . note that,
The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. FIG. In this manner, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 1032 . The audio control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, and an amplifier for amplifying audio signals (hereinafter referred to as AM
P) and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound output from the speaker 1032 . Sound source IC is sub C
One voice data is selected from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command from the PU 1301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 1032 .

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 1058). The role product control circuit 1307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each role product, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role product data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the role product control circuit 1307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 1301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 1301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 1308 is connected to the command output port 1206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 .

The payout/shooting control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/shooting control circuit 1400 includes a payout device 1082 capable of paying out game balls and causing game balls to be shot. A launching device 1006 capable of controlling ball lending, a card unit 1180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200, the payout/launch control circuit 1400 sends a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082 and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball lending operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180 . The ball lending operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving the return of a ball lending card storing cash data (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180 . The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180 . Although the operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 1400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation) when the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise. (not shown) to control the shooting of game balls.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit that is created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 1200, the sub-control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, and the like.

A power switch 1095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 1450 . The power switch 1095 is connected to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 130).
0, payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. basic specifications]
Next, basic specifications of the second pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. FIG. The second pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but in the following,
Descriptions related to setting functions are omitted.

In the second pachinko game machine, the normal game state in which neither the variable probability control nor the time reduction control is executed, the high probability time-saving game state in which both the variable probability control and the time reduction control are executed, and the time reduction control although the variable probability control is executed A high-probability non-time-saving game state that is not executed, and a low-probability short-time game state in which variable-probability control is not executed but time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 120
1 allows the game to progress in any one of these game states. However, the game state progressed under the control of the main CPU 1201 is not limited to this, and any one of the normal game state, the high-probability short-time game state, the high-probability non-short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state progresses. You may choose not to do so. For example, the game progresses in any one of the normal game state, the high-probability short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state, and the game does not progress in the high-probability non-short-time game state. good.

In the present embodiment, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the high-probability short-time game state, the high-probability non-short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state.
The sub CPU 1301 determines the regular game mode (for example, whether to play right or left).
For example, control to display in the display area of the display device 1007 is executed.

[2-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 71 shows the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko game machine.
It is an example of a hit determination table of special symbols stored in .

The special symbol hit determination table is a special symbol hit determination process (S1034 in FIG. 78 to be described later).
reference), that is, the first start port 1120 or the second start port 1
A table referred to when a ``time saving hit'', a ``minor hit'', a ``jackpot'' or a ``losing'' is determined by lottery based on a big hit determination random number extracted when a game ball wins in 140A, 1140B. is. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the winning determination process for the first special symbol are "time-saving win", "big win", and "lose", and "minor win" is not included in the lottery targets. On the other hand, the lottery targets in the hit determination process for the second special symbol are "time-saving win", "minor win", "big hit", and "losing". However, a "small hit" may be included in the lottery target in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

As described above, the big hit determination random number value is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the random number for judging a big hit is 0 to 65535 (65536 types)
extracted from the However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines "time-saving win", "big win", or "lose" in the first special symbol win determination process based on the extracted big win determination random number value. In the hit determination table of the first special symbol, for each probability variation flag value (0 or 1), "
The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for judging a big hit determined as a "time-saving hit" and the corresponding judgment value data for a time-saving hit, the range (width) of the random number value for judging a big hit determined as a "jackpot" and this and the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number value determined as "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data.

In addition, in the second special symbol win determination process, the main CPU 1201 determines whether a "time-saving win", "minor win", "big win" or "losing" is determined based on the extracted big win determination random number value.
to decide. In the hit determination table of the second special symbol, the range (width) of the random number value for judging the big hit determined as "time saving hit" and the time saving hit decision value corresponding to this for each probability variation flag value (0 or 1) relationship with the data, the range (width) of the random number for judging a big hit determined as a "small hit" and the relationship with the corresponding judgment value data for judging a big hit, the random number for judging a big hit determined as a "big hit" The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number value determined as "losing" and the corresponding loss determination value data are stipulated. be.

In this embodiment, for example, the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
When the extracted random number for judging a big hit is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 120
1 determines that it is a "time saving hit", and determines the hit-loss determination value data as "time saving hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit" and hits and drops. The determination value data is determined as "big hit determination value data". In addition, when the extracted random number value for judging a big hit is any one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 120
1 is determined to be "losing", and the determination value data is determined as "losing determination value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201
It is determined as "time saving hit", and the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Also, the first
When the probability variation flag is ON during the special symbol hit determination process and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and sets the determination value data to " Big hit judgment value data” is determined. Also, if the extracted random number value for judging a big hit is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 judges it as "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

Similarly, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201
It is determined to be a "time saving hit", and the determination value data is determined as "time saving hit determination value data". Also, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit", The determination value data is determined as "small hit determination value data". In addition, the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted random number for jackpot determination is 22118 ~
22322, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit" and determines the determination value data as "big hit determination value data". Furthermore, the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number is 22323 to 65535
In either case, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is "losing", and determines the determination value data to be "losing determination value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for big hit determination is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201
It is determined as "time saving hit", and the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Also, the second
When the probability variation flag is ON during the special symbol hit determination process and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit" and stores the determination value data. Determined as "small hit judgment value data". In addition, the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number is 22118 to 2
2968, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit" and determines the determination value data as "big hit determination value data". Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 22969 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is "losing", and determines Change the value data to
"Loss Judgment Value Data".

Thus, in this embodiment, for example, among the random numbers for judging a big hit generated in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined width from 0 (for example, 0 to 22117 in the case of the hit judging process for the second special symbol)
), other judgment value data (for example,
It is assigned to time-saving hit judgment value data and small hit judgment value data). Also, from a predetermined value to the end (for example, if the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, 22
323 to 65535) are assigned to the loss judgment value data. Furthermore, the big-hit determination value data and the loss determination value data are allocated adjacently. By doing so, for example, when the probability variation flag is turned from OFF to ON (or from ON to OFF), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced by the amount that increases (or reduces) the width of the big hit judgment value data ( or larger), it is possible to change the big hit probability without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time saving judgment value data and small hit judgment value data).

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, and the "time saving hit" winning probability when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed By making the probabilities different from each other, it is possible to provide variations to the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 71, the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed is compared to the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. , it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the normal game state, which tends to be monotonous.

However, the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed. may In this case, for example, by overlapping the time-saving game state when winning the "time-saving hit" in the time-saving game state, when the "time-saving win" is won just before the time-saving game state ends, the time-saving game state is substantially It will be extended, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline of interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 can determine that the result of the hit determination process is "time saving win" regardless of whether the variable probability flag is on or off. . However, when the variable probability flag is off (normal game state, time saving game state), if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", the main CPU 1201 controls the time saving game state, but the probability change flag is on. In the case, even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", it is not controlled to the time saving game state.

[2-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 72 shows the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko game machine.
It is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in.

The special symbol determination table is the first starting port 1120 or the second starting port 1140A, 1140
When selecting the "selection symbol command" and the "designation command" for determining the stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins in B and the above-mentioned win-lose judgment value data. (That is, when executing the special symbol determination process of S1035 of FIG. 78 described later), it is a table referred to. The "selection symbol command" is a command for specifying a symbol determined according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and the "symbol specification command" is a symbol to be displayed when the special symbol variable display is stopped. This is the command to specify. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 72, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201, for example, outputs the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 1201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 1201
"z1" is selected as the selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Also, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
The main CPU 1201 selects, for example, a selection symbol command and a symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, the main C
PU 1201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and "z3" as the symbol designation command.
zA3”. Also, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 2 to 9,
The main CPU 1201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command. In addition, the design random number of the first special design is 60 ~
99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command.
is selected, and "zA4" is selected as the design designation command.

Also, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
For example, even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 120
1 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 1201
"z8" is selected as the selection symbol command, and "zA6" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Also, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
For example, the main CPU 1201 selects "z10" as the selected symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the special symbol is 0 to 99.

In addition, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201 executes a small hit game control process. In the small-hit game control process, for example, the small-hit shutter 1153 (see FIG. 69) is operated, and the small-hit big winning opening 1151 (
(See FIG. 69) can be entered (passed) by a game ball, or can be controlled to be easily opened, and a prize ball can be paid out.

Also, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
For example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 29, the main CPU 1201 selects "z11" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA9" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 30 to 59, the main C
PU1201 selects "z12" as the selection symbol command, and selects "zA10" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z13" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

Also, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
For example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201
"z14" is selected as the selection symbol command, and "zA11" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, in this embodiment, with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71), the hit/lose determination value data is determined based on the extracted big hit determination random number value, and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number value for judging a big hit and the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the winning/losing of the special symbol, the selected symbol command and the symbol specifying command may be determined together.

Although the explanation is omitted in the second pachinko game machine, the main RO of the main control circuit 1200
M1202 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the special symbol stop mode derived to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164 (see FIG. 70) when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped. It is a table referred to when making a decision according to a design command. In addition, the special symbol display units 1163 and 1164 derive the display mode of the time saving win, the big win display mode, the small win display mode or the losing display mode based on the result of the special symbol win determination process. In addition, the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (Fig. 1
2 (B)), the sub-control circuit 13
00 is stored in the program ROM 1302 .

[2-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 73 shows the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko game machine.
It is an example of a hit type determination table stored in . The winning type determination table determines the aspect of the winning game state and/or the aspect of the subsequent game state according to the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol (that is, when determining the mode of the game state after that) S10 in FIG.
36 when executing the hit type determination process). The mode of the winning game state shown in FIG. 73 shows the mode of the big winning game state or the mode of the small winning game state. Further, the aspect of the game state after that indicates the aspect of the game state after the end of the winning game state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the winning game state, so the mode of the game state after that is the C time saving game state. Aspects are shown.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 1201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and to set the number of times of time saving to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" and "z8", the main CPU 1201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number of times to 50 times. to decide. When the selected symbol command is "z2" and "z9", the main CPU 1201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number of times to 100 times. to decide. When the result of the special symbol win determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described time saving win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164,
A time saving flag is set on and the determined number of times of time saving is set without controlling to a jackpot game state, and control to a C time saving game state is possible. In addition, since the winning game state is not controlled when the result of the special symbol hitting determination process is "time saving hit", the aspect of the winning game state is not determined. In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", regardless of the game state when the hit determination process of this special symbol is performed, the number of times of time saving to be set is the same. . However, it is not limited to this, and the number of set time reduction times may be varied according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

Thus, in the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", according to the selected symbol command determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the time saving number of times to be set are making it different. By doing so, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", it is possible to give variation to the progress of the game after that, and it is possible to suppress the decline of interest. It becomes possible.

By the way, as described above, when the variable probability flag is ON, the main CPU 1201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, even if the variable probability flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 1201 performs a lottery for "shorter working hours" as shown in FIG. In this case, although the display mode of the time saving hit indicating that the "time saving win" is won is derived to the special symbol display parts 1163 and 1164, it is not controlled to the C time saving game state. In addition, the main CPU 1201 performs a lottery for "shorter working hours" even if the probability variable flag is on, and when the result of the hit determination process is "shorter working hours", the display mode of losing is forcibly changed to a special symbol. The information may be led out to display units 1163 and 1164 . Furthermore,
When the variable probability flag is ON, the time saving hit determination value data is not assigned to the big hit determination random number value, that is, the winning determination process not including the "time saving hit" in the lottery result may be performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability flag is ON, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is off even if the probability variable flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the state is shifted to a high-probability time-saving game state. You may do so.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", the mode of the winning game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows. For example, if the selected pattern command is "z10
, the main CPU 1201 selects the small winning big winning port 1 as the mode of the small winning gaming state.
151 (see FIG. 69) is determined to be opened once. The result of the special symbol hit judgment process is "
If it is a small win, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described display mode of the small win to the second special symbol display unit 1164, then sets the number of openings of the determined small win big winning opening 1151, It is possible to control the winning game state. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", the main CPU 1201 does not change the probability variation flag and the time saving flag after the end of the small hit game state, and is controlled to the small hit game state. Return to the game state just before the game.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the mode of the winning game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" and "z11", the main CPU 1
201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as a mode of the jackpot game state, and determines to set ON only the variable probability flag out of the variable probability flag and the short time flag as the mode of the subsequent game state, and sets the variable probability number. is set to 10000 times. In this case, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and after the jackpot game state ends, can be controlled to the high-accuracy non-work-time-saving game state. becomes.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z4", "z5", and "z12", the main CPU 1201 sets the number of rounds to 10 as the mode of the jackpot gaming state.
Decide on rounds, 4 rounds, and 10 rounds. In addition, as a form of the game state after that, in any case, it is decided to set both the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON, and the probability variable number of times and the time saving number of times are both set to 10000 times. . In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display portion 1163 or the second special symbol display portion 1164, then controls the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, It becomes controllable to a highly reliable time-saving game state.

Also, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z13", the main CPU 1
201 has four rounds and one
Decide on 0. In addition, as a mode of the subsequent game state, in either case, it is determined to set ON only the time saving flag out of the probability changing flag and the time saving flag. Also, the number of times of time reduction to be set is determined to be set to 200 times, for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6", and determined to be set to, for example, 300 times when the selected symbol command is "z13". In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display portion 1163 or the second special symbol display portion 1164, then controls the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, It becomes controllable in a time-saving game state. The time saving game state controlled here is the A time saving game state. In addition, the mode of time-saving control in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (
Hereinafter also referred to as "time saving performance") is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, but may be different from the time saving performance in the A time saving.

Further, for example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), the main CPU 1201
Neither the mode of the winning game state nor the mode of the subsequent game state is set. i.e.
When the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss, the main CPU 1201 does not shift the game state, and continues control to the previous game state.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), as described above, the mode of the winning game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state modes are set, originally, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. However, in the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", for the sake of convenience, the figure 73.

Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table of FIG. Determine the hit/lose judgment value data based on the random number value for judging a big hit (make a hit/lose judgment)
to decide. After that, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table of FIG. The selected symbol command is determined based on the hit/loss determination value data, and the type of display mode derived to the special symbol display units 1163 and 1164 (for example,
He is trying to determine the kind of time saving hit, the kind of big hit). Incidentally, the hit-lose determination and the determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, but are excluded from being performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbols and the final display. not on purpose.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73, in the present embodiment, the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z6")
Or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z13"). On the other hand, the number of time saving in the C time saving game state controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1") or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). That is, the expected value of the time saving frequency in the A time saving game state is higher than the expected value of the time saving frequency in the C time saving game state. In this way, by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving game state, it is possible to increase the position of the "big hit". For example, if you did not win the "jackpot" even though you won the "jackpot" (
It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest that may occur due to being disadvantageous compared to the case of winning the "time saving hit".

In addition, instead of setting the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time-saving gaming state higher than the expected value of the number of time-savings in the C time-saving gaming state, the expected value of the number of time-savings in the C time-saving gaming state You may make it higher than an expected value. Thus, by making the C time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the A time-saving game state, the positioning of the "time-saving win" can be increased. For example, even if a state in which the ``jackpot'' is not won continues for a long period of time, if the ``shorter working hours'' is won, the game is controlled to a relatively advantageous C time-saving game state, thereby suppressing the decline in interest. It becomes possible to

[2-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 74 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of the second pachinko gaming machine. Also, FIG. 75 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start of the second pachinko gaming machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko game machine. It should be noted that the columns of "remarks" in FIGS. 74 and 75 are shown for convenience to facilitate understanding. Main CPU
1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120, and the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting ports 1140A, 1140B. determine the variation pattern of The special symbol variation pattern table of FIGS. 74 and 75 is a table referred to when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process of S1037 of FIG. 78 described later.

In the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to a special symbol variation pattern table for low start shown in FIG. 74, for example.

As shown in the special symbol variation pattern table for low start in FIG. 74, the main C
PU1201 sets a look-ahead flag, when the random number value for production|presentation selection extracted based on the prize-winning of the game ball to the 1st start opening 1120 is a specific random number value. The sub CPU 1301, which receives the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 1201, performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 decides whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 1301 may decide.

On the other hand, in a game state in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, that is, in a high-probability short-time game state, a high-probability non-short-time game state, or a low-probability short-time game state, for example, a special symbol for a high start shown in FIG. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 does not set the look-ahead flag when determining the special symbol variation pattern with reference to the high start special symbol variation pattern table, but the present invention is not limited to this.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the special symbol variation pattern is the type of special symbol,
It is determined based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (hit or lose), the random number for reach determination, and the random number for effect selection. However, it is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values instead of or in addition to any of the above.

Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start of FIG. 75, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start of FIG. The expected value of the number of variable display times of special symbols per unit time is greater than when it is determined. In particular, when determining the special symbol variation pattern with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start, the second special symbol is, for example, approximately 6000.
Variable display is performed for an extremely long time of 00 msec (for example, long fluctuations A to C).
On the other hand, when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for a very short period of time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, super-speed variation). .

The main CPU 1201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 1301 . The sub CPU 1301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 1032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201 .

Although not shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, for each set value, for example, the range of random number values for effect selection is changed so that the variation pattern (variable display time) of the determined special symbol is different. good too.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in the normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 74) is referred to determine the special symbol variation pattern, for example, high probability short game state, high probability non In the time-saving gaming state and the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 75), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a variation pattern table of special symbols for a high start, a plurality of variation pattern tables having different expected values of variable display times of special symbols per unit time are provided, for example, according to the type of time-saving gaming state, special symbols Different tables may be referred to when determining the variation pattern of .

In addition, the time-saving hit system reach A and B shown in the column of "remarks" in FIGS. 74 and 75 have the possibility of a time-saving hit as a result of the special symbol hit determination processing (there is no possibility of a big hit). It is a reach production that shows. Similarly, the big hit type reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is a possibility of a big hit (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be both a time saving hit and a big hit.

Also, although the description is omitted for the second pachinko machine, as in the first pachinko machine,
The main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 contains a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17), a normal symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern table ( 19) are stored. Then, the main CPU 1201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 1146 (see FIG. 69) in the same manner as in the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 1146 based on this.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 are the special symbol control process performed at S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, the special symbol control processing will be described below, and description of other processing executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. It should be noted that the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (Fig. 42, Fig. 86), etc. ), below, including the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko game machine, step numbers are changed,
The special symbol control processing will be explained again.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the special symbol control processing performed at S39 in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 76, the main CPU 1201 first, in S1001, the second
Load the special symbol control state number. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process regarding the variable display (special symbol game) of each special symbol. After executing the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 1201, when executing the special symbol control process, performs an address setting process of setting the address of the work area of each special symbol in the main RAM 1203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001. .

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 1201 also performs processing for checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control processing.
Then, the main CPU 1201 determines that the number of pending first special symbols is "0
”, the transmission reservation processing of the demonstration display command for the first special symbol is performed, and if the number of pending second special symbols is “0” for a certain period of time or more, the demonstration display command for the second special symbol Perform transmission reservation processing. It should be noted that the demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is the effect control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (S322 in FIG.
), it is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 . Then, when the sub-control circuit 1300 receives the demonstration display command, if the demonstration display command is a main special symbol demonstration display command, the sub CPU 1301 performs a demonstration display effect.

Although the second pachinko gaming machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub CPU 1301 can display either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol and the other is used as the sub special symbol, and the performance control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In this embodiment, in the normal game state in which the left-hand hitting is the regular game mode, the first special symbol is the main special symbol, and the right-hand hitting is the regular game mode (
For example, the second special symbol is the main special symbol in the high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state, and low-probability short-time gaming state. Then, the sub CPU 1301 performs variable display of decorative symbols for the main special symbols, display effects such as characters, and voice effects for the main special symbols.
For example, when the result of the sub-special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a big hit, for example, the sub-special symbol effect may be performed while performing the main special symbol effect. In addition, among the game states in which the right-handed hitting is the regular game mode, in the low-probability short-time game state, instead of the variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the variable display of the second special design, which is the main special design, other effects An image (for example, a countdown effect of the remaining number of times of time saving until the time saving game state ends) may be displayed.

At S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded at S1001.

When it is determined in S1002 that the second special symbol is not the time to start the variable display (NO determination in S1002), that is, when any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 performs the process to S1003. For example, NO determination is made in S1002 during execution of the big hit game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1002 that it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (when S1002 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 advances the processing to S1004.
to

At S1003, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. The main CPU 1201 is S
After executing the process of 1003, the process moves to S1004.

At S1004, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1004, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1005.

At S1005, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded at S1004.

When it is determined in S1005 that the timing for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is not reached (NO determination in S1005), that is, when any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 performs the process. to S1006. For example, NO determination is made in S1005 during execution of the big hit game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1005 that it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol (when S1005 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 advances the processing to S1007.
to

At S1006, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. Main CPU1
After executing the process of S1006, 201 shifts the process to S1007.

At S1007, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S1007, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1008.

At S1008, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded at S1007.

When it is determined in S1008 that the timing for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is not reached (NO determination in S1008), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1010.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1008 that the timing for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is reached (when S1008 determines YES), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is executed and variable display can be started. , the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1
009.

At S1009, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. Main CPU1
After executing the process of S1009, 201 moves the process to S1010.

At S1010, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1010, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1011.

At S1011, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded at S1010.

When it is determined in S1011 that the first special symbol is not the time to start variable display (NO determination in S1011), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and shifts the process to the main control main process (FIGS. 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1011 that the timing for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is reached (YES in S1011), no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and variable display can be started. , the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1
012.

At S1012, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. Main CPU1
After executing the process of S1012, 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It should be noted that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section, and performs the special symbol control processing (S
1001 to S1012) are preferably performed within the interrupt disabled section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the process related to the second special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, and when processing related to the first special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, in the order of priority, special symbol management processing described later is running.

[2-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 77, S1003 and S100 in the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76)
6, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1009 and S1012 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, for example, S1003 or S1009 during special symbol control processing special symbol management processing
When the second special symbol is called and executed, the second special symbol is processed, and when the special symbol management process is called and executed at S1006 or S1012 during the special symbol control process, the first special symbol is processed. becomes.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 77 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 1201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for special symbols is 0 (S
1021).

If it is determined that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 in S1021 (S1021 is N
If the determination is O), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 in S1021 (S102
1 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1022.

At S1022, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1022, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1023.
It should be noted that the main CPU 1201 performs the processes after S1023 based on the control state number read in the process of S1022.

At S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S1023 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 advances the process to S102.
Move to 4.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S1024 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1025.

At S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This S
The processing of 1025 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2".
The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.
When the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1.
026.

At S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. This S
The process of 1026 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3".
The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1027.

At S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening opening control process. This S
The processing of 1027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs jackpot end processing. This S102
The process of 8 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processing of S1023 to S1028, the main CPU 1201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 76). In addition, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1004 when the special symbol management process is called in S1003 during the special symbol control process, and returns to S1004.
If called at 006, the process returns to S1007, if called at S1009, the process returns to S1010, and if called at S1012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 78, at S1023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), the main C
A special symbol variable display start process executed by PU 1201 will be described. Figure 78 shows
It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called at S1023 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1031).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" in S1031 (S10
31 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" in S1031 (
If S1031 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1032.

At S1032, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S1032, even if S1031 is YES determination (that is, even if the special symbol start condition is satisfied), the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, if it is on (S1032 is NO If it is a judgment), the special symbol variable display start process is terminated without proceeding.

When it is determined that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on in S1032 (NO determination in S1032), as described above, the special symbol variable display start processing does not proceed, and the main CPU 1201 displays the special symbol variable display. End start processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol pause flag is off in S1032 (S10
32 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1033.

At S1033, the main CPU 1201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S1033, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1034.

In S1034, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination process is performed using a special symbol big hit determination random number value. In this embodiment, it is determined whether the first special symbol is a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a loss. It is determined whether there is In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets the time saving flag to ON when the result of the special symbol winning determination processing is a time saving hit, and turns on the small winning flag when the result of the special symbol winning determination processing is a small win. , and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the big hit flag is set to ON. After executing the process of S1034, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1035. The time-saving winning flag is turned off when shifting to the C time-saving game state, the small winning flag is turned off when the small winning game state is started, and the big winning flag is turned off when the big winning game state is started.

In the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process (see S1034), first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. If it is determined that it is not a small hit in this process, it is determined whether or not it is a time saving hit, and if it is determined that it is not a time saving hit in this process, it is determined to be a loss.

At S1035, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034) (for example, time saving hit, small hit, big hit,
or loss) is a process of judging or determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the error. In this process, referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72), using the symbol random number value of the special symbol,
The above-mentioned "selected pattern command" and "designated pattern command" are determined. In this embodiment, since there is only one kind of loss, there is no need to determine the stop symbol when the special symbol win determination process is a loss. A stop symbol may be determined when the result is a loss. After executing the process of S1035, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1036.

In S1036, the main CPU 1201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process of judging or determining the type of the winning when the result of the winning determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a winning (a time-saving winning, a small winning, or a big winning). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 73) is referred to, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1035). In addition, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but the number of types of big winnings may be one, and the type of time-saving winnings may also be one. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of wins, a plurality of types of other wins (for example, small wins) may be provided, or a plurality of types of losses may be provided. good. After executing the process of S1036, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1037.

In S1037, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75) is referred to, for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034), the reach determination random number or/and the effect selection random number. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the numerical value or the like. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 74), In the game state (for example, high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state) where right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, a special symbol variation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 75 ) to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1037, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1038.

At S1038, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S1037) is
It is determined as the fluctuation time of the special design. After executing the process of S1038, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1039.

At S1039, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (Fig. 77 S1024) is performed. After executing the process of S1039, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1040.

At S1040, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 is performed. The main CPU 1201 executes S1040
After executing the process of , the process moves to S1041.

At S1041, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S1041, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1.
Go to 042.

At S1042, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. In addition, the special symbol effect start command that is reserved for transmission in this process is the next effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the system timer interrupt process.
It is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 .

It should be noted that the main CPU 1201 sets an interruption prohibited section, and interrupts the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management processing (S1041) and the special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S1042)). It is preferable to perform it within the prohibited section.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, referring to FIGS. 79 and 80, S102 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77)
4, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 1201 will be described. 79 and 80 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed. In addition, in the special symbol variable display ending process described below, the special symbol to be processed is simply referred to as "special symbol", and the special symbol not to be processed is referred to as "other special symbol".

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1051).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" in S1051 (S10
51 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" in S1051 (
If S1051 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1052.

At S1052, the main CPU 1201 loads the special symbol pause flag value.
After executing the process of S1052, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1053.

At S1053, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off based on the special symbol pause flag value loaded at S1052.

If it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (NO determination in S1053), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the special symbol management processing (FIG. 77). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol pause flag is off in S1053 (S10
53 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1054.

At S1054, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S1025 in FIG. 77) can be performed after the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be performed. Main CPU 1201
executes the process of S1054, and then moves the process to S1055.

At S1055, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. In addition, the special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is the effect control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45), the sub control circuit 1300
sent to. After executing the process of S1055, the main CPU 1201 advances the process to S10.
Move to 56.

At S1056, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. The number-of-determined-symbols counter is a counter for counting the number of times special symbols are determined (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the count value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 . For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the number of remaining times of variable probability and the number of remaining times of reduced working hours. You can manage numbers. After executing the process of S1056, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1057.

At S1057, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol hit determination processing (S
1034) determines whether or not the result is a small hit.

In S1057, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a small hit (NO in S1057), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1059.

On the other hand, in S1057, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit (when S1057 determines YES), the main CPU 1
201 moves the process to S1058.

At S1058, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible not to start or stop the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the small winning game control process. Main CPU1
After executing the process of S1058, 201 moves the process to S1059.

In S1059, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol hit determination processing (S
1034) determines whether or not the result is a big hit.

In S1059, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a big hit (when S1059 determines NO), the main CPU 1201 terminates the special symbol variable display end process and processes. is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1059, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big hit (when S1059 determines YES), the main CPU 1
201 moves the process to S1060.

At S1060, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible not to start the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the big hit game control process. After executing the process of S1060, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1061.

At S1061, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the other special symbol is being variably displayed.

When it is determined that the other special symbol is not being variably displayed in S1061 (S1061
is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (S1
061 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1062.

At S1062, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. After executing the process of S1062, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1063.

In S1063, the main CPU 1201 sets a variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the test-firing test signal is output to the outside. This test-firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol is forcibly stopped due to a failure. Main CPU1
After executing the process of S1063, 201 moves the process to S1064.

At S1064, the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes the win flag of the other special symbol to a loss and sets it. By performing this processing, when the result of the hit determination processing for the special symbol to be processed (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big hit, the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the other special symbol hits. Even if the result of the determination process is a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss. The main CPU 1201 performs S10
64, the process proceeds to S1065.

At S1065, the main CPU 1201 performs processing for clearing the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S1065, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1066.

At S1066, the main CPU 1201 performs processing for setting a predetermined fixed waiting time to the timer for the other special symbol. In this process, the fixed waiting time is set so that when the special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating the big hit, the other special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating the loss. After executing the process of S1066, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1067.

At S1067, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2
” is set. After executing the process of S1067, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1.
Move to 068.

At S1068, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1068, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1069.

At S1069, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. The main CPU 1201, S1069
After executing the process of (1), the special symbol variable display end process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

Thus, in the special symbol variable display end process of the present embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78). If the result of (2) is a big hit and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, the process of forcibly making the variable display of the other special symbol a failure is performed.

[2-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, referring to FIGS. 81 and 82, S102 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77)
5, the special symbol game determination processing executed by the main CPU 1201 will be described. 81 and 82 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is called at S1025 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called at S1025 during the special symbol management process with the second special symbol as the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1071).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" in S1071 (S10
71 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" in S1071 (
If S1071 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1072.

At S1072, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not a big win has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S1072, when it is determined that the stopped special symbols are not in the stop display mode indicating the big win (NO determination in S1072), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1073. On the other hand, in S1072, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating a big win (YES in S1072), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1075.

At S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not there is a small win, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a small win.

In S1073, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S1073), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1074.

At S1074, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, the main CPU 120
1, when the special symbol game end processing is performed, the special symbol game determination processing is terminated, and the processing is returned to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1073, when it is determined that it is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a small hit (when S1073 is YES), the main CPU 1
201 moves the process to S1075.

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs a start setting process for the big hit game control process or the small hit game control process. In this processing, signals output to, for example, a hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 for both) and an island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 1184 are generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. Main CPU
1201 moves the process to S1076 after performing the process of S1075.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control process of S1075, the main CPU 120
1 also performs processing for clearing various flags and various counters such as a variable probability flag, a variable probability counter, a time saving flag, and a time saving counter.

In S1076, the main CPU 1201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening 1131 or the big winning opening 1151 for the small winning) (S1077), the external terminal board 1184 Big hit signal set processing (S107
8), the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079), the game state designation parameter setting process (S1080), and the transmission reservation process of the jackpot start display command (
S1081) and other processing are performed. In addition, by performing the process (S1079) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol game determination process ends, the large winning opening preparation process (Fig. 77 S1026) is performed. After that, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination processing (S1071 to S1081) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 83, S1 in the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 81 and 82)
The special symbol game end processing executed by the main CPU 1201 at 074 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first performs time saving management processing (S1091). The details of this time saving management process are the same as the processes described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko game machine, so description thereof will be omitted. After executing the process of S1091, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1092.

At S1092, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "0". Thus, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S1092, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1093.

At S1093, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S1094). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S1094, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 81).

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is lost,
The main CPU 1201 does not set or reset any of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the display mode of losing is derived, the game state does not shift.

[2-4-7. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 84, at S1026 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), the main C
A special winning opening preparation process executed by PU 1201 will be described. FIG. 84 shows the second
It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the pachinko game machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening opening preparation process is called at S1026 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the big winning opening opening preparation process is called at S1026 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1101).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" in S1101 (S11
01 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" in S1101 (
If S1101 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1102.

At S1102, the main CPU 1201 loads the value of the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening number counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the big winning game state when the big winning game control process is executed, and when the small winning game control process is executed. , corresponds to a counter that counts the number of executions of the small hit game control process. It should be noted that the count value of the large winning opening opening number counter (large winning opening opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 . After executing the process of S1102, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening 1131 or the small winning big winning opening 1151) reaches the upper limit. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of openings of the big-hit jackpot 1131 opened in the big-hit gaming state, is 4 rounds or 10 rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of openings of the small-hit large winning opening 1151 opened in the small-hit game state is, for example, one.

If it is determined in S1103 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (S1103
is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1104.

At S1104, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S1104
) to switch the control state number, the jackpot ending process (see S1028 in FIG. 77) is performed after the big winning hole opening preparation process is finished. Main CPU 12
After executing the process of S1104, 01 shifts the process to S1105.

At S1105, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (
S1106). It should be noted that the jackpot end display command that is reserved for transmission in this process, in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process,
It is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 . After the processing of S1106, the main CPU 120
1 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

Returning to S1103, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit (S110
3 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1107.

In S1107, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the counter value of the number of times the big winning opening has been opened. After executing the process of S1107, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S
Go to 1108.

At S1108, the main CPU 1201 performs selection processing of a large winning opening to be opened.
In this process, as the big winning hole to be opened, the big winning big winning hole 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected when the big winning game control process is executed, and the small winning big winning hole 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected when the small winning game control process is executed. A big winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is selected. The main CPU 1201 performs S110
After executing the process of No. 8, the process moves to S1109.

In S1109, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, a large winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for big winning, big winning opening for small winning 1151
), the maximum opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening, the number of prize balls at the time of winning the big winning opening, etc. are set. The number of openings of the big winning opening corresponds to the number of rounds when the big winning game control process is executed, and corresponds to the opening number of the big winning opening 1151 for small winnings when the small winning game control process is executed. In addition, it is not intended to exclude one round or a small winning game control process in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of opening and closing times of the big winning opening are performed as separate processes.
After executing the process of S1109, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1110.

In the present embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to a maximum of 30000 msec, for example, when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to a maximum of 1800 msec, for example, when executing the small winning game control process. be. The maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening is set to, for example, 10 at maximum when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to 5 at maximum when executing the small winning game control process. The number of prize balls at the time of winning the big winning opening is set to 10 for both the big winning opening 1131 and the big winning opening 1151 for the small winning, for example. However, the values set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

At S1110, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, processing for generating opening/closing control data for the big winning openings (large winning opening 1131 for big winning, big winning opening 1151 for small winning) is performed. After executing the process of S1110, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1111.

At S1111, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S1111
) to switch the control state number, the large winning opening opening control process (see S1027 in FIG. 77) is performed after the completion of this large winning opening opening preparation process. Main CP
After executing the process of S1111, U1201 moves the process to S1112.

At S1112, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1112, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1113.

At S1113, the main CPU 1201 performs reservation processing for transmission of the command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1113, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-8. Large winning opening control process]
Next, referring to FIG. 85, at S1027 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), the main C
A special winning opening opening control process executed by PU 1201 will be described. FIG. 85 shows the second
is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the pachinko game machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening opening control process is called at S1027 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the big winning opening opening control process is called at S1027 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1121).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" in S1121 (S11
21 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" in S1121 (
If S1121 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1122.

In S<b>1122 , the main CPU 1201 opens a big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for big winning).
, and determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won a prize in the small winning big prize opening 1151) is the maximum winning number. In this process, a large winning opening winning counter (for example, a big winning opening counting switch 1132 for big winning and a big winning opening counting switch 1152 for small winning (see FIG. 70) etc.) is the value of the maximum winning number. It should be noted that the value of the large winning opening winning counter counted by the large winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 .

In S1122, the big winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big winning, big winning opening 115 for small winning
1) When it is determined that the number of winning game balls is not the maximum winning number (S1122 is NO
determination), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1123.

On the other hand, in S1122, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131, small winning opening 1151) is the maximum winning number (S1122
is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1124.

At S<b>1123 , the main CPU 1201 opens a large winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for big winning).
, It is determined whether or not the maximum opening time of the small winning big winning opening 1151) has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S1109 in FIG. 84) has passed.

In S1123, the big winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big winning, big winning opening for small winning 1151
), if it is determined that the maximum opening time has not elapsed (if NO determination is made in S1123),
The main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1123, the big winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big winning, big winning opening 1 for small winning)
151) that the maximum open time has elapsed (YES in S1123), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1124.

At S<b>1124 , the main CPU 1201 opens a big winning opening (big winning opening 1131
, closing processing of the small winning big winning opening 1151). The main CPU 1201 performs S1124
, the process proceeds to S1125.

At S1125, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (
S1125) is performed to switch the control state number, and after the end of this big winning opening opening control process, the big winning opening opening preparation process (see S1026 in FIG. 77) is performed again. After executing the process of S1125, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1126.

At S1126, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1126, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1127.

In S1127, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1127, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 86, at S1028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), the main C
The jackpot end processing executed by the PU 1201 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, S1 during the special symbol management process for which this jackpot end process is the first special symbol to be processed
When called by 028, the first special symbol is processed. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called at S1028 during the special symbol management process with the second special symbol as the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1131).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" in S1131 (S11
31 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 terminates the jackpot end processing, also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 76). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" in S1131 (
If S1131 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1132.

At S1132, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, set or reset the value of various flags (eg, variable probability flag, time-saving flag, ceiling count prohibition flag, etc.), and various counters (eg, variable probability counter, time-saving counter, pattern fixed number counter, number of times the big winning opening is opened) counter, big winning opening winning counter, ceiling counter, etc.) is set or reset. Both the special symbol pause flag and the ceiling counter are reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S1132). In addition, when the variable probability flag is set to ON, the ceiling count prohibition flag is also set to ON. As a result, the ceiling counter is not updated in the high-probability gaming state in which the probability variation flag is on. After executing the process of S1132, the main CPU 1201
The process moves to S1133.

At S1133, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. Main CPU 12
After executing the processing of S1133, 01 ends the jackpot end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[2-5. Small hit rush]
In the second pachinko gaming machine described above, a so-called small winning rush can be realized. The small hit rush will be described below.

In the second pachinko gaming machine, as described above, a normal game state, a high-probability short-time game state, a high-probability non-short-time game state, and a low-probability short-time game state are prepared, and the main CPU 1201 is one of these game states. Control to any game state. As described above, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode. In addition, in other game states (high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state and low-probability short-time gaming state), since hitting to the right is a regular game mode, the game to the second start port 1140A, 1140B A second special symbol game based on winning balls is mainly executed. In addition, when the winning opening included in the normal electric accessory unit 1145 is the first starting opening, the first The special symbol game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state.

In this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the small winning big winning opening 1151 is another game state (for example, normal game state, high-probability short-time gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state ), the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time becomes a small hit rush that can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the mechanism of the small hit rush will be described. First, a game ball struck to the right almost passes through the passage gate 1126 . In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the normal electric accessory 114
6 to increase the frequency of opening the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 1140B in this embodiment) is not executed. In addition, unless the big hit game control process is executed, the big winning opening 1131 for the big hit will not be in the open state, so the frequency that the second start opening 1140B will be in the open state in the high probability non-time-saving game state is the game in which the time-saving control is executed. low compared to the state
Therefore, if the small winning large winning opening 1151 is opened, the game ball hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can win the small winning large winning opening 1151.例文帳に追加When a game ball wins in the big winning hole 1151 for a small hit, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out as described above. In addition, the game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win the second start port 1140A. When the game ball wins in the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B, for example, 3 as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71).
Not only is a stop display mode that indicates a small hit with a relatively high probability of 1/1 (approximate) derived, but also super-fast fluctuations ( For example, variable display time 1000 msec) is executed, so the winning frequency of the game ball to the small winning big winning opening 1151 is another game state ). In this way, it is possible to realize a small winning rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of winning balls) paid out per unit time exceeds 1.

On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the time saving control is executed (for example, the high certainty short working hours gaming state, the low certainty short working hours gaming state), the second start port 1140B is in the open state by executing the electric sapo control,
Most of the game balls that are hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b are the second starting port 1
I will win 140B. Therefore, even if the small-hit large winning opening 1151 is open, the expectation value of the game ball winning the small-hitting large winning opening 1151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out. The game ball hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a is the second
For example, three prize balls are paid out when the starting port 1140A wins, but the second starting port 11
In 40A, only about one-third to one-fifth of the game balls hit right and distributed to the upper flow-down path 1107a win a prize. In this way, in the gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed, the game value paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.)
The expected value of is set not to exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, but if right-handed hitting is performed, the right-handed game ball passes through the passage gate 1126 and the normal symbol hit is displayed in a stop display mode. When pulled out, the normal electric accessory 1146 operates, and there is a possibility that the small winning big winning opening 1151 is opened by the game ball winning in the second starting opening 1140B. However, in the normal game state, since the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 74), provisionally, the game ball wins the second start port 1140A, 1140B. Even if it does, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in any one of the long variations A to C having extremely long variation times, and the frequency of opening the small winning big winning opening 1151 is extremely small. Therefore, there is no real benefit for the player to hit to the right in the normal game state. In addition, when the winning opening included in the normal electric accessory unit 1145 is the first start opening, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal game state is set to 0, for example, so as not to generate the actual profit of hitting to the right. good too. In the normal game state, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1, and is smaller than the game state in which the time reduction control is executed. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to be a small hit rush in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be made to be a small hit rush in a high-probability short-time gaming state in which the special symbol shortening control for shortening the variable display time of the special symbol is performed without performing the electric support control.

[3. Third pachinko machine]
Next, the third pachinko game machine will be explained. As described above, the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine called a 1-type 2-type mixed machine, and has a first route and a second route as routes until it is controlled to the jackpot game state. There is A first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a "big win" is derived.
In the second route, the V-attacker is released by deriving a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is "a prize released", and the game ball entering the released V-attacker is V This is the case of winning the V winning slot in the attacker.

The third pachinko game machine does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and establishes the starting condition of the second special symbol with priority over the starting condition of the first special symbol. It is a priority variator to However, it is not limited to this, and may be the sequential variation machine described above.

Hereinafter, in explaining the third pachinko game machine, for example, the basic configuration such as the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal plate 2184 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the outside of the third pachinko game machine (For example, a hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 described later) or an island computer (not shown) provided on each island), such as signals output to the first pachinko machine The description of the common points will be omitted as much as possible.

In describing the third pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko game machine are used for the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to the newly adopted drawings in the description of the third pachinko game machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko game machine, the first pachinko machine The description will be made using the reference numerals and step numbers that are different from those of the game machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
A game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG. This game board unit 2010 also has a protective glass 4 as in the first pachinko game machine.
3 (see FIG. 2) is positioned in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 87 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 provided in the third pachinko game machine. On the front side of the game board unit 2010, a game area 2105 is formed in which a shot game ball can roll and flow.

In addition, various members (for example, the first start port 2120, etc.) arranged in the game area 2105 of the third pachinko game machine may be common to various members arranged in the game area 105 of the first pachinko game machine. Yes, but let me explain again.

As shown in FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 formed with a game area 2105 in which a shot game ball can roll and flow down, and a guide rail 21 .
10, a center accessory 2115 arranged substantially in the center of the game area 2105, a first starting port 2120, a second starting port 2140, a general prize winning port 2122, and a passage gate unit 212.
5, a special electric accessory unit 2130, a normal electric accessory unit 2145, an LED unit 2160, a V winning device 2150, an outlet 2178, and a back unit (not shown). Incidentally, the LED unit 2160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in this third pachinko game machine.

(game panel)
The game panel 2100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007 . A guide rail 2110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 2100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 2110 toward the game area 2105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward to the game area 2105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

In addition, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 2100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of arc-shaped outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals) as in the first pachinko game machine. The play area 2105 is the guide rail 2
It is partitioned (defined) by 110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding a game ball shot from a shooting device 2006 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and has an arc-shaped center rail 2116 above. The game balls shot toward the game area 2105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116. - 特許庁

The game ball shot toward the game area 2105 by the shooting device 2006 is the left area 2
106 or right area 2107. A game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 2100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the amount of operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 2106 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 2107 .

In addition, the center accessory 2115 has a warp entrance 2117 formed on the left outer peripheral edge thereof into which a game ball flowing down the left area 2106 can enter. A game ball entering the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be guided to a stage 2118 formed in the center accessory 2115 . The stage 2118 is formed in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007 so that the game ball can roll in the horizontal direction. Note that the stage 2118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

Behind the center of the stage 2118 in the left-right direction is a chance entrance 21 into which game balls can enter.
19 is formed, and the game ball entering the chance entrance 2119
is configured to be emitted directly above the Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 2117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 2117 but did not enter the chance entrance 2119. Mouth 2
It is designed to win (pass) 120.

(First start port)
The first starting port 2120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins the first starting port 2120, the first starting port switch 2121 (
(see FIG. 88, which will be described later). In addition, the game ball hit to the right is the first start port 2120
may be able to win a prize. Also, in place of or in addition to the above-described first starting port 2120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the start condition is established. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 2120 is not limited to three.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 2140 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and the left-handed game ball is the second
It may be possible to win prizes at the starting port 2140 .

When the game ball enters the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. FIG. When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld starting information is subjected to the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize winner)
A plurality of general winning openings 2122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007.
The game balls are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win prizes (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win prizes). When a game ball wins in one of the plurality of general winning openings 2122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 2122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the general winning opening 21
The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to 22 is not limited to four.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but this is not necessarily the case.
In place of or in addition to 122, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 2125 is arranged in the right region 2107, and includes a passing gate 2126 configured to allow almost right-handed game balls to pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of the game ball to the passing gate 2126. 2127 (see FIG. 88, which will be described later).

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected, the starting information of the normal symbol is extracted,
A predetermined number (for example, four at maximum) of the extracted starting information is retained. The reserved various data are usually subjected to the hit determination process of the design. Even if the passage gate switch 2127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126, the prize ball is not paid out. again,
The pass gate unit 2125 may be configured in the left region 210 instead of or in addition to the right region 2107 .
6 may be arranged.

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 includes a big winning hole 2131, a big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of the game ball to the big winning hole 2131,
It is a unit body integrated with the special electric accessory 2133 . Special electric accessories unit 2130
is arranged below the passage gate unit 2125 in the right region 2107 .

The big winning opening 2131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to
In place of or in addition to the large winning opening 2131, a large winning opening in which a left-handed game ball can win a prize is arranged, or a large winning opening in which a game ball can win a prize is arranged above the center accessory 2115. You may do so.

The big winning hole 2131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when controlled to a big win game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. is. The large winning opening 2 is selected by the large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later).
When winning of game balls to 131 is detected, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. however,
The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize opening 2131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 2135 (see FIG. 88 to be described later) that operates the special electric shutter 2134 . The special electric accessory 2133, that is, the special electric shutter 2134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the large winning opening 2131, and an open state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the large winning opening 2131. It is configured to be transitionable to and from a closed state. The big winning port 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the big win game state is entered through the above-described first route. When the jackpot game state is reached through the above-described first route, state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the big win game state through the first route is to pay out a large amount of game balls as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big win port 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is a game state that enables

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 2145 includes a prize winning opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) of the game balls, a switch for detecting the winning of the game balls to the winning opening, a normal electric It is a unit body integrated with the accessory 2146 and arranged in the right area 2107 . In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140 and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141 .

The normal electric accessory 2146 includes a protruding plate-type shutter 2147 for normal electric power that can move back and forth, and a solenoid for normal electric power 2148 (see FIG. 88 described later) for operating the shutter 2147 for normal electric power. The ordinary electric accessory 2146, that is, the ordinary electric shutter 2147, has an open state in which the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second start port 2140 is possible or easy, and the second start port 2140
It is configured to be able to shift to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to win a prize. note that,
Instead of the general electric shutter 2147 that can move forward and backward, a movable member called an electric chew may be employed.

(V winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided downstream of the passage gate 2126 in the right area 2107 . The V winning device 2150 includes an opening/closing winning port 2151 that is opened to allow game balls to enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, and a V that can open and close the opening/closing winning port 2151.
An attacker 2152, a V-attacker solenoid 2154 that operates the V-attacker 2152 to open and close the opening and closing winning port 2151, and a game inside the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152. A V-attacker count switch 2153 for detecting the entry of a ball, a V-winning opening 2155 through which a game ball entering the inside of the V-winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning opening 2151 can pass, and an opening/closing winning opening 2151.
A game ball entered into the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the V winning opening switch 2156 that detects that the game ball has entered (passed through) the V winning opening 2155, and enters the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the open/close winning opening 2151. A loss port 2157 into which a game ball that does not enter the V winning port 2155 among the game balls that have entered can enter (pass through), and a V shutter 21 that opens and closes the V winning port 2155.
58, a V-shutter solenoid 2159 that operates the V-shutter 2158 to open and close the V-winning opening 2155, and a locking member that can hold only one of the game balls entering the V-winning device 2150. 2160. In addition, the V winning device 2150
It may be provided upstream of the passage gate 2126 or may be provided in the left area 2106 .

The V-attacker 2152 consists of members along an arc, and is always in a closed state to close the open/close winning opening 2151 . Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and a stop display mode indicating that the later-described "accessory hit" is derived, almost simultaneously with the completion of the variable display of the special symbols, the V-attacker solenoid 2154 ( (see FIG. 88, which will be described later), the V-attacker 2152 operates, for example, once. When the V-attacker 2152 is activated once, the open/close winning opening 2151 is opened for 1800 msec, for example. And V Attacker 2
While the open/close winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of 152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is, for example, 10 per opening.

It should be noted that the manner in which the V-attacker 2152 is released when the stop display manner indicating that the "accessory hit" is derived is not limited to the above. It may be closed based on a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls entering the inside of the V winning device 2150 .

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of game balls into the V winning device 2150 . V winning device 21 by V attacker count switch 2153
50, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and changes the value of the V-attacker winning counter, which is a function of the main CPU 2201. to add. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches the specified value, the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec
) has not yet passed, the V-attacker solenoid 2154 activates the V-attacker 215
2 is activated to close the open/close winning opening 2151 .

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 . That is, the V winning opening 2155 is a winning opening that triggers control to the big hit game state via the above-described second route.

The V winning opening switch 2156 detects passage of a game ball to the V winning opening 2155 . When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 88) detects that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 is released,
Continue controlling the opening of the V-attacker 2152 . That is, it is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route. When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, a round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled through the first route, a round game is executed in which the big winning port 2131 is shifted from the closed state to the open state, whereas the second route is executed. When it is controlled to the jackpot game state through the route, a round game is executed to shift the V attacker 2152 from the closed state to the open state. However, it is not limited to this, for example, when it is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route, the first round is V attacker 2
152 is shifted from the closed state to the open state, a round game may be executed in which, for example, the big winning opening 2131 is shifted from the closed state to the open state in the middle of the round game.

Also, for example, by providing a V winning opening inside the special electric accessory 2133 (that is, the area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is in an open state), etc.
Only one attacker may be opened in the prize-winning game state and the jackpot game state. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating "accessory open win" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the V prize opening 2155 provided inside the special electric accessory 2133
When the game ball enters into, it is controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot game state via the second route).

The losing hole 2157 is configured so that a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but has not passed through the V winning hole 2155 enters (passes through). Missing mouth 2157
The game ball that has passed through is discharged out of the machine. In addition, when all the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the loss opening 2157 and no game balls pass through the V winning opening 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is terminated without being continued. do.

The V shutter 2158 has a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 2155 by the operation of the V shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 88 described later)
A fixed operation is always performed between the opening mode in which the passage of the game ball to the winning opening 2155 is possible (or easy). In this embodiment, for example, the V shutter 2158 always performs a constant operation in a cycle of 7000 msec, which repeats the operation of "6000 msec closed→1000 msec open→6000 msec closed".

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning opening 2155, and the V winning device 2150
It is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one ball out of the game balls that have entered the inside. A game ball that enters the V winning device 2150 but is not held by the locking member 2160 is ejected out of the machine through the loss port 2157 . Even if a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls that are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged out of the machine through the loss port 2157.例文帳に追加

Further, the locking member 2160 is held for a certain period of time (for example, 3
000 msec), the locking of the game ball is released by the operation of a locking solenoid (not shown). The game ball that is unlocked in the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning opening 2155, and if the V winning opening 2155 is opened at this timing, it wins (passes) the V winning opening 2155, and this If the V winning opening 2155 is closed at the timing, the losing opening 2157
pass through. In addition, without providing the locking member 2160 , the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning opening 2155 or the losing opening 2157 .

(out port)
The out port 2178 is various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 2120, the second starting port 2140, the big winning port 2131, the V winning device 2150,
It is for ejecting game balls that have not won or entered any of the general winning openings 2122, etc., to the outside of the machine. This out port 2178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 2105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the out port 2178 described above, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between a plurality of general prize winning ports 2122, between the special electric accessory unit 2130 and the second start port 2140, etc. A game ball flowing down the game area 2105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 2010 as in the first pachinko game machine, and is provided behind the game panel 2100 . This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 2007 and has a performance role group 2058 such as a movable role controlled by the sub-control circuit 2300 . At least one or more of the performance accessory group 2058 or the performance accessory component constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory operable based on the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol. do.

[3-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 88, the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine will be described. Figure 88
is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a third pachinko game machine. Although the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine has some in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, it will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 88, the third pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 2200 for controlling the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 2300 , a payout/fire control circuit 2400 , and a power supply circuit 2450 .

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201 , a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (readable/writable memory), an initial reset circuit 220
4 and a backup capacitor 2207, etc., and housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 2201 is connected with a main ROM 2202, a main RAM 2203, an initial reset circuit 2204, and the like. The main CPU 2201 has a WDT that monitors the operation.
and functions to prevent fraud.

The main ROM 2202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the third pachinko game machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. Main CPU 22
01 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 2202 .

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 2203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201 and has the function of storing various flags and variable values. . In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201, but the RAM is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 2203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 2200 is an I/O circuit connected to be communicable with various devices.
It also has a port 2205 and a command output port 2206 connected to the sub-control circuit 2300 so as to output various commands.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200 . For example, the main control circuit 2200 includes a normal symbol display portion 2161, a normal symbol pending display portion 2162, a first special symbol display portion 2163, a second special symbol display portion 2164, a first special symbol pending display portion 2165,
Second special symbol holding display unit 2166, time saving display unit 2168, general electric solenoid 21
48, a special power solenoid 2135, a V-attacker solenoid 2154, a V-shutter solenoid 2159, and the like are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 2200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 2170, an error notification monitor 2172, and the like.
Main control circuitry 2200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 2205 .

Performance display data, set values, and the like are displayed on the performance display monitor 2170 under the control of the main CPU 2201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 also displays a setting changing code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process being performed in the case of, for example, a pachinko game machine with a setting function. It is also possible to display a code during setting confirmation. As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed as a special pattern (for example, a setting change pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 2200 includes a first starting switch 2121 and a second starting switch 2
141, pass gate switch 2127, big winning slot count switch 2132, V attacker count switch 2153, V winning slot switch 2156, and general winning slot switch 2123 are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 2200 via I/O port 2205 .

Further, the main control circuit 2200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant and a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a hall computer 2186 which manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall. External terminal board 2184, setting key 217 operated when setting values are changed or confirmed in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function
4. A backup clear switch 2176 or the like is connected, which can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 according to the operation of the administrator of the game arcade.
In the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 is
It may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided.

Also, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. The "inside a predetermined case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 corresponding to the case. A notch is provided, and when the pachinko game machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the person in charge of the game hall to expose the back surface, the person in charge of the game hall presses the setting key 2174 or/and the backup key. Also included is one configured so that the clear switch 2176 can be contacted.

In this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. In this case also, a third party other than the person in charge of the game hall may operate the setting key 2174 or the backup clear switch 2.
Preferably, 176 is not easily accessible.

[3-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 2300 includes a sub CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work R
AM 2303, display control circuit 2304, audio control circuit 2305, LED control circuit 2306
, a role item control circuit 2307, a command input port 2308, and the like. Sub control circuit 2
300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 2200 .
Although not shown in FIG. 88, as in the first pachinko game machine, the sub-control circuit 230
0 is also connected with a performance button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 2302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the third pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 2301, various tables, and the like. Sub CPU
2301 has a function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the program ROM 2302 . In particular, the sub CPU 2301 controls game effects according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 2200 .

A work RAM 2303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 2301 .

A display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 2007 . The display control circuit 2304 includes an image data ROM that stores VDP and data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A converter that converts image data into image signals. Equipped with a converter, etc.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 2301 . note that,
The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. FIG. In this manner, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 2032 . The audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, and an amplifier for amplifying audio signals (hereinafter referred to as AM
P) and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 2032 . Sound source IC is sub C
One voice data is selected from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to the voice generation command supplied from the PU 2301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 2032 .

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 2058). The role item control circuit 2307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each role item, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role item data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the role product control circuit 2307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 2301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 2301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 2308 is connected to command output port 2206 and receives commands sent from main control circuit 2200 .

The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine. and a card unit 2180 capable of executing control related to ball lending are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, the payout/launch control circuit 2400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180 . The ball lending operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180 . The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180 . The operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 2400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) based on the clockwise rotation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2). (not shown) to control the shooting of game balls.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit that is created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and the like.

A power switch 2095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 2450 . The power switch 2095 is connected to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 230).
0, payout/launch control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. basic specifications]
Next, basic specifications of the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92. FIG. The third pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In addition, probability variation control is not performed in the 3rd pachinko game machine. In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, a normal game state in which time reduction control is not executed and a time reduction game state in which time reduction control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal game state or the time reduction game state. It is possible.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and in the time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is the regular game mode. The sub CPU 2301 executes control to display a hitting method that is regarded as a regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 2007 .

[3-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 89 shows the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko game machine.
It is an example of a hit determination table of special symbols stored in .

As shown in FIG. 89, when a game ball wins (passes through) the first starting port 2120, the main CPU 2201 performs the first special symbol hit determination process using the first special symbol jackpot determination random number value. Then, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "losing". In addition, when the game ball wins (passes) through the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 performs the second special symbol hit determination process using the second special symbol jackpot determination random number value. The result of the hit determination process is determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "accessory release hit".

It should be noted that it is not essential to prevent the "accessory hit" from being determined when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but even if it is determined to be the "accessory hit". ,
It is preferable that the second special symbol is determined only with a very low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than the "big hit") as compared with the case where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed.
In addition, it is not essential to avoid being determined to be "losing" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, but if it is determined to be "losing", "accessory open hit" It may be set to be higher than the probability determined by 1, or may be set to be lower than the probability determined by ``per chance to unlock the role item''.

The special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 includes the first start port 21
As the data used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol executed based on the winning to 20, the range of the jackpot determination random number (
width) and the corresponding determination value data (“time saving determination value data”, “big hit determination value data”, “losing determination value data”) are defined. Also, the second starting port 2140
As the data used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning of the
The range (width) of the random number value for judging the jackpot determined for "time-saving hit", "jackpot" or "accessory open hit", and the corresponding judgment value data ("time-saving hit judgment value data", "jackpot judgment value data", and "determination value data for opening a role item") are stipulated.

This third pachinko game machine does not have a function of changing the probability of a big win determined as a "big win", but this is not essential. It may be set so as to increase the probability of a big hit.

In addition, in this third pachinko game machine, the total random number value of the big hit determination random number value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the random number value for judging a big hit is generated within a range (width) of 0-65535.

If the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of opening the accessory may be set higher at high settings than at low settings. In this case, for example, both the probability of winning a big hit and the probability of winning a role object may be higher at a high setting than at a low setting. The probability may be higher with high setting than with low setting, or the probability of big hit is fixed regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning a role is higher with high setting than with low setting. may However, even if the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the time saving winning probability as a common probability for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the jackpot probability or the winning probability of opening the role object according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 is changed for each set value to change the winning rate to the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of continuous time reduction may be changed for each set value. That is, the probability of a big hit, the probability of opening a role, the frequency of opening the V winning opening 2155 (that is, the V
Attacker 2152 operation frequency), opening time, time reduction continuation number of times, etc. By adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, the expected value controlled to the big hit game state may be configured to be higher at the high setting than at the low setting.

[3-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 90 shows the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko game machine.
It is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selected symbol command" for determining the stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins the starting port 2120, 2140 and the aforementioned determination value data; This table is referred to when selecting the "symbol designation command". The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a winning symbol determined according to the type of the big hit when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a big hit, and the "symbol specifying command" is a special symbol. This is a command for specifying the pattern to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 90, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 9.
9, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Also, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
The main CPU 2201 selects, for example, a selection symbol command and a symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 3, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 4 to 60, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command. In addition, the pattern random number of the first special pattern is 61 to 99
, the main CPU 2201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Also, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
The main CPU 2201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2
201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.
”.

Also, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
For example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 22
01 selects "z6" as a selection symbol command and "zA5" as a symbol designation command.
to select.

Furthermore, when the accessory release hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows.
That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CP
U2201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and "z7" as the symbol designation command.
Select A6.

Although the explanation is omitted in the third pachinko game machine, the main RO of the main control circuit 2200
M2202 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the special symbol stop mode derived to the first special symbol display portion 2163 or the second special symbol display portion 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped. It is a table referred to when making a decision according to a symbol command. Further, in the special symbol display units 2163 and 2164, the display mode of the time-saving win, the display mode of the big win, the display mode of the winning prize or the display mode of losing is derived based on the result of the special symbol win determination processing. be. Further, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12B) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 2302 of the sub-control circuit 2300 .

[3-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 91 shows the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko game machine.
It is an example of a hit type determination table stored in . In the hit type determination table, according to the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the aspect of the jackpot game state (more specifically, the number of rounds) and the aspect of the subsequent game state (more specifically, It is referred to when determining time saving flag and time saving end condition). The mode of the game state after that indicates the mode of the game state after the end of the big hit game state. However, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the big hit game state.
"L" shown in the column of time-saving end conditions in FIG. 91 indicates the sum of the number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the number of variable display times of the second special symbol. Similarly, "M" indicates the number of times the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and "N" indicates the number of times the accessory is released. It should be noted that the remarks column in FIG. 91 is provided for convenience to facilitate understanding.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 2201 determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=6, and N=3. Also, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 2201 determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=3, and N=3. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the number of rounds as a mode of the big hit game state is not determined.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the number of rounds as a mode of the big win game state and the mode of the subsequent game state (A time-saving game state) are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and sets the time saving end conditions to L=50, M= 5, determine N=2. Also, if the selection pattern command is "z
2”, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag on, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=50, M=5, and N=1. do. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 and determines not to set the time saving flag to ON. again,
When the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and sets the time saving end condition to L=
50, M=5, N=2.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory release" (for example, the selected symbol command is "z7") and is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route, the main CP
U2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=50, M=5, and N=2. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory released", if the big win game state is not controlled through the second route, the main CPU 2201 executes the big win game state. Not only does it not, the time saving flag is not set on, and after executing the control based on the winning of the opening of the role, the game state immediately before the opening of the role is restored.

Further, for example, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), the main CPU 2201 determines the mode of the jackpot game state and the mode of the subsequent game state. Do not set either. That is, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 2201 does not shift the game state, and continues control to the previous game state.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), both the aspect of the jackpot game state and the aspect of the subsequent game state as described above Since it is not set, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. However, in the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", for the sake of convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the jackpot game state nor the mode of the subsequent game state is determined. 91.

In addition, "L", "M", and "N" shown in the column of time saving end conditions in FIG. 91 are all the same conditions regardless of the game state, but are not limited to this, different conditions may be used. For example, all of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state, or the A time saving game state and B Only one of the time saving game state and the C time saving game state may be different. Also, only one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state. , A time saving game state, B time saving game state and C time saving game state may be changed only in one of the time saving game state. That is, at least one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" is set to at least one of the A time reduction game state, B time reduction game state, and C time reduction game state. You may make it differ in a game state.

[3-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 92 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the third pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the "remarks" column in FIG. 92 is shown for the sake of convenience. Main C
PU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2120, and the variation of the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2140 determine the pattern.

As shown in FIG. 92, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins the first start port 2120, and determines the first special symbol when the game ball wins the second start port 2140. 2 Determine the variation pattern of the special design.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving winning", the main CPU 2201 sets the variation pattern of the first special symbol to the first start port 2120 and the game ball wins. It is determined based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when (passing).

Also, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot", the main CPU 22
01 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the effect selection random number value extracted when the game ball wins (passes) through the first starting port 2120. - 特許庁

Further, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "losing", the main CPU 22
01 is based on the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the value of the time saving flag, the random value for reach determination extracted when the game ball wins (passes) the first start port 2120, and the random value for effect selection. decide. It should be noted that, in the time-saving game state, since hitting to the right is the normal game mode, it is considered that the game ball rarely enters the first start hole 2120 .

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 2
201, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the game ball wins (passes) to the second start port 2140
It is determined based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when the

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 sets the variation pattern of the second special symbol to the effect extracted when the game ball wins (passes) the second starting port 2140. Determined based on the random number for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit the role" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 changes the variation pattern of the second special symbol to the second start port. A variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for performance selection extracted when the game ball wins at 2140.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit the role item open" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol as the variation time. is determined to be a very long long-fluctuation performance of, for example, 600000 msec. When the value of the time saving flag is "0", basically the game ball does not win (pass) to the second starting port 2140, but if an unexpected situation occurs and the second starting port 2140 This is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player even if the game ball wins, but this is not always essential.

Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 2201 sets a look-ahead flag when the random number for effect selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start hole 2120 is a specific random number. Main CPU 22
The sub CPU 2301 that received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from 01,
If the look-ahead flag is set, a look-ahead effect is performed.

For the sake of convenience, it does not appear in the special symbol variation pattern table of FIG. If the probability variation flag is on, do not set the look-ahead flag.

Also, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 2301 may determine.

It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 may set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead effect) also when the time saving flag is on or when the variable probability flag is on.
Also, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, set the look-ahead flag (
It may be so that a look-ahead effect is performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of times of variation per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301 . The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 2032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201 .

In addition, the time-saving hit system reach A and B shown in the column of "remarks" in FIG. It is a performance. Similarly, the big hit type reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is a possibility of a big hit (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be both a time saving hit and a big hit.

Also, although the description is omitted for the third pachinko machine, as in the first pachinko machine,
The main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 contains a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17), a normal symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol variation pattern table ( 19) are stored. Then, the main CPU 2201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 87) in the same manner as in the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 2146 based on this.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 are the special symbol control process performed at S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, the special symbol control process will be described below, and description of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. It should be noted that the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (Fig. 42, Fig. 103), etc. ), in the following
Including the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko game machine, the step numbers will be changed and explained again.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the special symbol control processing performed at S39 in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). Main CPU
2201 moves the process to S2002 after executing the process of S2001.

Although not shown, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the special symbol working area in the main RAM 2203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001 when executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 2201 also performs processing for checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control processing.
Then, when both the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are "0" for a certain period of time or longer, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a demonstration display command. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 2300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub-CPU 2301 performs a demonstration display effect. In addition, since the third pachinko machine is not a pachinko machine that can variably display the first special pattern and the second special pattern in parallel, the concept of the main special pattern as explained in the first pachinko machine There is no

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not it is waiting for variable display of the special symbol.

When it is determined that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 in S2002 (S2002 is N
If the determination is O), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2005.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control number of the special symbol is 0 in S2002 (S200
2 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is not reserved (when S2003 is NO determination), the main CP
U2201 moves the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is not the start of variable display, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is not reserved (when S2004 is NO determination), the main CP
U2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2004 that the variable display of the first special symbol is started, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld (when S2004 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 advances the process to S2005. Transfer.

Returning to S2003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved (when S2003 is YES determination), the main C
PU2201 moves a process to S2005.

At S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. The main CPU 2201 is S
After executing the process of 2003, the special symbol control process is terminated, and the process is returned to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 sets the interrupt prohibition section, and the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (
S2001 to S2005) are preferably performed within the interrupt disabled section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved as the third pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S2005) is given a higher priority than the first special symbol.
) has been described, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variation machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 2120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning to the second starting port 2140 .

[3-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 94, at S2005 in the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93), the main C
A special symbol management process executed by PU2201 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is 0 (when S2002 is YES determination), the special symbol management process is the second special symbol to be processed when S2003 is YES determination, and S2004 is YES.
In the case of S determination, the first special symbol is to be processed. Also, if the control state number is not 0 (S
2002 is NO determination), the special symbol management process is for the special symbol being executed.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 94 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for special symbols is 0 (S
2011).

If it is determined that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 in S2011 (S2011 is N
If the determination is O), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 in S2011 (S201
1 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2012.

At S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2012, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2013.
to It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 performs the processes after S2013 based on the control state number read in the process of S2012.

At S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S2013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 advances the processing to S201.
Move to 4.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S2014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 causes the processing to proceed to S201.
Move to 5.

At S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This S
The process of 2015 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2".
The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "2", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening preparation processing. The process of S2016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "3", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2017.

At S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening control processing. The process of S2017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 2201 advances the processing to S2018.
to

At S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. This S
The process of 2018 is a process performed when the special symbol control state number is "5".
The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101 . If the special symbol control state number is not "5", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening control process. This S
The process of 2019 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6".
The details of this big winning hole opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102 . If the special symbol control state number is not "6", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot end processing. This S202
The process of 0 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 95, at S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), the main C
A special symbol variable display start process executed by the PU 2201 will be described. Figure 95 shows
It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly,
S20 during the special symbol management process in which the special symbol variable display start process targets the second special symbol
If it is the process called in 13, the second special symbol is to be processed.

As shown in FIG. 95, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" in S2021 (S20
21 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" in S2021 (
If S2021 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 89) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a special symbol big hit determination random number value. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is a processing object, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a loss. Also, if the second special symbol is the object of processing, it is determined which of the time saving hit, the big hit, and the accessory release hit. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2024.

At S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) (for example, a time saving hit, a big hit, a role release hit or a loss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 90) is referred to, and the above-described "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. Main CPU2
201 moves the process to S2025 after executing the process of S2024.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining the type of winning when the result of the winning determination process of the special symbol is a winning (time-saving winning, big winning, accessor product opening winning). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91) is referred to, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024). It should be noted that the type of hit determined when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is, for example, a prize-opening hit is determined by the game ball passing through the V winning opening 2155 opened based on the prize-opening hit. It is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of time-saving wins, big wins, and accessory-opening wins. . Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of time-saving wins, big wins, and/or prize release wins, a plurality of losing types may be provided. After executing the process of S2025, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S202.
Move to 6.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, the special symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 92) is referred to, for example, the type of special symbol,
As a result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023), the special symbol variation pattern is determined according to the value of the time saving flag, the reach determination random number value and/or the effect selection random number value. After executing the process of S2026, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 92) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S2026) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S2027, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2028.

At S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol variable display start process is completed. It will happen. The main CPU 2201 performs S202
After executing the process of No. 8, the process moves to S2029.

At S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 (for example, variable probability remaining number, time saving remaining number, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2030.

At S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S2030, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2.
Move to 031.

At S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. In addition, the special symbol effect start command that is reserved for transmission in this process is the next effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the system timer interrupt process.
It is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 .

In addition, the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section, and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S2030), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S2031)) during the interrupt prohibited interval. preferably in-house.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 96, at S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), the main C
A special symbol variable display end process executed by PU 2201 will be described. Figure 96 shows
It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is the process called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" in S2041 (S20
41 is NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" in S2041 (
If S2041 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2042.

At S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (S2 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process
015) is performed. After executing the process of S2042, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2043.

At S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. In addition, the special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
sent to. After executing the process of S2043, the main CPU 2201 advances the process to S20.
Move to 44.

At S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. As described above in the description of the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of special symbol confirmations (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). For example, you may manage the number of games of the special symbol game performed under specific conditions, such as the probability variable remaining number and the time-saving remaining number. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).
back to

[3-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, referring to FIG. 97, at S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), the main C
The special symbol game determination processing executed by PU2201 will be described. FIG. 97 shows the third
It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the pachinko game machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is the process called at S2015 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly,
S2015 during the special symbol management process in which the special symbol game determination process targets the second special symbol
, the second special symbol will be processed.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" in S2051 (S20
51 is NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" in S2051 (
If S2051 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2052.

At S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a big win has been achieved, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is not a big win, that is, it is not in the stop display mode indicating a big win (NO in S2052), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2060. On the other hand, in S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win (YES in S2052), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is a stop display mode indicating the winning of the accessory, and when the special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a loss, a NO determination is made in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing of big hit game control. In this processing, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) to be output to hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is the special symbol hit signal that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2054.

In addition, in the big hit game control start setting process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning hole 2131 (S2055), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". (S2057) to set to
Processing such as game state designation parameter setting processing (S2058) and transmission reservation processing (S2059) of a jackpot start display command is performed. In addition, by performing the process (S2057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the special symbol game determination process ends,
A special winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed. After that, the main CPU 2201 terminates the special symbol game determination process, and performs the special symbol management process (FIG. 94).
reference).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a winning prize, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a winning prize.

In S2060, if it is determined that it is not a winning prize, that is, that the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S2060), the main CPU 22
01 moves the process to S2061. On the other hand, in S2060, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the winning of the opening of the role (S2
060 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2061.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for the game control per release of the accessory. In this processing, a signal (for example, a winning signal for winning a prize) to be output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2061, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2062.

At S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened. In this embodiment, the V winning device 2150 set in this process
is, for example, one time. After executing the process of S2062, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2063.

At S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting a winning signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2063), and a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S
2064), game state designation parameter setting processing (S2065), and transmission reservation processing (S2066) of a per-accessory start display command are performed. By performing the process (S2064) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

At S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, the main CPU 220
1, when the special symbol game end processing is performed, the special symbol game determination processing is terminated, and the processing is returned to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination processing (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97) will be described. Figure 98 shows
It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first performs time saving management processing (S2071). Since the third pachinko game machine, which is called a one-type and two-type mixed machine, is not controlled to a high-accuracy game state, the time-saving management process executed in the third pachinko game machine is similar to that shown in Fig. 32 in the first pachinko game machine. ~ Figure 3
9 is different from the processing described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in the first pachinko machine,
When the variable probability flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value,
Although it has been explained that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to ON, the third pachinko game machine is not controlled to a high certainty game state. Therefore, instead of setting the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON when the variable probability flag is set to ON and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is set to ON only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. different in again,
In the first pachinko game machine, in the time reduction transition determination process (see FIG. 37), after determining whether the probability variation flag is off (see S191), on the condition that the probability variation flag is off S192 Although processing is being performed, in the third pachinko game machine, since it is not controlled to the high accuracy gaming state as described above, the processing of S191 is not performed, and the processing of S192 is performed. Other processes in the time saving management process are shown in FIG. 3 in the first pachinko game machine.
2 to 39 are the same as the processing described with reference to FIG. The main CPU 2201 executes S2071
After executing the process of , the process moves to S2072.

At S2072, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "0". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game is finished, and the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. Become. After executing the process of S2072, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2073.

At S2073, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S2074). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S2074, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 97).

[3-4-7. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, referring to FIG. 99, at S2016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), the main C
V winning device opening preparation processing executed by PU 2201 will be described. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening preparation processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" in S2081 (S20
81 is NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process,
The processing is returned to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" in S2081 (
If S2081 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 selects the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (
That is, as the operation pattern of the V attacker 2152, for example, the maximum open time and the maximum number of open times are set. In this embodiment, the opening pattern is set to perform only one opening for a maximum of 1800 msec, but the opening pattern is not limited to this. , the first time e.g. up to 60
It may be opened for 0 msec and then opened for a maximum of 1200 msec for the second time. Furthermore, a plurality of release patterns are provided within a range not exceeding a specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total per opening of the role item, and among these multiple release patterns, for example, which one is selected based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol Either one open pattern may be set. After executing the process of S2082, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2083.

At S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this process, the process of generating opening/closing control data for the V winning port 2155 is performed. Main CPU 22
After executing the process of S2083, 01 shifts the process to S2084.

At S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S2084
), the V winning device opening control processing (see S2017 in FIG. 94) is performed after the completion of this V winning device opening preparation processing. The main CPU 2201 performs S208
After executing the process of 4, the process moves to S2085.

At S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2085, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the processing of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-8. V winning device opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of V winning device opening control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" in S2091 (S20
91 is NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process,
The processing is returned to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" in S2091 (
If S2091 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls entering the V winning device 2150 when the open/close winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88) for counting the number of winning game balls entering the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number. be. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the V-attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 .

In S2092, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (NO in S2092), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2093.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2092 that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when S2092 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 (
That is, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time of the open/close winning opening 2151 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum open time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 99) has passed.

If it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not passed (NO determination in S2093), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing ( 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (when S2093 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 advances the processing to S209.
Move to 4.

At S2094, the main CPU 2201 closes the V winning device 2150 (that is, the open/close winning opening 2151). After executing the process of S2094, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2095.

At S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a V prize detection.
In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 (that is, whether or not there is detection by the V winning opening switch 2156) within the specified time. It should be noted that the above-mentioned specified time may be a time related to entry of the game ball into the V winning device 2150. For example, within the specified time after the V attacker 2152 starts to operate, The above specified time may be within a specified time after the lock is released.

When it is determined in S2095 that a V prize has been detected (when S2095 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing of V-per game control. In this processing, a signal (for example, V hit signal, etc.) to be output to hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via external terminal plate 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is the special symbol hit signal that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V winning game control is executed, a round game of, for example, 10 rounds is executed as shown in the winning type determination table (see FIG. 91). You can get a lot of prize balls as well. In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V-hit game control and the big-hit game control process are distinguished and called, but the V-hit game control can also be called the big-hit game control process. Main C
After executing the process of S2096, PU 2201 moves the process to S2097.

In addition, in the start setting process of the V per game control of S2096, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the round counter value. By carrying out this process, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, activation of the V attacker 2152), which is first executed based on the winning prize, is processed as the first round of the round game. That is, it was determined that there was a V winning detection (S2095 is Y
The game control per V executed by ES determination is started from the round game of the second round. After executing the process of S2097, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened (that is, the number of times the V attacker 2152 is operated) (S209
9), V hit signal set processing to the external terminal plate 2184 (S2100), processing of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), game state designation parameter setting processing (S
2102), and processing such as transmission reservation processing (S2103) of the start display command per V is performed. In addition, by performing the process (S2101) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the special symbol game determination process ends, the big winning opening preparation process (S2 in FIG. 94
018) is performed. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2095, if it is determined at S2095 that no V winning has been detected (NO at S2095), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2104.

At S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. Main CPU 22
After executing the processing of S2104, 01 ends the V winning device opening control processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-9. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2018 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94) will be described. Figure 101 shows
It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

If it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" in S2111 (S21
11 is NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" in S2111 (
If S2111 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2112.

At S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. The round counter value (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 . After executing the process of S2112, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2113.

At S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S2113 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (S2113
is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2114.

At S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "7". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S2114
), the jackpot ending process (see S2020 in FIG. 94) is performed after the big winning hole opening preparation process is finished. After executing the process of S2114, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2115.

At S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (
S2116). It should be noted that the jackpot end display command that is reserved for transmission in this process, in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process,
It is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 . After the processing of S2116, the main CPU 220
1 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2113, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit (S211
3 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S2117, the main CPU 2201 advances the process to S2118.
to

At S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs selection processing of a large winning opening to be opened.
In this process, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 95) is a big hit, and the stop display mode indicating the big win is derived (S2052 in FIG. 97 is YES). In the case of the jackpot game control process, the jackpot 2131 is selected as the jackpot to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the winning determination process of the special symbol is the winning of the winning character, and the stop display mode indicating the opening of the character is derived (S2060 of FIG. 97 is determined as YES).
, In the case of V winning game control started by further V winning detection (S2095 of FIG. 100 is determined YES), V winning device 2150 (that is, opening and closing winning opening 2151) is selected as a large winning opening to be opened be done. After executing the process of S2118, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2119.

At S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the large winning The number of winning balls and the like at the time of winning to the mouth 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are set. The number of openings of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 corresponds to the number of rounds. In addition, in one round, the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150
is not intended to exclude those that are opened multiple times. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times of opening and closing the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S2119, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2120.

It should be noted that the "large winning opening 2131 or V winning device 2150" corresponds to the large winning opening selected in S2118 as the large winning opening to be opened, out of the large winning opening 2131 and the V winning device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

At S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is performed. After executing the process of S2120, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2121.

At S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "6". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S2121
), the large winning opening opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 94) is performed after the completion of this large winning opening opening preparation process. After executing the process of S2121, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2122.

At S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2122, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2123.

At S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the display command during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-10. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. Figure 102 shows
It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" in S2131 (S21
31 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" in S2131 (
If S2131 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2132.

At S2132, the main CPU 2201 selects the big winning port 2131 or the V winning device 2
It is determined whether or not the number of game balls winning 150 is the maximum winning number. This process
Large winning hole count switch 2132 (
(see FIG. 88) or the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88) for counting the number of game balls entering the interior of the V winning device 2150 is determined whether or not it is the value of the maximum winning number. be. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the big winning opening count switch 2132 or the V-attacker count switch 2153 is
It is stored in a predetermined area in the AM2203.

In S2132, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (when S2132 is NO determination), the main C
PU2201 moves a process to S2133.

On the other hand, in S2132, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when S2132 determines YES),
The main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2134.

At S2133, the main CPU 2201 selects the big winning port 2131 or the V winning device 2
Determine if the maximum open time of 150 has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 101) has passed.

If it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not passed (NO determination in S2133), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening control process and continues the process. Return to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has passed (if S2133 determines YES), the main CPU 22
01 moves the process to S2134.

At S2134, the main CPU 2201 selects the big winning port 2131 or the V winning device 2
150 closing processing is performed. After executing the process of S2134, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2135.

At S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (
By performing S2135), after the end of this big winning opening opening control process, the big winning opening opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed again. Main CPU 2201
executes the processing of S2135, and then shifts the processing to S2136.

At S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2136, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-11. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" in S2141 (S21
41 is NO), the main CPU 2201 terminates the jackpot end processing, also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 93). In this case, it returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" in S2141 (S21
41 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2142.

At S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (e.g., variable probability flag, time-saving flag, etc.) and various counters (e.g., variable probability counter, time-saving counter, design fixed number counter, round counter, big winning entrance winning counter, etc.) set value Alternatively, reset processing is performed. Main CPU
2201 moves the process to S2143 after executing the process of S2142.

At S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. Main CPU 22
01, after executing the processing of S2143, ends the big hit end processing, also ends the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 93). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[4. Extension example]
An expansion example common to the above-described first pachinko game machine, second pachinko game machine and third pachinko game machine will be described below. In addition, since the symbols attached to each configuration differ depending on the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, in the following description, a specific pachinko game machine (especially the third Codes are omitted unless the explanation is limited to the pachinko game machine).

[4-1. Extension example of variable probability control]
In the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag is set to ON according to the type of jackpot, and when the variable probability flag is set to ON, the variable probability number is determined. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, the following aspects may be adopted.

For example, during the execution of the big hit game control process, it is determined whether or not a specific area provided in the big winning opening is passed, and if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific area, a big hit It may be a so-called V probability variation machine that sets the probability variation flag to ON at the end of the game control process. It should be noted that the specific area, for example, by operating the movable member in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process, the open state in which the passage of the game ball is possible or easy, and the entry of the game ball is prohibited It can be displaced into a possible or difficult closed state.

In such a V probability variation machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. When the result is a big hit, the ease of passage of the game ball to the above-mentioned specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process, that is, the probability that the probability variation flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process can be different.

FIG. 104 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example. A diagram showing when the open mode of the area is the first open mode, (B) when the open mode of the specific area is the second open mode, and (C) when the open mode of the specific area is the third open mode. is. The first open mode and the second open mode are modes in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area, and the third open mode is a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area. It should be noted that in the example shown in FIG. 104, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

In addition, although FIG. 104 shows a mode in which the big winning hole is opened for a short time and then long open, the opening mode of the big winning hole is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 104(A), in the first opening mode, the specific area is also open while the big winning hole is open, except for a predetermined time after the start of the long opening of the big winning hole. It has become. Therefore, during the execution of the big-hit game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have won the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is likely to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is in the open state, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

Also, as shown in FIG. 104(B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in an open state from the start of the short opening of the big winning opening to the end of the long opening of the big winning opening. ing. Therefore, during execution of the big-hit game control process, it is extremely easy for at least one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is set to ON very easily at the end of the big hit game control process. However, as described above, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104(C), in the third opening mode, during the short opening of the special prize opening and for a predetermined time after the long opening of the special prize opening is started (these two times are short )except,
A specific area is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, even if one game ball among a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening, it is possible to pass through the specific area.
It is more difficult than both the open mode and the second open mode. That is, it is difficult for the probability variation flag to be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, when the game ball passes through the specific area with good timing, the probability variation flag is turned on at the end of the jackpot game control process. set.

In addition, in FIG. 104, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, at least one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening can easily pass through the specific area as an example of the opening mode of the specific area. , the first opening mode and the second opening mode are provided. However, during execution of the jackpot game control process, at least one of the plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot
The number of opening modes of the specific area through which one game ball can easily pass through the specific area is not limited to two modes, and may be one mode or three modes or more.

In addition, in FIG. 104, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, even if it is one game ball among a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening, it is difficult to pass through the specific area. As an example of , the example of providing the third opening mode has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, even if it is one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot, it is difficult for even one game ball to pass through the specific area. The mode is not limited, and two or more modes may be provided.

FIG. 105 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 105, when the hit/lose determination value data is "big hit determination value data" (when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit), the first special symbol and the second The winning selection symbol command of 2 special symbols is selected as follows. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the selection symbol command at the time of hit is, for example, "z0" is selected with a selection rate of 40%, and "z1" is selected with a selection rate of 10%. selected, and with a selectivity of 50%, "z2" is selected. Also, if the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit,
As for the hit selection symbol command, for example, "z3" is selected with a selection rate of 15%, "z4" is selected with a selection rate of 50%, and "z5" is selected with a selection rate of 35%.

FIG. 106 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 106, the jackpot type (for example, the number of rounds, the opening mode of the specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, the selection pattern command at the time of hit is "z0
, the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the third opening mode jackpot (3R normal jackpot A). Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot A). Also, when the hit selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot A). Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined as the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot B). When the hit selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode jackpot (
It is determined to be 10R probability variable jackpot B). When the hit selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the second opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot C).

That is, according to the above FIGS. 104 to 106, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a big hit, the type of the big hit is determined to be the 3R normal big hit A with a selection rate of 40%.
A 10R normal jackpot A is determined at a selection rate of 0%, and a 10R probability variable jackpot A is determined at a selection rate of 50%. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the type of the big win is determined to be the 10R normal jackpot B with a selection rate of 15%, and the 10R probability variable jackpot B with a selection rate of 50%. , is determined to be a 10R probability variable jackpot C with a selection rate of 35. In this way
When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit and when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the probability variation flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. It is possible to vary the probabilities.

It should be noted that, in a specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which it is opened by time control as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 107, it may be in an open state according to the winning of the game ball into the big winning opening.

FIG. 107 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example (the specific area is a big winning (Example of control to be in an open state based on winning a prize in the mouth), when (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second It is a figure which shows when it is an open mode.

As shown in FIG. 107(A), in the first open mode of another example, after the big winning hole is opened, the first game ball enters the big winning hole, and the big winning hole is counted. When the winning of the first game ball is detected by the switch, based on this detection, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. When the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole counting switch, the big winning hole is closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area will be open. Therefore, during the execution of the big-hit game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have won the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is likely to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

Also, as shown in FIG. 107(B), in the second open mode of another example, after the big winning hole is in the open state, the first game ball wins the big winning hole, Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. Then, even if the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole counting switch, the specific area remains until the winning hole is closed. does not open and remains closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, passing through the specific area even if one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening,
It is more difficult than the first open mode. That is, it is difficult for the probability variation flag to be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area with good timing, the probability changes at the end of the big hit game control process. Flag is set on.

It should be noted that, in the above, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the example in which the probability variation flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process has been described, but not limited to this, for example , When the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the time saving flag may be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective in the case of a one-kind-two-kind machine such as the third pachinko game machine.

Further, in the above, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area. Although the example provided has been described, it is not limited to this, and for example, an open mode dedicated to the first special symbol or an open mode dedicated to the second special symbol may be provided.

Further, in the above, in both cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the game ball does not pass through the specific area. Although the example that can be determined to the difficult third mode has been described, it is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process of one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one It may be configured such that only the mode (first mode or second mode) in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area is determined.

Further, in the above, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is
During the short opening of the big prize gate and after the long opening of the big prize gate is started, it is open for a predetermined time twice (both short times), but it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area. If so, the number of times the specific area is opened may be one or more times.

In addition, the specific area is closed according to the elapse of a predetermined opening time, the end of the round in which the specific area is opened, or the specified number of large winning openings or winning in the specific area. and so on. Also, one or more conditions for closing may be combined.

In addition, the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variation control is executed (for example, high probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-shortening gaming state, etc.) are a predetermined upper limit number (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number"). It may be a so-called limiter machine that is alternately and repeatedly executed until it is reached. In such a limiter machine, when the number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as "loop number") reaches a predetermined limiter number, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is a game state in which probability variation control is not executed. (For example, normal game state, time-saving game state, etc.) is controlled. At this time, the loop count is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the number of times of the limiter may be a fixed number of times, or may be determined, for example, according to the symbol random number value of the special symbol, or determined by a predetermined lottery. In the case of a setting machine, the number of limiter times may be changed according to the set value.

It should be noted that, in the above, the jackpot game state and the game state in which probability variation control is executed alternately and repeatedly executed until reaching the limiter number of times so-called limiter machine has been described, but not limited to this, for example, the jackpot game state , and the game state in which the time saving control is executed may be repeatedly executed alternately until the number of times of the limiter is reached. In particular, it is effective in the case of a one-kind-two-kind machine such as the third pachinko game machine.

Further, in the case of the above-described V probability variation machine, when the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the game state in which the probability variation control is executed is continued. Therefore, in such a V probability variable machine, if the number of limiters is set to N times, for example, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the N-th big hit game control process, assuming that the predetermined limiter number has been reached,
The game state after the jackpot game control process is finished is controlled to the game state in which the variable probability control is not executed. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the N-th big hit game control process, although it does not reach the predetermined limiter number of times, the specific area is played during the execution of the big hit game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the game state after the big hit game control process is finished is controlled to a game state in which the variable probability control is not executed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the same applies to the gaming machine in which the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game control process, the game state (for example, high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state, etc.) in which probability variation control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are performed is controlled to a predetermined When the special symbol game of the number of times is performed, it may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a game state (for example, normal game state, time saving game state, etc.) in which variable probability control is not executed. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games in which variable probability control is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "ST number") may be a fixed number of times, or may be different each time. In the case of a setting machine, the expected value of the number of STs may differ according to the set value. Furthermore, for example, it may be a so-called fall type game machine in which a fall lottery is performed and the variable probability control is terminated based on the result of the fall lottery. , It may be a so-called V probability variable type game machine in which probability variable control is executed after the end of the big hit game state.

[4-2. Extension example of time saving control]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a big win, time saving control can be executed after the big win game control process is finished. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, the time saving control may be executed.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, a specific random number out of the random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting hole (for example, a special symbol hit determination A random number, a symbol random number of a special symbol, etc.) may be used to perform a time-saving winning/losing determining process for determining whether or not to execute time-saving control separately from the special symbol winning determining process. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, when performing a time-saving win-loss determination, for example, the symbol random number of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is a specific symbol random When it is a numerical value, it can be determined to be "time saving hit" in which time saving control is executed. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving winning/losing determination process may be performed.

In addition, when performing the time saving winning/losing determination processing separately from the special symbol hitting determining processing, the time saving winning/losing determining processing may be executed prior to the special symbol winning determining processing in the same frame.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving win-lose determination process, the random number for time-saving win-lose determination exclusively provided for the time-saving win-lose determination process is generated within a predetermined range, and for example, the time-saving win-lose is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the start port. A random number value may be extracted, and the time saving winning/losing determination process may be performed using the extracted random number value for time saving winning/losing.

In addition, it is not essential that the random number value used for the time-saving winning/losing determination process is extracted based on the fact that the game ball has won the start opening, and other areas (for example, general winning opening, small winning opening, It may be extracted based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in a large prize winning opening or the like. Furthermore, for example, a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving win-lose determination process is provided, and based on the game ball passing through this dedicated area, for example, a random value that is used for the time-saving win-lose determination process is extracted. You may do so.

By the way, for example, when the time-saving winning/losing determination process and the special symbol winning/losing determination process are executed at different timings, the time-saving winning/losing determination process is performed during the variable display of the special symbols from which the stop display mode indicating the big hit is derived when the final display is performed. It is executed, and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process may be "time-saving winning". In such a case, the main CPU determines that the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving win"
In spite of this, for example, it is preferable to forcibly derive a display mode indicating "time saving failure".

In addition, the sub CPU can grasp whether the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is "time-saving hit" or "time-saving loss" by appearance or easy effect image (for example, variable effect of decorative pattern or character It is preferable to execute control to display a display effect by ) on the display device. In this case, since the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the special symbol hit determination process, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, instead of displaying on the display device an effect image that makes it possible or easy to grasp whether the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is "time-saving win" or "time-saving loss" by appearance, time-saving win-lose determination A display device that displays an effect image (for example, a variable effect of decorative patterns, a display effect by characters, etc.) that makes it impossible or difficult to grasp from the appearance whether the result of processing is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss". You may execute the control displayed in the . In this case, interest can be maintained until the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is disclosed.

In addition, in a general pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the sub CPU displays an effect image indicating, for example, an instruction to hit to the right as a game ball shooting method recommended in the big win game state. It is controlled to be displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device).
In this regard, in the present embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, if the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving hit", the sub CPU, when the time saving control is executed Control is performed so that an effect image indicating, for example, an instruction to hit to the right as a recommended game ball shooting method is displayed on the display device. However, if the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is "time-saving hit", the effect image showing the method of shooting the game ball recommended when the time-saving control is executed may always be displayed on the display device. However, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, the number of time reductions set based on the "time reduction per" is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2
times or more) is displayed, and if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than 2 times), it may not be displayed. In addition, said specific condition is not restricted to what makes a condition the number of times of time saving, It can be set as arbitrary conditions suitably.

In addition, when the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed before the special symbol winning determination process is executed, the sub CPU is under the condition of "time-saving hit" (that is, the time-saving flag is set to ON). Whether or not the special symbol hit determination process is executed may be controlled to display a performance image that can be grasped from the appearance or is easily grasped on the display device.

In addition, the type of random number used in the time saving judgment process, the timing of extracting the random number used in the time saving judgment process, the condition to be determined as time saving in the time saving judgment process, the execution timing of the time saving judgment process, the time saving judgment process can be executed, the mode of the time-saving game state, the time-saving number of times set at the time of the time-saving hit, the start timing of the time-saving game state, the end timing of the time-saving game state, the timing of rewriting the time-saving number of times, the time-saving hit probability, and the time-saving judgment Processing related to time saving, such as processing result display, is summarized below.

(Types of random numbers used for time-saving hit-loss judgment processing)
The random numbers used in the time-saving hit-and-fall determination process are, for example, the random numbers for special design hit determination, the random numbers for special design determination, the random numbers for normal hit determination, the random numbers for normal design determination, the random numbers for special design fall determination, and It may be any one of a plurality of types of random numbers such as a dedicated time-saving hit-or-lose determination random number. Moreover, if it is a setting machine, when changing the setting, the time saving win-lose determination process may be performed using the changed setting value.

In addition, the random number value used in the time saving judgment process is not limited to one type (for example, only the time saving judgment random number value), but multiple types of random number values (for example, the special symbol per judgment random number value and the random number value for design determination ) may be used for determination.

(Timing of extracting random numbers used for time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
The timing of extracting the random value used for the time-saving winning/losing determination process is when the game ball enters the starting port, which triggers the special symbol hit determination process, and when the game ball passes through the passing gate, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol hit determination process. Time, when the game ball passes through a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving hit-loss determination process, etc.
Any timing is acceptable. In addition, the extraction of the random number used for the time-saving win-lose determination process may be performed based on the winning of a specific prize winning opening where prize balls are dispensed, or a specific gate or specific out where no prize balls are dispensed. It may also be based on passage through the mouth or the like.

It should be noted that, if the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing determination process is extracted based on the winning (passing) of the game ball to the start opening, the game ball wins either the first start opening or the second start opening. Even if there is, the random number for time saving win-lose determination may be extracted, or only when the game ball wins in any one of the specific start openings, the random number for time saving win-lose determination may be extracted.

(Conditions that are determined to be time-saving in the time-saving hit/loss determination process)
When performing time saving judgment processing using the extracted random number for time saving judgment processing, the extracted random number for time saving judgment judgment is a specific random number for time saving judgment judgment (for example, specific time saving judgment value data). It is good to make it determined that it is a time-saving hit at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time saving judgment process using the random number for judging the special symbol, the time saving when it is the specific loss judgment value data, the specific small hit judgment value data or/and the specific big hit judgment value data It is preferable to make it judged as a hit. In addition, when executing the time-saving winning/losing determination process using the symbol random number value of the special symbol, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving hit is determined when it is a specific losing symbol, a particular small winning symbol, or a specific big winning symbol. . Also, when the time-saving hit-loss determination process is executed using the special symbol fall determination random number value, it may be determined that the time-saving hit is determined when the random number data for the special symbol fall determination is specific. Furthermore, when executing the time saving win-lose determination process using the setting value after the change, it is good to be determined to be a time saving hit when it is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case of performing time-saving winning/losing determination processing using random numbers for normal hit determination and random numbers for determining normal symbols. Furthermore, the condition that is determined to be a time saving hit in the time saving hit/loss determination process,
Various conditions can be arbitrarily determined without being limited to the above conditions.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, even if the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving hit", the result of the special symbol winning determination process (see S2023 in FIG. And when the game ball entering the V winning device 2150 passes through the V winning opening 2155 when the V attacker 2152 is opened, whether or not the time saving control is executed and the number of times of time saving are determined according to the type of the opening of the accessory. It is better to In spite of the fact that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the hit of the opening of the accessory and that the V attacker 2152 has opened, the V winning opening 2
When the passage of the game ball to 155 is not detected and the jackpot game control process is not executed, the main CPU 2201 determines "time saving hit" if the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving hit".
It is preferable to determine the execution presence or absence of time saving control and the number of time saving times based on. However, the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving loss", the result of the special symbol winning determination process is the opening hit, and the game ball entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 opens. does not pass through the V winning opening 2155, time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
When executing the time-saving win-lose determination process at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the random number for time-saving win-lose determination acquired based on the winning (passing) of the game ball in the starting port, the main CPU is the starting information of the special symbol. In the same way, it is better to reserve the random number value for the time saving judgment that was obtained.

In addition, the main CPU may execute the time-saving win-lose determination process immediately after extracting the random number used for the time-saving win-lose determination process (for example, before being suspended), or suspend the extracted random number, The time-saving winning/losing determination process may be executed before the variable display of the special symbols is started, or the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

(Game state that can execute time-saving win-lose determination processing)
The time-saving hit/loss determination process may be executed in any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state, or the game state in which the time-saving control is not executed (for example, normal It may be executed only in a game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.). Also, for example, to execute the time-saving win-lose determination process in any game state,
The conditions for executing the time-saving win-lose determination process, such as executing the time-saving win-lose determination process only in a specific game state, are determined in advance, and the time-saving win-lose determination process is executed when the predetermined conditions are met. good too.

(Aspect of time saving control)
The mode of the time saving control executed according to the type of the jackpot and the mode of the time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process may be the same or different. For example, a first time-saving flag and a second time-saving flag are prepared, and when time-saving control is executed according to the jackpot type, the first time-saving flag is set to ON, and based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process When the time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set to ON. In this case, when the 1st time saving flag is set to ON, and when the 2nd time saving flag is set to ON, it is good to perform time saving control with a different function. For example, when the first time saving flag is set on, both special figure shortening control and electric sapo control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set on, special figure shortening control and electric sapo Only one of the controls can be performed. Also, when the first time saving flag is set to ON, control to the first time saving game state in which only the special figure shortening control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control, and the second time saving flag is turned on If it is set to , it may be controlled to the second time-saving game state in which only the electric sapo control is performed out of the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control. However, which of the plurality of time saving flags to set on is not limited to the above. It may be determined according to the game state when it is played.

(Time saving number of times set at time saving hit)
It is preferable to determine the number of times of time saving set when the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving hit" according to the game state when the time saving win/loss determination process is performed. However, not limited to this, for example, if a plurality of time saving hit-or-loss judgment random numbers are defined as time saving hit judgment value data, the number of time saving times to be set to the game state when the time saving hit-or-fall judgment process is performed Instead or in addition, it may be determined according to the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination. For example, the random number for time-saving winning/losing determination extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is the first
If it is the time saving hit determination value data, the number of time saving times is determined to "100", and if it is the second time saving hit determination value data, it corresponds to determining the time saving times to "50".

In addition, the game state in which the time saving control is executed (for example, high probability time saving game state, time saving game state, etc.)
Even if the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and if the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit", the main CPU determines the number of time saving times determined based on "time saving hit",
Instead of the remaining number of times of saving time, it may be newly set (that is, resetting the remaining number of times of saving time). In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the newly set number of times of saving time is greater or less than the remaining number of times of saving time, and the range of game characteristics is expanded, and the time saving game state in which the time saving flag is turned on is interesting. It is possible to make it have and increase interest.

In addition, the game state in which the time saving control is executed (for example, high probability time saving game state, time saving game state, etc.)
Even if the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and if the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit", the main CPU determines the number of time saving times determined based on "time saving hit",
You may make it add to the number of times of shortening of working hours remaining. In this case, since the remaining number of times of time saving does not become less than the current remaining number of times, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the game state in which the time saving control is executed.

In addition, the game state in which the time saving control is executed (for example, high probability time saving game state, time saving game state, etc.)
Even if the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and if the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit", the main CPU determines the number of time saving times determined based on the "time saving hit". Either a process of newly setting instead of the number of times or a process of adding the number of times of time saving determined based on the 'time saving hit' to the remaining number of times of time saving is determined in advance, and this predetermined condition is satisfied. You may make it set the number of times of time saving in a mode.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine in which time saving control with different functions is executed when the first time saving flag is set on and when the second time saving flag is set on,
If the result of the time saving determination process is "time saving hit", the main CPU, the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the time saving control of the same function. You may make it change the process which sets the time-saving frequency|count with the case where it is time-saving control of a different function. For example, if the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the same function of time saving control, the number of time saving determined based on the "time saving hit" to the remaining number of time saving In addition, if the time saving control that is executed based on the time saving control being executed and the time saving control that is executed based on the "time saving hit" is a time saving control with a different function, instead of the time saving remaining number of times that is being executed, based on the "time saving hit" You may make it newly set the number of times of time saving determined by (that is, reset the remaining number of times of time saving). In addition, if the time-saving control that is executed based on the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control that is executed based on the "time-saving hit" are different functions, after all the remaining time-saving times during execution are consumed, time-saving based on the "time-saving hit" You may make it perform control.

In addition, when the number of times of time saving is set based on the fact that the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process is "hit", the number of times of time saving may be set to "0". That is, when the number of times of time saving to be set is determined to be "0", the time saving flag is set to ON even though the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit". In addition, when the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process performed during the execution of the time-saving control is 'time-saving win' and the number of times of time-saving is set to '0', the time-saving control being executed is terminated.

(Start timing of time saving control)
The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving win" can be the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the time saving control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol determination time for determining the special symbol. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process.
Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, time saving control can be started based on the end of the big hit game control process.

The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving hit" is the end of the special symbol game, and the time saving winning/losing determination process is the special symbol winning determination process in the same frame. If performed earlier, even if the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is "time-saving hit", if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, invalidate the "time-saving hit" (based on "time-saving hit" It is preferable that the time saving flag is not set to ON based on the hit selection pattern command (the time saving flag may not be set to ON depending on the type of big win).

Moreover, the start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving winning" is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, in the same frame, if the time saving hit/loss determination process is performed prior to the special symbol hit determination process, based on the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process, immediately (before the special symbol hit determination process is performed) even if the time saving control is started. good. In this case, the game state (that is, whether or not time-saving control is executed) may differ between the time of extracting the random number used for the time-saving win-lose determination process and the execution of the time-saving win-lose determination process, and it is possible to enhance the interest. becomes.

Furthermore, the start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving win" may be set after a predetermined number of games have been played. In this case, after the result of the time saving win-lose determination process becomes "time saving hit", until the time saving control is started, the sub CPU executes the fanning effect of whether or not the time saving control is started, It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, when the jackpot game control is executed based on the fact that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot for which the time saving control is executed), the jackpot game control ends Based on, it is preferable to start the time saving control based on the big hit. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a per access (a per access for opening the time saving control) and when the V attacker 2152 opens, the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 Also when big-hit game control is performed by having detected, it is good to start time saving control based on the end of big-hit game control. In addition, even if the V attacker 2152 opens based on the fact that the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process is "time saving hit" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is the role release hit Regardless, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed,
The main CPU may start the time saving control based on the "time saving win" based on the closure of the open/close winning opening 2151 .

(End timing of time-saving game state)
The timing at which the time saving game state ends is, for example, "in the game state in which the time saving control is performed, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed over the set number of time saving times", "in the game state in which the time saving control is performed , When it is controlled to a big hit game state based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process "or "When the number of times of time reduction is set to 0 times even though the result of the time reduction hit/loss determination process was a time reduction hit" etc. is.

It should be noted that, in the gaming state in which the time saving control is executed, if the small hitting game control processing is executed based on the result of the special symbol per determination processing, the time saving control continues to be executed even after the small hitting game control processing ends. be done.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, during the execution of the time saving control, the opening and closing winning opening 2 is derived by deriving the stop symbol mode indicating that the special symbol hit determination process is the opening hit.
151 is opened, when the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected when the V attacker 2152 is opened and the jackpot game control processing is not started, the main CP
U2201 continues and performs time saving control, even after opening-and-closing winning a prize mouth 2151 closes.

(Time-saving number of rewrites)
Time saving control is executed (for example, high probability time saving game state, time saving game state, etc.) to execute time saving judgment processing, and the result of this time saving winning and losing judgment processing is "time saving hit",
The main CPU may rewrite the number of times of saving time, or may not rewrite the number of times of saving time (that is, execute the time saving control until the number of times of saving time in the time saving control being executed is consumed).

In addition, when rewriting the number of times of time saving, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of times of time saving determined based on the "time saving hit" at the time when the number of times of time saving in the time saving control being executed is consumed, It may be set at the time of execution of the special design hit determination process, it may be set at the time of starting or stopping the variable display of the special design, it may be set at the time of the time saving success determination process, and it may be set at various timings. can do. In addition, when setting at the time of time saving hit-loss determination processing, the time saving number of times determined based on the "time saving hit" will be overwritten to the time saving number of times in the time saving control being executed. Alternatively, one of "rewrite the number of time saving" and "add to the previous number of time saving" may be determined in advance, and the number of time saving may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

(Probability of time saving)
When the time reduction win-lose determination processing is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port or the second start port, the time reduction win-lose determination processing performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port (hereinafter referred to as "the 1 time reduction hit/loss determination process") and time reduction hit/loss determination process (hereinafter referred to as "second time reduction hit/loss determination process") performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port, the time reduction hit probability may be different. For example, the second than the time saving hit probability when the first time saving hit or loss determination process is performed
It is possible to increase the time saving hit probability when the time saving hit/loss determination process is performed, or when the first time saving hit/loss determination process is performed than the time saving hit probability when the second time saving hit/loss determination process is performed. The time-saving winning probability may be increased, or the time-saving winning probability may be set to be the same or substantially the same between when the first time-saving winning/losing determination processing is performed and when the second time-saving winning/losing determination processing is performed.

(Result display of time-saving win-lose judgment processing)
A time saving judgment result display unit that displays the result of the time saving judgment process (whether it is a time saving hit or a time saving loss) or / and the time saving number determined based on the result of the time saving judgment process (time saving hit) A win-time reduction number display unit for displaying may be provided. The time-saving winning/losing determination result display section and/or the winning time-saving number display section may be provided in an LED display group including a special symbol display section and the like, and controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub CPU, for example, on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, even if it displays the number of times of time saving determined based on the result of the time saving judgment process and / and the time saving hit. good.

(interval)
When the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss and the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU sets the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game, It may be longer than the interval time when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss and the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving loss". In addition, since the variable display of decorative patterns is synchronized with the variable display of special patterns, in this case, the sub-CPU displays, for example, the liquid crystal It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a role release hit and the big win game control process is not executed based on this role release hit, the main CPU 2201 performs the time saving winning/losing. When the result of the judgment process is "time saving win", the interval time after the action for opening the accessory is longer than the above interval time when the result of the time saving win-lose judgment process is "time saving loss". may be the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Expansion example related to management of game media]
The first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine described in this specification play games using game media, and rewards (for example,
It can be applied to all forms of gaming machines that provide prize balls, prize data, etc.). i.e.
A game is played by shooting or inserting game media (e.g., game balls, medals, etc.) by physical actions of the player, and game media are paid out based on the results of the game. The main control circuit itself may electromagnetically manage the game media owned by the player and enable a game played by circulating enclosed game balls or a game played without medals. In addition, the game media owned by the player are electromagnetically managed by the main control circuit (
connected) to manage game media.

In the case of a gaming machine in which a game is played by circulating enclosed game balls, the game balls as game media are not discharged to the outside so that the game can be played. Prize ball data as a game medium is provided instead. In this specification, "game value to be paid out" includes both prize balls and prize ball data. For example, when the player wins a winning slot with 15 prize balls, prize ball data having a value corresponding to 15 prize balls is provided in the case of an enclosed game machine. Also, the game value is not necessarily limited to prize balls or prize ball data, and may be equivalent to prize balls or prize ball data.

In addition, when the game media management device connected to the main control circuit manages, the game media management device is a device provided in the game machine having ROM and RWM (or RAM),
An external game medium handling device (not shown) is connected to a two-way communication function via a predetermined interface. operation of providing game media) or winning a prize related to the payout of game media (
game media payout operation (that is, an operation to acquire the necessary game media in order to pay out the game media to the player), or the game media to be used for the game. What is necessary is just to be able to perform the operation|movement which records electromagnetically. In addition, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media,
A display device for the number of owned game media (not shown) for displaying the number of game media owned is provided in front of the pachinko machine, and the number of game media displayed on the display device for the number of owned game media is managed. may In other words, the game media management device may record and display the total number of game media that a player can use for games by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has the capability of allowing the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device. In addition to being directly operated by the player, it has the performance that the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between it and an external game media handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with lending operation means, return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (e.g. IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal, other operating means such as lending operation means, return operation means, etc., external connection terminal board on the side of the game media handling device may be provided (neither is shown).

As the game flow at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable value based on the operation of one of the lending operation means. Then, the game media corresponding to the subtracted value are increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operation when the game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device ejects the recording medium recording the number of game media. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when transmitting the number of game media. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange for prizes, or moves the game machine to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media are sent to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is sent from the gaming machine or the game medium handling device, and the game media possessed by the player are sent. It is good also as dividing and processing. Moreover, it is not limited to ejecting the recording medium, and cash or cash equivalents may be ejected, or may be stored in a portable terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be configured so that the member recording medium of the game parlor can be inserted, and the member recording medium is stored so that the game can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown), it is possible to execute a lock operation to lock the game medium or valuable value data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device. good too. In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded by imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

In the above description, the game media management device is applied to a pachinko game machine. It can also be provided so that the game media of the player can be managed.

Thus, by providing the above-described game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced compared to the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. not only can be reduced, but also the player can be prevented from directly contacting the game medium, the game environment can be improved, the noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of the game machine can be reduced by reducing the number of parts. It will also happen. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through game media or through the slot for inserting or paying out game media. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, an enclosed type game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and a communication cable for transmitting data related to the increase or decrease in the game medium associated with consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected to enable transmission and reception by optical signals via a game system, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed type game machine, the shooting device is positioned above the game area and shoots game balls as game media from above to the game area.
When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit,
A ball-feeding pestle pushes out a game ball in a standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. Also, a subtraction sensor is provided on the route from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, 1 is subtracted from the number of possessed balls. In this way, since game balls as game media are shot from above into the game area, so-called return balls (foul balls) can be avoided in enclosed type game machines. The game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is conveyed upward by the lifting device and guided to the shooting device. Game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed type game machine, and a fixed number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. In addition, a discharge mechanism for discharging the game balls to the outside of the game machine and a take-in mechanism for taking in the game balls polished outside the game machine are provided without providing a ball polishing device. good too. In this case, the take-in mechanism may be provided with a gutter dedicated to take-in, or may be configured to take in from a winning opening provided in the game area.

Since game balls are not ejected to the outside of the game machine, enclosed type game machines are not provided with an upper tray or a lower tray for temporarily holding game balls. Since the game balls are not discharged to the outside in the closed-type game machine, the game balls are not actually in the hands of the player, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as the game is played. In an enclosed type game machine, a player starts a game after obtaining a ball by lending it from a game medium management device. Here, to get the ball,
It means that a player obtains game media for data management. As game balls are shot from the shooting device, the balls in the player's possession are consumed, and the number of balls in the player's possession decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through the respective prize winning openings provided in the game area, the number of payouts according to the conditions set according to the winning openings is performed, and the number of possessed balls is increased. Furthermore, the number of balls in possession is increased by lending out from the game medium management device. In addition, for example, when the game is over, all the game values (that is, the balls in possession) stored in the enclosed gaming machine are cleared, or some of the balls in possession are transmitted to the game medium management device. When all or part of the balls are integrated into the game value managed by the game medium management device, the game value stored in the enclosed game machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls is reduced. . Furthermore, game machines that shoot game balls from above the game area do not have the concept of foul balls, but if game balls are shot from below as in conventional gaming machines, foul balls are generated. sell. Therefore, in the case of a game machine that shoots game balls from below, the number of held balls increases or decreases depending on the presence or absence of foul balls.
It should be noted that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" indicates consumption, lending, and payout of held balls. Also, "increase or decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases or decreases due to consumption, lending, or payout. Also, "data on increase/decrease in game media associated with consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on decrease in possessed balls due to shooting game balls and increase in possessed balls due to lending and payout.

The enclosed type game machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors for detecting the passage of game balls through the winning openings. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls to be paid out is added to the number of balls. Also, when a game ball is shot, the number of possessed balls is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held by the player to the game medium management device. In addition, the above liquid crystal display device is located at the top of the game machine,
Conversion from game value managed by the game media management device to possessed balls (ball lending), count of possessed balls (
return) is accepted. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data regarding the current number of balls in possession. Here, the "game value" includes money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, and the like, which can be converted into holding balls by the game media management device. In this embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept bills, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted number of balls in hand can be used for prize exchanges and the like in a game arcade where the game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed game machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even if the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. In addition, this backup power supply may be used to continuously detect opening of the door frame by the door opening sensor, for example. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored.
Furthermore, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the game machine when the power is turned on.

It should be noted that the enclosed type game machine only needs to be configured so that the player cannot touch the game balls, for example, a type that circulates the game balls only in the game machine without circulating the game balls in the island facility. , and those in which the game balls circulate in the island facility but the players cannot touch the game balls are also included in the enclosed game machines.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signal) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted and received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, the game This is information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the game machine and the game medium management device is the transmission source and the other is the transmission destination, when the transmission source transmits the transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether they are the same.

In this manner, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal and determines whether or not they are the same. It is possible to confirm that the message has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress cheating such as falsification of transmission/reception signals between the game machine and the game medium management device.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation section for modulating a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation section is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section. It is also possible to have a demodulator for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission/reception signal between the game machine and the game media management device is read, it is difficult to decipher the signal. Unauthorized acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming system, when the transmission signal is received from the transmission source, the transmission destination transmits an acknowledgment signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may be sent to the sender.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is possible not only to confirm that the normal signal has been transmitted and received, but also to confirm that the normal signal has been transmitted and received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent acts. Instead of directly connecting the main control circuit and the game media management device, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the game media management device, and the main control circuit and the game media management device are connected via the frame control circuit. A communication connection may be established with the game media management device. In addition, a launch control circuit is provided separately from the main control circuit,
A frame control circuit may be provided between the launch control circuit and the game media management device. In this case, the error control of the main control circuit and the firing control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

Also, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel,
The main CPU performs processing so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not stop at a symbol combination indicating a big hit symbol.

More specifically, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one special symbol stops at a symbol combination indicating a jackpot symbol, the other symbol is displayed. The special symbols are forcibly stopped with a symbol combination showing a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol,
As described above, the general game state is shifted to the jackpot game state.
The PU newly performs neither the variable display of the first special symbol nor the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol,
Based on the transition from the general game state to the small winning game state (stopping at the combination of symbols showing the small winning pattern), the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special pattern is interrupted, and the change from the small winning game state to the general game state is performed. Based on the shift (end of the small winning game), the process of restarting the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the general game state is shifted to the small winning game state as described above. None of the symbol start conditions are met, and the main CPU
Neither the variable display of the special symbol nor the variable display of the second special symbol is newly performed. however,
When both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed and one special symbol stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the main CPU controls the other symbol during variable display. With regard to the special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol composed of the group of LEDs is apparently performed in the same manner as during the variable display, but the clocking of the variable time is interrupted as described above.

[4-4. Other expansion examples]
In this specification, the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine have been described as examples, but the technology described in this specification can be applied to other machines such as pachislot machines. It can be applied to gaming machines.

Regardless of whether the technique described in this specification is applied to a pachinko gaming machine or a pachislot machine, an effect accompanied by a temporary stop of symbols may include a temporary stop of the reels. The "stop" of the symbol includes a permanent stop and a temporary stop, and any interpretation of the "stop" is acceptable. Further, the operation for playing the game by the player may be operation of a lever, a handle, a button, or the like, touch, or the like.

In a pachinko game machine, there are cases where the administrator of the gaming machine sets effects, etc. by operating the effect buttons, but there are cases where the player starts the game after setting the effect buttons. be. In this case, it is conceivable that an operation by the manager may result in an operation for the player to play a game. Similarly, in pachislot, the manager performs a 2-bet game,
It may be assumed that a player performs a 3-bet game while the BB flag corresponding to the 2-bet game is established. In this case, the player can play either a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game. bet game, etc.), selection of a hole menu, etc., may be operations for the player to play the game.

In the pachinko machine, the game method of the player is managed by notifying whether the game is right-handed or left-handed under the control of the main CPU. The fact that it is unintended may be notified by the control of the sub CPU.

In pachislot, the main CPU controls the player's playing method, such as the player's pushing order (assist).
However, if the game method of the player is not intended,
An error or warning that the game is unintended may be notified by the control of the sub CPU.

Further, in the pachinko game machine, the main control board and the payout control board are mounted on separate boards, but they may be mounted on one board. In pachi-slot, there may be no payout control board, but the payout may be controlled by the main control board, or the main control board and the payout control board may be separated.

In addition, pachislot machines usually have a rectangular housing containing devices necessary for various games, and a door that can be opened and closed to the housing. It is possible. On the other hand, in pachinko, the outer frame is regarded as the housing, the outer frame and the base door are regarded as the housing, and the entire game machine consisting of the outer frame, the base door, the glass door and the plate unit is regarded as the housing. is possible. Between the housing and the door, or between the frame and the door, there may be a unit provided with various control boards, a middle frame, an intermediate part, etc., or a door, a frame, a housing, etc. Various control boards, display means, decorations, accessories, etc. may be present in the device.

[5. First embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine]
Next, the fourth pachinko game machine will be explained. The fourth pachinko machine has a first embodiment and a second embodiment, and both of these embodiments are called 1-type 2-type mixing machines, similar to the third pachinko machine. It is a pachinko machine. The first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko machine differ from the third pachinko machine in terms of the basic specifications of playability, and along with that, the various members placed in the game area are different. The configuration is partly different.

It should be noted that the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine do not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, as in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a priority variation machine in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is preferentially established over the starting condition of the first special symbol. however,
It is not limited to this, and may be the sequential variation machine described above.

First, after describing the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. Hereinafter, in describing the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and the same step numbers are assigned to the same constituent elements as the first pachinko game machine, and the configuration and A detailed description of the processing is omitted.

<First Embodiment of Fourth Pachinko Machine>
[5-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 108, game board unit 3 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine
010 will be explained. This game board unit 3010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 108 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 3010 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 3010 includes a game panel 3100, various members are arranged on the game panel 3100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side surface of the game panel 3100, in which the shot game ball can roll and flow. .

As shown in FIG. 108, the game board unit 3010 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine mainly includes the first passage gate 3126A,
The configuration and arrangement of the second pass gate 3126B, the first starting port 3120, the second starting port 3140, the normal electric accessory unit 3145, the special electric accessory unit 3130, and the V winning device 3150 are different. . Each configuration and arrangement thereof will be described below.

(first passage gate)
The first passage gate 3126A is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that left-handed game balls can pass through (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to pass through). ing. The first pass gate 3126A is provided with a first pass gate switch 3127A (see FIG. 109 described later) for detecting passage of a game ball to the first pass gate 3126A.

(Second passage gate)
The second passage gate 3126B is the normal electric accessory unit 314 in the right area 107, which will be described later.
5, and arranged so that only right-handed game balls can pass through. The second pass gate 3126B is provided with a second pass gate switch 3127B (see later-described FIG. 109) for detecting passage of a game ball to the second pass gate 3126B.

When the game ball passes through the first pass gate 3126A or the second pass gate 3126B (hereinafter also referred to as "pass gates 3126A, 3126B" as appropriate), normal symbol lottery and normal symbol variable display are performed. In this embodiment, no prize ball is paid out even if the game ball passes through the passage gates 3126A and 3126B, but a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) may be paid out.

Also, the passage gates 3126A and 3126B may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous actuating device. On the premise that the conditional device is operating, the accessory continuous operating device may be operated upon passage of the game ball through the passage gates 3126A and 3126B to shift to the jackpot game state.

This is the same for the passage gate 126 of the first pachinko game machine and the passage gate 2126 of the third pachinko game machine described above.

(First start port)
The first starting port 3120 is the traveling direction of the game ball that has passed through the first passage gate 3126A (that is, directly under the first passage gate 3126A), and is approximately 1 from the first passage gate 3126A.
The individual game balls are arranged close to each other with a distance therebetween. Furthermore, the first starting port 3120 is arranged so that it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the game ball with a game nail or the like, except for the game ball that has passed through the first passage gate 3126A.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 3120, a special symbol lottery, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed, or a predetermined prize ball (for example, three game balls) is paid out. Become.

In this embodiment, the distance between the first starting port 3120 and the first passage gate 3126A is approximately one game ball, but it may be approximately one or two game balls. Originally, the shorter the distance between the first starting port 3120 and the first passage gate 3126A, the better.
In order to make the functions of the first start port 3120 and the first pass gate 3126A independent, the distance between the first start port 3120 and the first pass gate 3126A must be at least one game ball. is desirable.

Thus, by arranging the first starting port 3120 close to directly under the first passing gate 3126A, the game ball that has passed through the first passing gate 3126A immediately reaches the first starting port 31
20, and the start timing of the variable display of normal symbols triggered by the passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A and the entry of the game ball to the first start port 3120. It is possible to adjust the start timing of the variable display of the special symbols (the variable display can be started substantially at the same time).

In addition, by arranging the first starting port 3120 so that it is difficult to enter a game ball other than the game ball that has passed through the first passage gate 3126A, although the variable display of normal symbols is not performed, the variable display of special symbols is performed. To prevent the event of only being performed, the variable display of the special symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 3120, and the ordinary The variable display of the pattern can be operated as a set.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 3140 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can be entered (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to enter).

When the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, a special symbol lottery, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, or a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) is paid out. Become.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 3145 includes a winning opening for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls when the game balls enter, a switch for detecting the entry of game balls into the winning opening, and a normal electric role. It is a unit body integrated with the object 3146 and is arranged in the right area 107 . In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 3140 and the switch is the second starting opening switch 3141 .

The normal electric accessory 3146 includes a protruding plate type shutter 3147 for normal electric power that can move back and forth, and a solenoid for normal electric power 3148 (Fig. 109 to be described later) that operates the shutter 3147
See). The normal electric accessory 3146, that is, the normal electric shutter 3147, has an open state in which a game ball can or easily enter the second start port 3140, and a game ball cannot or cannot enter the second start port 3140. It is configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states.

Specifically, the general electric shutter 3147 includes a substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion arranged in front of the entrance of the second start port 3140 and a plate-shaped ball entry guide portion inclined toward the second start port 3140. consists of When the general electric shutter 3147 is in the open state, the substantially triangular ball entry preventing portion protrudes from the surface of the game panel 3100 by a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball to prevent the game ball from entering the second start port 3140. Without hindrance, the plate-like entrance ball guide part protrudes from the surface of the game panel 3100 by a distance smaller than the diameter of the game ball, receives the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107, and moves the received game ball to the second 2 Guide to the starting port 3140 . On the other hand, when the general electric shutter 3147 is in the closed state, the substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion protrudes from the surface of the game panel 3100 by a distance smaller than the diameter of the game ball, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the second starting port 3140. The plate-like ball-entering guide portion that inhibits ball-entering is buried in the surface of the game panel 3100 and causes the game ball that has flowed down to the right region 107 to flow downward without receiving it. It should be noted that a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed instead of the general electric shutter 3147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction.

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 3130 includes a large winning slot 3131, a large winning slot count switch 3132 (see FIG. 109 to be described later) for detecting the entry of a game ball into the large winning slot 3131, and a special electric role product 3133. It is an integrated unit body. The special electric accessory unit 3130 is arranged below in the right area 107 .

The big winning opening 3131 is arranged in the right area 107 so that a right-handed game ball can be entered (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to enter). However, it is not limited to this, and a large winning opening into which a left-handed game ball can enter is arranged, or a large winning opening into which a game ball can enter is arranged in the upper part of the center accessory 115. You may make it so.

The big winning opening 3131 is a winning opening that is opened so that up to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be entered when controlled to a jackpot game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. be. When game balls enter the big winning hole 3131, predetermined prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out.

The transition of the big winning port 3131 from the closed state to the open state is the first route when the stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination process is "big hit" is derived, and the special symbol determination. V-attacker 3152 is released by deriving a stop display mode indicating that the result of the above is "a winning prize", and the game ball that has entered the released V-attacker 3152 is a V winning opening in the V-attacker 3152. This is the second route when winning a prize.

The special electric accessory 3133 includes a special electric shutter 3134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 3135 (see FIG. 109 to be described later) that operates the special electric shutter 3134 . The special electric accessory 3133, that is, the special electric shutter 3134, has an open state in which a game ball can or easily enter the big winning opening 3131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the big winning opening 3131. It is configured to be able to transition to and from states.

Specifically, the special electric shutter 3134 is composed of an open/close door pivotally supported at the bottom.
When the special electric shutter 3134 is in an open state, the opening/closing door falls to the front side to open the big prize winning opening 3.
131 is opened to receive the game balls flowing down to the right area 107 and guide the received game balls to the big winning opening 3131 . On the other hand, when the special electric shutter 3134 is in the closed state, the opening/closing door is inverted to close the big winning opening 3131, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 3131.

(V winning device)
The V winning device 3150 is provided downstream of the normal electric accessory unit 3145 in the right area 107 . The V winning device 3150 has an opening/closing winning port 3151 that is open so that a game ball can enter inside the V winning device 3150, a V attacker 3152 that can open and close the opening/closing winning port 3151, and this V attacker 3152. Operate to open and close winning port 31
V-attacker solenoid 3154 for opening and closing 51, V-attacker count switch 3153 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the opening and closing winning opening 3151, V from the opening and closing winning opening 3151
A V winning port 3155 through which a game ball entering the winning device 3150 can pass, and a V winning port 3
V winning opening switch 3156 for detecting that the game ball has passed through 155, opening and closing winning opening 31
A loss opening 3157 through which game balls that have not entered the V winning opening 3155 out of the game balls that have entered the interior of the V winning apparatus 3150 from 51 can pass, a V shutter 3158 that opens and closes the V winning opening 3155, and this V shutter. A V shutter solenoid 3159 for opening and closing the V winning opening 3155 by operating the 3158 is provided. Note that the V winning device 3150 may be provided upstream of the normal electric accessory unit 3145 or may be provided in the left area 106 .

The V-attacker 3152 is made of a protruding plate-shaped plate-like member that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction. , the V-attacker 3152 is retracted backward to allow the entry of game balls into the open/close winning opening 3151, or to easily shift to an open state.

The open/close winning opening 3151 is a winning opening that is opened by the operation of the V attacker 3152 at the time of "accessory opening hit", and up to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be entered per opening. It has become. When a game ball enters the opening/closing winning hole 3151, the value of the V attacker winning prize counter is added, and predetermined prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out.

The V winning mouth 3155 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 4000
msec), on condition that the game ball has passed through, it is a winning opening that triggers control to the big hit game state via the second route described above.

When the game ball is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route, the release of the V attacker 3152 when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 3155 is regarded as the first round, and the game ball passes through the V winning opening 3155. After that (after the second round), a round game is executed in which the big winning opening 3131 is shifted from the closed state to the open state. In addition, when it is controlled to the big hit game state through the second route, the V winning opening 315 is set so that the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued
After the game ball has passed to 5 (after the second round), a round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state may be executed over a predetermined number of rounds.

Also, for example, by providing a V winning opening inside the special electric accessory 3133 (that is, the area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 3134 is in an open state)
Only one attacker may be opened in the prize-winning game state and the jackpot game state. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that the "accessory is open" is derived, the special electric shutter 3134 is opened, and the V prize opening 3155 provided inside the special electric accessory 3133
When the game ball enters into, it is controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot game state via the second route).

The losing opening 3157 is configured such that a game ball that has entered the interior of the V winning device 3150 but has not passed through the V winning opening 3155 enters (passes through). Missing mouth 3157
The game ball that has passed through is discharged out of the machine. In addition, all of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 3150 pass through the loss opening 3157, and if there is no game ball passing through the V winning opening 3155, the game ends without being controlled to the big win game state. becomes.

The V shutter 3158 includes a V shutter solenoid 3159 (see FIG. 109 described later).
Due to the operation of the closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) to pass the game ball to the V winning opening 3155,
It operates between the open mode in which the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 3155 is possible (or easy).

[5-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 109, the control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 109 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 109, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 for controlling the game and a It is composed of a sub-control circuit 300 for controlling effects, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450. - 特許庁

However, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the configuration of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 is partially different from that of the first pachinko gaming machine. Specifically, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the general electric solenoid 3148, the special electric solenoid 3
135, V-attacker solenoid 3154, V-shutter solenoid 3159, first
Starting port switch 3121 , second starting port switch 3141 , first pass gate switch 312
7A, the configuration of the second pass gate switch 3127B, the big winning opening count switch 3132, the V attacker count switch 3153, and the V winning opening switch 3156 are partially different. Each configuration and arrangement thereof will be described below.

Further, since the fourth pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment does not execute probability variation control, the probability variation notification display unit 167 in the first pachinko gaming machine is not provided. Furthermore, as will be described later, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine does not have a holding function for holding the starting information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, so in the first pachinko gaming machine Normal symbol reservation display unit 162, first special symbol reservation display unit 165, second special symbol reservation display unit 16
6 is not provided.

(Solenoid for general electricity)
The general electric solenoid 3148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electric shutter 3147 . When the main CPU 201 energizes the general electric solenoid 3148 (it is ON), the general electric shutter 3147 advances forward to open the second start port 3140 , and the main CPU 201 energizes the solenoid 3148 . If not (if it is OFF), the general electric shutter 3147 is retracted rearward to close the second starting port 3140 .

(solenoid for special train)
The special electric solenoid 3135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates a special electric shutter 3134 consisting of an opening/closing door. When the special electric solenoid 3135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, the special electric shutter 3134 is tilted forward to open the big winning opening 3131, and when the main CPU 201 does not energize (OFF) ) and
The special electric shutter 3134 is turned upside down to close the big winning opening 3131.例文帳に追加

(Solenoid for V attacker)
The V-attacker solenoid 3154 is an electromagnetic solenoid that activates the V-attacker 3152 . When the V-attacker solenoid 3154 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201 , the V-attacker 3152 moves backward to open and close the winning opening 3151 .
is opened, and when the main CPU 201 does not energize (OFF), the V-attacker 3152 advances forward to close the open/close winning opening 3151 .

(Solenoid for V shutter)
The V shutter solenoid 3159 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V shutter 3158 . When the main CPU 201 energizes the V-shutter solenoid 3159 (it is ON), the V-shutter 3158 moves backward to open the V-winning opening 3155. If the main CPU 201 does not energize the V-shutter solenoid 3159 is OFF) and
The V shutter 3158 is moved forward to close the V winning opening 3155. - 特許庁again,
In this embodiment, the V-shutter solenoid 3159 is activated 200 msec after the open/close winning opening 3151 is opened to open the V winning opening 3155 . That is, V
Winning port 3155 opens and closes after 200 msec from the opening of opening and closing winning port 3151.

(First start switch)
The first starting port switch 3121 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects entry of a game ball into the first starting port 3120 . When the first starting port switch 3121 detects the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 3120, the main CPU 201 extracts the starting information of the first special symbol, and converts the starting information of the extracted special symbol to the first special symbol. It is used for the hit determination process, performs the variable display process of the first special symbol, or instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to pay out a predetermined prize ball (for example, 3 game balls). .

(Second starting switch)
The second starting port switch 3141 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects entry of a game ball into the second starting port 3140 . When the second starting port switch 3141 detects the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 3140, the main CPU 201 extracts the starting information of the second special symbol, and converts the starting information of the extracted special symbol to the second special symbol. It is used for the hit determination process, performs the variable display process of the second special symbol, or instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to pay out a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball). .

(First pass gate switch)
The first passage gate switch 3127A is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball to the first passage gate 3126A. When the first passage gate switch 3127A detects the passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A, the main CPU 201 extracts the normal symbol starting information, and applies the extracted normal symbol starting information to the normal symbol hit determination process. It is used, and the variable display processing of the normal pattern is performed.

(Second pass gate switch)
The second pass gate switch 3127B is a penetrating proximity switch that detects passage of a game ball to the second pass gate 3126B. When the second passage gate switch 3127B detects the passage of the game ball to the second passage gate 3126B, the main CPU 201 extracts the normal symbol start information, and applies the extracted normal symbol start information to the normal symbol hit determination process. It is used, and the variable display processing of the normal pattern is performed.

In addition, when the passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A is detected by the first passage gate switch 3127A, the second passage gate 3 by the second passage gate switch 3127B
When the passage of the game ball to 126B is detected, the same normal symbol hit determination processing is performed without distinction. Also, even if the passage of the game ball to the passage gates 3126A and 3126B is detected by the first passage gate switch 3127A or the second passage gate switch 3127B (hereinafter also referred to as "passage gate switches 3127A and 3127B" as appropriate),
Prize balls are not paid out.

(Grand prize mouth count switch)
The big winning hole count switch 3132 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 3131 . When the big winning hole count switch 3132 detects that a game ball has entered the big winning hole 3131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls game balls) is instructed to the payout/launch control circuit 400.

(V attacker count switch)
The V-attacker count switch 3153 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects entry of game balls into the open/close winning opening 3151 . When the V-attacker count switch 3153 detects that a game ball has entered the opening/closing winning hole 3151, the main CPU 201 adds the value of the V-attacker winning counter and pays out predetermined prize balls (for example, 10 game balls). It instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the processing. When the V-attacker winning prize counter reaches a specified value, the V-attacker solenoid 3154 operates the V-attacker 3152 to close the opening/closing winning port 3151 even if the maximum time for opening the opening/closing winning port 3151 has not passed. will be

(V prize opening switch)
The V winning opening switch 3156 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects passage of a game ball to the V winning opening 3155 . A predetermined time (for example, 4000m
sec), when the V winning opening switch 3156 detects the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 3155, the main CPU 201 performs transition control to the jackpot game state. In addition, even if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 3155 is detected by the V winning opening switch 3156,
Prize balls are not paid out.

[5-3. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 110 to 120, basic specifications of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. The first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, although variable probability control is not executed, a time-saving game state in which time-saving control is executed and a normal game state in which time-saving control is not executed are prepared.
The main CPU 201 is capable of progressing the game in the normal game state or the time-saving game state. In addition, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the variable probability control is not executed, but this is not essential, for example, the variable probability flag is set to ON according to the type of jackpot etc. may be executable.

Further, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, although details will be described later, under specific conditions (
A "limiter function" that counts the number of consecutive big wins that transitioned to the big win game state in A short time game state), and when the number of consecutive big wins reaches a predetermined limit number, the game state that shifts after the end of the big win game state is partially regulated. It has

In the present embodiment, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is the normal game mode in the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state. In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the game mode between left-handed and right-handed is appropriately changed depending on the open mode of the normal electric accessary 3146 . The sub CPU 301 executes control to display the hitting method that is regarded as a regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 7 .

[5-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 110 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 110 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

In the special symbol hit determination table, data used in the first special symbol hit determination process executed based on the ball entering the first starting port 3120 includes "big hit" and "accessory open hit".
Or the range (width) of the random number value for judging the jackpot determined for the "time-saving hit", and the corresponding judgment value data ("jackpot judgment value data", "jumping judgment value data", "time-saving hit judgment value data”). Also, as the data used for the second special symbol hit determination process executed based on the winning to the second start port 3140, "big hit" or "
The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for judging the jackpot determined for the "jackpot open hit" and the corresponding decision value data ("jackpot judgment value data", "jackpot hit judgment value data") is stipulated. It is Incidentally, the total random number value of the big hit determination random number value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the random number value for judging a big hit is generated within a range (width) of 0-65535.

As shown in FIG. 110, when a game ball enters the first starting port 3120, the main CPU2
01, based on the hit determination process of the first special symbol using the random number value for the determination of the big hit of the first special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, "big hit", "accessory hit" or " Decide on a short time hit. Also, when a game ball enters the second start port 3140, the main CPU 20
1, based on the second special symbol hit determination process using the second special symbol big hit determination random number value, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined as "big hit" or "accessory release hit". do.

In addition, when the hit determination process of the 1st special design is performed, it may be configured such that "losing" is determined. Further, when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, it may be configured so that the "accessory release hit" is not determined. That is, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, it is an essential requirement that a "big hit" or a "time saving hit" is determined when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed. However, other requirements can be freely changed in design.

Also, when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, it may be configured so that "losing" is determined, but when it is determined to be "losing", the first special symbol It is preferable to set the probability to be relatively low so that the determination performed in the hit determination process for the second special symbol is more advantageous than the determination performed in the hit determination process. Moreover, when the hit determination process of the 2nd special design is performed, you may comprise so that "time saving hit" may be determined. That is, the fourth
In the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine, it is an essential requirement that a "jackpot" or a "accessory release hit" is determined when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed. Other requirements can be freely changed in design.

In addition, when the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of opening the accessory is set to be higher at the high setting than at the low setting. should be In this case, for example, both the probability of winning a big hit and the probability of winning a role object may be higher at a high setting than at a low setting. The probability may be higher with high setting than with low setting, or the probability of big hit is fixed regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning a role is higher with high setting than with low setting. may However, even if the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the time saving winning probability as a common probability for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the jackpot probability or the probability of opening the role item according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 3152 is changed for each set value to change the winning rate to the V winning device 3150. Alternatively, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 3155 may be changed for each set value to change the passage rate to the V winning opening 3155, or the number of continuous time reduction may be changed for each set value. That is, the probability of a big hit, the probability of opening a role, the frequency of opening the V winning opening 3155 (that is, V
Attacker 3152 operation frequency), opening time, time reduction continuation number of times, etc. By adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, the expected value controlled to the jackpot game state may be configured to be higher at the high setting than at the low setting.

[5-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 111 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the special symbol determination table shown in FIG.
Stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the embodiment

The special symbol determination table determines the stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins in the first start port 3120 and the second start port 3140 and the aforementioned determination value data. It is a table referred to when selecting a "selected pattern command" and a "designated pattern command".

The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a winning symbol determined according to the type of the big hit when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a big hit, and the "symbol specifying command" is a special symbol. This is a command for specifying the pattern to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 111, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 3. In this case, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 4 to 60, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 61 to 99, the main CPU 201 outputs "z
3”, and select “zA1” as the design designation command.

Also, when the winning determination value data for opening the first special symbol is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol, when the symbol random number value for the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201
selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 60 to 89, the main C
The PU 201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "z5" as the symbol designation command.
A2”. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 90 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the winning judgment value data for opening the first special symbol is obtained as a result of the winning judgment processing for the first special symbol, the special symbol judgment table shown in FIG. 111 is used as the selected symbol command , "z6"<"z5"<"z4".

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 99, for example, the selected symbol. "z7" is selected as the command, and "zA3" is selected as the design designation command.

Also, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
Even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 201
selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, when the hit judgment value data for the second special symbol is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 99,
U201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and "zA" as the symbol designation command.
5”.

Although the explanation is omitted in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the main control circuit 200
The main ROM 202 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the special symbol stop mode derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 109) when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped. It is a table referred to when making a decision according to a symbol command. Further, in the first special symbol display unit 163 and the second special symbol display unit 164, based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the display mode of the time-saving win, the display mode of the big win, and the display mode of the open-access prize are displayed. Alternatively, a display mode of failure is derived. The program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 also stores a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12B) described in the first pachinko game machine.

[5-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 112 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It should be noted that the hit type determination table shown in FIG.
00 is stored in the main ROM 202 . FIG. 112(a) is an example of a winning type determination table that is referred to when the limiter function is not in operation (limiter function is not in operation), and FIG. It is an example of a hit type determination table that is referred to when the function is activated).

As shown in FIG. 112, the hit type determination table is, for the selected symbol command, the opening mode of the role product opening hit, the mode of the jackpot game state, the mode of the game state after the jackpot game state (time saving flag and time saving count ), the mode of opening the winning prize, and the number of times of the limiter at the time of the first winning are associated with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table, and based on the selected symbol command, the opening mode of the winning of the accessory, the mode of the big win game state, the mode of the game state after the big win game state (time saving flag and time saving number of times), The mode of opening per opening of the role item and the number of limiters are determined.

The "opening mode for winning a role" is the open/close winning port 31 that is opened at the time of "winning a role".
51 opening mode (opening mode of V winning device 3150). The "first open mode" is an opening mode in which the open/close winning opening 3151 is opened for a short period of time (for example, 200 msec in this embodiment), which is disadvantageous to the player. Also, as described above, in this embodiment,
Since the V winning port 3155 will be in an open state after 200 msec from the opening of the opening and closing winning port 3151, the opening and closing winning port 3151 will be opened in the first opening mode, and the game ball will open and close the winning port 315
Even if the ball enters 1, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 3155, and from this point of view, the opening mode is disadvantageous for the player. The "second opening mode" is an opening mode in which the open/close winning opening 3151 is open for a long time (for example, 18000 msec), which is advantageous for the player. Then, when the opening and closing winning port 3151 is opened in the second open mode and the game ball enters the opening and closing winning port 3151, it is easy for the game ball to pass through the V winning port 3155. It is an opening mode that is advantageous for the person.

In the present embodiment, the opening time of the opening and closing winning port 3151 is short in the "first opening mode", and the opening time of the opening and closing winning port 3151 is long in the "second open mode". The opening time of the open/close winning port 3151 is set to be substantially the same between the "open mode" and the "second open mode", and the V shutter 3158 is easier to operate in the "second open mode" than in the "first open mode" ( V prize gate 3
155 may be opened so that the game ball can easily pass through the V winning opening 3155).

"Aspect of jackpot gaming state" indicates an opening mode of the big winning opening 3131 opened at the time of "jackpot", and indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot in this embodiment. In addition to the number of rounds for the big win, the opening time per round and the big winning opening to be opened may be determined.

"Aspect of subsequent game state" indicates the aspect of the game state after the end of the jackpot game state, and means the setting of the "time saving flag" and the "time saving number of times". In addition, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the big hit game state, and the "time saving flag" and the "time saving number" are set.

"Limiter count" indicates the number of limiters set at the time of a big hit in a state other than the A time-saving game state (normal game state, B time-saving game state or C time-saving game state). The number of limiters is decremented each time a transition to a big hit game state occurs under specific conditions (A time-saving game state), and when the number of limiters becomes 0, the limiter function is activated, and the hit type is determined as shown in FIG. 112(b). A table will be referenced.

As shown in FIG. 112(a), when the selected symbol command "z4 to z6" corresponding to the "accessory hit" as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 A ``first opening mode'' that is disadvantageous to the player is determined as a winning opening mode,
When the selected symbol command "z9" corresponding to the "hit of the role release" is the result of the second special symbol win determination process, the "second release mode" which is advantageous to the player as the "open mode of the win of the role release". ” is configured to determine

In the present embodiment, as described above, either the "big win" or the "accessory release win" is determined in the second special symbol win determination process. Then, when the "accessory opening hit" is determined as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, the "second opening mode" advantageous for the player is determined, and the game ball is placed in the opening/closing winning opening 3151. It is easy to pass through the winning opening 3155, and it is easy to shift to the jackpot game state from the second route. Therefore, if the game ball enters the second start port 3140, it is easy to shift to the jackpot game state from the first route or the second route, and the game ball enters the second start port 3140. It is configured to be able to shift to a jackpot game state as a matter of course.

On the other hand, even if the "accessory prize winning" is determined as a result of the winning determination processing of the first special symbol, the "first opening mode" disadvantageous to the player is determined and the big win from the second route is determined. It is difficult to shift to the game state. Therefore, the winning of the accessory release triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 3120 is treated substantially in the same manner as the losing. note that,
Accessory release hit triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 3120 is treated in the same manner as loss, but is referred to for switching the variation pattern table to be described later.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the "accessory hit" is determined as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the "opening mode of the accession hit" is set as the "first prize" that is disadvantageous to the player. Although it is configured so that only the "open mode" is determined, it may be configured so that the "second open mode" that is advantageous to the player is determined. In the case of such a configuration, it is desirable that the ``second opening mode'', which is advantageous to the player, is less likely to be selected than the ``first opening mode,'' which is disadvantageous to the player. .

Also, as shown in FIG. 112(a), when the selected symbol command "z1 to z3" corresponding to the "jackpot" as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 turns on the time saving flag. Decide to set and decide to set the number of times of time saving to 100 times. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, and determines to set the number of limiter times to 5 only in the case of a big hit in a state other than the time-saving game state A. . Further, when the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, and determines to set the number of limiter times to 3 only when the jackpot is achieved in a state other than the time-saving game state A. . Further, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, and determines to set the number of limiter times to 3 only in the case of a big win in a state other than the time-saving game state A. .

In this way, in the case of "big hit" as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, different numbers of rounds and limiter times are set according to the selected symbol command.
As a result, it is possible to differentiate the profit given to the player for each type (symbol) of the big win,
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 112(a) and 112(b), when the selected symbol command "z7" corresponding to "time-saving winning" is selected as a result of the first special symbol winning determination process, the main CPU 20
1 decides to set the time saving flag to ON, and decides to set the number of time saving times to 1 time.

In this way, as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, when "time saving hit", the first
As a result of the special symbol hit determination process, a time-saving game state of a very short period is determined as compared with the "big hit".

The hit type determination table when the limiter function is activated shown in FIG. 112(b) is shown in FIG.
2, the setting of "mode of subsequent game state" and "number of limiter times" are different, and "mode of release for opening the accessory" and "jackpot game state The setting of "Aspect of" is the same. As shown in FIG. 112(b), since the limiter function is in operation, naturally the "limiter count" is not set.

As shown in FIG. 112(b), when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", it is controlled to the jackpot game state. Since there is no such thing, similarly to FIG. 112(a), a time saving flag and a time saving number of times are set.

However, when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" or "accessory release hit", any selected symbol command Also, as a mode of the game state after the end of the jackpot game state, the time saving flag is set to OFF and the number of times of time saving is not set. That is, when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), the game state after the jackpot game state ends is shifted to the normal game state.

[5-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
113 to 116 are examples of the special symbol variation pattern table of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 113 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 114 is a C time saving game in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols of the state. Moreover, FIG. 115 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, and FIG.
It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols after the limiter function is activated in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It should be noted that the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 is the main RO
It is stored in M202.

As shown in FIGS. 113 to 116, the special symbol variation pattern table includes the special symbol type, the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the reach determination random number, the effect selection random number, and the special symbol. A symbol variation pattern and a variable display time of a special symbol are associated with each other. Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. In addition, the columns of "remarks" in FIGS. 113 to 116 are shown for convenience to facilitate understanding.

The main CPU 201 determines one of the special symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 according to the gaming state, etc.
A variation pattern of the special symbol and a variable display time of the special symbol are determined based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for performance selection.

Further, when determining the variation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the sub CPU 301 . The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 . In addition, the variation pattern command is a variation pattern triggered by the game ball entering the first start port 3120, or a variation pattern triggered by the game ball entering the second start port 3140. It is configured to be identifiable.

The jackpot type reach and jackpot type normal reach shown in the column of "remarks" in FIGS. It is a reach performance. Chance variation is a variation production that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a time saving hit.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 113 (1) and the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG.
3(2) and a special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 113(3). In addition, the number of variation pattern tables of special symbols in the normal game state is not limited to three, and may be one.
It may be 2 or more.

In the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 113(1), after the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is backed up and cleared (that is, the variation pattern table of the initial values), "accessories are released". After the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z4" is stopped and displayed, after the shift to the normal game state after the limiter function is activated, the hit determination process of the first special symbol for the first time is performed. It is a variation pattern table selected after the completion (that is, after transition from the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116 (1) to be described later).

The special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 113 (2) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z5" for "accessing the role" is stopped and displayed. .

The special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 113 (3) is a variation pattern table selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" for "accessing the role" is stopped and displayed. .

Figure 113 (1) ~ (3) in the normal game state special symbol variation pattern table T1 ~
In T3, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the variable display time of the special symbol is a longer variation pattern than the variable display time of the normal symbol "01H" (hereinafter "
Either a variation pattern "02H" (hereinafter also referred to as "chance variation B") in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol is selected. be.

Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 137, in the normal game state, the chance variation A longer than the variable display time of the normal symbols is caused by the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbols. The starting port 3140 tends to be in an unfavorable open state, and the second starting port 3140 is advantageous due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol for the chance variation B shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol. open mode.

Figure 113 (1) ~ (3) in the normal game state special symbol variation pattern table T1 ~
In T3, the selectivity between chance variation A and chance variation B is different. The chance variation B that tends to open the second start port 3140 in the normal game state is advantageous, and is configured to be easily selected in the order of special symbol variation pattern table T1<special symbol variation pattern table T2<special symbol variation pattern table T3. It is

Therefore, among the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table T3 is the most advantageous variation pattern table for the player. In addition, as a selection pattern command,
Since it is configured to be easily selected in the order of 'z6'<'z5'<'z4', the variation pattern table T3 of the special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command 'z6' is most difficult to be selected.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in C time saving game state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114, as a special symbol variation pattern table in the C time saving game state, a special symbol variation pattern table C1 shown in FIG. 114 (1) and FIG.
14(2) and a special symbol variation pattern table C3 shown in FIG. 114(3). In addition, C
The number of variation pattern tables of special symbols in the time-saving gaming state is not limited to three, and may be one or two or more.

The special symbol variation pattern table C1 shown in FIG. 114 (1) is the first special symbol command "z4" corresponding to the selected symbol command "z4" after the normal game state has shifted to the C time saving game state. This is a variation pattern table selected after the symbols are stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table C2 shown in FIG. 114(2) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z5" for "accessing the role" is stopped and displayed. .

The special symbol variation pattern table C3 shown in FIG. 114(3) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" for "accessing the role" is stopped and displayed. .

Variation pattern table C1 of special symbols in C time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 114 (1) to (3)
~ C3 also, the variation pattern table T1 of the special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG.
Like ~T3, if the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol "Chance variation A" and the special symbol Any variation pattern of "chance variation B" whose variable display time is shorter than the variable display time of normal symbols is selected.

Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 138, even in the C time-saving game state, the chance variation A longer than the variable display time of the normal symbols is usually caused by the operation of the electric accessory 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbols. The second starting port 3140 is likely to be in a disadvantageous open state, and the chance variation B shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol is usually caused by the operation of the electric accessory 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol. is likely to be an advantageous open mode.

Variation pattern table C1 of special symbols in C time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 114 (1) to (3)
˜C3 have different selectivity between chance variation A and chance variation B. FIG. Chance variation B, in which the second starting port 3140 tends to be in an advantageous open mode in the C time-saving gaming state, is likely to be selected in the order of special symbol variation pattern table C1<special symbol variation pattern table C2<special symbol variation pattern table C3. It is configured.

For this reason, among the special symbol variation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time saving game state, the special symbol variation pattern table C3 is the most advantageous variation pattern table for the player. Thus, since the selected symbol commands are configured to be easily selected in the order of "z6"<"z5"<"z4", the special symbol variation pattern table C3 corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" is the most It is configured to be difficult to be selected.

In addition, the variation pattern tables T1 to T3 of the special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 113,
The variation pattern tables C1 to C3 of the special symbols in the C time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 114 are the first
The variation pattern of the special symbols is common, but the variation pattern of the second special symbol is different when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "a winning prize". i.e.
In the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state shown in FIG. The pattern is changed with a variation time of, for example, 500000 msec or 600
000msec and is determined to be a very long long fluctuation effect. This is because, in the normal game state, basically the game ball does not enter (pass through) the second start port 3140, but if an unforeseen situation occurs, the game ball enters the second start port 3140. This is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous person even if the prize is won, but it is not always essential to do so.

Therefore, the variation pattern tables T1 to T3 of the special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG.
And, a special symbol variation pattern table common to the special symbol variation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time saving game state shown in FIG. 114 may be adopted.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in A reduced working hours gaming state or B reduced working hours gaming state)
The variation pattern table A of special symbols shown in FIG. 115 is a variation pattern table selected when being controlled to the A time saving game state or the B time saving game state.

The special symbol variation pattern table A is configured such that the variable display time of the special symbol is relatively short except when the result of the hit determination process is "big hit". As a result, in the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving game state, the game ball is V winning opening 3155 in opening and closing winning opening 3151
can be shifted to a big win game state via the second route in a short time.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols after the limiter function is activated)
The special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116 (1) is a specific variation pattern table selected in the first special symbol hit determination process after the shift to the normal game state after the limiter function is activated. be.

In the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116 (1), when the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the second start port 31 in the normal game state
40 is configured to always select the chance variation B that tends to be an advantageous open mode.

When the chance variation B is selected in the normal game state, the second starting port 3140 becomes an advantageous open mode, and the game ball easily enters the second starting port 3140. And, in the present embodiment, as described above, if the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, it is easy to transition to the big hit game state from the first route or the second route, and the game ball is the second By entering the start hole 3140, it is possible to shift to a big hit game state.

For this reason, even if the continuous game in the time-saving game state is completed by the operation of the limiter function, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination process after the shift to the normal game state is "time-saving hit", again Since it is possible to shift to the jackpot game state via the second route, it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game due to the activation of the limiter function.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 is configured so that chance variation B is always selected when the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit". It may be configured such that the chance variation A, which tends to cause the second starting port 3140 to be in an unfavorable open mode, is selected with a lower probability than the chance variation B.

In addition, after the shift to the normal game state after the limiter function is activated and after the first special symbol hit determination process is completed, the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116 (1) Therefore, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 113(1) is selected.

The special symbol variation pattern table Z2 shown in FIG. 116 (2) is a modification of the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. , a specific variation pattern table selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process. The special symbol variation pattern table Z2 sets the chance variation A to 20% and the chance variation B when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time saving hit".
is configured to be selected with a probability of 80%.

Even in this way, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination process after the transition to the normal game state is "time saving hit", the probability of moving to the big win game state via the second route again. is increased, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to activation of the limiter function.

The special symbol variation pattern tables Z1 and Z2 are variation pattern tables selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process after the shift to the normal game state after the limiter function is activated. Not limited to the first time, for example, in the case of having a special symbol reservation function, it may be a variation pattern table selected based on the special symbol hit determination process up to the fourth time, or up to an arbitrary predetermined number of times The variation pattern table may be selected based on the special symbol hit determination process.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the chance variation A and the chance variation B are set to one, but based on the variable display time of the normal symbol, special It comprises a plurality of chance variation groups A in which the variable display time of patterns is longer than the variable display time of normal symbols and a plurality of chance variation groups B in which the variable display time of special patterns is shorter than the variable display time of normal patterns. good too.

[5-3-5. Normal pattern hit judgment table]
FIG. 117 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 117 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the game state and the normal symbol hit determination random value extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gates 3126A and 3126B. It is a table referred to when determining "normal design per" or "losing" by lottery based on and.

The normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 117 includes the game state, the normal symbol hit determination random number range (width), and the normal symbol hit determination value data ("normal symbol hit" or "loss").
and are defined in association with each other.

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for normal symbol hit determination from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 117, and determines the normal symbol hit determination value data based on the gaming state and the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value.

In the present embodiment, in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol win determination random number value is any one of 0 to 89 as "normal symbol win", and sets the win/lose determination value data. "Normal per design judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 90 to 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data ” is decided.

In addition, in the time-saving game state A, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 98 as "normal symbol hit", and sets the hit/lose determination value data to "normal". Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the time-saving game state A, when the random number value for winning judgment of the extracted normal symbol is 99, the main CPU 201 judges "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 89, determines that it is a “normal symbol hit”, and sets the hit/lose determination value data to “normal”. Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 90 to 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data ” is decided.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 89, determines that it is a “normal symbol win”, and sets the hit/loss determination value data to “normal”. Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 90 to 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data ” is decided.

Thus, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state, the winning probability per normal symbol in the A time-saving game state (Fig. 117
(estimated)) is the highest.

Also, the winning probability per normal symbol in the B time saving game state is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the normal game state. Similarly, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time saving game state is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the normal game state. Therefore, even if the game state shifts between the normal game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol will not be changed.

In addition, the winning probability per normal symbol may be made the same in the normal game state, the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to change the ratio of types of normal symbols to be described later for each state without changing the winning probability per normal symbol.

[5-3-6. Normal pattern judgment table]
FIG. 118 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118 is the first
It is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the embodiment.

The normal symbol determination table contains the above-mentioned hit/lose determination value data, the pass gates 3126A, 312
A table referred to when selecting a ``selected pattern command at the time of winning a normal symbol'' for determining a stop symbol of a normal symbol based on a symbol random value of a normal symbol extracted when a game ball passes through 6B. be. "Selected pattern command at the time of normal design hit" is a command for specifying the normal design hit pattern determined according to the normal design hit type when the result of the hit determination process for the normal design is a normal design hit. be.

In the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118, the normal symbol per determination value data ("normal symbol per" or "losing"), normal symbol random number value, and normal symbol per selection symbol command are associated with each other. stipulated by In addition, the pattern random number of the normal design is, for example, 0 to 9
It is extracted from among 9 (100 types).

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118, and determines the normal winning select symbol command based on the normal symbol winning determination value data and the normal symbol random number value.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command at the time of the normal symbol hit is selected as follows. be.

For example, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 issues a selection symbol command at normal symbol hit if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 29. Select "fz1" as the normal symbol random number of 30 to 6
If it is any of 9, select "fz2" as the selection symbol command at the normal symbol hit time, and if the symbol random number of the normal symbol is any of 70 to 99, select "fz3" as the selection symbol command at the normal symbol hit time. select.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko game machine, when selecting the "selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning", regardless of the game state, the hit/lose determination value data (normal symbol hit determination process result) and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, it is configured to be selected.

Further, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol win determination table (see FIG. 117), and determines win/lose determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol win determination random number value. After that, referring to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 118), the selection symbol command at normal symbol hit is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number for winning determination of the normal symbol and the random number of the normal symbol, the winning/losing of the normal symbol and the selection symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol may be determined together.

[5-3-7. Type determination table per normal pattern]
FIG. 119 is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the normal per symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 119 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal per symbol type determination table is a normal electric role as an opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 according to the game state and the normal symbol per selection symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the normal symbol. It is referenced when determining the release pattern of the object 3146 .

In the normal per symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 119, the game state, the selection symbol command at normal per symbol, and the release pattern as the release mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 are defined in association with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol type determination table shown in FIG.
Based on the game state and the selection symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is determined. After that, the main CPU 201 determines the normal electric accessory 3146
to the sub CPU 301.

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 201, in the normal game state, if it is a selection symbol command at normal symbol winning, the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is any selected symbol command at normal symbol winning. The opening pattern is the first opening time of 200 msec,
Decide on no wait time and no second opening.

In addition, in the case of the normal game state, the first open time may be varied according to the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning. For example, in the case of the normal game state, if the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz1", the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, is set to 200 msec for the first opening time, and the normal symbol hit is performed. When the selection pattern command is "f
z2", the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, is set to 250 msec for the first opening time, and the normal electric accessory 3146 is opened when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz3". The opening pattern, which is a mode, may have a first opening time of 300 msec and a second opening time of 0 for any of the normal symbol winning selection symbol commands.

Further, in the case of the time saving game state A, when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz1", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, to the first opening time of 2000 msec. , a wait time of 200 msec, and a second open time of 2000 msec. Further, in the case of the time saving game state A, if the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, for the first opening time of 2500 msec. , wait time 20
0 msec and the second opening time of 2500 msec are determined. Also, the main CPU 20
1, in the case of the A time saving game state, if the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz3", the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, is set to the first opening time 300;
0 msec, wait time 200 msec, second open time 3000 msec.

In addition, in the case of the B time saving game state or the C time saving game state, when the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz1", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, to 1. It is determined that the opening time for the first time is 2500 msec, no waiting time, and no opening for the second time. In addition, in the case of the B time saving game state or the C time saving game state, if the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, to 1. The opening time for the first time is 2000 msec, the wait time is 600 msec, and the opening time for the second time is 2000 msec. In addition, in the case of the B time saving game state or the C time saving game state, when the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz3", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, to 1. The opening time for the first time is set to 2500 msec, the wait time is set to 600 msec, and the opening time for the second time is set to 2500 msec.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the same normal symbol per selection symbol command (for example, "fz
1”), the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is configured to differ according to the game state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the normal symbol win determination process in the normal game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is the opening of the normal electric accessory 3146 in each game state. Among the patterns, the most advantageous degree becomes the disadvantageous aspect. Incidentally, the degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is the degree of ease of winning the game ball to the second starting port 3140 when the normal electric accessory 3146 is opened.

When the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the A time saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is the most advantageous among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 3146 in each game state. The degree becomes an advantageous aspect.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the B time reduction game state is "normal symbol hit" is the normal symbol hit determination process result in the C time reduction game state. The degree of advantage is the same as the open pattern of the ordinary electric accessary 3146 in the case of "ordinary winning pattern", but it is not limited to this.

[5-3-8. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 120 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 120 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG.
A, 3126B are associated with a random number value for normal symbol effect selection extracted when a game ball passes through, a normal symbol variation pattern, and a normal symbol variable display time. Incidentally, the random number for normal design effect selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table, and based on the game state and the normal symbol effect selection random number extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gates 3126A and 3126B, the normal symbol variation. A pattern and a variable display time of normal symbols are determined. After determining the variation pattern of the normal symbols, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub CPU 301 a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the normal symbols.

As shown in FIG. 120, in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state, even if the random number for normal symbol effect selection is any of 0 to 99, the normal symbol variable display time is 10000, for example.
It is determined in msec.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is one of 0 to 89, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the normal symbol effect selection random value is 90 to 99. , the variable display time of the normal pattern is, for example, 800 mse
c.

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is any one of 0 to 39, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the normal symbol effect selection random value is 40 to 79. In the case of either of
When it is determined to be ec and the random number for normal design effect selection is any one of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal design is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

Thus, the variable display time of the normal symbols per one variable display is the shortest expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the A short-time game state among the variable display times of the normal symbols in each game state. Therefore, in the A time-saving game state, among the game states, the normal electric accessory 314
The time until 6 is released is the shortest.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state and the C time saving game state, the variable display time of normal symbols is fixed at 10000 msec. 113 to 1
In the special symbol variation pattern table shown in 15, as described above, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the chance variation A longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol is The variable display time is 13000 msec, which is longer than 10000 msec, and the chance variation B, which is shorter than the variable display time of normal symbols, has a variable display time of 9000 msec, which is shorter than 10000 msec. See Figures 137 and 138 for details.
, but from the relationship between the game state and the variable display time of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the special symbols, the normal electric accessory 3146 opening pattern (second The opening state of the starting port 3140) will change.

[5-4. Main control processing]
In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the main CPU 20 of the main control circuit 200
1, the main control main processing (FIGS. 20 to 23
), the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process and the switch input detection process performed in S39 are partially different, but the other processes are the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control processing normal symbol control processing and the switch input detection processing will be described, and the main CPU
Description of other processes executed by 201 is omitted.

The processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example,
Jackpot end processing (FIGS. 42, 133, etc.), below, including the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko game machine, will be described again with different step numbers.

[5-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the special symbol control processing performed at S39 during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 121, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S3001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). Main CPU
201 moves the process to S3002 after executing the process of S3001.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process by:
Prior to the process of S3001, an address setting process is performed to set the address of the special symbol work area in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register.

At S3002, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded at S3001 is 0, that is, whether or not it is waiting for variable display of the special symbol.

When it is determined that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 in S3002 (S3002 is N
If the determination is O), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3005.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control number of the special symbol is 0 in S3002 (S300
2 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3003.

In S3003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display.

When it is determined that the second special symbol is not the variable display start in S3003 (S3003
is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3004.

In S3004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is to start variable display.

When it is determined that the first special symbol is not the variable display start in S3004 (S3004
is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is the start of variable display in S3004 (S3
004 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3005.

Returning to S3003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of variable display (S300
3 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3005.

At S3005, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. The main CPU 201 performs S3
After executing the process of 003, the special symbol control process is terminated, and the process is changed to the main control main process (Fig. 2
0 to FIG. 23).

It should be noted that the main CPU 201 sets the interrupt prohibition section, and the special symbol control process (S
3001 to S3005) are preferably performed within the interrupt disabled section.

[5-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 at S3005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121) will be described. FIG. 122 shows the fourth
is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is 0 (when S3002 is YES determination), the special symbol management process is the second special symbol to be processed when S3003 is YES determination, and S3004 is YES.
In the case of S determination, the first special symbol is to be processed. Also, if the control state number is not 0 (S
3002 is NO determination), the special symbol management process is for the special symbol being executed.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG.
It is the control state number of the special symbol to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for special symbols is 0 (S3
011).

If it is determined that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 in S3011 (S3011 is N
If the determination is O), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 in S3011 (S301
1 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3012.

At S3012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol.
After executing the process of S3012, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3013. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S3013 based on the control state number read in the process of S3012.

At S3013, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S3013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 advances the processing to S3014.
to

In S3014, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S3014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 advances the processing to S3015.
to

At S3015, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This S3
The process of 015 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3016.

At S3016, the main CPU 201 performs V winning device opening preparation processing. This S
The process of 3016 is a process performed when the special symbol control state number is "3".
The details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3017.

At S3017, the main CPU 201 performs V winning device opening control processing. This S
The processing of 3017 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4".
The details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3018.

At S3018, the main CPU 201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. This S3
The process of 018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 131 . If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3019.

At S3019, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening control process. This S3
The process of 019 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3020.

At S3020, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot ending process. This S3020
is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S3013 to S3020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

[5-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 at S3013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. Figure 123
is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S3013 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly,
S30 during the special symbol management process in which the special symbol variable display start process targets the second special symbol
If it is the process called in 13, the second special symbol is to be processed.

As shown in FIG. 123, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S3021).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" in S3021 (S30
21 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process,
The process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" in S3021 (
If S3021 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3022.

In S3022, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 110) is referred to, and the special symbol hit determination is performed using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value stored in the special symbol determination area. will be In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is a processing target, it is determined which one of the big hit, the accessory release hit, and the time saving hit. Also, if the second special symbol is to be processed, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a prize release hit. Main CPU20
1 executes the process of S3022 and then moves the process to S3023.

At S3023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process
It is a process of judging or determining the stop design of the special design corresponding to the result of the special design hit determination process (S3022) (for example, the big hit, the role release hit and the time saving hit). This process
By referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 111) and using the symbol random number value of the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination area, the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "designated symbol command" are determined. After executing the process of S3023, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3024.

In S3024, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (big hit, accessory release hit and time saving hit). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 112) is referred to, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S3023). It should be noted that the type of hit determined when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is, for example, an open-accessory hit is determined by the game ball passing through the V winning opening 3155 opened based on the open-accessory hit. It is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. Also, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots and prizes to be released, but the number of jackpots and/or prizes to be opened may be one. Furthermore, it is good also considering the kind of time reduction hit as multiple kinds. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S3024, the process moves to S3025.

In S3025, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. This process
113 to 116 according to the game state, etc., and referring to the determined special symbol variation pattern table, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process Then, the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined based on the reach determination random number value and the effect selection random number value. The details of this special symbol variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S3025, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3026.

At S3026, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variable display time of the special symbol is determined based on the determined variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 113 to 116) determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S3025). Thereafter, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display time of the determined special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164 to start variable display of the special symbol. After executing the process of S3026, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3027.

In S3027, the main CPU 201 performs time saving management processing. In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, unlike the first pachinko game machine, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, from the ceiling counter update process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter and the time saving counter A time saving counter update process for subtracting 1 is performed. Specifically, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the time saving flag = 1 is set (the time saving flag is turned on), the specified number of times is set in the time saving number counter, and the B time saving game state is identified Time saving identification Set the number = 2, and control the transition to the B time-saving gaming state. Also, when the time saving number counter=0, the time saving flag and the time saving identification number are cleared, and the transition control from the time saving game state to the normal game state is performed.

In addition, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, which is called a one-type and two-type mixed machine, it is not controlled to a high-quality game state, so time-saving management performed in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine The processing also differs from the processing described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko game machine. Specifically, in the first pachinko game machine, when the variable probability flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is set on. In the first embodiment of the pachinko game machine No. 4, it is not controlled to the high certainty game state. Therefore, instead of setting the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON when the variable probability flag is set to ON and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is set to ON only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. different in Also, in the first pachinko game machine, in the time saving transition determination process (see FIG. 37), after determining whether the probability variation flag is off (see S191), on the condition that the probability variation flag is off Although the processing of S192 is performed, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, since it is not controlled to the high accuracy game state as described above, the processing of S192 is performed without performing the processing of S191. . Then, even in the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38), without performing the process of S202, the ceiling flag turned on when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value Controls the transition to the B time saving game state (see S208) will take place. Other processes in the time saving management process are the same as the processes described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. After executing the process of S3027, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S
Move to 3028.

At S3028, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", the special symbol variable display end process (
(see S3014 in FIG. 122) is performed. The main CPU 201, S3028
After executing the process of , the process moves to S3029.

At S3029, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 (for example, the remaining number of time-savings, etc.) are updated. Main CPU2
01 moves the process to S3030 after executing the process of S3029.

At S3030, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this processing, mainly update processing of various flags (for example, time saving flag etc.) relating to management of the game state is performed. After executing the process of S3030, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3031.

At S3031, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S3030), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S3031)) during the interrupt prohibition interval. preferably in-house.

[5-4-4. Special Symbol Variation Pattern Decision Processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 124, S302 in the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 123)
5, the details of the special symbol variation pattern determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation pattern determination processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the limiter operation flag is ON (S
3025-1). In S3025-1, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3025-2 if it is determined that the limiter operation flag is ON, and advances the process to S3025-2 if it is determined that the limiter operation flag is not ON. Move to 5.

Here, the "limiter operation flag" counts the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot game state under specific conditions (A time-saving game state), and is a flag that operates when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limiter count. , is turned on in limiter count update processing (see FIG. 127), which will be described later.

In S3025-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling counter=0. In S3025-2, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3025-3 if it is determined that the ceiling counter is 0, or to S3025-5 if it is determined that the ceiling counter is not 0. Transfer.

Unlike the first pachinko game machine, the "ceiling counter" updates the ceiling counter (adds 1) when variable display of special symbols is started, and B when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value.
It is a counter for controlling the time saving game state. In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, when the special symbol variation pattern determination processing is performed, the ceiling counter is not incremented in the "time saving management processing" of S3027, so the ceiling counter = 0 , means the time when the first variable display of special symbols is started in the normal game state.

In S3025-3, the main CPU 201 turns off the limiter operation flag,
The process moves to S3025-4.

At S3025-4, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116(1) as the specific variation pattern table after the limiter function is activated. Incidentally, as shown in the modified example, the special symbol variation pattern table Z2 shown in FIG. 116(2) may be determined.

In addition, in S3025-4, set the small winning symbol switching information = 0, which will be described later, from the next time onwards, from the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 or Z2 shown in FIG.
Preparations are made so that the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in (1) is selected.

At S3025-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether the current game state is the normal game state,
Information on the game state (time saving identification number) is acquired in order to grasp which game state is being controlled among the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B and the time saving game state C.

In S3025-6, the main CPU 201 displays the information of the symbol stop-displayed in the first special symbol display section 163 when it was previously determined that the first special symbol win was determined to be a "accessory hit" as a result of the hit determination process. (hereinafter referred to as "small hit symbol switching information") is acquired.

"Small hit design switching information" is an overwriting process of small winning design switching information described later (S of FIG. 126
3062), one piece of information is overwritten and updated. As a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, when it is determined that the "accessory hit" is determined, the selected symbol command "
When the first special symbol corresponding to "z4" is stopped and displayed, small winning symbol switching information = 0 is stored,
When the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z5" is stopped and displayed, the small winning symbol switching information=1 is stored, and when the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" is stopped and displayed. , small hit symbol switching information = 2 will be stored.

At S3025-7, the main CPU 201 determines one variation pattern table from a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the acquired game state information and the small winning symbol switching information.

Specifically, when determining that the main CPU 201 is under control in the normal game state, the small winning symbol switching information corresponding to the selected symbol command "z4" is 0, and the main CPU 201 determines (1) in FIG.
determines the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 113 (2), and determines the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. , When the small winning symbol switching information corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" is 2, the special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 113 (3) is determined.

Further, when the main CPU 201 determines that it is controlled in the C time-saving gaming state,
When the small winning symbol switching information corresponding to the selected symbol command "z4" is 0, the special symbol variation pattern table C1 shown in FIG. 114 (1) is determined, and the small winning symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z5" is determined. When the switching information is 1, the special symbol variation pattern table C2 shown in FIG.
A special symbol variation pattern table C3 shown in FIG. 114(3) is determined.

Further, when the main CPU 201 determines that it is controlled in the A reduced working hours gaming state or the B reduced working hours gaming state, it determines the special symbol variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 115 regardless of the small winning symbol switching information. do.

In S3025-8, the main CPU 201 acquires the type of the special symbol and win/lose information (big win, bonus release win, and time saving win) as a result of the special symbol win determination process.

At S3025-9, the main CPU 201 acquires the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for effect selection from the special symbol determination area.

In S3025-10, the main CPU 201 performs S3025-4 or S
By referring to the special symbol variation pattern table determined in 3025-7, the special symbol variation pattern is determined based on the special symbol type, win/loss information, reach determination random number, and effect selection random number. .

[5-4-5. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S3014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. Figure 125
4 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

Incidentally, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S3014 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is the process called in S3014 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S3041).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" in S3041 (S30
41 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing,
The process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" in S3041 (
If S3041 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3042.

At S3042, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (S3
015) is performed. After executing the process of S3042, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3043.

At S3043, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S3043, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3044.

At S3044, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter.
As described above in the description of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of special symbol confirmations (the number of times a special symbol game is executed). You may manage the number of games of the special symbol game performed under specific conditions, such as the remaining number of times of shortening of working hours. After executing the process of S3044, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-6. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 at S3015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. Figure 126 shows
It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is the process called in S3015 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly,
S3015 during the special symbol management process in which the special symbol game determination process targets the second special symbol
, the second special symbol will be processed.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S3051).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" in S3051 (S30
51 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" in S3051 (
If S3051 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3052.

At S3052, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a big win has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S3052, when it is determined that there is no big win, that is, the stopped special symbols are not in the stop display mode indicating the big win (NO determination in S3052), the main CPU 201
The process moves to S3061. On the other hand, in S3052, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win (if YES in S3052), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3053. In addition, when the special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the winning of the accessory release, and when the special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the loss, a NO determination is made in S3052.

In S3053, the main CPU 201 decrements the number of limiter counts each time the game state shifts to the jackpot game state in the time saving game state A, and performs limiter count update processing for determining whether or not to activate the limiter function. The number-of-limiter update process in S3053 is a process to be updated when shifting from the first route to the jackpot game state. In addition, as will be described later, when the transition is made from the second route to the jackpot game state, the V winning device opening control process (FIG. 130
), the limiter count is updated (see S3096). Details of the limiter count update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 127 . Main CPU 201
executes the process of S3053, and then moves the process to S3054.

In S3054, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing of big hit game control.
In this process, the hall computer 186 (both shown in FIG.
reference) to be output (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) is generated and updated. note that,
The signal generated and updated in this process is a special symbol hit signal that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S3054, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3055.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control of S3054, the main CPU201
It also performs processing to clear various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S3055, the main CPU 201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning hole 3131 (S3056), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 184 (S
3057), the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3058), the game state designation parameter setting process (S3059), and the big hit start display command transmission reservation process (S3060). In addition, by performing the process (S3058) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the special symbol game determination process is completed, the large winning opening preparation process (see S3018 in FIG. 122) is performed. It will happen. Then main C
PU201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

In S3061, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a winning prize, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a winning prize.

In S3061, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not a prize-open win, that is, the stop display mode indicates a time-saving win or a loss (NO in S3061), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3071. On the other hand, in S3061, when it is determined that the special symbol is a winning prize, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a winning prize (YES in S3061), the main CPU 201 advances the process to S3062. Transfer.

In S3062, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected symbol command when the result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol is determined to be "a prize released", and when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 selects a small winning symbol. The switching information is overwritten with ``0'' for updating, when the selected pattern command is ``z5'', the small winning pattern switching information is overwritten with ``1'' for updating, and when the selected pattern command is ``z6'', the small winning pattern is updated. Overwrite and update the switching information with "2". In addition, when it is determined as "accessory release hit" as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S3063 without overwriting the small winning symbol switching information. After executing the process of S3062, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3063.

In S3063, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing of the game control per release of the accessory. In this processing, a signal (for example, a winning signal for winning a prize) to be output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 109 for both) via the external terminal board 184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S3063, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3064.

At S<b>3064 , the main CPU 201 performs processing for setting the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 3150 is opened. In this embodiment, the V winning device 3150 set in this process
is, for example, one time. After executing the process of S3064, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3065.

At S3064, the main CPU 201 performs the process of setting the winning winning signal to the external terminal board 184 (S3065), and the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S30).
66), game state designation parameter setting processing (S3067), and transmission reservation processing (S3068) of the per-accessory start display command are performed. By performing the process (S3066) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the V winning device opening preparation process (see S3016 in FIG. 122) is performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

In S3069, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a time saving win, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a time saving open win.

In S3069, when it is determined that it is not the time saving hit, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3071. On the other hand, when it is determined in S3061 that it is a time saving win, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3070.

In S3070, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 112, determines the mode of the game state (time saving flag and time saving number of times) based on the selection symbol command "z7" for time saving winning, and determines the determined game. Sets the state aspect data. Specifically, while setting the time saving flag = 1 (turning on the time saving flag), setting the time saving number counter = 1, and setting the time saving identification number = 3 for identifying the C time saving game state. note that,
As for the time saving identification number, when the A time saving game state is entered, the time saving identification number = 1 is set, and B
When shifting to the time saving game state, the time saving identification number=2 is set.

Also, in this embodiment, the hit type determination table has two types depending on whether or not the limiter function is activated.
Although two hit type determination tables are provided, the hit type determination table when the limiter function is not in operation is referred to regardless of whether the limiter function is activated or not with respect to the time-saving hit. Main CPU
After executing the process of S3070, 201 shifts the process to S3071.

At S3071, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, the main CPU 201
When the special symbol game end processing is performed, the special symbol game determination processing is terminated, and the processing is returned to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 122).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination process (S3051 to S3071) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[5-4-7. Limiter count update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 127, details of the limiter count update process executed by the main CPU 201 at S3053 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126) will be described. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing an example of limiter count update processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not it is in the A time-saving gaming state (S3053-
1). In S3053-1, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3053-2 when it is determined to be in the A time saving game state, and when it is determined not to be in the A time saving game state, the process to S3053-5. Transfer.

In S3053-2, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the limiter count to update it. After executing the process of S3053-2, the main CPU 201 executes the process of S3053-
Move to 3.

In S3053-3, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the limiter count=0. If it is determined that the limiter count=0, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3053-4. Return to the symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

Here, when it is determined that the number of limiter times=0, it means that the number of transitions to the jackpot game state has reached the number of limiter times in the A time saving game state.

At S3053-4, the main CPU 201 turns on the limiter operation flag.
After executing the process of S3053-4, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter count update process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

In S3053-5, the main CPU 201 performs a limiter number setting process for the first hit. The main CPU 201 refers to the hit type determination table when the limiter function is inactive shown in FIG. 112(a), determines the number of limiters based on the selected symbol command, and sets the determined number of limiters. After executing the process of S3053-5, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter count update process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

[5-4-8. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S3071 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126) will be described. Figure 128
is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0" (S30
72). Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game is finished, and the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. Become. After executing the process of S3072, the main CPU 201
The process moves to S3073.

At S3073, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In addition, various random numbers stored in the special symbol determination area are cleared. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S3074).
The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S3074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

[5-4-9. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 at S3016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening preparation processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S3081).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" in S3081 (S30
81 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" in S3081 (
If S3081 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3082.

At S3082, the main CPU 201 refers to the win type determination table shown in FIG.
The determined opening mode (for example, maximum opening time, maximum number of times of opening, etc.) is set. In this embodiment, when the "first open mode" is disadvantageous to the player, the maximum time is 200 msec.
"Second opening mode" which is advantageous for the player by setting the opening pattern of opening only once
, the release pattern is set to perform only one release for a maximum of 1800 msec. The opening pattern is not limited to this. For example, when the "second opening mode" is advantageous for the player, the opening may be performed for a maximum of 900 msec twice at maximum. Open for a maximum of 600msec, and the second time, for example, a maximum of 1200msec
You may make it open. Furthermore, the total specified time (
For example, a plurality of open patterns may be provided within a range not exceeding 1800 msec), and one of the plurality of open patterns may be set based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, for example.

In addition, in S3082, the main CPU 201 opens and closes the V winning port 3155.
The operating mode of the shutter 3158 is determined, and the determined operating mode (eg, maximum open time, maximum number of times of opening, etc.) is set. In this embodiment, 2
After 00 msec, the operation mode is set to open the V winning port 3155 . Main C
After executing the process of S3082, the PU 201 shifts the process to S3083.

At S3083, the main CPU 201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this process, the process of generating opening/closing control data for the V winning port 3155 is performed. Main CPU 201
executes the process of S3083, and then moves the process to S3084.

At S3084, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S3084)
By doing, after the end of this V winning device opening preparation processing, the V winning device opening control processing (
(see S3017 in FIG. 122) is performed. The main CPU 201 executes S3084
After executing the process of , the process moves to S3085.

At S3085, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S3085, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3086.

At S3086, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted in the effect control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG.
It is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 . After executing the process of S3086, the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-10. V winning device opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S3017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S3091).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" in S3091 (S30
91 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" in S3091 (
If S3091 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3092.

At S3092, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls entering the V winning device 3150 when the open/close winning opening 3151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 3152 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the V attacker count switch 3153 (see FIG. 109) for counting the number of winning game balls entering the V winning device 3150 is the maximum winning number. be. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the V-attacker count switch 3153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 .

In S3092, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the V winning device 3150 is not the maximum number of winning prizes (NO determination in S3092), the main CPU 201 advances the process to S
3093.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3092 that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 3150 is the maximum winning number (when S3092 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3094.

At S3093, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 (that is, the maximum opening time of the opening/closing winning opening 3151) has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum open time set in the process of S3082 (see FIG. 129) has passed.

If it is determined in S3093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 has not passed (NO determination in S3093), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening control processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing ( 122).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 has passed (when S3093 determines YES), the main CPU 201 advances the processing to S3094.
to

At S3094, the main CPU 201 performs closing processing of the V winning device 3150 (that is, the open/close winning opening 3151). After executing the process of S3094, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3095.

At S3095, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a V winning detection. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 3155 (that is, whether or not the V winning opening switch 3156 has detected it). It should be noted that the above-mentioned specified time may be the time related to the entrance of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 3150, for example, the specified time after the activation of the V attacker 3152 is defined as the above-mentioned specified time. can do.

When it is determined in S3095 that a V prize has been detected (when S3095 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3096.

At S3096, the main CPU 201 decrements the number of limiter counts each time the game state transitions to the jackpot game state in the time saving game state A, similarly to the above S3053, and performs limiter count update processing for determining whether or not to activate the limiter function. The number-of-limiter update process in S3096 is a process that is updated when the game moves from the second route to the jackpot game state.
After executing the process of S3096, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3097.

In S3097, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing of V-per game control.
In this process, the hall computer 186 (both shown in FIG.
reference) is generated and updated (eg, per V signal, etc.). note that,
The signal generated and updated in this process is a special symbol hit signal that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V winning game control is executed, a round game of, for example, 4 rounds or 10 rounds is executed as shown in the winning type determination table (see FIG. 112). You can win as many prizes as you would if you did. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V-hit game control and the big-hit game control process are distinguished and called, but the V-hit game control can also be called the big-hit game control process. After executing the process of S3097, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3098.

In addition, in the start setting process of the game control per V of S3097, the main CPU201,
It also performs processing to clear various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S3098, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By carrying out this processing, the opening of the V winning device 3150 (that is, activation of the V attacker 3152), which is first executed based on the winning of the accessory opening, is processed as the first round of the round game. That is, it was determined that there was a V prize detection (YES in S3095).
The game control per V executed by (S determined) is started from the round game of the second round. After executing the process of S3098, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3099.

In S3099, the main CPU 201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 determines, for example, the number of times the V winning device 3150 has been opened (
Namely. Processing for setting the upper limit value of the number of times the V-attacker 3152 operates (S3100)
, V hit signal set processing to the external terminal plate 184 (S3101), processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3102), game state designation parameter setting processing (S310
3), and processing such as transmission reservation processing (S3104) of the per V start display command.
By performing the process (S3102) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the special symbol game determination process ends, the large winning opening preparation process (S301 in FIG. 122
8) will be performed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

Returning to S3095, if it is determined at S3095 that V winning has not been detected (NO at S3095), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3105.

At S3105, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 128 is performed. Main CPU20
1 ends the V winning device opening control process after executing the process of S3105, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-11. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S3018 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 122) will be described. Figure 131 shows
It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S3111).

If it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" in S3111 (S31
11 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" in S3111 (
If S3111 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3112.

In S3112, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. The count value of the round counter (round counter value) is the main R
It is stored in a predetermined area within the AM 203 . After executing the process of S3112, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3113.

At S3113, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S3113 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (S3113
is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3114.

At S3114, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "7". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S3114)
, the big win ending process (see S3020 in FIG. 122) is carried out after the big winning hole opening preparation process ends. After executing the process of S3114, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3115.

At S3115, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (S3
116). Incidentally, the jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the process of S3116, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

Returning to S3113, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit (S311
3 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3117.

In S3117, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S3117, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3118.

At S3118, the main CPU 201 performs selection processing of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the big winning hole 3131 is selected as the big winning hole to be opened in the big winning game state.
If the result of the special symbol win determination process is a big win and the big win game control process is started by deriving the stop display mode indicating the big win, the big win hole 3131 is used as the big win hole to be opened. Selected, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the hit of the opening,
In the case of the V winning game control started by the fact that the stop display mode indicating the release of the accessory is derived and the V winning is detected, the large winning opening to be opened is not the large winning opening 3131,
A V winning device 3150 (that is, an open/close winning opening 3151) may be selected. Main CPU2
After executing the process of S3118, 01 shifts the process to S3119.

At S3119, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the big winning opening 3131, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 3131, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening 3131, the number of winning balls when winning the big winning opening 3131, etc. are set. . The number of rounds corresponds to the number of openings of the big winning opening 3131 . In addition, it is not intended to exclude the case where the big winning opening 3131 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case
It is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times of opening and closing the big winning opening 3131 are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S3119, the main CPU 201
The process moves to S3120.

At S3120, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big winning opening 3131 or the V winning device 3150 is performed. After executing the process of S3120, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3121.

At S3121, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "6". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S3121)
By doing, after the end of this big winning opening opening preparation process, the big winning opening opening control process (Fig. 1
22 S3019) is performed. After executing the process of S3121, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3122.

At S3122, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S3122, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3123.

At S3123, the main CPU 201 performs reservation processing for transmission of the command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S3123, the main CPU 201
The big winning opening preparation process is ended, and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-12. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S3019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. Figure 132 shows
It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S3131).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" in S3131 (S31
31 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" in S3131 (
If S3131 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3132.

At S3132, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls entering the big winning opening 3131 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the big winning hole count switch 3132 (see FIG. 109) for counting the number of winning game balls into the big winning hole 3131 is the maximum winning number. Incidentally, the value of the big winning hole counter counted by the big winning hole count switch 3132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 .

In S3132, when it is determined that the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 3131 is not the maximum winning number (NO in S3132), the main CPU 201 advances the processing to S3.
Move to 133.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3132 that the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 3131 is the maximum winning number (when S3132 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3134.

At S3133, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 3131 has passed. In this process, various setting processes related to the big winning opening (S311 in FIG. 131
9), it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in step 9) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S3133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 3131 has not elapsed (NO determination in S3133), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process ( 122).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3133 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 3131 has elapsed (YES in S3133), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3134.

At S<b>3134 , the main CPU 201 performs closing processing of the big winning opening 3131 . After executing the process of S3134, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3135.

At S3135, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S
3135), after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (see S3018 in FIG. 122) is performed again. After executing the process of S3135, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3136.

At S3136, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S3136, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3137.

In S3137, the main CPU 201 performs an inter-round display command transmission reservation process. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S3137, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-13. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S3020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S3141).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" in S3141 (S31
41 is NO), the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot end processing, also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 122), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 121). In this case, it returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" in S3141 (S31
41 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3142.

At S3142, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags are set and various counters (eg, ceiling counter, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing the process of S3142, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3143.

At S3143, the main CPU 201 performs state setting processing after the end of the big win. In this post-jackpot state setting process, the main CPU 201 refers to whether the limiter operation flag is ON or OFF, and if the limiter operation flag is OFF, determines the winning type determination table shown in FIG. If the operation flag is ON, the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 112(b) is determined. Then, referring to the determined hit type determination table, the mode of the game state after the jackpot game state (time saving flag and the number of times of time saving) is determined, and data of the determined game state mode is set. Specifically, when the limiter operation flag is off, the time saving flag = 1 is set (the time saving flag is turned on), the time saving number counter = 100 is set, and it is identified that it is in the A time saving game state. Time saving identification number = 1 is also set. Also, if the limiter operation flag is on, set the time saving flag = 0 (off the time saving flag)
At the same time, the time saving number counter = 0 and the time saving identification number = 0 are set. Main CPU2
01, after executing the processing of S3143, ends the big hit end processing, also ends the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 122), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 121). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[5-4-14. Normal symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the normal symbol control processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. In addition, Fig. 134
Needless to say, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal symbol start condition is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the numerical values (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flow chart shown in FIG. 134 are normal symbol control state numbers. Main C
The PU 201 normally advances the symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. Note that each process shown in FIG. 134 is not shown as a subroutine for convenience.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the wait time for normal symbols is 0 (S3
291).

When it is determined that the waiting time of the normal symbol is not 0 in S3291 (S3291 is N
In the case of O determination), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process, and shifts the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 in S3291 (S329
1 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3292.

At S3292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol.
After executing the process of S3292, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3293. Note that the main CPU 201, based on the control state number read in the process of S3292,
3293 and subsequent processes are performed.

At S3293, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S3293 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3294.

In this normal symbol variable display start process, when various random numbers are stored as starting information in the normal symbol determination area, the main CPU 201 performs "normal symbol hit determination process", "normal symbol determination process", "normal symbol Design fluctuation pattern determination processing”, “ordinary drawing time saving management processing” are performed, and then processing for setting the control state number of normal design to “1” is performed. In addition, when the random number value for the normal design hit determination is not extracted (when various random values are not stored in the normal design determination area), the normal design hit determination process, normal design determination process, normal design The control state number of the normal symbol is held at "0" without performing the fluctuation pattern determination processing, etc., and waiting for the game ball to pass through the passage gates 3126A and 3126B.

In the normal symbol hit determination process in the normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 20
1 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. determine the "hit" or "losing").

In the normal symbol determination process in the normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 201
With reference to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. Determine the "selected symbol command at normal symbol per hit".

In addition, in the normal symbol variation pattern determination process in the normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. Based on the random number value, the variation pattern of normal symbols and the variable display time of normal symbols are determined. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display time of the determined normal symbols, and causes the normal symbol display section 161 to start variable display of the normal symbols.

In the time saving management process for normal patterns in the normal pattern variable display start process, the time saving number counter is 1
It is determined whether or not the number of times is above, and if the time saving number counter is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number counter. As a result of the subtraction, if the time saving number counter=0, the time saving flag and the time saving identification number are cleared, and the shift control from the time saving game state to the normal game state is performed. Also, if the time saving number counter is not 1 or more, the time saving management process for the normal figure is ended, and even if the time saving number counter is 1 or more, the subtraction result from the time saving number counter is 0 Otherwise, without clearing the time saving flag and the time saving identification number, the current time saving management process for the normal map ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, in any of the time-saving gaming states of the A time-saving gaming state, the B time-saving gaming state, and the C time-saving gaming state, 1 from the time-saving number counter at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol
is subtracted, but 1 is subtracted from the time saving number counter at the start of the variable display of normal symbols only when it is in the C time saving game state, and it is in the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state. In some cases, it may be configured so that 1 is not subtracted from the time saving number counter at the start of the variable display of normal symbols.

At S3294, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S3294 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3295.

In this normal symbol variable display end processing, the main CPU 201 manages whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbols has ended. 2”. When the variable display time of the normal design is not finished, the control state number of the normal design is held at "1", and the end of the variable display time of the normal design is waited.

At S3295, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This S3
The process of 295 is a process performed when the control state number of normal symbols is "2". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S
3296.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs determination processing of the normal symbol derivation result (for example, normal symbol win or loss). Then, when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol is a hit for the normal symbol, the opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, wait time) setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to " 3”. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol is a loss, the control state number for the normal symbol is set to "0" without performing the open pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 146. - 特許庁

Further, in the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 in the normal symbol game determination process, referring to the normal per symbol type determination table shown in FIG. The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is determined, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 determines the normal electric accessory 3
The sub CPU 30 sends the opening pattern command of the normal electric accessory corresponding to the opening pattern of 146
Send to 1.

At S3296, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric accessory release process. This S3
The process of 296 is a process performed when the control state number of normal symbols is "3". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S
3297.

In this normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 201 performs the opening process of the normal electric accessory 146 according to the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S3295. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric accessory 146 is completed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "5".

At S3297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol per end processing. This S3
The process of 297 is a process performed when the control state number of normal symbols is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol per end process, it ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this normal per symbol end process, the main CPU 201
A process of resetting (clearing) various parameters related to the normal design determined in 96 and various random numbers stored in the normal design determination area is performed.

As described above, the hit determination process of the normal symbol is the normal symbol variable display start process of S3293. The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 is determined based on the above S
In the normal symbol game determination process of 3295, it is determined based on the game state when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the variable display of the normal symbol ends). Therefore, if the game state is changed while the variable display of the normal symbols is being performed, the normal symbols are changed based on the different game states when the variable display of the normal symbols is started and when the variable display of the normal symbols is ended. Hit determination and determination of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessories 146 are performed.

[5-4-15. Switch input detection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 135, switch input detection processing executed by main CPU 201 at S320 during system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is provided with a holding function of holding the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number until the start condition is satisfied, compared with the first pachinko game machine. However, the processing contents of the starting opening winning detection process and the ball passing detection process are partially different. In addition, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine has a large winning opening count switch 3132, a V attacker count switch 3153, and a V winning opening switch 315 compared to the first pachinko gaming machine.
6 is added, a part of such processing is added.

First, the main CPU 201 executes a first start opening winning detection process (S3381). After executing the process of S3381, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3382.

In this first start opening winning detection process, the main CPU 201 controls the first start opening switch 3
121 detects the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 3120, the first starting port 3120
to set the payout information corresponding to, and determine whether or not there is an empty area in one first special symbol determination area. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is an empty area in one first special symbol determination area, various random numbers (for example, the first special symbol jackpot determination random number, the first special The symbol random number of the symbol, the reach determination random number of the first special symbol, and various random numbers such as the random number for the effect selection of the first special symbol, etc.) are extracted, and the extracted various random numbers are combined into one first It is stored in the special symbol determination area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no empty area in one first special symbol determination area, the first start opening winning detection process is terminated without extracting various random numbers.

Next, the main CPU 201 executes a second start opening winning detection process (S3382). After executing the process of S3382, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3383.

In this second start opening winning detection process, the main CPU 201 controls the second start opening switch 3
141 detects the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 3140, the second starting port 3140
to set the payout information corresponding to, and determine whether or not there is an empty area in one second special symbol determination area. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is an empty area in one second special symbol determination area, various random numbers (for example, a second special symbol jackpot determination random number, a second special Pattern random number of the pattern, random number for reach determination of the second special pattern, and various random numbers such as random number for selection of the effect selection of the second special pattern, etc.) are extracted, and the extracted various random numbers are combined into one second It is stored in the special symbol determination area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no empty area in one second special symbol determination area, the second start opening winning detection process is terminated without extracting various random numbers.

Thus, in this embodiment, in order to perform the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the hit determination process of the second special symbol, only one first special symbol determination area and one second special symbol determination area are provided. However, the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) for holding the special symbol start information until the start condition is satisfied are not provided.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs general winning opening passage detection processing (S3383). In the general winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc., is set at the time of winning to the general winning opening 122 . After executing the process of S3383, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S338.
Move to 4.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a special winning opening passage detection process (S3384). In the big winning hole passage detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects that the game ball has entered the big winning hole 3131 by the big winning hole count switch 3132, it sets the payout information corresponding to the big winning hole 3131, A big winning hole counter for counting the winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 3131 is updated by adding 1 to it. After executing the process of S3384, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3385.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs V-attacker passage detection processing (S3385). In the V-attacker passage detection process, the main CPU 201
When the entry of the game ball to the big winning opening 3131 is detected, the payout information corresponding to the V winning device 3150 (opening and closing winning opening 3151) is set, and the V winning device 3150 (opening and closing winning opening 3151) 1 is added to a V-attacker winning counter for counting the winning number of game balls and updated. After executing the process of S3385, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S33.
Move to 86.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs V winning opening detection processing (S3386). In the V winning opening passage detection process, the main CPU 201 causes the V winning opening switch 3156 to open the V winning opening 3
When the passage of the game ball to 155 is detected, the V prize opening passage flag is turned on. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the V winning opening 3155, the payout information is not set. Main CPU20
1 executes the process of S3386, and then moves the process to S3387.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs ball passing detection processing (S3387). In the ball passage detection process, when the passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A or the second passage gate 3126B is detected by the first passage gate switch 3127A or the second passage gate switch 3127B, one normal symbol determination area determines whether or not there is free space. Main CPU2
01, when it is determined that there is an empty area in one normal symbol determination area, various random numbers (for example, normal symbol hit determination random numbers, normal symbol random numbers, and normal symbol start information) Various random numbers such as random numbers for effect selection, etc.) are extracted, and the extracted various random numbers are stored in one normal symbol start determination area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no empty area in one normal symbol start determination area, the ball passing detection process is terminated without extracting various random numbers.

Thus, in the present embodiment, in order to perform the normal design hit determination process, only one normal design determination area is provided, and the normal design for withholding the start information of the normal design until the start condition is satisfied. Start storage area (1) to normal symbol start storage area (4) are not provided.

[5-5. Game state transition diagram]
Next, referring to FIG. 136, the game state transition in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 136 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

As described above, in the present embodiment, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is the normal game mode in the A time-saving game state and B time-saving game state. again,
In the C time-saving game state, the game mode between left-handed and right-handed is appropriately changed depending on the open mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 .

Therefore, in the normal game state, the transition of the game state triggered by the game ball entering the first start port 3120 is performed, and in the time saving game state A and the time saving game state B, the second start port 3
Triggered by the entry of a game ball at 140, the transition of the game state is performed. In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the transition of the game state triggered by the game ball entering the first start port 3120 or the game ball entering the second start port 3140 will be performed. . Below, in the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the game ball has entered the first start port 3120, and in the A time saving game state and B time saving game state, it is assumed that the game ball has entered the second start port 3140. I will explain as a premise.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the game ball enters the first start hole 3120 in the normal game state, it is determined as "big win", "accessory release win" or "time saving win" (see FIG. 110).
.

In the normal game state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 3120 and a "jackpot" is determined, the game shifts to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in the normal game state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 3120 to determine the "accessory release hit", and when the game ball passes through the V winning port 3155, the state shifts to the jackpot game state,
When the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening 3155, the normal game state is maintained without shifting the game state.

In addition, as described above, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 3120 and a "accessory win" is determined, the opening mode of the V winning device 3150 (opening and closing winning port 3151) is Since it becomes a disadvantageous opening mode, it is extremely difficult to shift to the jackpot game state. Therefore, when the game ball enters the first start port 3120 and "accessory release win" is determined, the normal game state is maintained without substantially shifting the game state. .

Then, after shifting from the normal game state to the jackpot game state, it shifts to the A time-saving game state.

A time-saving gaming state is defined as a condition for ending the A time-saving gaming state.
12)” and “transition to jackpot game state” are established.

Here, "100 times of shortening of the time" means that "the total number of times of variable display of the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the normal symbol is counted 100 times".

In the present embodiment, "time saving number of times 100 ends" is defined as "the total number of variable displays of special symbol variable display and normal symbol variable display is counted 100 times", but "special symbol 100 times of variable display” and “100 times of variable display of normal symbols” may be satisfied, or “variable display of special symbols should be performed 100 times”.
It is also possible to say only "to be performed repeatedly".

Then, when shifting to the jackpot game state in the A time-saving game state (continuous play in the A time-saving game state), the number of limiters is counted, and if the number of times of the limiter is reached, the state is shifted to the normal game state,
If the number of times of the limiter is not reached, it shifts to the A time-saving game state again.

In addition, in the normal game state, when the game ball enters the first start port 3120 and the "time saving hit" is determined, the game state shifts to the C time saving game state.

In the C time saving game state, as a condition for ending the C time saving game state, "end of the time saving number of times (Fig. 112
(see)” and “transition to jackpot game state” are set to be met.

Here, "the number of times of time saving ends once" means "that the variable display of the special pattern is counted once" and "
It means that one of the conditions "that the variable display of normal symbols is counted once" is established. In addition, in this embodiment, the counting of the "number of times of time reduction" is performed when the variable display of special symbols or normal symbols is performed, and if the transition to the jackpot game state is not performed, the first special symbol is counted. When the variable display is performed, or when the variable display of the normal symbols is performed for the first time, the C time-saving game state is terminated, and the state is shifted to the normal game state.

Further, after shifting from the C time-saving game state to the big win game state, it shifts to the A time-saving game state after finishing the big win game state.

Furthermore, in the normal game state, when the number of variable display times of special symbols (eg, ceiling counter) reaches the ceiling value (eg, 1000 times), the normal game state is shifted to the B time-saving game state.

In the B time-saving gaming state, as a condition for ending the B time-saving gaming state, "a specified number of times (for example, 1212
It is set to the fact that either condition of "end of variable display of special symbols for times)" and "transition to jackpot game state" has been established.

In the B time-saving gaming state, when "end of variable display of special symbols for a specified number of times" is established, B
The time-saving game state is shifted to the normal game state. In addition, after shifting from the B time-saving game state to the big win game state, it will shift to the A time-saving game state after the big win game state ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, three time-saving game states, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state, are provided as the time-saving game state, but without the B time-saving game state,
It may be configured to have two time-saving game states, A time-saving game state and C time-saving game state.

[5-6. Opening mode of normal electric accessories]
In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, in relation to the variable display time of normal symbols, the variable display time of special symbols when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit" By adjusting, the opening mode (opening pattern) of the normal electric accessory 3146 can be varied. An example of the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 will be described below.

FIG. 137 is a time chart showing an example of an opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the normal game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Also, FIG. 138 is a time chart showing an example of an opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 in the C time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

Figures 137 and 138 show the variation and stop of the normal symbol display portion 161, the variation and stop of the first special symbol display portion 163, and the normal electric solenoid 3148 constituting the normal electric accessory 3146.
The operation and stop of , and the transition of the game state are shown up and down.

Also, FIGS. 137 and 138 are based on the premise that the result of the normal symbol win determination process is "normal symbol win" and the result of the first special symbol win determination process is "time saving win". Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display time of normal symbols in the normal game state and the C time saving game state is 1000, as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table of FIG.
It is fixed at 0msec (10s).

137 and 138, as shown in the normal per symbol type determination table of FIG.
) is illustrated as “short open”, and the advantageous open mode in which the opening time (2000 to 3000 msec) of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the C time saving game state is long is illustrated as “long open”. . Further, the type of the first special symbol to be stopped and displayed corresponding to the "time saving hit" is illustrated as "stop with C time saving symbol".

In FIG. 137(a), in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state of FIG. It is an example of a time chart when "chance variation A" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 137(a), since the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, after the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (after the variation of the normal symbol ends), the game The state has shifted from the normal game state to the C time-saving game state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (at the end of the fluctuation of the normal symbol), the game state is the normal game state, and as shown in the normal symbol per type determination table of FIG. "Short opening" in the normal game state is performed as the opening mode of the accessory 3146 .

In FIG. 137(b), in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state of FIG. It is an example of a time chart when "chance variation B" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 137(b), since the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol, before the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (before the end of the variation of the normal symbol), the game The state has shifted from the normal game state to the C time-saving game state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the fluctuation of the normal symbol ends), the game state is the C time-saving game state, and as shown in the normal symbol type determination table of FIG. As the opening mode of the electric accessary 3146, "long opening" in the C time saving game state is performed.

Here, in FIG. 137(b), when "fz1" is selected as the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning in the C time saving game state, the normal electric accessory 3146 is shown in the opening mode,
One actuation of the utility solenoid 3148 (one release) is illustrated. When ``fz2'' or ``fz3'' is selected as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol in the C time saving game state, the solenoid 3148 for general electricity is operated twice with a wait time interposed. This also applies to FIG. 138(b), which will be described later.

In FIG. 138(a), in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the C time-saving gaming state of FIG. It is an example of a time chart when the longer "chance variation A" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 138 (a), when the variable display of one special symbol is performed in the C time-saving gaming state, the end condition of the C time-saving gaming state (end of the time-saving number of times) is established, and the special symbol is variable. At the start of the display, the C time-saving game state is shifted to the normal game state. While the variable display of the special symbols is being performed, it is in the normal game state, but after the variable display of the special symbols is finished and "stopped at the C time saving pattern", the normal game state is changed to the C time saving game state again. will be migrated.

Then, since the variable display time of the special symbols is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbols, after the variable display time of the normal symbols ends (after the variation of the normal symbols ends), the game state changes from the normal game state to the C time reduction. It is transitioning to play state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (at the end of the fluctuation of the normal symbol), the game state is the normal game state, and as shown in the normal symbol per type determination table of FIG. "Short opening" in the normal game state is performed as the opening mode of the accessory 3146 .

In FIG. 138(b), in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the C time-saving gaming state of FIG. It is an example of a time chart when "chance variation B" with a short time is determined.

As shown in FIG. 138 (b), when the variable display of one special symbol is performed in the C time-saving gaming state, the end condition of the C time-saving gaming state (end of the time-saving number of times) is established, and the special symbol is variable. At the start of the display, the C time-saving game state is shifted to the normal game state. While the variable display of the special symbols is being performed, it is in the normal game state, but after the variable display of the special symbols is finished and "stopped at the C time saving pattern", the normal game state is changed to the C time saving game state again. will be migrated.

Then, since the variable display time of the special symbols is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbols, before the variable display time of the normal symbols ends (before the end of the variation of the normal symbols), the game state changes from the normal game state to the C time reduction. It is transitioning to play state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the fluctuation of the normal symbol ends), the game state is the C time-saving game state, and as shown in the normal symbol type determination table of FIG. As the opening mode of the electric accessary 3146, "long opening" in the C time saving game state is performed.

In addition, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, one of the termination conditions of the C time-saving gaming state, "finishing the number of time-saving times once," is "that the variable display of the special symbol is counted once. In addition to ", it is also a condition that "the variable display of normal symbols is counted once". For this reason, Fig. 13
As shown in 7(a) and FIG. 138(a), when the shift to the C time-saving game state is made after the variable display of the special symbols is completed, the game ball is hit to the right as an unintended game, and the game ball is passed through the second passing gate. Even if it is passed to 3126B, the game state is shifted from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state at the start of variable display of normal symbols, and unintended "long opening" as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is performed. can be prevented.

Thus, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the normal symbol win determination process is determined based on the game state when the normal symbol variable display is performed (when the normal symbol variation starts). , and the opening mode of the normal electric accessories 3146 is when the variable display of the normal symbols ends (
Since the game state is determined based on the game state at the end of the variation of the normal symbols, there is a new interest in changing or maintaining the game state while the variable display of the normal symbols is being performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving it.

In particular, in the present embodiment, in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol, by adjusting the variable display time of the special symbol when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", The game state can be changed and maintained while the variable display of normal symbols is intentionally performed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the variable display time of the special symbol is the variable of the normal symbol. A variation pattern table of a plurality of special patterns having different selection rates of ``chance variation A'' longer than the display time and ``chance variation B'' having a variable display time shorter than the variable display time of the special symbols is provided, and is provided with a predetermined pattern table. Since the variation pattern table of the special symbols is switched according to the change condition of , interest in the switching of the variation pattern table of the special symbols can be made, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, as a predetermined change condition, based on the information of the symbol stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display unit 163 (small winning symbol switching information) when it is determined that the "accessory hit" is determined. Since the variation pattern table of the special symbol can be switched, the interest in the "accessory release win" and the small winning symbol switching information can be increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 and 112, the second starting port 31
If a game ball enters 40, it is easier to transition to a jackpot game state from the first route or the second route than when the game ball enters the first start port 3120. - 特許庁In particular, in this embodiment,
By entering the game ball into the second starting port 3140, it is substantially configured to be able to shift to the jackpot game state. Therefore, as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, the value of the "long opening" that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start port 3140 is increased, and the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is made more interesting. , it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, although the limiter function is provided, even if the operation of the limiter function ends the continuous game in the A time-saving game state and shifts to the normal game state, the normal game state after the operation of the limiter function In the first special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 116 is selected. The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 116 is a specific variation pattern table in which, in the normal game state, the advantageous chance variation B, which is likely to be "long open", is likely to be selected as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146. Therefore, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination process after shifting to the normal game state is "time saving hit", it is possible to shift to the big hit game state via the second route again. , it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the operation of the limiter function.

In addition, in the present embodiment, one of the termination conditions of the C time-saving gaming state is set to "finishing the number of time-saving times once" as "the variable display of the special symbol is counted once", and the variable of the special symbol Since it is configured so that the game state can be shifted by subtracting the number of time saving times when the display is performed, the probability that the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol will be "time saving hit" is increased. Also, it is possible to prevent the adverse effect of always controlling the time-saving game state, and to maintain the game.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one of the termination conditions of the C time-saving gaming state is "time-saving number of times 1
In addition to "the variable display of the special pattern is counted once", "the variable display of the normal pattern is counted once" is also a condition, so in the C time-saving gaming state, the intention Even if the game ball is hit to the right as a non-playing game and the game ball is passed through the second passage gate 3126B, the game state is shifted from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, and the normal electric accessory is made. Unintended "long opening" as the opening mode of 3146 can be prevented.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the second passage gate 3126B
is arranged below the normal electric accessory unit 3145 in the right area 107,
In the time-saving game state C, even if the game ball happens to flow down the right region 107 and pass through the second passage gate 3126B, the game ball is prevented from unintentionally entering the normal electric accessory 3146.例文帳に追加can do.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first starting port 3120 is arranged close to directly under the first passing gate 3126A, so that the game ball that has passed through the first passing gate 3126A immediately enters the first starting port 3120. When the ball is to be played, the normal symbol variation start time triggered by the passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A, and the special symbol variation start triggered by the game ball entering the first start port 3120. It is possible to adjust with the timing (the variable display can be started at approximately the same time).

[6. Second Embodiment of the Fourth Pachinko Machine]
Next, a second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. Unlike the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko machine differs from the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine in that the configuration of the game board unit (arrangement of passage gates), the start information of the normal symbols and the special symbols are set to a predetermined number. The difference is in the end conditions of the time-saving game state, in that it has a holding function that holds until.

Hereinafter, in describing the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and the same step numbers are used for the same components as in the first embodiment of the first pachinko game machine and the fourth pachinko game machine. , and a detailed description of its configuration and processing will be omitted.

[6-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 139, the game board unit 4 provided in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine
010 will be explained. This game board unit 4010 is also positioned behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) as in the first embodiment of the first pachinko game machine and the fourth pachinko game machine. reference).

FIG. 139 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 4010 provided in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 4010 includes a game panel 4100, various members are arranged on the game panel 4100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side surface of the game panel 4100, in which the shot game balls can roll and flow. .

As shown in FIG. 139, the game board unit 4010 provided in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is the game board unit 3010 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.
, mainly in that the right area 107 is not provided with the second pass gate 3126B of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the second passage gate 31 is located in the right area 107
The reason why 26B is not provided is that the game ball hit to the right passes through the second passage gate 3126B, and the normal symbol is formed by having the holding function of holding the starting information of the normal symbol and the special symbol up to a predetermined number. This is to prevent the number of reserved symbols from being stored and the adjustment of the variable display time between the normal symbols and the special symbols to be prevented.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 139, the LED unit 160 is provided with a normal symbol reservation display portion 162, a first special symbol reservation display portion 165, and a second special symbol reservation display portion 166. But they are different.

[6-2. electrical configuration]
Regarding the control circuit of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine as well, compared with the control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine (Fig. 109), the number of game balls to the second passage gate 3126B The configuration of the second passage gate switch 3127B for detecting passage is deleted, and the normal symbol reservation display unit 162, the first special symbol reservation display unit 165, and the second special symbol reservation display unit 166 in the first pachinko game machine. Since only the configuration of is added, detailed description is omitted.

Further, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the main RAM 203 stores a predetermined number of starting information of normal symbols and special symbols because it has a holding function of holding the starting information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number. The normal symbol start storage area (1) to normal symbol start storage area (4) for holding up to, and the first special symbol start storage area (1) to hold the special symbol start information up to a predetermined number. Special symbol start storage area (4), and second special symbol start storage area (1) ~ second
It means that it has a special symbol start storage area (4).

[6-3. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 140 to 142, basic specifications of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described.

In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, compared with the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, in order to synchronize the fluctuation time between the special symbols and the normal symbols, the special symbols are mainly The fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern table of normal symbols, etc. are different.

In addition, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, "
Although it is set that either condition of "time saving 100 times end" and "transition to jackpot game state" is satisfied, "time saving number 100 times end" does not count the variable display of normal symbols. 2, it is set to "variable display of special symbols is performed 100 times". Similarly, as the termination condition of the C time-saving gaming state, it is set that either the condition of "end of the time-saving number of times" or "shift to the big hit game state" is satisfied, but "time-saving number of times 1 End of times" is set to "variable display of special symbols is performed once" without counting variable displays of normal symbols.

In addition, the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine includes a special symbol hit determination table (FIG. 110), a special symbol determination table (FIG. 111), and a hit type determination of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Since it is common to the table (Fig. 112), the normal symbol hit determination table (Fig. 117), the normal symbol determination table (Fig. 118) and the normal symbol hit type determination table (Fig. 119), detailed description will be omitted.

[6-3-1. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 140 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state and the C time-saving game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Also, FIG. 141 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table after the limiter function is activated in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. In addition, since the fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol in the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state is the same as that of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the explanation is omitted. The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 140 and 141 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 140 and 141 includes the types of special symbols,
The result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the random number for effect selection, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variable display time of the special symbol are associated with each other.

The main CPU 201 determines a special symbol variation pattern table according to the game state, etc., refers to the determined special symbol variation pattern table, and selects the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol win determination process, and the effect selection. A variation pattern of the special symbols and a variable display time of the special symbols are determined based on the random number value. After determining the variation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the sub CPU 301 .

Here, in the column of "remarks" in FIGS. 140 and 141, "special electric accessary product opening end time" and "special figure processing end time" are described as reference.

"Special electric accessory opening end time" is the opening and closing prize opening 3 that is opened at the time of "accessory opening hit"
151 open times. If the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "a prize released", as described in the hit type determination table of FIG. Since the opening time of the mouth 3151 is 200 msec, "200 msec" is shown as the "special electric accessory opening end time".

"Special symbol processing end time" means the time from the start of the special symbol management process shown in FIG. 122 to the start information of one special symbol until it ends. Specifically, it means the time from when the special symbol variable display start process (special symbol control state number=0) of FIG. 123 is performed until the special symbol game end process of FIG. 128 is performed.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state and C time saving game state)
The special symbol variation pattern table TC1 shown in FIG. 140 is used after the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is backed up and cleared, or after the selected symbol command "z
4” is a variation pattern table selected after the first special symbol corresponding to “4” is stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table TC2 shown in FIG. 140 is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z5" for the "accessory win" is stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table TC3 shown in FIG. 140 is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z6" for the "accessory win" is stopped and displayed.

In the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 shown in FIG. 140, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the variable display time of the special symbol is the variable display time of the normal symbol (13300 or 13500 msec ) "chance variation A" of the above variation pattern "01H" and "chance variation B" of variation pattern "02H" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol. is selected.

Also in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, as in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, in the normal game state and the C time-saving game state, from the relationship with the variable display time of normal symbols , Chance variation A tends to open the second starting port 3140 in an unfavorable opening state due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146, and short chance variation B is the opening state in which the second starting port 3140 is advantageous due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146 easy to become.

In addition, the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 shown in FIGS. 140 (1) to (3)
is different in the selection rate between chance variation A and chance variation B, as in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Second start port 3140 in normal game state and C time saving game state
Chance variation B, which tends to be an advantageous open mode, is a special symbol variation pattern table T1
<Special Symbol Variation Pattern Table T2<Special Symbol Variation Pattern Table T3 is configured to be easily selected in this order.

Therefore, among the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3, the special symbol variation pattern table TC3 is the most advantageous variation pattern table for the player. , 'z6'<'z5'<'z4', the variation pattern table TC3 of the special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command 'z6' is most difficult to be selected.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, in the "special symbol processing end time" in the "remarks" column of the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 shown in Figure 140 (1) to (3) Focusing on it, it has the following characteristics.

The variation pattern (01H) of the special symbol of the disadvantageous chance variation A when it is determined to be "time saving hit" in the hit determination process of the first special symbol has the "special symbol processing end time" of "1350
The variable display time of the special symbol is set to be 0 msec.

In addition, the variation pattern (0BH) of the special symbol when it is determined to be the "accessory hit" in the hit determination process of the first special symbol has the "special symbol processing end time" of "13500 msec".
The variable display time of the special symbol is set so as to be.

That is, the variation pattern (01H) of the special symbol of the disadvantageous chance variation A when it is determined as "time saving hit" in the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the hit determination process of the first special symbol "Open The variation pattern (0BH) of the special pattern when it is determined to be a "hit"
The variable display time of the special symbol is set so that the "special symbol processing end time" is the same time.

Here, the variation pattern (01H) of the special symbol of the disadvantageous chance variation A when it is determined as "time saving hit" in the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the hit determination process of the first special symbol "Accessories The special symbol variation pattern (0BH) when it is determined to be "open hit" is a special symbol variation pattern corresponding to "substantially special symbol loss" in the fourth pachinko game machine. And, the variation pattern of the special symbols (
01H, 0BH), the variable display time of the special symbol is set so that they all have the same "special symbol processing end time".

(Variation pattern table of special symbols after the limiter function is activated)
The special symbol variation pattern table ZC1 shown in FIG. 141 (1) is a specific variation pattern table selected in the first special symbol hit determination process after the shift to the normal game state after the limiter function is activated. be.

In the special symbol variation pattern table ZC1 shown in FIG. 141 (1), when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the second start port 3 in the normal game state
The configuration is such that the chance variation B, which tends to make 140 an advantageous opening mode, is always selected.

Like the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, chance variation B in the normal game state
is selected, the second starting port 3140 becomes an advantageous opening mode, and the game ball is the second starting port 31
It becomes easier to enter the ball at 40. And, in the present embodiment, as described above, if the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, it is easy to transition to the big hit game state from the first route or the second route, and the game ball is the second By entering the start hole 3140, it is possible to shift to a big hit game state.

For this reason, even if the continuous game in the time-saving game state is completed by the operation of the limiter function, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination process after the shift to the normal game state is "time-saving hit", again Since it is possible to shift to the jackpot game state via the second route, it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game due to the activation of the limiter function.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special symbol variation pattern table ZC1 is configured so that the chance variation B is always selected when the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit". It may be configured such that the chance variation A, which tends to cause the second starting port 3140 to be in an unfavorable open mode, is selected with a lower probability than the chance variation B.

The special symbol variation pattern table ZC2 shown in FIG. 116 (2) is a modification of the special symbol variation pattern table ZC1 shown in FIG. , a specific variation pattern table selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process. The special symbol variation pattern table ZC2 is configured such that when the result of the first special symbol win determination process is "time saving hit", the chance variation A is selected with a probability of 20% and the chance variation B with a probability of 80%. is doing.

Even in this way, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination process after the transition to the normal game state is "time saving hit", the probability of moving to the big win game state via the second route again. is increased, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to activation of the limiter function.

The special symbol variation pattern tables ZC1 and ZC2 are variation pattern tables selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process after the shift to the normal game state after the limiter function is activated. Not limited to the first time, for example, in response to the special design reservation function, when the special design start information is reserved up to a specific reservation number (for example, 4 pieces), the special design hit determination process up to the specific reservation number , or may be a variation pattern table selected based on the special symbol hit determination process up to an arbitrary predetermined number of times.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the chance variation A and the chance variation B are set to one, but based on the variable display time of the normal symbol, special A plurality of chance variation groups A in which the variable display time of symbols is longer than the variable display time of normal symbols and a plurality of chance variation groups B in which the variable display time of special symbols is shorter than the variable display time of normal symbols may be provided. good.

[6-3-2. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 142 is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the variation pattern table of normal symbols shown in FIG. 142 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 142 includes the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbols, and the normal symbols extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 3126A. A random number for effect selection, a variation pattern of normal symbols, and a variable display time of normal symbols are associated with each other. In addition, the random number for normal design effect selection is, for example, 0 to 99 (
100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table, and extracts the game state when the normal symbol variable display is started, the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate 3126A. A variation pattern of normal symbols and a variable display time of normal symbols are determined based on the random number value for normal symbol performance selection. After determining the variation pattern of the normal symbols, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub CPU 301 a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the normal symbols.

Here, in the column of "remarks" in FIG. 142, "game state at the end of variable display", "ordinary electric accessory opening end time" and "normal figure processing end time" are described as reference.

The "game state at the end of the variable display" means the game state when the variable display of the normal symbols ends, and may differ from the game state when the variable display of the normal symbols is started. note that,"
In "game state at the end of variable display", there are also A time-saving game state and B time-saving game state, but since they are not so relevant to the game characteristics of the present embodiment, the description in the remarks is omitted.

"Normal electric accessory opening end time" is the end time of the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 (
1st open time + wait time + 2nd open time). In the normal game state, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", as described in the normal symbol hit type determination table of FIG. Open end time. Also, in the C time-saving gaming state, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", as described in the normal symbol hit type determination table of FIG. 119, the first open time and wait time 250 combined with the second opening time
Any one of 0 msec, 4600 msec, and 5600 msec is the normal electric accessory open end time.

"Normal design process end time" means the time from the start of the normal design control process shown in FIG. 134 to the start information of one normal design until it ends.

In particular, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, when focusing on the "completion" column of the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 142, it has the following characteristics. ing.

When the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbols is the normal game state or the C time saving game state, the normal symbol variation pattern (01H) when it is determined as "normal symbol hit" in the normal symbol hit determination process is The normal symbol variable display time is set so that the "normal symbol processing end time" when the game state at the end of the variable display of the normal symbol is the normal game state is both "13500 msec".

In addition, when the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbols is the normal game state or the C time saving game state, the normal symbol variation pattern (02H ), the normal symbol variable display time is set so that the "normal symbol processing end time" is "13500 msec" regardless of the game state at the end of the variable display of the normal symbol.

Here, when the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbols is the normal game state or the C time-reduced game state, and the game state at the end of the variable display of the normal symbols is the normal game state, in the hit determination process of the normal symbols. Even if it is determined to be a "normal win", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is a disadvantageous opening mode as shown in FIG. In addition, the fact that the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol loss" also means that the normal electric accessory 3146 does not operate,
Naturally, this is disadvantageous for the player.

Therefore, when the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbols is the normal game state or the C time-reduced game state, although it is determined that the normal symbol wins in the hit determination process of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols ends. A normal symbol variation pattern (predetermined 01H) in which the game state at the time becomes a normal game state, and a normal symbol variation pattern (02H) when it is determined as "normal symbol loss" in the normal symbol hit determination process. is a variation pattern of normal symbols corresponding to "substantially normal symbol loss" disadvantageous to the player. Then, the variable display time of the normal symbols is set so that all the variation patterns of the normal symbols corresponding to "substantially lost in the normal symbols" have the same "normal symbol processing end time".

140 and 141 and the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. Special figure processing end time (13500msec)” (
Figures 140 and 141) and "normal pattern processing end time (13500 msec)" (see Figure 142) in the normal pattern variation pattern corresponding to "substantially normal pattern loss" is configured to be the same time. It is

As a result, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 143, even if a holding function is provided to hold the starting information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, the deviation of the variable display start timing between the normal symbols and the special symbols is suppressed. can do.

[6-4. Main control processing]
In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the main CPU 20 of the main control circuit 200
1, compared to the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) are processes for performing a holding function of holding the starting information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number. , Although it differs in that the number of times of time saving is not subtracted when the variable display of normal symbols is performed, the other processes are the same. The processing for performing this holding function is similar to that of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, but differences will be explained using the drawings used in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

(Special symbol variable display start process)
In the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 123) in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S3021
YES), the special symbol hit determination process is performed using the starting information (special symbol jackpot determination random number value, etc.) stored in the special symbol determination area (S3022). However, in the special symbol variable display start process in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S3021), "the special symbol After the "starting information shift process" is performed, the special symbol hit determination process (S3022) is performed.

Specifically, in the "special symbol start information shift process", when the special symbol variable display start process is for the first special symbol, the first special symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 The stored start information is shifted to the special symbol determination area, and the start information stored in the first special symbol start storage area (2) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) is shifted to the first special symbol start storage area ( 1) to shift to the first special symbol start storage area (3). In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process targets the second special symbol, the first special symbol start storage area (
1) ~ Instead of the first special symbol start storage area (4), when the second special symbol start storage area (1) ~ second special symbol start storage area (4) is the first special symbol to be processed similarly shifted.

(Normal symbol control process)
In the normal symbol variable display start process (S3293) of the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 135) in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, various random numbers are stored as starting information in the normal symbol determination area. If there is, the hit determination processing of the normal design is performed. however,
In the normal symbol variable display start process in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine,
As in the above "starting information shift processing for special symbols", after performing the starting information shift processing for normal symbols, when various random numbers are stored as starting information in the normal symbol determination area, the hit determination processing for normal symbols is performed. will do. In addition, in the normal symbol variable display start process (S3293) of the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 134), the "ordinary symbol time reduction management process" in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is not performed. become.

(Switch input detection processing)
Switch input detection processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine (see FIG. 135)
In the first starting opening winning detection process (S3381), the second starting opening winning detection process (S3382), and the ball passing detection process (S3387), the extracted starting information is placed in one special symbol determination area or normal symbol start determination area I am working on remembering it. However, in the special symbol variable display start process in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the first special symbol start storage area (1) to first special symbol start storage area (4), and the second special symbol Start memory area (1) ~ second special symbol start memory area (4), first special symbol start memory area (1) ~ first special symbol start memory area (4), normal symbol start memory area (1) ~ normal The start information is stored while referring to the empty pattern start storage area (4). This is the same as the first pachinko game machine.

[6-5. Opening mode of normal electric accessories]
FIG. 143 is a time chart showing an example of an opening mode of a normal electric accessory in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 143 shows the fluctuation and stop of the normal symbol display portion 161, the operation and stop of the normal electric solenoid 3148 constituting the normal electric accessory 3146, the fluctuation and stop of the first special symbol display portion 163, and the state of the game. The transitions are shown up and down.

In addition, in FIG. 143, as shown in the normal per symbol type determination table of FIG. 119, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the normal game state is short (200 msec). Shown, the normal electric accessory 3146 in the C time-saving game state
An advantageous open mode with a long open time (2000 to 3000 msec) is illustrated as "long open". Furthermore, the type of the first special symbol to be stopped and displayed corresponding to the "time saving hit" is illustrated as "stop with C time saving design", and the opening time of the opening and closing winning opening 3151 opened at the time of "accessory opening hit" is illustrated as "accessory release end time".

In the period of (A) in FIG. 143, the first special symbol and the normal symbol are displayed variably for the first time, and when the game state is the C time-saving game state, the normal symbol display unit 161 displays the "normal symbol." The variable display time of the normal symbols corresponding to "losing" is started, and in the first special symbol display section 163, the variable display time of the first special symbols corresponding to "hit the role" is started. again,
With the start of the variable display time of the first special symbol, the game state has shifted from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state.

Although the variable display time of the first special symbol corresponding to the "permissible role" is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol loss", the variable display time of the first special symbol is "special electric "Special figure processing end time" added with "accessory release end time" is set to the same time as "ordinary figure processing end time" in normal symbols.

For this reason, at the time of (a) in FIG. 143, since it is set to the same time as the "special pattern processing end time" in the first special pattern and the "normal pattern processing end time" in the normal pattern, 2
The fluctuation start timings of the first special symbol and the normal symbol that are variably displayed for the first time are substantially synchronized.

143, when the game state is the normal game state, the normal symbol display unit 161 starts the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol hit", and the first
In the special symbol display portion 163, the variable display time of the first special symbol of the disadvantageous chance variation A corresponding to the "time saving hit" is started.

The variable display time of the first special pattern of the disadvantageous chance variation A corresponding to the ``time saving hit'' is longer than the variable display time of the normal pattern corresponding to the ``ordinary pattern hit'', and the variable display time of the normal pattern has ended. After that, the variable display time of the first special symbol ends, and the game state shifts from the normal game state to the C time-saving game state.

Therefore, when the normal symbol variable display time corresponding to "normal symbol per" ends,
The variable display time of the first special symbol has not ended, and the game state is the normal game state, as shown in FIG.
As shown in the normal per symbol type determination table No. 9, "short opening" in the normal game state is performed as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory.

Then, the variable display time of the first special symbol of the disadvantageous chance variation A corresponding to the "time saving hit" is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol hit", but the variable display time of the normal symbol. ``General pattern processing end time'', which is the ``short open end time'' that is the ``normal electric accessory open end time'', is set to the same time as the ``special symbol processing end time'' in the first special symbol. .

Therefore, even at the time of (c) in FIG. 143, since it is set to the same time as the "special pattern processing end time" in the first special pattern and the "normal pattern processing end time" in the normal design,
The fluctuation start timings of the first special symbol variably displayed for the third time and the normal symbols are substantially synchronized.

At the time of (c) in FIG. 143, when the gaming state is the C time-saving gaming state, the normal symbol display unit 161 starts the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol winning", and the first special In the symbol display section 163, the variable display time of the first special symbol of the advantageous chance variation B corresponding to the "time saving hit" is started. Also, with the start of the variable display time of the first special symbol, the game state has shifted from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state.

At the time of (d) in FIG. 143, the variable display time of the first special symbol of the advantageous chance variation B corresponding to the "time saving hit" is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol hit". , The variable display time of the first special symbol ends immediately before the variable display time of the normal symbol ends, and the game state shifts from the normal game state to the C time-saving game state.

At the time of (E) in FIG. 143, when the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "per normal symbol" ends, the variable display time of the first special symbol has already ended and the game state changes to the C time-saving game state. As shown in the normal per symbol type determination table of FIG. 119, "long release" in the C time saving game state is performed as the release mode of the normal electric accessory.

Thus, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, in addition to the configuration that produces the effects of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, special symbols corresponding to "substantially special symbol losing""Special pattern processing end time" in the fluctuation pattern (01H, 0BH), and "normal pattern processing end time" in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern corresponding to "substantially normal pattern loss"
are the same time (FIGS. 140 to 142). As a result, even if a holding function for holding start information of normal patterns and special patterns up to a prescribed number is provided, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the variation timing between the normal patterns and the special patterns until a big win is achieved.

<Modified Example of the Fourth Pachinko Machine>
Next, modified examples of the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described.

In the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine, while the game ball that has flowed down from the left side region 106 collides with the game nail, the first passage gate 3126A and the first start port 3
120 is configured to be directly passable/entranceable. However, the first pass gate 312
In order to pass/enter 6A and the first starting port 3120, only game balls that enter a sorting device (for example, a so-called crun) and are sorted to a specific discharge port by the sorting device. may be configured to pass/enter first pass gate 3126A and first start port 3120. For example, by using the stage 118 formed in the center accessory 115 as a sorting device, game balls that enter the warp entrance 117 are sorted to a plurality of discharge ports (not shown) by the sorting device, and are sent to a specific discharge port. Only the distributed game balls are the first
It may be configured to pass/enter the passage gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120. FIG.
In particular, as in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, when the holding function of holding the starting information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number is not provided, the first passing gate per unit time Even if the passing/entering rate to 3126A and the first starting port 3120 is reduced, the interest of the game can be maintained by the sorting device.

In addition, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, when the variable display of the special symbols is performed, the variable display time of the special symbols predetermined in the special symbol variation pattern table is However, when determining the variable display time of the special symbol, the variable display time of the special symbol is determined based on the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol that has already been variably displayed. You may For example, when the special symbol "chance variation B" advantageous to the player is determined, the variable display time of the first special symbol shorter than the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbols already variably displayed is calculated. Then (for example, the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol -1 second), the calculated time is determined as the variable display time of the first special symbol of the chance variation B. Further, when "chance variation A" of special symbols disadvantageous to the player is determined, the variable display time of the first special symbol longer than the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbols already variably displayed is calculated. Then (for example, remaining time of variable display time of normal design + 1 second)
, the calculated time is determined as the variable display time of the first special symbol of the chance variation A. especially,
When a holding function for holding the start information of normal patterns and special patterns up to a predetermined number is provided, it is effective because the end timing of the variable display time of normal patterns and special patterns can be adjusted in real time.

In addition, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the right side area 107 of the game board unit 3010 is provided with the second passage gate 3126B, but as shown in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, Second, the second passage gate 312
6B may not be provided.

Further, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, when the variable display of special symbols is performed, the number of times of time saving is subtracted, and it is possible to shift from the time saving game state to the normal game state. However, after the variable display of the special symbols is performed, the time saving number of times is subtracted, and the time saving game state can be shifted to the normal game state in the same way as the first to third pachinko game machines. good.

Further, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the number of consecutive big wins shifted to the big win game state under a specific condition (A time-saving game state) is counted,
A "limiter function" is provided for partially regulating the game state to be shifted after the end of the big win game state when the number of consecutive big wins reaches a predetermined limiter number of times, but the limiter function does not have to be provided.

Further, in the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine, when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, it is configured to determine the "accessory hit". but,
It may be configured such that when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, the "accessory release hit" is not determined.

(others)
The above-mentioned fourth pachinko game machine can apply each other's technique between each embodiment including a modification. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Further, the effects described in the fourth pachinko game machine are merely enumerations of the most suitable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. not something.

Furthermore, the above [4. Extension example] can also be applied to the fourth pachinko game machine as long as there is no discrepancy in the game characteristics and control.

[7. Fifth pachinko machine]
Next, the fifth pachinko game machine will be explained. The fifth pachinko machine is a so-called type 1 type pachinko machine. 5 pachinko machine uses normal patterns "
The difference is that the game is mainly based on the "normal pattern game", and the configuration of various members is partly different accordingly.

Also, unlike the first pachinko machine, the fifth pachinko machine does not have two types of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), but only one type of special symbol. not For this reason, there are no concepts such as "priority variator", "sequential variator", and "simultaneous variator" as described above. Incidentally, as in the first to third pachinko gaming machines, two types of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) may be provided.

Hereinafter, in describing the embodiment of the fifth pachinko game machine, the same components as those of the first pachinko game machine will be assigned the same reference numerals and the same step numbers, and detailed descriptions of the configurations and processes will be omitted. .

[7-1. Game board unit]
With reference to FIG. 144, the game board unit 5010 provided in the fifth pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 5010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 144 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 5010 provided in the fifth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 5010 includes a game panel 5100, and the game panel 5
Various members are arranged in 100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side surface of the game panel 5100 in which the shot game ball can roll and flow.

As shown in FIG. 144, the game board unit 5010 provided in the fifth pachinko gaming machine mainly has a first passage opening 5126A and a second passage opening 5126 as compared with the first pachinko gaming machine.
B, a start port 5140, a normal electric accessory unit 5145, and a special electric accessory unit 51
30 in configuration and arrangement. Each configuration and arrangement thereof will be described below.

(First pass)
The first passage opening 5126A is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can pass through (a right-handed game ball cannot pass or is difficult to pass through). ing. Further, the first passage port 5126A is provided with a first passage port switch 5127A (see FIG. 145 described later) for detecting passage of a game ball to the first passage port 5126A. Then, the game ball that has passed through the first passage port 5126A flows down the channel on the back side of the game panel 5100 and is discharged out of the machine.

(Second Passage)
The second passage port 5126B is arranged above the normal electric accessory unit 5145, which will be described later, in the right area 107, and is arranged so that only right-handed game balls can pass through. In addition, in the second passage port 5126B, a second
A passage port switch 5127B (see FIG. 145 described later) is provided. Then, the game ball that has passed through the second passage port 5126B is directed toward the normal electric accessory unit 5145, and the right side area 10
7 flows down.

First passage port 5126A or second passage port 5126B (hereinafter referred to as "passage port 5126A,
5126B"), normal symbol lottery and normal symbol variable display are performed.

In particular, in the fifth pachinko game machine, when the game ball passes through the first passage port 5126A (when the first passage switch 5127A detects the game ball), a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three game ball) is paid out, and when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B (when the second passage port switch 5127B detects the game ball), the prize ball is not paid out. there is
In addition, when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, a predetermined number of prize balls may be paid out, and when the game ball passes through the first passage port 5126A, the prize balls are paid out. It may be configured not to

(starting port)
The starting port 5140 is arranged in the right region 107 so that a right-handed game ball can be entered (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to enter). Also, the second passage port 5126
It is arranged below the starting port 5140 so that the game ball that has passed through B can enter the starting port 5140 . Further, the starting port 5140 is provided with a starting port switch 5141 for detecting entry of a game ball into the starting port 5140 .

When a game ball enters the starting port 5140, a special symbol lottery, a variable display of a special symbol is performed, or a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, one game ball) are paid out.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 5145 is a unit body in which the starting port 5140, the starting port switch 5141 for detecting the entry of the game ball into the starting port 5140, and the normal electric accessory 5146 are integrated. 107.

The ordinary electric accessory 5146 includes a protruding plate type shutter 5147 for ordinary electricity that can move back and forth, and a solenoid for ordinary electricity 5148 that operates the shutter 5147 for ordinary electricity (Fig.
See). The normal electric accessory 5146, that is, the normal electric shutter 5147 is the starting port 5
It is configured to be able to shift between an open state in which entry of a game ball into 140 is possible or easy, and a closed state in which entry of a game ball into starting port 5140 is impossible or difficult.

Specifically, the general electric shutter 5147 is composed of a substantially triangular ball entry preventing portion arranged in front of the entrance of the starting port 5140 and a plate-shaped ball entering guiding portion inclined toward the starting port 5140. there is When the general electric shutter 5147 is in the open state, the substantially triangular ball entry preventing portion moves from the surface of the game panel 5100 to a game ball non-contact point at a distance longer than the diameter of the game ball, to the start port 5140. The plate-shaped ball entry guide part is a game panel 5100
It moves to a game ball contact point at a distance of the diameter of the game ball or less from the surface of the game ball, receives the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107, and guides the received game ball to the starting port 5140. - 特許庁on the other hand,
When the general electric shutter 5147 is in the closed state, the substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion moves to the game ball contact portion to prevent the game ball from entering the starting port 5140, and the plate-shaped ball entry guide portion is buried in the game panel 5100 and does not accept the game ball flowing down to the right area 107,
It does not hinder the flow of game balls. It should be noted that the general electric shutter 5147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction
Instead, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be adopted.

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 5130 is a unit body in which a large winning opening 5131, a large winning opening count switch 5132 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the large winning opening 5131, and a special electric accessory 5133 are integrated. . The special electric accessory unit 5130 is arranged below in the right area 107 . In addition, the special electric accessory unit 5130 may be arranged below the first passage opening 5126A or above the center accessory 115 .

The big winning opening 5131 is a winning opening that can shift from a closed state to an open state. Grand Prize Gate 51
31 shifts from the closed state to the open state because the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit".
Or when a stop display mode indicating a "minor win" is derived. The big winning a prize mouth 5131 is a specified number (
For example, up to 10 game balls can enter, and when a game ball enters this big winning hole 5131, prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) corresponding to the big winning hole 5131 will be paid out. .

The special electric accessory 5133 includes a projecting plate type special electric shutter 5134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 5135 that operates the special electric shutter 5134 (see FIG. 145 to be described later).
See). The special electric accessory 5133, that is, the special electric shutter 5134, has an open state in which a game ball can or easily enter the big winning opening 5131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the big winning opening 5131. It is configured to be able to transition to and from states.

Specifically, the special electric shutter 5134 is composed of a plate-shaped roof that is gently inclined (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward the out port 178 side. When the special electric shutter 5134 is in the open state, the roof portion is buried in the game panel 5100 and the big winning opening 5131 is opened,
A game ball flowing down the right area 107 or a game ball rolling on the roof can enter. When the special electric shutter 5134 is in the closed state, the roof protrudes from the game panel 5100, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 5131.

In particular, in the fifth pachinko game machine, the special electric shutter 5134 is a gently inclined plate-shaped roof, and when the special electric shutter 5134 is closed, game balls can roll on the roof. Since it is configured to be, it is controlled to a small winning game state, and the big winning opening 5
131 is opened only for a very short time, one or a plurality of game balls rolling on the roof are dropped toward the large winning opening 5131 to prevent the game balls from entering the large winning opening 5131. making it possible.

[7-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 145, the control circuit of the fifth pachinko game machine will be described. Figure 1
45 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 145, the fifth pachinko machine, like the first pachinko machine,
It is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls games, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls effects according to the progress of games, a payout/fire control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the fifth pachinko game machine is partially different in the configuration of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 compared to the first pachinko game machine. Specifically, the fifth pachinko game machine includes a special symbol display unit 5160, a special symbol reservation display unit 5161, a general electric solenoid 5
148, special electric solenoid 5135, starting port switch 5141, first passage port switch 51
27A, the second pass port switch 5127B, and the big winning port count switch 5132 are partially different. Further, since the fifth pachinko gaming machine does not execute probability variation control, the probability variation notification display unit 167 in the first pachinko gaming machine is not provided. Each configuration and arrangement thereof will be described below.

(Special pattern display part)
The special symbol display unit 5160 displays the result of the special symbol hit determination process,
The LED unit 160 is composed of a plurality of LEDs. Specifically, the special symbol display unit 5160 is eight L corresponding to the special symbol display unit 5160 of the first pachinko game machine
It is composed of an LED group consisting of EDs 163a to 163h (see FIG. 5).

Conditions for starting variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "starting conditions for special symbols")
is established, all or part of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the special symbol display portion 5160 start to alternately or alternately alternately turn on and off a special symbol variable display. When a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the special symbols is started, the variable display of the special symbols is stopped, and the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbols is derived.

(Reserved display for special symbols)
The special symbol pending display unit 5161, when the start information of the special symbol, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is suspended, the number of variable display of the reserved special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "the number of reserved special symbols") ), and the LED unit 160 is composed of a plurality of LEDs. Specifically, the special symbol holding display unit 5161 is composed of an LED group consisting of two LEDs 165a and 165b corresponding to the first special symbol holding display unit 165 of the first pachinko game machine (Fig. 5). Here, "the variable display of the special symbol is suspended" means that the special symbol starting condition is established after the passage of the game ball to the starting port 5140 is detected and the special symbol starting information is extracted. refers to the state up to

The special symbol holding display unit 5161, like the first special symbol holding display unit 165 of the first pachinko game machine, is a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the two LEDs 165a and 165b, and the number of holding variable display of special symbols. display.

(Solenoid for general electricity)
The general electric solenoid 5148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electric shutter 5147 . When the main CPU 201 energizes the general electric solenoid 5148 (it is ON), the general electric shutter 5147 advances forward to open the starting port 5140 . (If it is OFF), the general electric shutter 5147 is retracted rearward to close the starting port 5140 .

(solenoid for special train)
The special electric solenoid 5135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the special electric shutter 5134 . When the special electric solenoid 5135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, the special electric shutter 5134 is retracted backward to open the big winning opening 5131, and when the main CPU 201 does not energize (OFF) ), the special electric shutter 5134 is moved forward to close the big winning opening 5131 .

(start switch)
The starting port switch 5141 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects entry of a game ball into the starting port 5140 . When the starting port switch 5141 detects that a game ball has entered the starting port 5140, the main CPU 201 extracts special symbol starting information (random number for judging a big hit, random number for design, random number for effect selection, etc.), The start information of the extracted special symbol is used for the hit determination process of the special symbol, the variable display process of the special symbol is performed, and the payout/emission control circuit 400 executes the payout process of a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball). You will be instructed to

(First passage switch)
The first passage port switch 5127A is a penetrating proximity switch that detects passage of a game ball to the first passage port 5126A. When the first passage port switch 5127A detects the passage of the game ball to the first passage port 5126A, the main CPU 201 generates normal symbol starting information (normal symbol hit determination random number value, normal symbol random number value, normal symbol effect random number for selection, etc.), and use the extracted normal symbol start information for normal symbol hit determination processing, normal symbol variable display processing, or predetermined prize balls (for example, three game balls) Payout/launch control circuit 4
00.

(Second passage switch)
The second passage port switch 5127B is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the passage of the game ball to the second passage port 5126B. When the second passage port switch 5127B detects passage of the game ball to the second passage port 5126B, the main CPU 201 extracts normal symbol starting information (normal symbol hit determination random number value, normal symbol symbol random number value, etc.). Then, the starting information of the extracted normal symbol is used for the hit determination process of the normal symbol, or the variable display process of the normal symbol is performed.
Even if the passage of the game ball to the second passage port 5126B is detected by the second passage port switch 5127B, the payout/emission control circuit 400 is not instructed to pay out the prize balls.

(Grand prize mouth count switch)
The big winning hole count switch 5132 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 5131 . When the big winning hole count switch 5132 detects the entry of the game ball into the big winning hole 5131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 5131 and the prize balls corresponding to the big winning hole 5131. The payout/launch control circuit 400 is instructed to pay out (for example, 15 game balls).

(Display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 144) is the same device as the first pachinko game machine, but the display area of the display device 7 variably displays the performance identification symbols corresponding to the special symbols in the normal game state. Instead, the difference is that in the normal game state, the production identification pattern corresponding to the normal pattern is variably displayed.

[7-3. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 to 153, basic specifications of the fifth pachinko game machine will be described. The fifth pachinko machine may be a pachinko machine with a setting function,
Descriptions related to the setting function are omitted below.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, although variable probability control is not executed, a time-saving game state in which time-saving control is executed and a normal game state in which time-saving control is not executed are prepared.
In 01, the game can be progressed in the normal game state or the time-saving game state. In this fifth pachinko game machine, variable probability control is not executed, but this is not essential. good.

In the present embodiment, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is the normal game mode in the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state. The sub CPU 301 executes control to display the hitting method that is regarded as a regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 7 .
In the fifth pachinko game machine, although the B time saving game state is not executed, the B time saving game state may be executable.

[7-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 146 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the fifth pachinko game machine. It should be noted that the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 146 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko game machine.

In the special symbol hit determination table, "big hit", "small hit" or "short hit" is determined as the data used for the special symbol hit determination process executed based on the entry into the starting port 5140. The range (width) of the random number value for judging a big hit, and the judgment value data corresponding to it ("
Big hit judgment value data”, “small hit judgment value data”, “time saving judgment value data”) are defined in association with each other. It should be noted that the total random number value for judging a big hit is 65,536. That is, the random number value for judging a big hit is generated within a range (width) of 0-65535.

As shown in FIG. 146, when a game ball enters the starting port 5140, the main CPU 201
determines the result of special pattern win determination processing as ``big win'', ``small win'' or ``time saving win'' based on the special pattern win determination processing using the special symbol big win determination random number value.

In this embodiment, even if a game ball enters the starting port 5140 to determine a "small hit" and shifts to a small win game state, a game ball can enter the big winning hole 5131, and a predetermined number of It is possible to pay out game balls (for example, 150). In addition, even if the "time saving hit" is determined, it is possible to shift to the C time saving game state and enter the game ball into the starting port 5140 again.
Therefore, when the game ball enters the start hole 5140, the game ball is paid out triggered by the "big win" or "minor win".
140 is opened and a game is played with the goal of entering a game ball into the starting port 5140 .

It should be noted that, when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed, it may be configured so that "losing" is determined. In the case of determining "losing", it is preferable to define that "minor winning" or "time-saving winning" is determined with a higher probability than "losing".

Incidentally, if the fifth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the big win probability and/or the small win probability should be higher at the high setting than at the low setting. In this case, for example, both the probability of a big win and the probability of a small win may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting, or the probability of a small win may be set constant regardless of the set value, and the probability of a big win may be set low. Alternatively, the probability of a big win may be constant regardless of the set value, and the probability of a small win may be higher at a high setting than at a low setting. However, even if the fifth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the time saving hit probability as a common probability for all settings.

[7-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 147 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the special symbol determination table shown in FIG.
00 stored in the main ROM 202

The special symbol determination table includes "selected symbol command" and "selected symbol command" and " This is a table that is referred to when selecting the "symbol designation command".

The "selection symbol command" is a command for designating a winning symbol determined according to the type of winning when the result of the winning judgment processing of the special symbol is a winning, and the "symbol specifying command" is a special symbol. This is a command for specifying the pattern to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped.
The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any one of 50 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any one of 0 to 49, the main CPU 201 outputs "z3" as the selected symbol command. is selected, and "zA2" is selected as the design designation command. again,
When the special symbol random number value is any one of 50 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 outputs the selected symbol command "z5 ”, and select “zA3” as the design designation command.

Although the explanation is omitted in the fifth pachinko game machine, the main ROM of the main control circuit 200
202 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a special symbol display unit 5160 when the variable display of special symbols is stopped.
(See FIG. 145) is a table referred to when determining the stop mode of the special symbol derived in accordance with the selected symbol command. In addition, the special symbol display unit 5160 derives the display mode of the time-saving win, the display mode of the big win, the display mode of the small win, or the display mode of the loss based on the result of the special symbol win determination process. The program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 also stores a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12B) described in the first pachinko game machine.

[7-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 148 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko game machine. Incidentally, the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 148 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the hit type determination table, for the selected symbol command,
The mode of the jackpot game state, the mode of the small win game state, and the mode of the game state (the time saving flag and the number of times of time saving) are associated with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the hit type determination table and determines the mode of the big win game state, the mode of the small win game state, and the mode of the game state (time saving flag and time saving times) based on the selected symbol command.

Here, in the "jackpot game state", state transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning port 5131 is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. For one round, when the opening time for which the big winning hole 5131 is open has passed, or when a specified number (10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 5131, the big winning hole 5131 is opened. to the closed state, and one round ends. Then, when the predetermined number of rounds is completed, the jackpot game state is terminated.

"Aspect of the jackpot game state" indicates the opening mode of the big winning opening 5131 opened in the jackpot game state, and in this embodiment, indicates the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the opening time per round. ing. The number of openings may be determined such that the large winning opening 5131 is opened and closed a plurality of times per round, or a plurality of large winning openings may be provided and the large winning opening to be opened may be determined.

In this embodiment, when 10 game balls enter the big winning hole 5131 for one round, one round ends, and every time a game ball enters the big winning hole 5131, 15 balls game balls (prize balls) are set to be paid out. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 148, as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, the selected symbol command "z1" corresponding to the "jackpot"
, 10 rounds are determined, 10 rounds x 10 balls x 15 prize balls = 1500
game balls can be put out, and when the selected symbol command is "z2", 4 rounds are determined, and 4 rounds*10*15 prize balls=600 game balls can be put out.

In addition, in the "small winning game state", state transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening 5131 is performed over a predetermined number of opening times. When a predetermined number of opening times is completed for one small winning game state or when a specified number of game balls enter the big winning hole 5131, the big winning hole 5131 is shifted from the open state to the closed state, One small winning game state ends.

"Aspect of small-hit game state" indicates an opening mode of the large winning opening 5131 opened during the small-hit game state, and in this embodiment, indicates the number of times of opening and the opening time in the small-hit game state. It should be noted that a plurality of large winning openings may be provided and the large winning opening to be opened may be determined.

In this embodiment, 10 game balls are placed in the big winning opening 51 for one small winning game state.
When the ball enters at 31, the one-time small winning game state ends, and every time the game ball enters the big winning hole 5131, 15 game balls (prize balls) are paid out. For this reason, Fig. 148
As shown in , when the selected symbol command "z3, z4" corresponding to "small hit" is the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the number of times of opening 10 times or 8 times is determined, and 10 x
15 prize balls=150 game balls can be paid out.

In addition, one opening time (for example, 0.15 seconds) in the small winning game state is set shorter than one round opening time (for example, 29 seconds) in the big win game state,
A big winning opening 5131 is opened by an advantageous "first opening mode" in a big winning game state, and a big winning opening 51 by a "second opening mode" more disadvantageous than the first opening mode in a small winning game state.
31 can be said to be open. Furthermore, the total number of game balls (for example, 150) that can be paid out in one small win game state is larger than the total number of game balls (for example, 1500 or 600) that can be paid out in one big win game state. It can be said that the big win game state is an "advantageous special game state" and the small win game state is a "disadvantageous special game state" than the big win game state.

"Aspect of game state" indicates the aspect of the game state after the end of the jackpot game state or after the time-saving hit, and indicates the setting of the "time-saving flag" and the "time-saving number of times". In addition, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the big hit game state, and the "time saving flag" and the "time saving number" are set.

"Time saving flag" is a flag indicating whether or not a time saving game state is executed and the type of time saving game state to be executed, time saving flag = 0 indicates a normal game state, time saving flag = 1 indicates A time saving game state , and the time saving flag = 3 indicates the C time saving game state. In this embodiment, although the B time saving game state is not executed, when the B time saving game state is executable, the time saving flag = 2 indicates the B time saving game state.

In addition, the "number of times of time saving" is the number of times the special symbol hit determination process is performed in the time saving game state, that is, the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed. The number of times of time saving is subtracted when special symbol hit determination processing is performed, that is, when the variable display of special symbols is started, and when the number of times of time saving becomes 0, the time saving game state is shifted to the normal game state. It will be.

As shown in FIG. 148, when the selected symbol command "z1, z2" corresponding to "big hit" is the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 sets the "time saving flag".
It is configured to determine "1" indicating the A time saving gaming state as "10 times" as the "time saving number of times".

As shown in FIG. 148, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the selected symbol command "z5" corresponding to the "time saving hit", the main CPU 201 sets "3" indicating the C time saving gaming state as the "time saving flag". ”, and “once” is determined as the “time saving frequency”.

As shown in FIG. 148, when the selected symbol command "z5" corresponding to "time-saving win" is the result of the special symbol win determination process, the main CPU 201 determines "once" as the "time-saving number of times". is configured to

In the present embodiment, the number of times of time saving is determined to be 10 times when a big hit is made, and the number of times of time saving is determined to be 1 time when a time-saving hit is made, because the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit". The probability of being determined is low and it is a premium situation, but after the jackpot game state ends, by shifting to the A time saving game state of 10 times as the number of times of the time saving game state, 10
It is constructed so as to be able to shift to more small winning game states while being controlled to the A time-saving game state of times. That is, in the present embodiment, by setting a large number of time-saving times, it is possible to shift the time-saving gaming state to more small-hit game states, and to make it possible to pay out a large number of game balls.

As a result of the special symbol hit determination process, the selected symbol command "
When it is z1, z2", it may be configured to determine "once" as the "number of times of time saving" in the same way as when it is the selection symbol command "z5" corresponding to "time saving win".

[7-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 149 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the fifth pachinko gaming machine.
The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 149, the special symbol variation pattern table associates the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the random number for effect selection, the special symbol variation pattern, and the special symbol variable display time. It is The random number for effect selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. Also, FIG.
The column of "Remarks" in is shown for convenience so that it is easy to understand.

The main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149, and based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process and the random number value for effect selection, determines the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variable display time. to decide. In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal game state,
Regardless of the time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, C time-saving game state), the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. good too.

After determining the special symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub CPU 301 a special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 .

The "rewind effect" shown in the column of "remarks" in FIG. It is a production that suggests that there is a possibility that it will continue. Details of the "rewind effect" and "basic bonus time effect" will be described later with reference to FIG. "
"Full Rotation Reach" is an effect that informs in advance that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit. The "jackpot notification reach" is an effect suggesting that the result of the special pattern hit determination process may result in a jackpot. There will be a performance of whether or not. "Shortened variation" is a variation in which the variable display time of the special symbol is short, but during the shortened variation and the small winning game state, the effect is "bonus time basic effect or bonus time special effect. A performance (special performance) will be held.

In the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the special symbol variation pattern and special symbol variable display for performing "rewind effect" and is configured to determine the time.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "big hit", "full rotation reach"
Alternatively, it is configured to determine the variation pattern of the special symbols and the variable display time of the special symbols for performing the "reach for big hit notification".

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small win", the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variable display time for performing "reduced variation" or "big hit notification reach" are determined. is configured as follows.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is "small hit", the special symbol variation pattern for performing the "shortening variation" is likely to be determined, and the special symbol variation pattern for performing the "shortening variation" is determined. A short variable display time is determined by Therefore, by determining a short variable display time as the variable display time of the special symbol,
A plurality of small winning game states can be shifted in a short time.

Further, by determining the variation pattern of the special symbols for performing the ``reach for informing the jackpot'', when the A time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state is being executed, an effect corresponding to the lottery of the special symbols is performed. be able to.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", "
Although it is configured to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol for performing "reach for big hit notification", "loss" is provided as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is determined. It may be configured such that when the result is "losing", the variation pattern of the special symbol for performing the "big hit notification reach" is determined.

[7-3-5. Normal pattern hit judgment table]
FIG. 150 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 150 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process. It is a table referred to when determining "normal design hit" or "normal design loss" by lottery based on numerical values.

The normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 150 includes the game state, the normal symbol hit determination random number range (width), and the hit/loss determination value data ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol loss").
and are defined in association with each other.

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for normal symbol hit determination from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 150, and determines hit/loss determination value data based on the gaming state and the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol win determination random number value is any one of 0 to 97 as a "normal symbol win", and sets the win/lose determination value data. "Normal per design judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 determines "losing" when the random number for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is either 98 or 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data". to decide.

In addition, in the time-saving game state A, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 98 as "normal symbol hit", and sets the hit/lose determination value data to "normal". Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the time-saving game state A, when the random number value for winning judgment of the extracted normal symbol is 99, the main CPU 201 judges "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 97, determines that it is a “normal symbol win”, and sets the hit/loss determination value data to “normal”. Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the time-saving game state C, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is either 98 or 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data". ” is decided.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the winning probability per normal symbol in the A time-saving game state (selection rate shown in FIG. 150) is the highest among the normal game state, the A time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. .

Also, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time saving game state is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the normal game state. Therefore, even if the game state shifts between the normal game state and the C time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol will not be changed.

In addition, the winning probability per normal symbol may be made the same in the normal game state, the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to change the ratio of types of normal symbols to be described later for each state without changing the winning probability per normal symbol.

[7-3-6. Normal pattern judgment table]
FIG. 151 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151, the main control circuit 2 provided in the fifth pachinko game
00 is stored in the main ROM 202 .

The normal symbol determination table includes the above-described normal symbol win-lose determination value data, the passage opening 5126A,
Based on the symbol random number of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through 5126B, it is a table referred to when selecting the "select symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning" to determine the stop symbol of the normal symbol. be.

"Selected pattern command at the time of normal design hit" is a command for specifying the normal design hit pattern determined according to the normal design hit type when the result of the hit determination process for the normal design is a normal design hit. be.

The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151 corresponds to the normal symbol winning/losing determination value data ("normal symbol hit" or "losing"), the normal symbol symbol random number value, and the normal symbol winning selection symbol command. are stipulated.

In addition, the column of "reference" in Fig. 151 refers to the total selection rate of the selection rate of the hit determination of the normal symbol in the normal game state (see Fig. 150) and the selection rate of the "selected symbol command when winning the normal symbol". , and in the normal game state, it is determined that the "normal pattern win" is determined, and as described later, in the normal game state, the normal electric accessory 5146 (normal electric shutter 5147
) is advantageous for explaining the "combined selection rate of the normal game state" when the "selected symbol command fz1 at the time of normal symbol winning" is determined.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151, and determines a normal winning selection symbol command based on the normal symbol hit/lose determination value data and the normal symbol random number value.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol win/loss determination value data, for example, the selection symbol command at the time of the normal symbol hit is selected as follows. be done.

For example, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 issues a selection symbol command when the normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 162. Select "fz1" as the normal symbol random number value of 163
If it is any one of ~65535, "fz2" is selected as the selection symbol command at the normal per symbol.

Then, as shown in the "reference" column of FIG. 151, the selection rate of the normal symbol per determination value data in the normal game state is "98/100" (see FIG. 150), and the "normal symbol per selection symbol command fz1" selection rate is about "1/402.06", the "combined selection rate of the normal game state" for finally determining the "selected symbol command fz1 at the time of winning the normal symbol" in the normal game state. is set to approximately "1/410.3".

Further, in the present embodiment, unlike the first pachinko game machine, when selecting the "selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning", regardless of the game state, the normal symbol win-lose determination value data (normal symbol It is configured to be selected based on the result of the hit determination process) and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 150), and determines the normal symbol hit/lose determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value. After that, referring to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 151), the selection symbol command at normal symbol hit is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but it is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number for winning determination of the normal symbol and the random number of the normal symbol, the winning/losing of the normal symbol and the selection symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol may be determined together.

[7-3-7. Type determination table per normal pattern]
FIG. 152 is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the normal per symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 152 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal per symbol type determination table is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 (normal shutter 5147) according to the game state and the normal per symbol select symbol command.

In the normal per symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 152, the game state, the selection symbol command at normal per symbol, and the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 are defined in association with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol per type determination table shown in FIG.
Based on the game state and the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 is determined. After that, the main CPU 201 determines the normal electric accessory 5146
to the sub CPU 301.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, if the selected symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz1", the main CPU 201 sets the first open time to 2000 msec, the wait time to 500 msec, and the second open time to 3000 msec. decide. Also, the main CP
When the U201 is in the normal game state, the selected symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz2".
Then, it is determined that the first open time is 100 msec, no wait time, and no second open time.

For this reason, even in the normal game state, when the selection symbol command "fz1" at normal symbol winning is selected, an advantageous opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 is determined, and the starting port 51 is determined.
It is possible to enter a game ball into 40.

In addition, when the selection symbol command "fz1" at normal symbol hit is selected in the normal game state, a predetermined time (for example, 10000 msec) waiting time for opening is set before the first opening is performed. may By setting this waiting time for opening, time is secured for executing promotion effects (for example, effects such as displaying "Aim right!") to prompt the player to enter the ball into the normal electric accessary 5146. can be done. By executing this promotion performance, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a so-called puncture in which the game ball is not entered into the normal electric accessary 5146 even though the selection symbol command "fz1" at the time of normal symbol winning is selected. Since it becomes easier to play, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 sets the first open time of 2000 msec and the wait time of 500 msec when the selected symbol command at normal symbol winning is "fz1" in the A time saving game state or the C time saving game state. , 2nd open time 3000msec
to decide. Further, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time-saving gaming state or the C time-saving gaming state, if the selected symbol command at normal symbol winning is "fz2", the first opening time is 25.
00 msec, a wait time of 500 msec, and a second open time of 2500 msec.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the same normal symbol per selection symbol command (for example, "fz
2”), the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 is configured to differ according to the game state.

Then, in the case of the A time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state, an advantageous opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 is determined for any of the normal symbol winning time selection symbol commands, and the opening pattern to the start port 5140 is determined. It is possible to enter a game ball.

It should be noted that, even if the selection symbol command "fz1" or "fz2" at the time of the normal symbol is selected in the A time saving game state or the C time saving game state, a predetermined time (for example, 5000 msec) is required before the first opening is performed. ) may be set.

[7-3-8. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 153 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 153 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 153 is extracted when the gaming state, the normal symbol winning/losing determination value data, the normal symbol per selection symbol command, and the game ball passing through the passage openings 5126A and 5126B. Normal pattern production selection random number, normal pattern fluctuation pattern,
It is associated with the variable display time of normal symbols. In addition, the column of "remarks" in FIG. 153 is shown for convenience so that it is easy to understand.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 153, and based on the game state, the normal symbol winning/losing determination value data, the normal symbol winning selection symbol command, and the normal symbol effect selection random number value. Then, the variation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the normal symbols are determined.

Then, when the normal symbol variation pattern is determined, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301 . The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the normal symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 .

Here, the "long opening" illustrated in the "selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning" in FIG. In the form, in the normal game state, the selected pattern command "f
z1", the selection symbol commands "fz1" and "fz2" at the normal symbol hit in the A time saving game state or the C time saving game state. In addition, "short opening" refers to a disadvantageous opening pattern (see FIG. 152) in which the opening time of the normal electric accessory 5146 is short. , and is not performed in the A time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state.

"Normal reach" shown in the column of "remarks" in Fig. 153 suggests that there is a possibility that the selected symbol command fz1 at the time of normal symbol winning, which is advantageously released by the normal electric accessory 5146 in the normal game state, has been determined. It is a performance to do. In addition, "super reach" means that the normal electric accessory 5146 is advantageously released in the normal game state.
This is an effect suggesting that there is a high possibility that 1 is decided. Also, "special reach" is an effect suggesting that there is an extremely high possibility that the selected symbol command fz1 at the time of normal symbol winning, which is advantageous to open the normal electric accessory 5146 in the normal game state, has been determined. That is, "Normal Reach", "Super Reach" and "Special Reach" are effects suggesting the possibility that "Long Open" has been determined in the normal game state, and the entry of the game ball into the starting port 5140 is possible. It can be said that it is a production that suggests that it will become.

In addition, "normal fluctuation" means that the variable display time of normal symbols is normal fluctuation, and "shortened fluctuation"
It is a variation in which the variable display time of normal symbols is short.

In the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 153, in the case of the normal game state, the normal symbol win-lose determination value data is "normal symbol hit determination value data", and the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz1". When , it is configured to determine the variation pattern of normal symbols and the variable display time of normal symbols for performing "normal reach", "super reach" or "special reach".

In addition, in the case of the normal game state, when the hit/lose determination value data of the normal symbol is "normal symbol hit determination value data" and the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz2", "normal fluctuation", "normal reach"","SuperReach" or "Special Reach", the variation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the normal symbols are determined.

In addition, in the case of the normal game state, when the winning/losing determination value data of normal symbols is "normal symbol losing determination value data", "normal fluctuation", "normal reach", and "super reach".
Alternatively, it is configured to determine the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variable display time for performing the "special reach".

In addition, when it is in the A time saving game state or the C time saving game state, it is configured to determine the variation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the normal symbols for performing the "shortening variation".

In the case of the A reduced working hours gaming state or the C reduced working hours gaming state, by determining a short variable display time as the variable display time of the normal symbol, when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, the normal electric accessory. By activating 5146 quickly, it is possible to increase the rate of entry of game balls into the starting port 5140 per unit time.

[7-4. Main control processing]
In the fifth pachinko game machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are S3 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).
Although the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process and the sub-control circuit process performed in 9 are partially different, the other processes are the same. Therefore, the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process and the sub-control circuit process will be described below, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

It should be noted that the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine , including the same processing as , will be explained again with different step numbers.

[7-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the special symbol control processing performed at S39 during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 154 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 154, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S5001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). Main CPU
201 moves the process to S5002 after executing the process of S5001.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process by:
Prior to the process of S5001, an address setting process is performed to set the address of the special symbol work area in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register.

At S5002, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded at S5001 is 0, that is, whether or not it is waiting for variable display of the special symbol.

When it is determined that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 in S5002 (S5002 is N
If the determination is O), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5004.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control number of the special symbol is 0 in S5002 (S500
2 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5003.

In S5003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbols are to be displayed in a variable manner.

When it is determined that the special symbol is not the variable display start in S5003 (S5003 is N
In the case of O determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S5003 that the special symbol is the start of variable display (S500
3 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5004.

At S5004, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. The main CPU 201 performs S5
After executing the process of 003, the special symbol control process is terminated, and the process is changed to the main control main process (Fig. 2
0 to FIG. 23).

It should be noted that the main CPU 201 sets the interrupt prohibition section, and the special symbol control process (S
5001 to S5004) are preferably performed within the interrupt disabled section.

[7-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 at S5004 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154) will be described. FIG. 155 shows the fifth
is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the pachinko gaming machine.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG.
It is the control state number of the special symbol to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for special symbols is 0 (S5
021).

If it is determined that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 in S5021 (S5021 is N
If the determination is O), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 in S5021 (S502
1 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5022.

At S5022, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol.
After executing the process of S5022, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5023. Note that the main CPU 201, based on the control state number read out in the process of S5022,
Processing after 5023 is performed.

At S5023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The processing of this S5023 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 advances the processing to S5024.
to

At S5024, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The processing of this S5024 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 advances the processing to S5025.
to

At S5025, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This S5
The process of 025 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5026.

At S5026, the main CPU 201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. This S5
The process of 026 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 160 . If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5027.

At S5027, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening control process. This S5
The process of 027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5028.

In S5028, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot end processing. This S5028
is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After finishing the processing of S5023 to S5028, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 154). In addition, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S5004 when the special symbol management process is called in S5003 during the special symbol control process, and returns to S50.
If called at 06, the process returns to S5007, if called at S5009, the process returns to S5010, and if called at S5012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[7-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 at S5023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described. Figure 156
is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 156, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S5031).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" in S5031 (S50
31 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process,
The process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" in S5031 (
If S5031 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5033.

At S5033, the main CPU 201 shifts the special symbol starting information. In this process, the start information stored in the special symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determination area (0), and the special symbol start storage area (2) to the special symbol start storage area (4) are shifted. The start information stored in is shifted to the special symbol start storage area (1) to the special symbol start storage area (3). After executing the process of S5033, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5034.

At S5034, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 146) is referred to, and the special symbol determination area (0
), the special symbol hit determination process is performed using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value stored in the memory. In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a time saving hit, a small hit or a big hit.
In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving hit flag to ON when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a time-saving hit, and turns on the small-hit flag when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a small win. , and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the big hit flag is set to ON. After executing the process of S5034, the main CPU 201
The process moves to S5035.

At S5035, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process
It is a process of determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S5034) (for example, time saving hit, small hit, big hit). In this process, referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 147), using the symbol random number value of the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination area (0), the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" or "symbol designation command ” is determined. After executing the process of S5035, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5036.

In S5036, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process
If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (a time-saving hit, a small hit, or a big hit), the type of hit is determined or determined. In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 148) is referred to, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S5035). In this embodiment, there are multiple types of hits, but the number of types of big wins may be one, the type of small wins may be one, and the number of types of time-saving wins may be plural. There may be types. The main CPU 201 performs S50
After executing the process of 36, the process moves to S5037.

In S5037, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 149) is referred to, and based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process and the effect selection random number value stored in the special symbol determination area (0), the special symbol A variation pattern and a variable display time of special symbols are determined. In this embodiment, the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149 is referred to regardless of the game state, but the variation pattern table to be referred to may be changed according to the game state. The main CPU 201 performs S503
7, the process moves to S5038.

At S5038, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the special symbol variable display time determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S5037) is set to the special symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and the special symbol variable display is performed on the special symbol display section 5160. to start. The waiting time for this special design is, for example, 2
It will be decremented as a special symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process performed in msec cycles. After executing the process of S5038, the main CPU 201
The process moves to S5039.

In S5039, the main CPU 201 performs time saving end management processing. In the fifth pachinko game machine, unlike the first pachinko game machine, the number of times of time saving is subtracted "when variable display of special symbols is started". In this process, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number counter, and when the time saving number counter=0, the time saving flag is cleared, and the shift control from the time saving game state to the normal game state is performed. After executing the process of S5039, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5040.

At S5040, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display start process,
Special symbol variable display end processing (see S5024 in FIG. 155) will be performed. After executing the process of S5040, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5041.

At S5041, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. It should be noted that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is the effect control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (S322 in FIG. 45).
), it is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 . The main CPU 201
After executing the process of , the process moves to S5042.

At S5042, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this processing, mainly update processing of various flags (for example, time saving flag etc.) relating to management of the game state is performed. After executing the process of S5042, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5043.

At S5043, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the variation pattern command of the special symbol. In addition, the special symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is
Production control command transmission processing during the next system timer interrupt processing (see S322 in FIG. 45)
, is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 .

It should be noted that the main CPU 201 sets an interruption prohibited section, and interrupts the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S5042) and special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation processing (S5043)). It is preferable to perform it within the prohibited section.

[7-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S5014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described. Figure 157
is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S5051).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" in S5051 (S50
51 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing,
The process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" in S5051 (
If S5051 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5052.

At S5052, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (S5 in FIG. 155) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process
015) is performed. After executing the process of S5052, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5053.

At S5053, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S522 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S5053, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5054.

At S5054, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter.
As described above in the description of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of special symbol confirmations (the number of times a special symbol game is executed). You may manage the number of games of the special symbol game performed under specific conditions, such as the remaining number of times of shortening of working hours. After executing the process of S5054, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

[7-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 158, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 at S5025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described. Figure 158 shows
It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S5071).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" in S5071 (S50
71 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" in S5071 (
If S5071 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5072.

At S5072, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a big win has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S5072, when it is determined that there is no big win, that is, the stopped special symbols are not in the stop display mode indicating the big win (NO determination in S5072), the main CPU 201
The process moves to S5073. On the other hand, when it is determined in S5072 that the special symbol is a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating a big win (YES in S5072), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5078.

At S5073, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a small win, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a small win.

In S5073, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not a small hit, that is, it is in a stop display mode indicating a failure (when S5073 determines NO), the main CPU 201
The process moves to S5074. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a small hit (S5073 is YES determination), the main CPU
201 moves the process to S5078.

In S5074, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a time saving win, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a time saving open win.

In S5074, when it is determined that it is not the time saving hit, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5077. On the other hand, when it is determined in S5074 that it is a time saving win, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5075.

At S5075, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is an A reduced working hours gaming state.
Specifically, the main CPU 201 refers to the time saving flag and determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating the A time saving gaming state is 1. And, if it is determined that it is not in the A time-saving gaming state,
The process moves to S5076 to perform the C time saving state setting process, and when it is determined that it is in the A time saving gaming state, the process moves to S5077 without performing the C time saving state setting process. By this processing, even if the "time saving win" is determined by the lottery of the special symbols during the time saving game state A, the determination of the "time saving win" can be invalidated.

In S5076, the main CPU 201 performs C time saving state setting processing. In this C time saving state setting process, referring to the hit type determination table shown in FIG.
Set the data of the mode of the determined game state. Specifically, the time saving flag indicating the C time saving game state is set to 3 (the time saving flag is turned on), and the time saving counter is set to 1. After executing the process of S5076, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5077.

At S5077, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, the main CPU 201
When the special symbol game end processing is performed, the special symbol game determination processing is terminated, and the processing is returned to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 155).

In S5078, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process for the big hit game control process or the small hit game control process. In this processing, signals output to, for example, a hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 145 for both) and an island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 1184 are generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. Main CPU
201 moves the process to S5079 after performing the process of S5078.

In S5079, the main CPU 201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning hole 5131 (S5080) and a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S5081).

At S5082, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening preparation process (see S5026 in FIG. 155) will be performed.

At S5083, the main CPU 201 executes the game state designation parameter setting process (S5
083). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter when the jackpot is won. note that,
At the time of a small hit, processing for clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter is not performed. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. It should be noted that the game state designation command that is reserved for transmission in this process, in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process,
It is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 .

In S5084, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a big-hit start display command in the case of a big hit, and performs transmission reservation processing of a small-hit start display command in the case of a small hit. In addition, the big hit start display command or the small hit start display command reserved for transmission in this process is the next production control command transmission process during the system timer interrupt process (Fig. 45
(see S522 of )), it is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 . The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S5084, the special symbol game determination process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

It should be noted that the main CPU 201 sets the interrupt prohibited section, and performs the above-described special symbol game determination process (
S5071 to S5084) are preferably performed within the interrupt disabled section.

[7-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S5077 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 158) will be described. Figure 159
is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

At S5092, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". Thus, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed,
The next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S5092, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5093.

At S5093, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol game end command (S509
4). It should be noted that the special symbol game end command that is reserved for transmission in this process, in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process,
It is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 . After the processing of S5094, the main CPU 201
ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 158).

[7-4-7. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S5026 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 155) will be described. Figure 160 shows
It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S5101).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" in S5101 (S51
01 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" in S5101 (
If S5101 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5102.

In S5102, the main CPU 201 loads the value of the counter value of the number of times of opening/closing of the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening/closing execution number counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of rounds in the big winning game state when the big winning game control process is executed, and when the small winning game control process is executed, the small winning game control It corresponds to a counter that counts the number of times the process is opened. In addition, the count value of the large winning opening opening/closing execution number counter (large winning opening opening/closing execution number counter value) is stored in the main RAM 20
3 is stored in a predetermined area. After executing the process of S5102, the main CPU 201
The process moves to S5103.

In S5103, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the counter for the number of times of execution of opening and closing the big winning opening is the upper limit value. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the hit type determination table of FIG. times or 10 times.

If it is determined in S5103 that the number of opening and closing execution times of the big winning opening is the upper limit value (S51
03 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5104.

At S5104, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S5104)
By switching the control state number by performing
A jackpot end process (see S5028 in FIG. 155) will be performed. Main CPU20
1 executes the process of S5104 and then moves the process to S5105.

At S5105, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed.

In S5106, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a big-hit end display command when a big win is made, and performs transmission reservation processing of a small-hit end display command when a small win is made. In addition, the big hit end display command or the small hit end display command reserved for transmission in this process is the effect control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (Fig. 45
(see S322 of )), it is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 . Then, after the process of S5106, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

Returning to S5103, if it is determined that the number of opening/closing execution times of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (S5
103 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5107.

In S5107, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the counter value of the number of times of opening/closing of the big winning opening. After executing the process of S5107, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S
Move to 5108.

At S5108, the main CPU 201 performs processing for determining the big winning opening to be opened. In this process, as the big winning hole to be opened, when the big winning game control process is executed, the big winning hole 5
131 is determined, and the big winning opening 5131 is determined when the small winning game control process is executed.
After executing the process of S5108, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5109.

In S5109, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the big winning hole 5131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 5131, the maximum number of balls entering the big winning hole 5131, the number of prize balls when entering the big winning hole, etc. are set. The number of openings of the big winning opening corresponds to the number of rounds when executing the big winning game control process, and corresponds to the opening number of the big winning opening 5131 when executing the small winning game control process. In addition, it is not the meaning which excludes what the large winning a prize mouth 5131 is open|released multiple times in 1 round or small-hit game control processing. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the big winning opening 5131 are performed as separate processes. The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process of 5109, the process moves to S5110.

In the present embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to, for example, 29000 msec at maximum when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to 1500 msec at maximum or 2000 msec at maximum when executing the small winning game control process. is set to The maximum number of balls entering the big winning opening is set to, for example, 10 at maximum when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to 10 at maximum when executing the small winning game control process. Grand Prize Gate 5
The number of prize balls when entering 131 is set to 15, for example. However, the values that are set or set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

At S5110, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening/closing control process for opening the large winning opening 5131. FIG. After executing the process of S5110, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5111.

At S5111, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S5111)
By switching the control state number by performing
The big winning opening control process (see S5027 in FIG. 155) will be performed. Main CP
After executing the process of S5111, U201 shifts the process to S5112.

At S5112, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. Main C
After executing the process of S5112, the PU 201 shifts the process to S5113.

At S5113, the main CPU 201 performs reservation processing for transmission of the command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S5113, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

[7-4-8. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S5027 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described. Figure 161 shows
It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the fifth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S5121).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" in S5121 (S51
21 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" in S5121 (
If S5121 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5122.

At S5122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls entering the big winning opening 5131 is the maximum number of entering balls. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the big winning hole count switch 5132 (see FIG. 145) for counting the number of game balls entering the big winning hole is the maximum number of entering balls. . In addition, the big winning mouth count switch 5132
The big winning opening winning counter value counted by is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 .

In S5122, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 5131 is not the maximum winning number, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5123,
If it is determined that the number of game balls that have won 31 is the maximum winning number, the process is shifted to S51
Move to 28-1.

At S5128-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in the jackpot gaming state (jackpot flag is ON). If the main CPU 201 determines that it is in the big win game state, it shifts the process to S5124, and if it determines that it is not in the big win game state (that is, it is in the small win game state), it shifts the process to S5128-2. .

At S5123, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 5131 has passed. In this process, various setting processes related to the big winning opening (S510 in FIG. 160
9), it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in step 9) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S5123 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 5131 has not elapsed (NO determination in S5123), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process ( 155).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S5123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 5131 has elapsed (YES in S5123), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5124.

At S<b>5124 , the main CPU 201 performs closing processing of the big winning opening 5131 . After executing the process of S5124, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5125.

At S5125, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S
5125) to switch the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (see S5026 in FIG. 155) is performed again. After executing the process of S5125, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5126.

At S5126, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. Main C
After executing the process of S5126, the PU 201 shifts the process to S5127.

In S5127, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of an inter-round display command if it is in the jackpot gaming state. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is the effect control command transmission process (S32 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
2), it is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 . In addition, at the time of the small hit game state, transmission reservation processing of the inter-round display command is not performed. Then, after the process of S5127, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process, and discontinues the special symbol management process (see FIG. 1).
55).

At S5128-2, the main CPU 201 performs closing setting processing for closing the big winning opening 5131. FIG. After executing the process of S5128-2, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5128-3.

At S5128-3, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process,
A jackpot end process (see S5028 in FIG. 155) will be performed. Main CPU20
1 executes the process of S5128-3 and then moves the process to S5128-4.

At S5128-4, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S5128-4, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5128-5.

In S5128-5, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a small hit end display command. The small hit end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S5128-5, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

[7-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 162, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S5028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described. FIG. 162 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S5131).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" in S5131 (S51
31 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) as well as the big win end process, and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" in S5131 (
If S5131 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5132.

At S5132, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various counter values related to the big win game state and the small win game state (large winning mouth open number counter value, big winning mouth winning counter value, etc.), time saving flag, small winning flag, big winning flag, pattern fixed number counter , etc. are cleared. The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process of 5132, the process moves to S5133.

In S5133, the main CPU 201 performs A time saving state setting processing. In this A time saving state setting process, referring to the hit type determination table shown in FIG. Set aspect data. Specifically, the selection pattern command "z1
” and “z2”, the time saving flag indicating the A time saving game state is set to 1 (the time saving flag is turned on), and the time saving counter is set to 10. Main CPU2
After executing the process of S5132, 01 moves the process to S5034.

At S5134, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 159 is performed. Main CPU20
1, after executing the processing of S5134, ends the jackpot end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 155).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[7-4-10. Normal symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the normal symbol control processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. In addition, Fig. 163
Needless to say, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal symbol start condition is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

FIG. 163 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the numerical values (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flow chart shown in FIG. 163 are normal symbol control state numbers. The main CPU 201
By executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol, the normal symbol game is advanced.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the wait time for normal symbols is 0 (S5
300).

If it is determined in S5300 that the wait time for normal symbols is not 0, the main CPU 2
01 ends the normal symbol control process and shifts the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the wait time for normal symbols is 0, the main CPU 201
The process moves to S5301.

At S5301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol.
After executing the process of S5301, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5310. Note that the main CPU 201, based on the control state number read in the process of S5301,
Processing after 5310 is performed.

At S5310, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S5310 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". The details of this normal symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S
Move to 5320.

At S5320, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S5320 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5330.

In this normal symbol variable display end processing, the main CPU 201 manages whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbols has ended. ”. When the variable display time of the normal design is not finished, the control state number of the normal design is held at "1", and the end of the variable display time of the normal design is waited.

At S5330, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This S5
The process of 330 is a process performed when the control state number of normal symbols is "2". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S
Move to 5340.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs determination processing of the normal symbol derivation result (for example, normal symbol win or normal symbol loss). Then, when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol is a hit for the normal symbol, the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol is a loss, the control state number for the normal symbol is set to "0" without performing the open pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 146. - 特許庁

In addition, in the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 146, the normal per symbol type determination table shown in FIG. Determine the release pattern (number of times of release, release time, wait time) and set the determined release pattern. After that, the main CPU 201 sends the opening pattern command of the ordinary electric accessory corresponding to the opening pattern of the determined ordinary electric accessory 5146 to the sub C
It transmits to PU301.

At S5340, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessary product release processing. This S5
The process of 340 is a process performed when the control state number of normal symbols is "3". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S
Move to 5350.

In this normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 201 performs the opening process of the normal electric accessory 146 according to the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S5330. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric accessory 146 is completed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

At S5350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol per end processing. This S5
The process of 350 is a process performed when the control state number of normal symbols is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol per end process, it ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this normal per symbol end process, the main CPU 201
In 40, a process of resetting (clearing) various parameters related to the normal design and various random values stored in the normal design determination area (0) is performed.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the interrupt prohibition section, and the above-described normal symbol control process (S
5300 to S5350) is preferably performed within the interrupt disabled section.

[7-4-11. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 164, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 at S5310 during the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 163) will be described. FIG. 164 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 164, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" (S5311).

When it is determined in S5311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 terminates the normal symbol variable display start process, and shifts the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 16).
3). On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5312.

At S5312, the main CPU 201 shifts the normal symbol starting information. In this process, the start information stored in the normal symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol determination area (0), and the normal symbol start storage area (2) to the normal symbol start storage area (4). The start information stored in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to normal symbol start storage area (3). After executing the process of S5312, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5313.

At S5313, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG.
Based on the game state and the normal symbol hit determination random number value stored in the normal symbol determination area (0), hit/lose determination value data ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol loss") is determined. After executing the process of S5313, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5314.

At S5314, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. Based on the symbol random number value of the symbol, the ``selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol'' is determined.
After executing the process of S5314, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5315.

At S5315, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variation pattern determination processing. 153, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. ) based on the random number for normal design effect selection stored in
A variation pattern of normal symbols and a variable display time of normal symbols are determined. After executing the process of S5315, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5316.

At S5316, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the normal symbol variable display time determined in the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S5315) is set to the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the normal symbol variable display is displayed on the normal symbol display section 161. to start. The waiting time for this normal design is, for example, 2m
It will be subtracted as a normal symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process performed at the sec cycle. After executing the process of S5316, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5317.

At S5317, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of the normal symbol variable display start process,
Normal symbol variable display end processing (see S5320 in FIG. 163) will be performed. After executing the process of S5317, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5318.

At S5318, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the normal symbol variation pattern command. In addition, the fluctuation pattern command of the normal design reserved for transmission in this process is
Production control command transmission processing during the next system timer interrupt processing (see S322 in FIG. 45)
, is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 .

[7-5. Sub control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described. FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 165, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S5500).
. In this initialization processing, for example, initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup recovery initialization, and the like is performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 causes the process to proceed to S5510.
to

Note that the initialization process (S5500) described above is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared.

In S5510, the sub CPU 301 performs read processing of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 145). In this process, the command sent from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 145) set in the command input port 308 is read out. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5520.

In S5520, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S5510 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5530.

At S5530, the sub CPU 301 executes effect mode determination processing. In this process, for example, based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 201, a production pattern is determined, and based on the determined production pattern, various requests (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, etc.) for operating various production devices are executed. , lamp requests, and accessory requests). For details of this rendering mode determination processing, see FIG.
will be described later with reference to After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5540.

In S5540, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 145). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5550.

In S5550, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 145). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control for causing the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5560.

In S5560, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends the LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 145).
Send to The LED control circuit 306 receives the message (L
ED request), light emission control for lighting or blinking all or part of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 is performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301
The process moves to S5570.

At S5570, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the role product request to the role product control circuit 307 (see FIG. 145). Based on a message (a role request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301, the role control circuit 307 controls the performance drive motor (not shown) for all or part of the performance roles constituting the performance role group 58. Performs drive control for operation. After completing this process, the sub-C
PU 301 terminates the sub-control circuit main process.

[7-5-1. Production Mode Determination Process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 166, details of the effect mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 at S5530 during the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 165) will be described. Figure 166 shows
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation mode determination process in a 5th pachinko game machine.

At S5531, the sub CPU 301 executes effect mode determination processing. In this process, based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 201, an effect pattern that defines the mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 7, the mode of the sound effect output from the speaker 32, and the like is determined. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5532.

In S5532, the sub CPU 301 executes animation request generation processing. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the production pattern determined in S5531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5533.

In S5533, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing request generation processing. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5534.

In S5534, the sub CPU 301 executes sound request generation processing. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5.
Move to 535.

In S5535, the sub CPU 301 executes lamp request generation processing.
In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 causes the process to proceed to S553.
Move to 6.

In S5536, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product request generation process. In this process, a character request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 165).

[7-5-2. Effect pattern decision processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 167, details of the effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 at S5531 during the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166) will be described. Figure 167
4 is a flowchart showing an example of effect pattern determination processing in a fifth pachinko gaming machine.

At S5531-1, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "normal symbol variation pattern command".

When it is determined in S5531-1 that it is a "normal symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-2. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a "normal pattern variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-3.

At S5531-2, the sub CPU 301 performs a process for determining the variation effect of the identification symbol for effect. This "variation effect of the identification pattern for effect" is the "long open" of the normal electric accessory 5146.
As an effect suggesting that is determined, the effect is to variably display the effect identification pattern in a predetermined variation mode. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-3, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is the "open pattern command for normal electric accessory corresponding to long open".

The "open pattern command for normal electric accessories corresponding to long opening" is, as described above, the normal symbol per selection symbol command "fz1" in the normal game state, the normal symbol in the A short game state or the C short game state. It refers to the selection symbol commands "fz1" and "fz2" at the time of winning.

If it is determined in S5531-3 that it is the "open pattern command for normal electric accessories corresponding to long opening", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-4. on the other hand,
If it is determined not to be the "open pattern command for normal electric accessories corresponding to long open", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-5.

At S5531-4, the sub CPU 301 performs a start opening effect determination process. This "start opening effect" means that the "long opening" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed, and the start opening 51
This is an effect for notifying that entry of a game ball into 40 is possible. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and changes the process to the effect mode determination process (
166).

At S5531-5, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command".

When it is determined in S5531-5 that it is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-6. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-11.

At S5531-6, the sub CPU 301 performs special effect determination processing. This "special effect" is a variable display of special symbols, a background effect performed during the small win game state, and is a common effect performed over a plurality of times of the small win game state. This special effect includes a "bonus time basic effect" and a "bonus time special effect".
1 refers to the game state, determines the "bonus time basic effect" when it is in the normal game state or the C time saving game state, and determines the "bonus time special effect" when it is in the A time saving game state.
to decide. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-7, the sub CPU 301 performs a bonus time variation effect determination process for determining a special symbol variation effect in the bonus time, which will be described later, according to the type of the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

In this bonus time variation effect determination process, when it is a "time reduction per variation pattern command", the effect pattern for performing the "rewind effect" is determined so as to correspond to the effect of "remarks" in FIG. When it is the ``variation pattern command of the big win'', the production pattern for performing the ``full rotation reach'' or the ``reach for the notification of the big win'' is determined, and when it is the ``variation pattern command of the small win'', the ``shortening variation'' or the ``big win'' is determined. Decide the effect pattern for performing "notification reach". After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

At S5531-8, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "small hit start display command".

If it is determined that it is a "small hit start display command" in S5531-8, sub C
PU 301 shifts the process to S5531-9. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "small hit start display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-10.

At S5531-9, the sub CPU 301 performs special effect determination processing. This process is the same as S5531-6 above, and determines the "bonus time basic effect" when in the normal game state or the C time saving game state, and determines the "bonus time specialized effect" when in the A time saving game state. do. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

At S5531-10, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is the "big hit start display command".

When it is determined in S5531-10 that it is the "big hit start display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-11. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "big hit start display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-12.

In S5531-11, the sub CPU 301 performs bonus time special effect determination processing for determining the "bonus time special effect". After completing this process, the sub CPU 301
ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

At S5531-12, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "game state specifying command".

If it is determined that it is a "game state designation command" in S5531-12, sub C
PU 301 shifts the process to S5531-13. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be the "game state designation command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-14.

At S5531-13, the sub CPU 301 performs game state setting processing for setting the game state according to the type of the game state designation command. Specifically, if it is a game state designation command that indicates the normal game state, the normal game state data is set in the state storage area of the work RAM 303, and if it is a game state designation command that indicates the A time saving game state, A time saving game The state data is set in the state storage area of the work RAM 303, and if it is a game state designation command indicating the C time saving game state, the C time saving game state data is set in the state storage area of the work RAM 303. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

At S5531-14, the sub CPU 301 also determines an effect pattern according to various commands transmitted from the main CPU 201. FIG. After that, the sub CPU 301
After executing the process of S5084, the effect pattern determination process is terminated, and the process is returned to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

The above-mentioned "bonus time basic effect or bonus time special effect (special effect)", "
Details of the "rewind effect" and the "start opening effect" will be described later with reference to FIG.

[7-6. Game state transition diagram]
Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the game state transition in the fifth pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 168 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of game states in the fifth pachinko game machine.

As described above, in the present embodiment, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is the normal game mode in the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state.

Therefore, in the normal game state, when the game ball enters the first passage port 5126A, the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit determination) determines "normal symbol hit", and the normal electric role Selected symbol command f at normal symbol hit corresponding to "long open" of object 5146
When z1 is determined (approximately 1/420.3 probability), entry of the game ball into the starting port 5140 becomes possible.

When the game ball enters the starting port 5140, the starting information of the special symbol is extracted. And, in this embodiment, since the number of reserved special symbols is four, when five or more game balls enter the starting port 5140, the special symbol determination area (0) of the determination, four special symbols Start information is stored in the symbol start storage areas (1) to (4), and a special symbol lottery (special symbol hit determination) is performed five times in total.

When a special symbol lottery (special symbol win determination) is determined to be a "big win" with a first probability (approximately 1/319 probability), the game state shifts to a big win game state. In the present embodiment, as described above, 1500 game balls can be put out in the jackpot game state of 10 rounds, and 600 game balls can be put out in the jackpot game state of 4 rounds. is configured to

The second probability (probability of about 1/1.64) by special design lottery (hit judgment of special design)
When it is determined as a "small hit" in , it shifts to a small win game state. In this embodiment, as described above, 150 game balls are configured to be able to be paid out in the small winning game state. It should be noted that the game state does not shift with the shift to the small winning game state as a trigger.

The third probability (approximately 1/2.59 probability) by special design lottery (hit judgment of special design)
When it is determined as "time saving hit", it shifts to C time saving game state.

After shifting to the jackpot game state, it shifts to the A time-saving game state. This A time-saving game state is set to the establishment of either condition of "end of 10 times of time-saving times (see FIG. 148)" or "transition to jackpot game state" as a termination condition of A time-saving game state. ing.

In the C time saving game state, as a condition for ending the C time saving game state, "end of the time saving number of times (Fig. 148
(see)” and “transition to jackpot game state” are set to be met.

Further, in the present embodiment, the "number of times of time saving" is counted when the variable display of the special symbols is started, but may be performed when the variable display of the special symbols is finished.

In the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state, the normal electric accessory 5146 is “long opened” (see FIG. 152), so that the game ball can be entered into the start port 5140, and the special symbol is displayed again. can receive a lottery.

In this embodiment, the loss is not determined in the special symbol lottery, and the starting port 5140
When a game ball hits, one of "big hit", "minor hit" or "time saving hit" is determined. Then, if a "big win" or "minor win" is determined, an opportunity to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (hereinafter referred to as "bonus time") is provided, and if a "time-saving win" is determined, the C time-saving game state is entered. After shifting, the game ball is entered into the starting port 5140 again, and the "bonus time" can be further extended. It should be noted that, as described above, it may be configured such that "losing" is determined with a relatively low probability in the lottery for special symbols.

By the way, the A time saving game state is set so that the number of times of time saving is increased compared to the C time saving game state. Therefore, when "time saving hit" is determined by special pattern lottery during A time saving game state, it is shifted from A time saving game state during stay to C time saving game state according to the determination of the "time saving win". Then, there is a possibility that the number of times of time saving that can be executed may decrease, and as a result, it may be disadvantageous to the player.

Therefore, in the fifth pachinko game machine, even if the "time saving hit" is determined by the special symbol lottery during the A time saving game state, the process of invalidating the determination of the "time saving hit" (Fig. 15
8 processing of S5075 shown in), it is controlled not to shift from the A time-saving game state to the C time-saving game state. Therefore, even if "time saving win" is determined by lottery of special symbols during the A time saving game state, the A time saving game state being executed can be continued.

In addition, when the starting information for determining the "time saving hit" after the end of the A time saving game state remains in the pending storage and stored, C based on the starting information for determining this "time saving hit" Since it is possible to shift to the time-saving game state, even if it shifts to the A time-saving game state, the possibility of continuing the time-saving game state is maintained.

In addition, if "time saving hit" is determined by lottery of special symbols during C time saving game state,
Like the first pachinko game machine, it is ideal to configure the new C time-saving game state to be executed repeatedly, but in order to simplify the control process, the C time-saving game state It may be configured so as to invalidate the determination of the time saving per C.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko game machine, as the time saving game state, A time saving game state and C
It has two time-saving game states, a time-saving game state, but like the first pachinko game machine, A
Three time-saving game states, ie, time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state may be provided.

[7-7. Explanation of bonus time]
As described above, a “bonus time” is provided when a game ball enters the starting port 5140 . The mechanism of this "bonus time" will be explained. FIG. 169 shows the fifth
It is an example of an explanatory diagram for explaining the bonus time in the pachinko game machine.

Here, in FIG. 169, from the top, the "determination order" of the special symbol lottery, the "corresponding" indicating the special symbol determination area (0), and the special symbol start storage area (1) to (4) ""reservedmemory" is illustrated, and the starting information stored in "this" and "reserved memory" is illustrated with "circles". In addition, in the "circle" of the start information, "small" when the start information determines a small hit,
When the start information indicates that the time-saving hit is determined, "Time" is indicated, and when the start information indicates the big hit, "Large" is indicated.

In FIG. 169(a), the normal electric accessory 5146 is “long opened”, and the starting port 5140
This is an example when 5 or more game balls enter the ball and it is determined as a "small hit" in all special symbol lotteries.

As shown in FIG. 169(a), when all the special symbol lotteries result in a "small win", a total of 5 small win games are played and the bonus time is over. Figure 16
In the case shown in 9(a), it is possible to pay out 600 game balls (minor winning game×5 times=150×5=600).

In FIG. 169(b), the “long opening” of the ordinary electric accessory 5146 is performed, and the starting port 5140
This is an example after when five or more game balls enter the ball and the lottery for the fifth special symbol is determined as "time saving win".

As shown in FIG. 169(b), in the lottery of the 1st to 4th special symbols, it is determined as "small hit", and the small hit game is performed, and in the lottery of the 5th special symbol, " Time-saving win" is determined, and after the variable display of the special symbol is finished, the state is shifted to the C time-saving game state.

When shifting to the C time-saving game state, the normal electric accessory 5146 is “long opened” with the passage of the game ball through the second passage port 5126B as a trigger, and the game ball is entered into the start port 5140 again. becomes possible.

After the 5th special design lottery, "corresponding" and "reserved memory 1 to 4" are default data (
(Blank data) (all the start information of "relevant" and "reserved memory 1 to 4" are digested), so when 5 or more game balls enter the start port 5140, C Triggered by the time-saving gaming state, five pieces of starting information are newly stored in "relevant" and "reserved storage".

As shown in FIG. 169(b), in the lottery of the 6th and 7th special symbols, it is determined as "small hit", and the small winning game is played, and in the lottery of the 8th special symbol, again"
Time-saving win" is determined, and after the variable display of the special symbol is finished, the state is shifted to the C time-saving game state.

When shifting to the C time-saving game state, the normal electric accessory 5146 is “long opened” with the passage of the game ball through the second passage port 5126B as a trigger, and the game ball is entered into the start port 5140 again. becomes possible.

After the lottery for the 8th special symbol, the start information is already stored in "relevant" and "reserved memory 1", and "reserved memory 2 to 4" are default data (blank data). , By entering three or more game balls into the starting port 5140, with the C time-saving gaming state as a trigger, three pieces of starting information are newly stored in "holding memories 2 to 4".

After that, in the lottery for the ninth to thirteenth special symbols, it is determined as "small win", the small win game is played, and the bonus time ends.

In the case shown in FIG. 169(b), it is possible to pay out 1650 game balls of small winning game×11 times=150×11=1650.

In FIG. 169(c), the “long opening” of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed, and the starting port 5140
This is an example after when five or more game balls enter the ball and the lottery for the fifth special symbol is determined as a "big hit".

As shown in FIG. 169 (c), in the lottery of the 1st to 4th special symbols, it is determined as "small hit", and the small hit game is performed, and in the lottery of the 5th special symbol, " big hit
is determined, and after the jackpot game state is completed, the state is shifted to the A time saving game state.

As described above, in the A time saving game state, the number of time saving times of 10 times is set (see FIG. 148 etc.),
The A time-saving game state can be continued until the lottery of the special symbols is performed 10 times. In the A time-saving gaming state, when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, the normal electric accessory 5146 is “long opened”, and the game ball can enter the start port 5140 again. be possible.

Then, when a ``big win'' is determined in the lottery of the fifth special pattern, and after the jackpot game state is completed, the state is shifted to the A time saving game state, the 6th to 15th special pattern lotteries are conducted ten times in the A time saving game state. will do.

Here, in the lottery of the 9th and 13th special symbols in the A time saving game state, it is determined as "time saving win". However, as described above, even if the "time saving hit" is determined by the special symbol lottery during the A time saving game state, the process of invalidating the determination of the "time saving hit" (
By executing the process of S5075 shown in FIG. 158), the A time saving game state can be continuously executed without shifting from the A time saving game state to the C time saving game state.

The lottery of the 16th to 19th special symbols is based on the starting information (hereinafter also referred to as "remaining reservation information") stored in "reservation memory 1 to 4" after the end of the A time-saving game state. It is a lottery of patterns.

In the lottery of the 19th special design based on the remaining reservation information, it is determined as "time saving hit". Since this 19th special symbol lottery is performed in the normal game state after the A time-saving game state is completed, after the "time-saving hit" is determined, C after the variable display of the special symbol is ended. It will shift to the time saving game state. Therefore, even if the A time-saving gaming state ends, the time-saving gaming state can be continued again based on the remaining hold information, and A
It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game due to the termination of the time-saving game state.

When shifting to the C time-saving game state, the normal electric accessory 5146 is “long opened” with the passage of the game ball through the second passage port 5126B as a trigger, and the game ball is entered into the start port 5140 again. becomes possible.

After the lottery for the 19th special symbol, "relevant" and "reserved memory 1 to 4" are default data (blank data), so that 5 or more game balls enter the start port 5140. Therefore, with the C time-saving gaming state as a trigger, five pieces of starting information are newly stored in "relevant" and "reserved storage".

After that, in the lottery for the 20th to 24th special symbols, it is determined as a "small win", the small win game is played, and the bonus time ends.

In the case shown in FIG. 169(c), the "jackpot" in the fifth special symbol lottery is "1".
0R", the total "4500 pieces" obtained by adding the big hit game (10R) x 1 time = 1500 x 1 = "1500 pieces" and the small winning game x 20 times = 150 x 20 = "3000 pieces" Game balls can be paid out. In addition, the "jackpot" in the 5th special design lottery is "
4R", the total of "3600 pieces" obtained by adding the jackpot game (4R) x 1 time = 600 x 1 = "600 pieces" and the small winning game x 20 times = 150 x 20 = "3000 pieces" Game balls can be paid out.

As described above, in the fifth pachinko game machine, the "bonus time" can be extended if the "time saving win" is determined by the lottery of the special symbols. As a result, the end time of the "bonus time" can be made variable, allowing the player to enjoy how long the bonus time will continue, thereby enhancing the interest in the game. Incidentally, the end condition of the bonus time is also that "small wins are determined five times in a row in the special symbol lottery".

[7-8. Performance of bonus time]
Next, the effect of "bonus time" will be described. FIG. 170 is an example of a display image for explaining the effect of bonus time in the fifth pachinko game machine.

(Production when the time is reduced during the bonus time)
(a-1) to (d-1) in the left column of FIG. 170 are "time reduction per" during bonus time
This is an example of a display image for explaining the effect when it becomes 1 to 6 in FIG.
It corresponds to the lottery of the second special symbol.

FIG. 170(a-1) is an example of the display image of the "bonus time basic effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and the lottery for the 1st to 4th special symbols in FIG. 169(b) described above. corresponds to

"Bonus time basic effect" is a effect commonly performed during variable display of special symbols in the normal game state or the C time saving game state and in the small winning game state. More specifically, the "bonus time basic effect" receives a game state designation command indicating the normal game state or the C time saving game state, and when it is the normal game state or the C time saving game state, a special symbol variation pattern command and when a small hit start display command is received in the normal game state or the C time reduction game state.

As shown in FIG. 170(a-1), as the "bonus time basic effect", "number of remaining rounds" is displayed in the upper left part of the display area, and "bonus time" is displayed in the upper central part of the display area. , "RIGHT HITTING" is displayed in the upper right part of the display area in order to notify the regular game mode. Further, a predetermined character image is displayed in the central portion of the display area, and "total number of rounds" and "acquired points" are displayed in the lower right portion of the display area.

Here, the ``remaining number of rounds'' is displayed by subtracting 1R from 5R corresponding to the end condition of the bonus time being ``5 consecutive small hits in the lottery of special symbols''. It is. In addition, the "total number of rounds" indicates the sum of the cumulative number of times controlled in the small winning game state and the total number of rounds executed in the big winning game state. The “acquired points” indicates the cumulative number of game balls paid out each time the game balls enter the big winning hole 5131 .

FIG. 170(b-1) is an example of the display image of the "rewind effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7 when the time saving hit is determined by the special symbol lottery, and FIG. 169 described above.
This corresponds to the lottery for the fifth special symbol in (b).

"Rewind effect" is a effect that is performed when a variable pattern command of a special symbol for time saving is received (see FIG. 149), the bonus time basic effect is rewound, and the small winning game state may continue further. It is a production that suggests that there is. As shown in FIG. 170(b-1), as the rewind effect, a display as if the animation of the previous bonus time basic effect is rewound.

FIG. 170(c-1) is an example of a display image of "start opening effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7 after the rewinding effect shown in FIG. 170(b-1) is performed. .

The “start opening effect” is an effect for notifying that entry of a game ball into the start hole 5140 is enabled. Specifically, the “start opening effect” is when the variable display of the special symbol for the time saving per is completed and the game state designation command indicating the C time saving game state is received, or when the game ball is the second passage opening 5126B is passed, and it is the production|presentation performed when the selection pattern command is received at the time of normal design per which long opening of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed. As shown in FIG. 170(c-1), as the starting hole opening effect, a display of "Aim for the chance starting hole!" It should be noted that "Right shot" is still displayed in the upper right part of the display area.

FIG. 170(d-1) is an example of the display image of the "bonus time basic effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7 when the game ball enters the start hole 5140 again. This corresponds to the 6th special symbol lottery of 169(b).

As shown in FIG. 170 (d-1), after the "starting mouth open effect", the game ball is again the starting mouth 5
When the ball hits 140, the "bonus time basic effect" is performed again. In this "bonus time basic effect", the "number of remaining rounds" is increased (rewound), and the character image is displayed to notify that the bonus time has been extended.

In this way, it is possible to notify that the bonus time has been extended by the "rewind effect" when the time saving hit is determined, and the player is entertained to see how long the bonus time will continue, thereby making the game more enjoyable. It is possible to improve the interest of

(Production when a big hit is achieved during the bonus time)
(a-2) to (d-2) in the right column of FIG. 170 are examples of display images for explaining effects when a "jackpot" is achieved during the bonus time. 1 to 16
It corresponds to the lottery of the second special symbol.

FIG. 170(a-2) is an example of the display image of the "bonus time basic effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and the lottery for the 1st to 4th special symbols in FIG. 169(c) described above. corresponds to "Number of remaining rounds" and "Bonus time" shown in Fig. 170 (a-2)
, “Right shot”, “Total number of rounds” and “Acquired points” are shown in FIG. 170(a).
-1).

FIG. 170(b-2) shows the display device 7 when a big hit is determined by a lottery of special symbols.
It is an example of the display image of "jackpot notification reach" displayed in the display area of FIG.
This corresponds to the 5th special symbol lottery of 69(c).

"Big hit notification reach" is an effect performed when a variable pattern command for a special big win pattern is received (see Fig. 149), and is an effect of whether or not three decorative patterns consisting of the characters "invincible" are aligned. is. As shown in FIG. 170(b-2), when the game is a big win, as a result of the effect of the big win notification reach, the three decoration symbols "Invincible", "Invincible" and "Invincible" are stop-displayed together. When the game is not a big hit, decorative patterns such as "invincible", "x", and "invincible" are stopped and displayed as a result of the ready-to-win effect for informing the big hit.

FIG. 170(c-2) is an example of the display image of the "bonus time special effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and the sixth to fifteenth special symbols in FIG. 169(c) described above. It corresponds to lottery.

"Bonus time specialized performance" is a performance performed in common during the variable display of special symbols in the big winning game state, the time saving game state A, and the small winning game state in the time saving game state A. More specifically, the "bonus time special effect" receives a game state designation command indicating the A time-saving game state when a jackpot start display command is received, and when it is in the A time-saving game state, a special symbol is displayed. It is an effect performed when a variation pattern command is received and when a small hit start display command is received in the case of the A time saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 170(c-2), as the "bonus time special effect", the "invincible mode" is displayed in the center of the display area, and the regular game mode is displayed in the upper right part of the display area. "Right-handed" is displayed on . Then, in the lower right part of the display area, the "total number of rounds" and "acquired points" are displayed following the "bonus time basic effect". this"
In "total number of rounds", the sum of the cumulative number of times controlled in the small winning game state and the total number of rounds executed in the big winning game state are displayed, and in "acquired points", the small winning game state and The cumulative payout number of game balls paid out each time a game ball enters the big winning opening 5131 in the jackpot game state is displayed.

Figure 170 (d-2), when the A time-saving gaming state is completed and there are four remaining hold information,
This is an example of the display image of "bonus time basic effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and corresponds to the lottery for the 16th special symbol in FIG. 169(c) described above.

As shown in FIG. 170(d-2), in the "bonus time basic effect" after the bonus time special effect ends, the "number of remaining rounds" following the bonus time special effect,
The "total number of rounds" and "acquired points" are continuously displayed, and the character image is displayed to notify that the bonus time has been restarted.

In addition, "number of remaining rounds" is displayed as "4R" corresponding to four remaining pending information, and "3R" is displayed if there are three remaining pending information after the end of the A time-saving gaming state, If there are two remaining hold information after the end of the A time saving game state, "2R" is displayed, and if there is one remaining hold information after the end of the A time saving game state, "1R" is displayed, A time saving game state If there is no remaining pending information after the end of, "End" will be displayed.

In this way, the "bonus time special effect" performed during the big win and during the A short-time gaming state makes it possible to direct the guarantee period in which the bonus time does not end, so that the bonus time can be enjoyed with peace of mind, and further enhanced. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Thus, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, in the normal game state, the main game is not the "special symbol game" consisting of the lottery of special symbols, but the "ordinary symbol game" composed of the lottery of normal symbols. The special pattern lottery can be treated as a ``bonus time'' as an opportunity to give out a predetermined number of game balls without determining ``losing'' in the pattern lottery, thus providing unprecedented new playability. can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, if "time saving hit" is determined by lottery of special symbols, the game ball can enter the starting port 5140 again by shifting to the time saving game state (C time saving game state), and the bonus time is extended. can be done. As a result, it is possible to make the end time of the bonus time variable, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko game machine, an effect is performed when a small winning is determined by a lottery of special symbols and a shortening variation of the special symbols is performed, and when it is controlled to a small winning game state. The production is a common "special production (bonus time basic production or bonus time special production)", and the production over continuous shortening fluctuation and small winning game state is also a common "special production (bonus time basic production or bonus time Specialized effect)”, it is possible to perform a plurality of small winning game states as one bonus time.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko game machine, "time saving hit" is determined by lottery of special symbols,
When the special symbols are variably displayed, the bonus time basic performance is rewound, and a ``rewind performance'' suggesting the possibility that the small winning game state will continue is performed.
As a result, even when the special symbols are variably displayed, the interest in the game can be improved.

<Modified Example of the Fifth Pachinko Machine>
Next, a modification of the embodiment of the fifth pachinko game machine will be described.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, as a bonus time effect, as shown in FIG. 170, etc., a bonus time basic effect is rolled as a "rewind effect" when variable display of special symbols for time saving is performed. Returning, in the next bonus time basic effect, it is configured to perform an effect in which the "number of remaining rounds" is increased (rewound), but in the basic bonus time effect, the "number of remaining rounds" is not displayed, Display the "maximum number of rounds" as the number of times that the small winning game state can be executed, and add the maximum number of rounds as the "maximum number of rounds additional effect" when the variable display of the special pattern for the time saving is performed. It may be configured to perform such a production.

In addition, as a bonus time basic effect, a battle effect is performed between ally characters and enemy characters. The HP of the ally character is set to 5 points, the enemy character attacks the ally character and subtracts 1 HP every time the game is controlled to the small win game state, and the ally character is added when the variable display of the special pattern for the time-saving win is performed. It may be constructed such that an effect is performed such that the HP of the character is recovered.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, as the bonus time special effect, both the bonus time basic effect and the bonus time special effect can be executed.
The bonus time special effects may be combined with the bonus time basic effects. In this case, in the jackpot game state, the "jackpot middle performance" for the jackpot game state can be executed, and in the A time reduction game state, the "number of remaining rounds" of the bonus time basic performance is set to the time reduction of the A time reduction game state. The number of rounds may be added, or a display such as "HOLD" or "STOP" may be displayed in the "number of remaining rounds".

In the fifth pachinko game machine, as shown in FIG. 148, it is configured to determine one time as the number of times of time saving in the case of a time saving hit, but it may be configured to determine two or more times of time saving. . Furthermore, a plurality of types of special symbols (a plurality of types of selection symbol commands) corresponding to time saving hits may be provided, and a plurality of types of times of time saving may be determined. In particular, in the present embodiment, by setting a large number of time-saving times, it is possible to shift the time-saving gaming state to a larger number of small winning game states, and to make it possible to pay out a large number of game balls.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko game machine, it is a so-called type 1 pachinko game machine,
Like the third pachinko game machine, it may be configured as a pachinko game machine called a one-type two-type mixed machine. In the fifth pachinko game machine, when configured as a one-type two-type mixed machine,
A specific area and a non-specific area may be provided inside the big winning opening 5131 (or another big winning opening to be added), and the game ball may pass through the specific area so as to control the jackpot game state. .

(others)
The fifth pachinko game machine described above can apply each other's techniques between the respective embodiments, including modifications. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Also, the effects described in the fifth pachinko game machine are merely enumerations of the most suitable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. not something.

Furthermore, the above [4. Extension example] can also be applied to the fifth pachinko game machine as long as it does not cause any discrepancies in its game characteristics and control.

[8. Sixth pachinko machine]
Next, the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. The sixth pachinko machine is a so-called type 1 type pachinko machine capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel in the same manner as the second pachinko machine. However, the sixth pachinko gaming machine differs from the second pachinko gaming machine in terms of the basic specifications of the game performance, and along with this, some of the configurations of various members arranged in the game area are different.

Hereinafter, in describing the embodiment of the sixth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers are assigned to the same components as in the first pachinko game machine, and detailed descriptions of the configurations and processes will be omitted. .

The sixth pachinko machine is a "simultaneous variation machine" capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel. It may be a "prioritized variable machine" in which any one of the starting conditions is preferentially satisfied, or a "sequential variable machine" in which the starting conditions are satisfied in order of winning, including the first and second starting openings. may be

[8-1. Appearance configuration]
With reference to FIG. 171, the external configuration of the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 171 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the sixth pachinko gaming machine when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the forward direction.

As shown in FIG. 171, the external configuration of the sixth pachinko game machine is different from the first pachinko game machine in that the effect button device 6310 (first effect operation unit 6311) provided on the upper tray 51
configuration is different.

The performance button device 6310 is an operating device that allows the player to operate the performance. In particular, the effect button device 6310 of the sixth pachinko game machine is configured such that its operation mode can be changed, and the effect function can be improved by changing the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 .

Below, the change of the operation mode of the production|presentation button apparatus 6310 is demonstrated.

[8-2. Manner of operation of production button device]
FIG. 172 is an example of a conceptual diagram showing changes in the operation mode of the effect button device of the sixth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 172(a) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the first operation mode as the initial operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(a), the first operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is an operation mode in which the first effect operation section 6311 operable by the player is positioned on the upper surface side. When the effect button device 6310 is in the first operation mode, the player can press the first effect operation section 6311 .

FIG. 172(b) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the second operation mode changed from the first operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(b), in the second operation mode of the effect button device 6310, the operation drive unit 6313 is rotated by about 45 degrees toward the protective glass 43 by a drive device such as a motor, and the player can The operable second effect operation section 6312 is positioned on the front side. When the effect button device 6310 is in the second operation mode, the player presses the second effect operation section 6312
can be operated by pressing diagonally.

FIG. 172(c) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the third operation mode changed from the second operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(c), in the third operation mode of the effect button device 6310, the operation driving portion 6313 rotates about 90 degrees toward the protective glass 43 side, and the second effect operation portion 6312 rotates toward the upper surface side. It is an operation mode located at . When the effect button device 6310 is in the third operation mode, it is possible for the player to press the second effect operation section 6312 directly downward.

FIG. 172(d) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the fourth operation mode changed from the third operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(d), the fourth operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is an operation mode in which the second effect operation section 6312 protrudes upward from the operation drive section 6313. As shown in FIG. When the effect button device 6310 is in the fourth operation mode, it is possible for the player to press down the second effect operation section 6312 projecting upward.

FIG. 172(e) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the fifth operation mode changed from the fourth operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(e), in the fifth operation mode of the effect button device 6310, the operation driving part 6313 rotates up to about 120 degrees toward the protective glass 43 side, and the second effect operation part 6312 protrudes. is operated in such a manner that it falls backward. When the effect button device 6310 is in the fifth operation mode, it is possible to pull the second effect operation part 6312 that has fallen backward to the front side.

Furthermore, the production button device 6310 incorporates a vibration device (not shown), and the production button device 6310 is configured to vibrate. Therefore, in more detail, the effect mode of the effect button device 6310 can be configured by combining the first to fifth operation modes and the vibration mode.

In addition, the operation mode of the production button device 6310 is not limited to the above-described operation mode and the number of changes thereof. For example, the effect button device 6310 may be an operation mode in which it moves back and forth, left and right, or an operation mode in which it only protrudes upward. In addition, production button device 6310
may not vibrate without incorporating a vibrating device.

[8-3. Game board unit]
With reference to FIG. 173, the game board unit 6010 included in the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 6010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 173 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 6010 provided in the sixth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 6010 includes a game panel 6100, and the game panel 6
Various members are arranged in 100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side surface of the game panel 6100 in which the shot game ball can roll and flow.

As shown in FIG. 173, the game board unit 6010 provided in the sixth pachinko game machine mainly has a ball passage 6108, a deceleration wall portion 6109, and a game area 105 compared to the first pachinko game machine. The center accessory 6115 and the first start port (middle) 6120
A, a first starting port (right) 6120B, a second starting port 6140, a passage gate 6126,
The configuration and arrangement of the normal electric accessory unit 6145, the big winning accessory unit 6130, and the small winning accessory unit 6150 are different. Each configuration and arrangement thereof will be described below.

(ball passage)
The ball passage 6108 is arranged in the right region 107 and is composed of a downwardly inclined flat plate portion, and a game ball can roll on the plate portion. The plate portion of the ball passage 6108 is made of transparent resin, and the contact surface on which the game ball rolls is textured. By embossing the ball passage 6108, it is possible to decelerate the rolling game ball. In addition, by embossing the transparent resin, the light emitted from the LED or the like is diffusely reflected and decorated. You can also increase your sexuality. Note that the ball passage 6108 may be formed of a non-translucent member instead of being formed of a transparent resin.

(Deceleration wall)
The deceleration wall portion 6109 is arranged above the ball passage 6108 and is a surface processed portion in which the surface of the game panel 6100 is textured. A deceleration wall portion 6109 processed on the surface of the game panel 6100 can decelerate a rolling game ball. In addition, by configuring the game panel 6100 with transparent resin, light is emitted from an LED or the like. Light is diffusely reflected, and decorativeness can be enhanced.

(Center role)
The center accessory 6115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 6100, and has an arc-shaped center rail 116 above. The game balls shot toward the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116. - 特許庁

The center accessory 6115 has a warp entrance 117, a stage 118, and a chance entrance 119 as in the first pachinko machine. is also provided.

The effect section 6116 is arranged on the front side of the display area of the display device 7, and the display device 7
, and an upper display area 7a is formed as a display area of the display device 7 inside the effect partitioning section 6116. As shown in FIG.

Further, in the display area of the display device 7, while the special symbols are variably displayed in the same manner as in the first pachinko game machine, the special symbols are variably displayed with the identification symbols for performance (for example, decorative symbols). Display the result of the hit judgment process of the special pattern, the effect image according to the result of the hit judgment process of the special symbol,
A performance image during the jackpot game state, a demonstration performance image, a pending image showing a pending state of variable display of special symbols, and the like are displayed.

(First start port)
The first starting port (middle) 6120A is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and it is possible to enter a game ball hit to the left (difficult or impossible to enter a game ball hit to the right). It's becoming When the game ball enters the first starting port (middle) 6120A, the first starting port switch 6121A (
A game ball is detected by (see FIG. 174, which will be described later).

The first starting port (right) 6120B is arranged in the right region 107 and is provided in a normal electric accessory unit 6145, which will be described later. It is possible to enter a game ball that has been hit (left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to enter). When the game ball enters the first starting port (right) 6120B, the game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 6121B.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first starting port (middle) 6120A and the first starting port (right) 6120B
are collectively referred to as “first start ports 6120A and 6120B”, and the first start port switch 61
21A and the first starter switch 6121B are collectively referred to as "first starter switch 6121A,
6121B”.

First starting ports 6120A, 6120B are operated by first starting ports switches 6121A, 6121B.
When the entry (passage) of the game ball to is detected, the start information of the first special pattern (random number for judging the big hit, random number for pattern, random number for selection of first effect, random number for selection of second effect, etc. ) is extracted, and the extracted starting information of the first special symbol is reserved up to the "first reserved number (for example, 4 pieces)". The reserved starting information of the first special symbol is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the starting condition of the special symbol is satisfied. Also, when the game balls enter the first starting ports 6120A and 6120B, the first number of prize balls (for example, three) of game balls are paid out. However, the first starting port 6120A
, 6120B are not limited to the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the 6120B.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 6140 is the right side area 107 and is a normal electric accessory unit 614 described later.
It is arranged below (downstream side) 5, and it is possible to enter a game ball hit to the right (it is difficult or impossible to enter a game ball hit to the left). When the game ball enters the second starting port 6140, the game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 6141 (see FIG. 174 described later).

In addition, in this embodiment, the second starting port 6140 is a normal electric accessory unit 6145
When the first starting port (right) 6120B is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down the right region 107 is placed on the downstream side of the (first starting port (right) 6120B), the second starting port Before reaching 6140, the ball enters the first starting hole (right) 6120B provided on the upstream side, making it difficult to enter the second starting hole 6140. This is the same when the first starting port (right) 6120B is in a time-saving gaming state where it is likely to be in an open state.

When the entry ball (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 6140 is detected by the second starting port switch 6141, the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the starting information of the extracted second special symbol (
Jackpot judgment random number, symbol random number, first effect selection random number, second effect selection random number, etc.) up to "second pending number (for example, 2)" which is less than the first pending number Reserved. The reserved starting information of the second special symbol is subjected to the hit determination process of the second special symbol when the starting condition of the special symbol is satisfied. Also, when the game ball enters the second starting port 6140, a second number of prize balls (for example, one) smaller than the first number of prize balls is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 6140 is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the second start port 6140, the number of holdings to hold the start information is smaller than when the game ball enters the first start ports 6120A and 6120B, and is paid out. The number of prize balls is also set to be small. However, the second starting port 61
40 and when the game ball enters the first start openings 6120A and 6120B, the same number of reserved balls and the same number of prize balls may be set. starting port 61
It may be set so that when a game ball enters 40, the number of reserved balls or the number of prize balls is large.

(passage gate)
The passage gate 6126 is located in the right area 107 and is the normal electric accessory unit 614 described later.
5, and arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through. In addition, the passage gate 6126 is provided with a passage gate switch 6127 (see FIG. 174 described later) for detecting passage of a game ball to the passage gate 6126 . Then, the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 6126 is directed toward the normal electric accessory unit 6145, and the right area 10
7 flows down.

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 6126 is detected by the passage gate switch 6127, the starting information of the normal design is extracted, and the starting information of the extracted normal design (random number for judgment per normal design, normal design design random numbers, etc.) are reserved up to a third reserved number (for example, four). The normally reserved starting information of the design is provided for the winning determination process of the normal design (lottery of the normal design) when the starting condition of the normal design is satisfied. Also, even if the game ball passes through the passage gate 6126, the game ball is not paid out. In addition, the game ball passes through the gate 6126
A predetermined number of game balls may be dispensed when passing through.

Also, the passage gate 6126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous actuating device. Here, the condition for transitioning to the jackpot game state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous actuating device are activated. Although the conditional device is operated, it is possible not to operate the accessory continuous operating device. Then, on the premise that the conditional device is operating, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 6126, that is, when the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 6127 (see FIG. 174 described later), the accessory continuous operation device is activated. You may make it operate|move and it may be made to shift to a jackpot game state.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 6145 is arranged in the right region 107 above (upstream side) the second starting port 6140 and below the passage gate 6126 so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through. are placed in The normal electric accessory unit 6145 is the first start port (
Right) 6120B, a first starter switch 6121B for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first starter (right) 6120B, and a normal electric accessory 6146 are integrated into a unit body.

The ordinary electric accessory 6146 includes a protruding plate-type shutter 6147 for ordinary electricity that can move back and forth, and a solenoid for ordinary electricity 6148 (Fig. 174 to be described later) that operates the shutter 6147 for ordinary electricity
See). The normal electric accessory 6146, that is, the normal electric shutter 6147, has an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easily entered into the first start port (right) 6120B, and the first start port (right).
6120B is constructed so that the state can be changed to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into 6120B.

The general electric shutter 6147 is gently inclined toward the second start port 6140 (for example, 5 to
10 degrees) flat roof. When the general electricity shutter 6147 is in the open mode, the general electricity shutter 6147 is buried in the game panel 6100 and the first start port (right) is opened.
6120B becomes an open state, and a game ball flowing down the right side area 107 or a game ball rolling on the general electric shutter 6147 can enter the first start opening (right) 6120B. When the general electric shutter 6147 is in the closed mode, the general electric shutter 6147 protrudes from the game panel 6100 to close the first starting port (right) 6120B, and the first starting port (right) 6120
It becomes impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into B. Also, when the shutter 6147 for general electricity is in the closed mode, the game ball rolling on the shutter 6147 for general electricity is pushed to the second starting port 61
40 or a small winning accessory unit 6150 to be described later. Instead of the general electric shutter 6147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, a blade member that is movable in the left-right direction, called a so-called electric chew, may be employed.

(jackpot accessory unit)
The jackpot accessory unit 6130 is arranged above the passage gate 6126 in the right area 107 . The big winning accessory unit 6130 integrates a first big winning slot 6131, a first big winning slot count switch 6132 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first big winning slot 6131, and a big winning accessory 6133. It is a unit body.

The first big prize winning port 6131 is a prize winning port that can shift from a closed state to an open state. In the present embodiment, the first big winning port 6131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination process is "big win" is derived. be. When the first big winning hole 6131 is controlled to the big winning game state, the game balls up to the first specified number (for example, 10) can enter, and the game balls enter this first big winning hole 6131. When the ball is thrown, the number of game balls (for example, 15) corresponding to the first big winning hole 6131 will be paid out.

The big-hit accessory 6133 includes a protruding plate-type big-hit shutter 6134 that can move back and forth, and a big-hit solenoid 6135 (described later in FIG. 1) that operates the big-hit shutter 6134.
74). The jackpot accessory 6133, that is, the jackpot shutter 6134 is the first
An open state in which a game ball can enter or is easily entered into the big winning opening 6131, and the first big winning opening 613
It is configured to be able to shift to a closed state in which entry of a game ball to 1 is impossible or difficult.

The jackpot shutter 6134 is gently inclined toward the passage gate 6126 (for example, 5
It is composed of a flat plate-shaped roof part that is 10 degrees. When the big-hit shutter 6134 is in the open mode, the big-hit shutter 6134 is buried in the game panel 6100 and the first big-winning opening 6131 is in an open state. A game ball rolling on is allowed to enter the first big winning hole 6131 . When the big-hit shutter 6134 is in the closed mode, the big-hit shutter 6134 closes the game panel 6
Projecting from 100, the first big winning hole 6131 is in a closed state, making it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the first big winning hole 6131.例文帳に追加Also, when the big win shutter 6134 is in the closed mode, it guides the game ball rolling on the big win shutter 6134 to the passage gate 6126 on the downstream side.

In the "jackpot gaming state" in which the jackpot accessory 6133 operates, the first jackpot 6131
State transitions from closed to open state are performed up to the maximum number of rounds. For one round, the maximum opening time in which the first big winning hole 6131 is open has passed, or the first specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the first big winning hole 6131 Then, the 1st big prize mouth 61
31 transitions from open to closed to complete one round. Then, when the maximum number of rounds ends, the jackpot game state ends. Since the number of game balls (for example, 15) corresponding to the first big winning hole 6131 is paid out every time the game ball enters the first big winning hole 6131, the jackpot game state is a large amount of game balls. is a game state in which it is possible to pay out

(small hit accessories unit)
The small hit accessory unit 6150 is located in the right area 107 above the second start port 6140,
Moreover, it is arranged below the normal electric accessory unit 6145 . Small hit accessories unit 61
50 is a unit body integrating a second big winning hole 6151, a second big winning hole count switch 6152 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 6151, and a small winning accessory 6153. .

The second big prize winning port 6151 is a prize winning port that can shift from a closed state to an open state. In the present embodiment, the second big winning hole 6151 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit" is derived. is. When the second big winning hole 6151 is controlled in the small winning game state, the game balls up to the second specified number (for example, 4) can enter, and the game balls enter the second big winning hole 6151. When the ball enters, the number of game balls (for example, 14) corresponding to the second big winning hole 6151 will be paid out.

The small-hit accessory unit 6150 is a projecting plate-type small-hit shutter 6 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction.
154, and a small-hit solenoid 6155 (see FIG. 174 described later) for operating the small-hit shutter 6154. The small-hit accessory unit 6150, that is, the small-hit shutter 6154, has an open state in which the game ball can enter the second big winning hole 6151 or is easy to enter, and a game ball cannot enter the second big winning hole 6151. It is configured to be transitionable to a possible or difficult closed state.

The small hit shutter 6154 is gently inclined toward the second starting port 6140 (for example, 5
It is composed of a flat plate-shaped roof part that is 10 degrees. When the small winning shutter 6154 is in the open mode, the small winning shutter 6154 is buried in the game panel 6100 and the second big winning opening 6151 is in an open state, and the game balls flowing down the right region 107 and the small winning A game ball rolling on the shutter 6154 can enter the second big winning hole 6151.例文帳に追加When the small winning shutter 6154 is in the closed mode, the small winning shutter 6154 is closed by the game panel 6
Projecting from 100, the second big winning hole 6151 is in a closed state, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second big winning hole 6151.例文帳に追加Moreover, when the shutter 6154 for small hits is in a closed mode, the game ball rolling on the shutter 6154 for small hits is guided to the second starting port 6140 on the downstream side.

In the "small winning game state" in which the small winning accessory unit 6150 operates, the state transition from the closed state to the open state of the second big winning opening 6151 is performed over a predetermined number of opening times.
For one small winning game state, a predetermined number of times of opening is completed, or the first big winning game state
The second specified number of game balls (eg, 4) less than the specified number (eg, 10) of the second
When the ball enters the big winning hole 6151, the second big winning hole 6151 is shifted from the open state to the closed state, and one small winning game state ends. Each time a game ball enters the second big winning hole 6151,
2nd big prize opening 61 less than the number of prize balls (for example, 15 pieces) corresponding to the first big prize opening 6131
Since the number of game balls corresponding to 51 (for example, 14) is paid out, the small hit game state is a game state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the second specified number of the small hit game state (for example, 4 pieces) is set less than the first specified number of the big hit game state (for example, 10 pieces), but the small hit game state The second specified number may be set equal to the first specified number in the big win game state, or may be set larger than the first specified number in the big win game state. However, it is desirable to set the second specified number of the small winning game state to within 10 pieces.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (for example, 14) corresponding to the second big prize opening 6151 is set smaller than the number of prize balls (for example, 15) corresponding to the first big prize opening 6131. , The number of prize balls corresponding to the second big prize opening 6151 may be the same as the number of prize balls corresponding to the first big prize opening 6131, or may be set larger than the number of prize balls corresponding to the first big prize opening 6131. You may However, it is desirable to set the number of prize balls corresponding to the second big prize opening 6151 within 15 pieces.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first big winning hole 6131 and the second big winning hole 6151 are provided separately, but this is not the only option. The big winning opening opened when executing the winning game control process may be the same big winning opening.

[8-4. electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 174, the control circuit of the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. Figure 1
74 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the sixth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 174, the sixth pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine,
It is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls games, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls effects according to the progress of games, a payout/fire control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 and the configuration of the sub-control circuit 300 are partially different from those of the first pachinko game machine. Each configuration and arrangement thereof will be described below.

[8-4-1. Main control circuit]
Compared with the first pachinko game machine, the sixth pachinko game machine has a general power solenoid 6148, a big win solenoid 6135, and a small win solenoid 61 connected to the main control circuit 200.
55, the configurations of the first starting opening switches 6121A and 6121B, the second starting opening switch 6141, the passage gate switch 6127, the first big winning opening count switch 6132, and the second big winning opening count switch 6152 are partially different.

(Solenoid for general electricity)
The general electric solenoid 6148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electric shutter 6147 . When the main CPU 201 energizes the general electric solenoid 6148 (it is ON), the general electric shutter 6147 moves backward to open the first start port (right) 6120B. is not performed (OFF), the general electric shutter 6147 is advanced forward to close the first start opening (right) 6120B.

(Solenoid for jackpot)
The big win solenoid 6135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the big win shutter 6134 . The jackpot solenoid 6135 is energized by the main CPU 201 (
ON), the big win shutter 6134 is retracted backward to open the first big winning opening 6131, and when the main CPU 201 does not energize (OFF), the big win shutter 6134 is moved forward. , and the first big prize winning port 6131 is closed.

(Solenoid for small hit)
The small winning solenoid 6155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the small winning shutter 6154 . The small hit solenoid 6155 is energized by the main CPU 201 (
ON), the small winning shutter 6154 is retracted backward to open the second big winning opening 6151, and the main CPU 201 does not energize (OFF), the small winning shutter 6154 advances forward to close the second big prize winning port 6151.例文帳に追加

(First start switch)
The first starting port switches 6121A and 6121B are penetrating proximity switches that detect entry of game balls into the first starting ports 6120A and 6120B. First starting switch 6121A
detects the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (middle) 6120A, and the first starting port switch 6121
B detects the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (right) 6120B.

(Second starting switch)
The second starter switch 6141 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects entry of a game ball into the second starter switch 6140 .

(Passing gate switch)
The passage gate switch 6127 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects entry of a game ball into the passage gate switch 6126 .

(1st big prize mouth count switch)
The first big winning hole count switch 6132 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 6131 . When the first big winning hole count switch 6132 detects that a game ball has entered the first big winning hole 6131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering the first big winning hole per round, and counts the number of game balls entering the first big winning hole. The payout/launch control circuit 400 is instructed to pay out the first prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) corresponding to 6131 .

(Second big prize mouth count switch)
The second big winning hole count switch 6152 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 6151 . When the second big winning hole count switch 6152 detects the entry of the game ball into the second big winning hole 6151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of the game balls entering per small winning game state, The payout/launch control circuit 400 is instructed to pay out the second prize balls (for example, 14 game balls) corresponding to the second big winning opening 6151 .

[8-4-2. sub control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 includes a sub-CPU 301, program ROM 302, work RAM 303, display control circuit 304, voice control circuit 305, LE
The D control circuit 306, the character control circuit 307 and the command input port 308 are common, but the difference is that the button control circuit 310 and the effect button device 6310 are further provided.

(Button control circuit 310)
Button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving effect button device 6310 . That is, the button control circuit 310 changes the operation mode of the production button device 6310,
It is a circuit for vibrating the production button device 6310. The button control circuit 310 drives the effect button device 6310 according to the drive command from the sub CPU 301 .

Further, the button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal relating to the player's operation detected by the effect button device 6310 . The button control circuit 310 outputs predetermined operation information to the sub CPU 301 when an operation signal is input from the production button device 6310 .

(Production button device)
Effect button device 6310, as shown in FIG.
In addition to having an effect operation unit 6312 and an operation drive unit 6313 as external components, as an internal configuration (not shown), a first operation unit detection switch for detecting the operation of the game ball with respect to the first effect operation unit 6311, a second effect A second operation portion detection switch for detecting operation of the game ball on the operation portion 6312, a third operation portion detection switch for detecting operation of the game ball on the operation drive portion 6313, and a rotation motor for rotating the operation drive portion 6313. , a button solenoid for projecting the second effect operation section 6312, and a vibration motor for vibrating the vibrating body.

[8-5. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 175-185, the basic specifications of the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. The sixth pachinko machine may be a pachinko machine with a setting function,
Descriptions related to the setting function are omitted below.

In the sixth pachinko game machine, a "normal game state" in which a low-probability game state and a non-short-time game state are controlled, a "high-probability short-time game state" in which a high-probability game state and a short-time game state are controlled, and a high-probability game A "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state" in which the state and non-time-saving gaming state are controlled, and a "low-probability short-time gaming state" in which the low-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state are controlled are prepared, and the main CPU 201 controls these It is possible to progress the game in one of the game states. However, the game state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this,
Any one of the normal game state, the high-probability short-time game state, the high-probability non-short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state may not be progressed.

In the present embodiment, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is the normal game mode in the high-probability short-time game state, the high-probability non-short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state. The sub CPU 301 determines the regular game mode (for example, whether to play right-handed or left-handed).
For example, control to display in the display area of the display device 7 is executed.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first start port and the second start port are collectively referred to as "start port".
The first special design and the second special design are also collectively referred to as "special design". The hit determination process of the first special symbol is also called "first special symbol lottery", and the hit determination process of the second special symbol is also called "second special symbol lottery". Collecting lottery and "lottery of special designs"
Also called

[8-5-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 175 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 175 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko game machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table for determining "big win", "minor win" or "losing" by lottery.

The special symbol hit judgment table includes the type of special symbol (type of starting port) and the variable probability flag (
Presence or absence of variable probability control) and the first start port 6120A, 6120B or the second start port 614
Random numbers for judging big hits extracted (acquired) based on the ball entering 0, and data used for judging special symbols for judging hits corresponding to "big hits", "small hits" or "losing". Value data (“big hit determination value data”, “small hit determination value data”, “losing determination value data”) are defined in association with each other. The total random number for judging a big hit is 6553.
is 6.

As shown in FIG. 175, when the game ball enters the first start openings 6120A and 6120B corresponding to the first special symbol, the main CPU 201, based on the probability variation flag and the special symbol big hit determination random value, A "big hit" or "losing" is determined as the lottery result of the first special symbol. Here, in the lottery of the first special symbol, when the probability variation flag is 1 (when probability variation control is executed), when the probability variation flag is 0 (when probability variation control is executed) than , the random number for judging a big hit is defined so as to determine a "big hit" with a high selection rate.

When the game ball enters the second starting port 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main CPU 2
01 determines "big win", "minor win" or "losing" as the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the variable probability flag and the random value for judging the big win of the special symbol. Here, in the lottery of the second special symbol, when the variable probability flag is 1, the random value for judging the big hit is defined so as to determine the "big hit" with a higher selection rate than when the variable probability flag is 0. However, the random number value for big hit determination is defined so that the selection rate for determining the "small hit" is the same selection rate regardless of the probability variation flag.

Incidentally, when the sixth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the big win probability and/or the small win probability should be higher at the high setting than at the low setting. In this case, for example, both the probability of a big win and the probability of a small win may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting, or the probability of a small win may be set constant regardless of the set value, and the probability of a big win may be set low. Alternatively, the probability of a big win may be constant regardless of the set value, and the probability of a small win may be higher at a high setting than at a low setting.

[8-5-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 176 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the special symbol determination table shown in FIG.
00 is stored in the main ROM 202 .

The special symbol determination table is a table for selecting "selected symbol information" and "symbol designation command" which determine the stop symbol of the special symbols to be stopped and displayed.

"Selected symbol information" is symbol information for designating a winning symbol determined according to the type of winning when the special symbol lottery result is a winning, and "symbol specifying command" is a variable special symbol. This is a command for designating the pattern to be displayed when the display is stopped.

In the special symbol determination table, the type of special symbol (type of starting port) and the first starting port 6120
A, 6120B or second starting port 6140 extracted (acquired) based on the random number of symbols of the special symbol, the hit-loss determination value data described above, and "selected symbol information" and " Design designation command” is defined in association with the command. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

As shown in FIG. 176, when a game ball enters the first starting openings 6120A and 6120B corresponding to the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines whether the special symbol Based on the symbol random number value, the selected symbol information "z1" is selected with a selection rate of 30/100, the selected symbol information "z2" is selected with a selection rate of 30/100, and 40/1.
The selected pattern information "z3" is selected with a selection rate of 00. When the selected symbol information "z1" is selected, "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command, and when the selected symbol information "z2" is selected, "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command, and the selected symbol information "zA1" is selected. When "z3" is selected, "zA3" is selected as the symbol designating command.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first starting openings 6120A and 6120B corresponding to the first special symbol, the main CPU 201, when the win/lose determination value data is the loss determination value data,
The selected symbol information "z4" is selected, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Also, when the game ball enters the second starting port 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main C
When the hit/lose determination value data is the big hit determination value data, the PU 201 selects the selected symbol information "
"z5" is selected, and "zA5" is selected as the design designation command.

Also, when the game ball enters the second starting port 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main C
When the hit/lose determination value data is the small hit determination value data, the PU 201 selects the symbol information "
"z6" is selected, and "zA6" is selected as the design designation command.

Also, when the game ball enters the second starting port 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main C
When the hit-lose determination value data is the loss determination value data, the PU 201 selects the symbol information "
"z7" is selected, and "zA7" is selected as the design designation command.

Although the explanation is omitted in the sixth pachinko game machine, the main ROM of the main control circuit 200
202 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is the first special symbol display unit 16 when the variable display of special symbols is stopped.
3 or the second special symbol display portion 164 (see FIG. 174) is referred to when determining the stop mode of the special symbol derived in accordance with the selected symbol information. Also, in the first special symbol display portion 163 and the second special symbol display portion 164, a big win display mode, a small win display mode, or a losing display mode is derived based on the special symbol lottery result. Further, the program ROM of the sub-control circuit 300 also stores the decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko game machine.
302.

[8-5-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 177 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 177 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko game machine.

The hit type determination table is a table for determining "mode of big win game state", "mode of small win game state" and "mode of subsequent game state (probability variable flag, probability variable number of times, time saving flag, time saving number of times)". .

The "open mode of the jackpot game state" is the first big prize winning port 6 that is opened when the jackpot game state is reached.
131 open mode. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (for example, 28 seconds) and the closing time (for example, 2 seconds) per round in the jackpot gaming state are defined in advance. It shows the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state. In addition, you may decide the maximum open time per round,
A closing time for each round (round interval time) may be determined. Furthermore, the number of times of opening and the opening time may be determined so that the first big prize winning opening 6131 is opened and closed a plurality of times per round.

The "open mode of the small winning game state" is the second big winning opening 6 that is opened when the small winning game state
151 open mode. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds) and the closing time (for example, 0.6 seconds) per opening in the small winning game state are defined in advance, and the maximum in the small winning game state Indicates the number of openings. The maximum opening time per opening may be determined, or the closing time for each opening may be determined.

Here, than the maximum opening time of one round (for example, 28 seconds) in the jackpot gaming state,
One maximum opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds) in the small winning game state is set shorter, and in the big winning game state, the first big winning port 6131 is opened by the advantageous "first opening mode". , In the small winning game state, the second opening is performed by the "second opening mode" which is more disadvantageous than the first opening mode.
It can be said that the big winning opening 6151 is opened.

In addition, the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one big hit game state (for example, 3R × 1
0 (first specified number) x 15 (number of prize balls) = 450), the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one small hit game state (for example, one small win x 4 ( second prescribed number)
x 14 (number of prize balls) = 56) is set to be smaller, the "first special game" in which the big win game state is advantageous, and the small win game state is less profitable than the big win game state. It can be said that it is the second special game.

"Aspect of subsequent game state" indicates an aspect of the game state after the end of the jackpot game state,
Probability variation flag", "probability variation number of times", "time saving flag" and "time saving number of times" are shown.

"Probability variation flag" is a flag indicating whether it is a low probability gaming state or a high probability gaming state, probability variation flag = 0 indicates "low probability gaming state", probability variation flag = 1 indicates "high probability gaming state. In addition, the "probability variable number" indicates the number of special symbol lotteries in the high probability gaming state, that is, the number of variable display of special symbols.

"Time saving flag" is a flag indicating whether it is a non-working time saving game state or a working time saving game state, time saving flag = 0 indicates "non working time saving game state", time saving flag = 1 indicates "time saving game state" is shown. In addition, the "number of times of time saving" indicates the number of times of lottery of special symbols in the time saving game state, that is, the number of times of variable display of special symbols. In addition, in the present embodiment, the "time saving number of times" is the game state ("normal game state" or "other" at the time of winning when it is determined to be a big hit).
The winning type determination table is configured so that a different number of times of time saving can be determined depending on the game state.

As shown in FIG. 177, in the hit type determination table, for the selected symbol information, "open state of big win game state", "open state of small win game state", and " Probability variable flag", "probability variable number of times", "time saving flag" and "time saving number of times" are defined in association with each other.

Based on the selected symbol information, the main CPU 201 determines the "open mode of the jackpot game state",
``Open mode of small winning game state'', ``probability variation flag'', ``probability variation frequency'', ``time saving flag'' and ``time saving frequency'' are determined. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol information is "z4" and "z7"), the mode of the big win game state, the mode of the small win game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state aspects are determined, originally, FIG.
It is not provided in the hit type determination table of 77. However, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "losing", to clarify that none of the mode of the big hit game state, the mode of the small win game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined , for convenience, FIG.
7 is illustrated.

When the special symbol lottery result is "big win", the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. When the information is "z1", "open state of jackpot game state"
``10R'' is determined as the first special symbol, and when the selected symbol information ``z2'' corresponds to the big hit of the first special symbol, ``5R'' is determined as the ``open mode of the jackpot game state'', and the first special symbol is the big hit. When the corresponding selected symbol information is "z3", "3R" is determined as the "open mode of the jackpot game state", and when the selected symbol information is "z5" corresponding to the jackpot of the second special symbol, the "jackpot game" is determined. "2R" is determined as the state release mode.

177 after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit type determination table shown in FIG. Decide "1" to indicate the high certainty gaming state, and "Probability variable number of times"
"120 times" is determined as the "time saving flag", "1" indicating the time saving game state is determined as the "time saving flag", and "100 times" is decided as the "time saving number". Further, when the selected symbol information "z5" corresponding to the second special symbol jackpot, "1" indicating a high probability gaming state as a "probability variation flag".
is determined, "120 times" is determined as the "probability variable number", and "1" indicating the time-saving gaming state is determined as the "time-saving flag". Then, the selected symbol information "z
5", when the game state at the time of winning when it is determined as a big win is the normal game state, '100 times' is determined as the 'time reduction frequency', and when it is determined as a big win, '100 times' is determined. If the game state is not the normal game state, "10000 times" is determined as the "number of times of time saving".

In addition, when a “small win” is determined as the lottery result of the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. ', '6 times' is determined as the 'release mode of the small winning game state'.

In addition, after the end of the small hit game state, the selected symbol information corresponding to the small hit of the second special symbol "
z5", the mode of the subsequent game state is not determined. That is, the game state does not shift (change) with the small winning game state as a trigger.

Thus, in this embodiment, after all the jackpot game states are completed, the game moves to the "high-probability short-time game state" in which both the time-saving game state and the high-probability game state are executed. For this reason, after all the big win game states are finished, the chances of shifting to the big win game state again are increased (so-called consecutive game opportunities are given), and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the end of all the jackpot game state, since the probability variable number of high-probability game state (120 times) is not necessarily set to the number of times to guarantee the transition to the jackpot game state, By the time the number of times of variable display of the special symbols reaches the probability variable number of times, it is possible to make the player expect to shift to a big hit game state, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, the number of times of shortening time (100) is set to a shorter number of times than the number of times of variable probability (120 times). For this reason,
After the end of the jackpot game state with the first special symbol, after shifting to the first half (1 to 100 times) of "high-accuracy short-time game state", if it does not shift to the jackpot game state again, the second half (101 to 120 times) It is possible to shift to the “high-precision non-time-saving gaming state”.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the latter half of the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" is transitioned, the expected value of the number of game balls paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed 1, as will be described later. It is possible to plunge into "small hit RUSH". Here, the probability variable number of high probability gaming state (12
0 times) is not necessarily set to the number of times that guarantees the transition to the big hit game state, the expected value ( It is common that the so-called expected value of Renso) decreases and the interest in the game declines. However, in this embodiment, every time the number of times of variable display of the special symbols approaches the number of probability variations, the expected value of entering the "small hit RUSH" is increased, so the expected value of shifting to the big win game state is increased. The decrease is complemented by the expected value that rushes into the "small winning RUSH", and the improvement of the interest in the game can be maintained.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state with the second special symbol, the game state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot is not a "normal game state", that is, right-handed as a regular game mode When you are in the "high-probability short-time game state", "high-probability non-short-time game state" and "low-probability short-time game state", the number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state (10000 times) turns into a big hit game state It is set to the number of times that guarantees migration. For this reason, when the "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" and "low-probability short-time gaming state" (especially "high-probability non-short-time gaming state") are hitting to the right, the second A big hit with a special pattern can be expected, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Here, in the present embodiment, the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 6140, which is the second special symbol lottery trigger, is when the game ball is in a non-time-saving gaming state that is hitting to the right, that is, "high accuracy The main opportunity is when you are in a non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in the "high probability non-time-saving game state" that can be shifted to the second half after the end of the big hit game state, that is, the "small hit RUSH", the payout of the game ball is expected, and the transition to the next big hit game state is made. The guaranteed big hit of the second special symbol can also be expected, and the amusement of the game can be further improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state with the second special symbol, when the game state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot is the "normal game state", the number of times of the time saving game state ( 100 times) is not necessarily set to the number of times to guarantee the transition to the jackpot game state. This is because, when it is in the "normal game state", the left-hand hitting is performed as a regular game mode, and the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 6140 is not recognized as the game property of the present embodiment, and the " This is because it corresponds to an "irregular jackpot".

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a big hit after the end of the second special symbol jackpot game state is the "normal game state" (it was an irregular jackpot time), the same number of times as the number of times of time saving (100 times) of the time saving game state set after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol is set as the number of times of time saving (100 times) of the time saving game state. However, it may be set to a number less than the number of times of time saving in the time saving game state set after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, or it is not necessary to set the time saving flag and the number of time saving times (the number of time saving times 0 times).

[8-5-4. Game state transition diagram]
Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the game state transition explained in FIG. 177 will be explained in order. FIG. 178 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the sixth pachinko game machine.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the "normal game state" left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" and "low-probability short-time gaming state ”
In this case, hitting to the right is the regular game mode.

(Normal game state)
In the normal game state for hitting left, the game ball is configured to be able to enter the first start hole (middle) 6120A (see FIG. 173).

In the normal game state, when the game ball enters the first start hole (middle) 6120A and the "jackpot" is determined by lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot game state of the first special symbol ends. Later, it will shift to a "high-probability time-saving game state" in which the number of times of time-saving is set to "100 times" and the number of times of variable probability is set to "120 times".

(High-precision time-saving gaming state)
In the high-probability time-saving gaming state for hitting to the right, the passage gate switch 6126 is configured so that the game ball can pass through, and the time-saving gaming state is controlled, so the passage gate switch 612
6, the first starting port (right) 6120B is opened by the normal electric accessory 6146, and the game ball can enter the first starting port (right) 6120B. (See Figure 173).

In the high probability time-saving game state, when the game ball enters the first start port (right) 6120B and the "jackpot" is determined by the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol jackpot game state. After the end of , the time saving number of times and probability variable number of times etc. are reset, and it will shift to the high probability time saving game state again (so-called Renso).

Here, in the high probability time-saving gaming state, since the time-saving gaming state is controlled, the first start port (right) 6120B is opened by the normal electric accessory 6146, so that the first
It is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 6140 provided on the downstream side of the starting port (right) 6120B. Therefore, in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, it is difficult to perform the lottery of the second special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the second start port 6140, and the first start port ( Right) A first special symbol lottery will be held when a game ball enters 6120B.

Then, in the high-probability time-saving game state, the lottery of special symbols is not determined to be a big hit, and when the number of times of lottery of special symbols reaches the set number of times of time-saving (the number of times of time-savings ends 100 times), the control of the time-saving game state ends. , It will shift to "high probability non-time-saving game state".

(High accuracy non-time-saving gaming state)
In the high-precision non-time-saving game state that hits to the right, since the time-saving game state is not controlled, the first start port (right) 6120B is almost closed by the normal electric accessory 6146, and the normal electric shutter 6147 The game ball rolling upward is guided to the small winning accessory unit 6150 or the second starting port 6140, and the game ball can enter the second big prize winning port 6151 or the second starting port 6140. (See FIG. 173).

Therefore, in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, it is difficult to perform the lottery of the first special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the first start port (right) 6120B. A lottery for the second special symbol will be performed when the game ball enters the second start port 6140 .

In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, when the game ball enters the second starting port 6140 and the "small hit" is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol, the second big winning port 6151 is in an open state. As a result, every time a game ball enters the second big winning hole 6151, the number of game balls (for example, 14) corresponding to the second big winning hole 6151 is paid out. In the lottery of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. Hit RUSH" is executed, and the acquisition of game balls increases.

In the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, when the game ball enters the second start port 6140 and the "big hit" is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol, the big winning gaming state of the second special symbol ends. Later, "10000 times" to guarantee that the time saving number of times will be shifted to the jackpot game state,
It will shift to the "high probability short-time gaming state" in which the probability variable number of times is set to "120 times".

In the high probability non-time-saving game state, the special symbol lottery is not determined to be a big hit, and the probability variable number of times set by the special symbol lottery number after the end of the first special symbol jackpot game state (12 of the probability variable number of times)
When 0 rounds are completed), the control of the high-precision game state is ended, and the game returns to the "normal game state" in which the player hits to the left.

(Low-probability short-time gaming state)
The low-probability short-time gaming state for hitting to the right is not determined as a big hit in the lottery of the special symbols in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" shifted after the end of the big-hit game state of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol is a big hit. The probability variable number set by the special symbol lottery number after the game state is over (12 of the probability variable number
0 end), it is a game state to be shifted.

In the low-probability time-saving gaming state, similarly to the high-probability time-saving gaming state, since the time-saving gaming state is controlled, when the game ball passes through the passage gate switch 6126, the normal electric accessory 614
6, the first starting port (right) 6120B is opened, and a game ball can enter the first starting port (right) 6120B (see FIG. 173).

Then, even in the low-probability short-time gaming state, as in the high-probability short-time gaming state, since the time-saving gaming state is controlled, the second special triggered by the game ball entering the second start port 6140 It is difficult to draw a lottery for a symbol, and a lottery for a first special symbol will be performed when a game ball enters the first starting port (right) 6120B.

Even if it shifts to this low-probability time-saving game state, since the remaining number of time-saving times is "9880 times", it is guaranteed that the time-saving game state will not end and it will shift to the big hit game state again. there is

As described above, in this embodiment, the configuration of the game board unit (see FIG. 173), the content of the lottery for the special symbol (see FIG. 175), the transition rule to the game state (see FIG. 177), etc. are organically associated. , it is possible to create a game that has never existed before, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko machine, the "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" and "low-probability short-time gaming state" in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode are collectively It is also called right-handed playing state.

[8-5-5. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
Figures 179 to 181 are examples of variation pattern tables for determining the variation pattern of the special symbols of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 179 is an example of a first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 180 is a second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. An example. In addition, FIG. 181 shows the right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine ("high-probability short-time game state", "high-probability non-short-time game state" or "low-probability short-time game state") It is an example of a first half variation pattern table and a second half variation pattern table of special symbols. 179 to 181 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko game machine.

In addition, the ``variation pattern of special symbols'' of the sixth pachinko game machine includes a ``first half variation pattern'' corresponding to the first half of variable display of special symbols, and a ``second half variation pattern'' corresponding to the second half of variable display of special symbols. It is composed of two combinations of In addition, like the first pachinko game machine, the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern may be combined into one variation pattern. Also, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern are collectively referred to as a "variation pattern" as appropriate.

(First half fluctuation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
As shown in FIG. 179, the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state is
The type of special design (type of starting port), the lottery result of the special design, the first starting port 61
20A, 6120B or the first effect selection random number obtained based on the ball entering the second start port 6140, the "first half variation pattern number" indicating the first half variation pattern, and the "first half" of the special symbol in the first half variation pattern variable display time". The random number for selecting the first effect is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. In addition, the column of "remarks" in FIG. 179 indicates the details of the presentation for the sake of convenience.

When the main CPU 201 is in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol first half variation pattern table in the normal game state shown in FIG. A first half variation pattern of special symbols and a first half variable display time of special symbols are determined based on the random number value for selecting one effect. The main CPU 201 uses the first start port 612
0A, 6120B when based on the entry ball of the game ball determines the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time of the first special symbol, when based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 6140 second A first half variation pattern and a first half variable display time of special symbols are determined.

Here, "pseudo run" shown in the column of "remarks" in FIG. This shows a "pseudo-continuous effect" in which the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed are variably displayed again. The term "temporary stop display" refers to a mode in which the decorative symbols sway slightly or are slightly deformed to give the player the impression that the decorative symbols are stopped. This pseudo-continuous effect can be performed a plurality of times, and the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is performed is indicated as "X pseudo-continuous effects". In addition, "pseudo-continuous agitation" indicates an effect for inciting whether or not a pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed.
"NR" is an abbreviation for normal reach. Also, "long fluctuation" is a fluctuation in which the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be extremely long.

"Road to the decisive battle" and "Road to the ultimate decisive battle" are the same type of specific production, and the player is made to operate the production button device 6310 a predetermined number of times, and up to a specific number (10) of " It is a production to collect character icons. The "number of icons in the first half" indicates the number of "character icons" that can be displayed until the road to the decisive battle or the road to the decisive battle is performed. The road to the decisive battle, the road to the decisive battle, character icons, etc. will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS.

According to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. As the first half variation pattern of the design, the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time corresponding to any of "Normal variation", "Pseudo continuous X times", "Road to the decisive battle" and "Road to the ultimate decisive battle" are decided. be done.

Then, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG.
The random number value for selecting the first effect is set so that the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of "1 pseudo-run"<"2 pseudo-runs"<"3 pseudo-runs".

Then, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG.
The random number for selecting the first effect is set so that the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of "Road to the decisive battle"<"Road to the decisive battle".

Also, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG.
When based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 6140 (in the case of the second special symbol), the first half variation pattern of "long variation" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be extremely long is determined. .

Here, in the sixth pachinko game machine, when it is in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and when left-handed hitting is performed, the game ball enters the second start hole 6140. Although it is difficult or impossible to do so, if the game ball is hit to the right as an unintended game mode, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second start hole 6140 . However, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG.
When it is based on the entry of the game ball into the game ball, the first half variation pattern of "long variation" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be extremely long is determined, so the number of lotteries of the second special symbol per unit time is determined. It is made extremely small, and is constructed so that there is no real benefit for the player to hit to the right in the normal game state.

(Latter half fluctuation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
As shown in FIG. 180, the second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state is
The first half variation pattern number, the lottery result of the special pattern, the first start port 6120A, 6
120B or the second effect selection random number acquired based on the ball entering the second start port 6140, the "second half fluctuation pattern number" indicating the second half fluctuation pattern, and the "second half variable display" of the special symbol in the second half fluctuation pattern time" is associated with it. The second effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. In addition, the column of "remarks" in FIG. 180 shows the details of the presentation for the sake of convenience.

When the main CPU 201 is in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 refers to the second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG.
A second half variation pattern of special symbols and a second half variable display time of special symbols are determined based on a lottery result of special symbols and a random number value for selecting a second performance. The main CPU 201 uses the first start port 61
20A, 6120B When based on the entry of the game ball to 6120B, the latter half variation pattern and the second half variable display time of the first special symbol are determined, and when based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 6140, the second
The second half variation pattern and the second half variable display time of the special symbols are determined.

When the main CPU 201 determines the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern in the normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern combines the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern so that the type of the special symbol can be identified. A command is sent to the sub CPU 301 . Specifically, a 3-byte variation pattern command (for example, 83H00H00H) consisting of “83H”, “first half variation pattern number” and “second half variation pattern number” is transmitted as “first special symbol variation pattern command”. , "Variation pattern command of the second special symbol"
3 consisting of "84H", "first half variation pattern number" and "second half variation pattern number"
Send a byte variation pattern command (eg, 84HF1H00H). Then, in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 calculates the total variable display time by adding the first half variable display time and the second half variable display time. The sub CPU 301 is the main CPU 201
The display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 are controlled based on the special pattern variation pattern command transmitted from.

Here, "none" shown in the column of "remarks" in Fig. 180 means that the second half variation pattern and the second half variable display time of the special symbols are not determined, and the second half variation pattern of the special symbols is determined. If not, only the first half variation pattern of the special symbol will be executed. Also, "Normal Reach", "Ninja Reach", "Confrontation Reach" and "Great Battle Reach" are
In the normal game state, it is a ready-to-win performance suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbols may result in a big win. The "number of icons in the second half" indicates the number of "character icons" that can be displayed after the road to the decisive battle or the road to the decisive battle. The confrontation reach, character icon, etc. will be described later in detail.

According to the second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. First half fluctuation only)”, “Normal Reach”, “Ninja Reach”,
A second half variation pattern and a second half variable display time corresponding to either of the "showdown reach" and the "great battle reach" are determined.

Then, according to the second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG.
The random number for selecting the second effect is set so that the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of "normal reach"<"ninja reach"<"confrontation reach"<"great battle reach".

Also, according to the second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG.
When the game ball is entered into the second starting port 6140, the second half variation pattern and the second half variable display time of the special symbols are not determined. Therefore, in the normal game state, the second start port 61
When the game ball enters 40, only the first half variation pattern corresponding to the "long variation" which is the first half variation pattern of the special symbol is executed.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in right-handed game state)
Fig. 181 (a) shows the right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine ("high-probability short-time game state", "high-probability non-short-time game state" or "low-probability short-time game state") It is an example of the first half variation pattern table of special symbols. FIG. 181(b) is an example of a second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The variable display time is not determined, and there is no need to provide this table, but it is shown for convenience in order to clarify that the second half variation pattern and the second half variable display time of special symbols are not determined in the right-handed game state. be.

As shown in FIG. 181 (a), the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed gaming state includes the type of special symbols (type of starting port), the winning result which is the lottery result of special symbols, and the first start. The first effect selection random number obtained based on the ball entering the opening 6120A, 6120B or the second starting opening 6140, the "first half fluctuation pattern number" indicating the first half fluctuation pattern, and the special symbol " first half variable display time".

When the main CPU 201 is in the right-handed gaming state, the main CPU 201 refers to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed gaming state shown in FIG. A first half variation pattern of special symbols and a first half variable display time of special symbols are determined based on the lottery result and the random number value for selecting the first performance. The main CPU 201 determines the first-half variation pattern and the first-half variable display time of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting ports 6120A and 6120B, and the game ball entering the second starting port 6140 When based on the entering ball, the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time of the second special symbol are determined.

When the main CPU 201 determines the first half variation pattern of the special symbols in the right-handed game state, it does not determine the second half variation pattern and the second half variable display time, and does not execute the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern. Indicated default second half fluctuation pattern number (00H)
To the sub CPU 301, a variation pattern command of a special symbol combined with is transmitted. Then, the main CPU 201 calculates the first half variable display time as the total variable display time in the right-handed game state. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 .

Here, "battle challenge", "battle reach", "door opening effect" and "eye opening effect" shown in the column of "remarks" in FIG. It is a reach production that suggests that the result may be a big hit. In addition, the "ultra-shortened variation" is a variation in which the variable display time of the special symbols is set to be extremely short.

According to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed gaming state shown in FIG. As the first half variation pattern of the first special symbol, the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time corresponding to any one of "super shortened variation", "battle challenge" and "battle reach" are determined. For this reason, "battle challenge" and "battle reach" are also reach effects suggesting that the lottery result of the first special symbol may result in a big hit in the right-handed gaming state.

Then, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed gaming state shown in FIG.
The first
A random value for effect selection is set.

According to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed gaming state shown in FIG. 1
As the first half variation pattern of the special pattern, "super shortened variation", "door opening effect" and "eye opening effect"
A first half variation pattern and a first half variable display time corresponding to any one of are determined. For this reason,
"Door opening effect" and "Eyes opening effect" are also ready-to-win effects suggesting that the lottery result of the second special symbol may result in a big hit in the right-handed game state.

Then, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed game state shown in FIG.
The random number for selecting the first effect is set so that the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of "door opening effect"<"eye opening effect".

Also, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed game state shown in FIG. A first half variation pattern is determined. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is "small hit", all "
The first half variation pattern of "ultra-shortened variation" is determined.

For this reason, when in the right-handed game state, unlike the normal game state, the number of times of lottery of the first special symbol and the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol per unit time are increased, and in the right-handed game state, the player moves to the right. It is configured so that there is a real benefit to beating.

Here, the entry of the game ball into the second start port 6140, which is the second special symbol lottery trigger, is mainly triggered by the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, which is one of the right-handed gaming states. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is likely to be determined as "small hit" (see Fig. 175), and if the lottery result of the second special symbol is "small hit", the second big winning port 6151 is immediately shifted to the open state. (See FIG. 181). For this reason, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, it is possible to realize a "small hit RUSH" in which the rate of game balls entering the second big winning hole 6151 per unit time is increased.

[8-5-6. Normal pattern hit judgment table]
FIG. 182 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the hit determination table of normal symbols shown in FIG. 182 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process. It is a table referred to when determining "normal design hit" or "normal design loss" by lottery based on.

The normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 182 includes the game state, the normal symbol hit determination random number range (width), and the hit/loss determination value data ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol loss").
and are defined in association with each other.

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for normal symbol hit determination from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 182, and determines hit/lose determination value data based on the gaming state and the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value.

In this embodiment, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is 0, and determines that it is a "normal symbol hit", and sets the hit/loss determination value data to "normal symbol hit". judgment value data”. Also, in the normal game state, the main CPU
201, if the random value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 1 to 99, "
"Loss" is determined, and the judgment value data is determined as "losing judgment value data".

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 0 to 98, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal symbol winning", and sets the winning/losing determination value data to "normal symbol". hit judgment value data”. Also, in the time-saving game state, the main C
When the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is 99, the PU 201 determines "losing" and determines the determination value data as "losing determination value data".

[8-5-7. Normal pattern judgment table]
FIG. 183 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG.
00 is stored in the main ROM 202 .

The normal symbol determination table includes the above normal symbol win/lose determination value data and the pass gate 6126
Based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through, it is a table referred to when selecting the "select symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning" to determine the stop symbol of the normal symbol. .

"Selected pattern command at the time of normal design hit" is a command for specifying the normal design hit pattern determined according to the normal design hit type when the result of the hit determination process for the normal design is a normal design hit. be.

The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 183 corresponds to the normal symbol win-lose determination value data ("normal symbol hit" or "losing"), the normal symbol symbol random number value, and the normal symbol winning selection symbol command. are stipulated.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 183, and determines a normal winning selection symbol command based on the normal symbol hit/lose determination value data and the normal symbol random number value.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 183, when the normal symbol per determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit/loss determination value data, for example, the normal symbol per selection symbol command is selected as follows. be done.

For example, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 issues a selection symbol command at normal symbol hit if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 49. Select "fz1" as a normal symbol random number value of 50 to 1
If it is any of 00, "fz2" is selected as a selection symbol command at the time of a normal symbol hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, unlike the first pachinko game machine, when selecting the "selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning", regardless of the game state, the normal symbol win-lose determination value data (normal symbol Based on the result of the hit determination process) and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, it is configured to select the "selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit".

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 182), and determines the normal symbol win/lose determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value. After that, referring to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 183), the selection symbol command at normal symbol hit is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number for winning determination of the normal symbol and the random number of the normal symbol, the winning/losing of the normal symbol and the selection symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol may be determined together.

[8-5-8. Type determination table per normal pattern]
FIG. 184 is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the normal per symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 184 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal per symbol type determination table is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 (normal shutter 6147) according to the game state and the normal per symbol select symbol command.

In the normal per symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 184, the game state, the selection symbol command at normal per symbol, and the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 are defined in association with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol per type determination table shown in FIG.
Based on the game state and the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 is determined. After that, the main CPU 201 determines the normal electric accessory 6146
to the sub CPU 301.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern "01H" of the normal electric accessory 6146 when the selected symbol command at normal symbol winning is "fz1" or "fz2" in the non-time-saving gaming state. Then, 210 msec is determined as the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 6146 corresponding to the opening pattern.

Therefore, in the non-time-saving gaming state, even if it is a selection symbol command at the time of any normal symbol, a disadvantageous opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 is determined, and the first start port (right)
It is difficult or impossible to enter a game ball into 6120B.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern "02H" of the normal electric accessory 6146 when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz1" or "fz2" in the time saving game state. , 5820 msec is determined as the opening time of the normal electric accessories 6146 corresponding to the opening pattern.

Therefore, in the case of the time-saving gaming state, an advantageous opening pattern of the normal electric accessary 6146 is determined for any of the normal symbol winning time selection symbol commands, and the first start port (right) 6
It is possible to enter a game ball into 120B.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146, it is configured to perform only one opening, but it is configured to set a wait time and perform multiple openings. You may

[8-5-9. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 185 is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the variation pattern table of normal symbols shown in FIG. 185 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 185 corresponds to the game state, the normal symbol winning/losing determination value data, the normal symbol hit selection symbol command, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the normal symbol variable display time. attached.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 185, and based on the game state, the normal symbol winning/losing determination value data, and the normal symbol winning selection symbol command, the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol The variable display time of the pattern is determined.

Then, when the normal symbol variation pattern is determined, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301 . The sub CPU 301, based on the variation pattern command of the normal symbol transmitted from the main CPU 201, displays the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7, the speaker 32
Controls the sound effect output from.

In the present embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbols is relatively short so that the number of times of lottery of the normal symbols per unit time is increased. In particular, if it is a time-saving game state, if the lottery result of the normal pattern is "hit", immediately the first start port (right) 6120B
can be shifted to an open state, and the first start port (right) 6 per unit time
It is possible to increase the ball entry rate of game balls to 120B.

[8-6. Main control processing]
In the sixth pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the special symbol control process performed during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23), normal symbol Although the control processing and sub-control circuit processing are partially different, the other processing is the same. Therefore, the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process and the sub-control circuit process will be described below, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

It should be noted that some of the processes performed in the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process and the sub-control circuit process in the sixth pachinko game machine are the same as the processes performed in the first pachinko game machine. Including the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko game machine, the step numbers will be changed and explained again.

[8-6-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the special symbol control processing performed at S39 during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 186, the main CPU 201 first, in S6001, the second
Load the special symbol control state number. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process regarding the variable display (special symbol game) of each special symbol. After executing the process of S6001, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process by:
Prior to the process of S6001, an address setting process is performed to set the address of the work area for each special symbol in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control process. Then, when the number of reserved first special symbols is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the demonstration display command for the first special symbol, and the number of reserved second special symbols is constant. When it is "0" for more than the time, the transmission reservation processing of the demonstration display command for the second special symbol is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command, if the demonstration display command is a main special symbol demonstration display command, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect.

Although the sixth pachinko gaming machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub CPU 301 can display either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol and the other is used as the sub special symbol, and the performance control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol is the main special symbol in the normal game state and the time-saving game state (high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state), and the second special symbol is the main special symbol in the high-probability non-time-saving game state. It is a special design. Then, the sub CPU 301 performs variable display of decorative symbols and display effects such as characters for the main special symbols, and voice effects for the main special symbols. For example, when the result of the sub-special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a big hit, for example, the sub-special symbol effect may be performed while performing the main special symbol effect.

At S6002, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded at S6001.

When it is determined in S6002 that the second special symbol is not the timing to start the variable display (NO determination in S6002), that is, when any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 performs the process to S6003. For example, during execution of the big hit game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, N in S6002
O is determined.

At S6003, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. The main CPU 201 performs S6
After executing the process of 003, the process moves to S6004.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S6002 that it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S6002), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6004.

At S6004, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S6004, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6005.

At S6005, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded at S6004.

When it is determined in S6005 that the timing for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is not reached (NO determination in S6005), that is, when any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 performs the process to S6006. For example, during execution of the big hit game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, N in S6005
O is determined.

At S6006, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. Main CPU2
01 moves the process to S6007 after executing the process of S6006.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S6005 that it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol (YES in S6005), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6007.

At S6007, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S6007, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6008.

At S6008, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded at S6007.

When it is determined in S6008 that the timing for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is not reached (NO determination in S6008), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6010.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the timing of starting variable display in S6008 (when S6008 determines YES), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is executed and variable display can be started. , the main CPU 201 causes the process to proceed to S60
Move to 09.

At S6009, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. Main CPU2
After executing the process of S6009, 01 shifts the process to S6010.

At S6010, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S6010, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6011.

At S6011, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded at S6010.

When it is determined in S6011 that the timing for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is not reached (NO determination in S6011), the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol control process,
The processing is returned to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20-23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S6011 that it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol (when S6011 determines YES), that is, no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and variable display can be started. , the main CPU 201 causes the process to proceed to S60
Move to 12.

At S6012, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. Main CPU2
After executing the process of S6012, 01 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It should be noted that the main CPU 201 sets the interrupt prohibited section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S6
001 to S6012) is preferably performed within the interrupt disabled section.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the process related to the second special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, and when processing related to the first special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, in the order of priority, special symbol management processing described later is running.

[8-6-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 187, S6003, S6 in the special symbol control process (see FIG. 186)
006, S6009 and S6012, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, for example, the special symbol management process S6003 or S6009 during the special symbol control process
When called and executed, the second special symbol is processed, and when the special symbol management process is called and executed at S6006 or S6012 during the special symbol control process, the first special symbol is processed. becomes.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG.
It is the control state number of the special symbol to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for special symbols is 0 (S6
021).

If it is determined that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 in S6021 (S6021 is N
If the determination is O), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 186).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 in S6021 (S602
1 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6022.

At S6022, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol.
After executing the process of S6022, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6023. Note that the main CPU 201, based on the control state number read in the process of S6022,
Processing after 6023 is performed.

At S6023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S6023 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 advances the processing to S6024.
to

In S6024, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S6024 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190. FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6025.

At S6025, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This S6
The process of 025 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6026.

At S6026, the main CPU 201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. This S6
The process of 026 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 193 . If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6027.

At S6027, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening control process. This S6
The process of 027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6028.

In S6028, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot end processing. This S6028
is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After finishing the processing of S6023 to S6028, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 186). In addition, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S6004 when the special symbol management process is called in S6003 during the special symbol control process, and returns to S60.
If called at 06, the process returns to S6007, if called at S6009, the process returns to S6010, and if called at S6012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[8-6-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 188, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 at S6023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described. Figure 188
is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S6023 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S6023 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

As shown in FIG. 188, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S6031).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" in S6031 (S60
31 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process,
The process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" in S6031 (
If S6031 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6032.

In S6032, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol pause flag value, and determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off based on the loaded special symbol pause flag value. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S6032, even if S6031 is YES determination (that is, even if the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied), the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, if it is on (S6032 is NO If it is a judgment), the special symbol variable display start process is terminated without proceeding.

When it is determined that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on in S6032 (NO determination in S6032), as described above, the special symbol variable display start processing does not proceed, and the main CPU 201 displays the special symbol variable display. End start processing. After that, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol pause flag is off in S6032 (S60
32 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6033.

At S6033, the main CPU 201 shifts the special symbol starting information. In the shift process of the first special symbol start information for the first special symbol to be processed, since the number of reserved first special symbols is four, the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 (
1) shift the start information stored in the first special symbol determination area (0), the start information stored in the first special symbol start storage area (2) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) Shift to the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (3). In addition, in the shift processing of the second special symbol start information for the second special symbol to be processed, the number of reserved second special symbols is two, so the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 (1 ) is shifted to the second special symbol determination area (0), and the second special symbol start storage area (2
) is shifted to the second special symbol start storage area (1). Main CPU
After executing the process of S6033, 201 moves the process to S6034.

In S6034, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 175) is referred to, and the game state (presence or absence of probability variation flag) and the special symbol jackpot determination random value stored in the special symbol determination area (0) Based on this, special symbol hit determination processing is performed. In this embodiment, it is determined whether the first special symbol is a big hit or a loss, and it is determined whether the second special symbol is a big hit, a small hit or a loss. Also, the main CPU 201
sets a small win flag to ON when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a small win, and sets the big win flag to ON when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a big win. After executing the process of S6034, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6035.

At S6035, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process
The result of the special symbol hit determination process (S6034) (for example, a small hit, a big hit, or a loss)
It is a process of determining the stop design of the special design corresponding to. In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 176) is referred to, and the determination result (hit-lose) of the above-described special symbol hit determination process,
"Selected symbol information" and "symbol designation command" are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination area (0). In this embodiment, since there is only one kind of loss, there is no need to determine the stop symbol when the special symbol win determination process is a loss. A stop symbol may be determined when the result is a loss. After executing the process of S6035, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6036.

In S6036, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process
If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (a small hit or a big hit), this is the process of determining the type of the hit. In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 177) is referred to, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol information" determined in the special symbol determination process (S6035). In addition, in this embodiment, there are multiple types of hits,
The number of types of big wins may be one, or the number of types of small wins may be plural. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to the multiple types of winning, multiple types of other winnings (for example, time-saving winnings) may be provided, or multiple types of losing may be provided. good. After executing the process of S6036, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6037.

In S6037, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this special symbol variation pattern determination process, first, after the first half variation pattern determination process is performed, the second half variation pattern determination process is performed.

In the first half variation pattern determination process, if it is in the normal game state, the first half variation pattern table of special symbols shown in FIG. 179 is determined, and if it is in the right-handed game state, the first half variation pattern table of special symbols shown in FIG. Determined, referring to the first half variation pattern table of the determined special symbol, the determination result of the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process (hit-lose) and the special symbol determination area (0)
A first half variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number value for selecting the first effect stored in .

In the second half variation pattern determination process, if it is in the normal game state, the second half variation pattern table of special symbols shown in FIG. A second half variation pattern of special symbols is determined based on the result (hit-lose) and the random number value for selecting the second effect stored in the special symbol determination area (0). Also, when it is in the right-handed game state, the default second half variation pattern number (00H) indicating that the second half variation pattern is not executed is determined. After executing the process of S6037, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6038.

In S6038, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, when it is in the normal game state, referring to the special symbol variation pattern table of FIGS. 179 and 180, the first half variable display time of the first half variation pattern determined in the first half variation pattern determination process and the second half variation pattern determination process A total variable display time is calculated by summing the second half variable display time of the second half variation pattern determined in . In addition, when it is in the right-handed game state, the first half variable display time of the first half variation pattern determined in the first half variation pattern determination process is calculated as the total variable display time by referring to the first half variation pattern table shown in FIG. . Then, the calculated total variable display time is set in the special symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and the special symbol display units 163 and 164 are caused to start variable display of the special symbols. The waiting time for this special symbol is subtracted as a special symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process which is performed at intervals of 2 msec, for example. The main CPU 201 performs S6
After executing the process of 038, the process moves to S6039.

In S<b>6039 , the main CPU 201 performs time saving probability variable number subtraction processing. In this process, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag = 1 (high probability gaming state), and if the probability variation flag = 1, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number. In addition, if probability variation flag = 1, probability variation frequency is not subtracted.
Also, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag = 1 (time saving game state), and if the time saving flag = 1, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number of times. In addition, if it is time saving flag = 0, the number of times of time saving is not subtracted.

At S6040, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display start process,
Special symbol variable display end processing (see S6024 in FIG. 187) will be performed. After executing the process of S6040, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6041.

At S6041, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. It should be noted that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is the effect control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (S322 in FIG. 45).
), it is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 . The main CPU 201 executes S6041
, the process moves to S6042.

At S6042, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S6042, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S604.
Move to 3.

At S6043, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. In this process, transmission reservation processing of "symbol designation command" and "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as a special symbol effect start command. As transmission reservation processing of the design designation command, transmission reservation processing of the design designation command determined in S6035 is performed. In addition, as transmission reservation processing of the special symbol variation pattern command, transmission reservation processing of the special symbol variation pattern command combining the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern determined in S6037 so that the type of the special symbol can be understood I do. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It should be noted that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, game state management processing (S6042) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S6043)) is interrupt prohibited. It is preferable to perform it within the interval.

[8-6-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, referring to FIGS. 189 and 190, S during special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187)
The special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at 6024 will be described. 189 and 190 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S6024 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S6024 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed. In addition, in the special symbol variable display ending process described below, the special symbol to be processed is simply referred to as "special symbol", and the special symbol not to be processed is referred to as "other special symbol".

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S6051).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" in S6051 (S60
51 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing,
The process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" in S6051 (
If S6051 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6052.

In S6052, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol pause flag value, and determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off based on the loaded special symbol pause flag value.

If it is determined in S6052 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, i.e., it is on (NO determination in S6052), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the special symbol management processing (FIG. 187). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol pause flag is off in S6052 (S60
52 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6053.

In S6053, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol finalization time setting process. In this process, a predetermined special symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) is set in the special symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and the special symbol display units 163, 16
4 to stop the variable display of the special symbol. The waiting time for this special symbol is subtracted as a special symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process which is performed at intervals of 2 msec, for example. After executing the process of S6053, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6.
Move to 054.

In addition, the design determination time of the special design may differ depending on the type of hit, and may differ according to the game state. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit or a loss, the first symbol determination time (for example, 540 msec) is set, and when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, A second symbol fixing time (for example, 24 msec) shorter than the first symbol fixing time may be set. In particular, as in the sixth pachinko game machine, when creating a small win RUSH, it is desirable to shorten the symbol fixation time extremely in the case of a small win.

At S6054, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S6025 in FIG. 187) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be performed. After executing the process of S6054, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6055.

At S6055, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6055, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6056.

At S6056, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter.
The number-of-determined-symbols counter is a counter for counting the number of times special symbols are determined (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the count value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 . For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions, such as the number of times of probability variation and the number of times of reduced working hours. can be managed. After executing the process of S6056, the main CPU 201
The process moves to S6057.

In S6057, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing (S of FIG. 188
6034) is a small hit or not.

In S6057, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is not a small hit (NO in S6057), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6059.

On the other hand, in S6057, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is a small hit (S6057 is YES determination), the main CPU
201 moves the process to S6058.

At S6058, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible not to start or stop the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the small winning game control process. Main CPU20
1 executes the process of S6058, and then moves the process to S6059.

In S6059, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol win determination process (S of FIG. 188
6034) is a big hit or not.

In S6059, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is not a big hit (when S6059 determines NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and processes. is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, in S6059, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is a big hit (when S6059 determines YES), the main CPU
201 moves the process to S6060.

At S6060, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible not to start the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the big hit game control process. The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process of 6060, the process moves to S6061.

At S6061, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the other special symbol is being variably displayed.

If it is determined in S6061 that the other special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (S6061
is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6061 that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (S6
061 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6062.

At S6062, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter.
After executing the process of S6062, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6063.

In S6063, the main CPU 201 sets a variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the test-firing test signal is output to the outside. This test firing signal is
This is a signal indicating that the other special symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss. Main CPU20
1 moves the process to S6064 after executing the process of S6063.

At S6064, the main CPU 201 forcibly changes the win flag of the other special symbol to lose and sets it. By performing this process, when the result of the hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) of the special symbol to be processed is a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is being variably displayed, and the other special symbol Even if the result of the hit determination process of the symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss. After executing the process of S6064, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6065.

At S6065, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S6065, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6066.

At S6066, the main CPU 201 performs a symbol fixing time setting process for the other special symbol. In this process, a predetermined symbol fixing time (for example, 540 msec) is set to the main RA
The waiting time of the other special symbol in M203 is set, and the variable display of the other special symbol on the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is stopped. After executing the process of S6066, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6067.

At S6067, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2".
to set. After executing the process of S6067, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S606.
Move to 8.

At S6068, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. In addition, the gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6068, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6069.

At S6069, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the other special symbol effect stop command. In addition, the other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is
Production control command transmission processing during the next system timer interrupt processing (see S322 in FIG. 45)
, is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 . After executing the process of S6069, the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol variable display end process, and proceeds to the special symbol management process (FIG. 187).
reference).

Thus, in the special symbol variable display end process of the present embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the special symbol hit determination process (FIG. 18
8) is a big hit and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, the process of forcibly stopping the variable display of the other special symbol is performed.

[8-6-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 191, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 at S6025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described. Figure 191 shows
It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is called at S6025 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S6025 during the special symbol management process with the second special symbol as the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S6071).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" in S6071 (S60
71 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" in S6071 (
If S6071 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6072.

At S6072, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a big win has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S6072, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not in the stop display mode indicating the big win (NO determination in S6072), the main CPU 201
The process moves to S6073. On the other hand, when it is determined in S6072 that the special symbol is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating a big win (YES in S6072), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6075.

In S6073, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a small win, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a small win.

In S6073, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not a small hit, that is, it is a stop display mode indicating a loss (when S6073 is determined as NO), the main CPU 201
The process moves to S6082.

On the other hand, in S6073, when it is determined that it is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a small hit (when S6073 is YES), the main CPU 2
01 moves the process to S6075.

In S6075, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process for the big hit game control process or the small hit game control process. In this processing, signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 174 for both) and the island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 184 are generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. Main CPU20
1 moves the process to S6076 after performing the process of S6075.

In S6076, the main CPU 201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the first big winning hole 6131 is opened (S6077), and a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S6078).

At S6079, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the special symbol control state number to "3". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening preparation process (see S6026 in FIG. 187) will be performed.

At S6080, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, when the main CPU 201 is a big hit, the probability variation flag, the probability variation number,
It also performs processing to clear various flags and various counters such as the time saving flag and the number of time saving times. In addition, at the time of a small hit, processing for clearing various flags and various counters such as probability variation flag, probability variation number, time saving flag, and time saving number of times is not performed. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. In addition, the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is the effect control command transmission process (S in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
322), it is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 .

In S6081, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a big-hit start display command when it is a big hit, and performs transmission reservation processing of a small-hit start display command when it is a small hit. In addition, the big hit start display command or the small hit start display command reserved for transmission in this process is the next production control command transmission process during the system timer interrupt process (Fig. 45
(see S522 of )), it is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 . The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S6081, the special symbol game determination process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

At S6082, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state transition determination processing. In this game state transition determination process, the "low probability game state transition determination process" to determine the transition to the low probability game state and the "non-time reduction game state transition determination process" to determine the transition to the non-time reduction game state Both processes are performed. After executing the process of S6082, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S608.
Move to 3.

In the low probability game state transition determination process, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag = 1 (high probability game state), and if the probability variation flag = 1, then it is determined whether the probability variation number = 0 Then, if probability variable number = 0, probability variable flag = 0 (low probability game state) is set, and the high probability game state is shifted to the low probability game state. Also, if the probability variation flag = 0, end the low probability gaming state transition determination process,
If the probability variable count is not 0, the low probability game state transition determination process is terminated while the probability variable flag = 1 is maintained.

In the non-time-saving gaming state transition determination process, it is determined whether or not the time-saving flag = 1 (time-saving gaming state), and if the time-saving flag = 1, then it is determined whether or not the time-saving number of times = 0 , If the number of times of time saving = 0, the time saving flag = 0 (non-time-saving game state) is set, and the time-saving game state is shifted to the non-time-saving game state. Also, if the time saving flag = 0, the non-time saving game state transition determination process is ended, and if the time saving number = 0, the non time saving game state transition determination process is ended while the time saving flag = 1 is held.

At S6083, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, the main CPU 201
When the special symbol game end processing is performed, the special symbol game determination processing is terminated, and the processing is returned to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187).

It should be noted that the main CPU 201 sets the interrupt prohibited section, and performs the above-described special symbol game determination process (
S6071 to S6081) are preferably performed within the interrupt disabled section.

[8-6-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 192, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S6083 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 191) will be described. Figure 192
is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

At S6092, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "0". Thus, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed,
The next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S6092, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6093.

At S6093, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. It should be noted that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is the sub-control circuit 3 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG.
00. After executing the process of S6093, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S6.
Go to 094.

At S6094, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S6094, the main CPU 201
The special symbol game end processing is ended, and the processing is returned to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 191).

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is a loss, the main CPU 201 sets or resets neither the variable probability flag nor the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the display mode of losing is derived, the game state does not shift.

[8-6-7. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 193, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S6026 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187) will be described. Figure 193 shows
It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special winning opening opening preparation process is called at S6026 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the big winning opening opening preparation process is called at S6026 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S6101).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" in S6101 (S61
01 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" in S6101 (
If S6101 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6102.

At S6102, the main CPU 201 loads the value of the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening. The value of the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening corresponds to the count value for counting the number of rounds in the big winning game state when the big winning game control process is executed, and when the small winning game control process is executed, the small winning game It corresponds to a count value that counts the number of times the control process is opened. It should be noted that the value of the large winning opening opening frequency counter is stored in the main RAM 203 in the large winning opening opening frequency counter. Main CP
After executing the process of S6102, U201 moves the process to S6103.

At S6103, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit value. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the hit type determination table shown in FIG. The upper limit of the number of times is 6 times.

If it is determined in S6103 that the counter value for the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit value (S
6103 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6104.

At S6104, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S6104)
By switching the control state number by performing
A jackpot end process (see S6028 in FIG. 187) will be performed. Main CPU20
1 executes the process of S6104 and then moves the process to S6105.

At S6105, the main CPU 201 performs game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command as transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command if after the jackpot game state ends, and if after the jackpot game state ends, a small hit. Transmission reservation processing of the end display command is performed (S6106).
It should be noted that the jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is the sub-control circuit 3 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG.
00. Then, after the process of S6106, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

Returning to S6103, if it is determined that the value of the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (
If the determination in S6103 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6107.

At S6107, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the counter value of the number of times the big winning opening has been opened. After executing the process of S6107, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S61.
Move to 08.

At S6108, the main CPU 201 performs selection processing of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, as the big winning opening to be opened, the first big winning opening 6131 is selected when the big winning game control process is executed, and the second big winning opening 6151 is selected when the small winning game control process is executed. be done. After executing the process of S6108, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6109.

In S6109, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the big winning opening, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening, the number of prize balls at the time of winning the big winning opening, etc. are set. In addition, it is not intended to exclude one round or a small winning game control process in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of opening and closing times of the big winning opening are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S6109, the main CPU 201
The process moves to S6110.

In the present embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to a maximum of 28000 msec, for example, when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to a maximum of 100 msec, for example, when executing the small winning game control process. be. The maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening is set to, for example, 10 at maximum when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to 4 at maximum when executing the small winning game control process. The number of prize balls at the time of winning the big prize is 6 for the first big prize
15 are set for 131, and 14 are set for the second big winning opening 6151. However, the values set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

In S6110, the main CPU 201 selects the big winning gate (first big winning gate 6131, second big winning gate 6131, second
A large winning opening opening setting process for opening the large winning opening 6151) is performed. Main CPU20
1 executes the process of S6110, and then moves the process to S6111.

At S6111, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S6111)
By switching the control state number by performing
The big winning opening control process (see S6027 in FIG. 187) will be performed. Main CP
After executing the process of S6111, U201 moves the process to S6112.

At S6112, the main CPU 201 performs reservation processing for transmission of the command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6112, the main CPU 201
The big winning opening preparation processing is ended, and the processing is returned to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187).

[8-6-8. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 194, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S6027 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described. Figure 194 shows
It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the sixth pachinko game machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening opening control process is called at S6027 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the big winning opening opening control process is called at S6027 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S6121).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" in S6121 (S61
21 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" in S6121 (
If S6121 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6122.

In S6122, the main CPU 201 selects the big winning gate (first big winning gate 6131, second big winning gate 6131,
It is determined whether or not the number of winning game balls is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the large winning opening winning counter that counts the winning number of game balls into the large winning opening is the maximum winning number. It should be noted that the value of the large winning opening winning counter counted by the large winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 .

In S6122, the main CPU 201 selects the big winning gate (first big winning gate 6131, second big winning gate 6131,
When it is determined that the number of winning game balls is not the maximum winning number, the process moves to S6123, and the big winning opening (first big winning opening 6131, second big winning opening 6151)
If it is determined that the number of winning game balls is the maximum winning number, the process goes to S6128.
Move to -1.

At S6128-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in the jackpot gaming state (jackpot flag is ON). If the main CPU 201 determines that it is in the jackpot game state, it shifts the process to S6124, and if it determines that it is not in the jackpot game state (that is, it is in the small win game state), it shifts the process to S6128-2. .

In S6123, the main CPU 201 selects the big winning gate (first big winning gate 6131, second big winning gate 6131, second
It is determined whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 6151) has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S6109 in FIG. 193) has passed.

If it is determined in S6123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning openings (first big winning opening 6131, second big winning opening 6151) has not passed (NO determination in S6123), main C
PU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, in S6123, the big winning opening (first big winning opening 6131, second big winning opening 6151)
has passed (YES in S6123), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6124.

In S<b>6124 , the main CPU 201 opens the big winning gate (first big winning gate 6131 , second big winning gate 6131 ,
A closing setting process for closing the big winning opening 6151) is performed. The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process of 6124, the process moves to S6125.

At S6125, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the special symbol control state number to "3". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S
6125) to switch the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (see S6026 in FIG. 187) is performed again. After executing the process of S6125, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6126.

At S6126, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S6126, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6127.

In S6127, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of an inter-round display command if it is in the jackpot gaming state. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is the effect control command transmission process (S32 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
2), it is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 . In addition, at the time of the small hit game state, transmission reservation processing of the inter-round display command is not performed. After the processing of S6127,
The main CPU 201 terminates the big winning opening control process and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 18).
7).

In S6128-2, the main CPU 201 opens the big winning gate (the first big winning gate 6131,
A closing setting process for closing the second big winning opening 6151) is performed. After executing the process of S6128-2, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6128-3.

At S6128-3, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process,
A jackpot end process (see S6028 in FIG. 187) will be performed. Main CPU20
1 executes the processing of S6128-3 and then shifts the processing to S6128-4.

At S6128-4, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S6128-4, the main CPU 201 executes the process of S6128-
Move to 5.

At S6128-5, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a small hit end display command. The small hit end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S6128-5, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

[8-6-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 195, the jackpot end processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S6028 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187) will be described. FIG. 195 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, S6 during the special symbol management process for which this jackpot end process is the first special symbol to be processed
When called by 028, the first special symbol is processed. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called in S6028 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S6131).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" in S6131 (S61
31 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) as well as the big win end process, and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 186). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" in S6131 (
If S6131 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6132.

At S6132, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various counter values related to the big win game state and the small win game state (large winning mouth opening number counter value, big winning mouth winning counter value, etc.), small winning flag, big winning flag, value of the pattern fixed number counter, special A process of clearing the symbol pause flag or the like is performed. After executing the process of S6132, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6133.

At S6133, the main CPU 201 performs game state setting processing. In this game state setting process, referring to the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 177, based on the selected symbol information, probability variable flag, probability variable number of times, time saving flag and time saving number of times are set. Specifically, as shown in the hit type determination table in FIG. 177, after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, set probability variation flag = 1 (high probability game state), set probability variation frequency = 120 Then, the time saving flag = 1 (time saving game state) is set, and the number of time saving times = 100 is set. Also, after the end of the jackpot game state with the second special symbol, set the probability variation flag = 1 (high probability game state), set the probability variation number = 120, set the time reduction flag = 1 (time reduction game state), When the game state at the time of winning when it is determined as a big win is the normal game state, the number of times of time saving is set to 100, and when the game state at the time of winning when it is determined as a big win is not the normal game state, the time saving is performed. Set the number of times=10000.
In addition, after the end of the small hit game state, none of the data of the probability variation flag, the probability variation number, the time saving flag and the time saving number of times is set. That is, the game state does not shift (change) with the small winning game state as a trigger. After executing the process of S5133, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6034.

At S6134, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 192 is performed. Main CPU20
1, after executing the processing of S6134, ends the jackpot end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[8-6-10. Normal symbol control process]
Next, referring to FIG. 196, in main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23), the main CPU
Normal symbol control processing executed by 201 will be described. Needless to say, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 196, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal symbol starting condition is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

FIG. 196 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the numerical values (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flow chart shown in FIG. 196 are control state numbers of normal symbols. The main CPU 201
By executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol, the normal symbol game is advanced.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the wait time for normal symbols is 0 (S6
300).

If it is determined in S6300 that the wait time for normal symbols is not 0, the main CPU 2
01 ends the normal symbol control process and shifts the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the wait time for normal symbols is 0, the main CPU 201
The process moves to S6301.

At S6301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol.
After executing the process of S6301, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6310. Note that the main CPU 201, based on the control state number read in the process of S6301,
Processing after 6310 is performed.

At S6310, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S6310 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". The details of this normal symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S
Move to 6320.

At S6320, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S6320 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6330.

In this normal symbol variable display ending process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbols has ended. The pattern confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) of the main R
It is set to the waiting time of the normal design in AM203, and the control state number of the normal design is set to "2". The waiting time of this normal design is subtracted as a normal design timer counter in the system timer interrupt processing performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. When the variable display time of the normal design is not finished, the control state number of the normal design is held at "1", and the end of the variable display time of the normal design is waited.

It should be noted that the normal symbol determination time may vary depending on the type of hit, and may vary according to the game state. For example, in the case of the normal game state, the first design confirmation time (for example, 540 msec), and in the case of the time saving game state, the second design confirmation time shorter than the first design confirmation time (for example, 132 msec). In particular, as in the sixth pachinko game machine, when creating a small hit RUSH, it is desirable to make the symbol fixation time extremely short in the time-saving game state.

At S6330, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This S6
The process of 330 is a process performed when the control state number of normal symbols is "2". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S
Move to 6340.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs determination processing of the normal symbol derivation result (for example, normal symbol win or normal symbol loss). Then, when the result of the hit determination process for the normal design is the hit for the normal design, the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 6146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal design is set to "3". On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a loss, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0" without performing the open pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 6146. - 特許庁

In the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 6146, the normal electric accessory 6146 is opened based on the game state and the selection symbol command at the time of the normal symbol hit by referring to the normal symbol per type determination table shown in FIG. A pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) is determined, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub CPU 301 a normal electric accessory release pattern command corresponding to the determined normal electric accessory 6146 release pattern.

At S6340, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This S6
The process of 340 is a process performed when the control state number of normal symbols is "3". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S
Transfer to 6350.

In this normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 201 performs the normal electric accessory 6146 opening process according to the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S6330. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric accessory 6146 is completed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

At S6350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol per end processing. This S6
The process of 350 is a process performed when the control state number of normal symbols is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol per end process, it ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this normal per symbol end process, the main CPU 201
In 40, a process of resetting (clearing) various parameters related to the normal design and various random numbers stored in the normal design determination area is performed.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the interrupt prohibition section, and the above-described normal symbol control process (S
6300 to S6350) is preferably performed within the interrupt disabled section.

[8-6-11. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 197, the details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 at S6310 during the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 196) will be described. FIG. 197 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 197, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" (S6311).

When it is determined in S6311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process, and shifts the process to the normal symbol control process (FIG. 19).
6). On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6312.

At S6312, the main CPU 201 shifts the normal symbol starting information. In this process, the start information stored in the normal symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol determination area (0), and the normal symbol start storage area (2) to the normal symbol start storage area (4). The start information stored in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to normal symbol start storage area (3). After executing the process of S6312, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6313.

At S6313, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG.
Based on the game state and the normal symbol hit determination random number value stored in the normal symbol determination area (0), hit/lose determination value data ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol loss") is determined. After executing the process of S6313, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6314.

At S6314, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. Based on the symbol random number value of the symbol, the ``selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol'' is determined.
After executing the process of S6314, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6315.

At S6315, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. A variation pattern and a variable display time of normal symbols are determined. After executing the process of S6315, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6316.

At S6316, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the normal symbol variable display time determined in the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S6315) is set to the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the normal symbol variable display is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 161. to start. The waiting time for this normal design is, for example, 2m
It will be subtracted as a normal symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process performed at the sec cycle. After executing the process of S6316, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6317.

At S6317, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of the normal symbol variable display start process,
Normal symbol variable display end processing (see S6320 in FIG. 196) will be performed. After executing the process of S6317, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6318.

At S6318, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the normal symbol variation pattern command. In addition, the fluctuation pattern command of the normal design reserved for transmission in this process is
Production control command transmission processing during the next system timer interrupt processing (see S322 in FIG. 45)
, is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 .

[8-7. Small hit RUSH]
In the sixth pachinko game machine described above, it is possible to achieve a "small win RUSH". Below, the mechanism of the small hit RUSH will be described.

In the sixth pachinko gaming machine, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the frequency of the game ball entering the second large winning opening 6151 is in another game state (for example, the normal game state, the high-probability short-time gaming state, the low-probability By being increased compared to the time-saving game state), the expected value of the game value paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) becomes a small hit RUSH that can exceed 1.

As shown in FIG. 173, a game ball hit to the right almost passes through the passage gate 6126 and the normal electric accessory unit 6145 . In the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, since the non-time-saving gaming state is controlled, it is difficult for the general electricity shutter 6147 to be in the open mode (see FIGS. 182 to 184), and the general electricity shutter 6147 protrudes from the game panel 6100 and guides the game balls rolling on the general electric shutter 6147 to the second big winning opening 6151 and the second starting opening 6140 .

Therefore, if the second big winning hole 6151 is open, the game ball struck to the right is guided to the normal electric shutter 6147 and can enter the second big winning hole 6151 . Each time a game ball enters the second big winning hole 6151, for example, 14 game balls are paid out.

Then, when the game ball enters the second starting port 6140, a stop display indicating a small hit with an extremely high probability of 1/1.07 (approximate) as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 175). Not only the mode is derived, but also super shortened variation with extremely short variable display time is executed as shown in the variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed gaming state (see FIG. 181 (a)), so the second If the frequency of the game ball entering the big winning hole 6151 is different from the game state (for example,
Normal game state, high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state).

In this way, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, it is possible to realize a small hit RUSH in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1. It has become.

On the other hand, in the game state (high-precision time-saving gaming state, low-precision time-saving gaming state) in which the time-saving gaming state is controlled, the general electric shutter 6147 is likely to be an open state buried in the game panel 6100 (see FIGS. 182 to 184) , Most of the right-handed game balls enter the first starting hole (right) 6120B. Therefore, even if the second big winning port 6151 is open, the second
The expected value that the game ball wins in the big winning hole 6151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball enters the first starting port (right) 6120B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out.

In this way, in the game state in which the time-saving game state is controlled (high-probability time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), the game value paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.)
The expected value of is set not to exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, but if right-handed hitting is performed, since the non-time-saving gaming state is controlled, the right-handed game ball is the second start port 614
A game ball can enter 0. However, as described above, as shown in the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state (see FIG. 179), when the game ball is entered into the second starting port 6140, the special symbols are variable. Since the first half variation pattern of ``long variation'' in which the display time is set to be extremely long is determined, the number of lotteries of the second special symbols per unit time is made extremely small, and the player hits right in the normal game state. not configured.

In addition, in the present embodiment, although it is configured to be a small hit RUSH in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, it is not limited to this. For example, there is a special figure reduction control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol without executing the electric sapo control that increases the frequency of opening the first start port (right) 6120B by operating the normal electric accessory 6146. Small hit RUSH in the high-probability short-time gaming state to be executed
You may make it become.

[8-8. Production flow]
Next, the outline of the effect performed in the sixth pachinko game machine will be described using the flow of the entire effect. FIG. 198 is an example of the production flow of the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. Moreover, FIG. 199 is an example of the production|presentation flow of the right-handed game state in the 6th pachinko game machine.

(Direction flow in normal game state)
In the normal game state of hitting left, the game ball can be entered into the first start hole (middle) 6120A, and the variable display of the decorative symbols for the first special symbol, the display effect of the character, etc., the sound effect, The change effect of the operation mode of the effect button device 6310, etc. are performed. In the present embodiment, the decorative patterns are composed of three main patterns, ie, a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern, and sub-patterns that are much smaller than the main patterns. Note that the number and types of decorative patterns are not limited to this.

In addition, in the normal game state of the sixth pachinko game machine, the game is characterized mainly by collecting "character icons" and aiming for a big win.

When a game ball enters the first start opening (middle) 6120A, all decorative symbols start to be displayed in a random manner at high speed in the display area of the display device 7 ("variation start of all symbols").

When all the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to perform any of the "line notice", "button challenge notice", and "cherry blossom accumulation notice". note that,
Other notices may be possible.

"Dialogue notice" is, for example, one character is displayed from a plurality of characters,
This is an advance notice effect suggesting that the result of the lottery for the first special symbol is likely to be a big hit by the displayed words of the character.

The "button challenge notice" is, for example, by operating the effect button device 6310 multiple times (continuous hits).
Then, a predetermined number of "character icons" or "character icons" indicating the degree of expectation of a big win (eg, intense heat) and the content of developing reach (eg, SP) can be obtained or not. is. It should be noted that there are cases where none of the icons can be acquired for the "button challenge notice".

In the "cherry blossom accumulation notice", for example, cherry blossoms are scattered over the entire display area of the display device 7, and the cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a (see FIG. 173) of the display device 7, and the cherry blossoms are accumulated step by step. It is a preview performance. Then, when the accumulated cherry blossoms are released, a predetermined number of "character icons" or "gokudo icons" indicating that they will develop into "road to ultimate battle" are displayed, and "gokudo icons" are displayed. And develops into "the road to the ultimate battle". These cherry blossoms can be accumulated up to 3 stages over the fluctuation or multiple fluctuations due to prefetching, and the more cherry blossoms accumulate, the more expected the "gangster icon" will be displayed, and the " It is set so that the number of "character icons" increases. The details of the effects of this "cherry blossom accumulation notice" will be described later with reference to FIGS.

When the number of "character icons" displayed so far is five ("obtain 5 character icons"), it progresses to "road to decisive battle".

After all patterns start to fluctuate, after the left and right patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed ("right and left pattern temporary stop"), it will be "losing" in which all patterns are stopped and displayed, or will it be a "pseudo continuous fanning effect"? It is possible to perform one of the "normal reach" effects.

In the "pseudo continuous fanning effect", the right symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed is displayed again (right symbol sliding), and it is an effect to incite whether or not the "character icon" will stop at the position of the middle symbol. Then, when the "character icon" stops at the position of the middle symbol, the above-described "pseudo continuous effect" is performed, and if the "character icon" does not stop at the position of the middle symbol, it becomes "lost". In addition, multiple "character icons" can also be stopped at the position of the middle pattern.

"Normal ready-to-win" is a ready-to-win effect that is performed when the left and right symbols are of the same type. In the ``normal reach'', if the middle pattern is stopped and displayed in a pattern different from the left and right patterns, it is ``losing'', and if the middle pattern is stopped and displayed in the same kind of pattern as the left and right patterns, it is ``big hit''. In addition, in the "Normal Reach" mode, if the "Character Icon" stops at the position of the middle symbol without being displayed, it will develop into a "Pseudo Continuous Effect", and if the middle symbol changes at high speed, the "Ninja Reach" will appear. ” develops into.

"Ninja Reach" is a reach performance in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than normal reach. In ``Ninja Reach'', if the middle pattern is stopped and displayed in a pattern different from the left and right patterns, it is ``losing'', and if the middle pattern is stopped and displayed in the same kind of pattern as the left and right patterns, it is ``big hit''. In addition, in the "Ninja Reach", if the medium symbol is not stopped and displayed and the "Great Battle Icon" stops at the position of the middle symbol, it develops into the "Great Battle Reach".

In addition, when the "character icon" stops and the "pseudo continuous effect" is performed, if the number of "character icons" displayed so far is five (acquisition of five character icons), the "pseudo continuous effect ”
Develops into "Road to the Decisive Battle" without performing

"Road to the decisive battle" and "Road to the decisive battle" refer to the same type of specific icon that allows the player to operate the production button device 6310 a predetermined number of times and collect up to a specific number (10) of "character icons". It is a production of In this "Road to the decisive battle" and "Road to the decisive battle", see Figure 220-
This will be described later with reference to FIG.

"Road to the Decisive Battle" has already acquired five character icons, so the effect is to have the player operate the effect button device 6310 five times to collect the remaining five "character icons". be.

"Road to the ultimate battle" is an effect in which the player operates the effect button device 6310 10 times to collect 10 "character icons" since the character icon has not yet been acquired.

And the "character icons" collected in "Road to the Decisive Battle" or "Road to the Final Battle"
If is less than 10 (“Acquisition of less than 10 character icons”), it develops into “Confrontation Reach”,
If 10 "character icons" are collected ("10 character icons are acquired"), it develops into "great decisive battle reach".

"Confrontation Reach" is a reach performance in which the expectation of a big win is higher than that of Ninja Reach. is. Furthermore, in the "Confrontation Reach", a reach production using the "Character Icons" collected in the "Road to the Decisive Battle" will be performed. In addition, in the "showdown reach", when the "great battle icon" stops at the position of the medium pattern, the "showdown reach" develops into the "great battle reach". 223 and 22
4 will be described later.

"Big Battle Reach" is a reach effect with the highest expectation of a big hit among the reach effects in the normal game state. It is a reach production that will be "losing" if defeated.

(Production flow in right-handed game state)
Among the right-handed game states, in the "high-probability short-time game state" and "low-probability short-time game state", the game ball can enter the first start port (right) 6120B, and as a special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol By giving priority to the first special symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol for the first special symbol, the display effect of the character, etc., the voice effect, the change effect of the operation mode of the effect button device 6310, etc. are performed. In addition, in the "high probability non-time-saving gaming state", the game ball can enter the second start port 6140, and the second special symbol is preferentially corresponded as the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol, and the second special symbol Variable display of decorative patterns, display effects such as characters, voice effects, and effect button device 6
310, the change effect of the operation mode, etc. are performed. In the right-handed game state, when only the first special symbol or only the second special symbol is variably displayed, the special symbol variably displayed is made to correspond to the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol. may

First start port (right) 6120
When the game ball enters B, in the display area of the display device 7, all the decorative symbols start to fluctuate and display at high speed ("variation start of all symbols"). In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 6140 in the "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state", in the display area of the display device 7, all the decorative patterns are scattered and start changing at high speed ("all patterns start of fluctuation”).

When all the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to perform either the "notice inside the jewel" or the "notice of the lotus flower".

The "hoju inside notice" is, for example, a notice effect for displaying the degree of expectation of a big hit (for example, intense heat) in the upper display area 7a of the display device 7 (see FIG. 173).

The “lotus flower notice” is, for example, a notice effect suggesting that a bud is displayed and the bud opens to develop into a “door opening effect”. The display of the buds can be displayed over a plurality of fluctuations due to the look-ahead, and the display of the buds is continued even when the small winning game state is being performed. See Fig. 2
25 will be described later.

In addition, in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state", it is possible to perform the reach production of "battle challenge" or "battle reach".

In the "battle challenge", the production button device 6310 changes to the fourth operation mode (Fig. 172 (
d)), when the upward projecting second effect operation part 6312 is operated once (one hit) and the effect accessory group 58 (see FIG. 173) falls, the reach effect of the first special symbol big hit is.

In the "battle reach", the friendly character and the enemy boss face each other, and each time the friendly character attacks, the production button device 6310 changes (grows) in the operation mode, and the final operation mode of the production button device 6310 is reached. , and when the performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 173) falls, it is a ready-to-win performance in which the first special symbol hits the jackpot. Details of the effects of this "Battle Reach" will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In addition, in the "high-probability non-time-saving game state", it is possible to perform a reach effect of "door opening effect" or "eye opening effect".

"Door opening performance" is a ready-to-win performance in which the performance button device 6310 is operated (continuously hit) a plurality of times to gradually open the door, and when the door is completely opened, the second special symbol is a big hit.

The "eye-opening effect" is a ready-to-win effect in which the ally character gradually opens its eyes, and when the eye-opening succeeds, the second special symbol becomes a big hit.

In addition, the above-mentioned "development" includes the display of necessary information when the game or production progresses, or the progress of the game or production itself, and directly or indirectly progresses the game or production. It is a concept that includes In addition, in the "development" that displays necessary information when the game or performance progresses, predetermined development information (for example, icons, etc.) is displayed, or the displayed development information is displayed by adding or subtracting it. It is a concept that also includes doing.

[8-9. sub control circuit]
In order to execute the effects as described above, the contents of control of the sub-control circuit 300 based on various commands and the like transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 will be described.

First, details of various tables stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 209. FIG.

[8-9-1. Symbol effect pattern determination table in normal game state]
A symbol effect pattern determination table for determining symbol effect patterns in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 200 is an example of a symbol effect pattern determination table in a normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine.

The "symbol effect pattern" is the information that defines the display effect of the related characters and the like, the sound effect, the change effect of the operation mode of the effect button device 6310, etc. Say. In addition to the pattern effect pattern, various display effects such as an advance notice effect pattern can be superimposed and executed.

In addition, the pattern production patterns in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine are a "pre-reach production pattern" corresponding to the first half variation pattern of the special symbols and a "ready-to-win production pattern" corresponding to the second half variation pattern of the special symbols. It is composed of a combination of

As shown in FIG. 200, the symbol effect pattern determination table in the normal game state includes, in the first special symbol, the "first half variation pattern number" of the variation pattern command of the first special symbol,
The "second half icon number" and the "pre-reach effect pattern" in which the character icons to be described later are displayed in the latter half are associated with each other, and the "second half variation pattern number" and the "second half icon number" of the variation pattern command of the first special symbol are associated. ” and the “reach effect pattern” are associated with each other.
When the second half variation pattern number is "00H", the "effect end information" is determined so that only the pre-reach effect pattern is executed as the ready-to-win effect pattern.

In this embodiment, the combination of the first half variation pattern number (09H to 10H) and the second half variation pattern number (14H to 16H, 24H to 26H) reaches the "road to the final battle" or "road to the final battle" After execution of any one of the pre-production patterns 9-32, any one of the ready-to-reach production patterns 4-8 and 12-16 of "showdown reach" or "great decisive battle reach" can be executed. And the pre-reach production patterns 9-32 of "road to decisive battle" or "road to ultimate battle" are also reach production patterns 4-8 of "showdown reach" or "great decisive battle reach",
12 to 16 are also determined based on the "number of icons in the second half". , 16 are executed, and if the number of icons in the second half is 8 or 9, the ready-to-win effect patterns 4 to 7 and 12 to 15 of "showdown reach" can be executed.

In the symbol effect pattern determination table in the normal game state, in the second special symbol, all the variation pattern commands of the second special symbol are associated with the "standby effect pattern".

This "standby effect pattern" is a sub-symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, while the three main symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are kept on standby (stopped display) without being variably displayed as decorative symbols. Only is displayed blinking. Even if this standby effect pattern is executed, the so-called irregular variation can be quietly ended without the player paying attention to the variable display of the second special symbol.

[8-9-2. Symbol effect pattern determination table for right-handed game state]
A symbol effect pattern determination table for determining a symbol effect pattern in the right-handed game state will be described. FIG. 201 is an example of a symbol effect pattern determination table for a right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 201, the symbol effect pattern determination table for the right-handed gaming state includes special symbol variation pattern commands (first half variation pattern number, second half variation pattern number), selection rate (first random number), and ""symbol production pattern" is associated.

Here, the "selection rate" corresponds to the fact that the obtained first random number value is within a predetermined range with respect to the first random number value consisting of the first random number range. , is read as the selectivity. The selectivity may include 0% as well as 1 to 100%, and the term 0% selectivity is not excluded. 202 to 20
The same applies to the "selection rate" in the table shown in 9 and the like. In this embodiment,
Since a large number of different random number ranges are provided, the description of the random number types will be omitted as appropriate.

Also, the first symbol effect pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command of the first special symbol, and the second symbol effect pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command of the second special symbol. When both of the second symbol production patterns are executed at the same time (such as when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating simultaneously), the "high probability time-saving game state" or the "low probability time-saving game state" , priority is given to execution of the first symbol effect pattern, and priority is given to execution of the second symbol effect pattern in the “high-probability non-time-saving gaming state”. ,

[8-9-3. Normal game state second half icon number determination table]
The second half icon number determination table for determining the second half icon number in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 202 is an example of the second half icon number determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the determination of the number of icons in the second half is performed prior to determination of the symbol effect pattern (see FIG. 200) in the normal game state.

"Second half icon count" refers to the total number of character icons that are displayed in the end in "Road to the Decisive Battle" and "Road to the Final Battle", and in this embodiment, the maximum number is 10. However, the number is not limited. In addition, the "number of icons in the second half" includes the number of "icons in the first half", which will be described later, and the relational expression "number of icons in the second half"="number of icons in the first half"+α is established.

As shown in FIG. 202, in the second half icon number determination table, the variation pattern command (second half variation pattern number) of the first special symbol, the selection rate (second random value), and the "second half icon number" are associated with each other. It is

In this embodiment, when the "great decisive battle ready-to-win (ready-to-win effect pattern 8, 16: see FIG. 200)" is performed corresponding to the second half variation pattern number (16H, 26H), the maximum number of icons in the second half is 10. The second half icon number determination table is configured so that the number of icons is determined. As a result, when 10 character icons are finally displayed in the "Road to the Decisive Battle" or the "Road to the Decisive Battle", the "Great Decisive Battle Reach" will be performed.

[8-9-4. Normal game state first half icon number determination table]
The first half icon number determination table for determining the first half icon number in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 203 is an example of the first half icon number determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "number of icons in the first half" refers to the total number of character icons that are displayed in the end in the "normal variation" and "pseudo continuous effect". is not limited.

As shown in FIG. 203, in the first half icon number determination table, the first special symbol winning command (first half variation pattern number), selection rate (third random number value), and "first half icon number" are associated with each other. ing.

Here, the "first special symbol winning command" is, as described in the first pachinko gaming machine, information to increase the number of reserved first special symbols by 1, or variation pattern information of the first special symbol ( That is, it is a command including a variation pattern command of the first special symbol) and the like. This first
The special symbol winning command is reserved for transmission when the game ball enters the first start port 6120A, 6120B (see S397 in FIG. 52), and the next production control command transmission process during the system timer interrupt process (Fig. 45), it is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300. FIG. This is the same for the "second special symbol winning command" described later (Fig. 52
(see S403 of ).

In this embodiment, the number of icons in the first half is determined so that the maximum number of icons in the first half is 5 when "Road to the Decisive Battle" is played corresponding to the first half variation pattern numbers (09H to 0FH). A decision table is constructed. This makes it possible to use "normal variation" and "
When five character icons are finally displayed in the "pseudo continuous effect", the "road to decisive battle" is performed.

[8-9-5. Normal game state first half icon number determination table]
The first half icon display scenario determination table for determining the first half icon display scenario in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 204 is an example of the first half icon display scenario determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "first half icon display scenario" is where the character icons of the first half icon number are
This is the information that determines when and how many items to display, when to display, when to display, and how many to display.

As shown in FIG. 204, the first half icon display scenario determination table includes the first special symbol winning command (first half variation pattern number), the determined number of first half icons, and the selection rate (
fourth random number) and the "first half icon display scenario" are associated.

In the rightmost column of the first half icon display scenario determination table, "contents of the first half icon display scenario" are shown for reference. In addition, the 'variation' refers to the variable display of the decorative design based on the lottery for the special design for the starting information for which the first half icon display scenario was determined.

In this embodiment, the first half icon display scenario is configured such that one or a plurality of character icons can be displayed each time the pseudo continuous effect is performed one to three times. As a result, the player can expect that the character icon will be added each time the pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first half icon display scenario is configured so that one or more character icons can be displayed in the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" or the "button challenge notice" before the pseudo continuous effect is performed. there is The execution timings of the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" and the "button challenge notice" are different, and both are configured to be executable.

[8-9-6. Normal game state first half icon set order scenario determination table]
The first half icon gathering order scenario determination table for determining the first half icon gathering order scenario in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 205 is an example of an icon set order scenario determination table in the first half of the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "first half assembly order scenario" refers to information that defines the display order in which character icons of types corresponding to the number of icons in the first half are to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 205, the first half icon assembly order scenario determination table includes the winning command of the first special symbol, the determined first half icon number, the selection rate (fifth random value), and the "first half assembly order scenario." are associated with.

In the rightmost column of the first half icon display scenario determination table, "contents of the first half assembly order scenario" are shown for reference. Character icons A to E in the "Western army mode" described later are illustrated as "A" to "E", and character icons F to J in the "Eastern army mode" described later are illustrated as "F" to "J". showing. In addition, although details will be described later with reference to FIG. J.
display positions correspond and have similar roles.

The numbers at the end of the first half collection order scenarios shown in FIG. 205 indicate “first half icon count”−“display order pattern”. Display order pattern 1” is shown.

In this embodiment, as the "display order pattern" of the first half set order scenario,
Character icons are displayed in order from A (F) to the top (see FIG. 214) such as “A→B→C→D→E (F→G→H→I→J)”. Pattern 1" and
E(J) is the last, and D(I
) in which the character icons are displayed in order (see FIG. 214).
"When,
After displaying D (I) such as "D → A → B → C → E (I → F → G → H → J)", A
Returning to (F), "display order pattern 3" in which the character icons are displayed in order from A (F) upward (see FIG. 214);
Character icons are displayed in order from E (J) to the bottom (see FIG. 214) such as “E→D→C→B→A (J→I→H→G→F)”. pattern 4”. Note that the number of display order patterns and the content of the order are not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, "display order pattern 1" is a normal display order pattern, "display order pattern 2" is a display order pattern that improves the expectation of a big hit, and "display order pattern 3" is a pseudo consecutive notice. The display order pattern "display order pattern 4", which suggests that the road of the decisive battle or the road of the ultimate decisive battle, is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the order in which the characters are displayed also makes it possible to make the player interested in future game contents and to improve the interest in the game.

[8-9-7. Sakura Accumulation Notice Determination Table in Normal Game State]
The cherry blossom accumulation advance notice determination table for determining the cherry blossom accumulation advance notice in the normal game state will now be described. FIG. 206 is an example of a cherry blossom accumulation advance notice determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 206, the cherry blossom accumulation advance notice determination table is determined by "first special symbol winning command (first half variation pattern number)", "first special symbol pending number", and first half icon display scenario. "Number of character icons displayed" (Fig. 20
4), the selection rate (sixth random value), and the "cherry blossom accumulation notice effect pattern" are associated with each other.

In the rightmost column of the cherry blossom accumulation advance notice determination table, "contents of the cherry blossom accumulation advance notice effect pattern" are shown for reference. In addition, the 'variation' refers to the variable display of the decorative pattern performed based on the lottery for the special pattern for the starting information for which the cherry blossom accumulation notice effect pattern was determined. "Advance fluctuation" means the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern that is started before "the relevant fluctuation". Regarding this preliminary variation, it is executed a plurality of times according to the reserved number of the first special symbols, and if the reserved number of the first special symbols is 4, the preliminary variation will be performed three times from the next variation, If the reserved number of the first special symbol is 3, two preliminary variations will be executed from the next variation, and if the reserved number of the first special symbol is 2, one preliminary variation will be performed from the next variation. will be executed. In the present embodiment, up to two advance fluctuations can be executed, but up to three advance fluctuations may be executed.

As mentioned above, the "Sakura Accumulation Notice" is a notice effect that accumulates cherry blossoms in stages, and when the accumulated cherry blossoms are released, a predetermined number of "character icons" or "gangster icons" are displayed. It is the content to be done. For this reason, it can be said that the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" is composed of a step effect of accumulating cherry blossoms in stages and an icon display effect of displaying an icon.

Then, the step effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executable over the pre-variation and the variation, and the icon display effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executable in the variation.

In addition, in the cherry blossom accumulation notice, the cherry blossoms flutter over the entire display area of the display device 7 and are about to be sucked into the upper display area 7a (see FIG. 173) of the display device 7, but the cherry blossoms are not accumulated. It is also possible to execute a failed notice effect (Cherry blossom accumulation 0 stage notice -YK0). This will
It is possible to increase the appearance rate of the cherry blossom accumulation notice as a whole and give interest in whether or not the cherry blossoms are accumulated.

In the present embodiment, every time the step effect of cherry blossom accumulation advance notice develops (one step advance notice of cherry blossom accumulation <
The cherry blossom accumulation advance notice decision table is configured so that the degree of expectation for the "gangster icon" to be displayed and the number of "character icons" to be displayed increase for the cherry accumulation 2nd advance notice <sakura accumulation 3rd advance notice). It is As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the development of the stage presentation (accumulation of cherry blossoms), and to improve the interest of the game. In particular, the stage production of the cherry blossom accumulation notice,
Since it is configured to be executable over the prior fluctuation and the relevant fluctuation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game over a plurality of fluctuations.

[8-9-8. Support Icon Display Scenario Determination Table for Confrontation Reach in Normal Game State]
A support icon display scenario determination table for displaying support icons in confrontation reach in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 207 is an example of a support icon display scenario determination table for confrontation reach in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "support icon display scenario" means that the player's directing button device 6
This is the display content displayed by the support icon triggered by the operation of 310, and refers to information determined in association with the number of operations of the effect button device 6310 and the display content. Further, the “support icon” of the confrontation reach will be described in detail later using FIGS. 223 and 224. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 207, the support icon display scenario determination table includes a ready-to-win effect pattern corresponding to the showdown reach (see FIG. 200), the determined number of icons in the second half, the selection rate (seventh random value), and " support icon display scenario".

In the rightmost column of the support icon display scenario determination table, "support icon display scenario" is shown for reference. Here, "line" means that the character's line corresponding to the support icon is displayed, "opportunity" means that the characters of opportunity are displayed and that there is an expectation of a big win, and "excitement". shows that the character of intense heat is displayed and the expectation of a big hit is higher than "opportunity". Further, "LED" means that the LED group 46 performs predetermined light emission, and "great battle" means that a "great battle icon" is displayed. Note that the contents displayed by the "support icon display scenario" are not limited to the above, and include "change of pending image" for changing the display mode of the pending image, and " Characters such as "Direction Accessory" and "Change of Directive Button" that changes the operation mode of the directive button device 6310 may be displayed.

In this embodiment, reach production pattern 6 that develops from confrontation reach to decisive battle reach
, 7, 14, and 15, the support icon display scenario determination table is configured so that the "great battle icon" is always displayed. As a result, when the "great battle icon" is displayed by the support icon of the confrontation reach, the great battle reach can be performed.

[8-9-9. Lotus flower advance notice determination table in right-handed game state]
The lotus blossom advance notice determination table for determining the lotus blossom advance notice in the right-handed game state will now be described. FIG. 208 is an example of a lotus blossom advance notice determination table for a right-handed gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 208, the lotus flower advance notice determination table includes "second special symbol winning command (first half variation pattern number and second half variation pattern number)", "number of reserved second special symbols", and selection A rate (eighth random value) is associated with a "lotus flower forewarning effect pattern".

As described above, the "lotus flower notice" is a notice effect suggesting that a bud is displayed and the bud opens to develop into a "door opening effect". The display of the buds is based on multiple fluctuations (
prior variation).

As for the lotus flower notice effect pattern, a notice effect pattern of "lotus flower success notice" and a notice effect pattern of "lotus flower failure notice" are prepared. The notice effect pattern of "Lotus Flower Success Notice" will be displayed from the next change (previous change) after the decision of the lotus flower notice effect pattern triggered by the winning command of the second special symbol. It is a production pattern in which the buds will open. In addition, the notice effect pattern of "lotus flower failure notice" is displayed from the next change (previous change) after the decision of the lotus flower notice effect pattern triggered by the winning command of the second special symbol. It is a production pattern that buds disappear when it changes.

In this embodiment, when the "door opening effect" is performed corresponding to the first half variation pattern numbers (41H, 45H), the notice effect pattern of "lotus flower success notice" is determined at a predetermined selection rate. , the lotus flower advance notice determination table is configured. As a result, after the lotus flower success notice is performed, the door opening effect is performed.

[8-9-10. Fan notice decision table of jackpot game state]
A folding fan announcement determination table for determining the folding fan announcement in the jackpot game state will be described. FIG. 209 is an example of a folding fan advance notice determination table for a jackpot game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "fan notice" in the jackpot game state is that in the jackpot game state with the first special symbol, every time a game ball enters the first jackpot 6131, the fan falls from the display area of the display device 7. This is a notice suggesting whether or not the start information stored in the special symbol start storage area is a big hit by the color of the folding fan. That is, in the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, it is a notice suggesting a so-called reserve consecutive house. In addition, in the present embodiment, the "fan notice" is performed only in the jackpot game state with the first special symbol, but the "fan notice" is also performed in the jackpot game state with the second special symbol. You may

In addition, the "fan notice" indicates that the number of reserved second special symbols is two, which is the upper limit number (the start information is stored in each of the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (2). ) is the condition. In addition, regardless of the number of reserved second special symbols, the "fan notice" may be performed.

As shown in FIG. 209, the fan notice determination table includes the first special symbol start storage area (1
) ~ (4) start information (jackpot information, round information) stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) ~ (2) start information (jackpot information, round information) stored in ,
The selection rate (the ninth random number value) is associated with the "fan announcement effect pattern".

Also, the big-hit information means a big-hit judging random number value to be judged as a big-hit, and the round information means a pattern random number value for determining the number of rounds in the big-hit game state.

In addition, the fan notice production pattern is a notice production pattern of "white fan notice" in which a white fan falls, a notice production pattern of "red fan notice" in which a red fan falls, and a notice production pattern of "rainbow fan" in which a rainbow-colored fan falls. A notice effect pattern of "Notice" and a notice effect pattern of "Gold Fan Notice" in which a golden folding fan falls are prepared.

In the present embodiment, the notice effect pattern of "red fan notice" suggests that the start information of the jackpot of 3R or more (3R, 5R, 10R) is stored in the first special symbol start storage area. The lotus blossom notice determination table is constructed such that the notice performance pattern of "rainbow fan notice" suggests that the start information of the 10R jackpot is stored in the first special symbol start storage area.

In addition, the lotus blossom notice determination table is constructed such that the notice performance pattern of "golden fan notice" suggests that the 2R jackpot start information is stored in the second special symbol start storage area. .

For this reason, the notice effect pattern of "red fan notice" and the notice effect pattern of "rainbow fan notice" are fan notices suggesting a big hit with the first special symbol, and the notice effect pattern of "golden fan notice". can be said to be a fan announcement suggesting a big hit with the second special pattern.

In the present embodiment, when the start information of the big hit is stored in both the first special symbol start storage area and the second special symbol start storage area, the second special symbol big hit is suggested. The notice effect pattern of "notice" can not be determined, and the notice effect pattern of "red fan notice" or "rainbow fan notice" that suggests the big hit of the first special pattern can be determined. A flower notice determination table is configured.

[8-9-11. Sub control circuit processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described. FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the sixth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 210, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S6500).
. In this initialization processing, for example, initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup recovery initialization, and the like is performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 causes the process to proceed to S6510.
to

Note that the initialization process (S6500) described above is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared.

In S6510, the sub CPU 301 performs data input processing for inputting data.
In this data input processing, reading processing of the command input port 308 and effect button device 63
10 input processing and both processing are performed.

In the reading process of the command input port 308, the command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 set in the command input port 308 is read.

In addition, in the input processing of the effect button device 6310 , operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the effect button device 6310 is input from the button control circuit 310 . In addition, when the operation information is input from the button control circuit 310, the sub CPU 301 determines whether to validate or invalidate the input operation information.
Set the reception time for permitting input of operation information, the valid time for validating the input operation information, and the invalid period for invalidating the input operation information.

When the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button device 6310 are finished, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6520.

In S6520, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S6510 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6530.

At S6530, the sub CPU 301 executes effect mode determination processing. In this process, for example, based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 201, a production pattern is determined, and based on the determined production pattern, various requests (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, etc.) for operating various production devices are executed. , lamp requests, accessory requests, production button drive requests, etc.). Details of this rendering mode determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After completing this process, the sub CPU 3
01 moves the process to S6540.

In S6540, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 174). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6550.

In S6550, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 174). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control for causing the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 .
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6560.

In S6560, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends the LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 174).
Send to The LED control circuit 306 receives the message (L
ED request), light emission control for lighting or blinking all or part of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 is performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301
The process moves to S6570.

At S6570, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the role product request to the role product control circuit 307 (see FIG. 174). Based on a message (a role request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301, the role control circuit 307 controls the performance drive motor (not shown) for all or part of the performance roles constituting the performance role group 58. Performs drive control for operation. After completing this process, the sub-C
PU 301 moves the process to S6580.

At S6580, the sub CPU 301 executes effect button control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an effect button drive request to the button control circuit 310 (see FIG. 174). The button control circuit 310 changes the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 based on a message (effect button drive request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301, and performs drive control such as vibrating the effect button device 6310. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit process.

[8-9-12. Production Mode Determination Process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 211, details of the effect mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 at S6530 during the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 210) will be described. Figure 211 shows
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation mode determination process in a 6th pachinko game machine.

At S6531, the sub CPU 301 executes effect mode determination processing. In this process, based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 7, the mode of the sound effect output from the speaker 32, the effect button device 6310
A production pattern that defines the operation mode of is determined. Details of this rendering mode determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213. FIG. After completing this process, the sub CPU 30
1 moves the process to S6532.

In S6532, the sub CPU 301 executes animation request generation processing. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the production pattern determined in S6531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6533.

In S6533, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing request generation processing. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S6532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6534.

In S6534, the sub CPU 301 executes sound request generation processing. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S6531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6535.

In S6535, the sub CPU 301 executes lamp request generation processing.
In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S6531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6536.

In S6536, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product request generation process. In this process, a role product request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S6531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6537.

At S6537, the sub CPU 301 executes a process of generating a performance button drive request. In this process, an effect button drive request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S6531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 210).

[8-9-13. Effect pattern decision processing]
Next, referring to FIGS. 212 and 213, S6 in the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 211)
Details of the effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 at 531 will be described. 212 and 213 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect pattern determination process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In S6531-1, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is the "first special symbol winning command".

When it is determined in S6531-1 that it is the "first special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-2. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "first special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-7.

At S6531-2, the sub CPU 301 updates the reserved number of the first special symbols,
A first pending update display process for updating and displaying a pending image corresponding to the pending number of first special symbols is performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-3.

At S6531-3, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the current game state is the "normal game state".

When it is determined in S6531-3 that it is in the "normal game state", the sub CPU 301
moves the process to S6531-4. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 301 determines that it is not in the “normal gaming state”, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-7.

In S6531-4, the sub CPU 301 performs first half icon number determination processing for determining the number of first half icons in the normal game state.

In the first half icon number determination process, the first half icon number determination table shown in FIG. 203 is referred to, and the first half icon number is determined based on the winning command of the first special symbol and the third random number value. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-5.

In S6531-5, the sub CPU 301 performs icon scenario determination processing. In this icon scenario determination process, both the first half icon display scenario determination process for determining the first half icon display scenario and the first half assembly order scenario determination process for determining the first half assembly order scenario are performed.

In the first half icon display scenario determination process, the first half icon display scenario determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, the first half icon display scenario is determined.

In the first half collection order scenario determination process, the first half icon collection order scenario determination table shown in FIG. , determine the first half set order scenario.

When both the first half icon display scenario determination process and the first half assembly order scenario determination process are completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-6.

In S6531-6, the sub CPU 301 performs cherry blossom accumulation advance notice determination processing for determining the cherry blossom accumulation advance notice in the normal game state.

In the cherry blossom accumulation advance notice determination process, the cherry accumulation advance notice determination table shown in FIG. Based on the number of icons to be displayed and the sixth random number value, a cherry blossom accumulation notice effect pattern is determined. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the production pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

At S6531-7, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is the "second special symbol winning command".

When it is determined in S6531-7 that it is the "second special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-8. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "second special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-10.

At S6531-8, the sub CPU 301 updates the reserved number of second special symbols,
A second pending update display process for updating and displaying a pending image corresponding to the pending number of second special symbols is performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-9.

In S6531-9, the sub CPU 301 performs a lotus blossom advance notice determination process for determining the lotus blossom advance notice in the right-handed gaming state.

In the lotus flower advance notice determination process, the lotus flower advance notice determination table shown in FIG. A flower notice production pattern is determined. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the production pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

At S6531-10, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is the "win command for the big winning opening".

When it is determined in S6531-10 that it is the "win command for the big winning opening", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-11. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "win command for the big winning opening", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-20.

At S6531-11, the sub CPU 301 performs fan announcement determination processing for determining the fan announcement in the big hit game state.

In the folding fan announcement determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol jackpot game state is established, and if not the first special symbol jackpot game state, the fan announcement determination process is terminated. Next, if the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the reserved number of the second special symbol is the upper limit number of two, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is two of the upper limit number. Otherwise, the fan notice determination process is terminated. Then, when it is in the jackpot game state of the first special symbol and the number of reserved second special symbols is two, which is the upper limit number, the fan announcement determination table shown in FIG. 209 is referred to, and the first special symbol start memory A folding fan announcement performance pattern is determined based on the start information stored in the area, the start information stored in the second special symbol start storage area, and the ninth random number. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the production pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

At S6531-20, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command".

When it is determined in S6531-20 that it is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-21. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a "variation pattern command for special symbols", the sub CPU 301 causes the process to proceed to S6531-30.
to

At S6531-21, the sub CPU 301 performs second half icon number determination processing for determining the number of second half icons in the normal game state.

In the second half icon number determination process, the second half icon number determination table shown in FIG. 202 is referenced, and the second half icon number is determined based on the first special symbol variation pattern command and the second random number value. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-22.

At S6531-22, the sub CPU 301 performs a symbol effect pattern determination process for determining a symbol effect pattern. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S653.
Move to 1-23.

In the symbol effect pattern determination process, first, the game state is referred to, and if the normal game state is shown in FIG.
The symbol effect pattern determination table shown in 0 is determined, and if it is in the right-handed game state, the symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 201 is determined.

When the symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 200 is determined, the determined FIG.
With reference to the symbol effect pattern determination table shown in , if it is a variation pattern command of the first special symbol, based on the variation pattern command of the first special symbol and the number of second half icons determined in S6531-21 above, Before reach A performance pattern and a ready-to-win performance pattern are determined.
In addition, if it is the normal game state and the variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the standby performance pattern is determined.

In addition, when the ready-to-win effect pattern is determined in the normal game state, the support icon display scenario determination table shown in FIG.
A support icon display scenario is determined based on the number of second half icons determined in 1-21.

When the symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 201 is determined, the determined FIG.
With reference to the symbol effect pattern determination table shown in , the special symbol variation pattern command and the first
A symbol performance pattern is determined based on the random number.

At S6531-23, the sub CPU 301 performs other notice effect pattern determination processing for determining the dialog notice and the button challenge notice. After completing this process, the sub CP
U301 ends the effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In addition, in the dialogue notice in the notice effect pattern determination process, a dialogue notice determination table (not shown) is referred to so that the displayed character's dialogue can suggest the possibility of a big hit. Selectivity (10th random value, etc.)
Based on and, the dialog announcement effect pattern is determined.

In addition, in the button challenge notice in the other notice effect pattern determination process, first, the first half icon display scenario determined in S6531-5 is referred to, and the number of character icons to be displayed in the button challenge notice according to the first half icon display scenario. If there is, the first button challenge notice effect pattern in which the display number of character icons are displayed is determined. In this first button challenge notice effect pattern, when the player operates the effect button device 6310 a plurality of times, the displayed number of character icons are displayed, but the player does not operate the effect button device 6310. Even if the production button device 6
After the reception time of 310 ends, the display number of character icons are displayed.

On the other hand, in the button challenge notice in the other notice effect pattern determination process, if there is no number of character icons displayed in the button challenge notice due to the first half icon display scenario, the character icon showing the expectation level of the jackpot and the content of the developing reach will be displayed. To enable display, a button challenge notice determination table (not shown) is referred to, and based on the variation pattern command of the first special symbol and a predetermined selection rate (eleventh random number value, etc.), a second button challenge notice effect pattern is created. to decide. In this second button challenge notice effect pattern, character icons are displayed by the player operating the effect button device 6310 a plurality of times. In the second button challenge notice effect pattern, when the player does not operate the effect button device 6310, the character icon is not displayed, but the character icon is displayed after the end of the effect button acceptance time. You may do so.

At S6531-30, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is the "design designation command".

If it is determined that it is a "symbol designation command" in S6531-30, the sub CPU
301 moves the process to S6531-31. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a "design designation command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-40.

At S6531-31, the sub CPU 301 performs decorative design determination processing for determining the decorative design to be stopped and displayed according to the type of the design designation command. Also, when the type of the symbol designation command is a command corresponding to the big win symbol, the number data of rounds of the big win are set. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the production pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

At S6531-40, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol effect stop command".

When it is determined in S6531-40 that it is a "special symbol effect stop command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-41. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "special symbol effect stop command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-50.

At S6531-41, the sub CPU 301 performs a decorative design stop process for stopping display of the decorative design. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the production pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

At S6531-50, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is the "big hit start display command".

When it is determined at S6531-50 that it is the "big hit start display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-51. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "big hit start display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-60.

At S6531-51, the sub CPU 301 performs a jackpot effect determination process for determining a jackpot effect pattern for performing a jackpot effect. In this big hit effect determination process, the above S6
A big win performance pattern is determined according to the big win round number data set at 531-31. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the production pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

At S6531-60, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "game state designation command".

If it is determined that it is a "game state designation command" in S6531-60, sub C
PU 301 shifts the process to S6531-61. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be the "game state designation command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-70.

At S6531-61, the sub CPU 301 performs game state setting processing for setting the game state according to the type of the game state designation command. After completing this process, the sub CPU 30
1 moves the process to S6531-62.

At S6531-62, the sub CPU 301 performs effect mode determination processing for determining the effect mode.

In this production mode determination process, when the "high-probability time-saving game state" is set, the "battle mode" is set as the production mode, and when the "high-probability non-time-saving game state" is set, the "golden hour mode" is set as the production mode, In the case of the "low-probability short-time gaming state", the "dream mode" is set as the production mode. Also, in the "normal game state", the game alternately transitions between the "Western mode" and the "Eastern mode" based on a predetermined transition rate (12th random number value, etc.). In addition, regardless of the predetermined transition rate (12th random number value, etc.) in the "normal game state", depending on the predetermined number of fluctuations of the special symbol, "
It may be configured to switch between "Western Army Mode" and "Eastern Army Mode". In addition, in the normal game state, the game is not limited to the two production modes of the "Western army mode" and the "Eastern army mode", and three or more production modes may be configured to be transitionable. When this process ends, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (FIG. 211).
reference).

At S6531-70, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "demonstration display command".

If it is determined to be a "demonstration display command" in S6531-70, the sub CPU
301 moves the process to S6531-71. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 301 determines that it is not a “demonstration display command”, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-73.

At S6531-71, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect pattern determination process for determining a demonstration display effect pattern for effecting a game standby effect. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-72.

At S6531-73, the sub CPU 301 instructs the button control circuit 310 to return the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 to the first operation mode (see FIG. 172(a)) as the initial operation mode. conversion processing. After completing this process, the sub CP
U301 ends the effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

The effect button initialization process is configured to be performed when the "demonstration display command" is received, but in addition to this, at least the "special symbol winning command" and "special symbol variation pattern command" , It may also be configured to be performed when any one of the "special symbol effect stop command" or "big hit start display command" is received.

Also, the effect button initialization process may be performed according to the current game state and various commands. For example, the production button initialization process is performed regardless of the game state when the "demonstration display command" is received. It may be configured so that it is performed also when any one of the "production stop command" is received. In particular, since the average fluctuation time of special symbols differs depending on the game state and the operation frequency of the effect button device 6310 differs, the effect button device 6310 can be initialized while considering the game state.

At S6531-13, the sub CPU 301 also determines an effect pattern according to various commands transmitted from the main CPU 201. FIG. After completing this process, the sub-C
PU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

[8-10. Production content]
An example of the effect content of the display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described with respect to the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, and the like.

(Normal display image)
First, the normal display images in the "Western army mode" and "Eastern army mode" in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 214 is an example of normal display images in the West mode and the East mode in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 214(a) shows the normal display image in the West mode in the normal game state This is an example, and FIG. 214(b) is an example of the normal display image in the East mode in the normal game state.

As described above with reference to FIG. 173, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the effect section 6116, which is an annular structure, is arranged on the front side of the display area of the display device 7, and the effect section 611
6, an upper display area 7a is formed as a display area of the display device 7. As shown in FIG. Various icons, characters, etc., which will be described later, are displayed in the upper display area 7a.

As shown in FIG. 214(a), in the normal display image of the West army mode in the normal game state, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed on the center side of the display area of the display device 7 as the main symbol on the left. A pattern 6071L, a middle pattern 6071C, and a right pattern 6071R are configured to be displayable. In addition, at the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-design 6071A as a sub-design of the decorative design corresponding to the first special design and a second design as a sub-design of the decorative design corresponding to the second special design are displayed.
The secondary symbol 6072A is configured to be small and displayable. In the normal game state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the left symbol 6071L, the middle symbol 6071C, and the right symbol 6
071R and the first sub-symbol 6071A are variably displayed, but when the second special symbol is variably displayed, only the second sub-symbol 6072A is variably displayed.

In addition, in the normal display image of the Western army mode, the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed at the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, and the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed according to the number of reserved first special symbols. Special 1 first reserved image 607 showing that the start information is stored in the special symbol start storage area (1)
2a, special 1 second indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (2)
Reserved image 6072b, special 1 third reserved image 6072c indicating that the start information is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (3), start information is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (4) A special first fourth reserved image 6072d indicating that the user is present can be displayed. note that,
Although the reserved number of the second special symbols is not displayed in this embodiment, a number or the like indicating the reserved number of the second special symbols can also be displayed.

In the normal display image in the West army mode, a West army icon display portion 6074L is formed on the left side of the display area of the display device 7 to indicate that the character icon is displayed. The West Army icon display portion 6074L displays an icon A display image 6074a indicating that a character icon A (for example, West Army General A participates) and a character icon B (for example, West Army General B participates) are displayed. icon B display image 6074b indicating that, character icon C (
For example, an icon C display image 6074c indicating that Western Army General C has been displayed, and an icon D display image 6074c indicating that character icon D (for example, Western Army General D Participating) has been displayed.
074d, an icon E display image 6074e indicating that a character icon E (for example, General E of the Western Army has entered the war) is displayed. Details will be described later, but when each character icon is displayed, a West Army icon display section 6074L corresponding to that character icon is displayed.
icon display image is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 214(b), in the normal display image in the eastern mode in the normal game state, the left symbol 6071L, the middle symbol 6071C, the right symbol 6071R, and the
First sub-symbol 6071A, second sub-symbol 6072A, special first reserved image 6072a, special first second
A reserved image 6072b, a special first third reserved image 6072c, and a special first fourth reserved image 6072d are configured to be displayable.

In the normal display image of the East mode, an East icon display portion 6074R is formed on the right side of the display area of the display device 7 to indicate that the character icon is displayed. The East Army icon display portion 6074R displays an icon F display image 6074f indicating that a character icon F (for example, East Army General F Participation) and a character icon G (for example, East Army General G Participation) are displayed. An icon G display image 6074g indicating that a character icon H (
For example, an icon H display image 6074h indicating that East Army General H Participation) has been displayed, and an icon I display image 6074h indicating that character icon I (for example, East Army General I Participation) has been displayed.
074i, an icon J display image 6074j indicating that a character icon J (for example, general J of the eastern army participates in the war) is displayed can be displayed. Although details will be described later, when each character icon is displayed, the East Army icon display section 6074R corresponding to that character icon is displayed.
icon display image is displayed.

In this embodiment, in the West army mode of the normal game state, the character icons A to E correspond to the above-described "first half icons", and the icon display images lit up in the West army icon display section 6074L are displayed. The number corresponds to the "first half icon number" described above. In addition, in the East Army mode in the normal game state, character icon F ~ character icon J
corresponds to the "first half icon", and the number of icon display images lit and displayed in the eastern army icon display portion 6074R corresponds to the above-described "first half icon number".

In addition, in this embodiment, the West army icon display part 6074L and the East army icon display part 607
The display device 7 is used as a predetermined display image of 4R. good.

(Production of cherry blossom accumulation notice)
Next, a description will be given of the rendering of the “cherry blossom accumulation notice”. FIGS. 215 and 216 are examples of display images for explaining effects of cherry blossom accumulation notice in the sixth pachinko game machine.

214. In the description of the effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice, the characters attached in FIG. Also, the illustration of the first sub-symbol 6071A and the second sub-symbol 6072A, which are displayed extremely small, is also omitted. This is the same for the effects described with reference to FIGS. 217-227.

Using FIGS. 215 and 216, a staged effect of accumulating cherry blossoms in stages is performed in two stages, a preliminary variation and the start of variation of the variation, and a cherry blossom accumulation that displays "two character icons" in the variation. 2-stage advance notice-effect of accumulating cherry blossoms corresponding to the notice effect pattern of YK7 (see Fig. 206), or staged effect of accumulating cherry blossoms step by step;
Sakura Accumulation 2-stage notice-YK
An example of the effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice corresponding to the 24 notice effect patterns (see FIG. 206) will be described.

FIG. 215(a) is an example of a display image when the decorative symbols are stopped when the reserved number of the first special symbols is two. In addition, as shown in FIG. 215(a), none of the icon display images are illuminated in the West Army icon display section.

FIG. 215(b) is an example of a display image when the variable display of decorative symbols is started as a preliminary variation from the state of FIG. 215(a). As shown in FIG. 215(b), when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the cherry blossoms flutter over the entire display area of the display device 7 and are sucked into the upper display area 7a at the start of the preliminary variation. The intended display image is produced.

FIG. 215(c) is an example of a display image when the cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a from the state of FIG. 215(b) and the decorative pattern is stopped. As shown in FIG. 215(c), when the cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a, a one-step accumulation image indicating that one stage of cherry blossoms has been accumulated is displayed in the upper display area 7a. Stop display. If the cherry blossoms are about to be sucked into the upper display area 7a, but the cherry blossoms are to be accumulated but the cherry blossoms are to be accumulated in advance (zero level of cherry blossom accumulation - YK0), one level is accumulated in the upper display area 7a. The image will not be displayed.

FIG. 215(d) is an example of a display image when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in the state of FIG. 215(c) or as the variation. As shown in FIG. 215(d), when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the cherry blossoms flutter over the entire display area of the display device 7 and the cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a at the start of the variation. The intended display image is produced.

FIG. 216(e) is an example of a display image when cherry blossoms are drawn into the upper display area 7a from the state of FIG. 215(d). As shown in FIG. 216(e), when cherry blossoms are newly sucked into the upper display area 7a, a two-stage accumulated image is displayed in the upper display area 7a indicating that the cherry blossoms have been accumulated in two stages.

FIG. 216(f) is an example of a display image when the character icon A (for example, General A of the Western Army participates in the war) is displayed by button challenge notice or the like from the state of FIG. 216(e). Figure 21
As shown in 6(f), when character icon A (for example, West Army general A participates in war) is displayed by a button challenge notice or the like that is different from the cherry accumulation notice, the icon A display image lights up in the West Army icon display area. In the upper display area 7a, a 2-step accumulated image and a character image indicating the number of character icons are displayed as "Concentration of one person".

FIG. 216(g) is an example of the display image when the cherry blossoms accumulated in the upper display area 7a are released. As shown in FIG. 216(g), at a predetermined timing such as before reach, the cherry blossoms accumulated in the upper display area 7a are released, and a display is performed in which the cherry blossoms cover the entire display area. The timing at which the cherry blossoms stored in the upper display area 7a are released can be freely changed in design.

Figure 216(h-1) shows that after Sakura is released, it develops into the path to the final battle.
It is an example of a display image when "gangster icon" is displayed. As shown in FIG. 216(h-1), in the case of cherry blossom accumulation 2-step notice -YK24, when the released cherry blossoms disappear, the "gangster icon" indicating that it will lead to a final battle will appear. Is displayed. After that, the production of the road to the final battle will be performed.

FIG. 216(h-2) is an example of a display image when two character icons are displayed after the cherry blossoms are released. As shown in FIG. 216 (h-2), cherry accumulation two-step notice -YK7
, when the emitted cherry tree disappears, two character icons, character icon B (for example, West Army General B participates) and character icon C (for example, West Army General C participates) are displayed. . Then, the icon B display image and the icon C display image are lit and displayed in the West Army icon display portion, and "Three-person gathering" is displayed as a character image indicating the number of character icons in the upper display area 7a.

In FIGS. 215 and 216, an example of cherry blossom accumulation advance notice corresponding to the advance notice production patterns of cherry accumulation two-step notice-YK7 and cherry accumulation two-step notice-YK24 has been described. The same applies to the announcement effect pattern (see FIG. 206).

In this way, the cherry blossom accumulation advance notice of the present embodiment gradually improves the expectation of the game by developing the staged effect over the advance variation and the variation (or only with the variation), and the display It is possible to make the player more interested in the result and improve the interest in the game.

(Performance of pseudo-continuous performance)
Next, the effect of the "pseudo-continuous effect" will be described. FIGS. 217 to 219 are examples of display images for explaining the pseudo continuous effect in the sixth pachinko game machine.

217 to 219, corresponding to icon display scenarios A38 and A39 (see FIG. 204) in the first half, in which pseudo continuous effects are performed twice, five character icons are displayed, and the path to the decisive battle develops. An example of the pseudo continuous effect will be described. 217 to 219, the display order of the character icons in the pseudo continuous effect is based on the first half set order scenario 5-1 (see FIG. 205) corresponding to the display order pattern 1. FIG.

FIG. 217(a) is an example of a display image when all the left, middle and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. As shown in FIG. 217(a), the icon A display image and the icon B display image of the West Army icon display portion are lit and displayed, and the character image indicating the number of character icons is displayed in the upper display area 7a. is displayed.

FIG. 217(b) is an example of a display image when the right symbol is also temporarily stopped after the left symbol is temporarily stopped.

FIG. 217(c) is an example of a display image when the right symbol, which is temporarily stopped and displayed, starts changing display again (right symbol sliding) from the state of FIG. 217(b).

FIG. 217(d) is an example of the display image when the first pseudo-continuous effect is being performed to indicate whether or not the predetermined character icon will stop at the position of the middle symbol. As shown in FIG. 217(d), when the variable display of the right symbol is being performed, the character icon C (
A display is displayed to incite whether or not "West Troop General C Participation" will stop.

FIG. 218(e) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon stops at the position of the middle symbol and the first simulated continuous effect is successful. As shown in FIG. 218(e), when the simulated continuation effect is successful and "Character icon C (Western army general C participates)" stops at the middle symbol position, the icon C display image is displayed in the West army icon display area. is lit and displayed, and a character image indicating the number of character icons is displayed in the upper display area 7a.

It should be noted that when the first pseudo-continuous fanning effect fails, "Character icon C (Western army general C
Participation)" is erased, and after temporary stop display is performed with the right pattern being a different type of pattern from the left pattern, all decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, resulting in a "loss".

FIG. 218(f) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon stops at the position of the middle symbol and the first pseudo continuous effect is being performed. As shown in FIG. 218(f), as the first pseudo-continuous effect, "Pseudo x 1 time" indicating the first pseudo-continuous effect is displayed.
All the decorative patterns of the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern start the variable display.

FIG. 218(g) is an example of a display image when the second simulated continuous effect is being performed. As shown in FIG. 218(g), when the left symbol is temporarily stopped, the position of the middle symbol is "
A display prompting whether or not character icon D (Western Army general D participates)” and “character icon E (Western Army general E participates)” is displayed.

FIG. 218(h) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon stops at the position of the middle symbol and the second pseudo-continuous effect is successful. As shown in FIG. 218(h), "Character Icon D (West Army General D Participates)" and "Character Icon E (Western Army General E
When "Participation" is stopped, the icon D display image and the icon E display image are lighted and displayed in the Western army icon display part, and "5 people concentrated" is displayed as a character image indicating the number of character icons in the upper display area 7a. .

Also, when the second pseudo-continuous fanning effect fails, "Character icon D (Western army general D
Participation)" and "Character Icon E (Western General E Participation)" are erased, the right symbol is the same kind of symbol as the left symbol, and a temporary stop display is performed to perform normal reach.

FIG. 219(i) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon stops at the middle symbol position and the second pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As shown in FIG. 219(i), as the second pseudo-continuous effect, "Pseudo x 2 times" indicating the second pseudo-continuous effect is displayed.
All the decorative patterns of the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern start the variable display.

In FIG. 219(j), all the icon display images are lit and displayed in the West Army icon display section,
It is an example of the display image when the "road icon" which shows developing to the road to a decisive battle is displayed. As shown in FIG. 219(j), after the start of the second simulated continuous effect, all the icon display images are illuminated in the West Army icon display area, indicating that the path to the decisive battle will develop. A "road icon" indicating After that, the production of the road to the decisive battle will be performed.

217 to 219, the first half icon display scenario A38 or A39
and an example of a pseudo-continuous effect corresponding to the first half assembly order scenario 5-1 has been described. The same applies to continuous performances.

In this way, the pseudo-continuous effect of the present embodiment is not limited to whether or not re-fluctuation is performed.
The number of character icons displayed at the time of re-change, the types of character icons, the display order of the character icons, etc. can be given new interest, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

(Direction of the road to the decisive battle)
Next, the production of "Road to the Decisive Battle" will be described. FIGS. 220 and 221 are examples of display images for explaining the production of the road to the decisive battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Using FIGS. 220 and 221, pre-reach production patterns 9 and 12 are the production of the road to the decisive battle that develops from the western army mode, where eight character icons are displayed and develops into the confrontation reach. , 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, and 30 (see FIG. 200).

Here, the road to the decisive battle is an effect aiming to collect 10 character icons by having the player operate the effect button device 6310 for the first number of operations before the end of the predetermined time. "Operation effect time" during which one operation of the effect button device 6310 can be operated
is set. In the present embodiment, one set (4 seconds) is defined as 3 seconds for receiving the effect button device 6310 and 1 second for displaying a predetermined icon according to the operation result.
The "operation performance time of the road to the decisive battle" is set to 20 seconds so that the performance button device 6310 can be operated five times as the first number of operations. The configuration of the operation effect time of the road to the decisive battle and the reception time of the effect button device 6310 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 228 .

As shown in FIGS. 220 and 221, the production of the road to the decisive battle developed from the West Army mode is based on the premise that all the icon display images in the West Army icon display section are lit. Therefore, in the vicinity of the West army icon display part, a character image of "Western army rally" is displayed indicating that all the icon display images of the West army icon display part are illuminated. Also, a “countdown display image” that counts down the number of seconds until the “operation presentation time for the road to the decisive battle” is displayed in the lower left of the display area of the display device 7 . In this embodiment, the "countdown display image" indicates the maximum number of operations of the effect button device 6310 (see FIG. 228). A frequency image indicating the number of operations may be displayed.

FIG. 220(a) is an example of a display image when the effect button device 6310 can be operated for the first time. As shown in FIG. 220(a), when it is possible to operate the effect button device 6310, a effect button image for prompting the player to operate the effect button device 6310 and a effect button image are displayed below the effect button image. A gauge image showing the reception time of the button device 6310 is displayed. This is the same for the production of the road to the final battle.

FIG. 220(b) is an example of when "character icon H (eastern army general H participates)" is displayed as a predetermined icon when the effect button device 6310 is operated for the first time. As shown in FIG. 220(b), when "Character Icon H (Eastern Army General H Participates)" is displayed, the icon H display image is illuminated in the Eastern Army icon display area, and the character icon is displayed in the upper display area 7a. A character image indicating the number is displayed as "6 people gathering".

FIG. 220(c) is an example of a display image when the effect button device 6310 can be operated for the second time.

FIG. 220(d) is an example of a display image when "Approaching!?" This "Approaching!?" , etc., to adjust the displayed icons.

FIG. 221(e) is an example of a display image when the third and fourth operations of the effect button device 6310 are completed and the fifth (final) operation of the effect button device 6310 can be performed. .

FIG. 221(f) is an example of a display image when a predetermined icon is displayed when the effect button device 6310 is operated for the fifth time (final time). As shown in FIG. 221(f), when "character icon G (east general G participation)" and "character icon F (east general F participation)" are displayed as predetermined icons, the east army icon display area is displayed. The icon G display image and the icon F display image are lit and displayed in the upper display area 7a, and "Concentration of 8 characters" is displayed as a character image indicating the number of character icons in the upper display area 7a.

FIG. 221(g) is an example of a display image when the countdown display image becomes zero and the final number of character icons is displayed.

FIG. 221(h) is an example of a display image when a character image indicating development to confrontation reach is displayed after the final number of character icons is displayed. Here, in confrontation ready-to-win, since an effect using the displayed character icons is performed, as shown in FIG. ing. After the display shown in FIG. 221(h) is performed, an effect of confrontation ready-to-win is performed.

In FIGS. 220 and 221, it is the production of the road to the decisive battle that is developed from the Western army mode, and the production patterns 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, and 30 before reach are shown. An example of the corresponding Road to Decisive Battle production has been explained, but the Road to Decisive Battle production developed from the East Army mode and other pre-reach production patterns (see Fig. 200) that perform the Road to the Decisive Battle have been explained. The same is true for

In this way, the effect of the road to the decisive battle of the present embodiment is an effect aiming to collect 10 character icons by the player's operation of the effect button device 6310 by the end of the predetermined time. It is possible to actively encourage participation in the game and improve the interest in the game.

(Direction of the road to the final battle)
Next, the production of "The Road to the Final Battle" will be explained. FIG. 222 is an example of a display image explaining the production of the road to the decisive battle in the sixth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 222 shows the production of the road to the decisive battle that develops from the western army mode, in which ten character icons are displayed and the pre-reach production pattern 32 (Fig.
00) will be described below.

Here, the road to the decisive battle is a specific effect of the same kind as the road to the decisive battle. This is an effect for collecting character icons, and an "operation effect time" is set during which the effect button device 6310 can be operated for the second number of times. In the present embodiment, the reception time of the effect button device 6310 of 3 seconds and the display time of 1 second for displaying a predetermined icon according to the operation result are set as 1 set (4 seconds), and the number of second operations is greater than the number of first operations. 1 as the number of times
In order to operate the production button device 6310 0 times, the "operation production time of the road to the final battle" is set.
is set to 40 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 222, in the presentation of the path to the final battle developed from the West army mode, the "operation presentation time of the path to the final battle" ends at the lower left of the display area of the display device 7. A "countdown display image" that counts down the number of seconds until is displayed. In this embodiment, the "countdown display image" indicates the maximum number of operations of the effect button device 6310, but instead of the countdown display image, the effect button device 63
A count image showing a maximum number of operations of 10 may be displayed.

FIG. 222(a) is an example of a display image when the effect button device 6310 can be operated for the first time. At the start of the production of the road to the ultimate battle, the icon display image lit up in the West army icon display section is continuously displayed until the production of the road to the ultimate battle is started. In FIG. 222(a), the character icon A has already been displayed before the production of the road to the final battle begins, and the lighting display of the icon A display image is continued in the West army icon display section.

FIG. 222(b) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon D is displayed when the effect button device 6310 is operated for the first time. As shown in FIG. 222(b), when "character icon D (Western army general D participates)" and "character icon H (West army general H participates)" are displayed as predetermined icons, the West army icon display area is displayed. The icon D display image and the icon H display image of the East Army icon display portion are lit up, and "Three People Gathering" is displayed as a character image indicating the number of character icons in the upper display area 7a.

FIG. 222(c) is an example of a display image when the tenth operation of the effect button device 6310 is completed, the countdown display image becomes zero, and the final number of character icons is displayed. In FIG. 222(c), all the icon display images of the West army icon display part and the East army icon display part are illuminated.

FIG. 222(d) is an example of a display image when a character image indicating that the final number of character icons is displayed and then a character image indicating that the game will progress to the Great Decisive Battle Reach is displayed. At this time, the character image indicating the number of character icons displayed in the upper display area 7a is erased. Figure 2
After the display shown in 22(d) is performed, the effect of the big decisive battle reach is performed.

In addition, in FIG. 222, the pre-reach production pattern 32, which is the production of the road to the decisive battle developed from the western army mode and progresses to the great decisive battle ready with 10 character icons displayed, is shown. An example of the production of the road to the ultimate decisive battle has been explained, but the production of the road to the extreme decisive battle that is developed from the eastern army mode and other pre-reach production patterns that perform the road to the great decisive battle (Fig. 2)
00)) is the same.

In the present embodiment, the number of icon display images lit and displayed in the West army icon display section and the East army icon display section in the production of the road to the decisive battle or the production of the road to the final battle is the above-mentioned "
It corresponds to the number of icons in the second half.

(Direction of confrontation reach)
Next, a description will be given of the production of the "fight reach". FIGS. 223 and 224 are examples of display images for explaining effects of confrontation ready-to-win in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

223 and 224, an example of the effect corresponding to the ready-to-win effect patterns 4, 6, 12, and 14 (see FIG. 200) in which confrontation ready-to-win is performed after eight character icons are displayed will be described.

FIG. 223(a) is an example of a display image when confrontation reach is started. Figure 223 (
As shown in a) (and FIG. 221(h)), in the upper display area 7a, a character image indicating the number of character icons displayed in the production of the road to the decisive battle and the road to the final battle is continuously displayed. It is

FIG. 223(b) is an example of a display image when the number of character icons displayed in the upper display area 7a is converted into the number of support icons displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the display device 7. . Note that the decorative pattern is moved slightly to the lower right of the display area of the display device 7 so as not to impair the performance of the character.

FIG. 223(b) is an example of a display image when the number of character icons is converted to the number of support icons and displayed. As shown in FIG. 223(b), the upper display area 7a displays a character image indicating eight character icons, "Concentration of 8 characters", converted to "Support x 8" as the number of support icons. An image is rendered. In addition, when the text image indicating the number of nine character icons is displayed in the upper display area 7a, the display is converted and displayed to the number of support icons, which is "support x 9". An image rendering will be performed.

FIG. 223(c) is a display image when an enemy character appears, and FIG.
It is an example of the display image when the eight character icons are converted and displayed in the eight support icons following the above.

FIG. 223(d) is a display image when the ally character is facing off against the enemy character, and is an example of the display image when the support icon is displayed in the upper display area 7a.
As shown in FIG. 223(d), in the upper display area 7a, the player is provided with a production button device 6310.
and a face image (for example, the face of Western General A) corresponding to the character icon already displayed on the road to the decisive battle or the road to the final battle. A support icon will appear.

FIG. 224(e) is a display image when the friend character is facing off against the enemy character, and when the effect button device 6310 is operated and a predetermined effect result is displayed in the upper display area 7a. is an example of a display image of . In FIG. 224(e), when the support icon is displayed in the upper display area 7a, the effect button device 6310 is operated, and the characters "opportunity" are displayed as a predetermined effect result. It should be noted that what is displayed as the predetermined effect result is not limited to the "opportunity", but the support icon display scenario (see FIG. 207).
), any one of "line", "opportunity", "hot heat", "LED", and "great battle icon" can be displayed.

FIG. 224(f) is a display image when the ally character is facing off against the enemy character, when the effect button device 6310 is operated and the "great battle icon" is displayed in the upper display area 7a. is an example of a display image of . After the display shown in FIG. 224(f) is performed, the effect of the big decisive battle ready-to-win is performed.

FIG. 224(g) is an example of a display image when the support icon disappears and the ally character confronts the enemy character and displays the final result. As shown in FIG. 224(h-1),
If the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 224(h-2), if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

In addition, in FIGS. 223 and 224, reach production patterns 4 and 6 for confrontation reach
, 12, and 14 have been described, but the same applies to other ready-to-win effect patterns (see FIG. 200) that perform confrontation ready-to-win after nine character icons are displayed.

In this way, the production of the showdown reach of the present embodiment can be performed by the number of character icons collected until the showdown reach (production of the road to the decisive battle or the road to the final battle), and the operation production can be performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Production of lotus flower announcement)
Next, the rendering of the "lotus flower notice" will be described. FIG. 225 is an example of a display image for explaining the performance of the lotus flower notice in the sixth pachinko game machine.

With reference to FIG. 225, an example of the lotus flower foretelling effect corresponding to the lotus flower success foretelling foretelling effect pattern (see FIG. 208) will be described.

FIG. 225(a) is an example of a display image when buds are displayed in advance variation in the "golden hour mode" which is a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 225 (a), in the "golden hour mode" which is a high probability non-time-saving game state, the character image "golden hour" indicating the golden hour mode and the right-handed state A count display image "Tama" for counting the total number of game balls paid out after entering the 1st prize winning opening 6131 and the second prize winning opening 6151, and an operation instruction image "Tama" for right-hand hitting. hit right
is displayed.

FIG. 225(b) is an example of a display image when buds continue to be displayed even though the prior variation has ended. In addition, the buds continuously displayed from the previous fluctuation are also continuously displayed at the start of the fluctuation of the relevant fluctuation.

Here, the bud continuously displayed from the preliminary variation is continuously displayed from the preliminary variation to the small winning game state to the variation even if the preliminary variation is a variation corresponding to the small winning. Therefore, in the lotus flower notice effect of the present embodiment, the lotus flower is continuously displayed without interrupting the effect due to the small hit game state that is easily shifted when the game ball enters the second start port 6140. You can enjoy the flower notice.

FIG. 225(c) is an example of a display image when the buds are opened and displayed when a predetermined time has passed since the change was started. It is suggested that the opening of this bud develops into the “door opening effect” shown in FIG. 225(d).

In FIG. 225, an example of the lotus flower notice effect corresponding to the lotus flower success notice notice effect pattern has been described, but the lotus flower failure notice notice effect pattern (see FIG. 208).
The same is true for the performance of the lotus flower notice corresponding to .

(Direction of battle reach)
Next, the production of the "battle reach" will be described. FIGS. 226 and 227 are examples of display images for explaining effects of battle ready-to-win in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Using Figures 226 and 227, the final operation mode of the effect button device 6310 changes to the first symbol effect pattern 3, 4, 8, 9 (see Figure 201), which changes to the fourth operation mode or the fifth operation mode. An example of the production of the corresponding battle reach will be described.

FIG. 226(a) is an example of a display image of a button promotion chance effect that is performed when battle reach is started. In battle reach, it is possible to perform button promotion chance production first.

As shown in FIG. 226(a), above the display area of the display device 7 is a production button device 63.
"Button operation icons" indicating ten operation modes are displayed by scrolling from left to right. In addition, in the center of the display area of the display device 7, an "effect button state image" indicating the state of the current operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is displayed.

FIG. 226(b) is an example of a display image when the button operation icon is stopped and displayed and the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is changed.

As shown in FIG. 226(b), in the upper display area 7a, the button operation icon of "Lv 3 consecutive hits" indicating the third operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is stopped and displayed. Correspondingly, in the center of the display area of the display device 7, the effect button state image showing the state of the third operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is changed and displayed.

FIG. 226(c) is an example of a display image when a friendly character and an enemy boss are facing each other.

As shown in FIG. 226(c), in the upper display area 7a, the button operation icon of "Lv 3 successive hits" indicating the third operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is continuously displayed.

FIG. 226(d) is an example of a display image when the ally character's attack hits the enemy boss.

As shown in FIG. 226(d), when the ally character's attack hits the enemy boss, the button operation icon displayed in the upper display area 7a is raised by one level, and the effect button device 631 is displayed.
The button operation icon is changed to the button operation icon of "Lv4 blow" indicating the fourth operation mode of 0. Note that if the attack of the ally character does not hit the enemy boss, or if the enemy boss attacks the ally character, the button operation icon displayed in the upper display area 7a does not change.

FIG. 227(e) is an example of a display image when the operation mode of the production button device 6310 is changed following FIG. 226(d).

As shown in FIG. 226(e), since the button operation icon displayed in the upper display area 7a has changed to the button operation icon for "Lv4 blow", the effect button is displayed in the center of the display area of the display device 7. The effect button state image showing the state of the fourth operation mode of the device 6310 is changed and displayed.

In FIG. 227(f-1), the confrontation between the friend character and the enemy boss is repeated, and the operation mode of the production button device 6310 finally becomes the fourth operation mode, and the player presses the production button device 6310.
is an example of a display image when performing the operation of .

In FIG. 227(f-2), the confrontation between the ally character and the enemy boss is repeated, the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 finally becomes the fifth operation mode, and the player presses the effect button device 6310.
is an example of a display image when performing the operation of .

In FIG. 227(g-1), the player operates the production button device 6310 from the state of FIG. 227(f-1) or FIG. is an example of a display image showing that the has fallen (not shown) and has resulted in a big hit.

In FIG. 227(g-2), the player operates the production button device 6310 from the state of FIG. 227(f-1) or FIG. is an example of a display image indicating that the is not dropped (not shown) and is lost.

Incidentally, in FIGS. 226 and 227, an example of the battle ready-to-win effect corresponding to the first symbol effect patterns 3, 4, 8 and 9 has been described, but the first symbol effect patterns 2 and 7 (FIG. 20
1)), the same applies to the production of battle reach.

In this way, the effect of the battle reach of the present embodiment changes the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 according to the result of the effect content, so the effect that the player will directly operate from now on. A change in the operation mode of the button device 6310 (growth of the effect button) can arouse a new interest, and the game can be made more interesting.

[8-11. Configuration of operation presentation time and reception time]
Next, the operation performance time of the road to the decisive battle, reception time of the performance button device 6310, etc. will be described. FIG. 228 is an example of a configuration diagram for explaining the configuration of the operation effect time of the road to the decisive battle and the reception time of the effect button device in the sixth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 228(1) is a configuration diagram for explaining the configuration of the operation performance time of the road to the decisive battle.

As shown in FIG. 228(1), one performance button device 631 is used in the performance of the road to the decisive battle.
The operation time of 0 is composed of 4 seconds, which is the reception time of 3 seconds and the display time of 1 second for displaying a predetermined icon according to the operation result. Operation presentation time of the road to the decisive battle" is set to 20 seconds. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 220 and 221, the maximum number of operations of the production button device 6310 is reduced by a "countdown display image" that counts down the number of seconds until the "operation production time for the road to the decisive battle" ends. It is suggesting. This also applies to the production of the road to the final battle, although the number of operations differs.

Further, when the performance button device 6310 is operated within the reception time, a predetermined icon is continuously displayed from the time of operation until the end of the display time, and the performance button device 6310 is displayed within the reception time.
If the operation 10 is not performed, the predetermined icon will be displayed from the end of the reception time to the end of the display time.

When the effect button device 6310 is operated within such reception time, the reception time ends and a predetermined image is displayed (predetermined effect is performed) from the time of operation. The production is called "one-time operation production", and the same applies to the production of the road to the decisive battle.

FIG. 228(2a) is a configuration diagram for explaining the configuration of the acceptance time of the one-time operation effect.

As shown in FIG. 228(2a), the reception time of the effect button device 6310 for the one-time operation effect is the first period (for example, 3 frames, 3/60 seconds, etc.) immediately after the start of the reception time. A second period (for example, 3 frames, 3/60 seconds, etc.) immediately before the end of the reception time is set as a "start invalid period" in which the operation of 6310 is determined to be invalid.
is set as the ``end invalid period'' for determining that the operation of is invalid, and the period from the ``start invalid period'' to the ``end invalid period'' is set as the ``valid period'' for determining that the operation of the effect button device 6310 is valid. .

As shown in FIG. 228(2b), even if the period immediately before the start of the reception time is set as the "start invalid period" without including the "start invalid period" and the "end invalid period" in the reception time. Alternatively, the period immediately after the reception time ends may be set as the "end invalid period". In this case, the reception time corresponds to the "effective time" as it is.

On the other hand, even if the performance button device 6310 is operated within the reception time, the reception time does not end and the performance button device 6310 can be operated a plurality of times within the reception time. For example, button challenge notice, door opening effect, battle reach when the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 finally becomes the third operation mode (Lv 3 consecutive hits, etc.)
The composition of the reception time is different.

FIG. 228(3) is a configuration diagram for explaining the configuration of the acceptance time of the continuous hit operation effect.

As shown in FIG. 228(3), "start invalid period", "end invalid period", and "effective period (initial)" are set in the acceptance time of the continuous-hit operation effect because of the one-time operation effect. It is the same as the structure of reception hours.

Then, when the effect button device 6310 is operated within the "effective period (initial)", the sub CPU 301 sets the "operation invalid period" for determining that the operation of the effect button device 6310 is invalid for a predetermined period after the operation. is newly set by

This "operation invalid period" is set to a different period by the sub CPU 301 according to the content of the effect triggered by the operation of the effect button device 6310. FIG. For example, when the effect progresses, the effect button device 6310 vibrates, and the third period (
For example, 5 frames, 5/60 seconds, etc.) is set. On the other hand, when the effect does not progress, the effect button device 6310 does not vibrate, and a fourth period shorter than the third period (for example, 4 frames, 4/4 frames) is set as the “operation invalid period”. 60 seconds, etc.) is set.

In this way, in the continuous hitting operation effect, different periods are set according to the effect contents triggered by the operation of the effect button device 6310, so that the effect contents triggered by the operation of the effect button device 6310 are reliably performed. be able to.

[8-12. Signals output outside the machine]
Next, it is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the sixth pachinko machine (for example, hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), island computer (not shown) provided on each island). Signals are explained.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 generates “external information 1” to “external information 8” in the gaming state designation parameter setting process, and generates “external information 1” to “external information 8”.
is output to the external terminal board 184 . The external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine. Signals output from each CH of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the sixth pachinko machine are, for example, "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to
These are various signals of "external information 8", "prize ball information 2" and "security". However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals. It may be configured such that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 229 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. In the sixth pachinko game machine, similarly to the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 65), from each CH, "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8”, “
Various signals of "prize ball information 2" and "security" are output to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine. However, the sixth pachinko game machine differs from the first pachinko game machine in part in the output condition of the signal of "external information 3" output from the connector CH3. Output conditions and the like for "external information 3" will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 229, "external information 3" is "output during all jackpots, during probability variation and time reduction" as in the first pachinko machine, and "variation started during probability variation" A new output condition of "output until the end of the variation of the special symbol" is added.

Here, in the "simultaneous variation machine" in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, a specification consisting of a high-accuracy short-time gaming state, a high-accuracy non-short-time gaming state, and a low-accuracy short-time gaming state Although the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is started from the game state, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends, the game is played with the special symbol whose variable display has ended first. An error case may occur in which the state is shifted to the normal game state, and the special symbol whose variable display ends later is judged to be a big hit, loss, etc. in the normal game state. "
By adding the above-mentioned new output conditions to "external information 3", the occurrence of the above-mentioned error case is eliminated, and in the "simultaneous variation machine", the number of big wins and the number of consecutive games that became a big win triggered by a specific game state can be measured accurately. This will be specifically explained by taking the timing chart of the signal of "external information 3" as an example.

FIG. 230 is an example of a timing chart of the signal of "external information 3" among the signals output to the outside of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 230 vertically illustrates the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, the variable display and stop display of the second special symbol, the output and stop of the external information 3, and the transition of the game state.

As shown in FIG. 230, in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state which is one of the specific gaming states, the first
The special symbol starts variable display at the 119th rotation after the end of the big win game state. Thereafter, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state, the second special symbol starts variable display in the 120th rotation after the end of the jackpot game state.

The variable display of the second special symbol is finished before the first special symbol is displayed, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. When the second special symbol is stopped, the game state shifts from the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state to the normal game state.

The first special symbol is variablely displayed from the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, but is stopped and displayed in the normal game state.

The external information 3 is a first special symbol according to a new output condition that "output until the end of the variation of the special symbol that started the variation during the probability variation" even if the high probability non-time-saving gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state. Output continues until the variable display of is completed.

As a result, even if the first special symbol of the 119th rotation results in a big win, the number of big wins triggered by the specific game state can be counted.

Thus, in the sixth pachinko game machine, as explained in FIG.
The configuration of the game board unit (see FIG. 173), the contents of the lottery for special symbols (see FIG. 175), the rule for transition to the game state (see FIG. 177), etc. are organically related, and at the end of all the jackpot game states , Shift to the "(first half) high-accuracy short-time gaming state" where the expectation of the jackpot is high, and when the high-accuracy game state ends and the expectation of the big hit is low Non-time-saving gaming state: small hit RUSH”, and the shifted “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state: small hit RUSH”
, it is possible to anticipate the payout of the game balls and also the big hit of the second special pattern that guarantees the transition to the next big win game state, thereby creating unprecedented game characteristics and making the game more enjoyable. Interest can be improved.

Further, in the sixth pachinko game machine, as explained in FIG. 198 and the like, when the yakuza icon is displayed by carrying out the cherry blossom accumulation notice, it develops into the production of the road to the ultimate battle, and the pseudo-continuous production is performed. When 5 character icons are collected by doing this, it develops into the production of the road to the decisive battle. Then, when it develops into the production of the road to the ultimate battle or the production of the road to the decisive battle, it is possible to execute the same type of specific production (the production aiming to collect 10 character icons). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by associating various effects with each other.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko machine, the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" is a step effect in which the cherry blossoms are accumulated step by step, and a predetermined number of "character icons" or "gangster icons" are displayed by releasing the accumulated cherry blossoms. It is composed of an icon display effect that displays Then, the step effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executable over the pre-variation and the variation, and the icon display effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executable in the variation. In addition, the step effect of cherry blossom accumulation notice is set so that the more cherry blossoms are accumulated, the higher the degree of expectation for the display of the "gangster icon" and the greater the number of "character icons" to be displayed.
For this reason, the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" of the present embodiment gradually improves the expectation of the game by developing staged effects over the advance variation and the variation (or only with the variation). The display result can also arouse the interest of the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the "pseudo continuous effect" is such that when any one of a plurality of character icons stops, a pseudo continuous effect is performed, and one or more character icons are displayed each time the pseudo continuous effect is performed. It is possible to collect. And when five character icons are collected, it develops into the production of the road to the decisive battle. Further, the content of future games is suggested by the number of character icons to be collected, the types of character icons, the order of character icon collection (display order), and the like.
For this reason, the "pseudo-continuous effect" of the present embodiment is not only determined whether or not re-change is performed, but also the number of character icons displayed at the time of re-change, the type of character icons, and the display order of character icons. It is possible to give a new interest to the game, etc., and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the "performance of the road to the decisive battle" and the "performance of the road to the decisive battle" are performed by the player's operation of the performance button device 6310 until the predetermined time is over.
It is a production that allows you to aim to collect individual character icons. and 10
When individual character icons are collected, it develops into a big decisive battle reach with the highest expectation of a big hit. Further, it is also possible to suggest future contents of the game based on the number of character icons to be collected, the types of character icons, the order in which character icons are collected (display order), and the like.
For this reason, the "production of the road to the decisive battle" and the "production of the road to the decisive battle" of the present embodiment prompt the player to actively participate in the game (operation of the production button device 6310), and the game can be played more effectively. It is possible to improve the interest of

In addition, in the sixth pachinko machine, the "confrontation reach" converts the character icons collected up to the confrontation reach (directing the road to the decisive battle or the road to the final battle) into support icons,
By operating the effect button device 6310, it is possible to perform a support icon effect.
Therefore, in the "fight reach" of the present embodiment, it is possible to perform an operation effect using the icons collected up to the fight reach, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko machine, the "lotus flower notice" is configured to be executable over the prior variation and the variation, and even if the prior variation is a variation corresponding to a small hit, the prior variation to the small It is configured to be displayed continuously over the winning game state to the variation.
For this reason, the "lotus flower notice" of the present embodiment is a small hit game state that easily shifts when the game ball enters the second start port 6140, so that the lotus flower can be continuously drawn without interrupting the production. You can enjoy the flower notice.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, "battle reach" is an effect in which the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is changed according to the result of the content of the effect.
For this reason, the "battle reach" of the present embodiment arouses new interest in the change in the operation mode of the production button device 6310 (growth of the production button) that the player will directly operate from now on, and makes the game more enjoyable. It is possible to improve the interest of

(others)
The sixth pachinko game machine described above can apply each other's techniques to each embodiment including modifications. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Also, the effects described in the sixth pachinko game machine are merely enumerations of the most suitable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. not something.

Furthermore, the above [4. Extension example] can also be applied to the sixth pachinko game machine as long as it does not cause any discrepancies in its game characteristics and control.

[9. Seventh pachinko machine]
Next, the seventh pachinko game machine will be explained. The seventh pachinko machine, like the third pachinko machine, is a pachinko machine called a one-kind two-kind machine. The seventh pachinko game machine differs from the third pachinko game machine in terms of game playability, presentation contents, and the like, and along with this, some of the configurations of various members arranged in the game area are also different.

It should be noted that the seventh pachinko machine, like the third pachinko machine, the first special symbol and the second
This is a priority variable machine which does not variably display the special symbols in parallel and establishes the starting condition of the second special symbol preferentially over the starting condition of the first special symbol. However, it is not limited to this, and may be the sequential variation machine described above.

Hereinafter, in describing the seventh pachinko game machine, the same components as those of the first pachinko game machine are denoted by the same reference numerals and the same step numbers, and detailed description of the configuration and processing will be omitted.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, "a game ball is entered" at a ball entrance (for example, a start opening or a big winning opening) that can provide a player with a predetermined profit (payout of a game ball, transition of a game state). "Playing the ball" is also referred to as "winning" as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the “variable display” of the symbols includes, for example, both “variable display” in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner and “stopped display” in which the symbols are stopped and displayed. It is a concept, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is
It is called a “variable display” of times.

[9-1. Game board unit]
With reference to FIG. 231, the game board unit 7010 provided in the seventh pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 7010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 231 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 7010 provided in the seventh pachinko game machine. The game board unit 7010 includes a game panel 7100 as a game board, various members are arranged on the game panel 7100, and on the front side surface of the game panel 7100, there is a game area 105 in which shot game balls can roll and flow. formed.

As shown in FIG. 231, the game board unit 7010 provided in the seventh pachinko game machine mainly includes a passage gate 7126, a second start port 7140, a normal electric The structure and arrangement of the role product unit 7145, the first special electric role product unit 7130, and the second special electric role product unit 7150 are different. Each configuration and arrangement thereof will be described below.

In addition, the first start port 7120 arranged in the game area 105 of the seventh pachinko game machine is functionally common to the first start port 120 arranged in the game area 105 of the first pachinko game machine. However, due to the relationship with the second start port 7140, a different code from the first pachinko game machine will be used to explain again.

(passage gate)
The passage gate 7126 is arranged above the normal electric accessory unit 7145, which will be described later, in the right area 107, and allows passage of a game ball hit to the right (difficult or impossible passage of a game ball hit to the left). ing. The passage gate 7126 is provided with a passage gate switch 7127 (see later-described FIG. 232) for detecting passage of a game ball to the passage gate 7126 .

When the game ball passes through the passage gate 7126, normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit determination process)
Or, it will be used for variable display of normal symbols. In addition, in this embodiment, the passage gate 7
Even if a game ball passes through 126, no prize ball is paid out, but a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) may be paid out.

In addition, the passage gate 7126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous actuating device. On the premise that the conditional device is operating (that the special symbol for the big hit is stopped and displayed), the accessory continuous operating device is operated by the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 7126, and the big win game state. You may make it shift to .

(First start port)
The first starting port 7120 is arranged in the game area 105 below the display area of the display device 7, and allows a game ball struck left to enter, and a game ball struck right by a game nail or the like to enter. Configured to be difficult or impossible. Then, in the first starting port 7120, the first starting port 712
A first starting port switch 7121 (see FIG. 232 described later) for detecting entry of a game ball to 0 is provided.

When the game ball enters the first start port 7120, the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol hit determination processing), the variable display of the first special symbol, the prize balls for the first start port (for example, 3 game balls) are paid out. The processing after the game ball enters the first starting port 7120 will be described later in detail.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 7140 is located in the right region 107 and below a passage gate 7126 (
Downstream side) and provided in a normal electric accessory unit 7145 to be described later, which makes it possible to enter a game ball hit to the right (difficult or impossible to enter a game ball hit to the left). ing. The second starting port 7140 is provided with a second starting port switch 7141 (see FIG. 232 described later) for detecting entry of a game ball into the second starting port 7140 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second starting port 7140 is arranged below (downstream side) of the passage gate 7126, so that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 7126 is operating, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 7140.

When the game ball enters the second start port 7140, the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol hit determination processing), the variable display of the second special symbol, the prize ball for the second start port (for example, 1 game balls) are paid out. The processing after the game ball enters the second starting port 7140 will be described later in detail.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 7145 is arranged in the right area 107 below (downstream side) the passage gate 7126, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through. The normal electric accessory unit 7145 is a unit body that integrates a second start port 7140, a second start port switch 7141 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 7140, and a normal electric accessory 7146. is.

The ordinary electric accessory 7146 includes a protruding plate type shutter 7147 for ordinary electricity that can move back and forth, and a solenoid for ordinary electricity 7148 (Fig.
See). The ordinary electric accessory 7146, that is, the ordinary electric shutter 7147, has an open state in which a game ball can enter the second start port 7140 or is easy to enter, and a game ball cannot or cannot enter the second start port 7140. It is configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states.

Specifically, the general electric shutter 7147 includes a substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion disposed near the entrance of the second start port 7140 and a flat plate-like ball entry guide portion inclined toward the second start port 7140. consists of When the general electric shutter 7147 is in the closed state, the approximately triangular ball entry preventing portion is positioned in a region facing the entrance of the second start port 7140 and prevents the ball from entering the second start port 7140. , the plate-shaped ball-entering guide part is buried in the surface of the game panel 7100 and allows the game ball to flow downward without receiving the game ball flowing down to the right region 107 . on the other hand,
When the general electric shutter 7147 is in the open state, the substantially triangular ball entry preventing portion is positioned in the avoidance area not facing the entrance of the second start port 7140 to prevent the ball from entering the second start port 7140. First, the flat plate-shaped ball entry guide portion protrudes from the surface of the game panel 7100 , receives the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107 , and guides the received game ball to the second start port 7140 . It should be noted that a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed instead of the general electric shutter 7147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction.

In addition, when the normal electric accessory 7146 is in the open state of the second start port 7140,
When a game ball of a specified number (for example, one) for general electricity enters, the second starting port 7140 is closed even if the opening time has not passed.

(First special electric accessory unit)
The first special electric accessory unit 7130 has a passage gate 7126 in the right area 107,
It is arranged below (downstream side) than the normal electric accessory unit 7145 and the second special electric accessory unit 7150 which will be described later. The first special electric accessory unit 7130 includes a passage gate 7126, a normal electric accessory unit 7145, and a second special electric accessory unit 71, which will be described later.
50 may be provided on the upstream side, or may be provided in the left region 106 .

The first special electric accessory unit 7130 includes a first big prize opening 7131 and a first big prize opening 713
A first big winning hole count switch 7132 (see later in FIG. 232
), a first special electric shutter 7134 that can move back and forth, and a first special electric solenoid 7135 (see later-described FIG. 232) that operates the first special electric shutter 7134. .

The first big winning hole 7131 is a winning hole that is opened at the time of a big win, and the maximum winning number (for example, 7 individual) are stipulated. Each time one game ball enters the first big winning hole 7131, prize balls for the first big winning hole (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The transition of the first big winning port 7131 from the closed state to the open state is the first route when a special stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a "big win" is derived. , The second big winning port 7151 is opened by deriving a specific stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is "small hit", and the game entered into the opened second big winning port 7151 This is the second route when the ball enters the V winning opening in the second big winning opening 7151 .

The first special electric shutter 7134 is operated by a first special electric solenoid 7135 (see FIG. 232 described later) to open a state in which a game ball can or easily enter the first large winning opening 7131. A closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the winning opening 7131 can be transitioned to.

Specifically, the first special electric shutter 7134 is configured by an opening/closing door whose lower part is pivotally supported. When the first special electric shutter 7134 is in an open state, the opening/closing door falls down to the front side, the first big winning opening 7131 opens, receives the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107, and receives the received game ball. Guide to the 1st prize winning opening 7131 . On the other hand, when the first special electric shutter 7134 is in the closed state, the opening/closing door is inverted to close the first big winning port 7131, and it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the first big winning port 7131. Become.

(Second special electric accessory unit)
The second special electric accessory unit 7150 is provided below (downstream side) the passage gate 7126 and the normal electric accessory unit 7145 in the right area 107 . The second special electric accessory unit 7150 may be provided upstream of at least one of the passage gate 7126 or the normal electric accessory unit 7145, or may be provided in the left region 106.

The second special electric role product unit 7150 includes a second big prize winning port 7151 opened so that game balls can enter inside the second special electric role product unit 7150, and a game ball to the second big prize winning port 7151. A second big prize winning port count switch 7152 for detecting entering balls and a second big prize winning port 715
1 and the second special electric shutter 7154 capable of opening and closing the shutter 7154
154 to open and close the second special prize opening 7151 (
232 to be described later), a V winning opening 7156 through which a game ball that has entered the second big winning opening 7151 can pass, and a V winning opening switch 71 that detects that a game ball has passed through the V winning opening 7156.
57, a loss port 7158 through which game balls that have not entered the V winning port 7156 out of the game balls that have entered the second big winning port 7151 can pass, and a V shutter 7 that opens and closes the V winning port 7156.
159 and a V-shutter solenoid 7160 (see later-described FIG. 232) for operating the V-shutter 7159 to open and close the V-winning opening 7156 are integrated.

The second big winning hole 7151 is a winning hole that is opened at the time of a small win. stipulated. Each time one game ball enters the second big winning hole 7151, prize balls for the second big winning hole (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out.

The second special electric shutter 7154 is made of a projecting plate-shaped plate-like member that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction,
By operating the second special electric solenoid 7155 (see FIG. 232 to be described later), the second special electric shutter 7154 is advanced forward to make it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second big prize winning opening 7151 in a closed state. Then, the second special electric shutter 7154 is moved backward to open the second big prize winning opening 7151.
It is configured to be able to shift to an open state where it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter.

The V winning opening 7156 is a winning opening that can be opened and closed by the V shutter 7159, and is a winning opening that triggers control to the jackpot game state via the above-described second route when the game ball passes through.

When the game ball is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route, the opening of the second big winning hole 7151 when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 is regarded as the first round, and the game ball to the V winning hole 7156 (after the second round), a round game is executed to shift the first big winning port 7131 from the closed state to the open state. In addition, when it is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route, even after the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156 (after the second round), the second big winning opening 7151 changes from the closed state to the open state. A transitional round game may be played for a predetermined number of rounds.

Also, for example, by providing a V winning opening inside the first big winning opening 7131, etc., one V winning opening and one attacker may be opened in the jackpot game state. in this case,
When the stop display mode indicating the "minor win" is derived, the first big winning hole 7131 is opened, and when the game ball enters the V winning hole provided inside the first big winning hole 7131. , the jackpot game state (jackpot game state via the second route).

The losing hole 7158 is configured such that a game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 7151 but has not passed through the V winning hole 7156 enters (passes through). A game ball that has passed through the loss port 7158 is discharged out of the machine. In addition, all of the game balls that have entered the second big winning opening 7151 pass through the losing opening 7158, and if there is no passing of the gaming ball to the V winning opening 7156, the game ends without being controlled to the big winning game state. becomes.

The V shutter 7159 is operated by a V shutter solenoid 7160 (see FIG. 232 to be described later) to switch between a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to pass through the V winning opening 7156, and a game opening to the V winning opening 7156. It is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which the ball can (or easily) pass through.

[9-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 232, the control circuit of the seventh pachinko game machine will be described. Figure 2
32 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 232, the seventh pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine,
It is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls games, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls effects according to the progress of games, a payout/fire control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450 .

However, the seventh pachinko game machine is partially different in the configuration of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300 compared to the first pachinko game machine. Each configuration and arrangement thereof will be described below.

[9-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 is connected to the main control circuit 200 compared to the first pachinko game machine, the general electric solenoid 7148, the first special electric solenoid 7135, the second special electric solenoid 71
55, V-shutter solenoid 7160, first starting switch 7121, second starting switch 7141, passage gate switch 7127, first big winning opening count switch 7132,
The configurations of the second big winning opening count switch 7152 and the V winning opening switch 7157 are partially different.

(Solenoid for general electricity)
The general electric solenoid 7148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electric shutter 7147 . When the main CPU 201 energizes the general electric solenoid 7148 (it is ON), the general electric shutter 7147 advances forward to open the second start port 7140 , and the main CPU 201 energizes the general electric solenoid 7148 . If not (if it is OFF), the general electric shutter 7147 is retracted rearward to close the second starting port 7140 .

(No. 1 special electric solenoid)
The first special electric solenoid 7135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the first special electric shutter 7134 consisting of an open/close door. When the first special electric solenoid 7135 is energized (turned ON) by the main CPU 201 , the first special electric shutter 7134 is tilted forward to open the first prize winning opening 7131 , and the main CPU 201 energizes the first special electric solenoid 7135 . If not done (
OFF), and the first special electric shutter 7134 is inverted backward to open the first prize winning opening 71.
31 is closed.

(Second special electric solenoid)
The second special electric solenoid 7155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the second special electric shutter 7154 . When the second special electric solenoid 7155 is energized (is ON) by the main CPU 201 , the second special electric shutter 7154 is retracted backward to open the second big prize winning opening 7 .
151 is opened, and if the main CPU 201 does not energize (OFF), the second special electric shutter 7154 is moved forward to close the second big winning opening 7151 .

(Solenoid for V shutter)
The V-shutter solenoid 7160 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V-shutter 7159 . When the main CPU 201 energizes (turns ON) the V shutter solenoid 7160, the V shutter 7159 moves backward to open the V winning port 7156. If the main CPU 201 does not energize the V shutter solenoid 7160 ( If it is OFF), the V shutter 7159 is moved forward to close the V prize opening 7156 . Further, in this embodiment, the V-shutter solenoid 7160 operates in conjunction with the opening of the second big winning opening 7151 to open the V winning opening 7156 . That is, the V winning opening 7156 is in an open state from the time of opening the second large winning opening 7151, and when the game ball enters the second large winning opening 7151,
In principle, it will also pass through the V winning opening 7156 .

(First start switch)
The first starting port switch 7121 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects entry of a game ball into the first starting port 7120 .

When the first starting port switch 7121 detects the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 7120, the main CPU 201 determines that the first starting condition is satisfied, and determines that the first special symbol starting information (jackpot determination random number for use, random number for design, random number for reach determination, random number for effect selection, etc.). The acquired first special symbol start information is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (first special symbol start storage area (first special symbol start storage area (
1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) in order), and the first special symbol determination start condition (for example, that the special electric accessory is not operating, the special symbol variable display is performed etc.) is established, it will be used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 7120 is detected by the first start hole switch 7121, the main CPU 201 performs payout processing of the prize balls for the first start hole (for example, three game balls). to the payout/launch control circuit 400 .

(Second starting switch)
The second starting port switch 7141 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects entry of a game ball into the second starting port 7140 .

When the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 7140 is detected by the second starting port switch 7141, the main CPU 201 assumes that the second starting condition is satisfied, and determines that the second special symbol starting information (jackpot determination). random number for use, random number for design, random number for reach determination, random number for effect selection, etc.). The obtained start information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 (second special symbol start storage area (second special symbol start storage area (
1) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) in order), and the second special symbol determination start condition (for example, that the special electric accessory is not operating, the special symbol variable display is performed etc.) is established, it will be used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, when the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 7140 is detected by the second start hole switch 7141, the main CPU 201 performs the payout process of the prize ball for the second start hole (for example, one game ball). to the payout/launch control circuit 400 .

In addition, in the embodiment, the hit determination process of the first special symbol based on the starting information of the first special symbol is "lottery of the first special symbol", and the second special symbol based on the starting information of the second special symbol is selected. The hit determination process is also called "second special symbol lottery", and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are collectively called "special symbol lottery".

(Passing gate switch)
Pass gate switch 7127 is a penetration type proximity switch that detects passage of a game ball to pass gate 7126 .

When the passage gate switch 7127 detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 7126, the main CPU 201 acquires normal symbol starting information (normal symbol hit determination random number, normal symbol random number, etc.). The acquired normal symbol start information is stored in the normal symbol start storage area (normal symbol start storage area (1)) of the main RAM 203 up to "the number of normal symbols held (for example, 4)".
~ Normally stored in the pattern start storage area (4) in order), the judgment start condition of the normal pattern (for example,
When the normal electric accessory is not operating, the variable display of normal symbols is not performed, etc.) is established, it is used for normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit determination processing) and normal symbol variable display become. Even if the passage gate switch 7127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 7126, the prize ball is not paid out.

(1st big prize mouth count switch)
The first big winning hole count switch 7132 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 7131 . When the first big winning hole count switch 7132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 7131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of winning game balls into the first big winning hole 7131 per round. At the same time, the payout/launch control circuit 400 is instructed to pay out the prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the first big winning hole.

(Second big prize mouth count switch)
The second big winning hole count switch 7152 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 7151 . When the second big winning hole count switch 7152 detects the entry of the game ball into the second big winning hole 7151, the main CPU 201 controls the second big winning hole 7
While counting the number of winning game balls to 151, prize balls for the second big winning hole (for example, 10
game balls) to the payout/launch control circuit 400.

(V prize opening switch)
The V winning opening switch 7157 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects passage of a game ball to the V winning opening 7156 . When the V winning opening switch 7157 detects the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 7156, the main CPU 201 performs transition control to the jackpot game state. Even if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 7156 is detected by the V winning opening switch 7157, the winning ball is not paid out.

[9-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 includes a sub-CPU 301, program ROM 302, work RAM 303, display control circuit 304, voice control circuit 305, LE
The D control circuit 306, the character control circuit 307 and the command input port 308 are common, but the difference is that the button control circuit 310 and the effect button 54 are further provided.
(Button control circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the production button 54 . i.e.
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the production button 54 and vibrating the production button 54 . The button control circuit 310 drives the effect button 54 according to the drive command from the sub CPU 301 .

The button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal relating to the player's operation detected by the effect button 54 . The button control circuit 310 outputs predetermined operation information to the sub CPU 301 when an operation signal is input from the performance button 54 .

[9-3. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 233 to 245, the basic specifications of the seventh pachinko game machine will be described. The seventh pachinko machine may be a pachinko machine with a setting function,
Descriptions related to the setting function are omitted below.

In the seventh pachinko game machine, although variable probability control is not executed, a time-saving game state in which time-saving control is executed and a normal game state in which time-saving control is not executed are prepared.
In 01, the game can be progressed in the normal game state or the time-saving game state. In addition, in this seventh pachinko game machine, the variable probability control is not executed, but this is not essential. good.

In this embodiment, in a general normal game state (first normal game state described later), as a rule, left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, and in A time-saving game state and B time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is a regular game. It is considered as a mode. In addition, when the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state are not distinguished, the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state are simply referred to as "time saving game state". Sub CP
U301 displays, for example, the display area of the display device 7, how to play which is regarded as a regular game mode.

[9-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 233 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. Incidentally, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 233 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table for determining "big win", "minor win" or "losing".

In the special symbol hit determination table, as data used in the first special symbol hit determination process executed based on the ball entering the first start port 7120, there is a big hit determined as a "big hit" or "losing". The relationship between the range (width) of the judgment random number value and the corresponding win/lose judgment value data (big hit judgment value data, loss judgment value data) is defined. Also, the second starting port 7
As data used in the second special symbol hit determination process executed based on the ball entering 140, the range (width ) and the corresponding win/lose determination value data (big hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, loss determination value data) are defined. Incidentally, the total random number value of the big hit determination random number value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the random number value for judging a big hit is generated within a range (width) of 0-65535.

As shown in FIG. 233, when a game ball enters the first starting port 7120, the main CPU2
01, based on the hit determination process of the first special symbol using the random number value for the big hit determination of the first special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, with a selection rate of about 1/199.8, "big hit ”, and otherwise determined as “losing”. In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting port 7140, the main CPU 201 determines the hit of the special symbol based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random number for judging the big hit of the second special symbol. The result of the processing is determined as a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/199.8, a "minor win" with a selection rate of about 1/3.0, and otherwise determined as a "loss".

It should be noted that the range (width) of the random numbers determined as the "big hit", that is, the selection rate is not limited to the above values, and can be freely changed in design.

Further, when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, it may be configured to determine the "small hit", but when configured to determine the "small hit", the first It is possible to set a "small hit" with a relatively low selection rate so that the determination performed in the hit determination process of the second special symbol is more advantageous than the determination performed in the hit determination process of the special symbol. preferable.

In addition, when the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, without moving to the big hit game state, the time saving game state (C time saving game state) is directly transferred to the "time saving hit". ” may be determined.

Also, if the seventh pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the selection rate of the big win and/or the small win should be higher at the high setting than at the low setting. However, even if the seventh pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the selection rate per time saving is set to be a common probability for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the selection rate of the big win or the selection rate of the small win according to the setting value, for example, the V winning opening 7156 is opened by changing the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning opening 7156 for each setting value.
You may change the passage rate to 56, or you may change the time-saving continuation frequency|count for every setting value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the probability of a big hit, the probability of a small hit, the frequency of opening the V winning opening 7156 (that is, the frequency of operation of the second special electric shutter 7154), the opening time, and the number of times of continuous time reduction By adopting one or two or more of, the expected value controlled to the big hit game state may be configured so that the high setting is higher than the low setting.

[9-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 234 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the special symbol determination table shown in FIG.
00 is stored in the main ROM 202 .

The special symbol determination table is a table for determining "selected symbol information" and "symbol designation command" which determine the stop symbol of the special symbols to be stopped and displayed.

The "selection symbol command" is a command for designating a winning symbol determined according to the type of winning when the result of the winning judgment processing of the special symbol is a winning, and the "symbol specifying command" is a special symbol. This is a command for specifying the symbol to be displayed in a stopped state.

In the special symbol determination table, the type of special symbol, the above-mentioned winning/losing determination value data, and the symbol random value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 7120 or the second start port 7140 is defined in association with the "selected pattern command" and the "designated pattern command". The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 234, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 89. Sometimes, the main CPU 201 determines "z1" as the selected symbol command,
"zA1" is determined as the design designation command. In addition, the symbol random number of the first special symbol is 90
to 99, the main CPU 201 outputs "z
2” is determined, and “zA2” is determined as the design designation command.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. '<'z1'.

Also, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
When the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 19, the main CPU 201 determines "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 20 to 79, the main CPU 201 determines "z4" as the selected symbol command and "z4" as the symbol designation command.
zA3” is determined. Also, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 80 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and determines "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. ”=“z5”<“z4”.

Also, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
When the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 19, the main CPU 201 determines "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 20 to 79, the main CPU 201 determines "z7" as the selected symbol command and "z7" as the symbol designation command.
zA4” is determined. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 80 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Thus, in this embodiment, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. z6"="z8"<"z7".

The range of special symbol random number values for determining the "selected symbol command", that is, the selection rate is not limited to the above values, and can be freely changed in design.

Also, although the description is omitted in the seventh pachinko game machine, the main ROM of the main control circuit 200
202 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table determines the stop mode of the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164 (see FIG. 232) when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a table referred to when making decisions according to Also, based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process,
A big win stop mode, a small win stop mode, or a losing stop mode is displayed. Also, the first
Decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12 (B)) described in the pachinko game machine
A decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 .

[9-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 235 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 235 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko game machine.

The hit type determination table is a table for determining the operation contents of the hit, and includes "a mode of the big win game state", "a mode of the small win game state" and "a mode of the subsequent game state (time saving flag,
It is a table for determining A time saving end condition).

As shown in FIG. 235, the hit type determination table responds to the selected symbol command by "
Aspect of the jackpot game state”, “Aspect of the small win game state” and “Aspect of the subsequent game state (
Time saving flag, A time saving end condition)” are associated.

The "open state of the jackpot game state" is the first big prize winning port 7 that is opened when the jackpot game state is reached.
131 open mode. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (for example, 28 seconds) and the closing time (for example, 2 seconds) per round in the jackpot gaming state are defined in advance, and the opening mode of the first big winning port 7131 is as follows. It shows the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state. The maximum opening time for each round may be varied, or the closing time (round interval time) for each round may be determined differently. Furthermore, the number of times of opening and the opening time may be determined so that the first big prize winning opening 6131 is opened and closed a plurality of times per round.

In addition, the "open mode of the big win game state" corresponding to the "selected symbol command z6 to 8" of the small win of the second special symbol entered the second big winning port 7151 opened in the small win game state. Through the second route in which the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156 and shifts to the jackpot game state,
It is an open mode when shifting to a jackpot game state. When the transition to the jackpot game state through this second route, the opening of the second big prize opening 7151 at the time of the small hit game state is set as the first round, and after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 7156 (2 rounds After the second), a round game for opening the first big winning hole 7131 is executed. In addition, when the game ball entering the second big winning opening 7151 opened in the small winning game state does not pass through the V winning opening 7156, it does not shift to the big winning game state, and the mode of the game state after that does not change. It will not be decided.

The "open mode of the small winning game state" is the second big winning opening 7 that is opened when the small winning game state
151 open mode. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds) and the closing time (for example, 0.6 seconds) per opening in the small winning game state are defined in advance, and the maximum in the small winning game state Indicates the number of openings. It should be noted that the maximum opening time per opening may be determined differently, or the closing time for each number of times of opening may be determined differently.

Here, the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one big hit game state (for example, 5R ×
Total number of game balls that can be paid out in one small hit game state than 7 (first specified number) x 15 (number of prize balls) = 525) (for example, 1 time x 10 ( 2nd specified number) x 10 (number of prize balls) = 100) is set smaller, the big win game state is an advantageous "first special game state", and the small win game state is the big win game. Lower profit than state
It can be said that it is the second special game state.

In addition, the maximum opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds) in the small winning game state is set shorter than the maximum opening time (for example, 28 seconds) in one round in the big winning game state. , the first big winning opening 7131 is opened by the advantageous "first opening mode", and the second big winning opening 7151 is opened by the "second opening mode" which is more disadvantageous than the first opening mode in the small winning game state. It can be said that

"Aspect of subsequent game state" indicates an aspect of the game state after the end of the jackpot game state,
It shows the setting of "time saving flag" and "A time saving end condition". In addition, in this embodiment, according to the game state ("normal game state" or "time saving game state") at the time of winning when it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, "time saving flag" and "A time saving end Conditions" settings are configured differently.

The "time saving flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the time saving game state is executed and the type of the time saving game state to be executed. ”, and the time saving flag=2 indicates “B time saving game state”. In addition, in the present embodiment, although the C time-saving gaming state is not executed, if the C time-saving gaming state is executable,
Time saving flag = 3 will show the C time saving game state.

"A time-saving end condition" is a dedicated condition for ending the A time-saving gaming state as a time-saving gaming state, and in the A time-saving gaming state, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed. The total number of times "special design total time reduction number" and the total number of times the second special design is displayed in a reduced time game state "time reduction number of second special design" By establishing either, A After the time-saving game state is terminated, the normal game state is entered.

In addition, in all the time-saving game states (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state), as a "time-saving common end condition", it is set as a condition to shift to a big winning game state or a small winning game state. Therefore, in the A time saving game state, when the "A time saving end condition" is established or the "time saving common end condition" is established, the time saving game state is ended and the normal game state is entered.

Here, as the "A time saving end condition", in addition to the "time saving number of times of the second special design", the number of times of fluctuation display of the first special design is also accumulated "special design total time saving number of times" is also a condition, In the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, the starting information of the first special symbol is the first.
Up to the reserved number of special symbols (for example, 4) may be stored, and when the normal game state is shifted to the time-saving game state, the profit in the time-saving game state for the ``time-saving number of second special symbols'' is received. This is to avoid a phenomenon in which it becomes impossible to For this reason, the "special symbol total number of time reductions" is at least the safe number of times (for example, 2 times).

In this way, in addition to the "second special symbol time reduction number of times", even under the condition of "special symbol total time reduction number of times" in which the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol is accumulated, right-handed hitting is a regular game mode. In the time-saving gaming state, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first start port 7120,
Since it is easy for the game ball to enter the second start port 7140, the condition of "special symbol total time reduction number" is not satisfied except for irregular game modes, and "second special symbol time reduction When the condition of "number of times" is established, the time saving game state is terminated.

In addition, as the "A time saving end condition", only the condition of "second special symbol time saving number" may be provided without providing the condition of "special symbol total time saving number of times".

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table and determines the mode of the big win game state, the mode of the small win game state, the time saving flag and the A time saving end condition based on the selected symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 235, in the normal game state, when it is determined as a big hit as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the selected symbol command "z1" is selected at 90%, after the big hit game state ends. "Special pattern total time reduction number of times" as "first A time reduction end condition"
= 7 times and "the number of times of 2nd special symbol time saving" = 1 It is configured to be easy to determine the A time saving end condition on the condition that either is established. On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state,
After the end of all the jackpot gaming states, as the "second A time-saving end condition" that is more advantageous for the player than the "first A time-saving end condition", "special symbol total time-saving number of times" = 11 times and "second It is configured to determine the A time saving end condition on the condition that any one of "special symbol time saving number of times" = 5 times is established.

In this embodiment, when distinguishing the A time-saving gaming state in the time-saving gaming state in more detail, "special symbol total time-saving number of times = 7" and "second special symbol time-saving number of times = 1" are determined as A time-saving end conditions. The time-saving gaming state when it is done is also called "first time-saving gaming state", and when "special symbol total time-saving number of times = 11" and "second special symbol time-saving number of times = 5" are determined as A time-saving end conditions The time saving game state is also referred to as "second time saving game state". In addition, the B time-saving gaming state is also referred to as “third time-saving gaming state”. In addition, as described above, "A time saving end condition" may be configured with only the condition of "second special symbol time saving number of times" without the condition of "special symbol total time saving number of times", The first time-saving game state is "Time-saving number of times of the second special symbol = 1"
is determined, and the second time-saving game state may be the time-saving game state when "the number of times of time-saving of the second special symbol=5" is determined. Also, when the "first time-saving game state" and "second time-saving game state" are not clearly distinguished, they are also referred to as "A time-saving game state", and "A time-saving game state" and "B time-saving game state ( When not clearly distinguishing the third time-saving game state), it is also referred to as the "time-saving game state".

[9-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
Figures 236 and 237 are examples of a special symbol variation pattern table for the seventh pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 236 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 237 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. be. The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 236 and 237 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIGS. 236 and 237, the special symbol variation pattern table includes the special symbol type, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (hit-or-lose), the reach determination random value, and the effect selection random value. , the variation pattern of the special symbol and the variation display time of the special symbol are associated with each other. In addition, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types),
The effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. In addition, the columns of "remarks" in FIGS. 236 and 237 show, for the sake of convenience, the design determination time of the special design, the effect execution contents, and the like, so as to be easy to understand.

The main CPU 201 determines one of the special symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 236 and 237 in accordance with the gaming state, etc., refers to the determined special symbol variation pattern table, determines the type of special symbol, and the hit of the special symbol. The variation pattern of the special symbol and the variation display time of the special symbol are determined based on the result of the determination process, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for effect selection.

Further, when determining the variation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the sub CPU 301 . The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 . The variation pattern command is a variation pattern triggered by the game ball entering the first start port 7120, or a variation pattern triggered by the game ball entering the second start port 7140. It is configured to be identifiable.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 236, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236 (1) and the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG.
6(2) and a special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 236(3). In addition, the number of variation pattern tables of special symbols in the normal game state is not limited to three, and may be one.
It may be 2 or more.

In this embodiment, when distinguishing the normal game state in detail, the normal game state in which the left-handed hitting is the regular game mode is referred to as a "first normal game state", and when the time-saving game state ends, the main game state is displayed. The normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the start information of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the RAM 203 (that is, the second special stored in the time saving game state The normal game state in which the reserved number of symbols is consumed) is referred to as a "second normal game state".

The special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236 (1) is a variation pattern table selected during the first normal game state, and after the seventh pachinko gaming machine is backed up (that is, the initial value fluctuation pattern table) or after the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times after the first normal game state is started (that is, FIG. 236 described later)
(3) after transition from the special symbol variation pattern table T3) to be selected in the general effect state.

The special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 236 (2) is a variation pattern table dedicated to the second special symbol that is selected during the second normal game state, and is selected during the "continuous battle" described later. It is a fluctuation pattern table.

The special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 236 (3) is a variation pattern table selected during the first normal game state, and a predetermined number of special symbols after the first normal game state is started. This is a variation pattern table selected in a limited effect state until the variation display of is performed.

Figure 236 (1) ~ (3) in the normal game state special symbol variation pattern table T1 ~
The details of the transition relationship of T3 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, in the first normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, it is extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 7140, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined. (the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed). However, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is defined in preparation for the case where the game ball enters the second starting port 7140 irregularly.

In the special symbol variation pattern table T1 in the first normal game state shown in FIG. 236 (1), as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the second special The variation display time of the symbols is set to the same time (for example, 15000 ms). However, as will be described later, even if the variable display time of the same second special symbol, different effects are executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special symbol design determination time is determined based on the game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (hit or drop), but in the normal game state, the special symbol hit determination process Regardless of the result (hitting or losing), the design determination time is all the same time (for example, 540m
s).

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in time-saving gaming state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 237, the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 237 (1) and FIG.
7(2), the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 237(3), and the special symbol variation pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 237(4). It has a pattern table. In addition, the number of variation pattern tables of special symbols in the time-saving gaming state is not limited to four, and may be one or two or more.

The special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 237 (1) is a variation pattern table selected at the time of the final variation of the first time-saving gaming state, and a variation pattern selected at the time of "Sengoku rush chance" to be described later. is a table.

The special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 237 (2) is a variation pattern table selected at times other than the final variation of the first time-saving gaming state, and variation selected at the time of "Sengoku rush chance" pattern table.

Here, when other than the final variation of the first time-saving gaming state, "time-saving number of second special symbols = 1
” and “Total number of times of special symbols = 7” are not satisfied. Since the number of time reduction = 1" is established and becomes the final variation), the special symbol variation pattern table J2 is a variation pattern table dedicated to the first special symbol, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol is not determined.

The special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 237 (3) is a variation pattern table selected at times other than the final variation of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state. ] is a variation pattern table selected when

The special symbol variation pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 237 (4) is a variation pattern table selected during the final variation of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state. It is a fluctuation pattern table selected for.

In this embodiment, the same variation pattern table is determined in the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state, but the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state may be configured to determine a different variation pattern table.

Figure 237 (1) ~ (4) special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 ~ of the time-saving gaming state shown in
Details of the transition relationship of J4 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the special symbol variation pattern table J1 in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 1 variable display time (for example, 200 ms) is determined, and when a big hit is achieved as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the second variable display time for which the special symbol variable display time is longer (for example, 89000 ms).
In addition, at the time of the final variation of the first time-saving gaming state, a design determination time (for example, 89000ms) is determined, which is a very long design determination time for special symbols.

This will be described later in detail using FIG. Since the prescribed number for use is set to 1, etc., in the first time-saving gaming state, the number of reserved second special symbols is not accumulated, and the hit determination process of the second special symbol (variation display of the second special symbol) can be only once.

In addition, as "A time saving end condition", "special symbol total time saving number" is set to be greater than or equal to the total number of "second special symbol time saving number" and "first special symbol holding number (for example, 4)" (See FIG. 235), at the time of the final fluctuation of the time-saving gaming state, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol only when the "special symbol total time-saving number of times" is established. It corresponds to when it is played in an irregular game mode when the game is played.

It should be noted that, in the variation pattern table J1 of the special symbols in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. Although it is configured to be determined by a variable display time (for example, 200 ms), it may be configured to determine different times, or may be configured to be partially different. . For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the variation display time A (for example, 89000
ms), and in the case of a small hit as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
The variable display time of the special symbol is determined to be a short variable display time B (for example, 300 ms), and the second
In the case of a loss as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, the variation display time of the special symbol may be set to a very short variation display time C (for example, 200 ms).

In the variation pattern table J3 of the special symbols in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. Three variable display times (eg, 2000 ms) or fourth variable display times longer than the third variable display time (eg, 5000 ms, 12000 ms) are configured to be determined. Also, in the special symbol variation pattern table J3 in the time saving game state shown in FIG. In order to variably display the second special symbol from the next time onward, a third variable display time (for example, 2000 ms) with a short variable display time of the special symbol is determined.

It should be noted that in the special symbol variation pattern table J3 in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. Although configured to determine three variable display times or a fourth variable display time, the third variable display time may be the same as the first variable display time (e.g., 200ms). , the fourth variable display time may be the same as the second variable display time (eg, 89000ms).

In the special symbol variation pattern table J4 in the time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 237 (4), the special symbol variation display time is the same as the special symbol variation pattern table J3 in the time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 237 (3). However, the variation pattern of the special symbol is configured so that the contents to be executed are different when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a loss.

In addition, at the time of the final change between the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state, if the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is lost, the special symbol is determined. As the time, it is configured to determine a longer symbol fixing time (for example, 15000 ms) than when the first special symbol or the second special symbol hit determination process results in a big hit or a small hit.

Thus, in the final variation of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state, a long design determination time (for example, 15
000 ms) is determined because, when the long pattern confirmation time is displayed, the game results (payouts, number of consecutive games, etc.) in "Sengoku Time" are displayed as soon as the "Sengoku Time" (to be described later) ends. to display

[9-3-5. Transition diagram of special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 238 is an example of a transition diagram of a special symbol variation pattern table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the transition diagram of the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG.
In the normal game state, left-hand hitting is performed as a regular game mode, and in the time-saving game state, right-hand hitting is performed as a regular game mode. .

(Normal game state after power on after initialization)
First, in the first normal game state after power-on after initialization, as described above,
A special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236(1) is selected.

Then, in the first normal game state in which left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, the second start port 7
It is difficult for the game ball to enter 140, and when the game ball enters the first starting port 7120, the hit determination process of the first special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed.

(When the selected symbol command "z1" is determined in the normal game state)
In the normal game state, it is determined as a big hit as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
When the selected symbol command "z1" is determined, after the jackpot game state ends, the game shifts to the first time-saving game state in which "second special symbol time-saving number of times"=1 is determined. When the game ball enters the second starting port 7140 in the first time-saving game state, the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 237(1) is selected.

It should be noted that, when the first time-saving gaming state, without the game ball entering the second start port 7140,
If there is a reserved number of special symbols, the special symbol variation pattern table J shown in FIG. 237 (2)
2 is selected, and after the reserved number of the first special symbols is consumed, when the game ball enters the second starting port 7140, the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 237 (1) is selected. .

After the end of the first time-saving gaming state, the reserved number of second special symbols should not be stored as will be described later with reference to FIG. For this reason, after the first time-saving game state is completed, the state is shifted to the first normal game state. A special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in (3) is selected.

Then, when the number of times of the special symbol variation display exceeds 20 rotations after the start of the first normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236(1) is selected.

(When the selected symbol command "z1" is determined in the time saving game state)
In the time-saving gaming state, it is determined as a big hit as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol,
When the selected symbol command "z1" is determined, after the jackpot game state ends, the game shifts to the second time-saving game state in which "second special symbol time-saving number of times"=5 times is determined. When the game ball enters the second starting port 7140 in the second time-saving gaming state, the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 237 (3) is selected.

When it comes to the final variation of the second time-saving gaming state, the special symbol variation pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 237 (4) is selected.

After the end of the second time-saving game state, it is common that the number of reserved second special symbols is stored, so after the end of the second time-saving game state, the state is shifted to the second normal game state. be. and,
During the second special symbol control period in the second normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 236 (2) is selected.

After the end of the second normal game state (that is, after the reserved number of the second special symbols is consumed), the state is shifted to the first normal game state, and the variable display of the special symbols after the first normal game state is started. Until the number of times reaches 20, the special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 236(3) is selected.

Then, when the number of times of the special symbol variation display exceeds 20 rotations after the start of the first normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236(1) is selected.

(When the selected pattern command "z2 to 5" is determined)
As a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, it is determined as a big hit, and the selected symbol command "z2
” is determined, and when it is determined as a big hit as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process and the selected symbol command “z3 to 5” is determined, the transition to the second time-saving game state is performed. Since it is the same as the case where the selected symbol command "z1" is determined in the above-described time-saving game state, the description is omitted.

(When the selected pattern command "z6 to 8" is determined)
When it is determined as a small hit as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the game state is changed depending on whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 7156. Therefore, the selected special symbol fluctuates. The pattern table will be different.

Here, as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, it is determined to be a small hit on the premise that the time-saving game state in which the game ball can enter the second start port 7140 has been controlled. . When shifting to the small winning game state, as described above, the "time saving common end condition" is established, and the time saving game state ends once (similarly when shifting to the big winning game state). Then, when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156, it shifts to the big hit game state, and after the big hit game state ends, it shifts to the second time saving game state. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening 7156, the game state does not shift to the jackpot game state, but shifts to the normal game state.

As a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, it is determined to be a small hit, and the game ball is V winning opening 715
When 6 is not passed, after the end of the small winning game state, the number of reserved second special symbols is generally stored, so after the end of the time saving game state, the second normal It is shifted to a game state. And, during the control period of the second special symbol in the second normal game state, FIG.
A special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in (2) is selected.

After the end of the second normal game state (that is, after the reserved number of the second special symbols is consumed), the state is shifted to the first normal game state, and the variable display of the special symbols after the first normal game state is started. Until the number of times reaches 20, the special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 236(3) is selected.

Then, when the number of times of the special symbol variation display exceeds 20 rotations after the start of the first normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236(1) is selected.

As a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, it is determined to be a small hit, and the game ball is V winning opening 715
When 6 is passed, it will be shifted to the second time-saving game state, so it is the same as the case where the selected symbol command "z1" is determined in the time-saving game state described above, and the description is omitted. do.

(When transitioning to B time-saving game state)
As will be described later, the number of times of variable display of special symbols in the normal game state is the ceiling value (for example, 5
99 times), it shifts to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state). Here, the "B time-saving end condition" of the B time-saving gaming state is based on the condition that either "special symbol total time-saving number of times" = 11 times or "second special symbol time-saving number of times" = 5 times is established, It is set to be the same as the exclusive condition for ending the second time-saving gaming state. Therefore, when shifting to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state), the variation pattern table of the special symbols shifts as in the case of shifting to the second time-saving game state.

[9-3-6. Prefetch related data for special symbols]
FIG. 239 is an example of the special symbol look-ahead related data in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Here, "prediction" means that the game ball enters the first start port 7120 or the second start port 7140, and the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201) detects special symbol start information (random number for judging a big hit, symbol Random number, random number for reach determination, random number for effect selection, etc.) is to analyze the start information of the acquired special symbol in advance than the lottery of the special symbol. and,
The analyzed information (read-ahead command) is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 (sub-CPU 301), and the "read-ahead effect" can be executed based on the read-ahead command.

FIG. 239(1) is a look-ahead execution correspondence table that defines whether or not to perform look-ahead according to the game state as look-ahead related data of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 239 (1), in the normal game state, both prefetching based on the starting information of the first special symbol and prefetching based on the starting information of the second special symbol can be executed. Also, in the time-saving game state, the big win game state, and the small win game state, only the look-ahead based on the starting information of the second special symbol can be executed.

FIG. 239(2) is an example of the structure of the look-ahead command as the analyzed information after analyzing the start information of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 239 (2), the look-ahead command is composed of "type of special symbol", which is the first special symbol or second special symbol, and a plurality of "parameters 1 to 3". there is

"Parameter 1" is win/lose information pre-analyzed as to whether it is a big win, a small win, or a loss based on the random number value for judging a big win, and FIG. is.

"Parameter 2" is symbol information obtained by pre-analyzing the special symbol (selected symbol) to be stopped and displayed based on the random number for judging the big hit and the symbol random number. is an example of a setting table for .

"Parameter 3" is the variation information obtained by pre-analyzing the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the random number for judging the big hit, the random number for judging reach, and the random number for selection of effect. 3 is an example of a setting table of No. 3.

In the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbols from the prefetching of the start information of the special symbols to before the lottery of the special symbols based on the start information of the special symbols is performed is also referred to as "preliminary variation". . Moreover, the variable display of the special symbol when the special symbol lottery based on the starting information of the special symbol is performed is also called "the variation".

[9-3-7. Normal pattern hit judgment table]
FIG. 240 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 240 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process. It is a table referred to when determining "hit" or "normal symbol loss" by lottery.

In the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 240, the normal symbol hit determination random number range (
Width) and hit/lose determination value data of normal symbols (“normal design hit” or “normal design loss”) are defined in association with each other. In addition, the random number for the hit judgment of the normal pattern is, for example, 0 to 6
Acquired in the range of 5535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 240, and determines normal symbol hit/loss determination value data based on the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. , and the hit/lose determination value data of the normal design is determined as "normal design hit determination value data". In addition, when the obtained random number value for winning judgment of normal symbols is 0, the main CPU 201 judges that the winning judgment value of the normal symbols is “losing judgment value data”.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the "normal symbol win" is determined at a selection rate of about 1/1.00, and the "normal symbol win" is more likely to be determined than the "normal symbol loss" is determined. ing. It should be noted that it is desirable to be configured to make it easier to determine "normal design hit" rather than "normal design loss" is determined, and the selection rate of "normal design hit" is limited to about 1/1.00 do not have.

In this embodiment, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is set to be common (the probability of winning per normal symbol is common) regardless of the game state whether the normal game state or the time saving game state, but as described later. By changing the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 according to the game state,
The degree of profit given to the player is varied according to the game state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, regardless of the game state whether the normal game state or the time-saving game state, the selection rate of the "normal symbol winning" is set in common, but the "normal symbol winning" is selected according to the game state. Different selectivities may be used. When the selection rate of the ``normal pattern win'' is varied according to the game state, the selection rate of the ``normal pattern win'' in the time-saving game state is higher than the selection rate of the ``normal pattern win'' in the normal game state. It is desirable to configure Furthermore, depending on the type of time-saving game state in the A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state), "normal pattern per" may have different selectivities.

[9-3-8. Normal pattern judgment table]
FIG. 241 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG.
00 is stored in the main ROM 202 .

The normal symbol determination table includes the above-described normal symbol win/lose determination value data and the pass gate 7126
This is a table referred to when selecting "normal symbol selection symbol data" for determining a normal symbol stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol acquired when the game ball passes through.

The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG.
"Normal design win" or "Normal design loss"), the normal design random number value, and the normal design selection design data are defined in association with each other. Incidentally, the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is obtained from, for example, 0 to 100 (101 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 241, and determines the normal symbol selection symbol data based on the normal symbol winning determination value data and the normal symbol random number value.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 241, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol selection symbol data is selected as follows.

For example, when the normal symbol per determination value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f1" as the normal symbol selection symbol data if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 49, and selects "f1" as the normal symbol selection symbol data. If the symbol random number is any one of 50-99, "f2" is selected as normal symbol selection symbol data. Also, when the normal pattern loss judgment value data is obtained, the main C
The PU 201 normally selects "f3" as the symbol selection symbol data regardless of the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.
to select.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko game machine, when selecting the normal symbol selection symbol data, regardless of the game state, the normal symbol win-lose determination value data (normal symbol hit determination process) result) and the normal symbol random number value, the normal symbol selection symbol data is selected. Incidentally, as in the first pachinko game machine, the normal symbol selection symbol data may be selected according to the game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol win determination table (see FIG. 240), and based on the acquired normal symbol win determination random number value, determines whether the normal symbol win/lose determination value data is displayed. is determined, and then the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 241) is referred to, and the normal symbol selection symbol data is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, on the basis of the obtained random number for hit determination of the normal design and the random number of the normal design, hit/lose determination value data of the normal design (win/lose of the normal design) and normal design selection design data are determined together. You may do so.

[9-3-9. Open pattern determination table for normal electric accessories]
FIG. 242 is an example of an opening pattern determination table for normal electric accessories in the seventh pachinko game machine. It should be noted that the opening pattern determination table for the ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG.
is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the pachinko game machine.

The opening pattern determination table for the normal electric accessory, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process (in the case of the normal symbol hit), according to the game state and the normal symbol selection pattern data. , the normal electric accessory 714 as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 7146
6 is referred to when determining the opening pattern.

In the normal electric accessory release pattern determination table shown in FIG. 242, game states, normal symbol selection pattern data, and normal electric accessory 7146 release patterns are defined in association with each other.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the “opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146” is the second starting port 71
"First open time" in the first open state of 40, "First wait time" in the first closed state of the second start port 7140, "2 in the second open state of the second start port 7140 "second open time", "second wait time" in the second closed state of the second starting port 7140, and "ending time" for closing the second starting port 7140 and ending the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 7146. consists of In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 is not limited to the configuration described above, and may be configured so that the open state and the closed state can be repeated three or more times, or the open state can be configured only once. may be configured. Furthermore, "1
An “opening time” for waiting for the first opening of the second starting port 7140 may be provided before the “opening time for the first time”.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal electric accessory release pattern determination table shown in FIG. 242, and determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 based on the game state and the normal symbol selection symbol data. When the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 is determined, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub CPU 301 the normal electric accessory opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 .

According to the normal electric accessory release pattern determination table shown in FIG. As the opening pattern (91H01H), the first opening time is 72 ms,
It is configured to determine no waiting time for the first time, no opening for the second and subsequent times, and an ending time of 12 ms.

Further, according to the opening pattern determination table for the normal electric accessory shown in FIG.
As the opening pattern (91H02H) of the normal electric accessory 7146, the first opening time 54
00 ms, the first waiting time of 120 ms, the second opening time of 72 ms, and the ending time of 12 ms are determined.

Thus, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessary 7146 differs depending on the game state.
A "disadvantageous open mode (also called "short open")" that makes it difficult to enter the ball is decided,
In the case of normal symbol hit in the time saving game state, it is configured to determine the "advantageous opening mode (also referred to as "long opening")" in which the game ball is easy to enter the second start port 7140. ing.

Further, in this embodiment, even if the open pattern of any normal electric accessory 7146 is activated,
The prescribed number for the general electricity is set to 1, and during the operation of the open pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 7146 (during the opening of the second start port 7140), one game ball is placed in the second start port 7140. When the ball is entered, the operation of the open pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 ends (the second starting port 7140 is closed). That is, for one normal symbol per, only one game ball is the second starting port 71
40 cannot be entered, and even if there is an open time of 5400 ms remaining in the time-saving gaming state, the second start port 7140 will be closed.

In addition, in this embodiment, A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state)
and B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) are the same as the same time-saving game state without distinction, and the opening pattern of the same normal electric accessory 7146 is determined, but A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state , Second time-saving game state) and B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) may be configured to determine different opening patterns of the normal electric accessary 7146 .

Furthermore, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 may be varied according to the normal symbol selection symbol data. However, in the case of normal symbol hit in the normal game state, it becomes a "disadvantageous release mode" group than in the case of normal symbol hit in the time saving game state, and in the case of normal symbol hit in the time saving game state, in the normal game state. It is desirable that the "advantageous opening mode" group is obtained as compared with the case of winning the normal symbol.

[9-3-10. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 243 is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 243 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 243, the game state, the normal symbol selection symbol data, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the normal symbol variation display time are associated with each other.
In addition, the column of "remarks" in FIG. 243 shows the symbol fixing time of the normal symbol for convenience so that it is easy to understand.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variation display time based on the game state and the normal symbol selection symbol data. Then, when the normal symbol variation pattern is determined, the main CPU 201 issues a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU.
301.

According to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 243, in the normal game state,
A variable display time of 414 ms for normal symbols is determined, and a variable display time of 408 ms for normal symbols is determined in the time-saving game state. Further, in the present embodiment, the design determination time of the normal symbols is determined to be the same time (for example, 540 ms) regardless of the game state or the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbols.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state, it is configured so that the variable display time of the normal symbols and the design confirmation time of the normal symbols are all determined. It may be configured such that the variable display time of normal symbols and the design determination time of normal symbols are determined. Similarly, in the time-saving gaming state, the variable display time of the same normal symbols and the fixed time of the normal symbols are determined. It may be configured such that the variable display time and the design confirmation time of the normal design are determined. Furthermore, in the A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state), the variable display time of different normal symbols, the normal design pattern It may be configured such that a fixed time is determined.

Next, the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 235 described above, the variation pattern table J1 of the special symbol in the time saving game state shown in FIG. 237, the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. With reference to the object release pattern determination table, the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG.
An example of the operation contents of will be described.

[9-3-11. Operation details of normal electric accessories in the first time-saving game state]
Fig. 244 shows the normal electric accessory 714 in the first time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine
6 is an example of the operation contents of 6.

As shown in FIG. 244, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 7126 in the first time-saving gaming state, the first normal symbol variation display is started. At this time, with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG.
08 ms of variation in normal symbols is performed, and thereafter, stop display (design determination) of normal symbols is performed with a symbol determination time of 540 ms.

When the first normal symbol has been determined and the normal symbol is hit, the normal electric accessory 7146 is opened as a long opening pattern by referring to the normal electric accessory release pattern determination table shown in FIG. 242 . is determined, and the second start port 7140 is open for a maximum of 5400 ms.

Then, since the specified number of normal electric accessories for the normal electric accessory 7146 is 1, when the game ball enters the second start port 7140, the operation of the normal electric accessory ends, and the second start port 714
0 is closed.

When the game ball enters the second start hole 7140, the variation pattern table J1 of the special symbols in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. A variable display of the second special symbol is performed for 200 ms.

When the variation of the second special symbol is completed, "Time saving number of times of the second special symbol = 1" is established as the A time saving end condition, and the first time saving game state ends and the normal game state (first normal game state). Therefore, when the game ball enters the second starting port 7140, the first time-saving game state can be terminated quickly.

Then, when the variation of the second special symbol is completed, the second special symbol is stopped (determined symbol) with a very long symbol determination time of 89000 ms.

In addition, in the design confirmation of the second special design with a very long design confirmation time of 89000 ms,
As will be described later, an effect (boss battle effect) related to the determination result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed on the display device 7 .

In addition, even if the game ball enters the second start port 7140 and the operation of the normal electric accessory ends, if the number of reserved normal symbols is stored, the second time immediately after the end of the operation of the normal electric role The variable display of normal symbols is started. That is, in the first time-saving gaming state, the second normal symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display can be started substantially at the same time.

Then, the variable display of the normal symbols in the first time-saving gaming state is performed by referring to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. The normal symbol determination (stop display) is performed with a determination time of 540 ms.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first variable display time of the second special symbol in the first time-saving gaming state (200ms) ≤ the variable display time of the normal symbol (408ms) is configured to be established. Therefore, even if it is in the first time-saving gaming state when the second normal symbol variation display starts, when the second normal symbol variation display ends,
The game state has already been shifted to the normal game state (first normal game state).

For this reason, even if the second normal symbol determination is completed and the normal symbol is hit, the normal electric role in the normal game state is referenced by referring to the normal electric role item release pattern determination table shown in FIG. A short release (72 ms) is determined as the release pattern of the object 7146, making it extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 7140.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the first time-saving game state is quickly terminated by determining the variable display time of the second special symbol to the extremely short first variable display time, and the normal electric accessory 7146 Since the specified number for electricity is set to 1 and the variable display time of the normal symbols in the first time-saving game state is set to be longer than the first variable display time of the second special symbols, the first time-saving game state is controlled. When there is, the start information of the second special symbol is not stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 (the number of reserved second special symbols is not stored).
The game state is controlled, and the variable display of the second special symbol can be made only once.

On the other hand, when the second time-saving gaming state is controlled, the start information of the second special symbol can be stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 (the number of reserved second special symbols is storable) game state is controlled.

[9-3-12. Right-handed instruction period setting table]
FIG. 245 is an example of a right-handed instruction period setting table in the seventh pachinko game machine. 245 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 245, as a "right hitting instruction condition" for instructing a right hitting instruction, as the first right hitting instruction condition "controlling the big hit game state and the small winning game state", the second right hitting instruction Three conditions are set: "during control of the time-saving game state" as the condition, and "during the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving game state" as the third right-handed instruction condition.

"During control of the jackpot game state and the minor hit game state" as the first right-handed instruction condition is a condition that is established during the period from the start to the end of the jackpot game state or the minor hit game state.

"During control of the time-saving gaming state" as the second right-handed instruction condition is changed from "time-saving start condition" to "
It is a condition that is established during the period up to the time saving end condition. In addition, the time saving game state here does not distinguish between A time saving game state (first time saving game state, second time saving game state) and B time saving game state (third time saving game state). This is the same for "during the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving game state" as the third right-handed instruction condition.

In addition, the "time saving start condition" means that at the end of the big hit game state (the game ball is V from the small hit game state)
including the end of the jackpot game state after passing through the winning opening 7156). In addition, "time saving end condition" refers to either the start of the special symbol fixed time in the final variation of the time saving game state, the end of the big win game state or the end of the small win game state.

"During the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving game state" as the third right-handed instruction condition, when the reserved number of the second special symbols is stored at the time of the end of the time-saving game state, the second It is a condition that is satisfied during the period until the variable display of all the second special symbols corresponding to the reserved number of 2 special symbols is completed (until all the reserved numbers of the second special symbols are consumed). In addition, after the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving gaming state is over, even if the holding of the second special symbol is forcibly saved, the third right-handed instruction condition is not satisfied, and the right-handed instruction is performed. can't break

Then, when any one of the first to third right-handed instruction conditions is met, the player is notified of the right-handed instruction to hit to the right.

[9-4. Main control processing]
In the seventh pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the special symbol control process and normal symbol control performed in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although part of the processing is different, other processing is the same. Therefore, the special symbol control process and the normal symbol control process will be described below, and description of other processes executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

The processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot game state end processing (FIGS. 42 and 259). ), etc.), below, including the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko game machine, the step numbers will be changed and explained again.

[9-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the special symbol control processing performed in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 246 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 246, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S7001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). Main CPU
201 moves the process to S7002 after executing the process of S7001.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process by:
Prior to the process of S7001, an address setting process is performed to set the address of the special symbol work area in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register.

In S7002, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S7001 is 0, that is, whether or not it is waiting for variable display of the special symbol. When the main CPU 201 determines that the control number of the special symbol is not 0, the process goes to S.
The process moves to S7008, and when it is determined that the control number of the special symbol is 0, the process moves to S7003.

In S7003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, that is, whether or not there is a reserved number of second special symbols. When the main CPU 201 determines that the starting information of the second special symbol is not stored, the process proceeds to S7004, and when it determines that the starting information of the second special symbol is stored, the process proceeds to S7005. Transfer.

In S7004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, that is, whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols is present. When the main CPU 201 determines that the start information of the first special symbol is not stored, the process proceeds to S7007, and when it determines that the start information of the first special symbol is stored, the process proceeds to S7006. to

At S7005, the main CPU 201 performs shift processing to shift the second special symbol start information stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 to the special symbol determination area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the main RAM 203
The start information stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) is shifted to the special symbol determination area (0), and the second special symbol start storage area (2) to the first special symbol start storage area (3) The start information stored in is shifted to the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (2).

In S7006, the main CPU 201 performs shift processing to shift the first special symbol start information stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 to the special symbol determination area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the main RAM 203
The start information stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) is shifted to the special symbol determination area (0), and the first special symbol start storage area (2) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) The starting information stored in is shifted to the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (3).

In S7007, the main CPU 201 stores the main RAM 2
Special symbol start information (
When the reserved number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) has not been stored for a certain period of time or more, transmission reservation processing of the demonstration display command is performed. It should be noted that the demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 4) during the next system timer interrupt process.
5), it is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 . Then, when the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect.

At S7008, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. The main CPU 201 performs S7
After executing the process of 003, the special symbol control process is terminated, and the process is changed to the main control main process (Fig. 2
0 to FIG. 23).

It should be noted that the main CPU 201 sets the interrupt prohibition section, and the special symbol control process (S
7001 to S7008) are preferably performed within the interrupt disabled section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the starting information of the second special symbol is stored as the seventh pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the variator has been described, it is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is stored, it may be a priority variation machine in which the special symbol management process is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 7120 or the second It may be a sequential variation machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the winning order (ball entering order) to the starting port 7140.

[9-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 247, during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 246), the main CPU 20
1 will be described. FIG. 247 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The numbers (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 247 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

At S7011, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is zero. The waiting time for this special symbol is set as the waiting time for various processes in the special symbol management process, and is subtracted as a special symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process performed at intervals of 2 msec, for example. When the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol waiting time is not 0, it ends the special symbol management process, returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 246), and determines that the special symbol waiting time is 0. If it is determined, the processing is S
7012.

At S7012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol.
After executing the process of S7012, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7013. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S7013 based on the control state number read in the process of S7012.

At S7013, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S7013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 advances the processing to S7014.
to

At S7014, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S7014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 advances the processing to S7015.
to

At S7015, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This S7
The process of 015 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7016.

At S7016, the main CPU 201 performs a small winning game state setting process. This S
The process of 7016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3".
The details of this small winning game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7017.

At S7017, the main CPU 201 performs small winning game state control processing. This S
The process of 7017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4".
The details of this small-hit game state control process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7018.

At S7018, the main CPU 201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. This S7
The process of 018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "5", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7019.

At S7019, the main CPU 201 performs a special winning opening opening control process. This S7
The process of 019 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7020.

At S7020, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot game state ending process. This S
The processing of 7020 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7".
The details of this jackpot game state ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S7013 to S7020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 246). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

[9-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 248, during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), the main CPU 20
1 will be described. FIG. 248 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7021, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0". When the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", it terminates the special symbol variable display start process and performs the special symbol management process (FIG. 24).
7), and if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "0", the processing is S7
022.

In S7022, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process for determining a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, a special symbol hit determination is performed, and hit/lose determination value data is determined according to the determination result. After executing the process of S7022, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7023.

In S7023, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process for determining a special symbol to be stopped. In this special symbol determination process, with reference to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. A "selected symbol command" or a "designated symbol command" is determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol as the starting information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S7023, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7024.

In S7024, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process
When the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (big hit or small hit), it is a process of determining the type of hit. In this hit type determination process, the hit type determination table shown in FIG.
determines the type of hit. Furthermore, in order to determine the number of times of time reduction based on the game state at the time of winning after the end of the big win game state, the winning game state data indicating the game state at the time of winning when it is determined as a big win or a small win is stored in the main RAM 203. is set in the state area at the time of election. After executing the process of S7024, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7025.

In S7025, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing for determining a special symbol variation pattern. In this special symbol variation pattern determination process, one of the special symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the type, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for effect selection. The details of this special symbol variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S7025, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7026.

In S7026, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display time setting process for setting a special symbol variable display time. In this special symbol variation display time setting process, the above S
The special symbol variation pattern table determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process of 7025 is referred to, and the special symbol variation display time is determined based on the determined special symbol variation pattern. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display time of the determined special symbol to the main RA.
It is set to the special symbol waiting time in M203, and the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164 is caused to start variable display of special symbols. The main CPU 201 performs S702
After executing the process of 6, the process moves to S7027.

At S7027, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", the special symbol variable display end process (
(see FIG. 247) is performed. After executing the process of S7027, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7028.

At S7028, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of confirming/updating parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 is performed. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. In addition, the game state specifying command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7028, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7029.

At S7029, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this processing, mainly update processing of various flags (for example, time saving flag etc.) relating to management of the game state is performed. After executing the process of S7029, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7030.

At S7030, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. In this process, transmission reservation processing of "symbol designation command" and "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as a special symbol effect start command. As transmission reservation processing of the design designation command, transmission reservation processing of the design designation command determined in S7023 is performed. Further, as the transmission reservation processing of the special symbol variation pattern command, transmission reservation processing of the special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in S7025 is performed so that the type of the special symbol can be known. In addition, the special symbol effect start command that is reserved for transmission in this process is the effect control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45)
, is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 .

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section, and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S7029), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S7030)) during the interrupt prohibited interval. preferably in-house.

[9-4-4. Special Symbol Variation Pattern Decision Processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 249, during the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 248), the main C
The details of the special symbol variation pattern determination process executed by the PU 201 will be described.
FIG. 249 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation pattern determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7025-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, it shifts the process to S7025-2, and if it determines that the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (that is, the time-saving gaming state). , the process moves to S7025-4.

At S7025-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is during the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time saving gaming state. More specifically, the main RAM2
It is determined whether or not it is a special symbol control process when the second special symbol start information stored in the second special symbol start storage area of 03 is shifted to the special symbol determination area (0). If the main CPU 201 determines that it is during the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving gaming state, it moves the process to S7025-3, and if it is not during the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving gaming state. If so, the process proceeds to S7025-4.

At S7025-3, the main CPU 201 determines a special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 236(2).

In S7025-4, the main CPU 201 performs effect variation counter update processing for updating the effect variation counter of the main RAM 203 by subtracting 1 from it. Here, as will be described later, the "effect variation counter" is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) when the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving game state ends. Also, after the seventh pachinko game machine is backed up and cleared, the performance variation counter is also cleared, and the performance variation counter becomes zero.

At S7025-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect variation counter of the main RAM 203=0. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7025-6 if it determines that the production variation counter=0, and shifts the process to S7025-7 if it determines that the production variation counter=0.

At S7025-6, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236(1).

At S7025-7, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 236(2).

At S7025-8, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the first time-saving gaming state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is the first time-saving gaming state, it moves the process to S7025-9, and if it determines that the current gaming state is not the first time-saving gaming state, it processes to S7025-12.

At S7025-9, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the current variation of the special symbol is the final variation of the first time-saving gaming state. When the main CPU 201 determines that the current variation of the special symbol is the final variation of the first time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to S7025-10.
, and when it is determined that the fluctuation of the special symbol this time is not the final fluctuation of the first time-saving gaming state, the process is shifted to S7025-11.

At S7025-10, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 237(1).

At S7025-11, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 237(2).

At S7025-12, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the current variation of the special symbol is the final variation of the time-saving gaming state. When the main CPU 201 determines that the current variation of the special symbol is the final variation of the time-saving gaming state, it shifts the process to S7025-13 and determines that the current special symbolic variation is not the final variation of the time-saving gaming state. If so, the processing is S702
Move to 5-14.

At S7025-13, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 237(4).

At S7025-14, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 237(3).

At S7025-15, the main CPU 201 refers to the determined special symbol variation pattern table, the special symbol type (starting information type), the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process at S7022, and the special symbol determination. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number for reach determination and the random number for effect selection as the start information of the special symbol shifted to the area (0).

[9-4-5. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 250, during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), the main CPU 20
1 will be described. FIG. 250 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7041, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1". When the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", it terminates the special symbol variable display start process and performs the special symbol management process (FIG. 24).
7), and if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "1", the processing is S7
Go to 042.

In S7042, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol finalization time setting process for setting a special symbol finalization time. In this special symbol design determination time setting process, the special symbol design determination time is determined based on the game state and the result (hit or lose) of the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, as shown in the special symbol variation pattern table of FIGS. 236 and 237, when the game state is normal, the special symbol symbol determination time is determined to be the first symbol determination time of 540 ms, and the second symbol determination time is 540 ms. When it is the final variation time of the time-saving game state of 1, the pattern fixing time of the special pattern is determined to be a very long second pattern fixing time of 89000 ms, and the final variation time of the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state is determined. When it becomes a loss as a result of the hit determination processing of the special design, the design determination time of the special design is determined to be the third design determination time of 15000 ms, and if it is a time-saving game state other than the above, the design of the special design. The confirmation time is determined to be the fourth symbol confirmation time of 540 ms. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the symbol confirmation time of the determined special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and the first special symbol display section 16
3 or the second special symbol display unit 164 is made to stop display the special symbol. Main CPU 201
executes the process of S7042, and then moves the process to S7043.

It should be noted that the symbol fixing time of the special symbol may be determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, or may be determined based only on the game state. Furthermore, one predetermined symbol fixing time (for example, 540 msec) may be determined.

In S7043, the main CPU 201 performs time saving management processing. In the seventh pachinko game machine, a ceiling counter update process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter and a time saving counter updating process of subtracting 1 from the time saving number counter are performed when the variable display of the special symbols is finished. When this ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, set the time saving flag = 2 indicating the B time saving game state (
The time saving flag is turned on), the specified number of times is set in the time saving number counter, and the transition control to the B time saving game state is performed. Also, when the time saving number counter = 0, the time saving flag is cleared (the time saving flag = 0 is set), and the transition control from the time saving game state to the normal game state is performed. The details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIG. Main CP
After executing the process of S7043, U201 shifts the process to S7044.

At S7044, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (S7 in FIG. 247) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process
015) is performed. After executing the process of S7044, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7045.

At S7045, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7045, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S
Move to 7046.

At S7046, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter.
As described above in the description of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of special symbol confirmations (the number of times a special symbol game is executed). You may manage the number of games of the special symbol game performed under specific conditions, such as the remaining number of times of shortening of working hours. After executing the process of S7046, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

[9-4-6. Time saving management process]
Next, referring to FIG. 251, during the special symbol variable display end processing (see FIG. 250), the main C
The time saving management process performed by PU201 is demonstrated. FIG. 251 is a flow chart showing an example of time saving management processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7043-1, the main CPU 201 performs time saving counter update processing for updating the time saving counter. In particular, in the seventh pachinko game machine, "
The time-saving counter" is composed of two types: a "first time-saving counter" corresponding to the total time-saving number of special symbols, and a "second time-saving counter" corresponding to the number of time-savings of the second special symbol. there is The details of this time saving counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 252 . After executing the process of S7043-1, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7043-2.

In S7043-2, the main CPU 201 performs ceiling counter update processing for updating the ceiling counter. This ceiling counter update process is for adding 1 to the ceiling counter when the ceiling count prohibition flag is off.
5 is the same as the ceiling counter update process. After executing the process of S7043-2, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7043-3.

In S7043-3, the main CPU 201 performs time saving transition determination processing for determining the transition to the B time saving gaming state. In this time saving transition determination process, the ceiling counter is the ceiling value (for example, 59
9 times), the ceiling flag and the ceiling count prohibition flag are turned on to prepare for transition to the B time saving game state, and the time saving transition determination process shown in FIG. 37 of the first pachinko game machine is similar to However, since the seventh pachinko gaming machine is not controlled to a high-probability gaming state, the time-saving transition determination processing executed in the seventh pachinko gaming machine does not turn on the probability variation flag, and the probability variation flag is turned on and off. is determined as "off of probability variation flag". After executing the process of S7043-3, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S70.
Move to 43-4.

In S7043-4, the main CPU 201 performs time saving transition processing for transitioning to the B time saving gaming state. This time-saving transition process is a process of shifting to the B time-saving game state when the ceiling flag is ON, and is the same as the time-saving transition process shown in FIG. 38 of the first pachinko game machine. After executing the process of S7043-4, the main CPU 201 performs the process of S7043-
Move to 5.

However, the time-saving transition processing executed in the seventh pachinko gaming machine is different from the time-saving transition processing shown in FIG. 38 of the first pachinko gaming machine.
As the first difference, since the seventh pachinko game machine is not controlled to a high certainty game state, the time saving transition processing executed in the seventh pachinko game machine does not turn on the probability variation flag, and the probability variation flag The ON/OFF determination of is determined as "OFF of probability variation flag".
In addition, as the second difference, since the seventh pachinko game machine is not controlled to the C time saving game state, all determinations of ON/OFF of the time saving hit flag are determined as "off of the time saving hit flag".
As a third difference, the setting contents set in the B time saving control mode determination process (S208 shown in FIG. 38) are different. In the B time saving control mode determination process of the seventh pachinko game machine, B
The time saving flag indicating the time saving gaming state is set to 2 (the time saving flag is turned on), and the second
In order to have the same end condition as the A time saving end condition in the time saving game state, "first time saving counter = 1
1 (special symbol total time saving number = 11)" and "second time saving counter = 5 (second special symbol time saving number = 5)" are determined. In addition, the number of times of time saving may be determined in the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter so as to become a different end condition from the A time saving end condition of the second time saving game state.

In S7043-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not one of the “first time saving counter” and the “second time saving counter” is zero. Main CPU20
1 moves the process to S7043-6 when it is determined that the time saving counter=0, and moves the process to S7043-10 when it determines that the time saving counter=0 is not.

In S7043-6, the main CPU 201 clears the time saving information. here,
As time saving information, "first time saving counter", "second time saving counter", "time saving flag" for identifying whether the game state is normal game state, A time saving game state or B time saving game state, The "A time saving flag" for distinguishing the A time saving game state from the first time saving game state and the second time saving game state is cleared (=0 is set). After executing the process of S7043-6, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7043-7.

In S7043-7, the main CPU 201 refers to the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, and determines whether or not the second special symbol pending number>0 (second special symbol start storage area (1) to ( 3) It is determined whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is stored in any of the items. If the main CPU 201 determines that the reserved number of second special symbols>0, the process proceeds to S7043-8, and if it determines that the reserved number of the second special symbols is not>0, the process proceeds to S7043. Move to -10.

In S7043-8, the main CPU 201 turns on the special 2 control period flag. This "special 2 control period flag" is a flag for identifying whether or not it is in the "second normal game state", and when the special 2 control period flag is on, it is in the second normal game state. It is shown that. After executing the process of S7043-8, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S7043-8.
Transfer to 043-10.

At S7043-10, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. In particular, in the present embodiment, it is identified whether the normal game state is the "first normal game state" or the "second normal game state" by turning on/off the special 2 control period flag. A game state designation command can be generated. After executing the process of S7043-10, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7043-11.

In S7043-11, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a time saving shift command when shifting to the time saving game state. In addition, the time-saving transition command that is reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S7043-11, the main C
PU201 ends the time saving management process and returns the process to the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 250).

[9-4-7. Time saving counter update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 252, the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 251) will be described. FIG. 252 is a flow chart showing an example of the time saving counter update process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7043-21, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (the time saving flag is other than 0). When the main CPU 201 determines that the time saving flag is on, the process proceeds to S7043-22, and when it determines that the time saving flag is not on, the current time saving counter update process ends.

In S7043-22, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the "first time saving counter" of the main RAM 203 to update it. After executing the process of S7043-22, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7043-23.

At S7043-23, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting information shifted to the special symbol determination area (0) of the main RAM 203 is the second special symbol starting information.
When the main CPU 201 determines that the starting information is the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S7.
043-24, when it is determined that it is not the starting information of the second special symbol, the time saving counter update process of this time is terminated.

In S7043-24, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the "second time saving counter" of the main RAM 203 to update it. After executing the process of S7043-24, the main CPU 201 ends the current time saving counter update process.

[9-4-8. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, referring to FIG. 253, during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), the main CPU 20
The special symbol game determination processing executed by 1 will be described. FIG. 253 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7051, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2". When the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol control state number is not "2", the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol game determination process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and returns to the special symbol control state. If it is determined that the number is "2", the process goes to S705.
Move to 2.

In S7052, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a big win has been achieved, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win. The main CPU 201
If it is determined to be a big hit, the process moves to S7054, and if it is determined not to be a big hit, the process moves to S7061.

In S7054, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a big hit. In this process, an external signal (for example, a jackpot signal according to the type of special symbol) to be output to the hall computer 186 (both see FIG. 232) via the external terminal plate 184 at the time of the jackpot is generated. After that, the generated external signal is output to the external terminal board 184 . Main CPU20
1 executes the process of S7054 and then moves the process to S7055.

At S7055, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. Perform processing to set the upper limit of the number of rounds. After executing the process of S7055, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7056.

At S7056, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot state display process. In this jackpot state display process, the round display LED corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above
Along with setting data, right-handed instruction data for notifying the player to instruct right-handed hitting is set. After executing the process of S7056, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S70.
Move to 57.

At S7057, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the gaming state management process when it is determined to be a big hit, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the time saving flag and the time saving counter (first time saving counter and second time saving counter). After executing the process of S7057, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7058.

At S7058, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S7058, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7059.

At S7059, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the special symbol game determination process is completed, the large winning opening preparation process (see S7018 in FIG. 247) will be performed. . After executing the process of S7059, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7059.

At S7060, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a big hit start display command. After executing the processing of S7060, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 247).

At S7061, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a small hit. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7063 when it determines that it is a small hit, and shifts the process to S7071 when it determines that it is not a small hit (that is, loses).

In S7063, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a small hit. In this processing, an external signal (for example, a small win signal, etc.) is generated which is output to the hall computer 186 (both see FIG. 232) via the external terminal board 184 when a small win is made. After that, the generated external signal is output to the external terminal board 184 .
After executing the process of S7063, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7064.

At S7064, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG.
A process of setting the upper limit of the number of small hits in the main RAM 203 to the determined maximum number of times of opening is performed. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of small hits set in this process is, for example, 16
times. After executing the process of S7064, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7066.

In S7065, the main CPU 201 performs a small win state display process. In this small hit state display process, right hitting instruction data for notifying the player of instructing right hitting is set. After executing the process of S7065, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7066.

At S7066, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the gaming state management process when it is determined to be a small hit, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the time saving flag and the time saving counter (first time saving counter and second time saving counter). After executing the process of S7066, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7067.

At S7067, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S7067, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7068.

At S7068, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "3". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the small winning game state setting process (see S7016 in FIG. 247) is performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. . After executing the process of S7068, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7069.

In S7069, the main CPU 201 performs processing of reservation processing for transmission of a small winning start display command. After executing the processing of S7069, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 247).

At S7071, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, the main CPU 201
When the special symbol game end processing is performed, the special symbol game determination processing is terminated, and the processing is returned to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 247).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination processing (S7051 to S7071) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[9-4-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 254, during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 253), the main CPU
The special symbol game end processing executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 254 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7072, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "0". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game is finished, and the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. Become. After executing the process of S7072, the main CPU 201
The process moves to S7073.

At S7073, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. Also, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special symbol game end process, the starting information stored in the special symbol determination area (0) in the main RAM 203 is cleared. After executing the process of S7073, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S
Move to 7074.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special symbol game end process, the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 is referred to, and the second special symbol start storage area (1) to (3) ), when the starting information of the second special symbol is not stored in any of the above (the number of reserved second special symbols=0), the special 2 control period flag is turned off.

At S7074, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol game end command. In addition, the special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is the sub-control circuit 30 in the effect control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
0. After the process of S7074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 253).

[9-4-10. Small hit game state setting process]
Next, referring to FIG. 255, during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), the main CPU 20
The small hit game state setting process executed by 1 will be described. FIG. 255 is a flow chart showing an example of a small winning game state setting process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7081, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3". When the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 terminates the small winning game state setting process and performs the special symbol management process (FIG. 247).
See), and if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "3", the process is S70
Move to 82.

In S7082, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 235, determines the opening mode of the second big winning opening 7151 as the opening mode of the small winning game state, and opens and closes the V winning opening 7156. Determines the mode of operation of the shutter 7159 . In this embodiment, the operating mode of the V shutter 7159 is determined to open the V winning port 7156 when the second big winning port 7151 is opened. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S7082, the process moves to S7083.

At S7083, the main CPU 201 performs a second prize winning opening opening/closing control process. In this second big winning hole opening/closing control process, the opening/closing pattern data for opening/closing the second big winning hole 7151 (for example, opening time of the second big winning hole 7151, wait time , time-series control data such as the maximum number of openings). Then, control based on the generated opening/closing pattern data is started. After executing the process of S7083, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7084.

At S7084, the main CPU 201 performs V winning opening opening/closing control processing. In this V winning opening opening/closing control process, the V winning opening 71 is opened based on the determined operation mode of the V shutter 7159.
56 (for example, time-series control data such as opening time, waiting time, maximum number of openings, etc.) of V winning port 7156 is generated. Then, control based on the generated operation pattern data is started. After executing the process of S7084, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7085.

At S7085, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S7085)
By doing, after the end of this small hit game state setting process, the small hit game state control process (
(see S7017 in FIG. 247) is performed. The main CPU 201 executes S7085
After executing the process of , the process moves to S7086.

At S7086, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. The main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the processing of S7086, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game state setting processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 247).

[9-4-11. Small hit game state control process]
Next, referring to FIG. 256, during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), the main CPU 20
A small hit game state control process executed by 1 will be described. FIG. 256 is a flow chart showing an example of a small winning game state control process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7091, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 terminates the small winning game state control processing and performs the special symbol management processing (FIG. 247).
), and if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "4", the processing is S70
Move to 92.

In S7092, the main CPU 201 determines the number of game balls entering the second large winning opening 7151 when the second special electric shutter 7154 is operated to open the second large winning opening 7151 (the second large winning opening 7151 winning number) is the maximum winning number. In this process, the second
It is determined whether or not the value of the big winning opening counter is the predetermined maximum winning number of the second big winning openings 7151 (for example, 10).

When the main CPU 201 determines in S7092 that the number of prizes won at the second big prize opening 7151 is not the maximum number of prizes won, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7093, and at S7092 the number of prizes won at the second big prize opening 7151 reaches the maximum number of prizes won. If it is determined that there is, the process goes to S7094
to

At S7093, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second big winning opening 7151 has been completely opened. In this process, it is determined whether or not the control based on the opening/closing pattern data generated in the process of S7084 (see FIG. 255) has ended.

When the main CPU 201 determines in S7093 that the second big winning opening 7151 has not been completely opened, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game state control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247). Returning, when it is determined in S7093 that the second big winning opening 7151 has been completely opened, the process proceeds to S7094.

At S<b>7094 , the main CPU 201 performs closing processing of the second big winning opening 7151 . After executing the process of S7094, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7095.

At S7095, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is V winning detection. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 7156 within the specified time (that is, whether or not the V winning opening switch 7157 has detected it).

When the main CPU 201 determines in S7095 that V winning has been detected,
The process moves to S7097, and when it is determined in S7095 that there is no V winning detection, the process moves to S7105.

At S7097, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for the big hit from the second route. In this process, an external signal (for example, a jackpot signal according to the type of special symbol) to be output to the hall computer 186 (both see FIG. 232) via the external terminal plate 184 at the time of the jackpot is generated. After that, the generated external signal is output to the external terminal board 184 . After executing the process of S7097, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7098.

At S7098, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. Perform processing to set the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds. After executing the process of S7098, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7099.

In S7099, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the second big winning opening 7 that was first executed based on the small hit
The opening of 151 (that is, the operation of the second special electric shutter 7154) is processed as the first round round game. That is, it was determined that there was a V winning detection (S7095 is Y
The big hit game state executed by the ES determination is started from the round game of the second round. After executing the process of S7099, the main CPU 201
The process moves to S7100.

At S7100, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot state display process. In this jackpot state display process, the round display LED corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above
Along with setting data, right-handed instruction data for notifying the player to instruct right-handed hitting is set. After executing the process of S7100, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S71.
01.

At S7101, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the gaming state management process when it is determined to be a big hit, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the time saving flag and the time saving counter (first time saving counter and second time saving counter). After executing the process of S7101, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7102.

At S7102, the main CPU 201 performs game state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S7102, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7103.

At S7103, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the special symbol game determination process ends, the big winning opening preparation process (Fig. 247) is performed. After executing the process of S7103, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7104.

In S7104, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a V-hit start display command. After executing the processing of S7104, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game state control processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 247).

In S7105, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a small hit end display command. After executing the process of S7105, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7106.

At S7106, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 254 is performed. Main CPU20
1, after executing the processing of S7106, ends the small winning game state control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 247).

[9-4-12. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 257, during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), the main CPU 20
1 will be described. FIG. 257 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7111, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5". When the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the state number is "5", the process goes to S711.
Move to 2.

In S7112, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. The count value of the round counter (round counter value) is the main R
It is stored in a predetermined area within the AM 203 . After executing the process of S7112, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7113.

In S7113, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the loaded round counter value is the upper limit value of the number of big hit rounds.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7113 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit, it moves the process to S7114. to S7117.

At S7114, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "7". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7", the big win game state end process (Fig. 247) is performed after the big winning opening opening preparation process is finished. After executing the process of S7114, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S71.
Move to 15.

At S7115, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S7115, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7116.

In S7116, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command. Incidentally, the jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S7116, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

In S7117, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S7117, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7118.

At S7118, the main CPU 201 performs selection processing of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the first big winning hole 7131 is selected as the big winning hole to be opened in the big winning game state. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big win, the big win game control process is started. If the result is a small win and the big win game control process is started by the V winning detection, the second big winning hole 7151 is selected instead of the first big winning hole 7131 as the big winning hole to be opened. You may After executing the process of S7118, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7119.

At S7119, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the first big winning opening 7131, the maximum opening time of the first big winning opening 7131, the maximum number of winnings to the first big winning opening 7131, and the like are set. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude the case where the first big prize opening 7131 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the first big prize winning opening 7131 is opened and closed are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S7119, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7120.

In S7120, the main CPU 201 performs opening control data generation processing. In this process, opening control data for opening the first big winning hole 7131 is generated based on the information set in the various big winning hole related setting processes of S7119. Then, control based on the generated opening control data is started. After executing the process of S7120, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7121.

At S7121, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", the large winning opening opening control process (see FIG. 247) is performed after the completion of this large winning opening opening preparation process. Become. After executing the process of S7121, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7.
Move to 122.

At S7122, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S7122, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7123.

At S7123, the main CPU 201 performs reservation processing for transmission of the command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is the sub control circuit 3 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
00. After executing the process of S7123, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

[9-4-13. Large winning opening control process]
Next, referring to FIG. 258, during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), the main CPU 20
1 will be described. FIG. 258 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7131, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6". When the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 terminates the big winning opening control process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the state number is "6", the process goes to S713.
Move to 2.

In S7132, the main CPU 201 determines that the number of game balls entering the first big winning hole 7131 (the winning number of the first big winning hole 7131) is the maximum number of winning balls when the first big winning hole 7131 is opened. Determine whether or not there is In this process, the first big winning mouth count switch 7
132 (see FIG. 232) is determined whether or not the value of the first big winning opening counter is the predetermined maximum winning number of the first big winning opening 7131 (for example, 7). .

When the main CPU 201 determines in S7132 that the number of prizes won in the first big prize opening 7131 is not the maximum number of prizes won, it shifts the process to S7133, and in S7132 the number of prizes won in the first big prize opening 7131 is the maximum number of prizes won. If so, the process proceeds to S7134.

At S7133, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the first big winning opening 7131 has elapsed. In this process, various setting processes related to the big winning opening (S7 in FIG. 257
119), it is determined whether the maximum open time set in (see 119) has elapsed.

When the main CPU 201 determines in S7133 that the maximum opening time of the first big winning hole 7131 has not passed, it ends the big winning hole opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247). . Further, when the main CPU 201 determines in S7133 that the maximum opening time of the first big winning opening 7131 has passed, the process proceeds to S7134.

At S7134, the main CPU 201 performs closing processing of the first big winning opening 7131. FIG. After executing the process of S7134, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7135.

At S7135, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this big winning opening opening control process, the big winning opening opening preparation process (see FIG. 257) is performed again. It will happen. After executing the process of S7135, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7136.

At S7136, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, transmission reservation processing of a game state specifying command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S7136, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7137.

In S7137, the main CPU 201 performs an inter-round display command transmission reservation process. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S7137, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

[9-4-14. Jackpot game state end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 259, during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), the main CPU 20
1 will be described. FIG. 259 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot game state ending process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7141, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7". When the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7", the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot game state end processing and performs the special symbol management processing (FIG. 247).
), and if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "7", the processing is S71
Move to 42.

At S7142, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this special symbol game end setting process, a process of setting or resetting various flag data used in the jackpot game state and various counters (for example, a round counter, a big winning opening winning counter, etc.) is performed. After executing the process of S7142, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7143.

At S7143, the main CPU 201 performs state setting processing after the end of the big win. In this state setting process after the end of the jackpot, the hit type determination table shown in FIG.
Based on the selected symbol command determined in the special symbol determination process of 7023 and the game state data at the time of winning indicating the game state at the time of winning set in the winning type determination process of S7024,
The mode of the game state after the jackpot game state (the time saving flag and the number of times of time saving) is determined, and data of the determined game state mode is set. After executing the process of S7143, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7144.

Specifically, when the game state at the time of winning is the normal game state, the selected symbol command "z1"
When , the time saving flag = 1 is set (the time saving flag is turned on), the first time saving number counter = 7 is set, and the second time saving number counter = 1 is set. In addition, when the game state at the time of winning is the normal game state and the selected symbol command is "z2 to 8", the time saving flag = 1 is set (the time saving flag is turned on), and the first time saving number counter = 11
, and set the second time saving number counter = 5. Then, when the game state at the time of winning is the time saving game state, the time saving flag = 1 is set (the time saving flag is turned on) for all the selected symbol commands, and the first time saving number counter = 7 is set. and set the second time saving number counter=1.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in order to identify the A time saving game state in which the first time saving number counter = 7 and the second time saving number counter = 1 are set as the "first time saving game state", A time saving flag = In order to identify the A time saving game state in which 1 is set and the first time saving number counter = 11 and the second time saving number counter = 5 are set as the "second time saving game state", A time saving flag =
Set 2. And a game state specification command can be generated based on the A time saving flag.

At S7144, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 254 is performed. Main CPU20
1, after executing the processing of S7144, ends the jackpot game state end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited interval and performs the above-described jackpot game state end processing within the interrupt prohibited interval.

[9-6-15. Normal symbol control process]
Next, referring to FIG. 260, in main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23), the main CPU
Normal symbol control processing executed by 201 will be described. Prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 260, the main CPU 201 stores normal symbol start information and determines whether or not the normal symbol determination start condition is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process. It goes without saying that

FIG. 260 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The numbers (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flow chart shown in FIG. 260 are normal symbol control state numbers. The main CPU 201
By executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol, the normal symbol game is advanced.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the wait time for normal symbols is 0 (S7
300).

If it is determined in S7300 that the wait time for normal symbols is not 0, the main CPU 2
01 ends the normal symbol control process and shifts the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the wait time for normal symbols is 0, the main CPU 201
The process moves to S7301.

At S7301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol.
After executing the process of S7301, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7310. Note that the main CPU 201, based on the control state number read in the process of S7301,
Processing after 7310 is performed.

At S7310, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S7310 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". The details of this normal symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S
Move to 7320.

At S7320, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S7320 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7330.

In this normal symbol variable display end processing, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbols has ended. symbol determination time (as shown in FIG. 243, for example, 540m
sec) is set to the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "2". The waiting time of this normal design is subtracted as a normal design timer counter in the system timer interrupt processing performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. When the variable display time of the normal design is not finished, the control state number of the normal design is held at "1", and the end of the variable display time of the normal design is waited.

In addition, the design fixing time of the normal design may differ depending on the type of the normal design, and may differ according to the game state. For example, in the case of the normal game state, the fifth design confirmation time (for example, 540 msec), and in the case of the time saving game state, the sixth design confirmation time shorter than the fifth design confirmation time (for example, 132 msec).

At S7330, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This S7
The process of 330 is a process performed when the control state number of normal symbols is "2". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S
Transfer to 7340.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs determination processing of the normal symbol derivation result (for example, normal symbol win or normal symbol loss). Then, when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol is a hit for the normal symbol, the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 7146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a loss, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0" without performing the open pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 7146. - 特許庁

In this normal electric accessory 7146 opening pattern setting process, the normal electric accessory 7146 opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. An opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) is determined, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub CPU 301 a normal electric accessory release pattern command corresponding to the determined normal electric accessory 7146 release pattern.

At S7340, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric accessory release process. This S7
The process of 340 is a process performed when the control state number of normal symbols is "3". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S
Transfer to 7350.

In this normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 201 follows the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S7330, the second
When the starting port 7140 is opened and a specified number (for example, 1) of game balls for general electric power enter the second starting port 7140, or when all the open patterns of the normal electric accessories 7146 are completed, the second
The starting port 7140 is opened. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric accessory 7146 is completed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

At S7350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol per end processing. This S7
The process of 350 is a process performed when the control state number of normal symbols is "4". When the normal symbol per end process is completed, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0", terminates the normal symbol control process, and proceeds to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). back to

In this normal per symbol end process, the main CPU 201
In 40, a process of resetting (clearing) various parameters related to the normal design and various random numbers stored in the normal design determination area is performed.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the interrupt prohibition section, and the above-described normal symbol control process (S
7300 to S7350) is preferably performed within the interrupt disabled section.

[9-6-16. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, referring to FIG. 261, during the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 260), the main CPU 20
Details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by 1 will be described. FIG. 261 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 261, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" (S7311).

When it is determined in S7311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process, and shifts the process to the normal symbol control process (FIG. 26).
0). On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7312.

At S7312, the main CPU 201 shifts the start information of the normal symbol. In this process, the start information stored in the normal symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol determination area (0), and the normal symbol start storage area (2) to the normal symbol start storage area (4). The start information stored in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to normal symbol start storage area (3). After executing the process of S7312, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7313.

At S7313, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG.
Based on the game state and the normal symbol hit determination random number value stored in the normal symbol determination area (0), hit/lose determination value data ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol loss") is determined. After executing the process of S7313, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7314.

At S7314, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. "Normal symbol selection symbol data" is determined based on the symbol random number value of the symbol. Main C
After executing the process of S7314, the PU 201 shifts the process to S7315.

At S7315, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 243, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variation display time based on the game state and the normal symbol selection symbol data. decide. After executing the process of S7315, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7316.

At S7316, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variation display time setting processing. In this process, the normal symbol variation display time determined in the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S7315) is set to the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the normal symbol variation display is performed on the normal symbol display unit 161. to start. The waiting time for this normal design is, for example, 2m
It will be subtracted as a normal symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process performed at the sec cycle. After executing the process of S7316, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7317.

At S7317, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of the normal symbol variable display start process,
Normal symbol variable display end processing (see S7320 in FIG. 260) will be performed. After executing the process of S7317, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7318.

At S7318, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a normal symbol variation pattern command. In addition, the fluctuation pattern command of the normal design reserved for transmission in this process is
Production control command transmission processing during the next system timer interrupt processing (see S322 in FIG. 45)
, is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 .

[9-4-17. Switch input detection process]
Next, referring to FIG. 262, during system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 45), the main CPU
The switch input detection processing executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 262 is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The seventh pachinko game machine has a configuration of a first big winning hole count switch 7132, a second big winning hole count switch 7152, and a V winning hole switch 7157 as compared with the first pachinko game machine. Since then, some of these processes have been added.

At S7381, the main CPU 201 executes a first start opening winning detection process. After executing the process of S7381, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7382.

In this first start opening winning detection process, the main CPU 201 controls the first start opening switch 7
121 detects the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 7120, the first starting port 7120
Set the corresponding payout information, and determine whether or not there is an empty area in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4).
When it is determined that there is an empty area in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), various random numbers (for example, random numbers for judging a big hit, symbol random number, reach determination random number, effect selection random number, etc.) are acquired, and various acquired random numbers are stored in one first special symbol determination area in a FIFO (First In, First Out) format. Then, transmission reservation processing of the winning command of the first special symbol indicating the winning to the first starting port 7120 and the reserved number of the first special symbols is performed. The first special symbol winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no free space in any of the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), the first start opening winning detection is performed without acquiring various random numbers. Processing will end.

At S7382, the main CPU 201 executes a second start opening winning detection process. After executing the process of S7382, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7383.

In this second start opening winning detection process, the main CPU 201 controls the second start opening switch 7
141 detects the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 7140, the second starting port 7140
Set the corresponding payout information, it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in the second special symbol start storage area (1) ~ second special symbol start storage area (3).
When it is determined that there is an empty area in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (3), various random numbers (for example, random numbers for judging a big hit, Symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, effect selection random numbers, etc.) are acquired, and the acquired various random numbers are stored in one second special symbol determination area in the FIFO format. And the second starting port 714
Transmission reservation processing of the second special symbol winning command indicating the winning to 0 and the reserved number of second special symbols is performed. The second special symbol winning command reserved for transmission in this process is the sub-control circuit 30 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
0.
On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (3), the second start opening winning detection is performed without acquiring various random numbers. Processing will end.

Further, in this embodiment, the first special symbol has four first special symbol start storage areas, but the second special symbol does not have three first special symbol start storage areas.
Therefore, the number of reserved first special symbols is four, and the number of reserved second special symbols is three. In addition, the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are
Although the design can be freely changed as appropriate, it is desirable to set the number to 4 or less.

At S7383, the main CPU 201 performs general winning hole passage detection processing. In the general winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc., is set at the time of winning to the general winning opening 122 . After executing the process of S7383, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S738.
Move to 4.

At S7384, the main CPU 201 performs first big winning opening detection processing. first
In the special winning opening passage detection process, the main CPU 201 controls the first special winning opening count switch 71
32 detects the entry of the game ball into the first big winning hole 7131, the first big winning hole 713
Along with setting the payout information corresponding to 1, 1 is added to the first big winning hole counter for counting the winning number of game balls to the first big winning hole 7131 to update it. And the 1st big prize gate 7
Transmission reservation processing of the first big winning opening winning command indicating winning to 131 is performed. The first big winning opening winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Main CP
After executing the process of S7384, U201 moves the process to S7385.

At S7385, the main CPU 201 performs a second prize winning opening detection process. second
In the big winning opening passage detection process, the main CPU 201 controls the second big winning opening count switch 71
52 detects the entry of the game ball into the second big winning hole 7151, the second big winning hole 715
Along with setting the payout information corresponding to 1, 1 is added to the second big winning hole counter for counting the winning number of game balls to the second big winning hole 7151 to update it. And the second prize-winning entrance 7
Transmission reservation processing of the second big winning opening winning command indicating winning to 151 is performed. The second big winning opening winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Main CP
After executing the process of S7385, U201 moves the process to S7386.

At S7386, the main CPU 201 performs a V winning opening detection process. In the V winning opening passage detection process, the main CPU 201 causes the V winning opening switch 7157 to activate the V winning opening 7 .
When the passage of the game ball to 156 is detected, the V prize opening passage flag is turned on. Then, transmission reservation processing of a V passing command indicating that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 7156 is performed. The V passage command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156, the payout information is not set. Main CPU 201
executes the processing of S7386, and then shifts the processing to S7387.

In S7387, the main CPU 201 performs gate passage detection processing. Main CP
After executing the process of S7387, U201 moves the process to S7388.

In this gate passage detection process, the main CPU 201 controls the passage gate switch 712
7 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 7126, the normal symbol start storage area (
1) It is determined whether or not there is an empty area in the normal design start storage area (4).
When it is determined that there is an empty area in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to the normal symbol start storage area (4), various random numbers (for example, normal symbol per judgment random number, normal symbol symbol) are used as normal symbol start information. Random numbers etc.) are acquired, and the acquired various random numbers are stored in one normal symbol start storage area in the FIFO format.
On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no free space in any of the normal symbol start storage area (1) to the normal symbol start storage area (4), the gate passage detection process is terminated without acquiring various random numbers. .

In S7388, the main CPU 201 performs prefetch command generation processing. After executing the process of S7388, the main CPU 201 ends the current switch input detection process.

In this look-ahead command generating process, referring to the look-ahead related data in FIG. , to generate lookahead commands. In addition, as shown in the look-ahead related data in FIG. 239, in the time saving game state, the big hit game state, and the small hit game state, the look-ahead command (second special Design look-ahead command) can only be generated. Then, the generated prefetch command is sent to the sub control circuit 3
00 performs transmission reservation processing of the prefetch command to be transmitted to 00. The prefetch command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[9-5-1. Game state transition diagram]
Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the game state transition in the seventh pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 263 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of game states in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, the "first normal game state" is a normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, and while it is easy for a game ball to enter the first start hole 7120, It is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 7140 .

"Second normal game state" is the second game state of the main RAM 203 when the time saving game state ends
The second performed based on the start information of the second special symbol stored in the special symbol start storage area
It is the normal game state during the control period of the special symbols (that is, the normal game state during digestion of the reserved number of the second special symbols stored in the time saving game state). Here, the second normal game state may be left-handed or right-handed as a regular game mode, but during digestion of the reserved number of second special symbols, the second time-saving game is performed again. Because of the high pullback rate that transitions to the state (approximately 70%
), and hitting to the right is set as a regular game mode (see FIG. 245).

In the time-saving game state consisting of the first to third time-saving game states, right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, and while it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first start port 7120, the second start port 714
It is easy for a game ball to enter 0. As described above, the time saving game state when "time saving number of times of the second special symbol = 1" is determined as the A time saving end condition is referred to as "first time saving game state", and as the A time saving end condition "second The time-saving game state when the number of time-saving special symbols=5 is determined is called a "second time-saving game state", and the B time-saving game state is called a "third time-saving game state".

(Transition control of the first normal game state)
As shown in FIG. 263, in the first normal game state, when the game ball enters the first start port 7120, "big hit" or "losing" is determined based on the start information of the first special symbol (Fig. 233), when a "big hit" is determined, the state shifts to a big win game state. and the first
After the end of the jackpot game state triggered by the start information of the first special symbol in the normal game state, 90% shifts to the first time-saving game state in response to the selected symbol command, and 10% is the second time-saving game state. It shifts to a game state (see FIGS. 234 and 235).

Although illustration is omitted, in the first normal game state, due to an irregular game mode or the like, when the game ball enters the second start port 7140, based on the start information of the second special symbol "jackpot" , ``small hit'' or ``losing'' is determined (see FIG. 233), and when ``big hit'' is determined, the state shifts to the big win game state, and when ``small hit'' is determined, the state shifts to the small win game state. . And after the end of the jackpot game state triggered by the start information of the second special symbol in the first normal game state, all shift to the second time-saving game state (see FIG. 235).

In addition, in the first normal game state (including the second normal game state), after the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches 599 times, the normal game state is shifted to the third time-saving game state.

(Transition control of the first time-saving gaming state)
In the first time-saving gaming state, when the game ball enters the second start port 7140, "big hit"
, "small hit" or "losing" is determined (see FIG. 233), and when "big hit" is determined based on the start information of the second special symbol, the state shifts to a big win game state, and "small hit" is determined. Then, it shifts to a small winning game state. In particular, in the present embodiment, when based on the start information of the second special symbol, regardless of the game state, it is determined to be a "small hit" with a high probability of about 1/3, and the second route from the small win game state. It is configured to be able to shift to a big hit game state through.

Here, in the first time-saving game state, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first start port 7120, but the reserved number of the first special symbols stored in the normal game state remains. There are cases where In such a case, "big hit" or "losing" is determined based on the starting information of the first special symbol (see FIG. 233), and when "big hit" is determined, the game shifts to the big win game state.

Then, when the game state at the time of winning the big win or the small win is the first time-saving game state, after the big win game state is finished, all the games are shifted to the second time-saving game state (see FIG. 235).

Also, when it is in the first time-saving gaming state, when "losing" is determined based on the start information of the second special symbol (non-winning), the first normal game from the first time-saving gaming state will transition to state.

Furthermore, when "special symbol total number of time reduction = 7 times" is established as the A time reduction end condition due to irregular game mode etc. in the first time reduction game state, that is, the second start port 714
Seven times of "losing" determination (7
When the variable display of the first special symbol of the time) is performed, the first time-saving game state is shifted to the first normal game state.

(Transition control of the second and third time-saving gaming states)
In the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, when the game ball enters the second start port 7140, "big hit", "small hit" or "loss" based on the start information of the second special symbol. is determined (see FIG. 233).
When the "small hit" is determined, the game shifts to a small win game state.

Here, in the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state, the first start port 712
It is difficult for the game ball to enter 0, but the reserved number of the first special symbols stored in the normal game state before shifting to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state remains. There are cases where In such a case, "big hit" or "losing" is determined based on the starting information of the first special symbol (see FIG. 233), and when "big hit" is determined, the game shifts to the big win game state.

Then, when the game state at the time of winning the big win or the small win is the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, after the big win game state ends, the game state is shifted to the second time-saving game state (Fig. 235). reference).

Also, based on the starting information of the second special symbol, five times of "losing" determination (variation display of the first special symbol of five times) is performed, or the starting information of the first special symbol or the start of the second special symbol When 11 times of "losing" determinations (11 times of variable display of special symbols) are performed based on the information, the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends.

When the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends, there is a second special symbol holding number (the second special symbol start information is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203). ), it shifts to the second normal game state. On the other hand, when the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state ends, there is no second special symbol pending number (the second special symbol start information is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 When not stored), it shifts to the first normal game state.

(Second normal game state transition control)
In the second normal game state, "big hit", "small hit" or "losing" is determined based on the starting information of the second special symbol (see FIG. 233), and when "big hit" is determined, the big win game state. , and when a "small win" is determined, the game state shifts to a small win game state.

And after the end of the jackpot game state triggered by the start information of the second special symbol in the second normal game state, it shifts to the second time-saving game state again (see FIG. 235).

Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols is consumed when the second time-saving gaming state ends (all the start information of the second special symbols stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 is "losing"). is determined and erased), the second normal game state ends, and the state shifts to the first normal game state.

[9-5-2. Production flow]
Next, the outline of the effect performed in the seventh pachinko game machine will be described using the flow of the entire effect. FIG. 264 is an example of the game state production flow in the seventh pachinko game machine.

The effects performed in the seventh pachinko game machine include a variable effect consisting of a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbols displayed in the display area of the display device 7, a display effect of characters and the like, and output from the speaker 32. , a lamp effect that emits light from the LED group 46, a effect accessory effect that drives the effect accessory group 58, a change effect of the operation mode of the effect button 54, and the like. In the present embodiment, the decorative patterns are composed of three main patterns, ie, a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern, and sub-patterns that are much smaller than the main patterns. Note that the number and types of decorative patterns are not limited to this.

In addition, in the embodiment, the production based on the first special symbol lottery is also called "first special symbol production", and the production based on the second special symbol lottery is also called "second special symbol production".

(Production in the first normal game state)
In the first normal game state, executable effects are different between the general effect state and the limited effect state.

In the general effect state of the first normal game state, at least "normal variation", "normal reach", "super reach", and "super super reach" are used as the "first special symbol effect".
is executable, and at least "normal variation" and "card effect" are executable as the "second special symbol effect".

In addition, in the limited effect state of the first normal game state, at least "normal variation" and "step-up reach" are executable as "effect of the first special symbol", and "effect of the second special symbol". , at least "normal variation" and "card effect" are executable.

In addition, in the first normal game state, the number of times of variable display of special symbols is the ceiling value of 59.
At the ninth turn, the "door presentation" is configured to be executable. It should be noted that the "door effect" is configured to be executable even in other game states.

In addition, as the notice effect of the "first special symbol effect" in the first normal game state, the "window notice" can be executed in the variation, and the "hold change notice" and ""flashnotice" is configured to be executable.

"Normal fluctuation" is a variable mode production in which all decorative patterns start fluctuating display at high speed and stop display in order, and can be executed when the special pattern lottery is lost is.

"Normal Reach", "Super Reach", and "Super Super Reach" are exclusive effects of the first special symbol that can be executed in the general effect state, and the lottery result of the first special symbol may be a big hit. It is a suggestive reach production. "Normal ready-to-win" is a ready-to-win effect that is performed when left and right symbols of the same type are temporarily stopped and displayed. In "Normal Reach", if the middle pattern is stopped and displayed in a pattern different from the left and right patterns, it will be lost, and if the middle pattern is stopped and displayed in the same type as the left and right patterns, it will be a big hit. In addition, in "Normal Reach", the middle pattern may develop to "Super Reach" without being stopped, and it is configured so that it can develop from "Super Reach" to "Super Super Reach". there is

And, according to the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236(1),
Random numbers for effect selection and the like are set so that the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of "normal reach"<"super reach"<"super super reach".

The "card effect" is a dedicated effect for the second special symbol, and is a ready-to-win effect suggesting that the lottery result of the second special symbol may result in a big win or a small win. "card show"
is an effect in which, as an example, a card with a predetermined pattern is displayed, and when the card is slowly flipped over, characters suggesting a big win or a small win are displayed.

Further, "step-up reach" is a dedicated performance of the first special symbol that can be executed in a limited performance state, and is a ready-to-win performance suggesting that the lottery result of the first special symbol may result in a big hit. "Step Up Reach" is an example in which a predetermined character is displayed so that it can grow from STEP 1 to STEP 3, and when it finally grows up to STEP 3, it becomes a big hit.
If it grows only up to STEP1 or STEP2, it will be lost.

"Door effect" is an effect that can be executed regardless of the type of special symbol, the effect time is defined indefinitely (end time is not defined), and it is also an effect that suggests the transition of each game state. . As an example of the "door effect", a half-open door is displayed from the left and right, and the half-open door is displayed rattling for a predetermined period of time, then the door is completely closed and then completely opened again. Then, it is notified that the background and the like have been changed and the game state has been changed.

In the first normal game state, the "door effect" is executed when the number of times of variable display of special symbols is the ceiling value of 599th rotation, and from the next special symbol (600th rotation), B time saving game state ( It is notified that it has shifted to the third time-saving game state).

"Window notice" is an effect that foretells the change of the stage, the effect contents of the pattern effect pattern, or the lottery result of the lottery for the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is performed.
As an example of "window notice", a window is displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and predetermined notice contents are displayed in the window.

"Reservation change notice" is an example of a look-ahead effect, and before the special design lottery is performed, the special design lottery result and the special design change depending on the display mode of the reservation image showing the number of special design reservations. It is a production that suggests information.

The “flash notice” is an example of a look-ahead effect, and refers to a effect in which the LED group 46 emits predetermined light from the time when the first start port 7120 is won to the start of the change.

(Production in the first time-saving gaming state)
In the first time-saving game state, at least "boss battle performance", "super-shortened variation", and "door performance" are executable as "first special symbol performance", and "second special symbol performance". As such, at least the "boss battle effect" is configured to be executable.

The "ultra-shortened variation" is a variation mode effect in which all the decorative symbols are scattered and the variable display is started at high speed, and all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in an extremely short time (for example, 200 ms).

The "boss battle effect" is a dedicated effect that can be executed in the first time-saving game state, and is a ready-to-win effect suggesting that the lottery result of special symbols may result in a big win or a small win. A "boss battle effect" is, for example, a effect in which a boss character appears and the main character and the boss character confront each other. If the character is defeated ("boss battle production (defeat)"), the character loses.

As described above, in the first time-saving gaming state, since the "time-saving number of times of the second special symbol = 1" is determined as the A time-saving end condition, the lottery of the second special symbol is performed, and the jackpot or If it is a small win, it shifts to a second time-saving game state, and if it is a loss, it shifts to a first normal game state. Then, a lottery for the second special pattern is performed in the first time-saving game state, and if it is a big hit or a small hit, a "boss battle production (victory)" is executed, and if it is a loss, a "boss battle production (defeat)" is executed. be done.

Further, in the first time-saving game state, in the case where the reserved number of the first special symbols stored in the normal game state remains, the lottery of the first special symbols is performed, and the jackpot is won. and "boss battle production (victory)" is executed, and if it is a loss, "super shortened variation" is executed.

Then, when "special symbol total number of time reduction = 7 times" is established as the A time reduction end condition due to an irregular game mode etc. in the first time reduction game state, that is, the second start port 714
When the lottery of the first special symbol is performed 7 times without the game ball entering 0, it is determined that it is a big hit.
A boss battle effect (victory)" is executed, and a "door effect" is executed if the game is lost. Here, when the "door effect" is executed in the first time-saving game state, it is notified that the game state has shifted to the first normal game state.

(Production in the second and third time-saving gaming states)
Except for the final variation of the special symbols in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, at least the ``Sengoku time performance'' is executable, and the special in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state In the final variation of the pattern, at least "Sengoku time effect", "door effect", and "continuous battle entry effect" are configured to be executable.

“Sengoku time production” refers to a series of productions performed from the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state to the small winning game state, and from the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state to the small game state. The period that is performed over the winning game state is also called "Sengoku time". The details of this "Sengoku time effect" will be described later with reference to FIGS. 288 and 289. FIG.

"Continuous battle entry effect" is a dedicated effect that can be executed in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends (Sengoku Time is end), and it is an effect that informs that a continuous battle reach will be performed next time.

As described above, when the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends, when there is a reserved number of second special symbols, the state is shifted to the second normal game state, and the second special symbol is reserved. When there is no number, it shifts to the first normal game state. Then, at the final variation of the special symbols in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, when there is a reserved number of the second special symbols, the "continuous battle rush effect" is executed, and the second special symbol is displayed. When there is no reserved number, "door effect" is executed. Here, when the "door effect" is executed in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, it is notified that the game state has shifted to the first normal game state.

(Production in the second normal game state)
In the second normal game state, at least the "continuous battle effect" is executable as the "second special symbol effect".

"Consecutive battle effect" is a dedicated effect that can be executed in the second normal game state, and is a ready-to-win effect suggesting that the lottery result of special symbols may result in a big win or a small win. For example, a "continuous battle effect" is a effect in which a rival character appears and the main character and the rival character have a maximum of three confrontations in succession. Continuous battle production (victory)”) It will be a big hit or a small hit,
If the main character is defeated (“continuous battle production (defeat)”), the game is lost.

In addition to the effects shown in FIG. 264, this embodiment is provided with a plurality of detailed stages that serve as the bases (motifs of effects) of various effects during jackpots and effects, which will be described in detail later.

[9-6. sub control circuit]
In order to execute the effects as described above, the contents of control of the sub-control circuit 300 based on various commands and the like transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 will be described.

First, details of various tables stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 265 to 277. FIG.

[9-6-1. Symbol production pattern determination table in the first normal game state]
The symbol effect pattern determination table E1 for determining the symbol effect pattern in the first normal game state will be explained. FIG. 265 is an example of a symbol effect pattern determination table for the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The “effect pattern” refers to information that defines display effects such as characters, voice effects, change effects of the operation mode of the effect button 54, and the like. In addition, the "symbol production pattern" is centered on the variation of the decorative pattern corresponding to the special pattern, and defines the display production of the related characters and the like, the sound production, the change production of the operation mode of the production button 54, etc. information. In addition to the pattern effect pattern, various display effects such as an advance notice effect pattern can be superimposed and executed.

As shown in FIG. 265, the first normal game state symbol effect pattern determination table E1
is the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the effect stage that defines the effect display state, the number of special symbol variation displays counted after the start of the normal game state, and the selection rate (the 1 random number) and the design effect pattern are associated.

Here, the "production stage" is information that defines the production display state of the production background, motif, etc. For example, "production stage 0" is the mountain village stage in the general production state of the first normal game state. "Production stage 1" indicates the castle town stage in the general production state of the first normal game state, and "Production stage 2" indicates the seaside stage in the limited production state of the first normal game state. In this embodiment, only two stages are provided in the general presentation state of the first normal game state, but three or more different stages may be provided.

In addition, the "selection rate" means the obtained first
Although it corresponds to the fact that the random number is within a predetermined range, it is read as a selection rate for convenience of explanation. The selectivity may include 0% as well as 1 to 100%, and the term 0% selectivity is not excluded. 267 to 277
The same applies to the "selection rate" in the table shown in . In the present embodiment, a large number of random numbers of different random number ranges are provided, and description of the types of random numbers will be omitted as appropriate.

According to the symbol effect pattern determination table E1 in the first normal game state shown in FIG. 265, even with the same special symbol variation pattern command, different symbol effect patterns (different effects) can be determined according to the effect stage. It is configured.

Further, according to the symbol effect pattern determination table E1 in the first normal game state shown in FIG. 265, even if the same special symbol variation pattern command is used, different symbol effect patterns production) is configured to be determinable. Then, when the number of variable display times of special symbols = 599 and when it is "losing" in the lottery of special symbols (that is, when shifting to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state)), the door effect is configured to determine the effect pattern 100 for executing In addition, the number of times the special symbol is displayed fluctuating = 5
Even if it is 99, when it is a "big hit" or "small hit" in the special symbol lottery,
Since it does not transition to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) and shifts to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the effect that suggests a big hit or a small hit (if the second special pattern is the effect, the card It is configured so that the pattern effect pattern for executing the effect) is determined. note that,
Since the production stage 2 is a dedicated stage in the limited production state and the number of variable display times of the special symbol is never 599, the production pattern 100 for executing the door production is never determined.

[9-6-2. Determination table at the start of the second normal game state]
A start determination table for determining the symbol effect pattern determination table when the second normal game state is started will be described. FIG. 266 is an example of a determination table at the start of the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In the second normal game state, when the second normal game state is started, that is, when the first variable display of the second special pattern is started in the second normal game state, a plurality of pattern performance patterns are determined. One symbol performance pattern determination table is determined from the tables, and when starting variable display of the second special symbols after that, the symbol performance pattern determination table already determined when the second normal game state is started. will be referenced.

As shown in FIG. 266, the determination table at the start of the second normal game state includes the number of reserved second special symbols, the number of hits in the number of reserved second special symbols, the pullback information, and the pattern effect pattern. Decision tables E2 to E8 are associated with each other.

Here, "the number of hits in the reserved number of second special symbols" is the starting information (random number ), and since the number of reserved second special symbols is set to a maximum of 3, the number of reserved second special symbols is 2 (subtracted by 1) at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. number is maximum.

"Pull-back information" refers to variation information that is first determined to be a big hit or a small hit among starting information including the first variation and holding storage in the second normal game state, and in the second normal game state. When the first variable display of the second special pattern is performed, the information that is first determined as a big win or a small win is set to "1", and when the second special symbol is displayed for a second time, the first big win or small win is determined. The information to be judged is "2", the information to be judged as a big hit or a small hit first at the time of the third variation display of the second special symbol is "3", and the information to be judged as a big hit or a small hit is "3". It is set to "0" when it does not exist.

Then, from the "hit number within the reserved number of the second special symbols" and the "pullback information", after the end of this big win game state (big hit game state shifted from the small win state), it is possible to hit again with a big hit or a small hit. It is possible to grasp the "holding ream stock number" corresponding to the determined number of times.

For this reason, the determination table at the start of the second normal game state shown in FIG.
It can be said that the symbol effect pattern determination table for the second normal game state is determined according to the number of times) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks.

[9-6-3. Second Normal Game State Symbol Production Pattern Determination Table]
The symbol effect pattern determination tables E2 to E8 for determining the symbol effect pattern in the second normal game state will be explained. Figure 267 shows the second
It is an example of the symbol effect pattern determination table in the normal game state.

The symbol effect pattern determination table E2 for the second normal game state shown in FIG. The variation pattern command of the second special symbol received from, the number of reserved second special symbols, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol effect pattern are associated with each other.

Also, the symbol effect pattern determination table E2 for the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267(1)
According to, even if it is a variation pattern command of the same special symbol, it is configured to be able to determine a different pattern effect pattern (different effect) according to the number of reserved second special symbols, and the number of reserved second special symbols = 0 When it is (the final variation of the second normal game state), the symbol effect pattern R3 for executing the effect indicating the end of the second normal game state is determined.

As shown in FIG. 267(2), the symbol effect pattern determination table E3 in the second normal game state is a table determined when per 1 variation (pullback information 1) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks=0. There is, and the second special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol effect pattern are associated with each other.

The second normal game state symbol effect pattern determination table E4 shown in FIG.
It is a table determined when the variation hit (pullback information 1) and the number of reserved ream stocks = 1, and the variation pattern command of the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200 and the selection rate (first random value) , and the symbol effect pattern are associated with each other.

The second normal game state symbol effect pattern determination table E5 shown in FIG.
It is a table determined when the variation hit (pullback information 1) and the number of reserved ream stocks = 2, and the variation pattern command of the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200 and the selection rate (first random value) , and the symbol effect pattern are associated with each other.

The symbol effect pattern determination table E6 in the second normal game state shown in FIG.
It is a table determined when the fluctuation hit (pullback information 2) and the number of reserved ream stocks = 0, and the fluctuation pattern command of the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200 and the selection rate (first random value) , and the symbol effect pattern are associated with each other.

The symbol effect pattern determination table E7 for the second normal game state shown in FIG.
It is a table determined when the fluctuation hit (pullback information 2) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1, and the fluctuation pattern command of the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200 and the selection rate (first random value) , and the symbol effect pattern are associated with each other.

The second normal game state symbol effect pattern determination table E8 shown in FIG.
It is a table determined when the fluctuation hit (retraction information 3) and the number of reserved ream stocks = 0, and the fluctuation pattern command of the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200 and the selection rate (first random value) , and the symbol effect pattern are associated with each other.

Then, the second normal game state symbol effect pattern determination tables E2 to E shown in FIG.
8, the order of variation display of the second special symbol that is first determined to be a big hit or a small hit (pullback information), the number of reserved consecutive stocks ("the number of hits in the number of reserved second special symbols" and " A different pattern effect pattern is configured to be determinable according to the pullback information.

[9-6-4. Symbol effect pattern determination table for first time-saving game state]
The symbol performance pattern determination table E9 for determining the symbol performance pattern in the first time-saving game state will be described. FIG. 268 is an example of a symbol effect pattern determination table for the first time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 268, the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol effect pattern are associated with each other.

Further, according to the pattern effect pattern determination table E9 of the first time-saving game state shown in FIG. When it is the variation pattern command (83H12H, see FIG. 237) of the first special symbol corresponding to the loss, the effect pattern 100 for executing the door effect is determined.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the design production patterns C4 to C9 of the second special symbol determined at the time of the final variation of the first time-saving gaming state are the boss battle production over the variation display time of the second special symbol and the design determination time. configured to run. Similarly, the performance pattern 100 determined at the time of the final variation of the first time-saving game state is constructed such that the door performance is executed over the variation display time of the first special symbol and the symbol fixing time.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pattern effect pattern C1 of the first special symbol corresponding to the big hit
is configured so that the boss battle effect is executed over the variable display time of the first special symbol, and when it is the final variation of the first time-saving gaming state, the boss battle is performed again over the symbol fixing time of the first special symbol. It is configured such that an effect is executed (the boss battle effect is looped and executed).

[9-6-5. Second time-saving game state or third time-saving game state pattern production pattern determination table]
The symbol performance pattern determination tables E10 and E11 for determining the symbol performance pattern in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state will be described. Figure 269 shows the seventh
It is an example of a pattern effect pattern determination table other than the final variation of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the pachinko game machine. Moreover, FIG. 270 is an example of a symbol production pattern determination table at the time of the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

(Other than the final variation of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state)
The symbol effect pattern determination table E10 shown in FIG. 269 is referred to other than the final variation of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state.

In the symbol effect pattern determination table E10 shown in FIG. 269, the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the effect stage, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol effect pattern are associated with each other. ing.

Here, "production stage 30" indicates the male character stage in the second and third time-saving game states, and "production stage 31" indicates the female character stage in the second and third time-saving game states. . This "production stage 30" and "production stage 31"
It is a stage that can be selected by the player when a predetermined selection condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, only two stages are provided as stages selectable by the player in the second and third time-saving gaming states, but three or more different stages may be provided.

In addition, "production stage 40" indicates a premier stage for a female character that suggests that the number of reserved consecutive stocks ≧ 1 in the second and third time-saving game states, and "production stage 41" is the second and third Shows a premier stage 1 for a male character suggesting that the number of pending stocks = 1 in the time-saving game state, and "production stage 42" is a male character that suggests the number of pending stocks ≥ 2 in the second and third time-saving gaming states. Premier stage 2 for characters is shown.

According to the pattern production pattern determination table E10 of the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. Effect by different background display mode) is configured to be determinable.

However, the symbol effect patterns associated with the symbol effect pattern determination table E10 in the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state shown in FIG. Although different from the above, the decorative pattern production mode is that except for some big hits (variation pattern command 84H14H movie production), all the decorative patterns are scattered and high-speed fluctuation display is started, and the left and right patterns are temporarily stopped in order. Instead, the production of the normal variation mode in which all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed substantially at the same time is performed.
This means that even in the symbol performance patterns associated with the symbol performance pattern determination table E11 for the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. The same is true except in one case.

(During the final change of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state)
At the time of the final variation of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, the symbol effect pattern determination table E11 shown in FIG. 270 is referred to.

The pattern effect pattern determination table E11 for the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state shown in FIG.
The effect stage, the reserved number of second special symbols, and the symbol effect pattern are associated with each other.

According to the symbol effect pattern determination table E11 of the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. Different design effect patterns (different effects) can be determined.

Then, when the special symbol lottery is "losing" at the time of the final change in the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state, when the number of pending special symbols ≥ 1 (second special symbol When there is a reserved number), after performing the result production showing the game result of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, the pattern production pattern F1 to execute the continuous battle entry production.
Any one of 0 to 13 is determined, and when the reserved number of the second special symbols = 0 (when there is no reserved number of the second special symbols), after performing the result production, the door It is configured such that the symbol effect patterns F20 to F23 for executing the effect are determined. In addition, the production stages 40 to 42 are dedicated stages with the number of reserved consecutive stocks, and the special symbol lottery will not be "lost" at the time of the final change in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state. do not have.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the pattern production patterns F10 to F13 determined when the special symbol lottery is "losing" at the final change of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state
, F20 to F23 execute the result effect during the variable display of the special symbols, and execute the continuous battle entering effect or the door effect during the fixed display of the special symbols. A continuous battle entry effect or a door effect may be executed.

[9-6-6. Notice effect pattern determination table of window notice in first normal game state]
The notice effect pattern determination table for deciding the notice effect pattern of the window notice in the first normal game state will be explained. FIG. 271 is an example of an advance notice effect pattern determination table of the window advance notice of the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 271, the notice effect pattern determination table of the window notice in the first normal game state includes the variation pattern command of the special symbol received from the main control circuit 200, the effect stage defining the effect display state, A selection rate (second random number value) is associated with an announcement effect pattern.

In the present embodiment, as the notice effect pattern, the notice effect pattern 1 that displays the characters "stage change" indicating the change of the stage, and the effect content of the pattern effect pattern "reach" that suggests reach. A notice performance pattern 2 in which characters are displayed and a notice performance pattern 3 in which characters of ``Extremely hot'' suggesting a high possibility of a big win as a lottery result of special pattern lottery are displayed. In this embodiment, only three types of forewarning effect patterns are provided, but the content of the forewarning may be subdivided and four or more display modes may be provided.

Then, when the advance notice effect pattern 1 in which characters of "stage change" indicating the stage change are displayed is determined, the effect stage 0 and the effect stage 1 in the first normal game state are alternately performed. will be switched. If three or more different stages are provided in the general presentation state of the first normal game state, the stages may be switched according to a predetermined rule (for example, a predetermined order).

[9-6-7. Suspended Notice Effect Pattern Decision Table for Suspended Change Notice in First Normal Game State]
A pending notice performance pattern determination table for determining the pending notice performance pattern of the pending change notice in the first normal game state will be described. FIG. 272 is an example of a pending notice effect pattern determination table of the pending change notice of the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 272, the holding notice effect pattern determination table of the holding change notice of the first normal game state includes the look-ahead command received from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 239),
A selection rate (third random number value) is associated with a pending notice effect pattern.

As will be described later, when a special symbol winning command is received, a pending image in a predetermined display mode is displayed based on the current effect stage and the number of pending special symbols. In the present embodiment, when the first normal game state is in the general effect state (production stages 0 and 1), "normal hold 1" is displayed as a predetermined display mode, and the first normal game state limited effect is displayed. When it is in the state (production stage 2), "normal suspension 2" is displayed as a predetermined display mode.

In this embodiment, as the display mode of the pending change notice, when it is in the general production state (production stage 0, 1) of the first normal game state, the change information of the special symbol indicates reach or more. "Special hold 1", or "Special hold 2", which suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit as a lottery result of a lottery of super reach or higher and special symbols as variation information of special symbols, and the first normal Limited production state of game state (production stage 2)
When , it is constituted so as to be changeable to ``special hold 3'' suggesting that the possibility of a big hit is high as the result of the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the reach or more as the variation information of the special symbol.
In the present embodiment, only three types of display modes are provided as the display modes of the pending change notice. good.

For example, if it is a hold notice effect pattern 10, "normal hold 1" is displayed as the display mode of the hold image at the time of winning the first start port 7120, and "normal hold 1" is changed to "special hold 1" by the change. The display mode is changed. If it is the suspension notice effect pattern 11, the first start port 712
From the time of winning to 0, "special hold 1" is continuously displayed as the display mode of the hold image until the change.

In addition, if it is a hold notice effect pattern 20, "normal hold 1" is displayed as the display mode of the hold image at the time of winning the first start port 7120, and "normal hold 1" is changed to "special hold 2" by the change. The display mode is changed. If it is the holding notice effect pattern 21, the first start port 7120
"Special hold 2" is continuously displayed as the display mode of the hold image from the time of winning the prize to the change.

In addition, if it is a hold notice effect pattern 30, "normal hold 2" is displayed as the display mode of the hold image at the time of winning the first start port 7120, and "normal hold 2" is changed to "special hold 3" by the change. The display mode is changed. If it is the holding notice effect pattern 21, the first start port 7120
"Special hold 3" is continuously displayed as the display mode of the hold image from the time of winning the prize to the change.

[9-6-8. Winning notice effect pattern determination table for flash notice in first normal game state]
A winning notice performance pattern determination table for determining a winning notice performance pattern of flash notice in the first normal game state will be described. FIG. 273 is an example of a win-time notice effect pattern determination table for flash notice in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 273, the first flash notice win-time notice effect pattern determination table in the normal game state includes the prefetch command received from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 239).
, the selection rate (fourth random number value), and the winning announcement effect pattern are associated with each other.

In the present embodiment, as the winning notice effect pattern, the winning notice effect pattern 1 in which the LED group 46 emits white light from the time of winning to the first start port 7120 until the change starts, and the first The LED group 46
has a prize-winning notice performance pattern 2 that emits rainbow-colored light. In the present embodiment, only two types of winning notice performance patterns are provided, but three or more types of winning notice performance patterns may be provided by subdividing suggested contents.

Then, in the present embodiment, the forewarning performance pattern 1 at the time of winning is determined and the LED group 46
emits white light, it suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit as a lottery result of the special pattern lottery. A lottery result of the pattern lottery suggests a big hit.

[9-6-9. Prohibited condition setting table for look-ahead effect]
A look-ahead effect prohibition condition setting table for determining whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect (holding change notice, flash notice) in the first normal game state will be described. Figure 274 shows
It is an example of a prohibition condition setting table of the look-ahead effect in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 274, the prohibition conditions for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead effect are a "common prohibition condition" that prohibits the execution of both the pending change notice and the flash notice, and prohibiting the execution of only the flash notice. A "first prohibition condition" is set.

Five common prohibition conditions 1 to 5 are set as common prohibition conditions. The "common prohibition condition 1" is established when there is a reserved number of second special symbols, and the "common prohibition condition 2" is the second
It is established during the control period of the special symbol (during the variable display of the second special symbol), and the "common prohibition condition 3
” is satisfied when the change display is within 5 times before and after the stage change, and “Common prohibition condition 4
' is satisfied when the full-rotation effect is being displayed, and 'common prohibition condition 5' is satisfied when the same prefetch effect is already being executed with reference to the prefetch flag.

If any one of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 5 is established, neither the pending change notice nor the flash notice will be executed.

As the first prohibition conditions, four prohibition conditions 1 to 4 are set. The "first prohibition condition 1" is established when the first start port 7120 is won in the case where the variation effect other than the normal variation is performed, and the "first prohibition condition 2" is the symbol of the first special symbol. Established when winning the first starting port 7120 during the period of design determination from 1500 ms before the determination, the "first prohibition condition 3" is within 500 ms from the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol The first starting port 7120 The "first prohibition condition 4" is established when winning at the first starting port 7120 during the demonstration display.

If any one of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is satisfied, the flash notice is not executed, but the pending change notice can be executed.

[9-6-10. Small hit production pattern decision table]
A small-hit performance pattern determination table for determining the performance pattern in the small-hit game state will be described. FIG. 275 is an example of a small hit effect pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 275, as a small hit effect pattern determination table, a small hit start effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 275 (1) and a small hit end effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 275 (2) with a table.

The small hit start effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 275 (1) includes the small hit start display command received from the main control circuit 200 and the game state information (effect stage ), the number of reserved consecutive stocks, the selection rate (fifth random number value), and the small hit start effect pattern are associated with each other.

Here, the "small hit start effect pattern" is the effect that is performed at the start of the small win game state, and information that defines the display effect of characters etc., the sound effect, the change effect of the operation mode of the effect button 54, etc. Say.

In the present embodiment, as the small-hit start effect pattern determined when the small-hit start display command is received, the normal character puts the game ball in the V winning opening 71 in the small-hit game state.
Small winning start performance pattern 1 for instructing passage to 56, and small winning start for instructing the male character to pass the game ball through the V winning opening 7156 in the background A1 (for example, blue background) in the small winning game state. A production pattern 10, a small winning start production pattern 11 instructing a male character to pass a game ball in a background A2 (for example, a red background) to a V winning opening 7156 in a small winning game state, and a female character in a small winning game state. is a small hit start effect pattern 20 that instructs the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 7156 in the background A1 (for example, blue background), and a female character is placed in the background A2 (for example, red background) game ball in the small win game state. to the V winning opening 7156.

Then, according to the small hit start effect pattern determination table shown in FIG.
When it is in the time saving game state (performance stage 20), a small winning start performance pattern 1 is determined as a normal small winning performance.

On the other hand, when it is in the second time-saving game state, it is possible to determine different small winning start performance patterns (different performances) based on the stages "performance stage 30" and "performance stage 31" selectable by the player. is configured to
Specifically, when it is the male character's "performance stage 30", the small winning start performance pattern 10 or the small winning performance start performance pattern 11 is determined, and when it is the female character's "performance stage 31", the small winning start performance is determined. A pattern 20 or a small winning start effect pattern 21 is determined.

In addition, as will be described later, the "production stage 41" and the "production stage 42" shift only from the "production stage 30" of the male character selected by the player, and the "production stage 40".
' shifts only from the female character's 'production stage 31' selected by the player.
Therefore, when it is the "production stage 41" and the "production stage 42", the small winning start production pattern 10 or the small winning start production pattern 11 is determined similarly to the "production stage 30" of the male character, and the "production stage" is determined. 40", the female character's "
Similar to the production stage 31, the small winning start production pattern 20 or the small winning start production pattern 21 is determined.

Furthermore, when it is in the second time-saving game state, a different small winning start effect pattern (different effect) can be determined based on the number of reserved consecutive stocks.
Specifically, the greater the number of reserved consecutive stocks, the greater the male character's production stage (30,
41, 42), the small winning start performance pattern 11 is more likely to be determined than the small winning start performance pattern 10, and the small winning start performance pattern 20 is smaller than the small winning performance pattern 20 when the female character performance stage (31, 40). The winning start performance pattern 21 is configured to be easily determined.

Thereby, when it is in the second time-saving game state, the number of reserved consecutive stocks can be suggested by the small winning start performance pattern.

The small hit end effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 275 (2) includes the small hit end display command received from the main control circuit 200, the pending number of the second special symbols, the effect pattern for executing the door effect, and the small win. It is associated with the production stage after the end.

Here, the "small win end production pattern" is a production performed at the end of the small winning game state, and information that defines display production of characters and the like, sound production, change production of the operation mode of the production button 54, etc. Say. Also, as described above, the small hit end display command is a command sent when the small hit game state ends without the game ball passing through the V winning opening 7156 (
(See S7105 in FIG. 256), the time-saving game state ends.

In the present embodiment, as the small winning end effect patterns, a performance pattern 101 in which a door effect is executed and then a stage change effect to the effect stage 2 is executed, and after the door effect is executed, a continuous battle entering effect is executed. A production pattern 102 is provided.

Then, according to the small hit end production pattern determination table shown in FIG. When the number of reserved second special symbols is present at the end of the winning game state, the production pattern 102 and the production stage 10 are determined.

In addition, in the present embodiment, effect pattern 1 determined as a small hit end effect pattern
01 and the effect pattern 102 are performed in the end interval time when the small win game state is over, but part of the effect is performed in the variable display of special symbols immediately after the end of the small win game state. may be broken. For example, a door effect may be executed at the end interval time of the small winning game state, and a stage change effect or a continuous battle entering effect may be executed in the variable display of the special symbols immediately after the end of the small winning game state.

[9-6-11. V passing effect pattern determination table]
A V passing effect pattern determination table for determining the V passing effect pattern in the small winning game state will be explained. FIG. 276 is an example of a V passing effect pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine.

"V passing effect pattern" is the effect that is performed when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156 in the small winning game state, and the display effect such as the character, the sound effect, the effect button 5
This is the information that defines the change effect of the operation mode of 4.

As shown in FIG. 276, the V passage effect pattern determination table contains the V pass command received from the main control circuit 200 and the information (effect stage) of the game state at the time of winning when it is determined as a big hit or a small win. , the number of reserved consecutive stocks, the selection rate (sixth random number value), and the V passage effect pattern are associated with each other.

In the present embodiment, the V-passing effect patterns are V-passing effect pattern 1 in which V is displayed in the normal display mode, V-passing effect pattern 10 in which V is displayed in the first display mode, and V-display in the first display mode. , a V passage effect pattern 11 that displays "STOCK1" suggesting that the number of holding stocks = 1;
V passing effect pattern 12 that displays "STOCK 2" suggesting 2, and V in the second display mode
A V-passing performance pattern 20 to be displayed and a V-passing performance pattern 21 to indicate V in a special display mode suggesting that the number of reserved consecutive stocks≧1 is provided.

And, according to the V passing production pattern determination table shown in FIG. When it is the stage 20), it is configured such that the V-passing effect pattern 1 is determined as the normal V-passing effect.

On the other hand, when it is in the second time-saving game state, different V passing effect patterns (different effects) can be determined based on the effect stage.
Specifically, when the male character is in the “production stages 30, 41, 42”, V
A passing effect pattern 10, a V passing effect pattern 11 or a V passing effect pattern 12 is determined, and when the female character is in the "effect stages 31, 40", the V passing effect pattern 20 or the V passing effect pattern 21 is determined. is configured to

Furthermore, when in the second time-saving game state, different V passing effect patterns (different effects) can be determined based on the number of reserved consecutive stocks.
Specifically, in the case of male character production stages (30, 41, 42), when the number of holding consecutive stocks is 1, the V passage production pattern 11 is higher than the V passage production pattern 10.
is easily determined, and when the number of reserved consecutive stocks≧2, the V passing effect pattern 12 is more likely to be determined than the V passing effect pattern 10. - 特許庁Further, in the case of female character production stages (31, 40), the V passage production pattern 21 is more likely to be determined than the V passage production pattern 20 when the number of reserved consecutive stocks≧1.

Thereby, when it is in the second time-saving game state, it is possible to suggest the number of reserved consecutive stocks by the V passing effect pattern.

Further, according to the small hit start effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 275 (1) and the V passage effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. The production is performed based on the same production stage selected in . As a result, it is possible to execute like a series of performances from the second time-saving game state to the small win game state, and it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 288 and 289. FIG.

[9-6-12. Production stage selection table after the end of the jackpot game state]
The effect stage selection table for determining the effect stage after the end of the jackpot game state will be explained. FIG. 277 is an example of an effect stage selection table after the end of the jackpot game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 277, the first normal game state, the second normal game state and the first time saving shown in FIG. Two effects of the production stage selection table 1 after the end of the jackpot game state in the game state and the production stage selection table 2 after the end of the jackpot game state in the second time-saving game state shown in FIG. 277 (2) It has a stage selection table.

As shown in FIG. 277(1), in the production stage selection table 1 after the end of the big win game state, the game state at the time of winning when it is judged as a big win or a small win, the winning pattern, and the production stage correspond to each other. attached.

Here, the ``selection permission flag ON'' shown in FIG. 277(1) means that the selection permission flag is turned on ( allowed).

According to the production stage selection table 1 after the end of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 277 (1),
When the game state at the time of winning is the first normal game state (performance stages 0 to 2), and when the winning pattern is ``first special pattern_5R jackpot pattern 1'' corresponding to the pattern specifying command ``zA1''. , since the game is shifted to the first time-saving game state, the "production stage 20" indicating the stage for the chance to enter the Sengoku period in the first time-saving game state is selected.

According to the production stage selection table 1 after the end of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 277 (1),
When the game state at the time of winning is the first normal game state (performance stages 0 to 2) and the winning pattern corresponds to the design designation command "zA2-4", the game state at the time of winning is the second normal game state. In the case of the game state (production stage 10), when the game state at the time of winning is the first time-saving game state (production stage 20), in either case, the so-called initial hit or pullback hit is the first. 2, the "selection permission flag ON" is set to enable the player to select "production stage 30" or "production stage 31".

As shown in FIG. 277 (2), the effect stage selection table 2 after the end of the big win game state includes information on the game state at the time of winning when it is determined as a big win or a small win (production stage).
, the above-described V-pass effect pattern, the number of reserved consecutive stocks, and the effect stage are associated with each other.

According to the production stage selection table 2 after the end of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 277 (2),
Depending on whether or not the number of reserved consecutive stocks has been notified by the V passing performance pattern, the performance stage selected after the big win game state is completed is different.

Specifically, when the game state at the time of winning is the production stage 30, when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not notified by the V passing production pattern 10, the production stage 30 is selected again (the production stage 30 is continued). , When the V passing performance pattern 11 notifies the number of holding consecutive stocks=1, the performance stage 41 is selected, and when the V passing performance pattern 12 notifies the number of holding consecutive stocks=2, the performance stage 42 is selected. .

Further, when the game state at the time of winning is the production stage 41, when the V passing production pattern 10 does not notify the number of reserved consecutive stocks, the production stage 30 is selected and the V is selected.
When the passing performance pattern 11 notifies the number of holding consecutive stocks=1, the performance stage 41 is selected (continues the performance stage 41), and when the V passing performance pattern 12 notifies the number of holding consecutive stocks=2, the performance is performed. Select stage 42 .

Further, when the game state at the time of winning is the performance stage 42, when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not notified by the V passage performance pattern 10 and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 1, the production stage 41 is selected and the V passage is performed. When the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not notified by the production pattern 10 but the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 2, the production stage 42 is selected (the production stage 42 is continued), and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 1 by the V-passing production pattern 11. is notified, the production stage 42 is selected (the production stage 42 is continued).

As a result, the "production stage 41", which is the premier stage 1 for male characters,
In the second and third time-saving game states, it is possible to suggest at least the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1, and the "production stage 42", which is the premier stage 2 for the male character, is in the second and third time-saving game states. At least the number of retained ream stocks≧2 can be suggested.
Therefore, when the effects of the effect stages 41 and 42 are executed, the player can grasp the number of reserved consecutive stocks and play the game without anxiety.

Further, when the game state at the time of winning is the performance stage 31, when the V passing performance pattern 20 does not notify the number of reserved consecutive stocks, the performance stage 31 is selected (the performance stage 31 is continued), and the V passing performance is performed. When pattern 21 informs that the number of reserved consecutive stocks≧1, production stage 40 is selected.

Further, when the game state at the time of winning is the production stage 40, when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not notified by the V passage production pattern 20 and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 0, the production stage 31 is selected and the V passage is performed. When the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not notified by the production pattern 20 but the number of reserved consecutive stocks≧1, the production stage 40 is selected (the production stage 40 is continued), and the number of reserved consecutive stocks≧1 is obtained by the V-passing production pattern 21.例文帳に追加is notified, the performance stage 40 is selected (the performance stage 40 is continued).

As a result, the "production stage 40", which is the premier stage for the female character, can suggest that the number of reserved consecutive stocks≧1 in the second and third time-saving game states. Therefore, when the effect by the effect stage 40 is being executed, the player can be interested in how many reserved consecutive stocks there are and how long the effect stage 40 will continue.

[9-7-1. Sub control circuit processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 278, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 278, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S7500).
. In this initialization processing, for example, initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup recovery initialization, and the like is performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 causes the process to proceed to S7510.
to

Note that the initialization process (S7500) described above is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared.

In S7510, the sub CPU 301 performs data input processing for inputting data.
In this data input process, both the read process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button 54 are performed.

In the reading process of the command input port 308, the command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 set in the command input port 308 is read.

Further, in the input process of the effect button 54, operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the effect button 54 is input from the button control circuit 310. FIG. Also, the sub CPU 301
When operation information is input from the button control circuit 310, it is determined whether the input operation information is valid or invalid and discarded. Set the valid time for validating the input operation information and the invalid period for invalidating the input operation information.

When the read processing of the command input port 308 and the input processing of the effect button 54 are completed,
The sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7520.

In S7520, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S7510 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7530.

At S7530, the sub CPU 301 executes effect mode determination processing. In this process, for example, based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 201, a production pattern is determined, and based on the determined production pattern, various requests (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, etc.) for operating various production devices are executed. , lamp requests, accessory requests, production button drive requests, etc.). The details of this effect mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After completing this process, the sub CPU 3
01 moves the process to S7540.

In S7540, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 . The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7550.

In S7550, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to audio control circuit 305 . The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control for causing the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7560.

In S7560, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 . LE
The D control circuit 306 receives the message (LED request) sent from the sub CPU 301
light emission control for lighting or blinking all or part of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 is performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 causes the process to proceed to S7570.
to

At S7570, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a role product request to the role product control circuit 307 . Based on a message (a role request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301, the role control circuit 307 controls the performance drive motor (not shown) for all or part of the performance roles constituting the performance role group 58. Performs drive control for operation. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7580.

At S7580, the sub CPU 301 executes effect button control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an effect button drive request to the button control circuit 310 . The button control circuit 310 changes the operation mode of the effect button 54 based on a message (effect button drive request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 and performs drive control such as vibrating the effect button 54 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit process.

[9-7-2. Production Mode Determination Process]
Next, referring to FIG. 279, sub CPU 301 during sub control circuit processing (see FIG. 278)
The details of the effect mode determination process executed by will be described. FIG. 279 is a flow chart showing an example of effect mode determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7531, the sub CPU 301 executes effect mode determination processing. In this process, based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 7, the mode of the sound effect output from the speaker 32, the operation mode of the effect button 54, etc. are determined. A pattern is determined. For details of this rendering mode determination processing, see FIG.
0 to 283, which will be described later. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7532.

In S7532, the sub CPU 301 executes animation request generation processing. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S7531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7533.

In S7533, the sub CPU 301 executes processing for generating a drawing request. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S7532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7534.

In S7534, the sub CPU 301 executes sound request generation processing. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S7531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7535.

In S7535, the sub CPU 301 executes lamp request generation processing.
In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S7531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7536.

In S7536, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product request generation process. In this process, a role item request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S7531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7537.

At S7537, the sub CPU 301 executes the process of generating the effect button drive request. In this process, an effect button drive request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S7531. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 278).

[9-7-3. Effect pattern decision processing]
Next, referring to FIGS. 280 to 282, sub-C during the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 279)
Details of the effect pattern determination process executed by PU 301 will be described. Figure 280~
FIG. 282 is a flow chart showing an example of effect pattern determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7531-1, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol winning command".

If it is determined that it is a "special symbol winning command" in S7531-1, sub C
PU 301 shifts the process to S7531-2. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a "special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-3.

In S7531-2, the sub CPU 301 performs special symbol reserved number addition processing for adding the reserved number of special symbols.

In this special design reserved number addition process, it is determined whether it is a "first special design winning command" or a "second special design winning command", and if it is a "first special design winning command" , 1 is added to the reserved number of the first special symbol in the work RAM 303 (the counter of the reserved number of the first special symbol), and when it is the "second special symbol winning command", the work RAM 3
1 is added to the reserved number of 03 second special symbols (second special symbol reserved number counter). In addition, referring to the effect stage storage area of the work RAM 303, the display mode of the pending image is determined based on the current effect stage and the pending number of special symbols added this time, and the pending image in the determined display mode is displayed on the display device 7. determine the pending display pattern to be displayed in the
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-3, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a special symbol "prefetch command".

If it is determined in S7531-3 that it is a "prefetch command", the sub CPU 30
1 moves the process to S7531-4. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 301 determines that it is not a "prefetch command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-10.

At S7531-4, the sub CPU 301 performs a pending information storage process for storing the contents of the special symbol starting information.

In this pending information storage process, it is determined whether it is a "first special symbol prefetch command" or a "second special symbol prefetch command", and various parameters of the prefetch command (see FIG. 239) are stored in the main RAM 203. In the decorative design determination area, the first decorative design start storage area and the second decorative design start storage area of the work RAM 303 so as to correspond to the special design determination area, the first special design start storage area and the second special design start storage area Remember.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-5.

At S7531-5, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead effect determination process for determining a look-ahead effect. Details of this look-ahead effect determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-10, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is the "design designation command".

If it is determined that it is a "symbol designation command" in S7531-10, the sub CPU
301 moves the process to S7531-11. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a "design designation command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-20.

At S7531-11, the sub CPU 301 performs decorative design determination processing for determining the decorative design.

In this decorative design determination process, the decorative design stop design is determined based on the type of the design designation command and the state information (current game state) stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and the determined stop design is selected. It is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303 . Further, when the type of the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a big win or a small win, the information of the current game state is stored in the winning state storage area of the work RAM 303 in order to hold the game state at the time of winning. . Furthermore, unless the game state at the time of winning is the first normal game state (
That is, the second normal game state, the first to third time-saving game states), work RAM 30
1 is added to the 3 consecutive game counter, and if the game state at the time of winning is the first normal game state,
Clear (set to 0) the counter for the number of times of consecutive residences in the work RAM 303 .
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-20, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command".

When it is determined in S7531-20 that it is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-21. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a "variation pattern command for special symbols", the sub CPU 301 causes the process to proceed to S7531-30.
to

At S7531-21, the sub CPU 301 performs special symbol reserved number subtraction processing such as subtracting the reserved number of special symbols.

In this special symbol reserved number subtraction process, it is determined whether it is a "first special symbol variation pattern command" or a "second special symbol variation pattern command", and a "first special symbol variation pattern command" is determined. When , 1 is subtracted from the first special symbol reserved number counter of the work RAM 303, and when it is a "second special symbol variation pattern command", 1 is subtracted from the second special symbol reserved number counter of the work RAM 303. do. Also, a pending shift display pattern for shifting and displaying the pending image on the display device 7 is determined with respect to the pending image of the special symbol subtracted this time.
Furthermore, the decorative design determination area of the work RAM 303, the first decorative design start storage area and the second
Various parameters stored in the decorative symbol start storage area are shifted in the same manner as the special symbol determination area, the first special symbol start storage area and the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 .
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-22.

At S7531-22, the sub CPU 301 refers to the state information (current game state) etc. stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and performs number counter update processing for updating various number counters.

In this frequency counter update process, in the case of the normal game state, the "normal variation display counter" of the work RAM 303 that counts the number of times the special symbols are displayed in the normal game state.
is updated by adding 1 to
In addition, in the case of the time saving game state, when it is a variation pattern command of the first special symbol, subtract 1 from the "first time saving number sub-counter" and "second time saving number sub-counter" of the work RAM 303, 2 When it is a special pattern variation pattern command, work R
1 is subtracted from the "second time saving sub-counter" of AM303.
When the first look-ahead flag indicating that the pending change notice is being executed is on, the "first look-ahead number counter" in the work RAM 303 is updated by subtracting 1 to indicate that the flash notice is being executed. is on, the work RAM
1 is subtracted from the "second look-ahead count counter" 303 to update it. When the first read-ahead number counter=0, the first read-ahead flag is turned off, and when the second read-ahead number counter=0, the second look-ahead flag is turned off.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-23.

At S7531-23, the sub CPU 301 refers to the state information (current game state) stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and determines whether the current game state is the "first normal game state". judge.

If it is determined to be the "first normal game state" in S7531-23, the sub CP
U301 shifts the process to S7531-24. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "first normal game state", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-26.

At S7531-24, the sub CPU 301 performs a first symbol effect pattern determination process for determining a symbol effect pattern in the first normal game state.

In this first symbol effect pattern determination process, after acquiring the first random number value, the symbol effect pattern determination table E1 shown in FIG. A pattern performance pattern is determined on the basis of the performance stage stored in the area, the variable display frequency of the special pattern stored in the normal variable display frequency counter of the work RAM 303, and the obtained first random number value.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-25.

At S7531-25, the sub CPU 301 performs a notice effect pattern determination process for deciding the notice effect pattern of the window notice of the first normal game state.

In this notice effect pattern determination processing, after obtaining the second random value, the window notice notice effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. A notice effect pattern is determined based on the effect stage stored in the area and the acquired second random number value. Here, when the advance notice effect pattern 1 indicating the stage change is determined, the effect stage 0 stored in the effect stage storage area of the work RAM 303 is changed to the effect stage 1, or the effect stage 1 is changed to the effect stage 0. switch and update.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-26, the sub CPU 301 refers to the state information (current game state) stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and determines whether the current game state is the "second normal game state". judge.

If it is determined to be the "second normal game state" in S7531-26, the sub CP
U301 moves the process to S7531-27. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the “second normal game state”, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-29.

At S7531-27, the sub CPU 301 performs symbol effect pattern table determination processing for determining the symbol effect pattern determination table for the second normal game state.

In this symbol effect pattern table determination process, first, various parameters stored in the decorative symbol determination area and the second decorative symbol start storage area of the work RAM 303 are referred to, and "the number of hits in the reserved number of second special symbols" and " pullback information”.
Then, referring to the determination table at the start of the second normal game state shown in FIG. One of the symbol performance pattern determination tables E2 to E8 is determined based on the winning number in the reserved number of the second special symbols and the pullback information.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-28.

At S7531-28, the sub CPU 301 performs second symbol effect pattern determination processing for determining the symbol effect pattern in the second normal game state.

In this second symbol effect pattern determination process, after obtaining the first random number, the above S7531-
By referring to the symbol effect pattern determination table determined in 27, the received special symbol variation pattern command, the second special symbol pending number stored in the second special symbol pending number counter of the work RAM 303, and acquisition. A symbol effect pattern is determined based on the obtained first random number value.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-29, the sub CPU 301 performs a third symbol effect pattern determination process for determining a symbol effect pattern in the time saving game state.

In this third symbol effect pattern determination process, first, the game state storage area of the work RAM 303 is referred to, and it is determined whether it is the first time-saving game state or the second and third time-saving game states.

In the third symbol effect pattern determination process, in the case of the first time-saving gaming state, after acquiring the first random number value, referring to the symbol effect pattern determination table E9 shown in FIG. A pattern effect pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command and the acquired first random number value. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In the third symbol effect pattern determination process, when the second and third time-saving game states are
It is determined whether or not it is the final variation of the time saving game state. Here, whether or not it is the final variation of the time saving gaming state, referring to the "first time saving number sub-counter" and "second time saving number sub-counter" of the work RAM 303, any time saving number sub-counter = 0 If so, it is determined to be the final variation.

In the third symbol effect pattern determination process, in the case of the second and third time-saving gaming states, when it is other than the final variation of the time-saving gaming state, with reference to the symbol effect pattern determination table E10 shown in FIG. The variation pattern command of the special symbol and the work RAM 303
A pattern effect pattern is determined based on the effect stage stored in the effect stage storage area. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In the third symbol effect pattern determination process, in the case of the second and third time-saving gaming states, when it is the final variation of the time-saving gaming state, the symbol effect pattern determination table E shown in FIG.
11, the received special symbol variation pattern command, the effect stage stored in the effect stage storage area of work RAM 303, and the second special symbol reserved number counter of work RAM 303 are stored. Based on the reserved number of special symbols, a symbol performance pattern is determined. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-30, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol effect stop command".

When it is determined in S7531-30 that it is a "special symbol effect stop command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-31. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a "special symbol effect stop command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-32.

At S7531-31, the sub CPU 301 performs a symbol effect ending process for ending the symbol effect.

In this pattern effect end processing, referring to the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, "first time saving number sub-counter" and "second time saving number sub-counter", whether it is the final variation of the first to third time saving game state determine whether or not If it is other than the final variation of the first to third time-saving game states, pattern performance execution end data for ending the performance of the performance pattern 100 of the pattern performance pattern and the door performance are created. Further, in the case of the final variation of the first to third time-saving game states, the symbol performance is performed without creating the symbol performance execution end data in order to execute the performance over the special symbol variable display time and the symbol determination time. End the termination process.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-32, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol game end command".

When it is determined in S7531-32 that it is a "special symbol game end command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-33. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "special symbol game end command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-40.

At S7531-33, the sub CPU 301 performs an all-effect end process for ending all the effects related to the special symbol lottery, except for some effects such as the background.

In this all-effects end processing, all-effects execution end data for ending the execution of all the effects related to the lottery of special symbols is created. In the above S7531-31, even when the symbol production execution end data is not created in the case of the final variation of the first to third time saving game states, this all production execution end data allows the first to third time saving Execution of the performance by the symbol performance pattern at the time of the final variation of the final variation of the game state is finished.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-40, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "small hit start display command".

When it is determined in S7531-40 that it is the "small hit start display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-41. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "small hit start display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-42.

At S7531-41, the sub CPU 301 performs a small winning start effect determination process for determining a small winning start effect pattern for performing a small winning start effect.

In this small hit effect determination process, first, various parameters stored in the second decorative symbol start storage area of the work RAM 303 are referred to, and the "holding consecutive stock number", which is the number of parameters for a big hit or a small hit, is calculated, The calculated "holding ream stock number" is stored in the work RAM 30
3 is overwritten and stored in the reserved ream stock number counter.
Then, after acquiring the fifth random number value, referring to the small winning start effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the number of reserved consecutive stocks stored in the reserved consecutive stock number counter of the work RAM 303, and the acquired fifth random number, a small winning start production pattern is set. decide.
When this process ends, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-42, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is the "V passing command".

If it is determined in S7531-42 that it is a "V passing command", the sub CPU 3
01 moves the process to S7531-43. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 301 determines that it is not the "V passing command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-44.

At S7531-43, the sub CPU 301 performs a V passing effect determination process for determining a V passing effect pattern for performing a V passing effect.

In this V passing effect determination process, after obtaining the sixth random number value, the V passing effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. A V passing effect pattern based on the effect stage stored in the effect stage storage area of the work RAM 303, the number of holding consecutive stocks stored in the holding consecutive stock number counter of the work RAM 303, and the acquired sixth random number value. to decide.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-44, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "small hit end display command".

When it is determined in S7531-44 that it is the "small hit end display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-45. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "small hit end display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-50.

At S7531-45, the sub CPU 301 performs a small hit end effect determination process for determining an effect pattern for performing a small win end effect.

In this small-hit end effect determination process, the small-hit end effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. A small winning end performance pattern and a performance stage are determined based on. Then, information on the determined performance stage is overwritten in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303 and stored.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-50, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is the "big hit start display command".

When it is determined at S7531-50 that it is the "big hit start display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-51. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "big hit start display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-52.

At S7531-51, the sub CPU 301 performs a jackpot start effect determination process for determining a pattern for performing a jackpot start effect. In this big-hit start effect determination process, the stop pattern storage area of the work RAM 303 is referred to, and the effect pattern of the big-hit start effect is determined according to the stop pattern (hit pattern).
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-52, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is the "big hit end display command".

When it is determined at S7531-52 that it is the "big hit end display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-53. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "big hit end display command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-70.

At S7531-53, the sub CPU 301 performs an effect stage determination process for determining the effect stage after the end of the jackpot game state.

In this production stage determination process, the winning state storage area of the work RAM 303 is referred to,
It is determined whether or not the game state at the time of winning is the second time-saving game state.

If the game state at the time of winning in the production stage determination process is not the second time-saving game state (first normal game state, second normal game state and first time-saving game state), FIG.
By referring to the effect stage selection table 1 after the end of the jackpot game state shown in 77 (1), the information of the game state stored in the winning state storage area of the work RAM 303 and the work RAM 3
The production stage (production stage 20 or selection permission flag ON) is newly determined based on the winning symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area of 03.

Here, when a new production stage 20 is determined, the information of the production stage 20 is overwritten and stored in the production stage storage area of the work RAM 303, the current production stage determination processing is terminated, and the processing is returned to S7531-54. to

Further, when the selection permission flag ON is determined, an operation effective time within the end interval time at the end of the jackpot game state is set, the initial selection stage is set as the performance stage 30, and the operation of the performance button 54 is input by the player. Production stage 30 and production stage 3 each time
Switch the selection stage with 1. Then, when the effective operation time has elapsed, the selection permission flag is turned OFF, the performance stage selected as the selection stage is newly determined, and the information of the newly determined performance stage is stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303. Overwrite and store. In addition, when the gaming state at the time of winning is the second time-saving gaming state, the selection permission flag is never turned ON. When this process ends, the process moves to S7531-54.

Further, when the game state at the time of winning in the performance stage determination process is the second time-saving game state, first, various parameters stored in the second decorative pattern start storage area of the work RAM 303 are referred to, and a big win or a small win is achieved. The number of parameters that will be "holding ream stock number"
is calculated, and the calculated "holding ream stock number" is overwritten and stored in the work RAM 303's holding ream stock number counter.
Then, referring to the production stage selection table 2 after the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 277 (2), the production stages stored in the production stage storage area of the work RAM 303,
V passing effect pattern determined (executed) in S7531-43 and work RAM
A performance stage is newly determined based on the number of reserved consecutive stocks stored in the reserved consecutive stock number counter 303.例文帳に追加After that, the newly determined performance stage information is overwritten in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303 and stored.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-54.

At S7531-54, the sub CPU 301 performs a jackpot end effect determination process for determining a pattern for effecting a jackpot end effect. In this big hit end effect determination process, the stop design (hit design) stored in the stop design storage area of the work RAM 303 and the above S75
In 31-53, the performance pattern of the jackpot end performance is determined according to the performance stage newly determined and the selection permission flag ON/OFF.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-70, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "game state specifying command".

If it is determined that it is a "game state designation command" in S7531-70, sub C
PU 301 shifts the process to S7531-71. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be the "game state specifying command", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-80.

At S7531-71, the sub CPU 301 performs a state information update process of updating and storing the state information indicating the current game state in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303 according to the type of the game state designation command. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S
Transfer to 7531-72.

Also, in the state information update process of the present embodiment, when the state information is updated from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state (when the first time-saving game state starts), the work RAM
303 "first time saving number sub-counter" = 7, "second time saving number sub-counter" = 1 are set, and when the state information is updated from the normal game state to the second time saving game state (second time saving When the gaming state starts), the "first time saving number sub-counter" of the work RAM 303 =
11, "second time saving sub-counter" = 5 will be set.

At S7531-72, the sub CPU 301 performs production stage shift determination processing for determining whether or not to shift the production stage.

In this effect stage transition determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the state information stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and the first to third time-saving game states or the second normal game state are changed. When the state information is changed to the first normal game state (when shifting to the first normal game state), the production stage 2 is determined, and the second and third time-saving game states are changed to the second state.
When the state information is changed to the normal game state (when shifting to the second normal game state), the production stage 10 is determined, and the first normal game state is changed to the state information of the third time-saving game state. When changed (when shifting to the B time-saving game state), the performance stage 30 is determined. Next, referring to the normal variation display number counter of the work RAM 303, when the variation display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) in the first normal game state, the production stage 0 is determined.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-80, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "demonstration display command".

If it is determined to be a "demonstration display command" in S7531-80, the sub CPU
301 transfers the process to S7531-81. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 301 determines that it is not a “demonstration display command”, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-90.

At S7531-81, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect pattern determination process for determining a demonstration display effect pattern for effecting a game standby effect.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

At S7531-90, the sub CPU 301 also determines an effect pattern according to various commands transmitted from the main CPU 201. FIG. For example, the cumulative payout information of the game balls is updated in response to the reception of the first big winning mouth winning command and the first big winning mouth winning command. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process, and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).
[9-7-4. Look-ahead effect determination processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 283, sub CPU 3
01 will be described in detail. FIG. 283 is a flow chart showing an example of prefetch effect determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7601, the sub CPU 301 refers to the state information (current game state) stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and determines whether or not the current game state is the "first normal game state". do.

When it is determined in S7601 that it is in the "first normal gaming state", the sub CPU 30
1 moves the process to S7602. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the "first normal game state", the current look-ahead effect determination process is terminated, and the process is shifted to the animation request generation process (see FIGS. 279 and 280).

In S7602, the sub CPU 301 refers to the prohibition condition setting table for the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 274, and determines whether or not any prohibition condition among the common prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is not satisfied.

If it is determined in S7602 that any of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is not satisfied, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7603. On the other hand, if it is determined that any of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to S7606.

In S7603, the sub CPU 301 performs pending change notice effect determination processing for determining a hold change notice effect pattern of a pending change notice.

In this pending change notice effect determination process, after acquiring the third random value, the received prefetch command (FIG. 2) is
39) and the acquired third random number value, a pending notice effect pattern is determined. Then, when the suspension notice effect pattern for performing the suspension change notice is determined, the first look-ahead flag has already been set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 in order to determine whether the common prohibition condition 5 (see FIG. 274) is established. (whether or not pending change notice is being executed). If the first look-ahead flag has already been set, the currently determined pending notice effect pattern is discarded, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the first prefetch flag is not set, the first prefetch flag is set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 (the first prefetch flag is turned on).
Then, referring to the reserved number counter of the first special symbol in the work RAM 303, the number corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbol is set in the first look-ahead number counter of the work RAM 303,
End this process.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7604.

In S7604, the sub CPU 301 refers to the prohibition condition setting table for the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 274, and determines whether or not any of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is not satisfied.

If it is determined in S7604 that any one of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is not satisfied, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7603. On the other hand, if it is determined that any one of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to S7606.

In S7605, the sub CPU 301 performs winning notice effect determination processing for determining a prize winning notice effect pattern of flash notice.

In this winning notice effect determination process, after acquiring the fourth random value, the flash notice winning notice effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Based on the fourth random number value, a winning announcement performance pattern is determined. Then, when the winning notice effect pattern for performing the flash notice is determined, the second look-ahead flag has already been set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 in order to determine whether the common prohibition condition 5 (see FIG. 274) is established. (whether flash notice is being executed) or not. If the second look-ahead flag has already been set, the winning announcement performance pattern determined this time is discarded, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the second look-ahead flag is not set, the second look-ahead flag is set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 (the second look-ahead flag is turned on), and the number counter of the first special symbol held in the work RAM 303 is referred to. Then, the number of times corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbols is set in the second look-ahead counter of the work RAM 303 .
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7606.

In S7606, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the received prefetch command is the second special symbol prefetch command, that is, the second start port 714 in the first normal game state.
It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered 0.

In S7606, when it is determined that the received prefetch command is the second special symbol prefetch command, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7607. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received look-ahead command is not the look-ahead command of the second special symbol, the current look-ahead effect determination processing is terminated, and the processing is changed to animation request generation processing (FIGS. 279 and 280
reference).

At S7607, the sub CPU 301 performs erasing processing of the prefetch information of the first special symbol. In this erasing process, the first look-ahead flag, the second look-ahead flag, the first look-ahead number counter, the second look-ahead number counter, the pending notice effect pattern, and the winning notice effect pattern are deleted (=
0) do.

Even if the prefetch effect of the pending change notice or the flash notice is performed in the first normal game state, when the game ball enters the second start port 7140, the execution of the prefetch effect is stopped. It's becoming

[9-8. Production content]
An example of the effect content of the display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described with respect to the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, and the like.

(Normal display image)
First, referring to FIG. 284, the normal display image in the first normal game state will be described. FIG. 284 is an example of a normal display image in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 284, in the normal display image in the first normal game state, a left symbol 7071 as a main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed on the central side of the display area of the display device 7.
L, middle symbol 7071C, and right symbol 7071R are configured to be displayable.

In addition, at the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-design 7072 as a sub-design of the decorative design corresponding to the first special design, and a second design as a sub-design of the decorative design corresponding to the second special design. The secondary symbol 7073 is configured to be displayed in a small size.

In this embodiment, when the special symbols are variably displayed in the first normal game state, in addition to the variability display of the main symbols of the left symbol 7071L, the middle symbol 7071C and the right symbol 7071R, the special symbols are displayed. The variable display of the sub-symbol of the first sub-symbol 7072 or the second sub-symbol 7073 is also performed according to the type. This is the same for the second normal game state and the first to third time-saving game states. However, when the variable display of the special symbols is performed in the first time-saving gaming state, the main symbols of the left symbol 7071L, the middle symbol 7071C and the right symbol 7071R are not displayed, and the first sub symbol 7072 or the second The variable display of only the sub-symbol 7073 is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the left symbol 7071L, the middle symbol 7071C and the right symbol 707
The main symbols of 1R consist of numbers "1 to 9" and character symbols, and when a big win or a small win are made, all the same symbols are stop-displayed. On the other hand, the sub-symbols of the first sub-symbol 7072 and the second sub-symbol 7073 are composed of symbols such as "○, ×, □, △". The combination is configured to be statically displayed.

In the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbols can be displayed, and according to the reserved number of the first special symbols, the first special symbol start storage area ( 1)
1st reserved image 7074a indicating that the starting information is stored in the 1st reserved image 7074b indicating that the starting information is stored in the 1st special symbol start storage area (2), 1st special symbol start storage a third reserved image 7074c showing that start-up information is stored in area (3);
A fourth pending image 7 showing that the start information is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (4)
074d can be displayed. In addition, corresponding to the pending image, the pending image 7075 indicating that the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner can be displayed. In this embodiment, the reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special symbols is not displayed, but the reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special symbols may be displayed.

(Card effect and door effect)
Next, with reference to FIG. 285, the card effect and the door effect when the second special symbol is varied and displayed in the first normal game state will be described. FIG. 285 is an example of a display image for explaining card effects and door effects in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In the description of the card effects, the symbols attached in FIG. 284 are omitted because the letters are small and lack visibility and may interfere with the description of the effect contents. Also, the illustration of the first sub-symbol 7072 and the second sub-symbol 7073, which are displayed extremely small, is also omitted. This is the same for the effects described in FIGS. 286-292.

The left column (a), (b-1), (c-1), and (d-1) of FIG. 285 are the special symbol fluctuation display times=599 in the first normal game state, and the second special symbol. This is an example of the card effect executed in the symbol effect pattern A14 (see FIG. 265) when the result of the lottery is a big hit.

In addition, the right column (a), (b-2), (c-2), and (d-2) of FIG. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, the card performance is not executed, and the performance pattern 100 (see FIG. 265).
This is an example of a door effect executed in .

FIG. 285(a) is an example of the display image before starting the variable display of the 599th rotation of the second special symbol in the first normal game state.

FIG. 285(b-1) is an example of the display image when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the card effect is started. As shown in FIG. 285(b-1), when the pattern effect pattern A14 (see FIG. 265) is determined and the card effect is started, the chance card with the words "big win", "small win", and "loss" is turned over. is shuffled, and the card becomes 1
A production that selects one is performed. In addition, the left, middle, and right main symbols, which were displayed large in the center of the display area, are displayed in reduced size at the bottom right of the display area to the extent that the player can identify them so as not to interfere with the card performance. be done.

FIG. 285(c-1) is an example of a display image when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed and the effect result of the card effect is displayed. As shown in FIG. 285(c-1), when one card is selected in the card effect, the card is slowly reversed, and a chance card with a big win character is displayed.

FIG. 285(d-1) is an example of a display image in which a big win is reported as a lottery result of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol ends. Figure 285 (d-1)
As shown in , when a chance card with a big hit character is displayed, the main symbols of the left, middle and right symbols displayed in reduced size at the bottom right of the display area are displayed large in the center of the display area. , all the main symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbols, and the player is notified of the big win.

FIG. 285(b-2) is an example of a display image when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and the door effect is started without executing the card effect. As shown in FIG. 285(b-2), when the effect pattern 100 (see FIG. 265) is determined and the door effect is started, half-open doors are displayed from the left and right sides of the display area, and the doors are half-open for a predetermined period. A production is performed that makes the door rattle. Here, the effect pattern of the door effect does not specify the end time of the effect, and the effect of rattling the half-open door is repeatedly performed over a predetermined period until the end of the effect is instructed.

FIG. 285(c-2) is an example of a display image when the variable display of the second special symbol ends and the door effect ends. As shown in FIG. 285 (c-2), when the variable display of the second special symbol ends (when the special symbol effect stop command is received), the effect of closing the door is performed, and all the decorative symbols are stopped. .

FIG. 285(d-2) is an example of the display image when starting the variable display of the special symbols for the 600th rotation, continuing from FIG. 285(c-2). As shown in FIG. 285 (d-2), the door is opened when starting the variable display of the 600th special symbol from the first normal game state, and the first normal game state to B time-saving game state ( 3rd time-saving game state) is notified by the background or the like. In addition, as described above in S7531-72 of FIG. 285, when the first normal game state is shifted to the B time saving game state (third time saving game state), the male character production stage 30 is used as the initial value production stage. will be determined.

(Sengoku Rush Chance)
Next, with reference to FIG. 286, the rendering of the Sengoku rush chance in the first time-saving gaming state will be described. FIG. 286 is an example of a display image for explaining the production of the Sengoku rush chance in the first time-saving gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

Fig. 286 is executed in pattern production patterns C4 to C7 (see Fig. 268) as a production of the Sengoku rush chance when the lottery result of the second special pattern in the first time-saving gaming state is a big hit or a small hit. This is an example of a boss battle production.

FIG. 286(a) is an example of a display image when the Sengoku rush chance in the first time-saving gaming state is started. As shown in FIG. 286(a), in the Sengoku rush chance in the first time-saving game state, as an example, an operation instruction image for causing the player to hit right in the upper right of the display area and a Sengoku rush chance A background of "production stage 20" indicating the stage is displayed.

FIG. 286(b) is an example of a display image of a boss battle effect that is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 7140 in the first time-saving gaming state and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. .

Here, as described above in FIG. 237 (1) and FIG. 268, the lottery of the second special symbol performed by entering the game ball into the second start port 7140 in the first time-saving gaming state is the first
When the final fluctuation of the time-saving gaming state is reached, the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol is determined to be an extremely short fluctuation display time (0.2 seconds), and the design confirmation time of the second special symbol is extremely long.
89 seconds).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 286(b), the second starting port 71 in the first time-saving gaming state
When the game ball enters 40, the variable display of the second sub-symbol 7073 is immediately stopped and displayed without displaying the main symbol. At this time, the boss battle effect started during the variable display of the second special symbol does not end in accordance with the stop display of the second special symbol, and the boss character is continuously displayed.

FIG. 286(c) is an example of a display image of a boss battle effect that is performed while the second special symbol is being displayed for confirmation. As shown in FIG. 286(c), when the second special symbol is displayed for confirmation, an effect of fighting a boss character is performed, and the boss battle effect started during the variable display of the second special symbol continues. is running.

FIG. 286(d) is an example of a display image when the effect result of the boss battle effect performed during the symbol confirmation display of the second special symbol is displayed. As shown in FIG. 286(d),
When the boss character wins the battle, a big win or a small win is reported as a result of the lottery of the second special symbols, and the state shifts to a big win game state or a small win game state.

At the end of the jackpot game state (including the case of passing through the small win game state) from the first time-saving game state, the selection permission flag is turned ON, and the player can select the Sengoku time production stage. Become.

(Selection of Production Stage by Player)
Next, referring to FIG. 287, the selection of the Sengoku Time presentation stage by the player will be described. FIG. 287 is an example of a display image for explaining the selection of the effect stage by the player in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 277 (1), if the game state at the time of winning is the first normal game state and the winning symbol corresponds to the symbol designation command "zA2-4", When the game state is the second normal game state, and when the game state at the time of winning is the first time-saving game state, in either case, the second time-saving game is a so-called first win or pullback win. Since the game state is shifted to the game state, it is possible for the player to select the production stage of the Sengoku time at the end interval at the end of the jackpot game state.

FIG. 287(a) is an example of a display image when selecting the Sengoku time production stage in the end interval at the end of the jackpot game state. As shown in FIG. 286(a), in the end interval at the end of the jackpot game state, an operation instruction image for causing the player to hit to the right, an effect button operation image indicating the operation of the effect button 54, and an effect A remaining time image showing the remaining time of the operation effective time of the button 54, an operation explanation image explaining the operation method of stage selection by the production button 54, a male character stage (production stage 30) and a female character stage (production stage 30) A stage selection image showing the selection of and is displayed.

FIG. 287(b) is an example of a display image when the production stage of Sengoku time is determined in the end interval at the end of the jackpot game state. As shown in FIG. 286(b), in the end interval at the end of the jackpot game state, when the operation effective time of the production button 54 has passed (when the remaining time image becomes zero), the selected production The stage will be decided as the production stage of Sengoku Time.

(Sengoku Time production)
Next, the Sengoku time production will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 and 289. FIG. Figure 288
is an example of a display image for explaining the Sengoku time production when the male character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko game machine. Also, FIG. 289 is an example of a display image for explaining the Sengoku time production when the female character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko game machine.

FIG. 288(a) is an example of a display image when the Sengoku time production in the second time saving game state is started. As shown in FIG. 288(a), in the Sengoku time production in the second time saving game state, as an example, the remaining variation display count of the Sengoku time (second time saving count) is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area.
, an operation instruction image for causing the player to hit to the right, and the background of the Sengoku Time production stage are displayed. In FIG. 288(a), a star-patterned background of "production stage 41" indicating premier stage 1 for the male character (the number of reserved consecutive stocks=1) is displayed. Also, the "production stage 30" indicating the normal stage of the male character has a plain background.

Figure 288 (b) shows that the game ball enters the second starting port 7140 in the second time-saving gaming state, and the Sengoku time production (for example, the pattern production pattern It is an example of the display image of the effects executed by P10, P13, and P16 (see FIGS. 269 and 270). As shown in FIG. 288(b), a male character and a star-patterned background are displayed corresponding to the "production stage 41", and the left, middle, and right symbols, which were displayed large in the center of the display area, are displayed. The main symbol is reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display area to the extent that the player can identify it. At this time, the main patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns all start to fluctuate at high speed as a decorative pattern effect, and the left and right patterns do not temporarily stop in order, and all the patterns are displayed. Approximately at the same time, the production of the normal variation mode in which the stop display is performed is performed.

FIG. 288(c) shows a Sengoku time production (for example, pattern production patterns P10, P13, It is an example of the display image of the effect executed by P16. Figure 288
As shown in (c), the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols that are displayed in reduced form at the bottom right of the display area are displayed large in the center of the display area, and all the main symbols are stopped and displayed as the same symbol. Then, it is notified that the lottery for the second special symbol has resulted in a big hit or a small hit. When the lottery for the second special pattern is lost, the main patterns of the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern are displayed in a reduced size at the lower right of the display area and are stopped and displayed as scattered patterns.

FIG. 288(d) shows the Sengoku time production performed when the male character production stage is selected and the small winning game state is started (for example, the production executed by the small winning start production pattern 10 (FIG. 275). ))) is an example of a display image. As shown in FIG. 288(d), in the small winning game state, an effect is performed in which the male character directs the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 7156 in the background A1 (for example, blue background). At this time, the background A1 (
For example, a blue background) or a background A2 (for example, a red background) may pre-indicate the number of pending ream stocks.

FIG. 288(e) shows that the male character production stage is selected, and the Sengoku time production (for example,
This is an example of the display image of the effect (see FIG. 276) executed by the V-passing effect pattern 11. FIG. As shown in FIG. 288(e), when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156 in the small winning game state, V is displayed in the first display mode, and if the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 1,
It is possible to display "STOCK1", which suggests that the number of reserved ream stocks=1. In this way, when the game ball passes through the V prize opening 7156 in the male character production stage,
It is possible to notify the number of reserved ream stocks.

FIG. 289(a) is an example of a display image when the Sengoku time production in the second time saving game state is started. As shown in FIG. 289(a), in the Sengoku time production in the second time saving game state, as an example, the number of times the Sengoku time remaining variation is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area (second time saving number of times) is displayed.
, an operation instruction image for causing the player to hit to the right, and the background of the Sengoku Time production stage are displayed. In addition, in FIG. 289(a), a heart-patterned background of "production stage 40" indicating a premier stage for a female character (the number of reserved consecutive stocks≧1) is displayed. In addition, the "production stage 31" indicating the normal stage of the female character has a plain background.

FIG. 289(b) shows that the game ball enters the second starting port 7140 in the second time-saving gaming state, and the Sengoku time production (for example, the pattern production pattern It is an example of the display image of the effects executed by P12, P15, and P18 (see FIGS. 269 and 270). As shown in FIG. 289(b), a female character and a heart-patterned background are displayed corresponding to the "production stage 40", and the left, middle, and right symbols, which were displayed large in the center of the display area, are displayed. The main symbol is reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display area to the extent that the player can identify it. At this time, the main patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns all start to fluctuate at high speed as a decorative pattern effect, and the left and right patterns do not temporarily stop in order, and all the patterns are displayed. Approximately at the same time, the production of the normal variation mode in which the stop display is performed is performed.

FIG. 289(c) shows a Sengoku time production (for example, pattern production patterns P12, P15, It is an example of the display image of the effect executed by P18. Figure 289
As shown in (c), the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols that are displayed in reduced form at the bottom right of the display area are displayed large in the center of the display area, and all the main symbols are stopped and displayed as the same symbol. Then, it is notified that the lottery for the second special symbol has resulted in a big hit or a small hit. When the lottery for the second special pattern is lost, the main patterns of the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern are displayed in a reduced size at the lower right of the display area and are stopped and displayed as scattered patterns.

FIG. 289(d) shows a Sengoku time production performed when the production stage of the female character is selected and the small winning game state is started (for example, production executed by the small winning start production pattern 20 (FIG. 275). ))) is an example of a display image. As shown in FIG. 289(d), in the small winning game state, an effect is performed in which the female character instructs the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 7156 in the background A1 (for example, blue background). At this time, the background A1 (
For example, a blue background) or a background A2 (for example, a red background) may pre-indicate the number of pending ream stocks.

FIG. 289(e-1) is performed when the female character effect stage is selected and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 0, and the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156 in the small winning game state. It is an example of the display image of the Sengoku time effect (for example, the effect executed by the V passing effect pattern 20 (see FIG. 276)). As shown in FIG. 289(e-1), when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156 when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 0, the V can be displayed in the second display mode.

FIG. 289(e-2) is performed when the female character effect stage is selected and the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156 in the small winning game state when the number of retained consecutive stocks≧1. It is an example of the display image of the Sengoku time effect (for example, the effect executed by the V passing effect pattern 21). As shown in FIG. 289(e-2), the number of retained ream stocks≧
When the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156 in the case of 1, V can be displayed in a special display mode.

In this way, when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 7156 in the female character production stage, it is possible to notify that the number of reserved consecutive stocks≧1 (whether or not there is the number of reserved consecutive stocks).

(Small hit game state: puncture)
Next, with reference to FIG. 290, the effect performed when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening 7156 in the small winning game state (so-called puncture) will be described. FIG. 290 is an example of a display image for explaining an effect performed when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening in the small winning game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

FIG. 290(a) is an example of the display image of the Sengoku time production performed when the male character production stage is selected and the small winning game state is started. As shown in FIG. 290(a), in the small winning game state, an effect is performed in which the male character instructs the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 7156. It is assumed that the game ball did not pass through the V winning opening 7156 .

FIG. 290(b) shows an effect (for example, an effect executed by the effect patterns 101 and 102 (FIG. 2
75))). As shown in FIG. 290(b), in the end interval time of the small winning game state, half-open doors are displayed from the left and right sides of the display area, and the half-open doors rattle over a predetermined period, and then the doors are closed. A door performance will be held.

FIG. 290 (c-1) is an effect performed when there is a reserved number of second special symbols at the end of the small hit game state after the door effect is performed (for example, effect performed by effect pattern 102) is an example of a display image of . As shown in FIG. 290 (c-1), when there is a reserved number of second special symbols at the end of the small winning game state, the door is opened, and a dedicated stage (production stage) of the continuous battle in the second normal game state 10), a continuous battle rush effect is performed to notify that the game will shift to 10).

FIG. 290 (c-2) is an effect performed when there is no pending number of second special symbols at the end of the small hit game state after the door effect is performed (for example, effect executed by effect pattern 101) is an example of a display image of . As shown in FIG. 290 (c-2), when there is no reserved number of second special symbols at the end of the small winning game state, the door is opened and the seaside stage in the limited production state in the first normal game state (production A stage change effect is performed to notify that the game will shift to stage 2).

(End of Sengoku Time)
Next, with reference to FIG. 291, the effect performed when the Sengoku time ends will be described. FIG. 291 is an example of a display image for explaining an effect when the Sengoku time ends in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 291(a) is an example of the display image of the Sengoku time production performed when the variable display of the special symbol is started in the final variation of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state. As shown in FIG. 291(a), a male character and a plain background are displayed corresponding to the "production stage 30", and at the lower right of the display area, a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern are displayed in reduced size. The main pattern is variably displayed.

FIG. 291(b) shows a Sengoku time result production (for example, pattern production patterns F10 to F
13, an example of the display image of the effect executed by F20 to F23 (see FIG. 270)). As shown in FIG. 291(b), as the game result of the Sengoku time, information on the number of big wins, acquisition points indicating the number of game balls paid out to the player, and the like are displayed. The main patterns of the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern, which are reduced and displayed in the lower right of the display area, are stopped and displayed in different patterns.

FIG. 291(c-1) is a display image of a continuous battle rush effect that is performed while special symbols are being confirmed and displayed when there is a reserved number of second special symbols when the variable display of special symbols ends. is an example. As shown in FIG. 291 (c-1), during the symbol confirmation display of the special symbols, a continuous battle entering effect that informs the transition to a dedicated stage (performance stage 10) of the continuous battle in the second normal game state. is done.

FIG. 291(c-2) is an example of the display image of the door effect that is performed during the symbol confirmation display of the special symbols when there is no pending number of the second special symbols when the variable display of the special symbols is finished. is. As shown in FIG. 291 (c-2), during the special symbol confirmation display, half-open doors are displayed from the left and right of the display area, and the doors are closed after rattling for a predetermined period of time. A door performance is performed.

(Direction of continuous battle)
Next, with reference to FIG. 292, the effect of the continuous battle in the second normal game state will be described. FIG. 292 is an example of a display image for explaining a continuous battle effect in the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In FIG. 292, when the second variation is hit as the result of the lottery of the second special symbol in the second normal game state, the first variation is the symbol rendering pattern R2 (see FIG. 267). , the second variation is an example in which a continuous battle effect is executed by symbol effect patterns R10 and R11 (see FIG. 267).

FIG. 292(a) is an example of a display image when the continuous battle effect in the second normal game state is started. As shown in FIG. 292(a), in the production of the continuous battle in the second normal game state, as an example, an operation instruction image for causing the player to hit right in the upper right of the display area, and On the left side, the 1st to 3rd round display images corresponding to the number of times the second special symbol is displayed,
In the center of the display area, a background of a stage dedicated to continuous battles (production stage 10) modeled after an arena is displayed. In addition, the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols are reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display area to the extent that they can be identified by the player so as not to interfere with the performance of the continuous battle.

FIG. 292(b) is an example of the display image of the effect of the continuous battle performed when the variation display of the second special symbol of the first variation is started in the second normal game state. As shown in FIG. 292(b), as a continuous battle effect, a main character and a rival character appear and fight each other (continuous battle effect according to pattern effect pattern R2).

FIG. 292(c) is an example of the display image of the continuous battle effect performed when the variation display of the second special symbol of the first variation ends in the second normal game state. As shown in FIG. 292(c), as a result of the continuous battle, the main character is superior and draws even though the confrontation cannot be settled.

FIG. 292(d) is an example of the display image of the continuous battle effect performed when the second special symbol variation display of the second variation is started in the second normal game state. As shown in FIG. 292(d), as a continuous battle effect, a continuous battle effect (continuous battle effect by pattern effect patterns R10 and R11) is performed in which the main character and the rival character continue to face each other.

FIG. 292(e) is an example of the display image of the continuous battle effect performed when the second special symbol variation display of the second variation ends in the second normal game state. As shown in FIG. 292(e), as a result of the successive battles, the confrontation is settled and the main character wins. Further, the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols reduced and displayed in the lower right of the display area are all the same symbols and are temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, all the same symbols are temporarily stopped and the main symbol is displayed in a large size in the center of the display area, and the player is notified that a big win or a small win has occurred.

Thus, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, the first normal game state, the second normal game state,
It is possible to shift to the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state,
Appropriate presentation is performed according to each game state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko game machine, in the look-ahead effect (holding change notice, flash notice) in the first normal game state, as described with reference to FIG. Since the propriety is determined, the look-ahead effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the seventh pachinko game machine, even when an irregular game mode is played, an appropriate performance pattern is executed in accordance with the transition of the game state to the irregular game mode. Therefore, it is possible to maintain and improve the playability.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko game machine, as described in FIG. 244 and the like, the first time-saving game state is quickly terminated by setting the variation display time of the second special symbol to the extremely short first variation display time. Let the specified number of normal electric accessories 7146 for normal electric use be 1, and the first
Since the variable display time of the normal symbol in the time-saving game state is set to be longer than the first variable display time of the second special symbol, it is possible to control the first time-saving game state that does not store the pending number of the second special symbol. can. Also, it is possible to control the second time-saving game state for storing the number of reserved second special symbols.

Further, in the seventh pachinko game machine, as described in FIG. 286 and the like, in the production of the Sengoku rush chance in the first time-saving game state, the production is performed over the variable display time of the second special symbol and the design determination time. Since it is executed, the degree of freedom of performance can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, in the seventh pachinko game machine, as described in FIGS. 288 and 289,
Since the production based on the same production stage is performed in the "Sengoku time" which is the period from the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state to the small winning game state, the second time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state is performed. A series of performances can be executed from the time-saving game state to the small winning game state of 3, and the amusement of the game can be further improved. Furthermore, in the Sengoku time production, the number of reserved consecutive stocks can be suggested by the small winning start production pattern and the V passing production pattern, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

(others)
The seventh pachinko game machine described above can apply each other's techniques between the embodiments including the modifications. The above-described embodiments are not intended to limit the content of the present invention, and modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Also, the effects described in the seventh pachinko game machine are merely enumerations of the most suitable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. not something.

Furthermore, the above [4. Extension example] can also be applied to the seventh pachinko gaming machine as long as there is no discrepancy in the game characteristics and control.

Techniques related to the present invention will be added below.

<Appendix: The sixth pachinko machine>
[Background technology]
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is performed, and this special symbol lottery. If you win, you can control the jackpot game state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), or when the game machine enters the start hole, change the big win hole to an open state, and enter the big win hole. There is known a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game state on the condition that the entered game ball enters a specific area (
So-called two types of game machines). When controlled to such a big winning game state, the big winning hole is opened in an advantageous opening mode (for example, opening time 29 seconds × 10 rounds, etc.) that makes it easy to enter the game ball, and the big winning hole is opened. A prize ball (game ball) corresponding to the entered game ball can be paid out.

Then, based on the result of the special symbol lottery, after performing the first reach production (long reach, SP reach) in order to improve the interest of the game, the second reach production (SP
A game machine that performs SP reach is known (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior art document]
[Patent document]
[Patent Document 1] JP 2013-236850 A

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, it has been desired to increase the interest in the game by increasing the relevance of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, etc., and further improving the effects such as the ready-to-win effect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing a variable display of identification symbols when a predetermined start condition is established,
Effect execution means (for example, display device 7, speaker 32, LED group 46, effect accessory group 58 and effect button device 63
10, a sub-control circuit 300, a sub-CPU 301),
The production executing means is
When the first effect execution condition (e.g., acquisition of the road to the ultimate battle icon) is established by performing the first effect (e.g., cherry blossom accumulation notice), the second effect (e.g., road to the ultimate battle) is established. is executable and
When the second effect execution condition (for example, display of five character icons) is established by performing a third effect (for example, pseudo-continuous effect) different from the first effect, a fourth effect (for example, , the road to the decisive battle) is feasible, and
The second effect and the fourth effect are characterized in that the same type of specific effect (for example, an effect aiming to collect 10 character icons) can be executed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect executing means
As the first effect, a step effect in which the effect progresses in stages (for example, cherry blossom accumulation notice);
A first development display effect (for example, a character icon) capable of displaying predetermined development information (
For example, it is desirable to be able to display a text image indicating the number of character icons, such as "1 person gathering", or to display the icon display image in the West Army icon display section. .

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect executing means
As the third effect, temporarily stopping and displaying the identification pattern that is being variably displayed,
It is possible to perform a plurality of pseudo-continuous effects in which the temporary stop-displayed identification symbols are again variably displayed, and each time the pseudo-continuous effects are performed, predetermined development information (for example, a character icon) is displayed. It is possible to perform a second development display effect (for example, a effect in which one or more character icons are statically displayed, or an icon display image is lit and displayed in the West Army icon display section, etc.). is desirable.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, an effect operation unit (for example, the first effect operation unit 6311 and the second effect operation unit 6312 of the effect button device 6310) that allows the player to operate the effect. and
The production executing means is
As the specific effect, it is possible to perform an operation effect (for example, a one-time operation effect in the road to the decisive battle or the road to the final battle) in which the player performs a predetermined number of operations on the effect operation unit. It is preferable that the number of operations of the operation presentation in the second presentation is larger than the number of operations of the operation presentation in the fourth presentation.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect executing means
By performing the second effect or the fourth effect, the third effect execution condition (for example,
less than 10 character icons) is established, a fifth effect (for example, confrontation reach) can be executed,
As the specific effect, it is possible to display predetermined development information and perform a development progress effect (for example, an effect aiming to collect 10 character icons) in which progress is made according to the displayed development information. ,
As the fifth effect, it is desirable to be able to perform a development effect (for example, a support icon effect) related to the development information displayed as progressing in the development progress effect.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, starting information obtaining means (for example, main CPU 201) for obtaining starting information when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; , a first special game that is advantageous to the player (for example,
First special game determination means (for example, main C
PU 201) and, based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means, whether or not to control a second special game (for example, a small winning game) with a lower profit than the first special game On the condition that it is determined that the first special game is controlled by the second special game determination means (for example, the main CPU 201) that performs the determination and the first special game determination means.
Special game control means (for example,
When the predetermined starting condition is established in a state in which the main CPU 201), the first special game determination means and the second special game determination means cannot determine, the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means is transmitted. Reservation storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of reservations (
For example, before the main RAM 203 having a special symbol start storage area) and the first special game determination means and the second special game determination means make a determination, based on the start information stored in the reservation storage means Based on the determination result by the prior determination means (eg, main CPU 201) capable of determining whether or not to control the first special game or the second special game, and the prior determination means , pre-production execution means (for example, display device 7, speaker 32, LE
A sub-control circuit 300 that controls the D group 46, the performance accessory group 58, and the performance button device 6310
, a sub CPU 301),
The pre-rendering execution means is
Even if the second special game is controlled by the special game control means during the predetermined effect period, it is desirable to be able to continue the preliminary effect.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the starting information acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201) acquires the starting information when the first starting condition or the second starting condition is established; Special game determination means (for example, main CPU 201) for determining whether or not to control a special game advantageous to the player based on the received starting information;
When the first starting condition is established in a state in which the special game determination means cannot make a determination, the first starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means can be stored up to the first reserved number. When the second start condition is established in a state in which the reservation storage means (for example, the main RAM 203 having the first special symbol start storage area (1) to (4)) and the special game determination means cannot make a determination , a second reserve storage means (for example, a second special symbol start storage area (1) and (2) capable of storing up to a second reserve number of start information acquired by the start information acquisition means). RAM 203) and whether or not to control the special game based on the starting information stored in the first reservation storage means or the second reservation storage means before the special game determination means makes a determination. Pre-determination means (for example, the main CPU 201) capable of determining whether the Means (for example, display device 7, speaker 32, LED group 46, production accessory group 58 and production button device 6310 Control the sub control circuit 300, sub CPU 301),
The pre-rendering execution means is
When a predetermined number (for example, two) of start information is stored in the second hold storage means, a hold pre-performance can be performed based on the start information stored in the first hold storage means. It should be possible.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, an effect operation unit (for example, the first effect operation unit 6311 and the second effect operation unit 6312 of the effect button device 6310) that allows the player to operate the effect. and an operation detecting means (for example, the first to third operating part detection switches of the effect button device 6310) for detecting an operation to the effect operating part, and whether the operation detected by the operation detecting means is valid or invalid. and an operation determination means (for example, sub CPU 301) that determines whether
When there is a reception time during which a plurality of operations can be received on the performance operation unit, the operation determination means invalidates the operation on the performance operation unit during the start preparation period set as the opening time of the reception time. It is determined that the end preparation period set at the end time of the reception time is invalid for the operation to the effect operation unit, and the operation valid period set from the end of the start preparation period to the start of the end preparation period determines that the operation to the effect operation unit is valid, and can set an operation invalid period from when the operation detected in the operation valid period is determined to be valid until when the next operation is determined to be valid. ,
It is preferable that the operation invalid period is set to a different period according to an effect based on the operation determined to be valid during the operation valid period.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, an effect operation unit (for example, effect button device 6310) that allows the player to operate the effect and can execute a plurality of types of operation modes;
Operation display effect execution means (for example, display device 7, speaker 32, LED group 46,
Sub control circuit 300 and sub CP for controlling performance accessory group 58 and performance button device 6310
U301) and
The operation display effect execution means responds to a change in the operation mode of the effect operation unit to be operated,
It is desirable to perform the operation display effect.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, an effect operation unit (for example, effect button device 6310) that allows the player to operate the effect and can execute a plurality of types of operation modes;
When a predetermined condition including the lapse of a predetermined period of time from when a predetermined game is played by a player is established, operation mode returning means (for example, a button control circuit) restores the operation mode of the effect operation section to the initial operation mode. 310, sub-control circuit 300 and sub-CPU 301).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first starting condition is established, the variable display of the first notification symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is started, and when a predetermined variation time elapses, the first First notification pattern display control means (for example, main C
PU 201) and when the second start condition is established, the second notification symbol (for example, the second special symbol)
a second notification symbol display control means (for example, the main CPU 201) for stopping and displaying the second notification symbol in a predetermined stop mode when a predetermined variation time elapses;
When the first notification symbol is stop-displayed in a specific stop mode by the notification symbol display control means, or when the second notification symbol is stop-displayed in a specific stop mode by the second notification symbol display control means,
Game state control means (for example, the main CPU 20
1) and external information output means (for example,
an external terminal plate 184),
The variable display of the first notification symbol by the first notification symbol display control means and the variable display of the second notification symbol by the second notification symbol display control means can be executed in parallel,
The game state control means, in the specific game state, the first notification symbol and the second
When the stop display of the notification symbols is performed a predetermined number of times, the normal game state is controlled from the specific game state,
The external information output means continues specific external information (for example, external information 3) during an output period from when the specific game state is controlled by the game state control means until when the normal game state is controlled. In addition to the output, when the variable display of the first notification symbol by the first notification symbol display control means is started when the specific game state is controlled, the stop display of the first notification symbol is performed. When the second notification symbol display control means starts the variable display of the second notification symbol when the specific game state is controlled, the second notification symbol is stopped. It is desirable to continue to output the specific external information even during the second additional period until the display is performed.

In addition, "development information" is information displayed when a game or effect progresses, such as character information indicating the content of the effect that will progress from now on, character icon information indicating a predetermined character, and It is information such as number information that displays the number of character icons, number information that displays the number of pseudo-runs that have already been performed, and time information until the performance that will progress from now on. It means

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

<Appendix: Seventh Pachinko Machine (Part 1)>
[Background technology]
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is performed, and this special symbol lottery. If you win, the game machine that controls the jackpot game state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine) or the game machine entering the start hole changes the big win hole to an open state, and the big win hole 2. Description of the Related Art There are known gaming machines (so-called two-type pachinko gaming machines) that control a jackpot game state on the condition that a game ball hit enters a specific area. Furthermore, by inserting a predetermined number of medals or the like and operating the start lever, a plurality of reels are rotated, and a specific number of medals, a bonus game, or the like is played based on the combination of symbols on the reels that are stopped and displayed. A game machine (a reel-type game machine called a so-called slot machine) is also known that provides a privilege.

In addition, in pachinko machines, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game, the game state (low probability game state, high probability game state) in which the lottery probability of special symbols is different, and the rate of entering the starting hole is different. A plurality of game states such as a set game state (time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state) are provided (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior art document]
[Patent document]
[Patent Document 1] JP-A-2013-59682

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Further, it has been desired to provide an appropriate effect according to the game state of the game machine, the game situation, and the like, thereby improving the interest of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a seventh pachinko gaming machine)
In a gaming machine capable of executing variable display of identification patterns,
Effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect (for example, a sub-control circuit 300 for controlling the display device 7, the speaker 32 and the LED group 46, a sub-CPU 301), and the game state is shifted, and the shifted game state is controlled. A game state control means (for example, main CPU 201),
The game state control means is a special game state (for example, a big win game state or a small win game state) capable of imparting an advantageous privilege to the player when the execution result of the variable display of the identification symbols satisfies a special condition. state), and a normal game state (for example, a first normal game state) and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. It is possible to control at least the game state with the game state (for example, the first to third time-saving game states and the second normal game state),
The effect execution means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of normal effects (for example, effects such as normal reach performed when hitting left) in the normal game state,
In the specific game state, one of a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, a boss battle effect performed when hitting the right hand, a Sengoku time effect, a continuous battle effect, etc.) can be executed. do.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The plurality of types of normal effects include a plurality of types of normal effects that can be executed by variable display of the identification pattern that satisfies the special conditions (for example, effects such as window notice and normal reach in the variation) and the special conditions. It is desirable to include at least a plurality of types of preliminary normal effects (for example, look-ahead effects in advance variation) that can be executed in the variable display of the identification symbols before the variable display of the identification symbols to be satisfied.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The plurality of types of pre-normal effects include at least a first pre-normal effect (for example, a flash notice at the time of winning a prize at the starting port) and a second pre-normal effect (for example, a pending change notice). ,
The production executing means does not execute the first preliminary normal production when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the start time of the preliminary normal production (for example, when winning a prize at the starting port), second
It is desirable to be able to execute the pre-normal presentation of .

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The effect executing means is configured to perform a specific condition different from the predetermined condition (for example, common prohibition condition 1 "when there is a reserved number of second special symbols" etc.) at the start time of the pre-normal effect. If so, it is desirable that neither the first preliminary normal effect nor the second preliminary normal effect be executed.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The specific game state (for example, the second time-saving game state) includes a normal display state (for example, a male character stage or a female character stage) and a special display state (for example, a holding series) that is different from the normal display state. A premium stage that suggests the number of stocks), and at least one display state can be executed, and the specific effect is
Among the plurality of types of specific effects, a special specific effect (for example, an effect by a background display mode of a premier stage) is included, and the effect executing means is capable of executing the special specific effect in the normal display state. On the other hand, in the special display state, it is desirable not to execute the special specific effect.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The specific game state includes a first specific game state (for example, a second time-saving game state) that can be executed after the special game state ends, and a second specific game state different from the first specific game state (for example, Second normal game state) and at least,
The production execution means includes production mode execution means for executing one of a plurality of types of production modes that define a production state, and production mode selection means for selecting the production mode executed by the production mode execution means. have
The production mode executing means, in the first specific game state, has at least a first specific production mode (for example, a male character stage) and a second production mode different from the first specific production mode.
One of a plurality of specific production modes including a specific production mode (for example, a female character stage) can be executed,
The production mode selection means enables the player to select at least one of the first specific production mode and the second specific production mode when a predetermined selection condition is satisfied. desirable.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The predetermined selection condition can be established in a special game state shifted based on the special condition when the special condition is satisfied by the variable display of the identification pattern executed in the second specific game state. It is desirable that when the special condition is satisfied by the variable display of the identification symbols executed in the first specific game state, the special game state shifted based on the special condition cannot be established.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
When the special condition is satisfied by the variable display of the identification symbols executed in the first specific game state, the production mode executing means executes the production mode executed when the special condition is satisfied. , It is desirable to continue execution in the first specific game state after the end of the special game state.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
starting information obtaining means for obtaining starting information when a predetermined starting condition is established; special condition determining means for determining whether or not the starting information obtained by the starting information obtaining means satisfies the special condition; and the starting information a pending storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined pending number of starting information acquired by the acquiring means;
The effect executing means executes a special effect (for example, display of the number of held consecutive stocks by a V passing effect pattern) when start information satisfying the special condition is stored in the holding storage means in the special game state. It is possible, and when the special condition is satisfied by the variable display of the identification pattern executed in the first specific game state, the special effect can be executed in the special game state shifted based on the special condition. On the other hand, when the special condition is satisfied by the variable display of the identification symbol executed in the second specific game state, in the special game state shifted based on the special condition, the holding storage means It is desirable not to execute the special effect even when the start information satisfying the special condition is stored.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
As a pattern in which the predetermined condition can be established, a first predetermined condition establishment pattern (for example, a first The variable display of the identification pattern is executed at the time when the first start opening is won within 500 ms from the start of the variable display of the first special pattern, which is the prohibited condition 3, etc.) and the start time of the pre-normal production. It is desirable to include at least a second predetermined condition establishment pattern (for example, the first prohibition condition 4 "when winning the first start opening during the demonstration display") that can be established when there is no such condition.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
identification pattern variable display control means for stopping and displaying the identification pattern in a predetermined stop mode after variably displaying the identification pattern for a predetermined variation time, and at least displaying the identification pattern; A variation pattern table switching means for switching to any one of a plurality of variation pattern tables in which a plurality of variation patterns for determining variation time are defined, and a variation switched by the variation pattern table switching means. a variation time determining means for determining a variation pattern with reference to a pattern table and determining the variation time of the identification pattern based on the determined variation pattern;
As a pattern in which the specific condition can be established, a first pattern that can be established when a predetermined normal production is executed with variable display of the identification pattern that is executed at the start time of the preliminary normal production.
specific condition establishment pattern (for example, common prohibition conditions 4 and 5, such as "when the same prefetch effect is already being executed while displaying the full rotation effect"), and the variation pattern at the start time of the pre-normal effect After a predetermined number of times that the table switching means switches the variation pattern table,
Alternatively, a second specific condition establishment pattern that can be established a predetermined number of times before (for example, common prohibition condition 3, "within 5 fluctuation display times before and after stage switching") may be included. desirable.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The identification pattern includes a first identification pattern that can be variably displayed when a first starting condition is satisfied, and a first identification pattern that can be variably displayed when a second starting condition different from the first starting condition is satisfied. A second identification pattern different from the first identification pattern, and execution of variable display of the first identification pattern,
a first identification pattern variable display control means for stop-displaying the first identification pattern in a predetermined stop mode after variably displaying the first identification pattern for a predetermined variation time; and variable display of the second identification pattern. As execution, after the second identification pattern is variably displayed for a predetermined variability time, the second
a second identification pattern variable display control means for stopping and displaying the identification pattern in a predetermined stop mode,
As a pattern in which the specific condition can be established, the second identification pattern is variably displayed by the second identification pattern variable display control means, and the second identification pattern is variably displayed by the second identification pattern variable display control means. A third specific condition establishment pattern that can be established when the
etc.).

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
In the specific game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined specific effect among the plurality of types of specific effects, and the predetermined specific effect is a variable display and stop of the identification pattern when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. It is desirable that the presentation be executable across the display.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

<Appendix: Seventh Pachinko Machine (Part 2)>
[Background technology]
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is performed, and this special symbol lottery. If you win, the game machine that controls the jackpot game state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine) or the game machine entering the start hole changes the big win hole to an open state, and the big win hole 2. Description of the Related Art There are known gaming machines (so-called two-type pachinko gaming machines) that control a jackpot game state on the condition that a game ball hit enters a specific area. Furthermore, by inserting a predetermined number of medals or the like and operating the start lever, a plurality of reels are rotated, and a specific number of medals, a bonus game, or the like is played based on the combination of symbols on the reels that are stopped and displayed. A game machine (a reel-type game machine called a so-called slot machine) is also known that provides a privilege.

In addition, in pachinko machines, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game, the game state (low probability game state, high probability game state) in which the lottery probability of special symbols is different, and the rate of entering the starting hole is different. A plurality of game states such as a set game state (time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state) are provided (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior art document]
[Patent document]
[Patent Document 1] JP-A-2013-59682

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Further, it has been desired to maintain and improve the game performance by setting an appropriate game state or performing appropriate processing according to the game performance of the gaming machine.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of maintaining and improving game playability.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
After variably displaying at least one of the first identification pattern (for example, the first special pattern) and the second identification pattern (for example, the second special pattern) until a predetermined fluctuation time, the identification pattern is predetermined Identification symbol variable display control means (for example, the main CPU 20
1) and production execution means for executing a predetermined production (for example, display device 7, speaker 32 and L
A sub-control circuit 300 for controlling the ED group 46, a sub-CPU 301), and a game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201) that shifts the game state and controls the shifted game state,
The game state control means can provide a privilege advantageous to the player when a stop state of at least one of the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol satisfies a special condition. A special game state (for example, a big win game state or a small win game state) can be shifted to, and a normal game state (for example, a normal game state) and the normal A specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the game state (for example,
It has at least a game state with a time-saving game state),
The normal game state includes a first normal game state (for example, a first normal game state) and the first
A second normal game state different from the normal game state (for example, a second normal game state),
The specific game state is a first specific game state (for example, a first time-saving game state), and the first
A second specific game state (for example, a second time-saving game state) different from the specific game state, and the first
A third specific game state (for example, a third time-saving game state) different from the specific game state and the second specific game state,
The game state control means indicates that the normal game state can be shifted to the third specific game state when the number of fluctuations in which the identification symbols are variably displayed reaches a predetermined specific number of times. Characterized by

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The first normal game state is a game state in which the first identification symbols are mainly variably displayed,
The second normal game state is a game state in which the second identification symbols are mainly variably displayed,
At least one of the first specific game state, the second specific game state and the third specific game state is preferably a game state in which the second identification symbols are mainly variably displayed.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The game state control means is capable of shifting to the second normal game state after the end of the first specific game state or the second specific game state, and after the end of the second normal game state, the first
It is desirable to be able to shift to the normal game state.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
When the identification symbol variable display control means variably displays the first identification symbol in which the stop mode of the first identification symbol does not satisfy the special condition (for example, loss) in the first specific game state , the first identification pattern is variably displayed by a first variation time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the stop mode of the first identification pattern satisfies the special condition (for example,
When variably displaying the first identification pattern to be a big hit or a small win, the first identification pattern is variably displayed by a second variation time (for example, 89 seconds) longer than the first variation time. , When the second identification pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the stop mode of the second identification pattern satisfies the special condition (for example, in the case of a big hit or a small hit), the first variation time or longer, and the It is desirable to be able to variably display the second identification pattern by a variation time (for example, 0.2 seconds) equal to or less than the second variation time.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The identification symbol variable display control means, in the second specific game state, selects the second identification symbol in which the stop mode of the second identification symbol satisfies the special condition (for example, in the case of a big hit or a small hit). When variably displaying, any variable time including a third variable time (for example, 2 seconds) and a fourth variable time longer than the third variable time (for example, 5 seconds or 12 seconds) It is possible to variably display the second identification symbol, and variably display the first identification symbol in which the stop mode of the first identification symbol satisfies the special condition (for example, in the case of a big win or a small win). When the first identification pattern is variably displayed by the third variation time, it is possible to prevent the first identification pattern from being variably displayed by the fourth variation time. can be,
The effect executing means performs the same effect (for example, It is desirable to be able to execute the production of the normal variation mode as the production of the decorative pattern.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The identification pattern variable display control means, when the second identification pattern is variably displayed when the number of times of variation reaches the specific number of times, the same fifth variation regardless of the stop state of the second identification pattern. It is possible to variably display the second identification pattern by time (for example, 15 seconds),
When the second identification pattern is variably displayed when the number of times of variation reaches the specific number of times, the effect executing means variably displays the second identification design by the fifth variation time. , when the second identification symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the fifth variation time, the stop mode of the second identification symbol satisfies the special condition and when the special condition is not satisfied. , it is desirable to be able to execute different effects (for example, card effects or door effects).

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
starting information acquiring means for acquiring starting information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied; and special condition determining means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means. , a holding storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined holding number of starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means,
The production pattern determination means, in the second normal game state, provides different effects according to the number of start information items that satisfy the special condition stored in the reservation storage means and the result of determination by the special condition determination means. It is desirable to be able to determine the pattern.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The effect executing means is a special effect (for example, a door effect) in which the end time of the effect is not specified.
should be executable.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
starting information acquiring means for acquiring starting information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied; and special condition determining means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means. , a holding storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined holding number of starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means,
The effect executing means controls at least one specific game state of the first specific game state or the second specific game state among the specific game states by the game state control means, and the control is performed. When the first identification symbol is variably displayed when the termination condition of at least one of the specific game states is satisfied, the starting information corresponding to the second identification symbol is stored in the holding storage means. When there is, the first for shifting to the second normal game state
(for example, a continuous battle entry effect) can be executed, and if the start information corresponding to the second identification pattern is not stored in the reservation storage means, the first transition effect is not executed. It is desirable that the special effect (for example, door effect) can be executed.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The effect execution means, the game state control means controls the third specific game state,
When the first identification symbol is variably displayed when the end condition of the third specific game state being controlled is satisfied, the special performance is executed at the start of the variability display of the first identification symbol. It is desirable that the execution of the special effect can be terminated together with the stop display of the first identification symbol.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
starting information acquiring means for acquiring starting information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied; and special condition determining means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means. , a holding storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined holding number of starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means,
When the special game state (for example, the small winning game state) is controlled and the specific condition is not satisfied (for example, when the V winning opening is not passed) , the special effect can be executed, and when the starting information corresponding to the second identification pattern is stored in the reservation storage means, the second normal game state is entered after the special effect is completed. 1 transition effect (for example, continuous battle entry effect) is executed, and if the start information corresponding to the second identification pattern is not stored in the holding storage means, the game enters the first normal game state after the end of the special effect. It is desirable to execute a second transition effect (for example, a stage change effect) for transitioning.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A stop time determining means for determining a stop time for stopping and displaying the identification pattern,
The stop time determining means determines a first stop time (for example, 54
0 ms), and in the specific game state, it is desirable to be able to determine a second stop time (for example, 89000 ms or 15000 ms) longer than the first stop time.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A variable time determination means for determining a variable time for variably displaying the identification pattern, and a stop time determination means for determining a stop time for the stop display of the identification pattern,
It is desirable that the stop time determination means can determine a specific stop time (for example, 89000 ms) longer than the variable time determined by the variable time determination means in the specific game state.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A stop time determining means for determining a stop time for stopping and displaying the identification pattern,
The game state control means is capable of shifting from the specific game state to the normal game state when a termination condition is satisfied in the specific game state, and the stop time determination means is adapted to enable the termination condition to be satisfied in the specific game state. It is desirable to be able to determine different stop times (eg, 89000ms or 540ms) depending on when the termination condition is not satisfied.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to maintain and improve playability.

7 display device 201 main CPU
202 main ROM
203 Main RAM
301 Sub CPU
310 Button control circuit 7010 Game board unit 7100 Game panel 7120 First starting opening 7126 Passing gate 7131 First big winning opening 7140 Second starting opening 7151 Second big winning opening 7156 V winning opening

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing a variable display of identification symbols when a predetermined starting condition is established,
an effect executing means for performing a predetermined effect when the identification pattern is displayed in a variable manner;
A performance operation unit that allows the player to operate the performance and can change the operation mode,
The production executing means is
When the first effect execution condition is established by performing the first effect, the second effect can be executed,
When a second effect execution condition is established by performing a third effect different from the first effect, a fourth effect can be executed,
As the second effect and the fourth effect, it is possible to perform an operation effect that causes the player to operate the effect operation unit,
As the operation effect, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to a change in the operation mode of the effect operation unit,
The production operation unit is
Having a first effect operation unit and a second effect operation unit that can be operated by a player,
The first effect operation unit is arranged at the initial operation position, and the second effect operation unit is stored.
an operation mode;
a second operation mode in which the first effect operation section is moved to a movable position and the second effect operation section is displayed at a specific operation position;
A game machine characterized by being able to change to

Images